Operating Manual
Baseband Signal Analyzer
R&S FMU36
1303.3500.02
Printed in Germany
Test and Measurement Division
1303.3545.12-01-
1
Dear Customer,
R&S® is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
Trade names are trademarks of the owners.
1303.3545.12-01-
2
R&S FMU
Tabbed Divider Overview
Tabbed Divider Overview
Contents
Safety Instructions
Certificate of Quality
EU Certificate of Conformity
List of R&S Representatives
Manuals for Baseband Signal Analyzer R&S FMU
Tabbed Divider
1
Chapter 1:
Putting into Operation (s. Quick Start Guide)
2
Chapter 2:
Getting Started
3
Chapter 3:
Menu Overview
4
Chapter 4:
Functional Description
5
Chapter 5:
Remote Control – Basics
6
Chapter 6:
Remote Control – Commands
7
Chapter 7:
Remote Control – Program Examples
8
Chapter 8:
Maintenance and Hardware Interfaces
9
Chapter 9:
Error Messages
10
1303.3545.12
Index
RE
E-1
EC Certificate of Conformity
Certificate No.: 2006-76
This is to certify that:
Equipment type
Stock No.
Designation
FMU36
1303.3500.02
Baseband Signal Analyzer
complies with the provisions of the Directive of the Council of the European Union on the
approximation of the laws of the Member States
- relating to electrical equipment for use within defined voltage limits
(73/23/EEC revised by 93/68/EEC)
- relating to electromagnetic compatibility
(89/336/EEC revised by 91/263/EEC, 92/31/EEC, 93/68/EEC)
Conformity is proven by compliance with the following standards:
EN 61010-1 : 2001
EN 55011 : 1998 + A1 : 1999 + A2 : 2002, Klasse B
EN 61326 : 1997 + A1 : 1998 + A2 : 2001 + A3 : 2003
EN 61000-3-2 : 2000 + A2 : 2005
EN 61000-3-3 : 1995 + A1 : 2001
For the assessment of electromagnetic compatibility, the limits of radio interference for Class
B equipment as well as the immunity to interference for operation in industry have been used
as a basis.
Affixing the EC conformity mark as from 2006
ROHDE & SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG
Mühldorfstr. 15, D-81671 München
Munich, 2006-11-23
1303.3500.02
Central Quality Management MF-QZ / Radde
CE
E-2
R&S FMU
Manuals
Contents of Manuals for Baseband Signal Analyzer
R&S FMU
Operating Manual R&S FMU
The operating manual describes the following models and options of baseband signal analyzer '
R&S FMU:
• R&S FMU36
This operating manual contains information about the technical data of the instrument, the setup
functions and about how to put the instrument into operation. It informs about the operating concept
and controls as well as about the operation of the R&S FMU via the menus and via remote control.
Typical measurement tasks for the R&S FMU are explained using the functions offered by the menus
and a selection of program examples.
Additionally the operating manual includes information about maintenance of the instrument and
about error detection listing the error messages which may be output by the instrument. It is subdivided into 9 chapters:
The data sheet
informs about guaranteed specifications and characteristics of the instrument.
Chapter 1
see Quick Start Guide chapter 1 and 2 (describes the control elements and connectors on the front and rear panel as well as all procedures required for putting
the R&S FMU into operation and integration into a test system.)
Chapter 2
gives an introduction to typical measurement tasks of the R&S FMU which are
explained step by step.
Chapter 3
describes the operating principles, the structure of the graphical interface and offers a menu overview.
Chapter 4
forms a reference for manual control of the R&S FMU and contains a detailed
description of all instrument functions and their application. The chapter also lists
the remote control command corresponding to each instrument function.
Chapter 5
describes the basics for programming the R&S FMU, command processing and
the status reporting system.
Chapter 6
lists all the remote-control commands defined for the instrument. At the end of the
chapter a alphabetical list of commands and a table of softkeys with command
assignment is given.
Chapter 7
contains program examples for a number of typical applications of the R&S FMU.
Chapter 8
describes preventive maintenance and the characteristics of the instrument’s interfaces.
Chapter 8
gives a list of error messages that the R&S FMU may generate.
Chapter 9
contains a list of error messages.
Chapter 10
contains an index for the operating manual.
Service Manual - Instrument
The service manual - instrument informs on how to check compliance with rated specifications, on
instrument function, repair, troubleshooting and fault elimination. It contains all information required
for the maintenance of R&S FMU by exchanging modules.
1303.3545.12
0.1
E-1
R&S FMU
Putting into Operation
1 Putting into Operation
For details refer to the Quick Start Guide chapters 1, "Front and Rear Panel", and 2, "Preparing for
Use".
1303.3545.12
1.1
E-1
R&S FMU
Contents– Getting Started
Contents - Chapter 2 "Getting Started"
2 Getting Started .................................................................................................... 2.1
Basic Spectrum Measurements....................................................................................................2.1
Setting the Input Impedance and Signal Source.........................................................................2.1
Intermodulation Measurements ..................................................................................................2.2
Measurement Example – Measuring the R&S FMU’s intrinsic intermodulation ....................2.4
Measuring Signals in the Vicinity of Noise .................................................................................2.7
Measurement example – Measuring a sinewave signal at low S/N ratios.............................2.9
Measurements in the Frequency Domain..................................................................................2.12
Measurement example – Spectrum of a GSM signal in the complex baseband .....................2.12
Measurement example – Function of the RECALC Softkey.....................................................2.18
Noise Measurements ...................................................................................................................2.22
Measuring noise power density.................................................................................................2.22
Measurement example – Measuring the intrinsic noise power density of the R&S FMU...2.22
Measurement of Noise Power within a Transmission Channel ................................................2.25
Measurement Example – Measuring the intrinsic noise of the R&S FMU with the
channel power function...............................................................2.25
Measuring Phase Noise............................................................................................................2.29
Measurement Example - Measuring the phase noise of a signal generator.............................2.29
Measuring Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ........................................................2.31
Power measurements..................................................................................................................2.32
Measurement Example - ACPR measurement on an IS95 CDMA Signal ..........................2.32
Measuring the S/N Ratio of Burst Signals.................................................................................2.34
Measurement Example – Time domain analysis of an 8PSK signal ...................................2.34
1303.3545.12
I-2.1
E-1
R&S FMU
Basic Spectrum Measurements
2 Getting Started
Chapter 2 explains how to operate the R&S FMU using typical measurements as examples. This
chapter is split up in two parts, basic spectrum measuremnts and measurements on modulated signals.
Chapter 3 describes the basic operating steps such as selecting the menus and setting parameters, and
explains the screen structure and displayed function indicators. Chapter 4 describes all the menus and
R&S FMU functions.
All of the following examples are based on the standard settings of the analyzer. These are set with the
PRESET key. A complete listing of the standard settings can be found in chapter 4, section "Preset
settings of the R&S FMU – PRESET key". Examples of more basic character are provided in the Quick
Start Guide, chapter 5, as an introduction.
Basic Spectrum Measurements
Though the R&S FMU is a baseband signal analyzer, it can also perform basic spectrum measurements
up to 36 MHz. Measuring the frequency and level of a signal is one of the most common purposes for
the use of a spectrum analyzer. On the R&S FMU, spectrum measurements can be performed usign the
FFT mode. For unknown signals, the FFT default settings (PRESET) are a good starting point for the
measurement.
In general, modulated signals can be connected to either the I or Q baseband input of the R&S FMU,
whereas baseband signals usually require two connections, one each for the I and Q component.
If the input impedance is set to 50 C, the total incident power at either input port may not exceed 30
dBm (= 1 W). Power attenuators can be used to measure stronger signals. With the input impedance
set to 1 MC, the maximum voltage at the input ports is 5 V. Exceeding these limits can destroy
attenuators or amplifiers.
Setting the Input Impedance and Signal Source
The following examples are all performed with the input impedance set to 50 C.
1. Set the input impedance to 50
Press FFT hotkey.
Press SIGNAL SOURCE.
Press I/Q INPUT until 50 C is selected.
In the default state (PRESET key) the input impedance is set to 50 C.
Unlike spectrum analyzers, the R&S FMU can not only display positive frequencies but also the negative
part of the spectrum in its FFT frequency domain. This is necessary as complex signals may have a
non-symmetric spectrum.
Depending on the choice made for the I/Q path (complex or either I or Q path), the spectrum is
displayed in full for a complex signal, or only positive frequencies are displayed for I or Q path only.
In the following examples for all spectrum measurements, the selection I path (I ONLY) shall be used.
In the default state (PRESET key) the baseband input is set up for complex signals (I+jQ).
2. Select real input signal on the I port
Press the FFT hotkey.
Press the SIGNAL SOURCE softkey.
Press the softkey I/Q PATH and select I ONLY.
1303.3545.12
2.1
E-1
Basic Spectrum Measurements
R&S FMU
Intermodulation Measurements
If several signals are applied to a DUT with non-linear characteristics, unwanted mixing products are
rd
generated – mostly by active components such as amplifiers or mixers. The products created by 3
order intermodulation are particularly troublesome as they have frequencies close to the useful signals
and, compared with other products, are closest in level to the useful signals. The fundamental wave of
nd
one signal is mixed with the 2 harmonic of the other signal.
f s1 = 2 f u1 – f u2
(1)
f s2 = 2 f u2 - f u1
(2)
where fs1 and fs2 are the frequencies of the intermodulation products and fu1 and fu2 the frequencies of
the useful signals.
The following diagram shows the position of the intermodulation products in the frequency domain.
Level
Pu1
Pu2
aD3
Ps1
Ps2
f
fs1
Fig. 2-1
Example:
f
fu1
f
f u2
f s2
Frequency
rd
3 order intermodulation products
f u1 = 10 MHz, f u2 = 10.03 MHz
fs1 = 2 f u1 - f u2 = 2 10 MHz – 10.03 MHz = 9.97 MHz
fs2 = 2 f u2 - f u1 = 2 10.03 MHz – 10 MHz = 10.06 MHz
The level of the intermodulation products depends on the level of the useful signals. If the level of the
two useful signals is increased by 1 dB, the level of the intermodulation products is increased by 3 dB.
The intermodulation distance d3 is, therefore, reduced by 2 dB. Fig. 2-2 shows how the levels of the
useful signals and the 3rd order intermodulation products are related.
1303.3545.12
2.2
E-1
R&S FMU
Basic Spectrum Measurements
Output
level
Intercept
point
Compression
Intermodulation
products
Carrier
level
3
aD3
1
1
1
Input level
Fig. 2-2
rd
Level of the 3
signals
order intermodulation products as a function of the level of the useful
The behavior of the signals can explained using an amplifier as an example. The change in the level of
the useful signals at the output of the amplifier is proportional to the level change at the input of the
amplifier as long as the amplifier is operating in linear range. If the level at the amplifier input is changed
by 1 dB, there is a 1 dB level change at the amplifier output. At a certain input level, the amplifier enters
saturation. The level at the amplifier output does not increase with increasing input level.
rd
The level of the 3 order intermodulation products increases 3 times faster than the level of the useful
rd
signals. The 3 order intercept is the virtual level at which the level of the useful signals and the level of
the spurious products are identical, i.e. the intersection of the two straight lines. This level cannot be
measured directly as the amplifier goes into saturation or is damaged before this level is reached.
rd
The 3 order intercept can be calculated from the known slopes of the lines, the intermodulation
distance d2 and the level of the useful signals.
TOI = aD3 / 2 + Pn
(3)
with TOI (Third Order Intercept) being the 3rd order intercept in dBm and Pn the level of a carrier in
dBm.
rd
With an intermodulation distance of 60 dB and an input level, Pw, of –20 dBm, the following 3 order
intercept is obtained:
TOI = 60 dBm / 2 + (-20 dBm) = 10 dBm.
1303.3545.12
2.3
E-1
Basic Spectrum Measurements
R&S FMU
Measurement Example – Measuring the R&S FMU’s intrinsic intermodulation
Test setup:
In order to measure the intermodulation performance of the R&S FMU the test signal must be largely
free of intermodulation. To avoid intermodulation inside the signal generators, use a 3 dB power
combiner (for example Mini Circuits ZFSC-2 series) instead of a common 6 dB splitter. Also the
automatic level control (ALC) of the signal generators must be switched off. Recommended signals
generators are R&S SMIQs.
Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMIQ):
Signal Generator 1
Signal Generator 2
Level
Frequency
+7 dBm
ALC off
21.35 MHz
+7
dBm
ALC off
21.45 MHz
Measurement using the R&S FMU:
1. Set the spectrum analyzer to its default settings.
Press the PRESET key.
The R&S FMU is in the its default state.
2. Set center frequency to 21.4 MHz and the frequency span to 900 kHz.
Press the FREQ key and enter 21.4 MHz.
Press the SPAN key and enter 900 kHz.
3. Set the reference level to +10 dBm.
Press the AMPT key and enter 10 dBm.
The input attenuator setting is coupled to the reference level setting. The attenuator is
automatically set to 0 dB with a reference level setting of +10dBm.
4. Set the resolution bandwidth to 500 Hz.
Press the BW key.
Press the RES BW MANUAL softkey and enter 500 Hz.
By reducing the bandwidth, the noise is reduced and the intermodulation products can be clearly
seen.
1303.3545.12
2.4
E-1
R&S FMU
Basic Spectrum Measurements
rd
5. Measuring intermodulation by means of the 3 order intercept measurement function
Press the MEAS key.
Press the NEXT key.
Press the TOI softkey.
The R&S FMU activates four markers. Two markers are positioned on the wanted signals and two
rd
on the intermodulation products. The 3 order intercept is calculated from the level difference
between the wanted signals and the intermodulation products. It is then displayed on the screen:
Fig. 2-3
rd
Result of intrinsic intermodulation measurement on the R&S FMU. The 3 order
intercept (TOI) is displayed at the top right corner of the grid
Calculation method:
The method used by the R&S FMU to calculate the intercept point takes the average wanted signal level
Puw in dBm and calculates the intermodulation d3 in dB as a function of the average value of the levels
of the two intermodulation products. The third order intercept (TOI) is then calculated as follows:
TOI/dBm = ½ d3 + Puw
The level of the intrinsic intermodulation products depends on the level of the useful signals at the input
amplifier. When the input attenuation is added, the level is reduced and the intermodulation ratio is
increased. With an additional attenuation of 5 dB, the levels of the intermodulation products are reduced
by 10 dB.
6. Increasing input attenuation to 5 dB by setting the reference level to +15 dBm to reduce
intermodulation products.
Press the AMPT key and enter 15 dBm.
The attenuator setting is coupled to the reference level setting. The attenuator is automatically set
to 5dB with a reference level of 15 dBm.
1303.3545.12
2.5
E-1
Basic Spectrum Measurements
Fig. 2-4
1303.3545.12
R&S FMU
If the baseband input attenuation is increased, the R&S FMU’s intrinsic
intermodulation products are reduced. In the shown example the intermodulation
products disappear below the noise floor of the signal genarators.
2.6
E-1
R&S FMU
Measuring Signals in the Vicinity of Noise
Measuring Signals in the Vicinity of Noise
The minimum signal level a signal analyzer can measure is limited by its intrinsic noise. Small signals
can be swamped by noise and therefore cannot be measured. For signals that are just above the
intrinsic noise, the accuracy of the level measurement is influenced by the intrinsic noise of the signal
analyzer.
The displayed noise level of a FFT signal analyzer depends on its noise figure, the selected reference
level, the selected resolution bandwidth and the detector. The effect of the different parameters is
explained in the following.
Impact of the reference level setting
If the reference level is changed, the R&S FMU changes the gain and the input attenuation so that the
voltage at the A/D converter is always the same for signal levels corresponding to the reference level.
This ensures that the dynamic range of the A/D converter is fully utilized. Therefore, the total gain of the
signal path is low at high reference levels and the noise figure of the amplifier makes a substantial
contribution to the total noise figure of the R&S FMU. Fig. 2-5 below shows the change in the displayed
noise depending on the set reference level.
40
35
rel. noise level / dB
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
5
10
15
20
25
re ference le vel / dBm
Fig. 2-5
Change in displayed noise as a function of the selected reference level
Impact of the resolution bandwidth
The sensitivity of a signal analyzer also depends directly on the selected bandwidth. The highest
sensitivity is obtained for the smallest bandwidth (for the R&S FMU: 0.5 Hz). If the bandwidth is
increased, the reduction in sensitivity is proportional to the change in bandwidth. Increasing the
bandwidth by a factor of 3 increases the displayed noise by approx. 5 dB (4.77 dB precisely). If the
bandwidth is increased by a factor of 10, the displayed noise increases by 10 dB.
Impact of the detector
Noise is evaluated differently by the different detectors. The noise display is therefore influenced by the
choice of detector. Sinewave signals are weighted in the same way by all detectors, i.e. the level display
for a sinewave signal does not depend on the selected detector, provided that the signal-to-noise ratio is
high enough. The measurement accuracy for signals in the vicinity of intrinsic spectrum analyzer noise
is also influenced by the detector which has been selected. The R&S FMU has the following detectors:
1303.3545.12
2.7
E-1
Measuring Signals in the Vicinity of Noise
R&S FMU
Maximum peak detector
If the max. peak detector is selected, the largest noise display is obtained, since the spectrum analyzer
displays the highest value of the baseband input in the frequency range assigned to a pixel at each pixel
in the trace. In the time domain, with longer sweep times, the trace indicates higher noise levels since
the probability of obtaining a high noise amplitude increases with the dwell time on a pixel. For short
sweep times, the display approaches that of the sample detector since the dwell time on a pixel is only
sufficient to obtain an instantaneous value.
Minimum peak detector
The min. peak detector indicates the minimum voltage of the baseband input in the frequency range
assigned to a pixel at each pixel in the trace. The noise is strongly suppressed by the minimum peak
detector since the lowest noise amplitude that occurs is displayed for each test point. If the signal-tonoise ratio is low, the minimum of the noise overlaying the signal is displayed too low.
Inn the time domain at longer sweep times, the trace shows smaller noise levels since the probability of
obtaining a low noise amplitude increases with the dwell time on a pixel. For short sweep times, the
display approaches that of the sample detector since the dwell time on a pixel is only sufficient to obtain
an instantaneous value.
Autopeak detector
The Autopeak detector displays the maximum and minimum peak value at the same time. Both values
are measured and their levels are displayed on the screen joint by a vertical line.
Sample detector
The sample detector samples the signal for each pixel of the trace only once and displays the resulting
value. If the frequency span of the spectrum analyzer is considerably higher than the resolution
bandwidth (span/RBW >500), there is no guarantee that useful signals will be detected. They are lost
due to undersampling. This does not happen with noise because in this case it is not the instantaneous
amplitude that is relevant but only the probability distribution.
RMS detector
For each pixel of the trace, the RMS detector outputs the RMS value of the baseband input for the
frequency range assigned to each test point. It therefore measures noise power. The display for small
signals is, however, the sum of signal power and noise power. In the time domain, for short sweep
times, i.e. if only one uncorrelated sample value contributes to the RMS value measurement, the RMS
detector is equivalent to the sample detector. If the sweep time is longer, more and more uncorrelated
values contribute to the RMS value measurement. The trace is, therefore, smoothed. In the frequency
domain, the level of sinewave signals is only displayed correctly if the selected span / resolution
bandwidth ratio is less than 200 (RBW). At a resolution bandwidth of 1 kHz, this means that the
frequency display range (SPAN) must not exceed 200 kHz.
Average detector
For each pixel of the trace, the average detector outputs the average value of the linear baseband input
for the frequency range assigned to each test point. It therefore measures the linear average noise. The
level of sinewave signals is only displayed correctly if the selected span / resolution bandwidth ratio is
less than 200 (RBW).
1303.3545.12
2.8
E-1
R&S FMU
Measuring Signals in the Vicinity of Noise
Measurement example – Measuring a sinewave signal at low S/N ratios
The example shows the different factors influencing the S/N ratio.
Test setup:
Settings on the signal generator (e.g. R&S SMIQ):
Frequency:
10 MHz
Level:
-60 dBm
Measurement using R&S FMU:
1. Set the spectrum analyzer to its default state.
Press the PRESET key.
The R&S FMU is in its default state.
2. Set the center frequency to 10 MHz and the frequency span to 10 MHz.
Press the FREQ key and enter 10 MHz.
Press the SPAN key and enter 10 MHz.
3. Set the reference level to 25 dBm to attenuate the input signal and to increase the intrinsic
noise.
Press the AMPT key.
Press the REF LEVEL softkey and enter 25 dBm.
The high input attenuation reduces the signal level which can no longer be detected in noise.
Fig. 2-6
1303.3545.12
Sinewave signal with low S/N ratio. The signal is completely swamped by the intrinsic
noise of the spectrum analyzer.
2.9
E-1
Measuring Signals in the Vicinity of Noise
R&S FMU
4. To suppress noise spikes the trace can be averaged.
Press the TRACE key.
Press the AVERAGE softkey.
The traces of consecutive sweeps are averaged. To perform averaging, the R&S FMU
automatically switches on the sample detector. The signal, therefore, can be more clearly
distinguished from noise.
Fig. 2-7
1303.3545.12
Sinewave signal with low S/N ratio if the trace is averaged.
2.10
E-1
R&S FMU
Measuring Signals in the Vicinity of Noise
5. By reducing the resolution bandwidth by a factor of 10, the noise is reduced by 10 dB.
Press the BW key.
Press the RES BW MANUAL softkey and enter 20 kHz.
The displayed noise is reduced by approx. 10 dB. The signal, therefore, emerges from noise by
about 10 dB.
The noise floor is outside the displayed level range. In order to display the noise, the level range
must be set to 120 dB.
Press the AMPT key.
Press the RANGE LOG MANUAL softkey and enter 120 dB.
Fig. 2-8
1303.3545.12
Sinewave signal at a smaller resolution bandwidth
2.11
E-1
Measurements in the Frequency Domain
R&S FMU
Measurements in the Frequency Domain
Measurement example – Spectrum of a GSM signal in the complex
baseband
Test setup:
Settings on the signal generator (e.g. R&S SMIQ or R&S SMU)
Frequency:
not relevant, because the baseband output is used
Level:
not relevant, because the baseband output is used
Modulation:
GSM standard; PRBS data is used
The I baseband output of the signal generator is connected to the I baseband input of the R&S FMU.
The Q baseband output of the signal generator is connected to the Q baseband input of the R&S FMU.
1. Set the R&S FMU to its default state:
Press the PRESET key.
2. Change to the FFT Analyzer:
Press the FFT hotkey.
3. Configure the baseband input:
Press the SIGNAL SOURCE softkey.
Select the appropriate input impedance using the I/Q INPUT softkey (usually 50 C, depends on
the signal generator).
Use the BALANCED softkey to set the measurement mode (balanced / referenced to ground to
match the signal generator's output).
4. Set the span to 1 MHz:
Press the SPAN key and enter 1 MHz.
5. Set the resolution bandwidth to 10 kHz:
Press the FREQ key, then the RES BW MANUAL softkey and enter 10 kHz.
1303.3545.12
2.12
E-1
R&S FMU
Measurements in the Frequency Domain
6. Switch on averaging:
Press the TRACE key and then the AVERAGE softkey.
You can see the typical spectrum of a GSM signal (see Fig. 2-9). The center frequency is 0 Hz.
Positive and also negative frequencies are shown. This is meaningful, because the spectrum of a
complex input signal is in most cases not symmetrical to 0 Hz.
Fig. 2-9
1303.3545.12
Typical spectrum of a GSM signal (PRBS data is used)
2.13
E-1
Measurements in the Frequency Domain
R&S FMU
We want to generate a complex rotating phasor now.
1. Switch the signal generator to bit pattern "11111..." or "00000....":
Operator interactions depend on the signal generator used.
Important: Differential coding must be used.
2. Use the marker to measure the frequency and the level of the rotating phasor:
Press the MKR
key, then the PEAK softkey.
You can see (Fig. 2-10) the spectrum of a complex rotating phasor. Its frequency is a quarter of
the GSM symbol frequency of 270.833 kHz (=67.708 kHz). You can read the frequency and the
level of the rotating phasor in the marker information field.
A complex rotating phasor is defined as:
s (t ) = e j
= cos(
t
t ) + j sin(
t)
with a positive or negative R, which determines the direction of rotation and the frequency.
The above formula can be rewritten as:
sin(
t) =
1
2 j
t) =
1
2
(e j
t
j
e
t
)
and
cos(
(e j
t
+e
j
t
)
A sine or cosine can be split into two complex rotating phasors. We will need this fact later.
Fig. 2-10
Spectrum with pattern "11111..." or "00000..." used.
Note: In the spectrum you can see a small DC offset around 0 Hz and a few harmonics at multiples of
67.708 kHz.
1303.3545.12
2.14
E-1
R&S FMU
Measurements in the Frequency Domain
We now want to generate a complex rotating phasor with the opposite direction of rotation:
1. Switch the signal generator to alternating bit pattern "10101..."
Operator interactions depend on the signal generator used.
Important: Differential coding must be used.
2. Use the marker to measure the frequency and the level of the rotating phasor:
Press the MKR
key, then the PEAK softkey.
Now you can see (Fig. 2-11) the spectrum of the same complex rotating phasor, but with the
opposite direction of rotation. The level measured by the marker stays the same.
Fig. 2-11
1303.3545.12
Spectrum with pattern "101010..." used.
2.15
E-1
Measurements in the Frequency Domain
R&S FMU
We now want to switch from a complex to a real input signal:
1. Use the signal generator's I output as a real signal
Disconnect the cable from the Q input of the R&S FMU.
Fig. 2-12
Spectrum after disconnecting the Q signal. Misconfiguration of the FFT analyzer!
You can see (Fig. 2-12) the complex spectrum of a real carrier. The level of the carrier measured
by the marker is 6 dB lower now. This is because half of the input power is now missing (one
cable disconnected). Due to the complex FFT, the remaining power is additionally split into equal
shares on a rotating phasor with a negative frequency and another one with a positive frequency.
Expressed mathematically:
cos(
t) =
1
2
(e j
t
+e
j
t
)
Conclusion: When measuring real signals, you should not use the configuration I+j*Q.
1303.3545.12
2.16
E-1
R&S FMU
Measurements in the Frequency Domain
We configure the R&S FMU to get the correct spectrum of the signal applied to the I input:
1. Switch to real input signals:
Press the FFT HOME hotkey, then SIGNAL SOURCE, then IQ PATH, then I ONLY
2. Use the marker to measure the frequency and the level of the rotating phasor:
Press the MKR
key, then the PEAK softkey.
The FFT analyzer omits the range of negative frequencies due to the selection of real input
signals. The correct level is now shown in the range of positive frequencies (see Fig. 2-13).
Fig. 2-13
1303.3545.12
Spectrum after switching to real input signals.
2.17
E-1
Measurements in the Frequency Domain
R&S FMU
Measurement example – Function of the RECALC Softkey
This measurement example shall demonstrate the application possibilities of the RECALC function. We
are using it in this example to measure the phase difference between the sine oscillations at the I and Q
inputs. As in the previous example, a complex phasor is used as the input signal.
Test setup:
Settings on the signal generator (e.g. R&S SMIQ or R&S SMU)
Frequency:
not relevant, because the baseband output is used
Level:
not relevant, because the baseband output is used
Modulation:
GSM standard; "1111..." or "0000...." pattern is used
The I baseband output of the signal generator is connected to the I baseband input of the R&S FMU.
The Q baseband output of the signal generator is connected to the Q baseband input of the R&S FMU.
1. Set the R&S FMU to its default state:
Press the PRESET key.
2. Change to the FFT analyzer:
Press the FFT hotkey.
3. Activate the "Capture Both Domains" mode:
Press the CAPTURE BOTH DOM softkey.
4. Configure the baseband input:
Press the SIGNAL SOURCE softkey.
Select the appropriate input impedance using the I/Q INPUT softkey (usually 50 C, depends on
the signal generator).
Use the BALANCED softkey to set the measurement mode (balanced / referenced to ground to
match the signal generator's output).
5. Initiate capturing of data:
Press the SWEEP key, then the SINGLE SWEEP softkey.
The memory was now filled completely with sampled data of the signals applied to the I and Q
inputs (because the CAPTURE BOTH DOMAINS softkey was active).
All following measurements of this measurement example are completely based on this data,
since the RECALC softkey will be used each time. You could already disconnect both cables now
or connect a new device under test.
We already know the frequency of the rotating phasor from the previous measurement example.
It is 270.8333 kHz / 4 = 67.708 kHz.
6. Set the span to 200 Hz and the center frequency to 67.708 kHz and start a recalculation
Press the SPAN key and enter 200 Hz.
Press the FREQ key and enter 67.708 kHz.
Press the SWEEP key
Press the RECALC softkey
1303.3545.12
2.18
E-1
R&S FMU
Measurements in the Frequency Domain
7. Switch on the phase information:
Press the FFT HOME hotkey, then FREQUENCY DOMAIN, then the MAGNITUDE PHASE
softkey.
.
8. Measure the phase of the signal applied to the I input:
Press the FFT HOME hotkey, then SIGNAL SOURCE, then the IQ PATH softkey,
then the I-ONLY softkey.
Press the SWEEP key
Press the RECALC softkey
Press the MKR key. Then enter 67.708 kHz.
In the marker information field you can read the phase of the sine wave applied to the I input
(see Fig. 2-14).
Fig. 2-14
1303.3545.12
Example of the measurement of the phase of the sine wave applied to the I input.
2.19
E-1
Measurements in the Frequency Domain
R&S FMU
9. Measure the phase of the signal applied to the Q input:
Press the FFT HOME hotkey, then SIGNAL SOURCE, then the IQ PATH softkey,
then the Q-ONLY softkey.
Press the SWEEP key
Press the RECALC softkey
Fig. 2-15
Example of the measurement of the phase of the sine wave applied to the Q input.
In the marker information field you can read the phase of the sine wave applied to the Q input
(see Fig. 2-15).
The phase difference between the I and the Q input is 155.89T - (-114.16T) = 270.05T = -89.95T.
1303.3545.12
2.20
E-1
R&S FMU
Measurements in the Frequency Domain
Now we want to observe both signals in the time domain:
1. Switch to time domain. Show both signals simultaneously:
Press the FFT HOME hotkey, then SIGNAL SOURCE, then the I+j*Q softkey.
Press the FFT HOME hotkey, then TIME DOMAIN, then the VOLTAGE softkey.
2. Switch off the mixer and set up the sweep time:
Press the FREQ key, then enter 0 Hz.
Press the SWEEP key, then enter 20 Us.
Press the RECALC soft key
3. Search for the maximum of the signal applied to the I input:
Press the MKR key. The marker searches for the maximum of the trace of the I input
automatically. The other marker is automatically moved synchronously on the trace of the Q input.
At the found maximum of the I signal, you can see (Fig. 2-16) a zero crossing of the sine wave applied
to the Q input. The phase difference is therefore again about -90°.
Note:
This measurement in the time domain does not reach the accuracy of the previous one in the
frequency domain. It should only show that you can also switch between time domain and
frequency domain when using CAPTURE BOTH DOMAINS and RECALC.
Fig. 2-16
1303.3545.12
Both signals shown simultaneously in the time domain.
2.21
E-1
Noise Measurements
R&S FMU
Noise Measurements
Noise measurements play an important role in signal analysis. Noise for example affects the sensitivity
of radiocommunication systems and their components.
Noise power is specified either as the total power in the transmission channel or as the power referred
to a bandwidth of 1 Hz. The sources of noise are, for example, amplifier noise, or noise generated by
oscillators used for the frequency conversion of useful signals in receivers or transmitters. The noise at
the output of an amplifier is determined by its noise figure and gain.
The noise of an oscillator is determined by phase noise near the oscillator frequency and by thermal
noise of the active elements far from the oscillator frequency. Phase noise can mask weak signals near
the oscillator frequency and make them impossible to detect.
Measuring noise power density
To measure noise power referred to a bandwidth of 1 Hz at a certain frequency, the R&S FMU has an
easy-to-use marker function. This marker function calculates the noise power density from the
measured marker level.
Measurement example – Measuring the intrinsic noise power density of the
R&S FMU
The frequency of interest is 100 kHz.
1. Set the spectrum analyzer to its default state.
Press the PRESET key.
The R&S FMU is in its default state.
2. Set the center frequency to 98 kHz and the span to 10 kHz.
Press the FREQ key and enter 98 kHz.
Press the SPAN key and enter 10 kHz.
3. Set the reference level to the most sensitive value
Press the AMPT key.
Press the REF LEVEL softkey and enter -20 dBm.
4. Set the display range 140 dB
Press the AMPT key.
Press the RANGE LOG MANUAL softkey and enter 140 dB.
5. Switch on the noise marker function.
Press the MKR FCTN key.
Press the NOISE MEAS softkey and enter 100 kHz.
The R&S FMU displays the noise power density at 100 kHz in dBm/Hz (dBm in 1Hz bandwidth).
Since noise is random, a sufficiently long measurement time has to be selected to obtain stable
measurement results. This can be achieved by averaging the trace.
1303.3545.12
2.22
E-1
R&S FMU
Noise Measurements
6. The measurement result is stabilized by averaging the trace
Press the TRACE key.
Press the AVERAGE softkey.
The R&S FMU performs sliding averaging over 10 traces from consecutive sweeps. The
measurement result becomes more stable.
Fig. 2-17
Measurement of the intrinsic noise power density of the R&S FMU
Conversion to other reference bandwidths
The result of the noise measurement is normalized to 1 Hz bandwidth. Using the Noise Marker yields
therefore a result, which is bandwidth independent.
If the noise power is read out using a standard marker, the conversion can be done manually. This is
done by subtracting 10 * log (BW) of the measurement result, BW being the resolution bandwidth.
Example:
A noise power of -120 dBm measured with a resolution bandwidth of 1 kHz shall be converted to 1 Hz
normalized noise power.
P[Noise] = -120 - 10 * log (1000) = -120 -30 = -150 dBm/Hz
Calculation method:
The following method is used to calculate the noise power:
If the noise marker is switched on, the R&S FMU automatically activates the sample detector.
To calculate the noise, the R&S FMU takes an average over 17 adjacent pixels (the pixel on which the
marker is positioned and 8 pixels to the left, 8 pixels to the right of the marker). The measurement result
is stabilized by averaging over 17 pixels.
Since averaging over 17 trace points is performed in the log display mode, the result would be 2.51 dB
too low (difference between logarithmic noise average and noise power). The R&S FMU, therefore,
corrects the noise figure by 2.51 dB.
To standardize the measurement result to a bandwidth of 1 Hz, the result is also corrected by –10 * log
(RBW). RBW is the equivalent noise power bandwidth of the selected resolution filter.
1303.3545.12
2.23
E-1
Noise Measurements
R&S FMU
Detector selection
The noise power density is measured in the default setting with the sample detector and using
averaging. Other detectors that can be used to perform a measurement giving true results are the
average detector or the RMS detector. The R&S FMU automatically corrects the measurement result of
the noise marker display depending on the selected detector (+1.05 dB for the average detector, 0 d
for the RMS detector).
The Pos Peak, Neg Peak or Auto Peak detectors are not suitable for measuring noise power density.
Determining the noise figure:
The noise figure of an amplifier can be obtained from the noise power measured at the amplifier's
output. Based on the known thermal noise power of a 50
resistor at room temperature (-174 dBm
(1Hz)) and the measured noise power Pnoise the noise figure (NF) is obtained as follows:
NF = Pnoise + 174 – g,
where g = gain of D UT in dB
Noise figure of the R&S FMU:
The R&S FMU displays the noise power density at the baseband input connector. Internal gain is
already included in the result. The noise figure (NF) of the R&S FMU is obtained as follows from the
displayed noise power Pnoise:
NF = Pnoise + 174
Example: The measured internal noise power of the R&S FMU is found to be –157.2 dBm / Hz. The
noise figure of the R&S FMU is obtained as follows
NF = -157.2 + 174 = 16.8 dB
Note:
If noise power is measured at the output of an amplifier, for example, the sum of the
internal noise power of the R&S FMU and the noise power at the output of the DUT is
measured. The noise power of the DUT can be obtained by subtracting the internal noise
power from the total power (subtraction of linear noise powers). By means of the following
diagram, the noise level of the DUT can be estimated from the level difference between the
total and the internal noise level.
0
Correction
-1
factor in dB
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Total power/intrinsic noise power in dB
Fig. 2-18
Correction factor for measured noise power as a function of the ratio of total power to the
intrinsic noise power of the spectrum analyzer.
1303.3545.12
2.24
E-1
R&S FMU
Noise Measurements
Measurement of Noise Power within a Transmission Channel
Noise in any bandwidth can be measured with the channel power measurement functions. Thus the
noise power in a communication channel can be determined, for example. If the noise spectrum within
the channel bandwidth is flat, the noise marker from the previous example can be used to determine the
noise power in the channel by considering the channel bandwidth. If, however, phase noise and noise
that normally increases towards the carrier is dominant in the channel to be measured, or if there are
discrete spurious signals in the channel, the channel power measurement method must be used to
obtain correct measurement results.
Measurement Example – Measuring the intrinsic noise of the R&S FMU with the
channel power function
The frequency band of interest is centered at 10 MHz, the channel bandwidth is 1.23 MHz.
Test setup:
The baseband input of the R&S FMU remains open-circuited or is terminated with 50
.
Measurement with the R&S FMU:
1. Set the analyzer to its default state.
Press the PRESET key.
The R&S FMU is in its default state.
2. Set the center frequency to 10 MHz and the span to 3 MHz.
Press the FREQ key and enter 10 MHz.
Press the SPAN key and enter 3 MHz.
3. To obtain maximum sensitivity, set the reference level to -20 dBm.
Press the AMPT key.
Press the REF LEVEL softkey and enter -20 dBm.
4. Switch on and configure the channel power measurement.
Press the MEAS key.
Press the CHAN POWER / ACP softkey.
The R&S FMU activates the channel or adjacent channel power measurement according to the
currently set configuration.
Press the CP/ACP CONFIG softkey.
The R&S FMU enters the submenu for configuring the channel.
Press the CHANNEL BANDWIDTH softkey.
Confirm the TX channel using the ENTER button and enter 1.23 MHz.
The R&S FMU displays the 1.23 MHz channel as two vertical lines which are symmetrical to the
center frequency.
Press the ADJUST SETTINGS softkey.
The settings for the frequency span, the bandwidth (RBW) and the detector are automatically set
to the optimum values required for the measurement.
1303.3545.12
2.25
E-1
Noise Measurements
R&S FMU
Fig. 2-19 Measurement of the R&S FMU’s
bandwidth.
intrinsic noise power in a 1.23 MHz channel
5. Referring the measured channel power to a bandwidth of 1 Hz
Press the CHAN PWR / Hz softkey.
The channel power is referred to a bandwidth of 1 Hz. The measurement is corrected by -10 * log
(ChanBW), with ChanBW being the channel bandwidth that was selected.
Method of calculating the channel power
When measuring the channel power, the R&S FMU integrates the linear power which corresponds to
the levels of the pixels within the selected channel. The analyzer uses a resolution bandwidth which is
far smaller than the channel bandwidth.
The following steps are performed:
• The linear power of all the trace pixels within the channel is calculated.
(Li/10)
Pi = 10
where Pi = power of the trace pixel i
Li = displayed level of trace point i
• The powers of all trace pixels within the channel are summed up and the sum is divided by the
number of trace pixels in the channel.
• The result is multiplied by the quotient of the selected channel bandwidth and the noise bandwidth of
the resolution filter (RBW).
Since the power calculation is performed by integrating the trace within the channel bandwidth, this
method is also called the IBW method (Integration Bandwidth method).
1303.3545.12
2.26
E-1
R&S FMU
Noise Measurements
Bandwidth selection (RBW)
For channel power measurements, the resolution bandwidth (RBW) must be small compared to the
channel bandwidth so that the channel bandwidth can be defined precisely. If the resolution bandwidth
which has been selected is too wide, this may have a negative effect on the selectivity of the simulated
channel filter and result in the power in the adjacent channel being added to the power in the transmit
channel. A resolution bandwidth equal to 1% to 3% of the channel bandwidth should, therefore, be
selected. If the resolution bandwidth is too small, the required measurement time increases
considerably.
Detector selection
Since the power of the trace is measured within the channel bandwidth, only the sample detector and
RMS detector can be used. These detectors provide measured values that make it possible to calculate
the real power. The peak detectors (Pos Peak, Neg Peak and Auto Peak) are not suitable for noise
power measurements as no correlation can be established between the peak value of the voltage and
power. The R&S FMU automatically uses the RMS detector when the channel power measurement is
switched on.
Repeatability
Repeatability can be estimated from the following diagram:
max. error/dB
0
95 % Confidence
level
0.5
1
99 % Confidence
level
1.5
2
2.5
3
10
Fig. 2-20
100
1000
10000
100000
Number of samples
Repeatability of channel power measurements as a function of the number of samples
used for power calculation
The curves in Fig. 2-20 indicate the repeatability obtained with a probability of 95% and 99% depending
on the number of samples used.
The repeatability depends on the averaging effect when summing up the noise powers within the
channel bandwidth. Since only uncorrelated samples cause averaging, the number of samples is not
equal to the number of pixels! Samples can be assumed to be uncorrelated if sampling is performed at
intervals of 1/RBW. The number of uncorrelated samples (Ndecorr) is calculated as follows:
Ndecorr = Channel Bandwidth / RBW
1303.3545.12
2.27
E-1
Noise Measurements
R&S FMU
Example:
At a resolution bandwidth of 10 kHz and a channel bandwidth of 1 MHz, 100 uncorrelated samples are
obtained. For the channel power measurement, a repeatability of 1.3 dB with a confidence level of 99%
is the estimate that can be derived from Fig. 2-20.
Averaging
To increase the stability of measurement results, the trace average mode can be used. With the trace
set to average, sweep count sets the number of sweeps that are averaged. In sweep continuous mode,
a sliding average is calculated over 10 sweeps, if sweep count is 0. For sweep count equalling 1,
averaging is switched off, as the number of sweeps is set to 1.
The repeatability is improved by a factor of
Navg with Navg = sweep count (number of averages).
Example:
The repeatability (without averaging) is estimated from Fig. 2-20 to be 1.3 dB. With trace averaging with
sweep count set to 100, the repeatability is improved by a factor of
averages is 0.13 dB.
1303.3545.12
2.28
100 =10. The repeatability after 100
E-1
R&S FMU
Noise Measurements
Measuring Phase Noise
The R&S FMU has an easy-to-use marker function for phase noise measurements. This marker
function indicates the phase noise of an oscillator at any carrier offset in dBc in a bandwidth of 1 Hz.
Measurement Example - Measuring the phase noise of a signal generator
The phase noise at 10 kHz carrier offset shall be measured.
Test setup:
Settings on the signal generator (e.g. R&S SMIQ):
Frequency:
10 MHz
Level:
0 dBm
Measurement using R&S FMU:
1. Set the spectrum analyzer to its default state
Press the PRESET key.
The R&S FMU is in its default state.
2. Set the center frequency to 10 MHz and the span to 50 kHz.
Press the FREQ key and enter 10 MHz.
Press the SPAN key and enter 50 kHz.
3. Enable phase noise measurement
Press the MKR FCNT key.
Press the PHASE NOISE softkey.
The R&S FMU activates phase noise measurement. Marker 1 (=main marker) and marker 2 (=
delta marker) are positioned on the signal maximum. The position of the marker is the reference
(level and frequency) for the phase noise measurement. A horizontal line represents the level of
the reference point and a vertical line the frequency of the reference point. Data entry for the delta
marker is activated so that the frequency offset at which the phase noise is to be measured can
be entered directly.
4. Set 10 kHz frequency offset for determining phase noise.
Enter 10 kHz.
The R&S FMU displays the phase noise at a frequency offset of 10 kHz . The magnitude of the
phase noise in dBc/Hz is displayed in the delta marker output field at the top right of the screen
(delta 2 [T1 PHN]).
1303.3545.12
2.29
E-1
Noise Measurements
R&S FMU
5. Stabilize the measurement result by activating trace averaging.
Press the TRACE key.
Press the AVERAGE softkey.
Fig. 2-21
Measuring phase noise with the phase-noise marker function
The frequency offset can be varied by moving the marker with the spinwheel or by entering a new
frequency offset as a number.
1303.3545.12
2.30
E-1
R&S FMU
Noise Measurements
Measuring Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power
Measuring channel power and adjacent channel power is one of the most important tasks in the field of
digital transmission for a spectrum analyzer with the necessary test routines. While, theoretically,
channel power could be measured at highest accuracy with a power meter, its low selectivity means that
it is not suitable for measuring adjacent channel power as an absolute value or relative to the transmit
channel power. The power in the adjacent channels can only be measured with a selective power meter.
A spectrum analyzer cannot be classified as a true power meter, because it displays the IF envelope
voltage. However, it is calibrated such as to correctly display the power of a pure sinewave signal
irrespective of the selected detector. This calibration is not valid for non-sinusoidal signals. Assuming
that the digitally modulated signal has a Gaussian amplitude distribution, the signal power within the
selected resolution bandwidth can be obtained using correction factors. These correction factors are
normally used by the spectrum analyzer's internal power measurement routines in order to determine
the signal power from IF envelope measurements. These factors are valid if and only if the assumption
of a Gaussian amplitude distribution is correct.
Apart from this common method, the R&S FMU also has a true power detector, i.e. an RMS detector. It
correctly displays the power of the test signal within the selected resolution bandwidth irrespective of the
amplitude distribution, without additional correction factors being required. With an absolute
measurement uncertainty of < 0.3 dB and a relative measurement uncertainty of < 0.1 dB (each with a
confidence level of 95%), the R&S FMU comes close to being a true power meter.
The R&S FMU utilizes the IBW method (Integration Bandwidth Method) for measuring channel and
adjacent channel power. The spectrum analyzer measures with a resolution bandwidth that is less than
the channel bandwidth and integrates the level values of the trace versus the channel bandwidth. This
method is described in the section on noise measurements.
The R&S FMU has test routines for simple channel and adjacent channel power measurements. These
routines give quick results without any complex or tedious setting procedures.
1303.3545.12
2.31
E-1
Power measurements
R&S FMU
Power measurements
Measurement Example - ACPR measurement on an IS95 CDMA Signal
Test setup:
Settings on the signal generator (e.g. R&S SMIQ):
Modulation:
CDMA IS 95
Measurement with the R&S FMU:
1. Set the spectrum analyzer to its default state.
Press the PRESET key.
The R&S FMU is in its default state.
2. Make sure I and Q path are activated
Press the FFT key.
Press the SIGNAL SOURCE softkey.
Press the I/Q PATH softkey and select I+j*Q.
3. Configuring the adjacent channel power for the CDMA IS95 reverse link.
Press the MEAS key.
Press the CHAN PWR ACP
softkey.
Press the CP/ACP STANDARD softkey.
From the list of standards, select CDMA IS95A REV using the spinwheel or the cursor down key
below the spinwheel and press ENTER.
The R&S FMU sets the channel configuration according to the IS95 standard for mobile stations
with 2 adjacent channels above and below the transmit channel. The baseband spectrum is
displayed in the upper part of the screen, the numeric values of the results and the channel
configuration in the lower part of the screen. The various channels are represented by vertical
lines on the graph.
The frequency span, resolution bandwidth and detector are selected automatically to give correct
results.
The repeatability of the results in the adjacent channels is very poor. The resolution bandwidth
equals the adjacent channel bandwidth, consequently only one uncorrelated sample is obtained.
To get stable results - especially in the adjacent channels, which are narrow in comparison with
the transmission channel – the R&S FMU automatically uses trace averaging with sweep count =
20.
Note that the channel power for this baseband measurement is only a characteristic number for
the I/Q output of the generator or DUT.
1303.3545.12
2.32
E-1
R&S FMU
Fig. 2-22
1303.3545.12
Power measurements
Adjacent channel power measurement on a CDMA IS95 signal
2.33
E-1
Power measurements
R&S FMU
Measuring the S/N Ratio of Burst Signals
The R&S FMU has easy-to-operate functions for measuring power during a given time interval.
For TDMA transmission methods, the S/N ratio or the switch-off range can be measured by comparing
the powers during the switch-on and switch-off phase of the transmission burst. The R&S FMU,
therefore, has a function to perform absolute and relative power measurements in the time domain. The
measurement is carried out as follows, using a GSM burst as an example.
Measurement Example – Time domain analysis of an 8PSK signal
Test setup:
Settings on the signal generator (e.g. R&S SMIQ):
Modulation:
8PSK
Data Source: Data List:
000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111
Filter:
Rectangular
Symbol Rate: 10 000 sym/s
Measurement with the R&S FMU:
1. Set the spectrum analyzer to its default state.
Press the PRESET key.
The R&S FMU is in its default state.
2. Make sure I and Q path are activated
Press the FFT key.
Press the SIGNAL SOURCE softkey.
Press the I/Q PATH softkey and select I+j*Q.
3. Switch to Time Domain
Press the FFT key
Press the TIME DOMAIN softkey.
Press the VOLTAGE softkey.
4. Adjust the sweep time and setup the trigger
Press the SWEEP key and enter 800 µs.
Press the TRIG key.
Press the I LEVEL softkey and enter 0.4 V.
1303.3545.12
2.34
E-1
R&S FMU
Fig. 2-23
Power measurements
Real and imaginary part of an 8PSK vector rotating counter-clockwise
Fig. 2-23 shows the counter-clockwise rotating 8PSK vector. It starts from the I-axis, as the trigger
was set to the maximum I level. The necessary trigger level may vary depending on the I/Q output
of the signal generator.
1303.3545.12
2.35
E-1
R&S FMU
Menu Overview
Contents - Chapter 3 " "Menu Overview"
3
Menu Overview................................................................................................ 3.1
FFT Analyzer ................................................................................................................................ 3.1
FREQ Key ..................................................................................................................................... 3.2
SPAN Key ..................................................................................................................................... 3.3
AMPT Key..................................................................................................................................... 3.4
MKR Key....................................................................................................................................... 3.5
MKR-> Key ................................................................................................................................... 3.6
MKR FCTN Key ............................................................................................................................ 3.7
BW Key ......................................................................................................................................... 3.8
SWEEP Key .................................................................................................................................. 3.9
MEAS Key................................................................................................................................... 3.10
TRIG Key .................................................................................................................................... 3.11
TRACE Key................................................................................................................................. 3.12
LINES Key .................................................................................................................................. 3.13
DISP Key..................................................................................................................................... 3.14
FILE Key ..................................................................................................................................... 3.15
CAL Key...................................................................................................................................... 3.16
SETUP Key ................................................................................................................................. 3.17
HCOPY Key ................................................................................................................................ 3.18
Hotkey Menu .............................................................................................................................. 3.19
LOCAL Menu.............................................................................................................................. 3.19
1303.3545.12
I-3.1
E-1
R&S FMU
Menu Overview
3 Menu Overview
The following section gives a graphical overview of the R&S FMU menus. Side menus are marked by an
arrow directed to the left/right, submenus by an arrow showing upwards.
The menus appear in the order corresponding to the arrangement of keys on the front panel. The
available hotkeys and the LOCAL menu appearing during the remote control of the instrument are also
displayed.
The functions of menus are described in detail in Chapter 4. The IEC/IEEE-bus command associated
with each softkey is indicated. In addition, the softkey list at the of Chapter 6 gives the assignment of
IEC/IEEE-bus commands to softkeys.
FFT Analyzer
FREQUENCY
DOMAIN
FFT HOME
MAGNITUDE
MAGNITUDE
TIME
DOMAIN
VOLTAGE
CAPTURE
BOTH DOM
MAGNITUDE
PHASE
FLATTOP
REAL
IMAG
GAUSSIAN
RECT
I+J*Q
BASEBAND
ANALOG
IQ PATH
(I+J*Q)
SIGNAL
SOURCE
HAMMING
I ONLY
HANN
Q ONLY
CHEBYCHEV
ZOOM
I/Q INPUT
50
1M
BALANCED
ON
OFF
WINDOWFCT
(FLATTOP)
ADJUST
REF LVL
LOW PASS
36 MHz
DITHER
ON
OFF
1303.3545.12
3.1
E-1
Menu Overview
R&S FMU
FREQ Key
1303.3545.12
3.2
E-1
R&S FMU
Menu Overview
SPAN Key
1303.3545.12
3.3
E-1
Menu Overview
R&S FMU
AMPT Key
AMPT
REF LEVEL
REF LEVEL
POSITION
RANGE
LOG 100 dB
REF LEVEL
OFFSET
RANGE
LOG MANUAL
PHASE
SETTINGS
RANGE
LINEAR
UNIT
AUTOSCALE
Y-AXIS
/DIV
dBm
RANGE
LINEAR %
dBmV
RANGE
LINEAR dB
dB+V
dBuV
Y-AXIS
REF VALUE
dB+A
dBuA
Y-AXIS
/DIV
Y-AXIS
REF POS
dBpW
dBpW
Y-AXIS
REF VALUE
PHASE
OFFSET
Y-AXIS
REF POS
PHASE
RAD
DEG
VOLT
PHASEWRAP
ON
OFF
AMPERE
WATT
1303.3545.12
3.4
E-1
R&S FMU
Menu Overview
MKR Key
1303.3545.12
3.5
E-1
Menu Overview
R&S FMU
MKR-> Key
SPAN
AMPL
MKR
MKR
FCTN
AUTO MAX
PEAK
SELECT
MARKER
PEAK
MIN
LEFT
LIMIT
CENTER
=MKR FREQ
NEXT MIN
RIGHT
LIMIT
REF LEVEL
=MKR LVL
NEXT MIN
RIGHT
THRESHOLD
NEXT PEAK
NEXT MIN
LEFT
AUTO MIN
PEAK
NEXT PEAK
RIGHT
NEXT PEAK
LEFT
EXCLUDE
DC
SEARCH
LIMITS
MRK->TRACE
PEAK
EXCURSION
SEARCH LIM
OFF
1303.3545.12
3.6
E-1
R&S FMU
Menu Overview
MKR FCTN Key
SPAN
AMPT
MKR
MKR
FCTN
PH NOISE
ON
OFF
SELECT
MARKER
NEW
SEARCH
SORT MODE
FREQ LEVEL
PEAK
NOISE MEAS
REF POINT
LEVEL
REF POINT
LVL OFFSET
REF POINT
FREQUENCY
PHASE
NOISE
PEAK
EXCURSION
PEAK
SEARCH
AUTO PEAK
SEARCH
LEFT
LIMIT
N DB DOWN
PEAKFACT
SHAPE
LIST60:6
60:3
RIGHT
LIMIT
SIGNAL ID
THRESHOLD
MRK->TRACE
1303.3545.12
PEAK LIST
OFF
3.7
E-1
Menu Overview
R&S FMU
BW Key
BW
SWEEP
RES BW
MANUAL
MEAS
TRIG
SWEEPTIME
MANUAL
RESB BW
AUTO
SWEEPTIME
AUTO
SPAN
SPAN/ / RBW
RBW
AUTO [50]
[ 50 ]
AUTO
SPAN / RBW
MANUAL
COUPLING
RATIO
DEFAULT
COUPLING
RES BW
1-2-3-5
1303.3545.12
3.8
E-1
R&S FMU
Menu Overview
SWEEP Key
BW
SWEEP
CONTINUOUS
SWEEP
MEAS
TRIG
SINGLE
SWEEP
CONTINUE
SGL SWEEP
SWEEPTIME
MANUAL
SWEEPTIME
AUTO
SWEEP
COUNT
SWEEP
POINTS
RECALC
RECALC
AUTO OFF
SGL SWEEP
DISP OFF
1303.3545.12
3.9
E-1
Menu Overview
R&S FMU
MEAS Key
ON
TIME DOM
POWER
MEAS
TOI
CHAN PWR
ACP
CP / ACP
ON
OFF
PEAK
CP / ACP
STANDARD
RMS
CP / ACP
CONFIG
MEAN
MAX HOLD
ON
OFF
SET CP
REFERENCE
STANDARD
DEVIATION
AVERAGE
ON
OFF
LIMITS
ON
OFF
NUMBER OF
SWEEPS
MULT CARR
ACP
OF
F
NOISE CORR
OFF
ON
OCCUPIED
BANDWIDTH
SIGNAL
STATISTIC
POWER
ABS
REL
START
LIMIT
STOP
LIMIT
NOISE
CORR
DIAGRAM
FULL SIZE
C/N
C/No
SET
REFERENCE
POWER
OFF
MODULATION
DEPTH
SELECT
MARKER
APD
ON
OFF
ON
CCDF
OFF
X-AXIS
REF LEVEL
X-AXIS
RANGE
OCCUP BW
ON
OFF
SELECT
PERCENT
MARKER
MARKER
Y-UNIT
%
ABS
C/N
RES BW
Y-AXIS
MAX VALUE
C/No
NO OF
SAMPLES
Y-AXIS
MIN VALUE
% POWER
BANDWIDTH
ACP LIMIT
CHECK
NO. OF
TX CHAN
EDIT
ACP LIMIT
CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH
CHANNEL
SPACING
CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH
ACP REF
SPACING
CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH
SCALING
NO. OF
ADJ CHAN
CP/ACP
ABS
REL
CHAN PWR
CONT
MEAS
SINGLE
MEAS
/ HZ
POWER
MODE
DEFAULT
SETTINGS
ADJUST
SETTINGS
ADJUST
SETTINGS
MAX HOLD
ADJUST
SETTINGS
1303.3545.12
CLEAR/
WRITE
SELECT
TRACE
3.10
E-1
R&S FMU
Menu Overview
TRIG Key
TRIG
FREE RUN
EXTERN
I LEVEL
Q LEVEL
I/Q LEVEL
TRIGGER
OFFSET
A
POL RITY
POS
NEG
1303.3545.12
3.11
E-1
Menu Overview
R&S FMU
TRACE Key
AUTO
SELECT
TRACE
SELECT
TRACE
CLEAR/
WRITE
MIN HOLD
HOLD CONT
ON
OFF
T1-T2->T1
T1-T3->T1
MAX HOLD
AVG MODE
LOG
LIN
TRACE
POSITION
BLANK
1303.3545.12
DETECTOR
MAX PEAK
DETECTOR
MIN PEAK
AVERAGE
VIEW
DETECTOR
AUTO PEAK
SWEEP
COUNT
ASCII FILE
EXPORT
DETECTOR
DECIM SEP
.
,
TRACE
MATH
COPY
TRACE
DETECTOR
SAMPLE
DETECTOR
RMS
DETECTOR
AVERAGE
TRACE MATH
OFF
3.12
E-1
R&S FMU
Menu Overview
LINES Key
LINES
SELECT
LIMIT LINE
NAME
NEW LIMIT
LINE
DISPLAY
LINE 1
VALUES
EDIT LIMIT
LINE
DISPLAY
LINE 2
INSERT
VALUE
COPY
LIMIT LINE
FREQUENCY
LINE 1
DELETE
VALUE
DELETE
LIMIT LINE
FREQUENY
LINE 2
SHIFT X
LIMIT LINE
X OFFSET
TIME
LINE 1
Y OFFSET
TIME
LINE 2
DISPLAY
LINES
PHASE
LINE 1
RESTORE
GSM LINES
PHASE
LINE 2
1303.3545.12
SHIFT Y
LIMIT LINE
SAVE
LIMIT LINE
3.13
E-1
Menu Overview
R&S FMU
DISP Key
LINES
DISP
FILE
FULL
SCREEN
SPLIT
SCREEN
SCREEN
TITLE
SELECT
OBJECT
TIME+DATE
ON
OFF
BRIGHTNESS
LOGO
ON
OFF
TINT
ANNOTATION
ON
OFF
SATURATION
DATA ENTRY
OPAQUE
DEFAULT
COLORS 1
PREDEFINED
COLORS
DEFAULT
COLORS 2
CONFIG
DISPLAY
1303.3545.12
DISPLAY
PWR SAVE
3.14
E-1
R&S FMU
Menu Overview
FILE Key
FILE
SAVE
ASCII FILE
EXPORT
EDIT
PATH
ASCII FILE
EXPORT
SELECT
ITEMS
RECALL
DECIM SEP
.
,
NEW
FOLDER
DECIM SEP
.
,
ENABLE
ALL ITEMS
EDIT
PATH
COPY
EDIT
COMMENT
RENAME
ITEMS TO
SAVE/RCL
CUT
DATA SET
LIST
PASTE
DATA SET
CLEAR
DELETE
STARTUP
DISABLE
ALL ITEMS
FORMAT
DISK
SORT MODE
RECALL
FILE
MANAGER
2
FILE LISTS
DEFAULT
CONFIG
NAME
DATE
EXTENSION
SIZE
1303.3545.12
3.15
E-1
Menu Overview
R&S FMU
CAL Key
CAL
PROBE CAL
PROBE DATA
SELECT
PROBE CORR
ON
OFF
SORT BY
NAME
DATE
SORT BY
NAME
DATE
PROBE CAL
RESULTS
PROBE CAL
START
PROBE DATA
RENAME
CAL TOTAL
PROBE COMP
ON
OFF
PROBE DATA
DELETE
CAL ABORT
GAIN&OFFS
ON
OFF
PROBE DATA
DELETE ALL
CAL CORR
OFF
FREQ RESP
ON
OFF
PROBE DATA
SELECT
SETUP
ON
CAL RESULTS
PAGE UP
PAGE DOWN
1303.3545.12
I + J*Q
IQ PATH
( I ONLY)
PROBE CAL
DC
I ONLY
IQ INPUT
50
1M
PROBE CAL
PULSE
Q ONLY
BALANCED
ON
OFF
PROBE CAL
COMP
3.16
E-1
R&S FMU
Menu Overview
SETUP Key
REFERENCE
INT
EXT
SETUP
FIRMWARE
UPDATE
GPIB
ADDRESS
FIRMWARE
UPDATE
ID STRING
FACTORY
RESTORE
FIRMWARE
SIGNAL
SOURCE
ID STRING
USER
UPDATE
PATH
BASEBAND
ANALOG
VIE
I/Q WINPUT
50
1M
GENERAL
SETUP
SYSTEM
INFO
SERVICE
I+j*Q
BALANCED
ON
OFF
I ONLY
LOW PASS
36 MHz
Q ONLY
DITHER
ON
OFF
SOFT
FRONTPANEL
GPIB
INSTALL
OPTION
REMOVE
OPTION
HARDWARE
INFO
COM
INTERFACE
STATISTICS
TIME +
DATE
SYSTEM
MESSAGES
CONFIGURE
NETWORK
SELFTEST
SELFTEST
RESULTS
FSP
B16
FSP
B16
NETWORK
LOGIN
CLEAR ALL
MESSAGES
FSPB16
FSPB16
OPTIONS
ENTER
PASSWORD
1303.3545.12
3.17
E-1
Menu Overview
R&S FMU
HCOPY Key
HCOPY
PRINT
SCREEN
COLOR
ON
OFF
INSTALL
PRINTER
SELECT
OBJECT
PRINT
TRACE
SCREEN
COLORS
BRIGHTNESS
PRINT
TABLE
OPTIMIZED
COLORS
TINT
USER
DEFINED
SATURATION
DEVICE
SETUP
PREDEFINED
COLORS
DEVICE
1
2
COLORS
COMMENT
SET TO
DEFAULT
1303.3545.12
3.18
E-1
R&S FMU
Menu Overview
Hotkey Menu
LOCAL Menu
LOCAL
1303.3545.12
3.19
E-1
R&S FMU
Contents
Contents - Chapter 4 "Instrument Functions"
4
Instrument Functions ..................................................................................... 4.1
Functional Description ...............................................................................................................4.2
Block Diagram.....................................................................................................................4.2
Digital Down Converter for Low Carrier Frequency (IF) ......................................................4.5
Level display........................................................................................................................4.7
Error correction ...................................................................................................................4.7
FFT Analyzer ................................................................................................................................4.8
Overview .............................................................................................................................4.8
Operating principle of the FFT Analyzer..............................................................................4.8
Operating principle in the Time Domain mode..........................................................4.9
Operating principle in the Frequency Domain mode ..............................................4.10
General Operation .....................................................................................................................4.11
Settings of the Baseband Inputs .......................................................................................4.12
Input impedance .....................................................................................................4.12
Measurement mode................................................................................................4.13
Lowpass Filter.........................................................................................................4.14
Dithering..................................................................................................................4.14
Measurement range................................................................................................4.16
Using Probes .............................................................................................................................4.17
Connecting the Probes......................................................................................................4.18
Measuring with Probes......................................................................................................4.18
Calibrating Probes.............................................................................................................4.19
Probe Calibration Procedure.............................................................................................4.20
Operation Menu .........................................................................................................................4.21
R&S FMU Initial Configuration – PRESET Key.......................................................................4.22
Selecting the Operating Mode – HOTKEY bar........................................................................4.23
Return to manual control – LOCAL Menu...............................................................................4.24
Operation of the FFT Analyzer .................................................................................................4.25
Overview of menus ...........................................................................................................4.25
Main menu of the FFT Analyzer........................................................................................4.26
Frequency Domain submenu of the FFT Analyzer ...........................................................4.27
Time Domain submenu of the FFT Analyzer ....................................................................4.31
SIGNAL SOURCE submenu of the FFT Analyzer ............................................................4.32
Frequency and Span Selection – FREQ Key ..........................................................................4.34
Setting the frequency span – SPAN Key.................................................................................4.38
Setting the level display and configuring the diagrams – AMPT key ..................................4.40
Setting the Bandwidths and Sweep Time – BW Key .............................................................4.44
Setting the Sweep – SWEEP Key.............................................................................................4.48
Triggering the Sweep – TRIG Key............................................................................................4.51
Selection and Setting of Traces – TRACE Key.......................................................................4.53
Selection of Trace Function ..............................................................................................4.53
1303.3545.12
I-4.1
E-1
Contents
R&S FMU
Selection of Detector.........................................................................................................4.60
Mathematical Functions for Traces...................................................................................4.63
Correction Data Acquisition of R&S FMU – CAL Key ............................................................4.64
Markers and Delta Markers – MKR Key...................................................................................4.74
Marker Functions – MKR FCTN Key........................................................................................4.80
Activating the Markers.......................................................................................................4.81
Measurement of Noise Density .........................................................................................4.81
Phase Noise Measurement...............................................................................................4.83
Measurement of the Filter or Signal Bandwidth ................................................................4.86
Measurement of a Peak List .............................................................................................4.87
Selecting the Trace ...........................................................................................................4.89
Change of Settings via Markers – MKR
Key .....................................................................4.90
Power Measurements – MEAS Key .........................................................................................4.96
Power Measurement in Time Domain...............................................................................4.97
Channel and Adjacent-Channel Power Measurements ..................................................4.102
Setting the Channel Configuration ..................................................................................4.107
Measurement of Occupied Bandwidth ............................................................................4.117
Measurement of Signal Amplitude Statistics...................................................................4.120
Measurement of Signal Amplitude Statistics...................................................................4.120
Measurement of Carrier/Noise Ratio C/N and C/No ........................................................4.126
Measurement of the AM Modulation Depth.....................................................................4.128
Measurement of the Third Order Intercept (TOI) ............................................................4.129
Setup of Limit Lines and Display Lines – LINES Key ..........................................................4.132
Selection of Limit Lines ...................................................................................................4.133
Entry and Editing of Limit Lines.......................................................................................4.137
Display Lines ...................................................................................................................4.142
Configuration of Screen Display – DISP Key........................................................................4.145
Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key .............................................4.149
External Reference .........................................................................................................4.150
SIGNAL SOURCE Submenu ................................................................................4.151
Programming the Interface Configuration and Time Setup ............................................4.153
Selecting the IEC/IEEE-Bus Address ...................................................................4.153
Serial Interface Configuration ...............................................................................4.154
Setting Date and Time ..........................................................................................4.156
Configuration of Network Settings R&S FMU .......................................................4.157
Enabling Firmware Options...................................................................................4.158
Emulation of the Instrument Front Panel ..............................................................4.159
System Information .........................................................................................................4.160
Display of Module Data .........................................................................................4.161
Display of Device Statistics ...................................................................................4.162
Display of System Messages................................................................................4.163
Service Menu ..................................................................................................................4.164
General Service Functions....................................................................................4.165
Selftest ..................................................................................................................4.165
Hardware Adjustment ...........................................................................................4.166
Firmware Update.............................................................................................................4.166
Saving and Recalling Data Sets – FILE Key .........................................................................4.167
1303.3545.12
I-4.2
E-1
R&S FMU
Contents
Overview .........................................................................................................................4.167
Storing a Device Configuration .......................................................................................4.168
Storing a Complete Device Configuration.............................................................4.168
Storing Parts of a Device Configuration................................................................4.169
Loading a Data Set:.........................................................................................................4.169
Automatic Loading of a Data Set during Booting ............................................................4.170
Copying Data Sets to Disk ..............................................................................................4.171
Description of the Individual Softkeys .............................................................................4.172
Operating Concept of File Managers ..........................................................................4.177
Measurement Documentation – HCOPY Key .......................................................................4.182
HCOPY menu: ................................................................................................................4.182
Selecting Printer, Clipboard and File Formats ................................................................4.185
File formats ...........................................................................................................4.185
Clipboard...............................................................................................................4.185
Printer ...................................................................................................................4.186
Selecting Alternative Printer Configurations .........................................................4.187
Selecting Printer Colours ................................................................................................4.187
1303.3545.12
I-4.3
E-1
R&S FMU
4
Functional Description
Instrument Functions
The baseband input is used for direct measurement of complex baseband signals (normally modulation
signals) or IF signals .
Measurements in both the time domain and frequency domain are possible.
Alternatively you can also extract data: To do so, the R&S FMU digitizes the analog input signals at a
user-selectable sampling rate.
The samples can be transferred via IEC/IEEE bus or LAN interface to an external computer for analysis.
They are not displayed (Baseband IQ Data Grabbing).
Note:
Baseband IQ data grabbing denotes the following:
The TRACE:IQ subsystem (see chapter 6.1) is used by an external computer via IEC/IEEE
bus or LAN interface. That is, the R&S FMU digitizes the signals applied at the baseband
input, then filters, decimates and transfers them to the external computer, where they are
further processed by a program (e.g. Matlab) to be written by the customer. No results are
displayed by the R&S FMU.
The user must explicitly select the sampling rate (thereby automatically selecting the filter
bandwidth) and the data length.
1303.3545.12
4.1
E-1
Functional Description
R&S FMU
Functional Description
Block Diagram
1303.3545.12
4.2
E-1
R&S FMU
Functional Description
DUT Connection
The device under test, e.g. a complex modulation source, is connected to baseband inputs I and Q . By
definition, I is the real part (in phase) and Q the imaginary part (quadrature phase).
A real signal source, like the IF output of a device under test, is connected to the baseband input I.
Differential sources are connected to baseband inputs I / I and Q / Q respectively, while the inverted
signal being connected to I and Q resp.
At the BALANCED OFF position only the I / Q input is through-connected and at the BALANCED ON
position the difference between the I - I and Q - Q inputs is through-connected for further processing.
Attenuator and Preamplifier
There is an attenuator to –15 dB at the input. This means that higher input voltages are attenuated to
<1 V so that the A/D converter is not overloaded. Voltages of ±1 V can be measured at the 0 dB
position. In sensitive measurement ranges, a preamplifier to +30 dB ensures adequate drive level of the
A/D converter and thus a low noise figure.
The attenuator and preamplifier settings are permanently coupled to the setting of the REFERENCE
LEVEL and not user accessible.
RANGE
5.62 V
3.16 V
1.78 V
1V
562 mV
316 mV
178 mV
100 mV
56.2 mV
31.6 mV
Attenuator
-15 dB
-10 dB
-5 dB
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
Preamplifier
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
+5 dB
+10 dB
+15 dB
+20 dB
+25 dB
+30 dB
The attenuator and preamplifier have an impedance of 50 . The switchable 1 M input is reached by
inserting a high-impedance 1:1 amplifier directly behind the input sockets. In this instance the maximum
measurement range is 1.78 V.
Antialiasing Filter
An analog anti-aliasing filter follows with a cutoff frequency of 36MHz. It is active by default and can be
switched off. With LOWPASS ON / OFF the amplitude and group delay flatness is specified up to 30
MHz / 36 MHz.
Dithering
If required, a dither signal can be added to the test signal, DITHER ON/OFF. This improves the linearity
of the A/D converter at low drive levels.
A to D conversion
The test signal (with dither signal if necessary) is sampled by a 14 bit A/D converter with 81.6 MHz.
The anti-aliasing filter is optimized for this fixed ADC sampling rate.
Sampling rate and bandwidth
The user must specify the output sampling rate when data is extracted. It is user-definable but must be
between 400 Hz and 100 MHz.
With the FFT Analyzer, the user never selects the output sampling rate directly but always indirectly
using other parameters (span, RBW, etc). The firmware always selects the appropriate output sampling
rate.
In both cases, the sampling rate is not changed at the A/D converter but by means of digital signal
processing using a resampler and subsequent integer decimation. Digital filters limit the signal before
decimation to the bandwidth which can still be displayed without aliasing at the output sampling rate.
If the sampling rate is set too low for the test signal, the bandwidth of the signal is limited; but this does
not result in aliasing (folding back of high frequencies to the useful band).
The bandwidths available for the given sampling rate are specified in the following table. Reference is
made to the useful bandwidth, without limitation of the data (flat response of the digital filters).
This table is only relevant if data is extracted (Baseband IQ Data Grabbing).
1303.3545.12
4.3
E-1
Functional Description
R&S FMU
With the FFT Analyzer, the sampling rate is calculated by the firmware. In this case, the
interdependencies from Chapter “FFT Analyzer” must be observed.
Table 4-1
Available bandwiths
Sampling rate
from
to
Max. flat bandwidth
I and Q in each case
100 MHz
>81.6 MHz
0.343 sampling rate
but L 30 MHz for
Lowpass = ON
81.6 MHz
>40.8 MHz
0.441 sampling rate
but L 30 MHz for
Lowpass = ON
40.8 MHz
>20.4 MHz
0.34 sampling rate
20.4 MHz
400 Hz
0.4 sampling rate
These bandwidths apply to I and Q, and are therefore the equivalent lowpass filter bandwidths.
The complex signal formed by I and Q is a bandpass signal having a center frequency of zero.
The bandpass filter bandwidth is twice the size of the lowpass filter bandwidth shown in the table.
The maximum bandpass filter bandwidth is therefore 72 MHz (with sampling rate 81.6 MHz,
Lowpass = OFF).
Sample length and format
When data is extracted, the samples (I/Q data) are written with the selected sampling rate to a
16 Mword memory (16 Mword for both I and Q). The number of measurement values (samples) to be
acquired is user-selectable.
The FFT Analyzer, however, selects the data volume automatically such that the data volume is always
just large enough for the requirements of the user-selected measurement task. The "Capture both
domains" mode is an exception; here the complete memory volume of 16 Mwords is filled.
If data is extracted, the acquisition and output of I/Q samples are controlled using the commands of the
TRACe:IQ subsystem.
In this case the measurement results are output in list form, with the list of I data and the list of Q data
immediately following each other in the output buffer. You can use the FORMAT command to choose
between binary output (32 bit IEEE 754 floating-point numbers) and output in ASCII format
For further details, refer to chapter 6 onwards.
1303.3545.12
4.4
E-1
R&S FMU
Functional Description
Digital Down Converter for Low Carrier Frequency (IF)
The R&S FMU is capable of mixing signals from low carrier frequencies (e.g. low IF signals) into the
complex baseband. The maximum allowed center frequency range is -35 MHz to +35 MHz. Both realvalued and complex-valued signals are supported.
The baseband signal is sampled, mixed from desired center frequency into the complex baseband and
resampled to the requested output sampling rate.
Limitation of center frequency range depending on signal bandwidth for real-valued signals:
Center frequency and sampling rate are adjustable independently, though there are some restrictions to
observe:
The lower limit of the center frequency depends on the sideband suppression that is needed for a
particular measurement application. To avoid overlapping of the two sidebands of a real-valued signal,
the theoretical lower limit of the intermediate frequency is half the signal bandwidth.
Fig. 4-1
Dependency between signal bandwidth and carrier frequency
The carrier frequency fc in Fig. 4-1 - a) is lower than half the signal bandwidth, resulting in sideband
overlap. The carrier frequency fc in Fig. 4-1 - b) is high enough to separate the two sidebands.
In practice, the intermediate frequency must be increased for lower sideband crosstalk (limited filter
edge steepness). All spectral components of the opposite sideband must be above the decimation filter
stop band frequency. Thus, the center frequency must be higher than 0.5 x ( stop band frequency +
0.5 x signal bandwidth).The stop band frequency depends on the desired output sampling rate and is
specified in the following table:
Table 4-2
Stop band frequency of equivalent lowpass filter
Sampling rate
from
to
Stop band frequency of
equivalent lowpass filter
100 MHz
>81.6 MHz
0.54 sampling rate
81.6 MHz
>40.8 MHz
0.55 sampling rate
40.8 MHz
>20.4 MHz
0.42 sampling rate
20.4 MHz
400 Hz
0.53 sampling rate
1303.3545.12
4.5
E-1
Functional Description
R&S FMU
Real-valued signals shifted to complex baseband
Fig. 4-2
Real-valued signals shifted to complex baseband
In the signal shown in Fig. 4-2 - a) an unwanted part of the opposite sideband remains after decimation
filtering, while figure Fig. 4-2 - b) depicts a decimation filtered signal free from sideband crosstalk.
Signal bandwidth dependency on the maximum baseband input bandwidth
The upper limit of the carrier frequency is specified by the available baseband input bandwidth. The
entire signal spectrum must fit into the baseband input bandwidth, so the carrier frequency may not
exceed
± 0.5 x (baseband input bandwidth – signal bandwidth )
Fig. 4-3
Signal bandwidth dependency on the maximum baseband input bandwidth
In Fig. 4-3 - a) signal spectrum is cut, because it exceeds the baseband input bandwidth.
Fig. 4-3 - b) shows a signal fitting entirely into the baseband input bandwidth.
Signal bandwidth limitation for real-valued input signals:
A theoretical upper bandwidth limit for an input signal on the lowest possible intermediate frequency
(= 0.5 x signal bandwidth) is defined by the half of the baseband input.
1303.3545.12
4.6
E-1
R&S FMU
Functional Description
Level display
When extracting data (I/Q data grabbing) the I/Q data specifies the voltages at the I/Q inputs at the
sampling instants in volts.
In the Time Domain Voltage display of the FFT Analyzer, the I/Q voltages versus time are displayed.
In the Time Domain Magnitude or Frequency Domain Magnitude display, the result is displayed as RMS
value (e.g.. RMS value of voltage or power in dBm).
Examples of the Frequency Domain Magnitude display:
Input Signal
Selected I/Q Input Mode
I only
I + j*Q
signal at freq. = f signal at freq. = +f , -3 dBm
0 dBm
signal at freq. = -f , -3 dBm
signal at freq. = +f , +3 dBm
cw signal, 0 dBm, freq. = f at input I
cw signal, 0 dBm, freq. = f, phase 0° at input I
cw signal, 0 dBm, freq. = f, phase -90° at input Q
cw signal, 0 dBm, freq. = f, phase 0° at input I
cw signal, 0 dBm, freq. = f, phase +90° at input Q
signal at freq. = -f , +3 dBm
Error correction
The R&S FMU automatically corrects all important parameters of the baseband input provided that a
valid total calibration has been performed (total calibration status passed).
Baseband input parameters corrected after total calibration
Offset:
Compensated for by means of a D/A converter before the A/D converters. This
ensures that the measurement range of the A/D converters is retained even at high
offset voltages (at high gain).
Gain:
Digitally corrected by a RAM with a correction table (lookup table) downstream of
the A/D converters.
Frequency
response:
Constant amplitude and group delay (linear phase) over the frequency are achieved
by means of digital compensation filters.
Phase
difference:
The delay difference (and thus the phase difference) between I and Q is
compensated for by means of digital filters.
Trigger offset:
The different propagation delays (depending on the sampling rate and filters in the
signal path) are automatically corrected so that the time reference between the test
signal and an external trigger signal is retained.
1303.3545.12
4.7
E-1
FFT Analyzer
R&S FMU
FFT Analyzer
Overview
The FFT Analyzer provides a convenient way of analyzing the signals at the analog baseband input in
both the time domain and the frequency domain. This does not require an external computer. The R&S
FMU is used to process the data and to display the results.
In contrast to usual spectrum analyzers, the FFT Analyzer does not determine the spectrum using the
sweep principle but instead by performing a FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) on the input data. For this
reason, some parameter interdependencies are completely different. There are also a number of new
setting options, such as the window functions.
In the FFT Analyzer, a distinction is made between the two operating modes Time Domain and
Frequency Domain. They differ with respect to signal processing and the internal parameter
interdependencies.
Operating principle of the FFT Analyzer
This chapter contains a brief description of the signal processing steps for the two operating modes of
the FFT Analyzer.
The processing sequence depends on the following parameters:
• Is the Time Domain or Frequency Domain mode active?
• Which input signal am I expecting?
- I+j*Q mode:
Signals at the I and Q input are regarded as components of a complex signal.
- I ONLY mode: A signal at the I input is regarded as a single, real signal. A signal at the Q input
is ignored.
- Q ONLY mode: A signal at the Q input is regarded as a single, real signal. A signal at the I input
is ignored.
• Is the CAPTURE BOTH DOMAINS mode active?
This mode allows measurements with completely different configurations to be performed repeatedly
using data which needs to be acquired once only. Initial acquisition of the data must, however, be
performed directly to the memory. In the first step, the samples of both the I and Q input are always
recorded regardless of the input signal setting.
• How large is the span in the Frequency Domain mode?
If the span is larger than 27.5 MHz, initial acquisition of the data must once again be performed
directly to the memory.
The input signals are processed in the following sequence corresponding to the functional block
diagram on page 4.2:
1. Provision of the appropriate input impedance (50 R or 1 MR).
2. Attenuation of signal depending on the REFERENCE LEVEL. Both inputs do, however, always
experience the same level of attenuation.
3. Amplification of signal depending on the REFERENCE LEVEL. Both inputs do, however, always
experience the same level of gain.
4. Adaptation of the measurement mode (balanced / referenced to ground). Has the same effect on
both inputs.
5. Activation of analog anti-aliasing filter or not. Has the same effect on both inputs.
1303.3545.12
4.8
E-1
R&S FMU
FFT Analyzer
6. Possible addition of shaped dither signal.
7. Sampling of both paths at constant 81.6 MHz.
8. The I and Q samples are then written directly to the memory, but only if this is necessary. Bypassing
of switch S1 and S2 using the signal processing block.
9. The samples from both the I and Q input are passed on to the mixer. They either come from the
current data acquisition process (i.e. directly from the two A/D converters) or are read out of the two
memories if the samples were written directly to these memories beforehand, e.g. because the
CAPTURE BOTH DOMAINS mode is active.
Reading out of the raw data and all subsequent signal processing steps can also be triggered by a
manual or automatic RECALC process. Signal processing starts here for every RECALC process.
10. The samples pass through the complex mixer. The mixer has a complex input and output.
Depending on the IQ PATH setting, the mixer performs the following internal processes:
- I + J*Q mode:
The samples from the I input are passed on to the real part of the mixer input
and the samples from the Q input to the imaginary part.
- I ONLY mode: The samples from the I input are passed on to the real part of the mixer input.
The samples from the Q input are discarded. The imaginary part of the mixer
input is instead set to zero.
- Q ONLY mode: The samples from the Q input are passed on to the real part of the mixer input.
The samples from the I input are discarded. The imaginary part of the mixer
input is instead set to zero.
11. The resulting real or complex signal at the mixer input is multiplied in the mixer by a complex
rotating phasor. This causes a shift in the frequency domain which is directly proportional to the
rotational frequency of the rotating phasor. The rotational frequency can also be 0 Hz; there is then
no shift. The rotational frequency is calculated automatically by the firmware on the basis of the
measurement settings. The output signal of the mixer is normally complex. If the input signal was
real and has not been mixed, it remains real.
The next processing steps are different for the two operating modes Time Domain and Frequency
Domain.
Operating principle in the Time Domain mode
The resampler processing block is not active in the Time Domain mode.
An identical digital lowpass filter in both signal paths allows only low-frequency signal components to
pass. However, these signal components had a completely different frequency position prior to mixing.
The mixing process should have shifted the frequency domain of interest to the range around 0 Hz. It is
not attenuated by the filter.
In the Time Domain mode, the filter always has a Gaussian characteristic. Its bandpass filter bandwidth
(twice the cutoff frequency) corresponds to the RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH (RBW) selected by the
user.
The filter also performs integer decimation. With small filter bandwidths, the effect of decimation may be
greater than with large filter bandwidths. The output sampling rate for small and medium RBWs is
always approx. 20 times that of the selected RBW; with very large RBWs the output sampling rate drops
to approx. twice that of the selected RBW.
The two filtered signals are then stored in the memory The output sampling rate of the signal processing block
determines the period during which the memory is completely full. As a result, the maximum observation time
in the Time Domain mode usually depends on the selected RBW. If, however, CAPTURE BOTH DOMAINS
and SINGLE SWEEP are active, the acquisition time is always max. 0.16 seconds (16 Mwords / 81.6 MHz
minus settling time) irrespective of the RBW since the data is initially recorded in the memory without
decimation. See Chapter “Setting the bandwidths and sweep time – BW key", softkey SWT MANUAL”.
1303.3545.12
4.9
E-1
FFT Analyzer
R&S FMU
The data is then read out of the memory for analysis. This cannot be performed until data acquisition
and processing has been completed. The result trace is therefore not continuously plotted on the display
in the case of long observation times. Instead, the trace only appears after the observation time has
elapsed. With very large data volumes (i.e. large RBW and/or long observation time), the data is read
out in blocks and, as a result, the trace is plotted bit by bit.
The read-out measurement data can be analyzed in a number of different ways:
• MAGNITUDE diagram:
The magnitude of the measurement data is plotted over time.
• VOLTAGE diagram:
The real and imaginary part of the read-out measurement data is plotted. If
the mixer was not active, this corresponds to the operating principle of a
digital single-channel or dual-channel storage oscilloscope. If, however, the
mixer was active, the information contained in this diagram will not be
conclusive.
Note:
The upper and lower diagram display the real part and the imaginary part of the selected
complex or real input signal AFTER the input signal has passed through the signal
processing modules. The two diagrams DO NOT normally represent the I and Q inputs.
A Gaussian filter is always used for Time Domain measurements. The user-definable
window functions from the Frequency Domain mode are completely irrelevant here.
Operating principle in the Frequency Domain mode
The resampler processing block is active in the Frequency Domain mode. It performs fractional
resampling of the sampling rate. Combined with the subsequent integer decimation in the digital filters,
this allows the output sampling rate to be varied steplessly over a very broad range.
An identical digital lowpass filter (approximately rectangular in form) in both signal paths removes highfrequency signal components. Only slightly more than the span selected by the user is allowed through
unchanged. The mixing process should have shifted the center of the selected span to the frequency 0 Hz.
This permits the largest possible decimation (here integer decimation) to be performed following
filtering, i.e. the sampling rate is reduced.
The two filtered signals are then stored in the memory. The output sampling rate of the signal
processing block determines the period during which the memory is completely full. This gives rise to
the interdependencies and minimum/maximum values described in chapter “Setting the bandwidths and
sweep time – BW key”. Other values apply in the CAPTURE BOTH DOMAINS mode since the
acquisition time is max. 0.16 seconds (16 Mwords / 81.6 MHz minus settling time). In this mode, data is
always initially recorded in the memory without decimation.
The samples are then read out of the memory. They are multiplied using the selected window function.
A complex FFT transforms the data from the time domain to the frequency domain.
The FFT results can be analyzed in a number of different ways:
• MAGNITUDE diagram: Only the magnitude of the FFT results is displayed.
• MAGNITUDE PHASE diagram: The upper diagram corresponds to the upper MAGNITUDE diagram.
The phase information is, however, also displayed in the lower diagram. The phase trace only
provides conclusive information if a single measurement (SINGLE SWEEP) was performed, or if a
periodic signal is analyzed in the CONTINUOUS SWEEP using a trigger.
• REAL IMAG diagram: The real and imaginary parts of the FFT results are displayed on a linear
scale. These can also be negative. This diagram is generally of little relevance. As with the
MAGNITUDE PHASE diagram, a single measurement should be performed or, alternatively, a trigger
should be used.
1303.3545.12
4.10
E-1
R&S FMU
General Operation
General Operation
The following diagrams explain which settings must be made to allow the hardware to process the input
signals correctly. The operating principle is the same for all operating modes; configuration, however,
takes place at different locations.
The configurations for the baseband inputs are kept separate for the following operating modes:
• Baseband IQ Data Grabbing (extraction of data by means of IEC/IEEE bus or LAN interface,
TRACE:IQ)
• FFT Analyzer
• every option which can use the baseband inputs
For configuration, the FFT Analyzer provides:
• a separate submenu
• or, alternatively, the submenu which can be called up using the SIGNAL SOURCE softkey in the
SETUP menu.
All options which can use the baseband inputs provide the following for configuration:
• the submenu, which can be called up using the SIGNAL SOURCE softkey in the SETUP menu.
Please also refer to the operating manual for the respective option.
Note:
Both paths (I and Q) are always taken into consideration when data is extracted. The
possibility of ignoring a path is only available in the FFT Analyzer (IQ PATH softkey).
1303.3545.12
4.11
E-1
General Operation
R&S FMU
Settings of the Baseband Inputs
Input impedance
IEC/IEEE bus command: INP:IQ:IMP LOW
LOW corresponds to 50
The default setting is 50
HIGH
; HIGH corresponds to 1 M .
.
Equivalent input circuit
50
1M
Note:
It should be remembered that at the 50 setting there is always a 50
even when the input is switched to BALANCED.
1303.3545.12
4.12
DC path to ground,
E-1
R&S FMU
General Operation
Measurement mode
IEC/IEEE bus command: INP:IQ:BAL ON
OFF
Used to toggle the measurement mode between balanced (BALANCED ON) and referenced to ground
(BALANCED OFF).
The default setting is OFF.
Connecting the signal sources (device under test)
BALANCED OFF
The connection to ground is run via the shield of the coaxial cable.
BALANCED ON
A connection to ground is not necessary.
1303.3545.12
4.13
E-1
General Operation
R&S FMU
Lowpass Filter
IEC/IEEE bus command: IQ:LPAS ON
OFF
Used to switch the anti-aliasing filters upstream of the A/D converters on and off (cutoff frequency
36 MHz).
The default setting is ON.
d
B
0
-10
-20
-30
-40
-50
-60
-70
-80
-90
-100
0Hz
10MHz
VDB(C24:2)
20MHz
30MHz
40MHz
50MHz
60MHz
70MHz
80MHz
90MHz
100MHz
Frequency
Fig. 4-4
Anti-aliasing lowpass filter, typical frequency response
• The filter prevents frequencies above the usable frequency range (>36 MHz) from
being mixed into the usable frequency range (DC to 36 MHz) as a result of sampling
(sampling frequency 81.6 MHz). It should therefore always be switched on. It should
bear in mind that, for example, harmonics and other spurious emissions of the device
under test might be in the disallowed frequency range.
Note:
• Amplitude response and phase response (or group delay) of the filter are
compensated for up to 30 MHz.
• With the filter switched off, amplitude response and phase response (or group delay)
of the filter are compensated for up to 36 MHz. This setting is only recommended if
the higher bandwidth is required. In this case, it is important to ensure that the
spectrum of the device under test has adequately decayed >45.6 MHz since these
spectral components appear in the useful band <= 36 MHz.
Dithering
IEC/IEEE bus command: IQ:DITH ON
OFF
Used to switch the dither signal on and off. The dither signal is added to the signal to be measured
before the A to D conversion.
The default setting is OFF.
The dither signal distinctly improves the linearity of the A/D converter at low signal levels (low drive level
at the A/D converter) and thus the accuracy of the level displayed.
Note:
The dither signal is necessary only if the total AC voltage applied to the input (up to
36 MHz) is more than 46 dB less than the set REFERENCE LEVEL. The DC component is
not taken into account.
1303.3545.12
4.14
E-1
R&S FMU
General Operation
The dither signal has no effect with signals applied having levels higher than measurement range –46 dB. A
disadvantage, however, is that it might have to be removed from the spectrum as a result of post-processing
(filters).
Baseband Level Linearity (sine wave)
0.50
Linearity Error / dB
0.40
0.30
Dither Off
0.20
Dither On
0.10
0.00
-0.10
-0.20
-0.30
-0.40
-0.50
0
-10
-20
-30
-40
-50
-60
-70
-80
-90
Relative Input Level / dB
Fig. 4-5
Typical linearity error with and without dither signal
Characteristics of the dither signal:
Band-limited noise, center frequency 38.93 MHz (in the I/Q spectrum), 3 dB bandwidth approx. 2 MHz, peak
voltage 7 %, rms 1 % of measurement range of A/D converter.
Fig. 4-6
Dither signal, spectrum (complex FFT of I/Q data)
The entire spectrum is outside the usable frequency range (>36 MHz) and can therefore be removed by
means of digital filters without affecting the useful signal. If data is extracted by means of IEC/IEEE bus
or LAN interface, at lower sampling rates (<40.8 MHz) the dither signal will already have been removed
by the internal digital filters and therefore no longer appears in the I/Q data.
In the FFT Analyzer the dither signal is almost completely removed by the internal digital filters.
1303.3545.12
4.15
E-1
General Operation
R&S FMU
Measurement range
IEC/IEEE bus command: VOLT:IQ:RANG 5.62 3.16 1.78 1 0.562 0.316 ...
The unit for input is volts.
The default setting is 1 V.
The measurement range specifies the measurable peak voltage, at the I and Q inputs in each case.
For example, voltages between –1 V and +1 V can be measured with a setting of 1 V.
With the BALANCED ON setting, the measurement range defines the measurable differential voltage.
The measurement range can be changed in steps of 5 dB.
Permissible settings:
0.0316 V
0.0562 V
0.1 V
0.178 V
0.316 V
0.562 V
1V
1.78 V
3.16 V only with IMPEDANCE LOW (50 )
5.62 V only with IMPEDANCE LOW (50 )
Headroom:
Typically 3 dB (with dither 2 dB) higher voltages can still be measured. The A/D
converter is overloaded when the headroom is exceeded, then the overload display
appears: OVLD.
The measurement range depends on the REFERENCE LEVEL. By setting the REFERENCE LEVEL,
the same or the next higher measurement range is selected automatically.
1303.3545.12
4.16
E-1
R&S FMU
Using Probes
Using Probes
As a special feature, the R&S FMU allows you to perform measurements using high-impedance probes,
since the input impedance can be switched to 1 MR.
10:1 probes
Conventional 10 MR/10:1 oscilloscope probes can be used if their
compensation range includes 8 pF. Appropriate probes are available
as an accessory (R&S FMU-Z1, order no. 1409.7508.00).
1:1 probes
You can also measure with 1:1 probes. But due to their high input
capacitance of typ. 50 pF, these probes are only suitable for
frequencies up to approx. 6 MHz.
However, the 1:1 probes are only advantageous with weak signals
(approx. <180 mV peak voltage), since they attain a higher signal-tonoise ratio in the R&S FMU than 10:1 probes.
Automatic probe detection
All modern probes have a coding pin. This pin is connected to ground
via a resistor. A certain resistance value is assigned to a variety of
attenuation factors (examples: 1:1, 2:1, 10:1, 100:1). By means of this
resistance coding, the R&S FMU detects a connected probe and
automatically takes into account the respective attenuation factor in
the display. The attenuation factors must be between 1:1 and 100:1.
Example: A measurement range of 1 V is set on the R&S FMU. A
10:1 probe is connected. The measurement range automatically
changes to 10 V.
Automatic switchover to 1 MD
As soon as a probe is connected, the R&S FMU automatically
switches the input impedance to 1 MR, since passive probes cannot
be operated at a 50 R input. The automatic switchover thus simplifies
operation.
When you remove the probe, the 1 MR setting is maintained.
Preset
The blue PRESET key resets the instrument to the default state
without taking connected probes into account. The default state of the
baseband input is I + j*Q, unbalanced, input impedance 50 R. Probe
calibration is switched off.
The PRESET FFT key in the hot key bar has the same effect as the
PRESET key, as long as no probes are connected.
If probes are connected, the following settings remain unchanged:
I/Q path (I only, Q only, I+j*Q)
Balanced ON/OFF
Input impedance 1 MR
An active probe calibration is not switched off.
1303.3545.12
4.17
E-1
Using Probes
R&S FMU
Connecting the Probes
Before connecting the probes, it is advisable to carry out the following configuration as desired:
I/Q path (I only, Q only, I+j*Q)
Balanced ON/OFF
By doing so, the active inputs are defined. Active inputs are indicated by illuminated LEDs.
Note!
Probes with identical attenuation factor must be connected on all active inputs.
If more than one input is active, the following message will appear after the first probe has been
connected:
As soon as you have connected probes on all active inputs, the message will disappear automatically. If
the configuration (e.g. Balanced = OFF) is not to be set correctly until after the probes have been
connected, then you must first acknowledge this message by pressing ESC or ENTER.
Measuring with Probes
Usually, you have 50 R interfaces at instrument outputs (e.g. I/Q output of a signal generator). In
development, it is often necessary to measure within printed boards – i.e. at spots that do not support 50
R. For this purpose, you can switch the R&S FMU to 1 MR input impedance. If you use a coaxial cable
(e.g. BNC cable) for connecting the DUT, this cable will put considerable strain on the measuring point
due to its capacitance (typ. 100 pF/m). This will lead to incorrect measurement results. Due to the high
impedance (10 MR // 10 pF) of high-quality probes (such as the R&S FMU-Z1), you can perform virtually
distortion-free measurements. Owing to their fine probe tip, adaptation is also much easier than
with a cable.
1303.3545.12
4.18
E-1
R&S FMU
Using Probes
Calibrating Probes
In principle, a connected probe leads to a larger measurement uncertainty. The tolerance of the
attenuation factor is usually specified, allowing you to at least calculate the resulting measurement
uncertainty. Although it is practically impossible to make a quantitative statement with respect to the
frequency response, this is no problem for the R&S FMU. The R&S FMU is able to measure all errors of
the probe and mathematically correct them afterwards. For this purpose, the probe is connected to the
calibration source of the R&S FMU and automatically calibrated by pressing a button. For safe
adaptation, you should make sure to use a BNC adapter. The R&S FMU-Z1 probes are supplied with a
BNC adapter.
Probe calibration is explained in detail in the description of the PROBE CAL menu. The following gives
you an overview of the procedure.
It is presumed that the I/Q input is set as desired and that all probes have been connected appropriately.
The PROBE CAL menu provides the following options:
• Gain & Offset
This function measures the probe attenuation and then mathematically
corrects it. In connection with the probe, the DC offset of the input gain is
compensated to zero.
• Frequency Response
This function measures the frequency response of the overall system
(probe, amplifier, filter, etc) and then compensates it with a digital filter.
• Probe Compensation
The R&S FMU provides a 1 kHz squarewave signal that allows you to
adjust the probe to the input capacitance of the R&S FMU. It is the same
procedure as usual with oscilloscopes. The R&S FMU automatically sets a
time domain display that matches the signal so that you only have to make
the adjustment.
In the default setting, all three functions are active.
1303.3545.12
4.19
E-1
Using Probes
R&S FMU
Probe Calibration Procedure
After pressing the PROBE CAL START softkey, you are requested to connect the probes to the
calibration source (PROBE CAL BNC connector).
After pressing the ENTER key, calibration is started. The first step (if selected) is the probe
compensation.
After the probe has been adjusted, the calibration is continued by pressing the ENTER key.
If more than one probe is to be calibrated, then this procedure, beginning with the request to connect
this probe, is repeated for each probe.
Finally, after all probes have been calibrated the following message will appear:
If you acknowledge this message with YES, the calibration data will be saved to the hard disk as a file
and can be reactivated at any time.
However, if you acknowledge with NO, the data will only be available in the memory. After each step that
renders the data invalid (e.g. disconnecting a probe, changing the Balanced ON /OFF configuration), the
calibration data is lost.
Taking the data into account (Probe Correction = ON) is automatically switched on after the calibration
or after a saved file has been loaded.
1303.3545.12
4.20
E-1
R&S FMU
Operation Menu
Operation Menu
All functions of the baseband signal analyzer and their application are explained in detail in this chapter.
The sequence of the described menu groups depends on the procedure selected for the configuration
and start of a measurement:
1. Resetting the instrument - PRESET key
2. Setting the mode – hotkey bar and LOCAL key
3. Configuring the FFT Analyzer – softkeys FREQUENCY DOMAIN, TIME DOMAIN, SIGNAL
SOURCE
4. Setting the measurement parameters - keys FREQ, SPAN, AMPT, BW, SWEEP, TRIG, TRACE,
CAL
5. Selecting and configuring the measurement function - keys MKR, MKR->, MKR FCTN, MEAS,
LINES
The instrument functions for general settings, printout and data management are described at the end
of this chapter – keys DISP, SETUP, FILE and HCOPY.
The different softkeys of a menu are described from top to bottom and from the left to the right side
menu. The submenus are marked by an indentation or displayed in a separate section. The whole path
(key - softkey - ...) is indicated in the line above the menu display.
An overview of the menus is given in chapter 3 which also contains the description of the operating
concept.
The IEC/IEEE-bus commands (if any) are indicated for each softkey. For a fast overview a list of
softkeys with the associated IEC/IEEE-bus commands is given at the end of Chapter 6.
An index at the end of the handbook serves as further help for the user.
1303.3545.12
4.21
E-1
R&S FMU Initial Configuration – PRESET Key
R&S FMU
R&S FMU Initial Configuration – PRESET Key
Using the PRESET key, the R&S FMU can be set to a predefined initial state.
PRESET
Notes:
CAL
The initial instrument state set by the PRESET key can be
adapted to arbitrary applications using the STARTUP RECALL
function. With this function the STARTUP RECALL dataset is
loaded upon pressing the PRESET key. For further information
refer to section "Saving and Recalling Data Sets".
Pressing the PRESET key causes the R&S FMU to enter its initial state according to the following table:
Table 4-3
Parameter
Initial State of R&S FMU
Settings
Mode
Capture domain
FFT Mode
Frequency domain magnitude
Center frequency
0 Hz
Center frequency step size
Span
Reference level
0.1 * center frequency
72 MHz
+10 dBm ( peak 1.0 V)
Level range
100 dB log
Level unit
dBm
Sweep time
3.8852 µs
Resolution bandwidth
auto (1 MHz)
Span / RBW
auto (50)
Sweep
continuous
Trigger
free run
Trace 1
clr write
Trace 2/3
blank
Detector
auto select (auto peak)
Trace math
off
Frequency offset
0 Hz
Reference level offset
0 dB
Reference level position
100 %
Grid
abs
Cal correction
on
Probe correction
off
Display
Full screen, active screen A
Type of signal at baseband input (IQ Path)
I+jQ
I/Q Input Impedance
50 Ohm
Balanced Input
Off
Lowpass 36 MHz
On
Dither
Off
Sweep count
0
Sweep points
625
The PRESET key also sets all other applications (e.g. VSA) to their default state.
The PRESET FFT key (in the hotkey bar) only sets the FFT Analyzer to a predefined default state.
IEC/IEEE bus command: SENS:FFT:PRES
1303.3545.12
4.22
E-1
R&S FMU
Selecting the Operating Mode – HOTKEY bar
Selecting the Operating Mode – HOTKEY bar
The R&S FMU has seven keys ("hotkeys") below the display to allow fast selection of the various
operating modes. These keys may have different functions depending on the available instrument
options.
The illustration below shows how the hotkey bar may look if the instrument is in the FFT mode (Preset
setting).
The EXIT FFT hotkey enables the R&S FMU main hotkey bar that allows the
selection of different operation modes.
EXIT FFT
IEC/IEEE bus command: INST:SEL <other>
The main hotkey bar allows the activation of another operation mode.
FFT
PRESET FFT
HOME FFT
SCREEN A
VSA
SCREEN B
The PRESET FFT hotkey sets the FFT Analyzer to a predefined state.
IEC/IEEE bus command: SENS:FFT:PRES
The HOME FFT hotkey opens the main menu of the FFT Analyzer.
Real split-screen mode is not possible with the R&S FMU. Although there are
measurements with a split screen, these measurements cannot display the
results
of
two
completely
independent
measurements.
The
SCREEN A / SCREEN B hotkey can only be used in measurements that
automatically display split-screen diagrams. Marker operations and the
configuration of the diagram axes can be switched between the upper diagram
(SCREEN A) and the lower one (SCREEN B) with this hotkey.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
DISP:WIND<1|2>:SEL
The meaning of the other keys is described in the chapter describing the various options.
1303.3545.12
4.23
E-1
Return to manual control – LOCAL Menu
R&S FMU
Return to manual control – LOCAL Menu
The menu LOCAL is displayed on switching the instrument to remote control
mode.
At the same time, the HOTKEY bar is blanked out and all keys are disabled
except the PRESET key. The diagram, traces and display fields are then
blanked out (they can be activated using the remote control command
SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate ON).
The menu contains only one softkey, the LOCAL key. The LOCAL key
switches the instrument from remote to manual control, with the assumption
that the remote controller has not previously set the LOCAL LOCKOUT
function.
A change in the control mode consists of:
- Enabling the Front Panel Keys
Returning to manual mode enables all inactive keys and turns on the
hotkey menu. The soft key menu which is displayed is the main menu of
the current mode.
Inserting the measurement diagrams
The blanked diagrams, traces and display fields are inserted.
LOCAL
- Generating the message OPERATION COMPLETE
If, at the time of pressing the LOCAL softkey, the synchronisation
mechanism via *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI is active, the currently running
measurement procedure is aborted and synchronisation is achieved by
setting the corresponding bits in the registers of the status reporting
system.
- Setting Bit 6 (User Request) of the Event Status Register
With a corresponding configuration of the status reporting system, this
bit immediately causes the generation of a service request (SRQ) which
is used to inform the control software that the user wishes to return to
front-panel control. This information can be used, e.g., to interrupt the
control program so that the user can make necessary manual
corrections to instrument settings. This bit is set each time the LOCAL
softkey is pressed.
Note:
1303.3545.12
If the LOCAL LOCKOUT function is active in the remote control
mode, the front-panel PRESET key is also disabled. The LOCAL
LOCKOUT state is left as soon as the process controller deactivates the REN line or the IEC/IEEE-bus cable is
disconnected from the instrument.
4.24
E-1
R&S FMU
Operation of the FFT Analyzer
Operation of the FFT Analyzer
Overview of menus
FREQUENCY
DOMAIN
FFT HOME
MAGNITUDE
MAGNITUDE
TIME
DOMAIN
VOLTAGE
CAPTURE
BOTH DOM
MAGNITUDE
PHASE
FLATTOP
REAL
IMAG
GAUSSIAN
RECT
I+J*Q
BASEBAND
ANALOG
IQ PATH
(I+J*Q)
SIGNAL
SOURCE
HAMMING
I ONLY
HANN
Q ONLY
CHEBYCHEV
ZOOM
I/Q INPUT
50
1M
BALANCED
ON
OFF
WINDOWFCT
(FLATTOP)
ADJUST
REF LVL
LOW PASS
36 MHz
DITHER
ON
OFF
1303.3545.12
4.25
E-1
Operation of the FFT Analyzer
R&S FMU
Main menu of the FFT Analyzer
This softkey main menu appears on the right-hand side of the display immediately after the
FFT Analyzer mode is started or whenever the HOME FFT hotkey is pressed.
The FREQUENCY DOMAIN softkey opens a submenu in which various types of
spectrum measurements can be selected. The softkey activates the
Frequency Domain mode and deactivates the Time Domain mode.
Note:
The Frequency Domain mode can also be activated by entering a
SPAN larger than 0 Hz (see chapter "Setting the frequency span –
SPAN ")
IEC/IEEE bus command: SENS:FREQ:SPAN 10MHz
The TIME DOMAIN softkey opens a submenu in which various types of timedomain measurements can be selected.
The softkey activates the Time Domain mode and deactivates the
Frequency Domain mode.
Note:
The Time Domain mode can also be activated by entering a SPAN
of 0 Hz (see Chapter "Setting the frequency span – SPAN ”).
IEC/IEEE bus command: SENS:FREQ:SPAN 0Hz
1303.3545.12
4.26
E-1
R&S FMU
Operation of the FFT Analyzer
The CAPTURE BOTH DOM softkey (short for "capture both domains") has a
toggle function. Function active: In single sweep mode, the entire I/Q data
memory is always filled with unfiltered raw data first. By using the RECALC and
RECALC AUTO softkeys in the SWEEP menu, this data can then be analyzed
as often as required using different instrument settings. This is possible in both
the time and frequency domain, hence the name of the softkey.
Function not active: Data acquisition is optimized for the currently selected
measurement task. This means that the observation time is only as long as
necessary. As a result, measurements are generally performed more quickly,
unless the measurement settings force data to be written directly to the memory.
If the function is not active and the data rate can be reduced prior to writing the
data to the memory, this will permit a longer observation time and a better
frequency resolution.
IEC/IEEE bus command: SENS:FFT:CAPT ON
The SIGNAL SOURCE softkey opens a submenu in which the properties of the
input signal and the way in which the signal is to be processed can be defined.
IEC/IEEE bus command: -
Frequency Domain submenu of the FFT Analyzer
This submenu appears when the FREQUENCY DOMAIN softkey in the main menu of the FFT Analyzer
is pressed.
FREQUENCY
DOMAIN
MAGNITUDE
FLATTOP
MAGNITUDE
PHASE
GAUSSIAN
REAL
IMAG
RECTANGULAR
HAMMING
HANN
CHEBYCHEV
The first three softkeys are used to select the display
mode for the measured spectrum. The softkey changes
color when selected. Pressing a different softkey toggles
the selection.
The displayed spectrum range depends primarily on the
parameters SPAN / CENTER FREQUENCY and START
FREQUENCY / STOP FREQUENCY. The frequency
resolution
is
determined
using
the
parameter
RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH (RBW). The selected
window function determines the filter shape and the shape
factor. The window function and the RBW together
determine the data acquisition time (i.e. SWEEP TIME)
which is automatically selected internally.
WINDOWFCT
(FLATTOP)
MAGNITUDE
If the MAGNITUDE softkey is selected, only the magnitude of the spectrum is
displayed as the result.
IEC/IEEE bus command: CALC:FORM MAGN
1303.3545.12
4.27
E-1
Operation of the FFT Analyzer
R&S FMU
If the MAGNITUDE PHASE softkey is selected, the magnitude of the
spectrum and its phase information are displayed as the result.
MAGNITUDE
PHASE
Note:
This option should only be selected for single measurements or
when using a trigger with periodic signals.
It should be noted that scaling of the phase information can be controlled
using a special submenu (PHASE SETTINGS) opened with the AMPT key.
IEC/IEEE bus command: CALC:FORM MPH
If the REAL IMAG softkey is selected, the real and imaginary parts of the
spectrum are displayed as the result. The results are displayed on a linear
scale.
Note:
This option should only be selected for single measurements or
when using a trigger with periodic signals.
A number of measurements (e.g. from the menu opened with the MEAS key)
are not permitted in this display mode.
IEC/IEEE bus command: CALC:FORM RIM
The WINDOWFCT softkey (short for "window function") opens a submenu
in which the window function for the FFT input data can be selected. The
input data for the FFT is multiplied by the selected window function. This
suppresses leakage effects (but not in the case of the rectangular window).
The softkey also indicates the type of window function currently active.
Note:
The window function
Time Domain mode.
is
completely
irrelevant
in
the
Selecting a different window function changes the filter shape of the
resolution filter, e.g.:
• shape factor: ratio of –60 dB bandwidth to –3 dB bandwidth
• sidelobe fall-off
• attenuation of highest sidelobe
The equivalent noise bandwidth remains constant when the window function
is changed. This is achieved by adapting the acquisition time.
Important: In the FFT Analyzer, the equivalent noise bandwidth is used as
the entry for RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH.
FLATTOP
The FLATTOP softkey selects a "flattop" window function. It provides optimum
amplitude accuracy. It is therefore the default setting. It is also suitable for
measurements with a wide dynamic range because the sidelobes are
attenuated very effectively.
IEC/IEEE bus command: SENS:WIND:TYPE FLAT
GAUSSIAN
The GAUSSIAN softkey selects a "Gaussian" window function.
It is also suitable for measurements with a wide dynamic range because the
sidelobes are attenuated very effectively.
IEC/IEEE bus command: SENS:WIND:TYPE EXP
1303.3545.12
4.28
E-1
R&S FMU
Operation of the FFT Analyzer
The RECT softkey selects a "rectangular" window function. The input data is
then not weighted differently but instead remains unchanged. This type of
window function is also referred to as "boxcar window" or "transient
window".
It should be used for brief transient signals (no data is lost).
It should be used in cases where only frequency resolution is an important factor.
It is otherwise unsuitable since leakage is not suppressed.
RECT
IEC/IEEE bus command: SENS:WIND:TYPE RECT
The HAMMING softkey selects a "Hamming" window function.
HAMMING
Note:
It is not suitable for measurements with a wide dynamic range.
IEC/IEEE bus command: SENS:WIND:TYPE HAMM
The HANN softkey selects a "Hann" window function (sometimes also
referred to as "Hanning").
It is sometimes used for measurements on noise-like signals.
HANN
IEC/IEEE bus command: SENS:WIND:TYPE HANN
CHEBYCHEV
The CHEBYCHEV softkey selects a "Chebychev" window function. It is also
suitable for measurements with a wide dynamic range because the
sidelobes are attenuated very effectively.
IEC/IEEE bus command: SENS:WIND:TYPE CHEB
Table 4-4
Window function data
ENBW
(bins)
BW3dB
(bins)
BW3dB /
ENBW
BW6dB
(bins)
BW6dB /
ENBW
Shape factor
=BW60dB/BW3dB
Highest
sidelobe
(dB)
sidelobe fall
off (dB /
decade)
Flattop
3.89
3.85
0.99
4.73
1.22
2.4
-90
0
Hann
1.50
1.45
0.97
2.02
1.35
9.1
-31.5
60
Hamming
1.36
1.32
0.97
1.83
1.35
70.7
-42.6
20
Rectangular
1.00
0.89
0.89
1.21
1.21
707
-13.3
20
Gaussian
2.26
2.13
0.94
3.00
1.32
4.4
-87.6
20
Chebychev
2.03
1.95
0.96
2.72
1.34
3.84
-110
0
Explanation of the table values:
• The equivalent noise bandwidth of a filter is the bandwidth which an ideal, rectangular filter would
need to have to allow the same power to pass if white noise is applied at the input.
• The value BW3dB / ENBW indicates the factor by which the measured 3 dB bandwidth is smaller than
the selected RBW (which is defined by the equivalent noise bandwidth).
If, for example, a Hann window and an RBW of 10 kHz are used, a 3 dB bandwidth of approx.
9.7 kHz will be measured with the N DB DOWN measurement.
• The values of the highest sidelobe and of the sidelobe fall-off are important if measurements are to be
performed with the widest possible dynamic range. The flattop, Gaussian and Chebychev windows are ideal
for such measurements. The flattop and Chebychev windows have sidelobes with more or less constant
attenuation.
• The shape factor is a measure of the shape of a window or filter. It is defined as the ratio of 60 dB bandwidth
to 3 dB bandwidth. Small values are to be aimed for. The rectangular window and Hamming window do not
perform well here.
1303.3545.12
4.29
E-1
Operation of the FFT Analyzer
R&S FMU
Interdependency between observation time and window function:
In the FFT Analyzer, the equivalent noise bandwidth is used as the entry for RESOLUTION
BANDWIDTH (RBW). This is because the FFT has an equivalent noise bandwidth of exactly one bin if
the rectangular window function is used. The frequency resolution of the FFT for this window is 1 Hz if
the observation time is 1 second. RBW and observation time (here referred to as SWEEPTIME SWT,
although no sweep principle is actually applied) are reciprocal.
The equation
f = RBW =
1
SWT
applies in the case of a rectangular window.
However, leakage effects occur which make the rectangular window unusable for the majority of applications.
If a window function is then used to reduce these leakage effects, the data is slowly attenuated toward zero at
the beginning and end of the observation time. The effective observation time drops as a result and the
frequency resolution in turn becomes poorer. The FFT then has a noise bandwidth which is one relative
equivalent noise bandwidth larger than if a rectangular window of the same length is used.
ENBWrel ( window) =
ENBW ( window)
ENBW (rectangular )
This problem can be solved by increasing the observation time by multiplying it by the relative equivalent
noise bandwidth ENBW rel of the window function:
The equations SWT =
ENBWrel
RBW
and
RBW =
ENBW rel
SWT
apply for all windows.
Changing the window function therefore changes the observation time. However, changing the SPAN
does not change the observation time.
1303.3545.12
4.30
E-1
R&S FMU
Operation of the FFT Analyzer
Time Domain submenu of the FFT Analyzer
This submenu appears when the TIME DOMAIN softkey in the main menu of the FFT Analyzer is
pressed.
In this menu the time domain display mode can be selected.
MAGNITUDE
If the MAGNITUDE softkey is selected, the magnitude of the input signal
(which may be offset with respect to frequency and then filtered by
lowpass filters) over time is displayed as the result.
Using the IQ PATH softkey (in the SIGNAL SOURCE menu), it is
possible to decide whether both paths or just one path of the baseband
input is to be through-connected.
IEC/IEEE bus command: CALC:FORM MAGN
VOLTAGE
If the VOLTAGE softkey is selected, the real and imaginary parts of the
input signal (which may be offset with respect to frequency and then
filtered by lowpass filters) over time are displayed as the result. The
diagram is split into two parts and shows the real and imaginary part on
a linear scale.
If no mixing takes place (CENTER FREQUENCY = 0 Hz), the following
applies:
• With IQ PATH = I + j*Q: The real part and imaginary part of the result
corresponds to the voltage characteristic at the I input and Q input.
• With IQ PATH = I ONLY: The real part of the result corresponds to
the voltage characteristic at the I input. The imaginary part is zero.
• With IQ PATH = Q ONLY: The real part of the result corresponds to
the voltage characteristic at the Q input. The imaginary part is zero.
A number of measurements (e.g. from the menu opened with the MEAS
key) are not permitted in this display mode.
IEC/IEEE bus command: CALC:FORM VOLT
1303.3545.12
4.31
E-1
Operation of the FFT Analyzer
R&S FMU
SIGNAL SOURCE submenu of the FFT Analyzer
This submenu appears when the SIGNAL SOURCE softkey in the main menu of the FFT Analyzer is
pressed.
The way in which the FFT Analyzer is to process the input signals can be defined in this menu.
A similar menu for configuring the baseband input can also be opened by pressing the SETUP hardkey.
The IQ PATH softkey opens a submenu. The way in which the two input
paths are to be interpreted can be defined in this submenu.
Only one state can be active at a time in the submenu. The color of one of
the three softkeys in the submenu changes to indicate which one is active.
The IQ PATH softkey also indicates the selected function.
IQ PATH
I+J*Q
The I+J*Q softkey causes the FFT Analyzer to regard the signals at the I and
Q input as components of a complex signal. This is the standard setting for
the analysis of signals with complex modulation.
IEC/IEEE bus command: INP:IQ:TYPE IJQ
I ONLY
The I ONLY softkey causes the FFT Analyzer to regard the signal at the I
input as a single, real signal. The signal at the Q input is ignored.
This setting should be selected if, for example, a signal at a low intermediate
frequency is connected to the I input.
IEC/IEEE bus command: INP:IQ:TYPE I
Q ONLY
The Q ONLY softkey causes the FFT Analyzer to regard the signal at the Q
input as a single, real signal. The signal at the I input is ignored.
This setting should be selected if, for example, a signal at a low intermediate
frequency is connected to the Q input.
IEC/IEEE bus command: INP:IQ:TYPE Q
1303.3545.12
4.32
E-1
R&S FMU
Operation of the FFT Analyzer
The IQ INPUT 50R / 1MI softkey is used to toggle the input impedance of
the baseband inputs. The setting has the same effect on both inputs.
The IEC/IEEE bus command uses the keywords LOW / HIGH for 50R /
1MI.
Caution: Toggling the input impedance has no effect on the power level
indicated in the FFT Analyzer. It is always assumed that the measured
voltage is applied to a 50 R resistor.
IEC/IEEE bus command: INP:IQ:IMP LOW
BALANCED
OFF
ON
The BALANCED ON / OFF softkey is used to toggle the measurement mode
of the baseband inputs.
ON switches to balanced inputs; OFF switches to ground-referenced inputs.
The setting has the same effect on both inputs.
IEC/IEEE bus command: INP:IQ:BAL:STAT ON
LOWPASS
36MHZ
The LOWPASS 36MHZ softkey is used to toggle the analog anti-aliasing
lowpass filters of the baseband inputs. The setting has the same effect on
both inputs. The softkey changes colour when the lowpass is switched ON.
IEC/IEEE bus command: SENS:IQ:LPAS:STAT ON
DITHER
ON
OFF
The DITHER ON / OFF softkey is used to add a shaped dither signal to both
inputs.
IEC/IEEE bus command: SENS:IQ:DITH:STAT ON
1303.3545.12
4.33
E-1
Frequency and Span Selection – FREQ Key
R&S FMU
Frequency and Span Selection – FREQ Key
The FREQ key is used to specify the frequency axis of the active display window. The frequency axis
can be defined either by the start and stop frequency or by the center frequency and the span (SPAN
key). With two windows (SPLIT SCREEN) displayed at the same time, the input data always refer to the
window selected in the SYSTEM-DISPLAY menu.
After pressing one of the CENTER, START or STOP softkeys, the value of the corresponding parameter
can be defined in an input window.
CENTER
The CENTER softkey opens a window in which the center frequency can be entered.
The permissible entry ranges for the center frequency are as follows:
For the frequency domain (Frequency Domain, Span > 0):
• For IQ PATH = I + jQ (complex signal):
-36 MHz + Minspan/2 fcenter +36 MHz - Minspan/2
• For IQ PATH = I ONLY or IQ PATH = Q ONLY (real signal)
Minspan/2 fcenter +36 MHz - Minspan/2
For the time domain (Time Domain, Span = 0):
• For IQ PATH = I + jQ (complex signal):
-36 MHz fcenter 36 MHz
• For IQ PATH = I ONLY or IQ PATH = Q ONLY (real signal)
0 Hz fcenter 36 MHz
• fcenter Center frequency
1303.3545.12
• Minspan
Smallest selectable span: 10 Hz
IEC/IEEE bus command:
FREQ:CENT 10MHz
4.34
E-1
R&S FMU
START
Frequency and Span Selection – FREQ Key
The START softkey activates manual entry of the start frequency.
The permissible entry ranges for the start frequency are as follows:
For the frequency domain (Frequency Domain, Span > 0):
• For IQ PATH = I + jQ (complex signal):
-36 MHz fstart +36 MHz - Minspan
• For IQ PATH = I ONLY or IQ PATH = Q ONLY (real signal)
0 fstart +36 MHz - Minspan
For the time domain (Time Domain, Span = 0):
• For IQ PATH = I + jQ (complex signal):
-36 MHz fstart 36 MHz
• For IQ PATH = I ONLY or IQ PATH = Q ONLY (real signal)
0 Hz fstart 36 MHz
If the entered start frequency is greater than the stop frequency, the stop frequency is
set to start frequency + minspan.
Start frequency
fstart
Minspan
Smallest selectable span: 10 Hz
IEC/IEEE bus command: FREQ:STAR 2MHz
STOP
The STOP softkey activates entry of the stop frequency.
The permissible entry ranges for the stop frequency are as follows:
For the frequency domain (Frequency Domain, Span > 0):
• For IQ PATH = I + jQ (complex signal):
-36 MHz + Minspan fstop +36 MHz
• For IQ
Minspan
PATH
fstop
= I ONLY
+36 MHz
or
IQ
PATH
=
Q
ONLY
(real
signal)
For the time domain (Time Domain, Span = 0):
• For IQ PATH = I + jQ (complex signal):
-36 MHz fstop 36 MHz
• For IQ PATH = I ONLY or IQ PATH = Q ONLY (real signal)
0 Hz fstop 36 MHz
If the entered stop frequency is less than the start frequency, the start frequency is set
to stop frequency - minspan.
fstop
Stop frequency
Minspan
Smallest selectable span > 0 Hz (10 Hz)
IEC/IEEE bus command: FREQ:STOP 20MHz
1303.3545.12
4.35
E-1
Frequency and Span Selection – FREQ Key
CFSTEPSIZE
R&S FMU
The CF STEPSIZE softkey opens a submenu for setting the step size of the
center frequency. The step size can be coupled to the span (frequency
domain) or the resolution bandwidth (time domain) or it can be manually set
to a fixed value. The softkeys are mutually exclusive selection keys.
The softkeys are presented according to the selected domain (frequency or
time).
Softkeys in frequency domain:
0.1 * SPAN
The 0.1 * SPAN softkey sets the step size for the center
frequency entry to 10% of the span.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK SPAN
FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK:FACT 10PCT
0.5 * SPAN
The 0.5 * SPAN softkey sets the step size for the center
frequency entry to 50% of the span.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK SPAN
FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK:FACT 50PCT
X * SPAN
The X * SPAN softkey allows the factor defining the
center frequency step size to be entered as % of the
span.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK SPAN
FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK:FACT 20PCT
MANUAL
The MANUAL softkey activates the window for entering a
fixed step size.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: FREQ:CENT:STEP 120MHz
Softkeys in time domain:
0.1 * RBW
The 0.1 * RBW softkey sets the step size for the center
frequency entry to 10% of the resolution bandwidth.
0.1 * RBW corresponds to the default setting.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK RBW
FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK:FACT 10PCT
0.5 * RBW
The 0.5 * RBW softkey sets the step size for the center
frequency entry to 50% of the resolution bandwidth.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK RBW
FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK:FACT 50PCT
1303.3545.12
4.36
E-1
R&S FMU
Frequency and Span Selection – FREQ Key
X * RBW
The X * RBW softkey allows the factor defining the center
frequency step size to be entered as % of the resolution
bandwidth.
Values between 1 and 100% in steps of 1% are allowed.
The default setting is 10%.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK RBW
FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK:FACT 20PCT
MANUAL
The MANUAL softkey activates the window for entering a
fixed step size.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
FREQ:CENT:STEP 120MHz
FREQUENCY
OFFSET
The FREQUENCY OFFSET softkey activates the window for entering an
arithmetical frequency offset which is added to the frequency axis labelling.
The allowed range of values for the offset is -100 GHz to 100 GHz. The
default setting is 0 Hz.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: FREQ:OFFS 10 MHz
1303.3545.12
4.37
E-1
Setting the frequency span – SPAN Key
R&S FMU
Setting the frequency span – SPAN Key
The SPAN key opens a menu which contains the various options for
setting the frequency span (Frequency Domain mode).
In the frequency domain (Span > 0), entry of the span (SPAN
MANUAL softkey) is activated automatically. In the time domain
(Span = 0), entry of the sweep time (SWEEPTIME MANUAL softkey)
is activated automatically.
SPAN
MANUAL
The SPAN MANUAL softkey activates manual entry of the frequency span,
whereby the center frequency is kept constant wherever possible. CENTER
FREQUENCY is adapted automatically only if the new span projects beyond
the permissible ranges. This is indicated on the display.
For the frequency domain (Frequency Domain, Span > 0), the permissible
entry range for the frequency span is:
• For IQ PATH = I + jQ (complex signal):
Minspan < fspan 72 MHz
• For IQ PATH = I ONLY or IQ PATH = Q ONLY (real signal)
Minspan < fspan 36 MHz
Entering a span of 0 Hz activates the Time Domain mode. In this mode, 0 Hz
is the only permissible value for SPAN.
Entering a span > 0 Hz activates the Frequency Domain mode.
fspan
Frequency span (Span)
Minspan
Smallest selectable span (10 Hz)
IEC/IEEE bus command: FREQ:SPAN 2MHz
SWEEPTIME
MANUAL
The SWEEPTIME MANUAL softkey activates manual entry of the sweep time
in the Time Domain mode (Span = 0). If the span is greater than 0, the
softkey is not available as the observation time is selected internally by the
firmware.
The softkey with the same label in the submenu opened by pressing the
SWEEP hardkey has the same functionality. See Table 4-5 for the
permissible values of the SWEEPTIME parameter.
IEC/IEEE bus command: SWE:TIME 1ms
1303.3545.12
4.38
E-1
R&S FMU
FULL SPAN
Setting the frequency span – SPAN Key
The FULL SPAN softkey sets the frequency span to the largest possible span
in the FFT Analyzer. If the Time Domain mode is currently active, the mode
also switches over to Frequency Domain.
The span and center frequency are then as follows:
• For IQ PATH = I + jQ (complex signal):
SPAN = 72 MHz, i.e. –36 MHz to +36 MHz.
CENTER FREQUENCY = 0 Hz
• For IQ PATH = I ONLY or IQ PATH = Q ONLY (real signal):
SPAN = 36 MHz, i.e. from 0 Hz to +36 MHz
CENTER FREQUENCY = 18 MHz
IEC/IEEE bus command: FREQ:SPAN:FULL
ZERO SPAN
The ZERO SPAN softkey sets the frequency span to 0 Hz. As a result, the
mode of the FFT Analyzer changes to Time Domain.
The x-axis becomes the time axis, whereby the gridlines each correspond to
1/10 of the current sweep time (SWT).
IEC/IEEE bus command: FREQ:SPAN 0Hz
LAST SPAN
If the frequency span has been changed, pressing the LAST SPAN softkey
restores the previous setting on the instrument. In this way, it is possible to
switch between an overview measurement (FULL SPAN) and a detailed
measurement (manually selected center frequency and span).
Note:
The last span value is restored if and only if the span is > 0, i.e.
the time domain is not selected automatically.
IEC/IEEE bus command: -
1303.3545.12
4.39
E-1
Setting the level display and configuring the diagrams – AMPT key
R&S FMU
Setting the level display and configuring the diagrams –
AMPT key
The AMPT key opens a submenu in which the reference level (REF LEVEL) and various properties of
the result diagrams can be configured. REF LEVEL can be entered immediately since the entry dialog is
opened automatically as soon as the AMPT key is pressed.
Note.
With the analog baseband input, the reference level should not be specified as the RMS
power but rather as the applied peak voltages.
REF LEVEL
The REF LEVEL softkey allows the reference level to be input in the currently
active unit (dBm, dBXV, etc).
The upper limit in dBm is
+15 dBm with IMPEDANCE HIGH (1 M )
+25 dBm with IMPEDANCE LOW (50 )
(other units corresponding)
IEC/IEEE-bus command: DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV -20dBm
RANGE LOG
100 DB
1303.3545.12
The RANGE LOG 100 dB softkey sets the level display range to 100 dB.
IEC/IEEE bus command:
4.40
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SPAC LOG
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y 100DB
E-1
R&S FMU
Setting the level display and configuring the diagrams – AMPT key
RANGE LOG
MANUAL
The RANGE LOG MANUAL softkey activates manual entry of the level
display range. Display ranges from 10 to 200 dB in 10 dB steps are permitted.
Invalid entries are rounded to the nearest permissible value.
The default setting is 100 dB.
IEC/IEEE bus command:
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SPAC LOG
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y 120DB
The RANGE LINEAR softkey switches the display range of the analyzer over to
linear scaling and opens the submenu for selecting % or dB as the diagram labeling.
The display in % is selected the first time the display range is switched over
to linear scaling (see RANGE LINEAR dB softkey).
RANGE
LINEAR
IEC/IEEE bus command:
RANGE
LINEAR %
The RANGE LINEAR % softkey switches the display range of the analyzer to
linear scaling. The horizontal gridlines are labeled in %. The grid has decadic
division. Markers are displayed in the selected unit and delta markers in %
referred to the voltage value at the position of marker 1.
IEC/IEEE bus command:
RANGE
LINEAR dB
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SPAC LIN
The RANGE LINEAR dB softkey switches the display range of the analyzer to
linear scaling. The horizontal gridlines are labeled in dB.
Markers are displayed in the selected unit and delta markers in dB referred to
the power at the position of marker 1.
IEC/IEEE bus command:
Y-AXIS
/DIV
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SPAC LIN
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SPAC LDB
With linear scaling, the Y-AXIS/DIV softkey is used to determine the value range
which is to correspond to the distance between two horizontal gridlines. The entire
displayed value range is therefore equivalent to 10 times the selected value.
The softkey is only available in the following display modes:
• REAL IMAG in the Frequency Domain mode
• VOLTAGE in the Time Domain mode
The setting always affects both subdiagrams in the same way.
IEC/IEEE bus command:
Y-AXIS
REF-VALUE
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:PDIV 10
The Y-AXIS REF-VALUE softkey determines the reference value of the diagram
at the reference position. The gridlines are arranged on the basis of this
reference value.
The softkey is only available in the following display modes:
• REAL IMAG in the Frequency Domain mode
• VOLTAGE in the Time Domain mode
The setting always affects both subdiagrams in the same way.
IEC/IEEE bus command:
1303.3545.12
4.41
DISP:WIND:TRAC:T:RVAL 1
E-1
Setting the level display and configuring the diagrams – AMPT key
Y-AXIS
REF-POS
R&S FMU
The Y-AXIS REF-POS softkey is used to control the location of the reference
position within the grid from 0% to 100%. The default value is 50%.
The softkey is only available in the following display modes:
• REAL IMAG in the Frequency Domain mode
• VOLTAGE in the Time Domain mode
The setting always affects both subdiagrams in the same way.
IEC/IEEE bus command:
UNIT
dBm
dBmV
dB@V
dB@A
dBpW
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y: RPOS
The UNIT softkey opens a submenu in which the desired unit for
the level axis can be selected.
In the default setting, the level is displayed over 1 milliwatt (=
dBm). The input impedance, which is ALWAYS assumed to be
50 , can be used for conversion to other units. As a result, it is
possible to convert the units dBm, dBmV, dBµV, dBµA, dBpW, V,
A and W directly.
IEC/IEEE bus command: CALC:UNIT:POW DBM
VOLT
AMPERE
WATT
AMPT – NEXT menu:
REF LEVEL
POSITION
The REF LEVEL POSITION softkey allows the reference level position to be
entered.
The setting range is from -200 to +200 %, 0 % corresponding to the lower
and 100% to the upper limit of the diagram.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: DISP:WIND:TRAC:RPOS 100PCT
REF LEVEL
OFFSET
The REF LEVEL OFFSET softkey activates entry of an arithmetic level
offset. This is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit.
The y-axis scaling is changed accordingly.
The setting range is ±200 dB in 0.1 dB steps.
IEC/IEEE bus command: DISP:WIND:TRAC:RLEV:OFFS -10dB
1303.3545.12
4.42
E-1
R&S FMU
Setting the level display and configuring the diagrams – AMPT key
PHASE
SETTINGS
The PHASE SETTINGS softkey opens a submenu in which the scaling of the
phase diagram can be configured. The softkey and the submenu are
therefore only available for the MAGNITUDE PHASE measurement in the
Frequency Domain mode.
Note:
AUTOSCALE
Y-AXIS
/DIV
The AUTOSCALE, PHASE OFFSET, PHASE RAD/DEG and
PHASEWRAP ON/OFF softkeys always affect the phase diagram.
The other softkeys of this submenu can have an effect on either the
upper or lower diagram, depending on the position of the
SCREEN A/B hotkey.
The AUTOSCALE softkey performs one-off scaling of the phase diagram so
that the current trace fully utilizes the value range.
IEC/IEEE bus command:
DISP:WIND2:TRAC:Y:SCAL:AUTO ONCE
The Y-AXIS/DIV softkey is used to determine the value range which is to
correspond to the distance between two horizontal gridlines. The entire displayed
value range is therefore equivalent to 10 times the selected value. With manual
entry, the unit selected using the PHASE RAD / PHASE DEG softkey applies
(only for the phase diagram).
IEC/IEEE bus command:
DISP:WIND2:TRAC:Y:PDIV 10DEG
Y-AXIS
REF-VALUE
The Y-AXIS REF-VALUE softkey determines the reference value of the diagram
at the reference position. The gridlines are arranged on the basis of this
reference value. The unit selected using the PHASE RAD / PHASE DEG
softkey applies (only for the phase diagram).
IEC/IEEE bus command:
DISP:WIND2:TRAC:Y:RVAL 20DEG
Y-AXIS
REF-POS
PHASE
OFFSET
The Y-AXIS REF-POS softkey is used to control the location of the reference
position within the grid from 0% to 100%. The default value is 50%.
IEC/IEEE bus command:
DISP:WIND2:TRAC:Y:RPOS 50
The PHASE OFFSET softkey determines a constant phase value which is
added to the overall phase trace. This allows a test point to be assigned to a
desired phase value.
The unit selected using the PHASE RAD / PHASE DEG softkey applies.
IEC/IEEE bus command: SENS:CORR:OFFS:PHAS 10DEG
PHASE
RAD DEG
PHASEWRAP
ON OFF
1303.3545.12
The PHASE RAD / PHASE DEG softkey switches the unit of the phase trace
between radians and degrees.
IEC/IEEE bus command: CALC:UNIT:ANGL RAD
The PHASEWRAP ON / PHASEWRAP OFF softkey activates/deactivates the
phase trace limitation to the value range between –180º and +180º / -pi to +pi.
IEC/IEEE bus command: CALC2:FORM PHAS
CALC2:FORM UPHAS
4.43
E-1
Setting the Bandwidths and Sweep Time – BW Key
R&S FMU
Setting the Bandwidths and Sweep Time – BW Key
The BW key opens a menu in which the resolution bandwidth (RBW) and sweep time (SWT) which
determine the measurement are set. The RBW can be coupled to the span (stop frequency minus start
frequency, SPAN) or can be freely defined by the user. The automatic coupling is set by pressing the
RES BW AUTO softkey. The coupling ratio is selected using the COUPLING RATIO softkey.
The RES BW MANUAL softkey activates direct entry of the RBW. There is then no coupling to the
SPAN.
In the Time Domain mode, Gaussian shaped digital filters are used as the resolution filters .
An FFT with preselectable windowing of the data is used in the Frequency Domain mode. The resolution
bandwidths can be selected both in the usual steps and in fine intermediate steps (RES BW 1-2-3-5
softkey).
The FFT Analyzer does not support video filters (VBW). The averaging of consecutive traces can be
used instead.
BW
SWEEP
RES BW
MANUAL
MEAS
TRIG
SWEEPTIME
MANUAL
RESB BW
AUTO
SWEEPTIME
AUTO
SPAN
SPAN/ / RBW
RBW
AUTO [50]
[ 50 ]
AUTO
SPAN / RBW
MANUAL
COUPLING
RATIO
DEFAULT
COUPLING
RES BW
1-2-3-5
1303.3545.12
4.44
E-1
R&S FMU
RES BW
MANUAL
Setting the Bandwidths and Sweep Time – BW Key
The RES BW MANUAL softkey activates manual entry of the resolution bandwidth.
The following applies in the Frequency Domain mode:
• The resolution bandwidth can be set in steps of 1, 2, 3, 5 and 10 or in
steps of 0.1 Hz, depending on the setting of the RBW 1-2-3-5 softkey. The
nominal values for the resolution bandwidths are the equivalent noise
bandwidths of the resolution filters and NOT the 3 dB bandwidths.
• The largest possible RBW is always 20 MHz.
• For CAPTURE BOTH DOMAINS active and/or a span greater than 27.5
MHz, the smallest possible RBW is 25 Hz, or rounded up to 30 Hz.
• Otherwise the smallest attainable RBW is equal to 0.1 Hz times the relative
ENBW of the set window function, depending on the position of RES BW 1-23-5, rounded up or not. For the relative ENBW, see Table 4-5.
• Also applicable, however, is a maximum ratio of the span to RBW, which
cannot be exceeded. Ratios that are too extreme can be rejected by the
firmware.
The following applies in the Time Domain mode:
• The resolution bandwidth can always be selected in steps of 1, 2, 3, 5 and
10 between 10 Hz and 20 MHz (s. Table 4-5). The nominal values for the
resolution bandwidths are the 3 dB bandwidths of the Gaussian shaped
filters.
If necessary, the RBW is rounded to the nearest possible value when the
Frequency Domain mode is switched over to the Time Domain mode.
When bandwidths are entered manually, the value is always rounded to the
nearest possible bandwidth; if bandwidths are entered using the rotary knob
or the UP/DOWN keys, the value is scrolled up and down in steps.
A green asterisk (*) appears on the display field to indicate that the resolution
bandwidth has been entered manually.
IEC/IEEE bus command: BAND 1MHz
SWEEPTIME
MANUAL
The SWEEPTIME MANUAL softkey activates manual entry of the sweep
time. It is only available in the Time Domain mode.
In the Frequency Domain mode, the sweep time is preset by selecting the
window function and frequency resolution. It is therefore not possible to
change the sweep time.
In time domain mode (Span = 0 Hz), the sweep times (which may range from
1 Xs to max. 16000 s) can be selected in steps of max. 5% of the sweep
time. When sweep times are entered manually, the FFT Analyzer always
rounds to the nearest possible sweep time; if sweep times are entered using
the rotary knob or the UP/DOWN keys, the FFT Analyzer scrolls the sweep
time up and down in steps.
Refer also to Table 4-5 for the sweep times. In the FFT Analyzer, the
maximum sweep time depends on the selected RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH
and the CAPTURE BOTH DOMAINS function.
IEC/IEEE bus command: SWE:TIME 10ms
1303.3545.12
4.45
E-1
Setting the Bandwidths and Sweep Time – BW Key
Table 4-5
R&S FMU
Maximum sweep times for the Time Domain mode
Maximum SWEEPTIME
for Time Domain
CAPTURE BOTH DOMAIN S = OFF
CAPTURE BOTH DOMAINS = ON
RBW = 10Hz
16000.0000 s
Not
RBW = 20Hz
16000.0000 s
available
RBW = 30Hz
16000.0000 s
RBW = 50Hz
16000.0000 s
RBW = 100Hz
8000.0000 s
RBW = 200Hz
4000.0000 s
RBW = 300Hz
2500.0000 s
RBW = 500Hz
1600.0000 s
RBW = 1KHz
800.0000 s
RBW = 2KHz
400.0000 s
RBW = 3KHz
250.0000 s
RBW = 5KHz
160.0000 s
RBW = 10KHz
80.0000 s
RBW = 20KHz
40.0000 s
RBW = 30KHz
25.0000 s
RBW = 50KHz
16.0000 s
RBW = 100KHz
8.6000 s
RBW = 200KHz
4.5000 s
RBW = 300KHz
2.8000 s
RBW = 500KHz
1.6000 s
RBW = 1MHz
0.8000 s
RBW = 2MHz
0.6000 s
RBW = 3MHz
0.6000 s
RBW = 5MHz
0.4000 s
RBW = 10MHz
0.4000 s
RBW = 20MHz
0.4000 s
0.1600s
Caution:
Very large volumes of data will be recorded if the values for both RBW and SWEEPTIME
are large. The trace will then be plotted block by block.
RES BW
AUTO
The RES BW AUTO softkey is only available in the frequency domain (Span
> 0 Hz). The softkey is not visible in the time domain.
It couples the resolution bandwidth to the selected frequency span (SPAN). If
the frequency span is changed, the resolution bandwidth is adjusted
automatically.
Automatic coupling of the resolution bandwidth to the frequency span is
always recommended if a resolution bandwidth setting is desired which is
suitable for the measurement task and in proportion to the selected span.
The coupling ratio is set in the COUPLING RATIO submenu.
IEC/IEEE bus command: BAND:AUTO ON
SWEEPTIME
AUTO
1303.3545.12
The SWEEPTIME AUTO softkey is only available in the frequency domain
(SPAN > 0 Hz) and is always selected there because it is not possible to
select the SWEEPTIME manually.
The softkey is not visible in the time domain because the SWEEPTIME can
only be selected manually.
4.46
E-1
R&S FMU
Setting the Bandwidths and Sweep Time – BW Key
COUPLING
RATIO
The COUPLING RATIO softkey opens a submenu in which the
coupling ratio of SPAN and RBW can be selected.
In the default state, i.e. when the COUPLING RATIO softkey is not
active (not highlighted), the ratio of span to resolution bandwidth
(SPAN/RBW) is 50 (corresponds to SPAN / RBW AUTO [50]).
SPAN / RBW
AUTO [ 50 ]
SPAN / RBW
MANUAL
SPAN /RBW
AUTO [50]
The SPAN/RBW AUTO softkey sets the following coupling ratio:
Resolution bandwidth = Frequency span/50
This coupling ratio corresponds to the default setting.
IEC/IEEE bus command: BAND:RAT 0.02
The setting is only effective if RBW AUTO is active.
SPAN /RBW
MANUAL
The SPAN/RBW MANUAL softkey activates entry of the coupling
ratio of frequency span and resolution bandwidth.
The ratio of frequency span to resolution bandwidth can be set
between 1 and 10000.
IEC/IEEE bus command: BAND:RAT 0.1
t is only possible to select this softkey if RBW AUTO is active.
DEFAULT
COUPLING
The DEFAULT COUPLING softkey sets all coupling functions to their default
state (AUTO); in the FFT Analyzer this only applies to SPAN/RBW. In addition,
the SPAN/RBW ratio in the COUPLING RATIO submenu is set to 50.
IEC/IEEE bus command:
BAND:AUTO ON
BW – NEXT menu:
RES BW
1-2-3-5
The RES BW 1-2-3-5 softkey is only available in the Frequency Domain mode.
When activated, the RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH can only be changed in
steps of 1, 2, 3, 5 and 10 (which is also always the case in the Time Domain
mode).
However, this softkey is also used to activate manual entry of freely selected
bandwidths in the Frequency Domain mode. The values must then be entered
by means of the RES BW MANUAL softkey, or are derived from the SPAN if
the automatic coupling function is activated. If the values are in the permissible
range, they are rounded to 0.1 Hz and accepted.
If the system is switched back to the mode with the bandwidth steps or to the
Time Domain mode, the RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH is rounded to the
nearest permissible value.
IEC/IEEE bus command: SENS:BWID:RESO:STEP:MODE LIN
SENS:BAND:RESO:STEP:MODE L1235
1303.3545.12
4.47
E-1
Setting the Sweep – SWEEP Key
R&S FMU
Setting the Sweep – SWEEP Key
The SWEEP key is used to select the frequency sweep type.
Note: The term "sweep" is used here (and also at other points in the description of the FFT Analyzer)
although no "sweep" principle is performed in a frequency analysis. The term is based on the Spectrum
Analysis mode of conventional analyzers.
The sweep time used for the FFT is also shown at the top of the screen in the middle of the display (e.g.
as "SWT = 10 ms"). This is, however, not the time required for a complete measurement process. If
CAPTURE BOTH DOMAINS is active, data acquisition is initially performed for 0.16 seconds for a
SINGLE SWEEP and then only a small proportion of the data is usually used for calculating the FFT.
The overall measurement process is made up of the times for data acquisition, for filtering and
decimation of the data, for calculation of the FFT and for displaying the results.
However, the displayed SWEEPTIME only indicates which time domain is covered by the input data of
the FFT.
SWEEP menu
BW
SWEEP
CONTINUOUS
SWEEP
MEAS
TRIG
SINGLE
SWEEP
The SWEEP key opens a menu in which the
frequency sweep (sweep mode) is
configured.
The CONTINUOUS SWEEP, SINGLE
SWEEP and SGL SWEEP DISP OFF softkeys
are selection switches. Only one of these
switches can be active at any one time.
CONTINUE
SGL SWEEP
SWEEPTIME
MANUAL
SWEEPTIME
AUTO
SWEEP
COUNT
SWEEP
POINTS
RECALC
RECALC
AUTO OFF
SGL SWEEP
DISP OFF
CONTINUOUS
SWEEP
The CONTINUOUS SWEEP softkey activates the continuous sweep mode,
which means that the sweep takes place continuously according to the trigger
mode set.
CONTINUOUS SWEEP is the default setting of R&S FMU.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: INIT:CONT ON
SINGLE
SWEEP
The SINGLE SWEEP softkey starts n sweeps after triggering. The number of
sweeps is determined by the SWEEP COUNT softkey.
If a trace is swept using TRACE AVERAGE or MAXHOLD, the value set via
the SWEEP COUNT softkey determines the number of sweeps. If 0 has been
entered, one sweep is performed.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: INIT:CONT OFF
1303.3545.12
4.48
E-1
R&S FMU
CONTINUE
SGL SWEEP
Setting the Sweep – SWEEP Key
The CONTINUE SGL SWEEP softkey repeats the number of sweeps set
under SWEEP COUNT, however without first deleting the trace.
This is particularly of interest when using the functions TRACE AVERAGE
and MAXHOLD, if previously recorded measurement results are to be taken
into consideration for averaging / maximum search.
If SGL SWEEP DISP OFF is active, the screen is switched off also during
repeated sweeps.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: INIT:CONM
SWEEPTIME
MANUAL
The SWEEPTIME MANUAL softkey activates the window for entering the
sweep time manually (for details see BW menu) in Time Domain.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: SWE:TIME 10s
SWEEPTIME
AUTO
The SWEEPTIME AUTO softkey indicates the automatic selection of the
sweep time (for details see BW menu) in Frequency Domain.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: --
SWEEP
COUNT
The SWEEP COUNT softkey activates the window for the entry of the
number of sweeps to be performed by R&S FMU after a single sweep has
been started. If Trace Average, Max Hold or Min Hold is activated, this also
determines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures.
Example:
[TRACE1: MAX HOLD]
[SWEEP: SWEEP COUNT: {10} ENTER]
[SINGLE SWEEP]
R&S FMU performs the Max Hold function over 10 sweeps.
The permissible range for the sweep count is 0 to 32767. For sweep count =
0 or 1, one sweep is performed. For trace averaging in the continuoussweep mode, R&S FMU performs running averaging over 10 sweeps if
sweep count = 0; if sweep count = 1, no averaging is performed.
The sweep count is valid for all the traces in a diagram.
Note:
The number of sweeps set in the TRACE menu is the same as
that in the SWEEP menu.
If SINGLE SWEEP is selected, the measurement stops after the
selected number of sweeps has been performed.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: SWE:COUN 64
SWEEP
POINTS
The SWEEP POINTS softkey selects the number of measurement samples
acquired during a sweep.
The following numbers of points per sweep are available: 155, 313, 625
(default), 1251, 1999, 2501, 5001, 10001, 20001, 30001
Note:
The autopeak detector will be disabled while the number of points per sweep
is 625.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: SWE:POIN 625
1303.3545.12
4.49
E-1
Setting the Sweep – SWEEP Key
SGL SWEEP
DISP OFF
R&S FMU
Te SGL SWEEP DISP OFF softkey deactivates the display while a single
sweep is being performed. Once the sweep has been completed, the trace is
shown.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: INIT:DISP OFF;:INIT
RECALC
The RECALC softkey is deactivated and cannot be used if the CAPTURE
BOTH DOMAINS measurement mode is not active.
The RECALC softkey can only be operated if the CAPTURE BOTH
DOMAINS measurement mode is active, the FFT Analyzer is in the SINGLE
SWEEP mode and measurement data has already been acquired.
The data stored in the memory (always sampled for 0.16 s at 81.6 MHz) is
reanalyzed according to the current instrument settings each time the
RECALC softkey is pressed. Data acquisition is not performed again. Any
trigger settings, e.g. EXTERN or I/Q LEVEL, are ignored, i.e. reanalysis is
performed immediately.
The instrument settings which can be adjusted are, for example:
• Time Domain / Frequency Domain
• measurement display mode (MAGNITUDE, VOLTAGE, etc)
• RBW, SPAN, WINDOWFCT, CENTER FREQUENCY, SWEEPTIME
• type of detector
• IQ PATH: I + jQ, I ONLY, Q ONLY
RECALC
AUTO OFF
The RECALC AUTO / RECALC OFF softkey is deactivated and cannot be
used if the CAPTURE BOTH DOMAINS measurement mode is not active.
If the softkey is set to OFF, the RECALC softkey must be pressed each time
recorded data is to be analyzed using modified measurement settings.
If, however, the softkey is set to AUTO, the firmware automatically triggers a
RECALC whenever the adjustable parameters are changed manually.
However, as soon as one of the critical parameters has been changed (see
the description of the RECALC softkey), the automatic RECALC is not
performed and, like the RECALC softkey, the RECALC AUTO / OFF softkey
is also temporarily deactivated.
1303.3545.12
4.50
E-1
R&S FMU
Triggering the Sweep – TRIG Key
Triggering the Sweep – TRIG Key
The TRIG key opens a menu for setting the various trigger sources and selecting the polarity of the
trigger. The associated softkeys are highlighted to indicate that the trigger mode is active.
The enhancement label TRG is displayed on the screen to indicate that a trigger mode other than
FREE RUN is set.
TRIGGER menu
TRIG
FREE RUN
EXTERN
I LEVEL
Q LEVEL
I/Q LEVEL
TRIGGER
OFFSET
POLARITY
POS
NEG
FREE RUN
The FREE RUN softkey activates the free-running measurement, i.e. there is no
explicit triggering of the start of measurements. When one measurement has
been completed, another is started immediately.
FREE RUN is the default setting of the FFT Analyzer.
IEC/IEEE bus command: TRIG:SOUR IMM
EXTERN
The EXTERN softkey activates triggering by means of a TTL signal at the EXT
TRIGGER input socket on the rear panel of the instrument.
The external trigger level can be adjusted in the range from 0.5 V to 3.5 V. The
default value is 1.4 V.
IEC/IEEE bus command: TRIG:SOUR EXT <numeric_value>
The I LEVEL softkey activates triggering to the voltage of the I signal (real part of
the signal) and determines the trigger threshold in volts. Sample acquisition
starts when the value exceeds (positive polarity) or drops below (negative
polarity) the selected threshold.
The I LEVEL softkey is only available in the Time Domain Voltage mode.
Triggering is performed on the real part after the complex signal processing as
displayed in the upper diagram. This is the voltage at the I input only if center
frequency is set to 0. The bandwidth is ½ * RBW.
IEC/IEEE bus command:
1303.3545.12
TRIG:LEV:IONL 0.1V
4.51
E-1
Triggering the Sweep – TRIG Key
R&S FMU
The Q LEVEL softkey activates triggering to the voltage of the Q signal
(imaginary part of the signal) and determines the trigger threshold in volts.
Sample acquisition starts when the value exceeds (positive polarity) or drops
below (negative polarity) the selected threshold.
The Q Level softkey is only available in the Time Domain Voltage mode.
The imaginary part of the signal is triggered after the complex signal processing
as displayed in the upper diagramThis is the voltage at the Q input only if center
frequency is set to 0. The bandwidth is ½ * RBW.
IEC/IEEE bus command:
I/Q LEVEL
TRIG:LEV:QONL 0.1V
The I/Q LEVEL softkey activates triggering to the magnitude of the I/Q signal and
determines the trigger threshold in volts. Sample acquisition starts when the
value exceeds (positive polarity) or drops below (negative polarity) the selected
threshold.
Here too, the IQ PATH setting is taken into account, which means the I or Q
input may be ignored.
The following applies to the bandwidth within which the magnitude of the I/Q
signal is measured:
• With CAPTURE BOTH DOMAINS inactive:
- Frequency domain measurement: the bandwidth is slightly smaller than
the set span, but no more than about 19 MHz
- Time domain measurement: the bandwidth is the set RBW
• With CAPTURE BOTH DOMAINS active:
- Frequency domain measurement: the bandwidth is always about 19 MHz
- Time domain measurement: the bandwidth is the set RBW
The bandwidth is symmetric around the set center frequency.
IEC/IEEE bus command:
TRIGGER
OFFSET
TRIG:LEV:IFP 0.7
The TRIGGER OFFSET softkey activates entry of a time offset between the
trigger signal and the start of the sweep.
Triggering is delayed (entry > 0) or advanced (entry < 0) by the entered time relative
to the trigger signal. The time can be entered in the value range –100 ms to 50 s
(default: 0 s).
IEC/IEEE bus command: TRIG:HOLD
POLARITY
POS
NEG
10US
The POLARITY POS/NEG softkey determines the polarity of the trigger slope.
Measurement starts after a positive or a negative slope of the trigger signal. The
selected setting is highlighted accordingly.
The setting applies to all trigger types except FREE RUN.
The default setting is POLARITY POS.
IEC/IEEE bus command: TRIG:SLOP POS
1303.3545.12
4.52
E-1
R&S FMU
Selection and Setting of Traces – TRACE Key
Selection and Setting of Traces – TRACE Key
The R&S FMU is capable of displaying up to three different traces at a time in a diagram. A trace
consists of a maximum of 625 pixels on the horizontal axis (frequency or time). If more measured values
than pixels are available, several measured values are combined in one pixel.
The traces are selected using the SELECT TRACE softkey in the menu of the TRACE key.
The traces can individually be activated for a measurement or frozen after completion of a
measurement. Traces that are not activated are blanked.
The display mode can be selected for each trace. Traces can be overwritten in each measurement
(CLEAR/WRITE mode), averaged over several measurements (AVERAGE mode), or a maximum or
minimum value can be determined from several measurements and displayed (MAX HOLD or MIN HOLD).
Individual detectors can be selected for the various traces. The autopeak detector displays maximum
and minimum values connected by a vertical line. The max peak detector and min peak detector display
the maximum and minimum value of the level within a pixel. The sample detector displays the
instantaneous value of the level at a pixel. The rms detector displays the power (rms value) of the
measured values within a pixel, the average detector the average value.
Selection of Trace Function
The trace functions are subdivided as follows:
•
Display mode of trace (CLEAR/WRITE, VIEW and BLANK)
•
Evaluation of the trace as a whole (AVERAGE, MAX HOLD and MIN HOLD)
•
Evaluation of individual pixels of a trace (AUTOPEAK, MAX PEAK, MIN PEAK, SAMPLE, RMS and
AVERAGE)
TRACE menu
AUTO
SELECT
TRACE
SELECT
TRACE
CLEAR/
WRITE
MIN HOLD
HOLD CONT
ON
OFF
T1-T2->T1
T1-T3->T1
MAX HOLD
AVG MODE
LOG
LIN
TRACE
POSITION
BLANK
1303.3545.12
DETECTOR
MAX PEAK
DETECTOR
MIN PEAK
AVERAGE
VIEW
DETECTOR
AUTO PEAK
SWEEP
COUNT
ASCII FILE
EXPORT
DETECTOR
DECIM SEP
.
,
TRACE
MATH
COPY
TRACE
DETECTOR
SAMPLE
DETECTOR
RMS
DETECTOR
AVERAGE
TRACE MATH
OFF
4.53
E-1
Selection and Setting of Traces – TRACE Key
R&S FMU
The TRACE key opens a menu offering the setting options for the selected trace.
Traces can be displayed, blanked and copied. Traces can also be corrected with the aid of
mathematical functions.
The measurement detector for the individual display modes can be selected directly by the user or set
automatically by R&S FMU.
The default setting is trace 1 in the overwrite mode (CLEAR / WRITE), the other traces 2 and 3 are
switched off (BLANK).
The CLEAR/WRITE, MAX HOLD, MIN HOLD, AVERAGE, VIEW and BLANK softkeys are mutually
exclusive selection keys.
SELECT
TRACE
The SELECT TRACE softkey activates the entry for the active trace (1, 2, 3).
IEC/IEEE-bus command -- (selected via numeric suffix of :TRACe)
CLEAR/
WRITE
The CLEAR/WRITE softkey activates the overwrite mode for the collected
measured values, ie the trace is overwritten by each sweep.
In the CLEAR/WRITE display mode all the available detectors can be
selected. In the default mode the autopeak detector (setting AUTO) is
selected.
Each time the CLEAR/WRITE softkey is actuated, R&S FMUFMU clears the
selected trace memory and starts the measurement anew.
IEC/IEEE-bus command DISP:WIND:TRAC:MODE WRIT
MAX HOLD
The MAX HOLD softkey activates the max peak detector.
R&S FMU saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is
greater than the previous one.
The detector is automatically set to MAX PEAK. The maximum value of a
signal can thus be determined over several sweeps.
This is especially useful with modulated or impulsive signals. The signal
spectrum is filled up upon each sweep until all signal components are
detected in a kind of envelope.
Pressing the MAX HOLD softkey again clears the trace memory and restarts
the max hold mode.
IEC/IEEE-bus command DISP:WIND:TRAC:MODE MAXH
AVERAGE
The AVERAGE softkey activates the trace averaging function. The average is
formed over several sweeps. Averaging can be performed with any of the
detectors available. If the detector is automatically selected by R&S FMU, the
sample detector is used.
Depending on the setting of AVG MODE LOG / LIN, the logarithmic level
values or the measured power/voltage values are averaged.
Averaging is restarted every time the AVERAGE softkey is pressed. The
trace memory is always cleared.
IEC/IEEE-bus command DISP:WIND:TRAC:MODE AVER
1303.3545.12
4.54
E-1
R&S FMU
Selection and Setting of Traces – TRACE Key
Description of averaging
Averaging is carried out over the pixels derived from the measurement samples. Several measured
values may be combined in a pixel. This means that with linear level display the average is formed over
linear amplitude values and with logarithmic level display over levels. For this reason the trace must be
measured again when changing between LIN and LOG display mode. The settings CONT/SINGLE
SWEEP and running averaging apply to the average display analogously.
There are two methods for calculating the average. For a sweep count = 0 , a running average is
calculated according to the following formula:
9 * TRACE + meas. value
10
TRACE =
Due to the weighting between the new measured value and the trace average, past values have
practically no influence on the displayed trace after about ten sweeps. With this setting, signal noise is
effectively reduced without need for restarting the averaging process after a change of the signal.
If the sweep count is >1, averaging takes place over the selected number of sweeps. In this case the
displayed trace is determined during averaging according to the following formula:
Trace n =
1
n
n 1
(Ti ) + m eas.value n
i=1
where n is the number of the current sweep (n = 2 ... SWEEP COUNT). No averaging is carried out for
the first sweep but the measured value is stored in the trace memory. With increasing n, the displayed
trace is increasingly smoothed since there are more single sweeps for averaging.
After the selected number of sweeps the average trace is saved in the trace memory. Until this number
of sweeps is reached, a preliminary average is displayed.
After completion of averaging, ie when the averaging length defined by SWEEP COUNT is attained, a
running averaging is continued with CONTINUOUS SWEEP according to the following formula:
TRACE =
(N - 1) * TRACE old + meas. value
N
where
Trace
= new trace
Traceold = old trace
N
= SWEEP COUNT
The display "Sweep N of N" does not change any more until a new start is triggered.
In the SINGLE SWEEP mode, the number of sweeps is triggered with SWEEP START. The sweeps are
stopped when the selected number of sweeps is attained. The number of the current sweep and the
total number of sweeps are shown on the display: "Sweep 3 of 200".
VIEW
The VIEW softkey freezes the current contents of the trace memory and
displays it.
If a trace is frozen by VIEW, the instrument settings can be changed without
the displayed trace being modified (exception: level display range and
reference level, see below). The fact that the trace and the current instrument
setting do not agree any more is indicated by an enhancement label "*" at the
right edge of the grid.
If in the VIEW display mode the level display range (RANGE) or the reference
level (REF LEVEL) are changed, R&S FMU automatically adapts the
measured data to the changed display range. This allows an amplitude zoom
to be made after the measurement in order to show details of the trace.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
1303.3545.12
4.55
DISP:WIND:TRAC:MODE VIEW
E-1
Selection and Setting of Traces – TRACE Key
BLANK
R&S FMU
The BLANK softkey activates the blanking of the trace on the screen.
IEC/IEEE-bus command DISP:WIND:TRAC OFF
SWEEP
COUNT
The SWEEP COUNT softkey activates the entry of the number of sweeps
used for averaging. The allowed range of values is 0 to 32767 and the
following should be observed:
• Sweep Count = 0 means running averaging
• Sweep Count = 1 means no averaging being carried out
• Sweep Count > 1 means averaging over the selected number of sweeps;
in the continuous sweep mode averaging is performed until the set
number of sweeps is attained and is then continued as running averaging.
The default setting is running averaging (Sweep Count = 0). The number of
sweeps used for averaging is the same for all active traces in the selected
diagram.
Note:
The setting of the sweep count in the trace menu is equivalent to
the setting in the sweep menu.
IEC/IEEE-bus command SWE:COUN 64
DETECTOR
TRACE
MATH
See following Section "Selection of Detector"
See following Section "Mathematical Functions for Traces"
TRACE - NEXT menu
MIN HOLD
The MIN HOLD softkey activates the min peak detector. R&S FMU saves for
each sweep the smallest of the previously stored/currently measured values
in the trace memory. The detector is automatically set to MIN PEAK. In this
way, the minimum value of a signal can be determined over several sweeps.
This function is useful eg for making an unmodulated carrier in a composite
signal visible. Noise, interference signals or modulated signals are
suppressed by the min hold function whereas a CW signal is recognized by
its constant level.
Pressing the MIN HOLD softkey again clears the trace memory and restarts
the min hold function.
IEC/IEEE-bus command DISP:WIND:TRAC:MODE MINH
1303.3545.12
4.56
E-1
R&S FMU
HOLD CONT
ON OFF
Selection and Setting of Traces – TRACE Key
The HOLD CONT softkey defines whether the traces in min hold and max
hold mode are reset after some specific parameter changes.
OFF The traces are reset after some definite parameter changes (default)
ON This mechanism is switched off.
In general, parameter changes require a restart of the measurement before
results are evaluated (e. g. with markers). For those changes that are known
to require a new measurement (e. g. modification of the span), the trace is
automatically reset so that erroneous evaluations of previous results are
avoided.
This mechanism can be switched off for those exceptional cases where the
described behavior is unwelcome.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
:DISP:WIND:TRAC:MODE:HCON ON|OFF
AVG MODE
LOG
LIN
The AVG MODE LOG/LIN softkey selects logarithmic or linear averaging for
the logarithmic level display mode.
At the same time the difference calculation is switched between linear and
logarithmic in submenu TRACE MATH.
IEC/IEEE-bus command CALC:MATH:AVER:MODE LIN
With logarithmic averaging, the dB values of the display voltage are averaged
or substracted from each other with trace mathematical functions. With linear
averaging the level values in dB are converted into linear voltages or powers
prior to averaging. Voltage or power values are averaged or offset against
each other and reconverted into level values.
For stationary signals the two methods yield the same result.
Logarithmic averaging or offsetting is recommended if sinewave signals are
to be clearly visible against noise since with this type of averaging noise
suppression is improved while the sinewave signals remain unchanged.
For noise or pseudo-noise signals the positive peak amplitudes are
decreased in logarithmic averaging due the characteristic involved and the
negative peak values are increased relative to the average value. If the
distorted amplitude distribution is averaged, a value is obtained that is smaller
than the actual average value. The difference is -2.5 dB.
Amplitude
Amplitude distribution
(without averaging)
2.5 dB
Amplitude distribution
(after averaging)
Probability distribution
1303.3545.12
4.57
E-1
Selection and Setting of Traces – TRACE Key
R&S FMU
This low average value is usually corrected in noise power measurements by
a +2.5 dB addition.
The R&S FMU offers the selection of linear averaging. The trace data are
delogarithmized prior to averaging, then averaged and logarithmized again for
display on the screen. The average value is always correctly displayed
irrespective of the signal characteristic.
ASCII FILE
EXPORT
The ASCII FILE EXPORT softkey stores the active trace in ASCII format on a
floppy disk.
IEC/IEEE command
FORM ASC;
MMEM:STOR:TRAC 1,'TRACE.DAT'
The file consists of the header containing important scaling parameters and a
data section containing the trace data.
The data of the file header consist of three columns, each separated by a
semicolon:
parameter name; numeric value; basic unit
The data section starts with the keyword " Trace <n> " (<n> = number of
stored trace), followed by the measured data in one or several columns
(depending on measurement) which are also separated by a semicolon.
This format can be read in from spreadsheet calculation programs, eg MSExcel. It is necessary to define ';' as a separator.
Note:
1303.3545.12
Different language versions of evaluation programs may require a
different handling of the decimal point. It is therefore possible to
select between separators '.' (decimal point) and ',' (comma) using
softkey DECIM SEP.
4.58
E-1
R&S FMU
Selection and Setting of Traces – TRACE Key
Example:
File header
File contents
Description
Type;R&S FMU36;
Version;1.00;
Date;01.Jul 2006;
Mode;Spectrum;
Center Freq;55000;Hz
Freq Offset;0;Hz
Span;90000;Hz
Instrument model
Firmware version
Date of data set storage
Instrument mode
Center frequency
Frequency offset
Frequency range (0 Hz with zero span and statistics
measurements)
Scaling of x axis linear (LIN) or logarithmic (LOG)
Start/stop of the display range.
Unit:
Hz for span > 0, s for span = 0,
dBm/dB for statistics measurements
x-Axis;LIN;
Start;10000;Hz
Stop;100000;Hz
Level Range;100;dB
Reference level
Level offset
Position of reference level referred to diagram limits
(0% = lower edge)
Scaling of y axis linear (LIN) or logarithmic (LOG)
Display range in in y direction. Unit: dB with x axis LOG,
% with x axis LIN
RBW;100000;Hz
Resolution bandwidth
SWT;0.005;s
Trace Mode;AVERAGE;
Sweep time
Display mode of trace:
CLR/WRITE,AVERAGE,MAXHOLD,MINHOLD
Detector set:
AUTOPEAK,MAXPEAK,MINPEAK,AVERAGE,
RMS,SAMPLE
Number of sweeps set
Ref.Level;-20;dBm
Level Offset;0;dB
Ref Position;75;%
y-Axis;LOG;
Detector;SAMPLE;
Sweep Count;20;
Data section of the file
Trace 1:;;
x-Unit;Hz;
Selected trace
Unit of x values:
Hz with span > 0; s with span = 0;
dBm/dB with statistics measurements
Unit of y values:
dB*/V/A/W depending on the selected unit with y axis
LOG or % with y axis LIN
y-Unit;dBm;
Values; 625;
Number of test points
Measured values:
<x value>, <y1>, <y2>
<y2> being available only with detector AUTOPEAK and
containing in this case the smallest of the two measured
values for a test point.
10000;-10.3;-15.7
10180;-11.5;-16.9
10360;-12.0;-17.4
...;...;
DECIM SEP
.
,
The DECIM SEP softkey selects the decimal separator between '.' (decimal
point) and ',' (comma) with floating-point numerals for the function ASCII FILE
EXPORT.
With the selection of the decimal separator different language versions of
evaluation programs (eg MS-Excel) can be supported.
IEC/IEEE-bus command FORM:DEXP:DSEP POIN
COPY TRACE
The COPY TRACE softkey copies the screen contents of the current trace into
another trace memory. The desired memory is selected by entering the number
1, 2 or 3.
Upon copying, the contents of the selected memory is overwritten and the new
contents displayed in view mode.
IEC/IEEE-bus command TRAC:COPY TRACE1,TRACE2
1303.3545.12
4.59
E-1
Selection and Setting of Traces – TRACE Key
R&S FMU
Selection of Detector
The detectors of the R&S FMU are implemented as pure digital devices. The detectors available are the
peak detectors which determine the maximum and/or the minimum value from a number of samples,
the rms detector which measures the power within a pixel, the average, the quasipeak and the sample
detector. The sample detector routes through the sampled data without any modification or performs a
data reduction by suppressing measured values that cannot be displayed.
The peak detectors compare the current level value with the maximum or minimum level from the previously
sampled data. When the number of samples defined by the instrument setting is reached, the samples are
combined in displayable pixels. Each of the 625 pixels of the display thus represents 1/625 of the sweep
range and contains all single measurements (frequency samples) in this subrange in compressed form. For
each trace display mode an optimized detector is selected automatically. Since peak detectors and sample
detector are connected in parallel, a single sweep is sufficient for collecting all detector values for 3 traces.
Peak detectors
(MAX PEAK and MIN PEAK)
Peak detectors are implemented by digital comparators. They determine
the largest of all positive (max peak) or the smallest of all negative (min
peak) peak values of the levels measured at the individual frequencies
which are displayed in one of the 625 pixels. This procedure is repeated
for each pixel so that for wide frequency spans and despite the limited
resolution of the display a large number of measurements can be taken
into consideration for the display of the spectrum.
Autopeak detector
The AUTOPEAK detector combines the two peak detectors. The max
peak detector and the min peak detector simultaneously determine the
maximum and the minimum level within a displayed testpoint and
display it as a single measured value. The maximum and minimum
levels within a frequency point are connected by a vertical line.
Sample detector
The SAMPLE detector routes through the sampled data without any
further evaluation and either displays them directly or, for reasons of
speed in case of short sweep times, first writes them into a memory and
processes them subsequently.
There is no data reduction, ie no summing up of measured values of
neighbouring frequencies or time samples. If during a frequency sweep
more measured values are obtained than can be displayed, measured
values will be lost. This means that discrete signals might be lost.
The sample detector therefore can only be recommended for a span-toresolution bandwidth ratio of up to approx. 250 in order to ensure that no
signal will be suppressed (example: span 1 MHz, -> min. bandwidth 5 kHz).
RMS detector
The RMS detector forms the rms value of the measured values within a
pixel.
The sampled linear values are squared, summed and the sum is divided
by the number of samples (= root mean square). For logarithmic display
the logarithm is formed from the square sum. For linear display the root
mean square value is displayed. Each pixel thus corresponds to the
power of the measured values summed up in the pixel.
The rms detector supplies the power of the signal irrespective of the
waveform (CW carrier, modulated carrier, white noise or impulsive
signal). Correction factors as needed for other detectors for measuring
the power of the different signal classes are not required.
1303.3545.12
4.60
E-1
R&S FMU
Selection and Setting of Traces – TRACE Key
Average detector
The average detector forms the average value of the measured values
within a pixel.
The sampled linear values are summed up and the sum is divided by
the number of samples (= linear average value). For logarithmic display
the logarithm is formed from the average value. For linear display the
average value is displayed. Each pixel thus corresponds to the average
of the measured values summed up in the pixel.
The average detector supplies the average value of the signal
irrespective of the waveform (CW carrier, modulated carrier, white noise
or impulsive signal).
TRACE-DETECTOR submenu
DETECTOR
AUTO
SELECT
DETECTOR
AUTOPEAK
DETECTOR
MAX PEAK
DETECTOR
MIN PEAK
DETECTOR
SAMPLE
The DETECTOR softkey opens a submenu for selecting the
detector for the selected trace. The softkey is highlighted if the
detector is not selected with AUTO SELECT.
The detector can be selected independently for each trace. The
AUTO SELECT mode selects the optimum detector for each
display mode of the trace (Clear/Write, Max Hold or Min Hold).
With split-screen FFT Analyzer diagrams, the selected detector
always applies to both diagrams.
The softkeys for the detectors are mutually exclusive selection
keys.
DETECTOR
RMS
DETECTOR
AVERAGE
AUTO
SELECT
The AUTO SELECT softkey (= default setting) selects the
optimum detector for the set display mode of the trace
(Clear/Write, Max Hold and Min Hold) .
Trace display
Clear/Write
Average
Max Hold
Min Hold
Detector
Auto Peak
Sample
Max Peak
Min Peak
The detector activated for the specific trace is identified in the
respective trace display field as follows:
Detector
Auto Peak
Max Peak
Min Peak
Average
RMS
Sample
AP
PK
MI
AV
RM
SA
IEC/IEEE-bus command DET:AUTO ON
1303.3545.12
4.61
E-1
Selection and Setting of Traces – TRACE Key
DETECTOR
AUTOPEAK
R&S FMU
The DETECTOR AUTOPEAK softkey activates the autopeak
detector.
IEC/IEEE-bus command DET APE
DETECTOR
MAX PEAK
The DETECTOR MAX PEAK softkey activates the max peak
detector. It is recommended for measurement of impulsive
signals.
IEC/IEEE-bus command DET POS
DETECTOR
MIN PEAK
The DETECTOR MIN PEAK softkey activates the min peak
detector.
IEC/IEEE-bus command DET NEG
DETECTOR
SAMPLE
The DETECTOR SAMPLE softkey activates the sample
detector.
It is used for measuring uncorrelated signals such as noise.
The power can be determined with the aid of fixed correction
factors.
IEC/IEEE-bus command DET SAMP
DETECTOR
RMS
The DETECTOR RMS softkey activates the rms detector.
The rms detector supplies the power of the signal independent
of the waveform. For this effect the root mean square of all
sampled level values is formed during the sweep of a pixel. The
sweep time thus determines the number of averaged values and
with increasing sweep time better averaging is obtained. The rms
detector is thus an alternative for averaging over several sweeps
in the time domain (see TRACE AVERAGE).
IEC/IEEE-bus command DET RMS
DETECTOR
AVERAGE
The DETECTOR AVERAGE softkey activates the average
detector.
In contrast to the rms detector, the average detector supplies
the linear average of all sampled level values during the sweep
of a pixel.
The same relations as for the rms detector apply (see above).
IEC/IEEE-bus command DET AVER
1303.3545.12
4.62
E-1
R&S FMU
Selection and Setting of Traces – TRACE Key
Mathematical Functions for Traces
TRACE 1-TRACE MATH submenu:
TRACE
MATH
TRACE MATH
T1-T2->T1
The TRACE MATH softkey opens a submenu in which the
difference between the selected trace to trace 1 is calculated.
The softkey is highlighted if a math function is activated.
T1-T3->T1
TRACE
POSITION
REF-T1
->T1
TRACE MATH
OFF
TRACE MATH
T1-T2->T1
T1-T3->T1
The T1-T2 and T1-T3 softkeys subtract the corresponding
traces. The result displayed is referred to the zero point
defined by TRACE POSITION.
To indicate that the trace has been obtained by subtraction,
the difference "1 - 2" or "1 - 3" is indicated on the trace info of
trace 1 and in the TRACE main menu the TRACE MATH
softkey is highlighted.
IEC/IEEE-bus command CALC:MATH (TRACE1–TRACE2)
CALC:MATH (TRACE1–TRACE3)
TRACE
POSITION
The TRACE POSITION softkey activates the entry of the
trace position for 0 difference. The position is stated in % of
the diagram height.
The range of values extends from -100% to +200%
IEC/IEEE-bus command DISP:MATH:POS 50PCT
TRACE MATH
OFF
The TRACE MATH OFF softkey switches the math function
off.
IEC/IEEE-bus command CALC:MATH:STAT OFF
1303.3545.12
4.63
E-1
Correction Data Acquisition of R&S FMU – CAL Key
R&S FMU
Correction Data Acquisition of R&S FMU – CAL Key
The R&S FMU obtains its high measurement accuracy through its inbuilt self-alignment method.
The correction data and characteristics required for the alignment are determined by comparison of the
results at different settings with the known characteristics of the high-precision calibration signal source
of R&S FMU . The correction data are then available in the instrument as a file and can be displayed by
means of the CAL RESULTS softkey.
For service purposes the use of correction data can be deactivated by means of the CAL CORR
ON/OFF softkey. If the correction data recording is aborted, the last complete correction data set is
restored.
Due to its 1 MR input impedance, the R&S FMU is ideally suited for measurements performed with highimpedance probes. The calibration signal source can be switched to the PROBE CAL and
PROBE CAL BNC connectors. Probes plugged into these connectors can be calibrated so that the
high measurement accuracy of the R&S FMU is directly transferred to the tip of the probe.
Note:
The term "Calibration" formerly used for the integrated self alignment was often mistaken
for the "true" calibration of the instrument at the test set in production and in service. It is
therefore no longer used although it appears in the abbreviated form in the name of keys
("CAL...").
CAL menu:
The CAL key opens a menu with the available functions for recording, displaying and activating the data
for self alignment and probe calibration.
CAL
PROBE CAL
PROBE DATA
SELECT
PROBE CORR
ON
OFF
SORT BY
NAME
DATE
SORT BY
NAME
DATE
PROBE CAL
RESULTS
PROBE CAL
START
PROBE DATA
RENAME
CAL TOTAL
PROBE COMP
ON
OFF
PROBE DATA
DELETE
CAL ABORT
GAIN&OFFS
ON
OFF
PROBE DATA
DELETE ALL
PROBE DATA
SELECT
SETUP
ON
CAL CORR
OFF
CAL RESULTS
PAGE UP
PAGE DOWN
1303.3545.12
FREQ RESP
ON
OFF
I + J*Q
IQ PATH
( I ONLY)
PROBE CAL
DC
I ONLY
IQ INPUT
50
1M
PROBE CAL
PULSE
Q ONLY
BALANCED
ON
OFF
PROBE CAL
COMP
4.64
E-1
R&S FMU
Correction Data Acquisition of R&S FMU – CAL Key
The PROBE CAL softkey opens a submenu for setting and performing of
probe calibrations (see page 4.68).
The PROBE CORR ON/OFF softkey switches the probe calibration data
on/off.
When set to ON, the enhancement label PRB is displayed on the screen to
indicate that Probe Correction Data are used.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
PROB:STAT ON
The PROBE CAL RESULTS softkey calls the PROBE CALIBRATION
RESULTS table, which shows the correction data found during calibration.
Es werden die Kalibrierwerte angezeigt die gerade benutzt werden. Es
können die Werte aus der zuletzt durchgeführten Probe Kalibrierung sein,
oder gespeicherte Daten aus einer früheren Kalibrierung (siehe hierzu softkey
PROBE DATA SELECT).
The CALIBRATION RESULTS table contains the following information:
– list of found correction values
- status of each alignement process
The status has the following meaning:
PASSED
calibration successful without any restrictions
FAILED
deviations of correction value too large, no correction was
possible. The found correction data are not valid.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: PROB:RES?
1303.3545.12
4.65
E-1
Correction Data Acquisition of R&S FMU – CAL Key
CAL
TOTAL
R&S FMU
The CAL TOTAL softkey starts the recording of correction data of the
instrument (selfalignment process).
If the correction data recording has failed or if the correction values are
deactivated (CAL CORR = OFF softkey), the status field indicates
UNCAL .
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
CAL
ABORT
The CAL ABORT softkey interrupts the recording of correction data and
restores the last complete correction data set.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
CAL CORR
ON
OFF
CAL:ABOR
The CAL CORR ON/OFF softkey switches the calibration data on/off.
ON
The status message depends upon the results of the total
calibration.
OFF
The message UNCAL appears in the status line.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
1303.3545.12
*CAL?
4.66
CAL:STAT ON
E-1
R&S FMU
CAL
RESULTS
Correction Data Acquisition of R&S FMU – CAL Key
The CAL RESULTS softkey calls the CALIBRATION RESULTS table, which
shows the correction data found during calibration.
The CALIBRATION RESULTS table contains the following information:
– date and time of last record of correction values
– overall results of correction value record
– list of found correction values according to function/module
The results have the following meaning:
PASSED
calibration successful without any restrictions
CHECK
deviation of correction value larger than expected, correction
could however be performed
FAILED
deviations of correction value too large, no correction was
possible. The found correction data are not valid.
ABORTED
calibration aborted
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
PAGE UP
CAL:RES?
The softkeys PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN scroll one page forward or
backward in the CALIBRATION RESULTS table.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: --
PAGE DOWN
1303.3545.12
4.67
E-1
Correction Data Acquisition of R&S FMU – CAL Key
R&S FMU
Probe Calibration
The PROBE DATA SELECT softkey calls the PROBE CALIBRATION DATA
table, which shows previously stored files that contain probe calibration
values.
The PROBE CAL DATA table contains the following information:
– filename
- date and time of calibration
- I/Q Input configuration
- calibration options
- calibration result
The currently active data set is indicated by a checkmark. The selection bar is
set to the currently selected data set or the first entry by default. The data set
is selected by marking with the selection bar (by using the rotary knob or
cursor keys) and the ENTER key.
Only files that match the current configuration of the I/Q input (ímpedance,
BAL/UNBAL, path e.g. I only) are displayed.
The extent of the calibration is displayed under OPTIONS:
Freq = nur Frequenzgang
Gain = nur Verstärkung/Dämpfung und Offset
Gain Freq = Frequenzgang, Verstärkung/Dämpfung und Offset
RESULT
Passed: This data set stands for a successful calilbration.
Failed: This data set stands for a failed calibration and should not be
activated, since this may lead to incorrect measurement results.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: PROB:CAT?
The SORT BY NAME/DATE selects the sorting criterion for the PROBE CAL
DATA table.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
1303.3545.12
4.68
--
E-1
R&S FMU
Correction Data Acquisition of R&S FMU – CAL Key
The PROBE CAL START softkey starts the probe calibration.
Important: Before starting the probe calibration, the following must be done:
Set the calibration options (PROBE COMP, GAIN&OFFS, FREQ RESP
softkeys)
Set the configuration of the I/Q input (IQ PATH, I/Q INPUT, BALANCED
softkeys)
Connect probes at all active inputs (indicated by LEDs). The active inputs
are defined by the IQ PATH and BALANCED softkeys. All probes must
have the same nominal attenuation (e.g. 10:1).
Since all mentioned softkeys are available in the PROBE CAL menu, you can
perform all presettings of the probe calibration without having to change the
menu.
After starting the probe calibration, you will be requested to connect the
probes to the calibration source ( PROBE CAL and PROBE CAL BNC
connectors).
When prompted to do so, plug the I probe into the PROBE CAL connector
(use BNC adapter) and also insert the I
connector at BALANCED = ON.
probe into the PROBE CAL
Then calibrate the probes of the Q input in the same way.
If you acknowledge a request for probe connection with NO, the calibration
will be stopped and has to be restarted, if necessary.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
CAL:PROB
By using the PROBE COMP ON/OFF softkey, you can select the Probe
Compensation option for the following probe calibration.
Probe compensation is the mechanical adjustment (trimming capacitor) of
the probe to the input capacitance of the baseband input. The probe is
adjusted in the same way as oscilloscopes, usually with a 1 kHz squarewave
signal.
Usually it is sufficient to adjust the probes to the R&S FMU once. But then
the probes must not be exchanged, not even between the different inputs,
since there may be little differences in the input capacitance.
In case of doubt, you should therefore select PROBE COMP = ON; then you
can check whether the probes have been adjusted correctly and readjust
them, if necessary.
Important: The frequency response correction (see FREQ RESP softkey)
cannot correct the error that occurs due to unadjusted PROBE
COMPENSATION, since a faulty adjustment of the PROBE
COMPENSATION causes a step in the frequency response at
approx. 1 kHz.
Due to the high sampling rate of 81.6 MHz, the digital equalizer
filter, which levels the frequency response up to 36 MHz, cannot
equalize a ripple in the kHz range.
If PROBE COMP is set to ON, then after the probe calibration (PROBE CAL
1303.3545.12
4.69
E-1
Correction Data Acquisition of R&S FMU – CAL Key
R&S FMU
START softkey) is started, the 1 kHz squarewave signal is switched to the
PROBE CAL / PROBE CAL BNC connectors and a suitable time domain
setup is automatically set on the R&S FMU. If you have no BNC adapter at
your disposal at the moment, you can also connect the probe at the pin
labeled PROBE COMPENSATION by using a terminal clamp. But then it is
not possible to calibrate gain/offset or frequency response!
The R&S FMU automatically sets the scaling in such a way that the top of
the squarewave signal is located at the center of the screen and is displayed
with 20 mV/DIV when zoomed. When mapping the entire signal, such an
exact adjustment would not be possible, since due to the pixel resolution of
the screen it would be very difficult to obtain an adjustment accuracy of 1 %.
Adjust Probes to optimum square wave response (see below figures)!
1303.3545.12
Fig. 4-7
UNDER COMPENSATED
Fig. 4-8
OPTIMUM
Fig. 4-9
OVER COMPENSATED
4.70
E-1
R&S FMU
Correction Data Acquisition of R&S FMU – CAL Key
Note:
The probes can also be adjusted at any time outside the probe
calibration. The 1 kHz squarewave signal is constantly applied
at the pins labeled PROBE COMPENSATION. But then you
must manually perform all settings that are necessary for
adequate display of the signal on the R&S FMU .
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
CAL:PROB:COMP ON
By using the GAIN&OFFS ON/OFF softkey, you can select the Gain and
Offset Calibration option for the subsequent probe calibration.
DC offset and gain errors (at DC) of the overall system (R&S FMU and
probe) are measured and saved for later correction.
Admissible range for the gain calibration: 1 to 0.01 nominal.
The gain of the probe must not be >1 (which could be the case with an active
probe). The maximum gain must not be greater than 40 dB (100:1 probe).
If the admissible range is exceeded, the status of the calibration will be
FAILED.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
CAL:PROB:GAIN ON
By using the FREQ RESP ON/OFF softkey, you can select the Frequency
Response Calibration option for the subsequent probe calibration.
The frequency response of the overall system (R&S FMU and probe) is
measured and saved for later correction.
Probes that up to 36 MHz have a frequency response greater than 6 dB,
cannot be calibrated. If the correctable frequency response is exceeded
(>6 dB), the status of the calibration will be FAILED.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
CAL:PROB:FRES ON
The IQ PATH softkey opens a submenu. The way in which the two input
paths are to be interpreted can be defined in this submenu.
The color of one of the three softkeys in the submenu changes to indicate
which one is active. The IQ PATH softkey also indicates the selected
function.
I+J*Q
The I+J*Q softkey causes the FFT Analyzer to regard the signals at the I and
Q input as components of a complex signal. This is the standard setting for
the analysis of signals with complex modulation.
IEC/IEEE bus command: :INP:IQ:TYPE IJQ
I ONLY
The I ONLY softkey causes the FFT Analyzer to regard the signal at the I
input as a single, real signal. The signal at the Q input is ignored.
This setting should be selected if, for example, a signal at a low intermediate
frequency is connected to the I input.
IEC/IEEE bus command: :INP:IQ:TYPE I
Q ONLY
The Q ONLY softkey causes the FFT Analyzer to regard the signal at the Q
input as a single, real signal. The signal at the I input is ignored.
This setting should be selected if, for example, a signal at a low intermediate
frequency is connected to the Q input.
IEC/IEEE bus command: :INP:IQ:TYPE Q
1303.3545.12
4.71
E-1
Correction Data Acquisition of R&S FMU – CAL Key
R&S FMU
The IQ INPUT 50R / 1MI softkey is used to toggle the input impedance of
the baseband inputs. The setting has the same effect on all inputs.
IEC/IEEE bus command: :INP:IQ:IMP LOW
BALANCED
OFF
ON
The BALANCED ON / OFF softkey is used to toggle the measurement mode
of the baseband inputs.
ON switches to balanced (differential) inputs; OFF switches to groundreferenced inputs. The setting has the same effect on both (I and Q) inputs.
IEC/IEEE bus command: :INP:IQ:BAL:STAT ON
1303.3545.12
4.72
E-1
R&S FMU
Correction Data Acquisition of R&S FMU – CAL Key
PROBE CAL – NEXT menu:
The NEXT key opens a menu for administrating the saved probe calibration files and for manually
setting the calibration signals.
The PROBE DATA SELECT softkey calls the PROBE CALIBRATION DATA
table, which shows previously stored files that contain probe calibration values.
For details see PROBE CAL menu.
IEC/IEEE bus command:
:PROB:SEL
The SORT BY NAME/DATE softkey selects the sorting criterion for the PROBE
CAL DATA table.
IEC/IEEE bus command:
---
The PROBE DATA RENAME softkey allows you to rename the probe calibration
data files.
IEC/IEEE bus command:
:PROB:MOVE
The PROBE DATA DELETE softkey allows you to delete a selected probe
calibration data file.
The currently active file (indicated by a checkmark) cannot be deleted.
IEC/IEEE bus command:
:PROB:DEL
The PROBE DATA DELETE ALL softkey allows you to delete all probe
calibration data files. The currently active file (indicated by a checkmark) is not
deleted.
IEC/IEEE bus command:
---
By using the PROBE CAL DC softkey, you can switch on the probe calibration
source with DC voltage for service purposes (e.g. performance test). This
softkey opens a selection list with voltages between 0 V and 2.4 V. The voltage
is applied at the PROBE CAL BNC connector.
Identical negative voltage is applied at the PROBE CAL BNC connector.
IEC/IEEE bus command:
:PROB:ADJ:DC
:PROB:ADJ:MODE DC
By using the PROBE CAL PULSE softkey, you can switch on the probe
calibration source with pulse signal for service purposes (e.g. performance test).
This softkey opens a selection list with frequencies between 10 kHz and 8 MHz.
An 8 ns pulse ís generated with the set repetition frequency. The pulse voltage
applied at the PROBE CAL BNC connector is positive and at the PROBE CAL
connector negative.
IEC/IEEE bus command:
:PROB:ADJ:PULS
:PROB:ADJ:MODE PULS
By using the PROBE CAL COMP softkey, you can switch on the 1 kHz
squarewave signal for compensating probes. The signal applied at both BNC
connectors PROBE CAL and PROBE CAL is positive. However, both outputs
are inverted to each other.
IEC/IEEE bus command:
1303.3545.12
:PROB:ADJ:MODE COMP
4.73
E-1
Markers and Delta Markers – MKR Key
R&S FMU
Markers and Delta Markers – MKR Key
The markers are used for marking points on traces, reading out measurement results and for quickly
selecting a display section. R&S FMU provides four markers per display window. All markers can be
used either as markers or delta markers. The availability of marker functions depends on whether the
measurement is performed in the frequency, time or level domain.
The marker that can be moved by the user is defined in the following as the active marker.
Examples of marker display:
Marker
1
Active marker
3
Temporary marker
T1
2
Delta marker
Temporary markers are used in addition to the markers and delta markers to evaluate the measurement
results. They disappear when the associated function is deactivated.
The measurement results of the active marker (also called marker values) are displayed in the marker
field. The marker info field at the upper right of the display shows the marker location (here, frequency),
the level and the currently selected trace [T1].
The MKR key calls a menu that contains all marker and delta marker standard functions. If no marker is
active, MARKER 1 will be enabled and a peak search on the trace carried out. Otherwise, the data
entry for the marker activated last is opened.
MKR menu:
1303.3545.12
4.74
E-1
R&S FMU
MARKER 1
MARKER 4
MA RKER
NORM DE LTA
Markers and Delta Markers – MKR Key
The MARKER 1/2/3/4 .softkey selects the corresponding marker and
activates it.
MARKER 1 is always the normal marker. After they have been switched
on, MARKERS 2 to 4 are delta markers that refer to MARKER 1. These
markers can be converted into markers with absolute value display by
means of the MARKER NORM DELTA softkey. When MARKER 1 is the
active marker, pressing the MARKER NORM DELTA softkey switches on
an additional delta marker.
Pressing the MARKER 1 to 4 softkey again switches off the selected
marker.
Example:
[PRESET]
is set to the default setting.
[MKR]
On calling the menu, MARKER 1 is switched on ('1'
highlighted in the softkey) and positioned on the
maximum value of the trace. It is a normal marker and
the MARKER NORMAL softkey is highlighted.
[MARKER 2]
MARKER 2 is switched on ('2' highlighted in the softkey).
It is automatically defined as a delta marker on
switching
on
so
the
DELTA
is
is
highlighted on softkey MARKER NORM DELTA. The
frequency and level of MARKER 2 with reference to
MARKER 1 are output in the marker info field.
[MARKER
NORM DELTA]
[MARKER 2]
The MARKER NORM DELTA softkey is highlighted.
MARKER 2 becomes a normal marker. The frequency
and level of MARKER 2 are output as absolute values in
the marker info field.
MARKER 2 is switched off. MARKER 1 is the active
marker for entry. The frequency and level of MARKER 1
are output in the marker info field.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
CALC:MARK ON;
CALC:MARK:X <value>;
CALC:MARK:Y?
CALC:DELT ON;
CALC:DELT:MODE ABS|REL
CALC:DELT:X <value>;
CALC:DELT:X:REL?
CALC:DELT:Y?
When several traces are being displayed, the marker is set to the maximum value (peak) of the active
trace which has the lowest number (1 to 3). In case a marker is already located there, it will be set to
the frequency of the next lowest level (next peak).
When the split-screen display mode is active, the marker will be placed in the active window. A marker
can only be enabled when at least one trace in the corresponding window is visible.
In the split-screen diagrams REAL IMAG, VOLTAGE and MAGNITUDE PHASE it is not possible to
move markers separately on each trace; these markers are in fact marker pairs which are coupled to
each other. The values of both markers are displayed, however. The marker always operates (search
for peak, etc) in the diagram currently selected by the SCREEN A / SCREEN B hotkey; the other
marker automatically moves in sync.
1303.3545.12
4.75
E-1
Markers and Delta Markers – MKR Key
R&S FMU
If a trace is turned off, the corresponding markers and marker functions are also deactivated. If the
trace is switched on again (VIEW, CLR/WRITE;..), the markers along with coupled functions will be
restored to their original positions provided the markers have not been used on another trace.
LINK MKR1
AND DELTA1
With the softkey LINK MKR1 AND DELTA1 the delta marker1 can be linked
to marker1, so if the x-axis value of the marker1 is changed the delta
marker1 will follow on the same x-position. The link is default off, and can be
switched on.
Example for setup:
•
PRESET
•
TRACE | MAX HOLD
•
TRACE | SELECT TRACE | 2 | AVERAGE
•
MKR (Switches marker1 on)
•
MARKER NORM DELTA | DELTA (Delta Marker 1 ON)
•
MKR-> | MKR->TRACE | 2
•
LINK MKR1 AND DELTA1
Now select the Marker1 (by switching MARKER1 from DELTA back to
NORM) and when changing the x-axis value (by knob wheel or UP/DOWN
keys) the delta marker1 will follow automatically.
The delta marker1 x-value can not be changed away from 0 as long as the
link functionality is active.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
1303.3545.12
4.76
CALC:DELT1:LINK ON
E-1
R&S FMU
Markers and Delta Markers – MKR Key
REF FIXED
REFERENCE
FIXED
REF FIXED
ON
OFF
REF POINT
LEVEL
REF POINT
LVL OFFSET
REF POINT
FREQUENCY
REF POINT
TIME
OFF
The REFERENCE FIXED softkey defines the level and the
frequency or time of MARKER 1 as a reference for one or several
delta markers. The measured values for one or several
markers displayed in the marker info field are derived from this
reference point instead of the current values of the reference
marker (MARKER 1).
On actuating the softkey, reference fixed is switched on and thus,
the level value and the frequency, time or x-level value of MARKER
1 immediately become the reference point.
Additionally, the REFERENCE FIXED softkey opens the submenu
where it is possible to determine manually a reference point with
level and frequency, time or x-axis level, to define a level offset or
deactivate the reference point.
The REFERENCE FIXED function is useful for the measurement of
the harmonic suppression at small span (fundamental not
represented).
The REFERENCE FIXED softkey is available in Frequency Domain
MAGNITUDE and Time Domain MAGNITUDE.
REF FIXED
ON
OFF
The REF FXD ON/OFF softkey switches on or off the relative
measurement to a fixed reference value (REFERENCE POINT)
independent of the trace.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
REF POINT
LEVEL
CALC:DELT2:FUNC:FIX ON
The REF POINT LEVEL softkey enters a reference level
independent of the reference marker level. All relative level values
of the delta markers refer to this reference level.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
CALC:DELT2:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y -10dBm
REF POINT
LVL OFFSET
The REF POINT LVL OFFSET softkey specifies a level offset
relevant to the reference level. The relative level values of the delta
markers refer to the reference point level plus the level offset.
The level offset is set to 0 dB on enabling the REFERENCE FIXED
or PHASE NOISE function.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
CALC:DELT2:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y:OFFS 0dB
REF POINT
FREQUENCY
With the REF POINT FREQUENCY softkey a reference frequency
can be manually activated for the delta markers when the
REFERENCE FIXED or PHASE NOISE function is used.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
CALC:DELT2:FUNC:FIX:RPO:X 10.7MHz
1303.3545.12
4.77
E-1
Markers and Delta Markers – MKR Key
REF POINT
TIME
R&S FMU
The REF POINT TIME softkey activates the entry box for the input
of a reference time for the REFERENCE FIXED function in the time
domain (span = 0 Hz).
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
CALC:DELT2:FUNC:FIX:RPO:X 5MS
For phase noise measurement, input of reference time is not
possible.
The PEAK SEARCH softkey sets the fixed reference value
(REFERENCE POINT) to the peak of the trace.
Measurement example:
Small-span harmonics measurement to increase sensitivity
CW signal (eg 10 MHz, 0 dBm) with harmonics at the I input of R&S FMU.
[PRESET]
R&S FMU is set to the default setting.
[CENTER: 10 MHz]
The center frequency of R&S FMU is set to 10 MHz.
[SPAN: 1 MHz]
The span is set to 1 MHz.
[AMPT: 0 dBm]
The reference level is set to 0 dBm .
[MKR]
MARKER 1 is switched on ('1' highlighted in the softkey)
and set to the signal peak.
[MARKER 2]
MARKER 2 is switched on and automatically defined as
the delta marker (DELTA is highlighted on MARKER
NORM DELTA softkey).
[REFERENCE
FIXED]
ALL MARKER
OFF
The frequency and level of MARKER 1 are a reference for
the delta marker.
[CENTER: 20 MHz]
The center frequency is set to 20 MHz (= frequency of the
2nd harmonic). The reference level may have to be
reduced to see the 2nd harmonic from the noise. This
does not affect the reference level set with REFERENCE
FIXED.
[MKR->: PEAK]
The delta marker jumps to the 2nd harmonic of the signal.
The level spacing of the harmonic to the fundamental is
displayed in the marker info field.
The ALL MARKER OFF softkey switches off all markers (reference and delta
markers). It also switches off all functions and displays associated with the
markers/delta markers.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
1303.3545.12
:CALC:MARK:AOFF
4.78
E-1
R&S FMU
MRK
TRACE
Markers and Delta Markers – MKR Key
The MKR TRACE softkey places the marker on a new trace. The trace is selected
via a data entry field. Only those traces can be selected which are visible on the
screen in the same window.
Example:
Three traces are presented on the screen. The marker is always on Trace 1 on
switching on.
[MKR ->TRACE]
"2"<ENTER>
[MKR ->TRACE]
"3"<ENTER>
The marker jumps to Trace 2 but remains on the previous
frequency or time.
The marker jumps to Trace 3. '
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
:CALC:MARK1:TRAC 1
:CALC:DELT:TRAC 1
The MKR FILE EXPORT softkey saves the data of active markers to a file <
file_name >.
Example:
File content with 2 active markers in screen A:
Marker;1;T1
-25.87;dBm
19.920000000;GHz
Delta;2;T1
-21.90;dB
-5.920000000;GHz
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
DECIM SEP
.
,
By means of the DECIM SEP softkey, one can select between a decimal point (.)
and a comma (,) as decimal-point notation for the MKRI FILE EXPORT function.
Due to the possibility of selecting between different decimal-point notations,
different language versions of analysis programs (such as MS Excel) can be
supported.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
1303.3545.12
:MMEM:STOR:MARK 'C:\marker.txt'"
:FORM:DEXP:DSEP POIN
4.79
E-1
Marker Functions – MKR FCTN Key
R&S FMU
Marker Functions – MKR FCTN Key
The MKR FCTN menu offers further measurements with the markers:
- Measurement of noise density (NOISE MEAS softkey)
- Measurement of phase noise (PHASE NOISE softkey)
- Measurement of filter or signal bandwidth (N DB DOWN softkey)
On calling the menu, the entry for the last active marker is activated (SELECT MARKER softkey); if no
marker is activated, marker 1 is activated and a maximum search (PEAK softkey) is performed. The
marker can be set to the desired trace by means of MKR -> TRACE softkey.
Menu MKR FCTN:
SPAN
AMPT
MKR
MKR
FCTN
PH NOISE
ON
OFF
SELECT
MARKER
NEW
SEARCH
SORT MODE
FREQ LEVEL
PEAK
NOISE MEAS
REF POINT
LEVEL
REF POINT
LVL OFFSET
REF POINT
FREQUENCY
PHASE
NOISE
PEAK
EXCURSION
PEAK
SEARCH
AUTO PEAK
SEARCH
LEFT
LIMIT
N DB DOWN
PEAKFACT
SHAPE
LIST60:6
60:3
RIGHT
LIMIT
SIGNAL ID
THRESHOLD
MRK->TRACE
1303.3545.12
PEAK LIST
OFF
4.80
E-1
R&S FMU
Marker Functions – MKR FCTN Key
Activating the Markers
Menu MKR FCTN:
SELECT
MARKER
The SELECT MARKER softkey activates the numerical selection of the
marker in the data entry field. Delta marker 1 is selected by input of ' 0 '.
If the marker is switched off, then it is switched on and can be moved later
on.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
PEAK
CALC:MARK1 ON;
CALC:MARK1:X <value>;
CALC:MARK1:Y?
The PEAK softkey sets the active marker/delta marker to the peak of the
trace.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
CALC:MARK1:MAX
CALC:DELT1:MAX
Measurement of Noise Density
NOISE MEAS
The NOISE MEAS softkey switches the noise measurement for the active
marker on or off. The corresponding marker becomes the NORMAL
marker.
During noise measurement, the noise power density is measured at the
position of the marker. In the time domain magnitude mode, all points of
the trace are used to determine the noise power density. When
measurements are performed in the frequency domain magnitude mode,
two points to the right and left of the marker are used for the measurement
to obtain a stable result.
The noise power density is indicated in the marker field. With logarithmic
amplitude units dBm, dBpW, dBmV, dBmMV, dBMA the noise density is
output in dBm/Hz, dBpW/Hz, dBmV/Hz, dBMV/Hz, dBMA/Hz, i.e. as power,
voltage or current in 1 Hz bandwidth with reference to 1 mW, 1pW, 1mV,
1MV, 1MA. With linear amplitude units (V, A, W) the noise voltage density
is evaluated in nV/ Hz, the noise current density in pA/ Hz or the noise
power density in pW/Hz.
The following settings have to be made to ensure that the power density
measurement yields correct values:
Detector:
Sample or RMS
In the default setting, the R&S FMU uses the sample detector for the noise
function.
With the sample detector, the trace can additionally be set to AVERAGE to
stabilize the measured values. With RMS detector used, trace averaging
must not be used since in this case it produces too low noise levels which
cannot be corrected. Instead, the sweep time can be increased to obtain
stable measurement results (time domain only).
1303.3545.12
4.81
E-1
Marker Functions – MKR FCTN Key
R&S FMU
The R&S FMU uses the following correction factors to evaluate the noise
density from the marker level:
• Since the noise power is indicated with reference to 1 Hz bandwidth,
the bandwidth correction value is deducted from the marker level. It is
10 x lg (1 Hz/BW Noise), where BW Noise is the noise or power bandwidth of
the set resolution filter (RBW).
Sample detector:
• As a result of trace averaging, 1.05 dB is added to the marker level.
This is the difference between the average value and the RMS value of
white noise.
• With a logarithmic level axis, 1.45 dB is added additionally. Logarithmic
averaging is thus fully taken into account which yields a value that is
1.45 dB lower than that of linear averaging.
RMS detector:
• With the exception of bandwidth correction, no further corrections are
required for the RMS detector since it already indicates the power with
every point of the trace.
To allow a more stable noise display the adjacent (symmetric to the
measurement frequency) points of the trace are averaged.
In time domain mode, the measured values are averaged versus time
(after a sweep).
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
CALC:MARK:FUNC:NOIS ON;
CALC:MARK:FUNC:NOIS:RES?
Example: Measurement of inherent R&S FMU noise
[PRESET]
The R&S FMU is set to default setting.
[MARKER]
Marker 1 is switched on and set to the maximum value
of the displayed spectrum. Set marker to desired
frequency using the rotary knob.
[NOISE]
The R&S FMU switches the sample detector on. The
power density level of inherent noise is displayed in
dBm/Hz in the marker info field.
[TRACE AVERAGE]
With trace averaging activated, the
reading is more stable.
1303.3545.12
4.82
power density
E-1
R&S FMU
Marker Functions – MKR FCTN Key
Phase Noise Measurement
Menu MKR FCTN:
PHASE
NOISE
PH NOISE
ON
OFF
REF POINT
LEVEL
REF POINT
LVL OFFSET
REF POINT
FREQUENCY
PEAK
SEARCH
AUTO PEAK
SEARCH
SIGNAL ID
The PHASE NOISE softkey switches the PHASE NOISE
function on/off. Additionally, the softkey opens the submenu
for manually setting the reference point. The phase noise
measurement can be switched off in the submenu.
MARKER 1 (= reference marker) is used as a reference for the
phase noise measurement. The frequency and level of the
reference marker are used as fixed reference values, i.e. the
REFERENCE FIXED function is activated. After switching on
the phase noise measurement the reference level or the
center frequency can thus be set in a way that the carrier is
outside the displayed frequency range, or, for example, a
notch filter is switched on to suppress the carrier.
A noise power density measurement is carried out with the
delta marker or delta markers. This measurement corresponds
to the NOISE function in the MARKER menu (MKR). The
result of the phase noise measurement is the difference in
level between the reference point and the noise power density.
The following possibilities can be selected on switching on
PHASE NOISE:
1. No marker enabled:
[MKR FCTN]
MARKER 1 is enabled and set to peak.
[PHASE NOISE]
MARKER 1 becomes the reference
marker, MARKER 2 the delta marker;
frequency = frequency of the reference
marker. The delta marker is the active
marker, i.e. it can be moved with the
rollkey or adjusted by entering numerals.
The PHASE NOISE function is switched
on and the measured value is output.
2. Markers are enabled:
[MKR FCTN]
The previous marker configuration
remains unchanged.
[PHASE NOISE]
MARKER 1 becomes the reference
marker. If other markers are enabled,
they become delta markers and measure
the phase noise at their respective
positions.
If further markers are enabled during the phase noise
measurement, they automatically become delta markers and
measure the phase noise at their respective positions.
When the phase noise measurement is switched off, the
marker configuration remains unchanged and the delta
markers measure the relative level to the reference marker
(MARKER 1).
1303.3545.12
4.83
E-1
Marker Functions – MKR FCTN Key
R&S FMU
The PHASE NOISE function measures the noise power at the
delta markers referred to 1 Hz bandwidth. The sample detector
is automatically used. Correction factors to evaluate the noise
density from the marker level are automatically taken into
account.
To obtain stable results, two pixels on the right and the left of
the respective delta marker position are taken for the
measurement. The procedure for determining the noise power
is identical to the method used for the noise power
measurement (see NOISE softkey). The measured noise level
referred to 1 Hz bandwidth is subtracted from the carrier level
at the reference marker (MARKER 1). The measured values
are displayed in the delta marker field in dBc/Hz (= spacing in
dB of the noise power from the carrier level in 1 Hz
bandwidth).
If several delta markers are enabled, only the value read by
the active marker is shown in the marker field. If several delta
markers are active, their measurement results are shown in
the marker info field.
The reference value for the phase noise measurement can be
defined with REF POINT LEVEL, REF POINT FREQUENCY
and REF POINT LVL OFFSET to differ from that of the
reference marker.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
PH NOISE
ON
OFF
--
The PH NOISE ON/OFF softkey switches on/off the phase
noise measurement. Switching on is performed by means of
the PHASE NOISE softkey and is only necessary when the
phase noise measurement has been switched off in the
submenu.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: CALC:DELT1:FUNC:PNO ON
CALC:DELT1:FUNC:PNO:RES?
REF POINT
LEVEL
The REF POINT LEVEL softkey activates an entry box for
the input of a reference level other than the reference
marker level. The function is identical to that of the softkey
with the same name in the marker menu (MKR).
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
CALC:DELT1:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y -10d
REF POINT
LVL OFFSET
The REF POINT LVL OFFSET softkey activates an entry
box for the input of an additional level offset for the phase
noise calculation.
This level offset is set to 0 dB on when the REFERENCE
FIXED or PHASE NOISE function is enabled.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y:OFFS 10dB
1303.3545.12
4.84
E-1
R&S FMU
Marker Functions – MKR FCTN Key
REF POINT
FREQUENCY
The REF POINT FREQUENCY softkey activates an entry
box for the manual input of a reference frequency for the
REFERENCE FIXED or PHASE NOISE function.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
CALC:DELT1:FUNC:FIX:RPO:X 10.7MHz
PEAK
SEARCH
The PEAK SEARCH sets the reference point level for delta
marker 2 in the selected measurement window to the peak of
the selected trace.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:MAX
Measurement example:
The phase noise of a CW signal at 10 MHz with 0 dBm level is to be measured at
8 kHz from the carrier
[PRESET]
The R&S FMU is set to the default setting.
[CENTER: 10 MHz]
The center frequency is set to 10 MHz.
[SPAN: 20 kHz]
The span is set to 20 kHz.
[AMPT: 0 dBm]
The reference level is set to 0 dBm.
[MKR FCTN]
MARKER 1 is switched on and positioned at the
maximum of the displayed trace.
[PHASE NOISE:
8 kHz]
The phase noise measurement is switched on. The delta
marker is positioned on the main marker and the
measured phase noise value is displayed in the marker
info field. The sample detector is used. When the phase
noise measurement function is enabled, the entry of the
delta marker frequency is activated. It can be entered
directly.
AUTO PEAK
SEARCH
The phase noise AUTO PEAK SEARCH adds an automatic
peak search action for the reference fixed marker 1 at the end
of each particular sweep. This function may be used for
tracking of a drifting source whilst phase noise measurement.
The delta marker 2 which shows the phase noise
measurement result keeps the delta frequency value.
Therefore the phase noise measurement in a certain offset is
valid although the source is drifting. Only when the marker 2 is
reaching the border of the span the delta marker value is
adjusted to be within the span. Choose a larger span in such
situations.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: CALC:DELT:FUNC:PNO:AUTO ON
1303.3545.12
4.85
E-1
Marker Functions – MKR FCTN Key
R&S FMU
Measurement of the Filter or Signal Bandwidth
Menu MKR FCTN:
N dB DOWN
The N dB DOWN softkey activates the temporary markers T1 and T2 which
are n dB below the active reference marker. Marker T1 is placed to the left
and marker T2 at the right of the reference marker. The value n can be input
in a window.
The default setting is 3 dB.
Span > 0: The frequency spacing of the two temporary markers is indicated
in the marker info field.
Span = 0: The pulse width between the two temporary markers is indicated in
the marker info field.
If, for example, it is not possible to form the frequency spacing for the n dB
value because of the noise display, dashes are indicated instead of a
measured value.
If a negative value is entered than the markers are placed n dB above the
active reference marker. This is then a n dB up function which can be used
for notch filter measurements,
Note:
When the 3 dB bandwidths of the FFT-analyzer’s resolution
filters are measured in the Frequency Domain mode, the value
that is returned is not exactly the same as the value that was set
as the RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH. This is due to the fact that
the equivalent noise bandwidths are entered as the RBW in the
Frequency Domain mode in the FFT Analyzer.
The function is disabled in the following display modes:
• time domain – VOLTAGE
• frequency domain – REAL IMAG
• frequency domain MAG PHASE
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
1303.3545.12
4.86
CALC:MARK1:FUNC:NDBD:STAT ON
CALC:MARK1:FUNC:NDBD 3dB
CALC:MARK1:FUNC:NDBD:RES?
CALC:MARK1:FUNC:NDBD:FREQ? 'Span > 0
CALC:MARK1:FUNC:NDBD:TIME? 'Span = 0
E-1
R&S FMU
Marker Functions – MKR FCTN Key
Measurement of a Peak List
Menu MKR FCTN:
PEAK
LIST
NEW
SEARCH
SORT MODE
FREQ LEVEL
The PEAK LIST softkey allows the peak values of the trace to be
determined and entered in a list with 50 entries max. The order of
the entries is defined by the SORT MODE:
FREQ
sorting in ascending order of frequency values (see
screenshot); if span = 0, the entries are sorted in
ascending order of time values
LEVEL
sorting according to level
PEAK
EXCURSION
LEFT
LIMIT
RIGHT
LIMIT
THRESHOLD
PEAK LIST
OFF
The search range can be restricted by means of the LEFT LIMIT,
RIGHT LIMIT and THRESHOLD softkeys. The definition of the
peak values can be modified using the PEAK EXCURSION softkey.
The MKR->TRACE softkey in the main menu is used to select the
trace for searching peak values.
Opening the list performs a single search at the end of the sweep.
The NEW SEARCH softkey triggers a new sweep, determines the
peak values of the trace at the end of the sweep and enters them in
the list.
Use the PEAK LIST OFF key to delete the list from the screen.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands: INIT:CONT OFF;
CALC:MARK:TRAC 1;
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:SORT X;
INIT;*WAI;
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE 10;
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:COUN?;
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:Y?;
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:X?
1303.3545.12
4.87
E-1
Marker Functions – MKR FCTN Key
NEW
SEARCH
R&S FMU
The NEW SEARCH softkey starts a new peak search and enters
the results in the peak list.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands: INIT;*WAI;
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE 10;
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:COUN?;
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:Y?;
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:X?
SORT MODE
FREQ LEVEL
The SORT MODE FREQ/LEVEL softkey defines the position of
the peak values in the list:
FREQ
sorting in ascending order of frequency values (time
values if span = 0)
LEVEL
sorting according to level
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
PEAK
EXCURSION
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:SORT X;
With level measurements, the PEAK EXCURSION softkey allows
the minimum amount to be entered by which a signal must
decrease or increase in order to be recognized as a maximum by
the peak search function.
Values between 0 dB and 80 dB may be entered, the resolution
being 0.1 dB
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
LEFT
LIMIT
RIGHT
LIMIT
CALC:MARK:PEXC 6dB
The LEFT LIMIT and RIGHT LIMIT softkeys define the vertical
lines F1/F2 in the frequency domain (span > 0) and T1/T2 in the
time domain (span = 0) between which the search is carried out.
If only one line is active, the F1/T1 line is used as the lower limit;
the upper limit is the stop frequency. If F2/T2 is also active, it
defines the upper limit.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands: CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:LEFT 1MHZ
CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:RIGH 10MHZ
CALC:MARK:X:SLIM ON
THRESHOLD
The THRESHOLD softkey defines a horizontal threshold line
which represents the lower limit of the peak search level range.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
PEAK LIST
OFF
The PEAK LIST OFF softkey switches off the table with the search
results.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
1303.3545.12
CALC:THR -20dBm
CALC:THR ON
4.88
-
E-1
R&S FMU
Marker Functions – MKR FCTN Key
Selecting the Trace
Menu MKR FCTN:
MRK
TRACE
The MKR TRACE softkey sets the active marker to different traces. Only
those traces can be selected which are visible on the screen in the same
window.
The function of the softkey is identical to that of the softkey with the same
name in the MKR-> menu.
Example:
Three traces are displayed on the screen. The marker is always on Trace 1
on switching on.
[MKR ->TRACE]
"1"<ENTER>
[MKR ->TRACE]
"3"<ENTER>
The marker jumps to Trace 2, but remains at the
previous frequency or time.
The marker jumps to Trace 3.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
1303.3545.12
4.89
CALC:MARK:TRAC 2
E-1
Change of Settings via Markers – MKR
Key
R&S FMU
Change of Settings via Markers – MKR
Key
The MKR
menu offers functions through which instrument parameters can be changed with the aid
of the currently active marker. The functions can be used on markers and delta markers.
On opening the menu, the functions for the last active marker are activated; if no marker was enabled,
MARKER 1 is activated and a peak search is performed.
MKR
menu
SPAN
AMPL
MKR
MKR
FCTN
AUTO MAX
PEAK
SELECT
MARKER
PEAK
MIN
LEFT
LIMIT
CENTER
=MKR FREQ
NEXT MIN
RIGHT
LIMIT
REF LEVEL
=MKR LVL
NEXT MIN
RIGHT
THRESHOLD
NEXT PEAK
NEXT MIN
LEFT
AUTO MIN
PEAK
NEXT PEAK
RIGHT
NEXT PEAK
LEFT
EXCLUDE
DC
SEARCH
LIMITS
MRK->TRACE
PEAK
EXCURSION
SEARCH LIM
OFF
SELECT
MARKER
The SELECT MARKER softkey activates the numerical selection of the
marker in the data entry field. Delta marker 1 is selected by input of ' 0 '.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands: CALC:MARK1 ON;
CALC:MARK1:X <value>;
CALC:MARK1:Y?
PEAK
The PEAK softkey sets the active marker/delta marker to the peak of the
trace.
If no marker is active when MKR-> menu is called, MARKER 1 is
automatically switched on and the peak search is performed.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands: CALC:MARK:MAX
CALC:DELT:MAX
1303.3545.12
4.90
E-1
R&S FMU
CENTER
=MKR FREQ
Change of Settings via Markers – MKR
Key
The CENTER = MKR FREQ softkey sets the center frequency to the current
marker or delta marker frequency.
A signal can thus be set to the center of the frequency display range, for
example, so that it can then be examined in detail with a smaller span.
The softkey is not available in the time domain (zero span).
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
CALC:MARK:FUNC:CENT
Example:
A spectrum is displayed with a large span after PRESET. A signal off the
center is to be examined in detail:
[PRESET]
R&S FMU is set to the default setting.
[MKR->]
MARKER 1 is switched on and automatically jumps to the
largest signal of the trace.
[CENTER
=MKR FREQ]
[SPAN]
REF LEVEL
=MKR LVL
The center frequency is set to the marker frequency. The
span is adapted in such a way that the minimum frequency
or the maximum frequency is not exceeded.
The span can, for example, be reduced using the rollkey.
The REF LEVEL = MKR LVL softkey sets the reference level to the current
marker level.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
CALC:MARK:FUNC:REF
Example:
A spectrum is displayed with a large span after PRESET. The reference level
shall be set so that the strongest signal is exactly at refence level.
[PRESET]
R&S FMU is set to the default setting.
[MKR->]
MARKER 1 is switched on and automatically jumps to the
largest signal of the trace.
[REF LEVEL
= MKR LVL]
NEXT PEAK
NEXT PEAK
RIGHT
The reference level is set to the measured marker level.
The NEXT PEAK softkey sets the active marker/delta marker to the next
lower maximum of the selected trace.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands: CALC:MARK:MAX:NEXT
CALC:DELT:MAX:NEXT
The NEXT PEAK RIGHT softkey sets the active marker/delta marker to the
next lower maximum right of the current marker position on the selected
trace.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands:
NEXT PEAK
LEFT
CALC:MARK:MAX:RIGH
CALC:DELT:MAX:RIGH
The NEXT PEAK LEFT softkey sets the active marker/delta marker to the
next lower maximum left of the current marker position the selected trace.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands:
1303.3545.12
4.91
CALC:MARK:MAX:LEFT
CALC:DELT:MAX:LEFT
E-1
Change of Settings via Markers – MKR
SEARCH
LIMITS
LEFT
LIMIT
RIGHT
LIMIT
Key
R&S FMU
The SEARCH LIMITS softkey limits the search range for
maximum or minimum search. The softkey switches to a
submenu in which the search range limits can be set in the x and
y direction.
THRESHOLD
SEARCH LIM
OFF
LEFT
LIMIT
RIGHT
LIMIT
The LEFT LIMIT und RIGHT LIMIT softkeys define the two
vertical lines F1 and F2 in the frequency domain (span > 0) and
T1 / T2 in the time domain (span = 0). The search is performed
between these lines in the frequency and time domain
If only LEFT LIMIT is enabled, line F1/T1 is the lower limit and
the upper limit corresponds to the stop frequency. If RIGHT
LIMIT is also enabled, it determines the upper limit.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands: CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:LEFT 1MHZ
CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:RIGH 10MHZ
CALC:MARK:X:SLIM ON
THRESHOLD
The THRESHOLD softkey defines the threshold line.
The threshold line represents a limit for the level range of the max.
search at the lower end and that of the min. search at the upper
end.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands: CALC:THR -20dBm
CALC:THR ON
SEARCH
LIMIT OFF
The SEARCH LIMIT OFF softkey disables all limits of the
search range.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands: CALC:MARK:X:SLIM OFF
CALC:THR OFF
1303.3545.12
4.92
E-1
R&S FMU
MKR
TRACE
Change of Settings via Markers – MKR
Key
The MKR TRACE softkey sets the active marker to a new trace. If only one
trace is available on the screen, the softkey does not appear. If several
traces are available on the screen, only these are offered.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
CALC:MARK:TRAC 2
Example:
Three traces are displayed on the screen. The marker is always on Trace 1
after switching on.
MIN
[MKR ->TRACE ] "2" <ENTER>
The marker jumps to Trace 2 but remains
at the previous frequency or time.
[MKR ->TRACE] "3" <ENTER>
The marker jumps to Trace 3.
The MIN softkey sets the active marker/delta marker to the minimum of the
selected trace.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands: CALC:MARK:MIN
CALC:DELT:MIN
NEXT MIN
The NEXT MIN softkey sets the active marker/delta marker to the next higher
minimum of the selected trace. The search direction is defined in the NEXT
MODE submenu (see above).
IEC/IEEE-bus commands: CALC:MARK:MIN:NEXT
CALC:DELT:MIN:NEXT
NEXT MIN
RIGHT
The NEXT MIN RIGHT softkey sets the active marker/delta marker to the
next higher minimum right of the current marker position on the selected
trace.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands:
NEXT MIN
LEFT
CALC:MARK:MIN:RIGH
CALC:DELT:MIN:RIGH
The NEXT MIN LEFT softkey sets the active marker/delta marker to the next
higher minimum left of the current marker position on the selected trace.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands:
EXCLUDE
DC
CALC:MARK:MIN:LEFT
CALC:DELT:MIN:LEFT
The EXCLUDE DC softkey limits the frequency range for the marker search
functions or disables the limit.
activated
The inherent DC component (DC offset) is represented as a
signal at 0 Hz. To avoid the marker jumping to the peak at 0 Hz
with the peak search function, this frequency is excluded. The
minimum frequency to which the marker jumps, is
1.25 ×
resolution bandwidth (RBW).
deactivated No restriction to the search range. The frequency 0 Hz is
included in the marker search functions.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
PEAK
EXCURSION
CALC:MARK:LOEX ON
The PEAK EXCURSION softkey enables – for level measurements – the
entry of a minimum level value by which a signal must rise or fall so that it will
be identified as a maximum or a minimum by the NEXT PEAK and NEXT
MIN search functions.
Valid entries are from 0 dB to 80 dB; the resolution is 0.1 dB.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
1303.3545.12
4.93
CALC:MARK:PEXC 10dB
E-1
Change of Settings via Markers – MKR
Key
R&S FMU
The default setting for the peak excursion is 6 dB. This value is sufficient for
the NEXT PEAK and NEXT MIN functions since, in this mode, the next lower
maximum or next higher minimum will always be detected.
If NEXT PEAK LEFT or NEXT PEAK RIGHT is selected, these functions
search for the next relative maximum left or right of the current marker
position irrespective of the current signal amplitude. Relative maximum is
understood to mean a decrease of the signal amplitude by a defined value –
i.e. the peak excursion – right and left of the amplitude peak.
The 6 dB level change set as a default value may be attained already by the
inherent noise of the instrument. In such a case, the R&S FMU would identify
noise peaks as maxima or minima. The value entered for the PEAK
EXCURSION should therefore be higher than the difference between the
highest and the lowest value measured for the displayed inherent noise.
The following example illustrates the effect of different settings of the PEAK
EXCURSION.
Fig. 4-10
Examples of level measurement with different settings of PEAK
EXCURSION
The following table lists the signals as indicated by marker numbers in the
diagram above, as well as the minimum of the amplitude decrease to both
sides of the signal:
Table 4-6
Signal #
1303.3545.12
min. amplitude decrease to
both sides of the signal
1
36 dB
2
36 dB
3
14 dB
4
13 dB
4.94
E-1
R&S FMU
Change of Settings via Markers – MKR
Key
With 40 dB peak excursion, NEXT PEAK, NEXT PEAK RIGHT and NEXT
PEAK LEFT will not find any signal, as the signal level does not decrease by
more than 36 dB to either side of any signal.
Order of signals detected:
PEAK:
NEXT PEAK:
or
PEAK:
NEXT PEAK LEFT:
NEXT PEAK RIGHT:
signal 1
signal 1 (no further signal detected)
signal 1
signal 1 (no further signal detected)
signal 1 (no further signal detected)
With 20 dB peak excursion, NEXT PEAK and NEXT PEAK RIGHT will also
detect signal 2, as the signal level decreases at least by 36 dB to either side
of this signal, which is now greater than the peak excursion.
Order of signals detected:
PEAK:
NEXT PEAK:
NEXT PEAK:
or
PEAK:
NEXT PEAK LEFT:
NEXT PEAK RIGHT:
NEXT PEAK RIGHT:
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 2 (no further signal detected)
Signal 1
Signal 1 (no further signal detected)
Signal 2
Signal 2 (no further signal detected)
With 6 dB peak excursion, all signals will be detected with NEXT PEAK and
NEXT PEAK RIGHT / NEXT PEAK LEFT.
Order of signals detected:
Order of signals detected:
PEAK:
NEXT PEAK:
NEXT PEAK:
NEXT PEAK:
or
PEAK:
NEXT PEAK LEFT:
NEXT PEAK RIGHT:
NEXT PEAK RIGHT:
NEXT PEAK RIGHT.
AUTO MAX
PEAK
AUTO MIN
PEAK
Signal 1
Signal 3
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 4
AUTO MAX PEAK / AUTO MIN PEAK adds an automatic peak search action
for Marker 1 at the end of each particular sweep. This function may be used
during adjustments of a device under test to keep track of the actual peak
marker position and level.
The actual marker search limit settings (LEFT LIMIT, RIGHT LIMIT,
THRESHOLD, EXCLUDE LO) are taken into account.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
1303.3545.12
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal 4
CALC1:MARK1:MAX:AUTO ON
CALC1:MARK1:MIN:AUTO ON
4.95
E-1
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
R&S FMU
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
With its power measurement functions the R&S FMU is able to measure all the necessary parameters
with high accuracy in a wide dynamic range.
A modulated carrier is almost always used for transmission of information. Due to the information
modulated upon the carrier, the latter covers a spectrum which is defined by the modulation, the
transmission data rate and the signal filtering. Within a transmission band each carrier is assigned a
channel taking into account these parameters. In order to ensure error-free transmission, each
transmitter must be conforming to the specified parameters. These include among others:
• the output power,
• the occupied bandwidth, i.e. the bandwidth which must contain a defined percentage of the power
and
• the power dissipation allowed in the adjacent channels.
Additionally the menu contains functions to determine the modulation depth of AM modulated signals
rd
and to measure the 3 order intercept point.
The measurements and the corresponding settings are selected in the MEAS menu.
MEAS menu:
BW
SWEEP
MEAS
TRIG
TIME DOM
POWER
TOI
The MEAS key opens the menu to
select and set the power measurement.
CHAN PWR
ACP
The following measurements can be
selected:
MULT CARR
ACP
• Power in the time domain (TIME
DOM POWER)
• Channel power and adjacent-channel
power in the frequency domain with a
single carrier
(CHAN PWR ACP)
OCCUPIED
BANDWIDTH
SIGNAL
STATISTIC
• Channel power and adjacent-channel
power in the frequency domain with
several carriers
(MULT CARR ACP)
C/N
C/No
MODULATION
DEPTH
• Occupied bandwidth
BANDWIDTH)
(OCCUPIED
• Carrier-to-noise ratio (C/N, C/No)
• Amplitude probability
(SIGNAL STATISTICS)
SELECT
MARKER
• Modulation
DEPTH)
depth
distribution
(MODULATION
rd
• 3 order intercept (TOI)
The above measurements are carried
out alternatively.
1303.3545.12
4.96
E-1
R&S FMU
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
Power Measurement in Time Domain
With the aid of the power measurement function, the R&S FMU determines the power of the signal in
the time domain (SPAN = 0 Hz) by summing up the power at the individual pixels and dividing the result
by the number of pixels. In this way it is possible to measure for example the power of TDMA signals
during transmission or during the muting phase. Both the mean power and the rms power can be
measured by means of the individual power values.
The result is displayed in the marker info field.
The measured values are updated after each sweep or averaged over a user-defined number of
sweeps (AVERAGE ON/OFF and NUMBER OF SWEEPS) in order to determine e.g. the mean power
over several bursts. For determination of the peak value (MAX HOLD ON) the maximum value from
several sweeps is displayed.
Example:
Marker info field for: MEAN selected, AVERAGE ON and MAX HOLD ON:
MEAN HOLD
MEAN AV
-2.33 dBm
-2.39 dBm
If both the on and off phase of a burst signal are displayed, the measurement range can be limited to
the transmission or to the muting phase with the aid of vertical lines. The ratio between signal and noise
power of a TDMA signal for instance can be measured by using a measurement as a reference value
and after that varying the measurement range.
Upon switching on power measurement the sample detector is activated (TRACE-DETECTORSAMPLE).
Submenu MEAS - TIME DOM POWER:
TIME DOM
POWER
POWER
ON
OFF
SET
REFERENCE
PEAK
POWER
ABS
REL
RMS
MEAN
MAX HOLD
ON
OFF
STANDARD
DEVIATION
AVERAGE
ON
OFF
LIMITS
ON
OFF
NUMBER OF
SWEEPS
START
LIMIT
STOP
LIMIT
OFF
1303.3545.12
The TIME DOM POWER softkey activates the
power measurement in the time domain and
opens a submenu for configuration of the power
measurement.
The submenu allows selection of the type of
power measurement (rms or mean power), the
settings for max hold and averaging as well as
the definition of limits.
The power evaluation range can be limited by
input of limit values.
Note: This softkey is only available in the
MAGNITUDE measurement in the time
domain (span=0).
O
4.97
E-1
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
ON
POWER
OFF
The POWER ON/OFF softkey switches the power measurement on and off.
When entering the submenu it is ON since the power measurement is already
switched on with the TIME DOM POWER softkey in the main menu.
Note:
The measurement is performed on the trace on which marker 1 is
placed. To evaluate another trace, marker 1 should be set on
another trace using the SELECT TRACE softkey in menu MKR.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
PEAK
R&S FMU
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE ON
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE:RES?
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS ON
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS:RES?
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN ON
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN:RES?
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:SDEV ON
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:SDEV:RES?
The PEAK softkey switches on the calculation of the peak value from the points of
the displayed trace or a segment thereof.
For the maximum peak, the largest peak value obtained since the activation of
MAX HOLD ON is displayed.
With AVERAGE ON, the peak values of a trace are averaged over several
sweeps and displayed.
The number of sweeps over which the average or the maximum value is
calculated is set with the NUMBER OF SWEEPS softkey.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
RMS
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE ON
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE:RES?
The RMS softkey switches on the calculation of the rms value from the points of
the displayed trace or a segment of it.
For the maximum peak, the largest rms value obtained since the activation of
MAX HOLD ON is displayed.
With AVERAGE ON, the rms values of a trace are averaged over several sweeps
and displayed.
The number of sweeps over which the average or the maximum value is
calculated is set with the NUMBER OF SWEEPS softkey.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
MEAN
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS ON
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS:RES?
The MEAN softkey switches on the calculation of the mean value from the points
of the displayed trace or a segment of it. The linear mean value of the equivalent
voltages is calculated.
This can be used for instance to measure the mean power during a GSM burst.
For the maximum peak, the largest mean value obtained since the activation of
MAX HOLD ON is displayed.
With AVERAGE ON, the mean values of a trace are averaged over several
sweeps and displayed.
The number of sweeps over which the average or the maximum value is
calculated is set with the NUMBER OF SWEEPS softkey.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
1303.3545.12
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN ON
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN:RES?
4.98
E-1
R&S FMU
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
STANDARD
DEIATION
The STANDARD DEVIATION softkey switches on the calculation of the standard
deviation of trace points from the mean value and outputs them as measured
value. The measurement of the mean power is automatically switched on at the
same time.
For the maximum peak, the largest standard deviation obtained since the
activation of MAX HOLD ON is displayed.
With AVERAGE ON, the standard deviations of a trace are averaged over several
sweeps and displayed.
The number of sweeps over which the average or the maximum value is
calculated is set with the NUMBER OF SWEEPS softkey.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:SDEV ON
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:SDEV:RES?
ON
LIMIT
OFF
The LIMIT ON/OFF softkey selects the limited (ON) or non-limited (OFF)
evaluation range.
The evaluation range is defined by the START LIMIT and STOP LIMIT softkeys. If
LIMIT = ON, signals are only searched between the two lines.
If only one limit line is switched on, time line 1 is the lower limit and the upper limit
corresponds to the stop frequency. If time line 2 is also switched on, it defines the
upper limit.
If no limit line is switched on, the evaluation range is not limited.
The default setting is LIMIT = OFF.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: CALC:MARK:X:SLIM OFF
START
LIMIT
The START LIMIT softkey activates the entry of the lower limit of the evaluation
range.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:LEFT <value>
STOP
LIMIT
The STOP LIMIT softkey activates the entry of the upper limit of the evaluation
range.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:RIGH <value>
SET
REFERENCE
The SET REFERENCE softkey sets the power values currently measured as
reference values for the calculation of the mean value (MEAN) and the rms value
(RMS). The reference values are used to perform relative measurements.
If the calculation of the mean value (MEAN) and rms value (RMS) is not switched
on, 0 dBm is used as a reference value.
If the average value (AVERAGE) or maximum value (MAX HOLD) is calculated
over several sweeps, the current value is the measured value summed up at the
actual time.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:REF:AUTO ONCE
POWER
ABS
REL
The POWER ABS/REL softkey selects the absolute power measurement (default
setting) or relative power measurement. The reference value for the relative
power is defined by SET REFERENCE.
The value 0 dBm is used if the reference value is not defined.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MODE ABS
1303.3545.12
4.99
E-1
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
MAX HOLD
OFF
ON
R&S FMU
The MAX HOLD ON/OFF softkey switches the display of the maximum peak
obtained from measurements at successive sweeps on and off.
The displayed maximum peak is only updated at the end of a sweep if a higher
value has occurred.
The maximum value can be reset by switching the MAX HOLD ON / OFF softkey
off and on again.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
AVERAGE
ON
OFF
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PHOL ON
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE:PHOL:RES?
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS:PHOL:RES?
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN:PHOL:RES?
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:SDEV:PHOL:RES?
The AVERAGE ON/OFF softkey switches averaging over successive sweep
measurements on and off.
The measured values can be reset by switching the AVERAGE ON / OFF softkey
off and on again.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
NUMBER OF
SWEEPS
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:AVER ON
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE:AVER:RES?
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS:AVER:RES?
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN:AVER:RES?
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:SDEV:AVER:RES?
The NUMBER OF SWEEPS softkey activates the entry of the number of sweeps
for maximum or average value calculation.
SINGLE SWEEP mode
The R&S FMU performs sweeps until the
selected number of sweeps is reached and
stops then.
CONTINUOUS SWEEP mode
Averaging is carried out until the selected
number of sweeps is reached. After that,
averaging is performed in continuous mode.
and is then continued as running averaging.
Calculation of the maximum peak (MAX HOLD)
is performed continuously irrespective of the
selected number of sweeps.
The valid range values is 0 to 32767.
Depending on the specified number of sweeps, averaging is carried out according
to the following rules:
NUMBER OF SWEEPS = 0
NUMBER OF SWEEPS = 1
NUMBER OF SWEEPS > 1
Note:
This setting is equivalent to the setting of the sweep count in the
TRACE menu.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
1303.3545.12
Continuous averaging is carried out over 10
measured values.
No averaging is carried out.
Averaging is carried out over the set number of
measured values.
SWE:COUN <value>
4.100
E-1
R&S FMU
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
Example:
The mean power of a GSM burst with 0 dBm nominal power at baseband is to be measured.
[PRESET]
Set the R&S FMU to the default setting.
The center frequency is zero (baseband) in the default state.
[SPAN: ZERO SPAN]
Select time domain display (span = 0 Hz).
[AMPT: 5 dBm]
Set the reference level to 5 dBm.
[BW: RES BW MANUAL:
30 kHz]
Set the resolution bandwidth to 30 kHz in line with
the requirements of the GSM standard.
[SWEEP: SWEEPTIME MANUAL
600 Ds]
Set the sweep time to 600 Ds.
[TRIG: I/Q LEVEL: 0.1 V]
Use the power of the complex baseband signal as trigger source.
[MEAS]
Call the menu for the measurement functions.
[TIME DOM POWER]
Select power measurement in the time domain. The R&S FMU
calculates the power from the points of the whole trace.
The submenu for configuration of the power measurement is
opened. RMS is already switched on.
[MEAN]
Additionally switch on the MEAN power measurement.
[LIMITS ON]
Activate the limitation of the time domain of the power
measurement .
[START LIMIT: 250 %s]
Set the start of the power measurement at 250 Ds.
[STOP LIMIT: 500 %s]
Set the end of the power measurement at 500 Ds.
Note: The GSM specifications require the power to be measured between 50% and 90% of the TDMA
burst. The time limits set above approximately correspond to the required time domain.
1303.3545.12
4.101
E-1
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
R&S FMU
Channel and Adjacent-Channel Power Measurements
For all channel and adjacent-channel power measurements a specified channel configuration is
assumed which is for instance based on a specific radio communication system.
This configuration is defined by the nominal channel frequency (= center frequency of the R&S FMU if
only one carrier is active), the channel bandwidth, the channel spacing, the adjacent-channel bandwidth
and the adjacent-channel spacing. With baseband signals, the channel frequency is set to zero. The R&S
FMU is able to simultaneously measure the power in up to four transmission channels and up to three
adjacent channels (10 channels: 4 transmission channels, 3 lower and 3 upper adjacent channels).
The R&S FMU uses the integrated bandwidth method (IBW method) for channel and adjacent-channel
power measurement, i.e. the integration of trace pixels within the bandwidth of the channel to be
measured to the total power of the channel.
With the IBW method, the channel is divided into sub spectra. This is done by means of a bandwidth
which is small compared to the channel bandwidth. These sub spectra are then combined by integration
of the trace pixels.
The transmission channels or adjacent channels are marked by vertical lines at a distance of half the
channel bandwidth to the left and to the right of the corresponding channel center frequency(see Fig.
4-11).
The results are listed in tables in the lower half of the screen.
The R&S FMU offers predefined standard settings which can be selected from a table for the common
mobile radio standards. Thus, channel configuration is performed automatically without the need to
enter the corresponding parameters manually.
For some standards, the channel power and the adjacent-channel power are to be weighted by means
of a root-raised cosine filter corresponding to a receive filter. This type of filtering is switched on
automatically on selecting the standard (e.g. NADC, TETRA or 3GPP W-CDMA).
Fig. 4-11
Screen display of adjacent-channel power measurement according to CDMA2000
standard.
Limit values for the adjacent-channel power can be defined for the measurement. If limit checking is
switched on, a pass/fail information indicating that the power has been exceeded is displayed during the
measurement in the table in the lower half of the screen.
Note:
With the CP/ACP measurement switched on the functions SPLIT SCREEN and FULL
SCREEN are inhibited.
1303.3545.12
4.102
E-1
R&S FMU
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
The channel configuration is defined in the MEAS - CHAN PWR ACP or the MEAS - MULT CARR ACP
menu.
CHAN PWR
ACP
MULT CARR
ACP
CP/ACP
ON
OFF
NO. OF
ADJ CHAN
ACP LIMIT
CHECK
CP/ACP
STANDARD
NO. OF
TX CHAN
EDIT
ACP LIMIT
CP/ACP
CONFIG
CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH
SET CP
REFERENCE
CHANNEL
SPACING
ACP REF
SETTINGS
NOISE CORR
OFF
ON
CP/ACP
ABS
REL
CHAN PWR
/ HZ
DIAGRAM
FULL SIZE
POWER
MODE
SELECT
TRACE
The CHAN PWR ACP and MULT
CARR ACP softkeys activate
channel or adjacent-channel power
measurement either for a single
carrier signal (CHAN PWR ACP) or
for several carrier signals (MULT
CARR ACP), depending on the
current measurement configuration.
In addition, they open a submenu for
defining the parameters for channel
power measurement. The softkey
selected is shown in color to indicate
that a channel or adjacent-channel
power measurement is active.
Note: The softkeys are available
only for measurements in the
frequency domain(span > 0).
ADJUST
SETTINGS
CP/ACP
ON
OFF
The CP/ACP ON/OFF softkey switches calculation of the channel power or
adjacent-channel power on and off.
The measurement is performed by integrating the powers at the display points
within the specified channels (IBW method).
The powers of the adjacent channels are measured either as absolute values or
as relative values referenced to the power of a transmission channel. The
default setting is relative-value measurement (see CP/ACP ABS/REL softkey).
When multicarrier ACP measurement is activated, the number of test points is
increased to ensure that adjacent-channel powers are measured with adequate
accuracy.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands:
1303.3545.12
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL CPOW|ACP|MCAC
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? CPOW|ACP|MCAC
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW OFF
4.103
E-1
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
CP/ACP
STANDARD
R&S FMU
The CP/ACP STANDARD softkey opens a table for the selection of the settings
according to predefined standards. The test parameters for the channel and
adjacent-channel measurements are set according to the mobile radio standard.
The standards available are listed in the
table on the left.
Note:
For the R&S FMU, the channel spacing is defined as the distance
between the center frequency of the adjacent channel and the center
frequency of the transmission channel. The definition of the adjacentchannel spacing in standards IS95 B and C, IS97 B and C and IS98 B
and C is different. These standards define the adjacent-channel
spacing from the center of the transmission channel to the closest
border of the adjacent channel. This definition is also used for the
R&S FMU when the following standard settings are selected:
CDMA IS95 Class 0 FWD
CDMA IS95 Class 0 REV
CDMA IS95 Class 1 FWD
CDMA IS95 Class 1 REV
FAST ACP is not available if a WLAN standard is selected.
The selection of the standard influences the following parameters:
• channel spacing and adjacent-channel spacing
• channel bandwidth, adjacent-channel bandwidth, and type of filtering
• resolution bandwidth
• detector
• # of adjacent channels
Trace mathematics are switched off.
1303.3545.12
4.104
E-1
R&S FMU
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
The reference level is not influenced by the selection of a standard. To achieve
an optimum dynamic range, the reference level has to be set in a way that
places the signal maximum as close as possible to the reference level without
forcing an overload message.
The default setting is CP/ACP STANDARD NONE.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
CP/ACP
CONFIG
SET CP
REFERENCE
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:PRES <standard>
See following section "Setting the Channel Configuration"
With channel power measurement activated, the SET CP REFERENCE softkey
defines the currently measured channel power as the reference value. The
reference value is displayed in the CH PWR REF field; the default value is 0 dBm.
In adjacent-channel power measurement with one or several carrier signals, the
power is always referenced to a transmission channel, i.e. no value is displayed
for CH PWR REF.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
DIAGRAM
FULL SIZE
POW:ACH:REF:AUTO ONCE
The DIAGRAM FULL SIZE softkey switches the diagram to full screen size.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
DISP:WIND1:SIZE LARG|SMAL
For manual setting of the test parameters different from the settings made with ADJUST SETTINGS the
following should be observed:
Frequency span
The frequency span must at least cover the channels to be measured plus
a measurement margin of 10%.
For channel power measurement, the span is 1.1 x channel bandwidth.
Note:
If the frequency span is large in comparison with the channel bandwidth
(or the adjacent-channel bandwidths) being examined, only a few points
on the trace are available per channel. This reduces the accuracy of the
waveform calculation for the channel filter used, which has a negative
effect on the measurement accuracy.
We therefore strongly recommend that the formulas mentioned be taken
into consideration when selecting the frequency span.
Resolution bandwidth (RBW)
To ensure both an acceptable measurement speed and the required
selection (to suppress spectral components outside the channel to be
measured, especially of the adjacent channels), the resolution bandwidth
must not be selected too small or too large. As a general approach, the
resolution bandwidth is to be set to values between 1% and 4% of the
channel bandwidth.
A larger resolution bandwidth can be selected if the spectrum within the
channel to be measured and around it has a flat characteristic. In the
standard setting, e.g. for standard IS95A REV at an adjacent channel
bandwidth of 30 kHz, a resolution bandwidth of 30 kHz is used. This yields
correct results since the spectrum in the neighborhood of the adjacent
channels normally has a constant level. For standard NADC/IS136 this is
not possible for example, since the spectrum of the transmit signal
penetrates into the adjacent channels and a too large resolution bandwidth
1303.3545.12
4.105
E-1
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
R&S FMU
causes a too low selection of the channel filter. The adjacent-channel
power would thus be measured too high.
With the exception of the IS95 CDMA standards, the ADJUST SETTINGS
softkey sets the resolution bandwidth (RBW) as a function of the channel
bandwidth:
RBW
1/40 of channel bandwidth.
The maximum possible resolution bandwidth (with respect to the
requirement RBW
1/40) resulting from the available RBW steps is
selected .
Detector
1303.3545.12
The ADJUST SETTINGS softkey selects the RMS detector.
The RMS detector is selected since it correctly indicates the power
irrespective of the characteristics of the signal to be measured. In principle,
the sample detector would be possible as well. Due to the limited number
of trace pixels used to calculate the power in the channel, the sample
detector would yield less stable results.
4.106
E-1
R&S FMU
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
Setting the Channel Configuration
MEAS - CP/ACP CONFIG submenu:
CP/ACP
CONFIG
NO. OF
ADJ CHAN
ACP LIMIT
CHECK
NO. OF
TX CHAN
EDIT
ACP LIMIT
The CP/ACP CONFIG softkey opens a submenu
for configuration of the channel power and adjacent
channel power measurement independently of the
offered standards.
The channel configuration includes the number of
channels to be measured, the channel bandwidths
(CHANNEL BANDWIDTH), and the channel
spacings (CHANNEL SPACING).
CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH
CHANNEL
SPACING
ACP REF
SETTINGS
Limit values can additionally be specified for the
adjacent-channel power (ACP LIMIT CHECK and
EDIT ACP LIMITS) which are checked for
compliance during the measurement.
CP/ACP
ABS
REL
CHAN PWR
/ HZ
POWER
MODE
SELECT
TRACE
ADJUST
SETTINGS
NO. OF
ADJ CHAN
The NO. OF ADJ CHAN softkey activates the entry of the number ±n of adjacent
channels to be considered in the adjacent-channel power measurement.
Numbers from 0 to 12 can be entered.
The following measurements are performed depending on the number of the
channels.
0 Only the channel powers are measured.
1 The channel powers and the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel
are measured.
2 The channel powers, the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel and
of the next higher and lower channel (alternate channel 1) are measured.
3 The channel power, the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel, the
power of the next higher and lower channel (alternate channel 1) and of the
next but one higher and lower adjacent channel (alternate channel 2) are
measured.
With higher numbers the procedure is expanded accordingly.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: POW:ACH:ACP 1
This increased number of adjacent channels is realized for all the relevant
settings like:
ACLR LIMIT CHECK
:CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:RES?
:CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT1..11:RES?
1303.3545.12
4.107
E-1
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
R&S FMU
EDIT ACLR LIMITS
:CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:STAT ON
:CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:ABS –10dBm,-10dBm
:CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:ABS:STAT ON
:CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT1..11 0dB,0dB
:CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT1..11:STAT ON
:CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT1..11:ABS –10dBm,-10dBm
:CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT1..11:ABS:STAT ON
ADJ CHAN BANDWIDTH
:SENS:POW:ACH:BWID:ALT1..11 30kHz
ADJ CHAN SPACING
:SENS:POW:ACH:SPAC:ALT1..11 1MHz
NO. OF
TX CHAN
The NO. OF TX CHAN softkey enables the entry of the number of carrier signals
to be considered in channel and adjacent-channel power measurements.
Numbers from 1 to 12 can be entered.
The softkey is available only for multicarrier ACP measurements.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH
SENS:POW:ACH:TXCH:COUN 12
The CHANNEL BANDWIDTH softkey opens a table for defining the channel
bandwidths for the transmission channels and the adjacent channels.
ACP CHANNEL BW
CHAN
BANDWIDTH
ADJ
14 kHz
ALT1
14 kHz
ALT2
14 kHz
The transmission-channel bandwidth is normally defined by the transmission
standard. The correct bandwidth is set automatically for the selected standard
(see CP/ACP STANDARD softkey).
The channel bandwidth limits are marked by two vertical lines right and left of
the channel center frequency. It can in this way be visually checked whether the
entire power of the signal under test is within the selected channel bandwidth.
The bandwidths of the different adjacent channels are to be entered numerically.
Since all adjacent channels often have the same bandwidth, the other channels
Alt1 and Alt2 are set to the bandwidth of the adjacent channel on entering the
adjacent-channel bandwidth (ADJ). Thus only one value needs to be entered in
case of equal adjacent channel bandwidths. The same holds true for the ALT2
channels (alternate channels 2) when the bandwidth of the ALT1 channel
(alternate channel 1) is entered.
Note: The channel spacings can be set separately by overwriting the table from
top to bottom.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: SENS:POW:ACH:BWID:CHAN 14kHz
SENS:POW:ACH:BWID:ACH 1kHz
SENS:POW:ACH:BWID:ALT1 14kHz
SENS:POW:ACH:BWID:ALT2 14kHz
1303.3545.12
4.108
E-1
R&S FMU
CHANNEL
SPACING
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
The CHANNEL SPACING softkey opens a table for defining the channel
spacings for the TX channels as well as for the adjacent channels.
Note:
The entry "TX" is only available for the multicarrier ACP
measurement.
TX channels
The spacing between every TX channels can be defined separately. Therefore
a TX spacing 1-2 for the spacing between the first and the second carrier, a
TX spacing 2-3 for the spacing between the second and the third carrier and
so on can be defined. In order to allow a convenient setup for the system with
equal TX channel spacing, the value of TX spacing 1-2 will be copied in all the
spacing below after entry, the TX spacing 2-3 will be copied in all the spacing
below after entry and so forth.
Note:
For different spacings a setup from top to bottom is necessary
If the spacings are not equal the channel distribution according to the center
frequency is as follows:
Odd number of TX channels:
The middle TX channel is centered to center frequency.
Even number of TX channels:
The two TX channels in the middle are used to calculate the frequency
between those two channels. This frequency is aligned to the center
frequency.
1303.3545.12
4.109
E-1
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
R&S FMU
Adjacent channels
Since all the adjacent channels often have the same distance to each other,
the entry of the adjacent-channel spacing (ADJ) causes channel spacing ALT1
to be set to twice and channel spacing ALT2 to three times the adjacentchannel spacing (and so on). Thus only one value needs to be entered in case
of equal channel spacing. The same holds true for the ALT2 channels when
the bandwidth of the ALT1 channel is entered.
Note:
The channel spacings can be set separately by overwriting the table
from top to bottom
IEC/IEEE-bus command: SENS:POW:ACH:SPAC:CHAN 20kHz
SENS:POW:ACH:SPAC:ACH 20kHz
SENS:POW:ACH:SPAC:ALT1 40kHz
SENS:POW:ACH:SPAC:ALT2 60kHz
Note:
ACP REF
SETTINGS
If the ACP or MCACP measurement is started all settings according
to the standard including the channel bandwidths and channel
spacings are set and can be adjusted afterwards.
The ACP REF SETTINGS softkey opens a table for selecting the transmission
channel to which the adjacent-channel relative power values should be
referenced.
ACP REFERENCE CHANNEL
TX CHANNEL 1
TX CHANNEL 2
TX CHANNEL 3
TX CHANNEL 4
TX CHANNEL 5
TX CHANNEL 6
TX CHANNEL 7
TX CHANNEL 8
TX CHANNEL 9
TX CHANNEL 10
TX CHANNEL 11
TX CHANNEL 12
MIN POWER TX CHANNEL
MAX POWER TX CHANNEL
LOWEST & HIGHEST CHANNEL
TX CHANNEL 1 - 12
Selection of one of channels.
MIN POWER
TX CHANNEL
The transmission channel with the
lowest power is used as a reference
channel.
MAX POWER
TX CHANNEL
The transmission channel with the highest
power is used as a reference channel.
LOWEST & HIGHEST CHANNEL
The outer left-hand transmission
channel is the reference channel for the
lower adjacent channels, the outer righthand transmission channel that for the
upper adjacent channels.
Note:
available
The softkey is
measurement.
only
for
the
multicarrier
ACP
IEC/IEEE-bus command: SENS:POW:ACH:REF:TXCH:MAN 1
SENS:POW:ACH:REF:TXCH:AUTO MIN
1303.3545.12
4.110
E-1
R&S FMU
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
CP/ACP
REL
ABS
The CP/ACP ABS/REL softkey (channel power absolute/relative) switches between
absolute and relative power measurement in the channel.
CP/ACP ABS The absolute power in the transmission channel and in the
adjacent channels is displayed in the unit of the Y axis, e.g. in
dBm, dBµV.
CP/ACP REL For adjacent-channel power measurements (NO. OF ADJ
CHAN > 0), the level of the adjacent channels is displayed
relative to the level of the transmission channel in dB.
For channel power measurements (NO. OF ADJ CHAN = 0) with a single
carrier, the power of the transmission channel is displayed
relative to the power of a reference channel defined by SET CP
REFERENCE. This means:
1. Declare the power of the currently measured channel as the
reference value, using the SET CP REFERENCE softkey.
2. Select the channel of interest by varying the channel
frequency (R&S FMU center frequency).
With linear scaling of the Y axis, the power of the new channel
relative to the reference channel (CP/CPref) is displayed. With
dB scaling, the logarithmic ratio 10lg (CP/CPref) is displayed.
The relative channel power measurement can thus also be
used for universal adjacent-channel power measurements.
Each channel can be measured individually.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: SENS:POW:ACH:MODE ABS
The CHAN PWR / HZ softkey toggles between the measurement of the total
channel power and the measurement of the channel power referenced to a 1
Hz bandwidth.
1
.
The conversion factor is 10 • lg
Channel Bandwidth
CHAN PWR
/ HZ
By means of this function it is possible e.g. to measure the signal/noise power
density or use the additional functions CP/ACP REL and SET CP REFERENCE to
obtain the signal to noise ratio.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
:CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES:PHZ ON|OFF
POWER
MODE
CLEAR/
WRITE
MAX HOLD
The POWER MODE softkey opens the submenu for selecting the power
mode.
CLEAR/WRITE In the CLEAR/WRITE mode the channel power and the adjacent
channel powers are calculated directly from the current trace
(default mode).
MAX HOLD
In MAX HOLD mode the power values are still derived from the
current trace, but they are compared with the previous power
value using a maximum algorithm. The higher value is remained.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
:CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:MODE WRIT|MAXH
1303.3545.12
4.111
E-1
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
ADJUST
SETTINGS
R&S FMU
The ADJUST SETTINGS softkey automatically optimizes the instrument
settings for the selected power measurement (see below).
All instrument settings relevant for a power measurement within a specific
frequency range (channel bandwidth) are optimized for the selected channel
configuration (channel bandwidth, channel spacing):
• Frequency span:
The frequency span should cover at least all channels to be considered in a
measurement.
For channel power measurements, the frequency span is set as follows:
(No. of transmission channels - 1) × transmission channel spacing + 2 x
transmission channel bandwidth + measurement margin
For adjacent-channel power measurements, the frequency span is set as a
function of the number of transmission channels, the transmission channel
spacing, the adjacent-channel spacing, and the bandwidth of one of
adjacent-channels ADJ, ALT1 or ALT2, whichever is furthest away from the
transmission channels:
(No. of transmission channels - 1) × transmission channel spacing + 2
× (adjacent-channel spacing + adjacent-channel bandwidth) + measurement
margin
The measurement margin is approx. 10% of the value obtained by adding
the channel spacing and the channel bandwidth.
• Resolution bandwidth RBW
• Detector
1/40 of channel bandwidth
RMS detector
Trace maths are switched off.
The reference level is not influenced by ADJUST SETTINGS.
The adjustment is carried out only once; if necessary, the instrument settings
can be changed later.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: SENS:POW:ACH:PRES ACP|CPOW|MCAC|OBW
ACP LIMIT
CHECK
The ACP LIMIT CHECK softkey switches the limit check for the ACP
measurement on and off.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: CALC:LIM:ACP ON
CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:RES?
CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT:RES?
1303.3545.12
4.112
E-1
R&S FMU
EDIT
ACP LIMIT
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
The EDIT ACP LIMITS softkey opens a table for defining the limits for the ACP
measurement.
The following rules apply for the limits:
• A separate limit can be defined for each adjacent channel. The limit applies
to both the upper and the lower adjacent channel.
• A relative and/or absolute limit can be defined. The check of both limit
values can be activated independently.
• The R&S FMU checks adherence to the limits irrespective of whether the
limits are absolute or relative or whether the measurement is carried out
with absolute or relative levels. If both limits are active and if the higher of
both limit values is exceeded, the measured value is marked accordingly.
Note:
Measured values exceeding the limit are marked by a preceding
asterisk.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: CALC:LIM:ACP ON
CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH 0dB,0dB
CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:STAT ON
CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:ABS –10dBm,-10dBm
CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:ABS:STAT ON
CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT1 0dB,0dB
CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT1:STAT ON
CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT1:ABS –10dBm,-10dBm
CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT1:ABS:STAT ON
CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2 0dB,0dB
CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:STAT ON
CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:ABS –10dBm,-10dBm
CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:ABS:STAT ON
SELECT
TRACE
The SELECT TRACE softkey selects the trace on which the CP/ACP
measurement is to be performed. Only activated traces can be selected, i.e.
traces not set to BLANK.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: SENS:POW:TRAC 1
1303.3545.12
4.113
E-1
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
R&S FMU
Examples:
1. Measurement of adjacent-channel power for a specific standard:
The adjacent-channel power is to be measured for a signal at baseband with 0 dBm level in line with
IS136.
[PRESET]
Set the R&S FMU to the default setting.
The center frequency is zero (baseband) in the default state.
[AMPT: 0 dBm]
Set the reference level to 0 dBm.
[MEAS]
Call the menu for the measurement functions.
[CHAN PWR / ACP]
Select the channel and adjacent-channel power measurement function.
The measurement is performed with the default settings or a previously
defined setting. The submenu for setting the desired new configuration
is opened.
[CP/ACP STANDARD:
select IS136: ENTER]
[CP/ACP CONFIG]
[NO. OF ADJ CHAN:
3 ENTER]
Select the NADC (IS136) standard.
Call the submenu for configuration of the adjacent-channel power
measurement.
Select three adjacent channels for the measurement, i.e. the adjacent
channel and two alternate channels are measured.
[SPAN 100 kHz]
The span is changed manually just to demonstrate the ADJUST
SETTINGS function.
[ADJUST SETTINGS]
Sets the optimum span, resolution bandwidth (RBW), and detector
automatically for the measurement. The absolute channel power and
the relative power of the adjacent channels are displayed on the
screen.
1303.3545.12
4.114
E-1
R&S FMU
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
2. Measurement with user-specific channel configuration:
Measurement of the adjacent-channel power ratio (ACPR) of an IS95 CDMA signal at baseband, level
0 dBm. Similar to example 1, the setting can be simplified by using CP/ACP STANDARD.
[PRESET]
Set the R&S FMU to the default setting.
The center frequency is zero (baseband) in the default state.
[AMPT: 0 dBm]
Set the reference level to 0 dBm.
[MEAS]
Call the menu for the measurement functions.
[CHAN PWR / ACP]
Select the channel and adjacent-channel power measurement function.
The measurement is carried out with the default settings or a previously
defined setting. The submenu for setting the desired new configuration
is opened.
[CP/ACP CONFIG]
Call the submenu for defining the channel configuration.
[NO. OF ADJ CHAN:
2 ENTER]
[CHANNEL BANDWIDTH:
1.23 MHz: : 30 kHz]
Select two adjacent channels for the measurement, i.e. the adjacent
channel and the alternate channel are measured.
Set the channel bandwidth to 1.23 MHz in accordance with IS 95.
Set the adjacent-channel bandwidth to 30 kHz.
TX/ACP CHANNEL BW
CHAN
BANDWIDTH
TX
1.23 MHz
ADJ
30 kHz
ALT1
30 kHz
ALT2
30 kHz
Upon entry of 30 kHz for the adjacent channel the alternate channels
are also set to 30 kHz.
[CHAN SPACING:
750 kHz: :
1.98 MHz] :
2.65 MHz]
Open the list for entering the channel spacings.
ACP CHANNEL SPACING
CHAN
SPACING
ADJ
750 kHz
ALT1
1.98 MHz
ALT2
2.65 MHz
Upon entry of 885 kHz for the adjacent channel the channels ALT1 and
ALT2 are set to 1770 kHz and 2655 kHz. Upon entry of 1.98 MHz for
the alternate channel 1 the alternate channel 2 is set to 2.97 MHz.
[ADJUST SETTINGS]
1303.3545.12
Automatically set the optimum span (= 4.02 MHz), resolution bandwidth
(RBW = 30 kHz), and detector (RMS) for the measurement. The
absolute channel power and the relative power of the adjacent
channels and alternate channels are displayed on the screen.
4.115
E-1
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
R&S FMU
3. Measurement of signal/noise power density (C/No) of an IS95 CDMA signal
(baseband, level 0 dBm)
[PRESET]
Set the R&S FMU to the default setting.
The center frequency is zero (baseband) in the default state.
[AMPT: 0 dBm]
Set the reference level to 0 dBm.
MEAS]
Call the menu for the measurement functions.
[CHAN PWR / ACP]
Select the channel and adjacent-channel power measurement. The
measurement is performed with the default setting or a previously
defined setting. The submenu for setting the desired new configuration
is opened.
[CP/ACP CONFIG]
Call the submenu for defining the channel configuration.
[NO. OF ADJ CHAN:
0 ENTER]
[CHANNEL BANDWIDTH:
1.23 MHz]
[ADJUST SETTINGS]
Do not select an adjacent channel for the measurement, i.e. the
measurement is carried out in one channel only.
Set the channel bandwidth to 1.23 MHz in line with IS95.
Set the optimum span (= 2.46 MHz), resolution bandwidth (RBW = 30
kHz), and detector (RMS) for the measurement automatically. The
absolute channel power is displayed on the screen.
[PREV:
SET CP REFERENCE]
Set the measured channel power as a reference for the subsequent
measurements.
[CP/ACP ABS / REL]
Select relative measurement related to the reference power set with
SET REFERENCE (result 0 dB).
[FREQ: CENTER: 5 MHz]
Set the center frequency to 5 MHz. The R&S FMU measures the
channel power at 1.23 MHz bandwidth and outputs the result in dB
relative to the reference power.
1303.3545.12
4.116
E-1
R&S FMU
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
Measurement of Occupied Bandwidth
An important characteristics of a modulated signal is its occupied bandwidth. In a radio communications
system for instance the occupied bandwidth must be limited to enable distortion-free transmission in
adjacent channels. The occupied bandwidth is defined as the bandwidth containing a defined percentage of
the total transmitted power. A percentage between 10% and 99.9% can be set on the R&S FMU.
MEAS OCCUPIED BANDWIDTH menu:
The OCCUPIED BANDWIDTH softkey activates measurement
of the occupied bandwidth according to the current
configuration and opens the submenu for configuring the
measurement. The softkey is available only in frequency
domain (span > 0) and is highlighted when the measurement is
switched on.
In the frequency domain, this measurement determines the
bandwidth that contains a predefined percentage of the power
of the displayed frequency range (% POWER BANDWIDTH
softkey). The occupied bandwidth is output in the marker
display field and marked on the trace by temporary markers.
Note:
OCCUP BW
ON
OFF
- The softkey is only available in the frequency
domain (span > 0).
- The measurement is performed on the trace with
marker 1. In order to evaluate another trace,
marker 1 must be placed on another trace by
means of SELECT TRACE in the MKR menu
The OCCUP BW ON/OFF softkey switches measurement of the
occupied bandwidth on or off.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
% POWER
BANDWIDTH
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL OBW
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? OBW
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW OFF
The % POWER BANDWIDTH softkey opens the entry of the
percentage of power related to the total power in the displayed
frequency range which defines the occupied bandwidth
(percentage of total power).
The valid range of values is 10 % to 99.9 %.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:SENS:POW:BWID 99PCT
CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH
The CHANNEL BANDWIDTH softkey opens an input window
for defining the channel bandwidth for the transmission
channel. For measurements in line with a specific transmission
standard, the bandwidth specified by the standard for the
transmission channel must be entered.
The default setting is 14 kHz.
The specified channel bandwidth is used for optimization of the
test parameters of the R&S FMU with ADJUST SETTINGS.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
1303.3545.12
4.117
SENS:POW:ACH:BWID 14kHz
E-1
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
ADJUST
SETTINGS
R&S FMU
The ADJUST SETTINGS softkey optimizes the instrument
settings for the measurement of the occupied bandwidth
according to the specified channel bandwidth.
All instrument settings relevant for power measurement within a
specific frequency range, such as
• frequency span
3 x channel bandwidth
• resolution bandwidth RBW
1/40 of channel bandwidth
• detector RMS
are optimized.
The reference level is not influenced by ADJUST SETTINGS.
For an optimum dynamic range it should be selected in a way
that the signal maximum is as close as possible to the reference
level without overloading.
The adjustment is carried out only once; if necessary, the
instrument settings may be changed later.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
1303.3545.12
4.118
SENS:POW:PRES OBW
E-1
R&S FMU
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
Measurement principle:
For example, the bandwidth containing 99% of the signal power is to be determined. The routine first
calculates the total power of all displayed points of the trace. In the next step, the points from the right
edge of the trace are summed up until 0.5% of the total power is reached. Auxiliary marker 1 is
positioned at the corresponding frequency. Then the R&S FMU sums up the points from the left edge of
the trace until 0.5 % of the power is reached. Auxiliary marker 2 is positioned at this point. 99% of the
power is now between the two markers. The distance between the two frequency markers is the
occupied bandwidth which is displayed in the marker info field.
A prerequisite for correct measurement is that only the signal to be measured is visible on the screen of
the R&S FMU. An additional signal would invalidate the measurement.
To ensure correct power measurement especially for noise signals and to obtain the correct occupied
bandwidth, the following settings should be selected:
RBW
Detector
Span
<< occupied bandwidth (approx.
communication type. 300 Hz or 1 kHz)
RMS or sample
1/20
of
occupied
bandwidth,
for
voice
2 to 3 x occupied bandwidth
Some of the measurement specifications (e.g. PDC, RCR STD-27B) require measurement of the
occupied bandwidth using a peak detector. The detector setting of the R&S FMU has to be changed
accordingly then.
Example:
Measurement of occupied bandwidth of a PDC signal at baseband, level 0 dBm
[PRESET]
Set the R&S FMU to the default setting.
The center frequency is zero (baseband) in the default state.
[AMPT: 0 dBm]
Set the reference level to 0 dBm.
[MEAS]
Call the menu for the measurement functions.
[OCCUPIED BANDWIDTH]
Select measurement of the occupied bandwidth and open the submenu
for configuring the measurement.
[% POWER BANDWIDTH:
99 %]
Select 99 % for the bandwidth to be measured.
[CHANNEL BANDWIDTH:
21 kHz]
Enter the channel bandwidth of 21 kHz specified by PDC.
[ADJUST SETTINGS]
Optimize the measurement parameters for the specified channel bandwidth.
[TRACE: DETECTOR:
DETECTOR MAX PEAK]
PDC requires measurement of the occupied bandwidth using a
peak detector. Therefore, switch on the peak detector instead of the
RMS detector selected by ADJUST SETTINGS.
1303.3545.12
4.119
E-1
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
R&S FMU
Measurement of Signal Amplitude Statistics
Digital modulated signals are similar to white noise within the transmit channel, but are different in their
amplitude distribution. In order to transmit the modulated signal without distortion all amplitudes of the
signal have to be transmitted linearly, e. g. from the output power amplifier. Most critical are the peak
amplitude values, of course.
Degradation in transmit quality caused by a transmitter two port network is dependent on the amplitude
of the peak values as well as on their probability.
The probability of amplitude values can be measured with the APD function (Amplitude Probability
Distribution). During a selectable measurement time all occurring amplitude values are assigned to an
amplitude range. The number of amplitude values in the specific ranges is counted and the result is
displayed as a histogram. Each bar of the histogram represents the percentage of measured
amplitudes within the specific amplitude range.
Fig. 4-12
1303.3545.12
Display of the amplitude probability distribution
4.120
E-1
R&S FMU
Fig. 4-13
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
Display of the complementary cumulative distribution function (CCDF)
Alternate to the histogram display of the APD the Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function
(CCDF) can be displayed. It shows the probability of an amplitude exceeding a specific value.
For the APD function the x-axis is scaled in absolute values in dBm, whereas for the CCDF function the
x-axis is scaled relative to the MEAN POWER measured.
Definitions:
Crest factor = peak voltage to rms
CCDF
= complementary cumulative distribution function
Note: During an active statistic measurement the functions FULL SCREEN, SPLIT SCREEN and
selection of the active diagram via SCREEN A / SCREEN B are disabled.
1303.3545.12
4.121
E-1
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
R&S FMU
MEAS SIGNAL STATISTIC submenu :
APD
SIGNAL
STATISTIC
CCPDF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
CCDF
OFF
The SIGNAL STATISTIC softkey opens a
submenu for measurement of signal
statistics.
In the submenu measurement of amplitude
probability density (APD) and complementary
cumulative distribution (CCDF) can be
selected alternately. Only one of the signal
statistic functions can be switched on at a
time.
X-AXIS
REF LEVEL
X-AXIS
RANGE
Y-UNIT
ABS
SELECT
PERCENT
MARKER
MARKER
%
RES BW
Y-AXIS
MAX VALUE
NO OF
SAMPLES
Y-AXIS
MIN VALUE
In default mode all statistic functions are
switched off.
SCALING
The SIGNAL STATISTIC softkey is available
only in zero span mode.
CONT
MEAS
SINGLE
MEAS
DEFAULT
SETTINGS
The R&S FMU measures the statistics of the signal applied to the baseband input with the resolution
bandwidth set. The sample detector is used.
ON
APD
OFF
The APD ON/OFF softkey switches on or off the amplitude probability
distribution function.
When the APD function is switched on, the CCDF function is switched off
automatically.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
ON
CCDF
OFF
The CCDF ON/OFF softkey switches on or off the complementary cumulative
distribution function.
When the CCDF function is switched on, the APD function is switched off
automatically.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
PERCENT
MARKER
CALC:STAT:CCDF ON
If the CCDF function is active, the PERCENT MARKER softkey allows to
position marker 1 by entering a probability value. Thus, the power which is
exceeded with a given probability can be determined very easily.
If marker 1 is in the switched-off state, it will be switched on automatically.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
1303.3545.12
CALC:STAT:APD ON
CALC:MARK:Y:PERC 0...100%
4.122
E-1
R&S FMU
RES BW
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
The RES BW softkey sets the resolution bandwidth in the menu STATISTIC
FUNCTION directly without switching to the corresponding menu (BW). The
function of the softkey is identical to the softkey RES BW MANUAL in the
menu BW.
For correct measurement of the signal statistics the resolution bandwidth has
to be wider than the signal bandwidth in order to transmit the actual peaks of
the signal amplitude correctly. The RBW can be set between 10 kHz and 60
MHz. Rectangular filters are used instead of filters with a Gaussian
characteristic.
Note:
Due to the signal processing with statistic functions the actual
bandwidth differs somewhat from the set resolution bandwidth
(RBW). The actual bandwidth is displayed on screen additionally
as "Usable BW ".
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
NO OF
SAMPLES
BAND 3 MHz
The NO OF SAMPLES softkey sets the number of power measurements taken
into account for the statistics.
Please note that the overall measurement time is influenced by the number of
samples selected as well as by the resolution bandwidth set up for the
measurement as the resolution bandwidth directly influences the sampling rate.
The measurement time is displayed on screen as "AQT" (=acquisition time).
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
CALC:STAT:NSAM <value>
The SCALING softkey opens a sub menu that allows changing the
scaling parameters for both the x- and the y-axis.
1303.3545.12
4.123
E-1
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
X-AXIS
REF LEVEL
R&S FMU
The X-AXIS REF LEVEL softkey changes the level settings of the
instrument and sets the maximum power to be measured.
The function is identical to softkey REF LEVEL in menu AMPT.
For the APD function this value is mapped to the right diagram
border. For the CCDF function there is no direct representation of this
value on the diagram as the x-axis is scaled relatively to the MEAN
POWER measured.
IEC/IEEE command: CALC:STAT:SCAL:X:RLEV <value>
X-AXIS
RANGE
The X-AXIS RANGE softkey changes the level range to be
covered by the statistics measurement selected.
The function is identical to softkey RANGE LOG MANUAL in menu
AMPT.
IEC/IEEE command: CALC:STAT:SCAL:X:RANG <value>
Y-UNIT
%
ABS
The softkey Y-UNIT %/ABS defines the scaling type on the y-axis.
The default case are the absolute probability. This can be changed
to percent values. The softkeys Y-AXIS MIN and Y-AXIS MAX are
using values based on the Y-UNIT setting.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
:CALC:STAT:SCAL:Y:UNIT PCT | ABS
The 0.1 %, 1 % and 10 % value from the CCDF measurement are
shown in the bottom screen half. Those values can also queried via
remote:
Y-AXIS
MAX VALUE
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
:CALC:STAT:CCDF:X? P0_1 | P1 | P10
The Y-AXIS MAX VALUE softkey defines the upper limit of the
displayed probability range.
Values on the y-axis are normalized which means that the
maximum value is 1.0. As the y-axis scaling has a logarithmic axis
the distance between max and min value must be at least one
decade.
IEC/IEEE command: CALC:STAT:SCAL:Y:UPP <value>
Y-AXIS
MIN VALUE
The Y-AXIS MIN VALUE softkey defines the lower limit of the
displayed probability range.
As the y-axis scaling has a logarithmic axis the distance between
max and min value must be at least one decade. Valid values are
in the range 0 < value < 1.
IEC/IEEE command:
DEFAULT
SETTINGS
CALC:STAT:SCAL:Y:LOW <value>
The DEFAULT SETTINGS softkey resets the x- and y-axis
scalings to their PRESET values.
x-axis ref level:
+10 dBm
x-axis range APD: 100 dB
x-axis range CCDF: 20 dB
y-axis upper limit:
y-axis lower limit:
1.0
1E-6
IEC/IEEE-bus command: CALC:STAT:PRES
1303.3545.12
4.124
E-1
R&S FMU
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
CONT
MEAS
The CONT MEAS softkey starts collecting a new sequence of
sample data and calculating the APD or CCDF curve depending on
the selected measurement. The next measurement is started
automatically as soon as the indicated number of samples has
been reached ("CONTinuous MEASurement").
IEC/IEEE-bus command: INIT:CONT ON;
INIT:IMM
SINGLE
MEAS
The SINGLE MEAS softkey starts collecting a new sequence of
sample data and calculating the APD or CCDF curve depending on
the selected measurement. At the beginning of the measurement
previously obtained measurement results are discarded.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: INIT:CONT OFF;
INIT:IMM
Hint for usage of the marker functions with measurement of signal statistics:
With the signal statistic measurement level always is displayed on x-axis. Y-axis always is a normalized
value between 0 and 1. In contrary to use of marker in frequency or time domain marker is input in level
values and the output is in percentage values.
Example:
Measurement of CCDF of a IS95 BTS baseband signal, level 0 dBm
[PRESET]
Switch on preset settings.
The center frequency is zero (baseband) in the default state.
[SPAN: ZERO SPAN]
Set span to 0 Hz (time domain) in order to enable statistic functions.
[AMPT: 10 dBm]
Set reference level to 10 dBm. The reference level must be set higher
than the rms signal power by the expected crest factor.
[MEAS]
Call the menu for measurement functions.
[SIGNAL STATISTIC]
Call the menu for signal statistics measurement.
[CCDF ON /OFF]
Switch on measurement of the complementary cumulative distribution
function. The R&S FMU switches to zero span mode. The power of the
signal and the CCDF is calculated for the number of samples selected.
With the CCDF function sample detector and video bandwidth are set
automatically.
[BW: 3 MHz]
Set resolution bandwidth to 3 MHz (resolution bandwidth shall be wider
then signal bandwidth (1.25 MHz) in order to have the complete signal
within the resolution bandwidth).
[NO OF SAMPLES: 250000]
Set the number of measurement samples to 250000.
[SINGLE MEAS]
Start the measurement sequence. At the end the resulting trace will
display the CCDF for the measured 250000 samples.
1303.3545.12
4.125
E-1
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
R&S FMU
Measurement of Carrier/Noise Ratio C/N and C/No
Using the carrier/noise measurement function, the R&S FMU determines the C/N ratio which can also
be shown normalized to a 1 Hz bandwidth (function C/No).
To determine the noise power, a channel at the set center frequency is examined. The bandwidth of the
channel is fixed by means of the CHANNEL BANDWIDTH function.
The largest signal in the frequency span is the carrier. It is searched when the function is activated and
is marked by means of the REFERENCE FIXED marker. The noise power of the channel is subtracted
from the signal level obtained (C/N), and in the case of a C/No measurement it is referred to a 1 Hz
bandwidth.
There are two methods for measuring the carrier/noise ratio:
1. The carrier is outside the channel examined:
In this case, it is sufficient to switch on the desired measurement function and to set the channel
bandwidth. The carrier/noise ratio is displayed on the screen.
2. The carrier is inside the channel examined:
In this case, the measurement must be performed in two steps. First, the reference measurement is
performed with the carrier being active. This is done by switching on either the C/N or the C/No
measurement and waiting for the end of the next measurement run . Then, the carrier is switched off so
that only the noise of the test setup is active in the channel. The carrier/noise ratio is displayed after the
subsequent measurement has been completed.
The ADJUST SETTINGS function facilitates the selection of the frequency span appropriate for the
channel bandwidth: it automatically sets the SPAN to approx. 2 x channel bandwidth.
The RMS detector is enabled when the power measurement is switched on (TRACE-DETECTORRMS).
Submenu MEAS – C/N, C/No:
C/N
C/No
The C/N, C/No softkey opens the submenu for configuring the
carrier/noise ratio measurement.
C/N
The user can choose between measurement without (C/N) and
measurement with reference to the bandwidth (C/No). In addition,
it is possible to select the bandwidth of the channel and to adapt
the span.
C/No
CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH
Note:
The measurements are only available in the
frequency domain (span >0).
F
ADJUST
SETTINGS
1303.3545.12
4.126
E-1
R&S FMU
C/N
C/No
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
The C/N and C/No softkeys enable and disable the measurement of the
carrier/noise ratio, the C/No measurement also being referred to a 1 Hz
bandwidth.
The maximum value of the current trace is determined when the function is
activated and is marked by means of the REFERENCE FIXED marker.
The measurements are only available in the frequency domain (span > 0). The
MAGNITUDE display mode must be active.
The measurement can be performed with every window function. However, a
warning is output if the measurement is started when a window function other
than the flattop window is active. This is because the measurement result for the
carrier might be too low if the flattop window function is not selected.
Note:
The measurement is performed on the trace where MARKER 1 is
located. To measure another trace, MARKER 1 has to be shifted to
the trace in question using the SELECT TRACE softkey in the MKR
menu.
If no marker is active, MARKER 1 is activated when the function is
switched on.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL CN
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? CN
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL CN0
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? CN0
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW OFF
CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH
The CHANNEL BANDWIDTH softkey opens a window for selecting the
measurement channel bandwidth.
The default setting is 14 kHz.
The specified channel bandwidth allows the optimal setting of the measurement
parameters of the R&S FMU using ADJUST SETTINGS.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:SENS:POW:ACH:BWID 14kHz
ADJUST
SETTINGS
The ADJUST SETTINGS softkey adapts the span to the channel bandwidth
selected.
For the carrier/noise ratio measurement, the span is set to:
2 x channel bandwidth
The adjustment is performed once; if necessary, the setting can be changed
later on.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: SENS:POW:ACH:PRES CN | CN0
1303.3545.12
4.127
E-1
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
R&S FMU
Measurement of the AM Modulation Depth
MODULATION
DEPTH
The MODULATION DEPTH softkey switches on the measurement of the AM
modulation depth. An AM-modulated carrier is required on the screen for
ensuring correct operation.
The level value of MARKER 1 is taken as the carrier level. When this
function is activated, MARKER 2 and MARKER 3 are automatically set
symmetrically to the carrier on the adjacent peak values of the trace as delta
markers and MARKER 2 is activated for the entry.
When the position of MARKER 2 (delta) is changed, MARKER 3 (delta) is
moved symmetrically with respect to the reference marker (MARKER 1).
If the data entry is activated for MARKER 3 (MARKER 1 2 3 4 softkey), the
latter can be moved for fine adjustment irrespective of MARKER 2.
The R&S FMU calculates the power at the marker positions from the
measured levels. The AM modulation depth is calculated from the ratio
between the power values at the reference marker and at the delta markers.
When the powers of the two AM side bands are unequal, the mean value of
the two power values is used for AM modulation depth calculation.
The measurements are only available in the frequency domain (span > 0).
The MAGNITUDE or MAGNITUDE PHASE display mode must be active.
The measurement can be performed with every window function. However, a
warning is output if the measurement is started when a window function other
than the flattop window is active. This is because the measurement result for
the carriers might be too low if the flattop window function is not selected.
Measurement example:
The AM modulation depth of an IF signal modulated with 1 kHz is to be
measured at 10 MHz.
[PRESET]
The R&S FMU is set to the default setting.
[FREQ: 10 MHz]
The center frequency is set to 10 MHz.
[SPAN: 5 kHz]
The span is set to 5 kHz.
[MEAS: MODULATION DEPTH: 1 kHz]
The measurement of the AM modulation depth is
switched on. Marker 1 is positioned at the maximum
of the displayed trace.
MARKERS 2 and 3 (delta markers) are set to the
adjacent peak values of the trace and are activated
for the frequency entry.
The AM modulation depth is output in % in the
marker info field.
When 1 kHz is entered, MARKER 2 can be exactly
positioned on 1 kHz and MARKER 3 at -1 kHz from
the reference marker.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: CALC:MARK:FUNC:MDEP ON;
CALC:MARK:FUNC:MDEP:RES?
1303.3545.12
4.128
E-1
R&S FMU
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
Measurement of the Third Order Intercept (TOI)
If several signals are applied to a transmission twoport device with nonlinear characteristic,
intermodulation products appear at its output by the sums and differences of the signals. The nonlinear
characteristic produces harmonics of the useful signals which intermodulate at the characteristic. The
intermodulation products of lower order have a special effect since their level is largest and they are
near the useful signals. The intermodulation product of third order causes the highest interference. It is
the intermodulation product generated from one of the useful signals and the 2nd harmonic of the
second useful signal in case of two-tone modulation.
The frequencies of the intermodulation products are above and below the useful signals. Fig. 4-14
shows intermodulation products PI1 and PI2 generated by the two useful signals PU1 and PU2.
P
U1
Level
P
U2
a D3
PI2
PI1
f
f
I1
Fig. 4-14
f
f
U1
f
f
U2
Frequency
f
I2
Intermodulation products PU1 and PU2
The intermodulation product at fI2 is generated by mixing the 2nd harmonic of useful signal PU2 and
signal PU1, the intermodulation product at fI1 by mixing the 2nd harmonic of useful signal PU1 and signal
PU2.
fi1 = 2 x fu1 - fu2
(1)
fi2 = 2 x fu2 - fu1
(2)
The level of the intermodulation products depends on the level of the useful signals. If the two useful
signals are increased by 1 dB, the level of the intermodulation products increases by 3 dB, which
means that spacing aD3 between intermodulation signals and useful signals is reduced by 2 dB. This is
illustrated in Fig. 4-15.
1303.3545.12
4.129
E-1
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
R&S FMU
Intercept point
Output
level
Compression
Intermodulation
product
Useful signal
3
1
1
1
Input level
Fig. 4-15
Dependence of intermodulation level on useful signal level
The useful signals at the twoport output increase proportionally with the input level as long as the
twoport is in the linear range. A level change of 1 dB at the input causes a level change of 1 dB at the
output. Beyond a certain input level, the twoport goes into compression and the output level stops
increasing. The intermodulation products of the third order increase three times as much as the useful
signals. The intercept point is the fictitious level where the two lines intersect. It cannot be measured
directly since the useful level is previously limited by the maximum twoport output power.
It can be calculated from the known line slopes and the measured spacing aD3 at a given level
according to the following formula.
IP 3 =
aD 3
+ PN
2
(3)
rd
The 3 order intercept point (TOI), for example, is calculated for an intermodulation of 60 dB and an
input level PU of -20 dBm according to the following formula:
IP 3 =
60
+ ( 20dBm ) = 10dBm .
2
(4)
rd
TOI
The TOI softkey enables the measurement of the 3 order intercept point.
A two-tone signal with equal carrier levels is expected at the R&S FMU input.
MARKER 1 and MARKER 2 (both normal markers) are set to the maximum
of the two signals. MARKER 3 and MARKER 4 (both delta markers) are
placed on the intermodulation products. When the function is enabled, the
frequency entry is activated for the delta markers. They can be set manually.
The R&S FMU calculates the third order intercept from the level spacing
between normal markers and delta markers and outputs it in the marker info
field.
The measurements are only available in the frequency domain (span > 0).
The MAGNITUDE or MAGNITUDE PHASE display mode must be active.
The measurement can be performed with every window function. However, a
warning is output if the measurement is started when a window function other
than the flattop window is active. This is because the measurement result for
the carriers might be too low if the flattop window function is not selected.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
1303.3545.12
4.130
CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI ON;
CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI:RES?
E-1
R&S FMU
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
Example:
A two-tone signal with frequencies of 10 MHz and 11 MHz is applied to the I
input of the R&S FMU. The level of the two signals is 0 dBm.
SELECT
MARKER
[PRESET]
The R&S FMU is set to the default setting.
[CENTER: 10.5 MHz]
The center frequency is set to 10.5 MHz.
[SPAN: 3 MHz]
The span is set to 3 MHz.
[AMPT: 10 dBm]
The reference level is set to 10 dBm.
[MEAS: NEXT: TOI]
The R&S FMU sets the 4 markers to the useful
signals and the intermodulation products and
calculates the third order intercept. The result is
output in the marker info field.
The SELECT MARKER softkey activates the selection of a marker for
functions MODULATION DEPTH and TOI. Thus, the markers can be fineadjusted for these functions.
The markers are numerically selected in a data entry field. Delta marker 1 is
selected by entering '0'.
If the marker is in the switch-off state, it will be switched on and can thus be
shifted.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:CALC:MARK1 ON;
CALC:MARK1:X <value>;
CALC:MARK1:Y?
1303.3545.12
4.131
E-1
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
R&S FMU
Setup of Limit Lines and Display Lines – LINES Key
Limit lines are used to define amplitude curves or spectral distribution boundaries on the display screen
which are not to be exceeded. They indicate, for example, the upper limits for interference radiation or
spurious waves which are allowed from a unit under test (UUT). For transmission of information in
TDMA (e.g. GSM), the amplitude of the bursts in a timeslot must adhere to a curve which must fall
within a specified tolerance band. The lower and upper limits may each be specified by a limit line.
Then, the amplitude curve can be controlled either visually or automatically for any violations of the
upper or lower limits (GO/NOGO test).
• The instrument supports limit lines with a maximum of 50 data points. 8 of the limit lines stored in the
instrument can be used simultaneously and activated in the split-screen mode either in Screen A,
Screen B or in the two windows. The number of limit lines stored in the instrument is only limited by the
capacity of the flash disk used.
• For each limit line, the following characteristics must be defined:
• • The name of the limit line. The limit line data are stored under this name and can be examined in
the table LIMIT LINES.
• The domain in which the limit line is to be used. Here, a distinction is made between the time domain
(span = 0 Hz) and the frequency domain (span > 0 Hz).
• The reference of the interpolation points to the X axis. The limit line may be specified either for
absolute frequencies or times or for frequencies which are related to the set center frequency and
times related to the time on the left edge of the diagram.
• The reference of the interpolation points to the Y axis. The limit line can be selected either for
absolute levels or voltages or referred to the set maximum level (Ref Lvl). The position on the
display depends on the REF LEVEL POSITION.
• With relative reference values for the Y axis, it is possible to enter an absolute threshold
(THRESHOLD) which lowers the relative limit values (see below).
• The type of limit line (upper or lower limit). With this information and the active limit checking function
(Table LIMIT LINES, LIMIT CHECK ON, the R&S FMU checks for compliance with each limit.
• The limit line units to be used. The units of the limit line must be compatible with the level axis in the
active measurement window.
• The measurement curve (trace) to which the limit line is assigned. For the R&S FMU, this defines
the curve to which the limit is to be applied when several traces are simultaneously displayed.
• For each limit line, a margin can be defined which serves as a threshold for automatic evaluation.
• In addition, commentary can be written for each limit line, e.g. a description of the application.
Display lines are exclusively used to optically mark relevant frequencies or points in time (span = 0) as
well as constant level values. It is not possible to check automatically whether the marked level values
have been underranged or exceeded.
1303.3545.12
4.132
E-1
R&S FMU
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
Selection of Limit Lines
The LINES key opens the menu for fixing the limit lines and the display lines.
LINES menu
LINES
SELECT
LIMIT LINE
NAME
NEW LIMIT
LINE
DISPLAY
LINE 1
VALUES
EDIT LIMIT
LINE
DISPLAY
LINE 2
INSERT
VALUE
COPY
LIMIT LINE
FREQUENCY
LINE 1
DELETE
VALUE
DELETE
LIMIT LINE
FREQUENY
LINE 2
SHIFT X
LIMIT LINE
X OFFSET
TIME
LINE 1
Y OFFSET
TIME
LINE 2
DISPLAY
LINES
PHASE
LINE 1
RESTORE
GSM LINES
PHASE
LINE 2
SHIFT Y
LIMIT LINE
SAVE
LIMIT LINE
LINES
1303.3545.12
4.133
E-1
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
R&S FMU
The SELECTED LIMIT LINE display field provides information concerning the characteristics of the
marked limit lines.
In the LIMIT LINES table, the limit lines compatible to the settings of the active screen can be enabled.
New limit lines can be specified and edited in the NEW LIMIT LINE and EDIT LIMIT LINE sub-menus,
respectively.
The horizontal and vertical lines of the DISPLAY LINES submenu mark individual levels or frequencies
(span > 0) or times (span = 0) in the diagram.
The SELECTED LIMIT LINE table provides information about the
characteristics of the marked limit line :
Name
Domain
Unit
X-Axis
Limit
X-Scaling
Y-Scaling
Threshold
Comment
name
frequency or time
vertical scale
interpolation
upper/lower limit
absolute or relative frequencies/times
absolute or relative Y units
absolute limit with relative Y units
commentary
The characteristics of the limit line are set in the EDIT LIMIT LINE (=NEW
LIMIT LINE) sub-menu.
SELECT
LIMIT LINE
The SELECT LIMIT LINE softkey activates the LIMIT LINES table and the
selection bar jumps to the uppermost name in the table.
The following information is offered in the columns of the table:
Name
Compatible
Limit Check
Trace
Margin
Enable the limit line.
Indicates if the limit line is compatible with the measurement
window of the given trace.
Activate automatic violation check for upper/lower limits.
Select the measurement curve to which the limit is assigned.
Define margin.
Name and Compatible - Enabling limit lines
A maximum of 8 limit lines can be enabled at any one time. In split screen
mode, they may be assigned to screen A, screen B or to both screens. A
check mark at the left edge of a cell indicates that this limit line is enabled.
A limit line can only be enabled when it has a check mark in the Compatible
column, i.e. only when the horizontal display (time or frequency) and vertical
scales are identical to those of the display in the measurement window.
Lines with the unit dB are compatible to all dB(..) settings of the Y axis.
If the scale of the y axis or the domain (frequency or time axis) are changed,
all non-compatible limit lines are automatically switched off in order to avoid
misinterpretation. The limit lines must be enabled anew when the original
display is re-displayed.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
1303.3545.12
4.134
CALC:LIM3:NAME "GSM1"
CALC:LIM3:UPP:STAT ON
CALC:LIM4:LOW:STAT ON
E-1
R&S FMU
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
Limit Check - Activate automatic limit violation check
When LIMIT CHECK ON is activated, a GO/NOGO test is performed in the
active screen. In the center of the diagram, a display window appears which
indicates the results of the limit check test:
LIMIT CHECK: PASSED
No violations of active limits.
LIMIT CHECK: FAILED
One or more active limit lines were violated. The
message contains the names of the limit lines
which were violated or whose margins were not
complied with.
LIMIT CHECK: MARGIN
The margin of at least one active limit lines was
not complied with, however, no limit line was
violated. The message contains the names of the
limit lines whose margins were not complied
with.
The following example shows two active limit lines:
LIMIT CHECK: FAILED
LINE VHF_MASK: Failed
LINE UHF2MASK: Margin
A check for violations of limit lines takes place only if the limit line of the
assigned measurement curve (trace) is enabled.
If LIM CHECK is set to OFF for all active limit lines, then the limit line check
is not executed and the display window is activated.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
Trace -
CALC:LIM:STAT ON
INIT;*WAI
CALC:LIM:FAIL?
Select the measurement curve to which the limit line is
assigned.
The selection of the measurement curve (trace) takes place in an entry
window. Allowed are the integer entries 1, 2 or 3. The default setting is trace
1. If the selected limit line is not compatible with the assigned measurement
curve, then the limit line is disabled (display and limit check).
IEC/IEEE-bus command:CALC:LIM:TRAC 1
EDIT LIMIT
LINE
See following Section "Entry and Editing of Limit Lines".
NEW LIMIT
LINE
COPY
LIMIT LINE
The COPY LIMIT LINE softkey copies the data file describing the marked limit
line and saves it under a new name. In this way, a new limit line can be easily
generated by parallel translation or editing of an existing limit line. The name
can be arbitrarily chosen and input via an entry window (max. of 8 characters).
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
1303.3545.12
4.135
CALC:LIM3:COPY 2
CALC:LIM3:COPY "GSM2"
or
E-1
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
DELETE
LIMIT LINE
R&S FMU
The DELETE LIMIT LINE softkey erases the selected limit line. Before
deletion, a message appears requesting confirmation.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:CALC:LIM3:DEL
X OFFSET
The X OFFSET softkey horizontally shifts a limit line, which has been
specified for relative frequencies or times (X axis). The softkey opens an
entry window, where the value for shifting may be entered numerically or via
the rollkey.
Note:
This softkey does not have any effect on limit lines that represent
absolute values for the X axis.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:CALC:LIM3:CONT:OFFS 10kHz
Y OFFSET
The Y OFFSET softkey vertically shifts a limit line, which has relative values
for the Y axis (levels or linear units such as volt). The softkey opens an entry
window where the value for shifting may be entered numerically or via the
rollkey.
Note:
This softkey does not have any effect on limit lines that represent
absolute values for the Y axis.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
1303.3545.12
4.136
CALC:LIM3:LOW:OFFS 3dB
CALC:LIM3:UPP:OFFS 3dB
E-1
R&S FMU
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
Entry and Editing of Limit Lines
A limit line is characterized by
• its name
• the assignment of domain (frequency or time)
• the scaling in absolute or relative times or frequencies
• he vertical unit
• the interpolation
• the vertical scaling
• the vertical threshold (only with relative vertical scaling)
• the margin
• the definition of the limit line as either upper or lower limit.
• the data points for frequency/time and level.
At the time of entry, the R&S FMU immediately checks that all limit lines are in accordance with certain
guidelines. These guidelines must be observed if specified operation is to be guaranteed.
• The frequencies/times for each data point must be entered in ascending order, however, for any
single frequency/time, two data points may be input (vertical segment of a limit line).
• The data points are allocated in order of ascending frequency/time. Gaps are not allowed. If gaps
are desired, two separate limit lines must be defined and then both enabled.
1303.3545.12
4.137
E-1
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
R&S FMU
• The entered frequencies/times need not necessarily be selectable in R&S FMU. A limit line may also
exceed the specified frequency or time domains. The minimum frequency for a data point is
-200 GHz, the maximum frequency is 200 GHz. For the time domain representation, negative times
may also be entered. The valid range is -1000 s to +1000 s.
• The minimum/maximum value for a limit line is -200 dB to +200 dB for the logarithmic or 10-20 to
10+20 or -99.9% to + 999.9% for the linear amplitude scales.
LINES - EDIT LIMIT LINE menu
EDIT LIMIT
LINE
NEW LIMIT
LINE
The EDIT LIMIT LINE and NEW LIMIT LINE softkeys both call the EDIT
LIMIT LINE sub-menu used for editing limit lines. In the table heading, the
characteristics of the limit line can be entered. The data points for
frequency/time and level values are entered in the columns.
Name
Domain
Unit
X-Axis
Limit
X-Scaling
Y-Scaling
Margin
Threshold
Comment
Time/Frequency
Limit/dBm
Note:
NAME
Enter name.
Select domain.
Select units.
Select interpolation
Select upper and lower limit value.
Entry of absolute or relative values for the X axis
Entry of absolute or relative values for the Y axis
Entry of margin.
Entry of vertical threshold (only with relative vertical
scaling)
Enter comments.
Enter time/frequency for the data points.
Enter magnitudes for the data points.
Domain, unit, X scaling and Y scaling cannot be modified as
soon as reference values have been entered in the data section
of the table.
The NAME softkey enables the entry of characteristics in the table heading.
Name - Enter name
A maximum of 8 characters is permitted for each name. All names must be
compatible with the MS DOS conventions for file names. The instrument
stores all limit lines with the .LIM extension.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: CALC:LIM3:NAME "GSM1"
Domain - Select time or frequency domain
The default setting is frequency.
Note: A change in domain (frequency/time) is only permitted when the data
point table is empty.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: CALC:LIM3:CONT:DOM FREQ
1303.3545.12
4.138
E-1
R&S FMU
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
X Axis - Select interpolation
Linear or logarithmic interpolation can be carried out between the frequency
reference points of the table. The ENTER key toggles between LIN and LOG
selection.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
CALC:LIM3:CONT:SPAC LIN
CALC:LIM3:UPP:SPAC LIN
CALC:LIM3:LOW:SPAC LIN
Scaling - selection of absolute or relative scaling
The limit line can either be scaled in absolute (frequency or time) or relative
units. Any of the unit keys may be used to toggle between ABSOLUTE and
RELATIVE, the cursor must be positioned in the X Scaling or the Y Scaling line.
X-Scaling ABSOLUTE
The frequencies or times are interpreted as
absolute physical units.
X-Scaling RELATIVE
In the data point table, the frequencies are referred
to the currently set center frequency. In time
domain mode, the left boundary of the diagram
constitutes the reference.
Y-Scaling ABSOLUTE
The limit values refer to absolute levels or
voltages.
Y-Scaling RELATIVE
The limit values refer to the reference level (Ref
Level) or, in case a reference line is set, to the
reference line.
Limit values with the unit dB are always relative
values.
The RELATIVE scaling is always suitable, if masks for bursts are to be
defined in the time domain, or if masks for modulated signals are required in
the frequency domain.
An X offset with half the sweep time may be entered in order to shift the
mask in the time domain into the center of screen.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
CALC:LIM3:CONT:MODE ABS
CALC:LIM3:UPP:MODE ABS
CALC:LIM3:LOW:MODE ABS
Unit - Select the vertical scale units for the limit line
The selection of units takes place in a selection box. The default setting is dBm.
UNITS
VERTICAL SCALE
dB
dBm
%
dBuV
dBmV
dBuA
dBpW
V
A
W
dBuV/MHz
dBmV/MHz
dBuA/MHz
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
1303.3545.12
4.139
CALC:LIM3:UNIT DBM
E-1
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
R&S FMU
Limit - Select upper/lower limit
A limit line can be defined as either an upper or lower limit.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:-(defined by key words :UPPer or :LOWer)
Margin - Setting a margin.
The margin is defined as the signal-level distance to the limit line. When the
limit line is defined as an upper limit, the margin means that the level is below
the limit line. When the limit line is defined as a lower limit, the margin means
that the level is above the limit line. The default setting is 0 dB (i.e. no
margin).
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
CALC:LIM3:UPP:MARG 10dB
CALC:LIM3:LOW:MARG 10dB
Threshold – Selection of the threshold value with relative Y scaling
With relative Y scaling, an absolute threshold value can be defined which
lowers the relative limit values. The function is useful especially for mobile
radio applications provided the limit values are defined in relation to the
carrier power as long as they are above an absolute limit value.
Example:
The preset value is at -200 dBm. The field is displayed if the value
RELATIVE is entered in the field Y-SCALING.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
CALC:LIM3:UPP:THR -30 dBm
or
CALC:LIM3:LOW:THR -30 dBm
Comment - Enter comments
Comments are arbitrary, however, they must be less than 41 characters long.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
1303.3545.12
4.140
CALC:LIM3:COMM "Upper limit"
E-1
R&S FMU
VALUES
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
The VALUES softkey activates the entry of the data points in the table
columns Time/Frequency and Limit/dB. Which table columns appear
depends upon the Domain selection in the table heading.
The desired frequency/time data points are entered in ascending order (two
repeated frequencies/time values are permitted).
IEC/IEEE-bus command: CALC:LIM3:CONT:DATA 1MHz,3MHz,30MHz
CALC:LIM3:UPP:DATA -10,0,0
CALC:LIM3:LOW:DATA -30,-40,-40
INSERT
VALUE
The INSERT VALUE softkey creates an empty line above the current cursor
position where a new data point may be entered. However, during the entry
of new values, it is necessary to observe an ascending order for
frequency/time.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: --
DELETE
VALUE
The DELETE VALUE softkey erases the data point (complete line) at the
cursor position. All succeeding data points are shifted down accordingly.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: --
SHIFT X
LIMIT LINE
The SHIFT X LIMIT LINE softkey calls an entry window where the complete
limit line may be shifted parallel in the horizontal direction.
The shift takes place according to the horizontal scale:
• in the frequency domain in Hz, kHz, MHz or GHz
• in the time domain in ns, Ds, ms or s
In this manner, a new limit line can be easily generated based upon an
existing limit line which has been shifted horizontally and stored (SAVE LIMIT
LINE softkey) under a new name (NAME softkey).
IEC/IEEE-bus command: CALC:LIM3:CONT:SHIF 50KHz
SHIFT Y
LIMIT LINE
The SHIFT Y LIMIT LINE softkey calls an entry window where the complete
limit line may be shifted parallel in the vertical direction.
The shift takes place according to the vertical scale:
• for logarithmic units, relative, in dB
• for linear units, as a factor
In this manner, a new limit line can be easily generated based upon an
existing limit line which has been shifted vertically and stored (SAVE LIMIT
LINE softkey) under a new name (NAME softkey).
IEC/IEEE-bus command: CALC:LIM3:CONT:UPP:SHIF 20dB
CALC:LIM3:CONT:LOW:SHIF 20dB
SAVE
LIMIT LINE
The SAVE LIMIT LINE softkey stores the currently edited limit line . The
name can be entered in an input window (max. 8 characters)
IEC/IEEE-bus command: --
1303.3545.12
4.141
E-1
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
R&S FMU
Display Lines
Display lines help to evaluate a trace – as do markers. The function of a display line is comparable to
that of a ruler that can be shifted on the trace in order to mark absolute values.
The R&S FMU provides two different types of display lines :
• two horizontal level lines for marking levels or phase values – Display Line 1/2, Phase Line 1/2
• two vertical frequency or time lines for marking frequencies or points in time – Frequency/Time Line
1/2.
Each line is identified by one of the following abbreviations:
D1 Display Line 1
D2 Display Line 2
F1 Frequency Line 1
F2 Frequency Line 2
T1 Time Line 1
T2 Time Line 2
P1 Phase Line 1
P2 Phase Line 2
The level lines and phase lines are continuous horizontal lines across the entire width of a diagram and
can be shifted in y direction.
The frequency or time lines are continuous vertical lines across the entire height of the diagram and can
be shifted in x direction.
The DISPLAY LINES submenu for activating and setting the display lines appears different depending
on the display mode set in the active measurement window (frequency or time domain).
If the spectrum is shown (span 0) the TIME LINE 1 and TIME LINE 2 softkeys are disabled, whereas
in the time domain (span = 0) the FREQUENCY LINE 1 and FREQUENCY LINE 2 softkeys are not
available. PHASE LINE 1 and PHASE LINE 2 softkeys are only available in the frequency domain with
magnitude & phase display.
Note:
The softkeys for setting and switching the display lines on/off work like triple switches:
Initial situation: The line is off (softkey with gray background)
1st press: The line is switched on (softkey with red background) and the data input
function is activated. The position of the display line can be selected by
means of the rollkey, the step keys or a numerical entry in the appropriate
field. The data input function is disabled if another function is activated. The
line, however, remains switched on (softkey with green background).
2nd press: The line is switched off (softkey with gray background).
Initial situation: The line is on (softkey with green background)
1st press: The data input function is activated (softkey with red background). The
position of the display line can be selected by means of the rollkey, the step
keys or a numerical entry in the appropriate field. The data input function is
disabled if another function is activated. The line, however, remains switched
on (softkey with green background).
2nd press: The line is switched off (softkey with gray background).
1303.3545.12
4.142
E-1
R&S FMU
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
LINES menu
DISPLAY
LINES
DISPLAY
LINE 1
DISPLAY
LINE 2
FREQUENCY
LINE 1
FREQUENCY
LINE 2
TIME
LINE 1
TIME
LINE 2
PHASE
LINE 1
PHASE
LINE 2
DISPLAY
LINE 1
Frequency Domain
(Span > 0 Hz)
Time Domain
(Span = 0 Hz)
Frequency Domain
Magnitude & Phase
The DISPLAY LINE 1/2 softkeys enable or disable the level lines and allow the user to
enter the position of the lines.
The level lines mark the selected level in the measurement window.
DISPLAY
LINE 2
FREQUENCY
LINE 1
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
CALC:DLIN:STAT ON
CALC:DLIN -20dBm
The FREQUENCY LINE 1/2 softkeys enable or disable the frequency lines 1/2 and
allow the user to enter the position of the lines.
The frequency lines mark the selected frequencies in the measurement window.
FREQUENCY
LINE 2
Note:
The two softkeys cannot be used in the time domain (span = 0).
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
TIME
LINE 1
CALC:FLIN:STAT ON
CALC:FLIN 120MHz
The TIME LINE 1/2 softkeys enable or disable the time lines 1/ and allow the user to
enter the position of the lines.
The time lines mark the selected times or define search ranges (see section "Marker
Functions ").
TIME
LINE 2
Note:
The two softkeys cannot be used in the frequency domain (span > 0).
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
1303.3545.12
CALC:TLIN:STAT ON
CALC:TLIN 10ms
4.143
E-1
Power Measurements – MEAS Key
PHASE
LINE 1
PHASE
LINE 2
R&S FMU
The PHASE LINE 1/2 softkeys activate/deactivate phase lines 1/2 and
activate entry of the line position.
The phase lines mark the selected phases in the measurement window.
Entries are made in the currently selected phase unit.
The line is adapted automatically if the unit is changed using the PHASE
RAD/DEG softkey in the AMPT menu.
The line will, however, not be adapted automatically if the phase offset is
changed using the PHASE OFFSET softkey in the AMPT menu.
Note:
The softkeys are only available in the frequency domain for the
MAGNITUDE PHASE measurement.
IEC/IEEE bus command: CALC:PLIN1:STAT ON
CALC:PLIN1 120DEG
CALC:PLIN2:STAT ON
CALC:PLIN2 140deg
1303.3545.12
4.144
E-1
R&S FMU
Configuration of Screen Display – DISP Key
Configuration of Screen Display – DISP Key
The DISPLAY menu allows the configuration of the diagram display on the screen and also the
selection of the display elements and colors. The POWER SAVE mode is also configured in this menu
for the display.
The test results are displayed on the screen of the R&S FMU either in a full-screen window or in two
overlapping windows. The two windows are called diagram A and diagram B.
In the FFT Analyzer, two measurement windows are not designed to be completely decoupled from
each other, i.e. they are not intended to behave like two completely independent instruments (SPLIT
SCREEN operation).
Although there are measurements with a split screen, they draw their data from the same
measurement.
New settings are performed in the diagram selected via hotkey SCREEN A or SCREEN B. If only one
window is displayed, it is the diagram in which the measurements are performed; the diagram not
displayed is not active for measurements.
The DISP key opens the menu for configuring the screen display and selecting the active diagram in
SPLIT SCREEN mode.
LINES
DISP
FILE
SCREEN
TITLE
FULL
SCREEN
SPLIT
SCREEN
SELECT
OBJECT
TIME+DATE
ON
OFF
BRIGHTNESS
LOGO
ON
OFF
TINT
ANNOTATION
ON
OFF
SATURATION
DATA ENTRY
OPAQUE
DEFAULT
COLORS 1
PREDEFINED
COLORS
DEFAULT
COLORS 2
DISPLAY
PWR SAVE
CONFIG
DISPLAY
In the FFT Analyzer the full screen or split screen display is coupled to the
measurement mode and not selectable by the user.
SPLIT
SCREEN
1303.3545.12
Full Screen:
Frequency Domain Magnitude
Time Domain Magnitude
Split Screen:
Frequency Domain Magnitude&Phase, Real&Imag
Time Domain Voltage
4.145
E-1
Configuration of Screen Display – DISP Key
CONFIG
DISPLAY
SCREEN
TITLE
The CONFIG DISPLAY softkey opens a submenu
allowing additional display items to be added to the
screen. In addition, the display power-save mode
(DISPLAY PWR SAVE) and the colors of the
display elements can be set here.
SELECT
OBJECT
TIME+DATE
ON
OFF
BRIGHTNESS
LOGO
ON
OFF
TINT
ANNOTATION
ON
OFF
SATURATION
R&S FMU
DATA ENTRY
OPAQUE
DEFAULT
COLORS 1
PREDEFINED
COLORS
DEFAULT
COLORS 2
DISPLAY
PWR SAVE
SCREEN
TITLE
The SCREEN TITLE softkey activates the entry of a title for the active diagram A or
B. It switches on or off a title that is already input. The length of the title is limited to
max. 20 characters.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
TIME+DATE
ON
OFF
The TIME+DATE ON/OFF softkey switches on or off the display of date and time
above the diagram.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
ON
LOGO
OFF
DISP:ANN:FREQ ON
The DATAENTRY OPAQUE softkey sets the data entry windows to opaque. This
means that entry windows are underlayed with the background color for tables.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
1303.3545.12
DISP:LOGO ON
The ANNOTATION ON/OFF softkey switches the displaying of frequency
information on the screen on and off.
ON Frequency information is displayed.
OFF Frequency information is not outputted to the display. This can be used for
example to protect confidential data.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
DATAENTRY
OPAQUE
DISP:TIME OFF
The LOGO ON/OFF softkey switches the Rohde & Schwarz company logo
displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen on or off.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
ANNOTATION
ON
OFF
DISP:WIND1:TEXT 'Noise Meas'
DISP:WIND1:TEXT:STATe ON
--
4.146
E-1
R&S FMU
DEFAULT
COLORS 1
DEFAULT
COLORS 2
DISPLAY
PWR SAVE
Configuration of Screen Display – DISP Key
The DEFAULT COLORS 1 and 2 softkey restores the default settings for
brightness, color tint and color saturation for all display screen elements.
The color schemes have been selected to give optimum visibility of all picture
elements at an angle of vision from above or below. DEFAULT COLORS 1 is active
in the default setting of the instrument.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
DISP:CMAP:DEF1
DISP:CMAP:DEF2
The DISPLAY PWR SAVE softkey is used to switch on/off the power-save mode for
the display and to enter the time for the power-save function to respond. After the
elapse of this time the display is completely switched off, i.e. including backlighting.
Note:
This mode is recommended for saving the TFT display especially when
the instrument is exclusively operated in remote control.
The power-save mode is configured as follows:
• The first keystroke activates the power-save mode and opens the editor for the
response time (POWER SAVE TIMEOUT). The response time is entered in
minutes between 1 and 6 minutes and is confirmed by ENTER.
• The power-save mode is deactivated by pressing the key again.
On leaving the menu with the power-save mode in the activated state, the softkey is
highlighted in color on returning to the menu and opens again the editor for the
response time. Pressing again the key switches off the power-save mode.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: DISP:PSAV ON
DISP:PSAV:HOLD 15
SELECT
OBJECT
The SELECT OBJECT softkey activates the SELECT DISPLAY OBJECT table, with
which a graphics element can be selected. After selection, the brightness, tint and
saturation of the selected element can be changed using the softkeys of the same
name. The color changes by means of the PREDEFINED COLORS softkey can be
seen immediately on the display screen.
SE LECT D ISPLA Y O BJ EC T
Background
Grid
Function field + status field + data entry text
Function field LED on
Function field LED warn
Enhancement label text
Status field background
Trace 1
Trace 2
Trace 3
Marker
Lines
Measurement status + limit check pass
Limit check fail
Table + softkey text
Table + softkey background
Table selected field text
Table selected field background
Table + data entry field opaq titlebar
Data entry field opaq text
Data entry field opaq background
3D shade bright part
3D shade dark part
Softkey state on
Softkey state data entry
Logo
1303.3545.12
4.147
E-1
Configuration of Screen Display – DISP Key
BRIGHTNESS
R&S FMU
The BRIGHTNESS softkey activates entry of the brightness of the selected graphics
element.
Values between 0 and 100% can be entered.
IEC/IEEE-bus: DISP:CMAP3:HSL< hue>,<sat>,<lum>
SATURATION
The SATURATION softkey activates the entry of the color saturation for the selected
element.
The range of inputs is from 0 to 100%.
IEC/IEEE-bus: DISP:CMAP3:HSL <hue>,<sat>,<lum>
PREDEFINED
COLORS
The PREDEFINED COLORS softkey activates a table, with which the predefined
colors for the display screen elements can be selected.
COLOR
BLACK
BLUE
BROWN
GREEN
CYAN
RED
MAGENTA
YELLOW
WHITE
GRAY
LIGHT
LIGHT
LIGHT
LIGHT
LIGHT
LIGHT
GRAY
BLUE
GREEN
CYAN
RED
MAGENTA
IEC/IEEE-bus command: DISP:CMAP1 to 26:PDEF <color>
1303.3545.12
4.148
E-1
R&S FMU
Configuration/Setup
Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key
The SETUP key opens the menu for configuration of the R&S FMU:
REFERENCE
INT
EXT
SETUP
FIRMWARE
UPDATE
GPIB
ADDRESS
FIRMWARE
UPDATE
ID STRING
FACTORY
RESTORE
FIRMWARE
SIGNAL
SOURCE
ID STRING
USER
UPDATE
PATH
BASEBAND
ANALOG
VIE
I/Q WINPUT
50
1M
GENERAL
SETUP
SYSTEM
INFO
SERVICE
I+j*Q
BALANCED
ON
OFF
I ONLY
LOW PASS
36 MHz
Q ONLY
DITHER
ON
OFF
SOFT
FRONTPANEL
GPIB
INSTALL
OPTION
REMOVE
OPTION
HARDWARE
INFO
COM
INTERFACE
STATISTICS
TIME +
DATE
SYSTEM
MESSAGES
CONFIGURE
NETWORK
SELFTEST
SELFTEST
RESULTS
FSP
B16
FSP
B16
NETWORK
LOGIN
CLEAR ALL
MESSAGES
FSPB16
FSPB16
OPTIONS
ENTER
PASSWORD
The following settings can be modified here:
• The REFERENCE INT/EXT softkey determines the source of the reference
• The SIGNAL SOURCE softkey opens a submenu for the baseband input settings
1303.3545.12
4.149
E-1
Configuration/Setup
R&S FMU
• The GENERAL SETUP softkey opens a submenu for all the general settings such as IEC/IEEE-bus
address, date and time as well as the configuration of the device interfaces. FIRMWARE OPTIONS
can be installed under this menu item.
• The SYSTEM INFO softkey opens a submenu for displaying the hardware configuration of the
instrument, the switching cycle statistics and system messages.
• The SERVICE softkey opens a submenu in which special device functions and system information
can be selected for servicing. The password required for service functions can be entered in this
submenu.
External Reference
The R&S FMU can use the internal reference source or an external reference source as frequency
standard from which all internal oscillators are derived. A 10 MHz crystal oscillator is used as internal
reference source. In the default setting (internal reference), this frequency is available as output signal
at rear-panel connector REF OUT, e.g. to synchronize other instruments to the reference of the R&S
FMU.
In the setting REFERENCE EXT, the connector REF IN is used as input connector for an external
frequency standard. In this case all internal oscillators of the R&S FMU are synchronized to the external
reference frequency.
SETUP menu:
The REFERENCE INT / EXT softkey switches between the internal and
external reference.
If the external reference is selected, also the frequency of the external
reference is adjustable between 1 MHz and 20 MHz.
The default value is 10 MHz.
These reference settings are not changed if a preset occurs to maintain the
specific setup of a test system.
Note:
If the reference signal is missing when switching to external
reference, the message "EXREF" appears after a while to
indicate that there is no synchronization.
On switching to internal reference please ensure that the
external reference signal is de-activated to avoid interactions
with the internal reference signal.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: ROSC:SOUR INT
ROSC:EXT:FREQ <numeric value>
1303.3545.12
4.150
E-1
R&S FMU
Configuration/Setup
SIGNAL SOURCE Submenu
This submenu appears when the SIGNAL SOURCE softkey is pressed.
SIGNAL
SOURCE
The way in which the FFT Analyzer is to process the input signals can be defined in this menu.
A similar menu for configuring the baseband input can also be opened by pressing the FFT HOME
hotkey.
The IQ INPUT 508 / 1M3 softkey is used to toggle the input impedance of
the baseband inputs. The setting has the same effect on both inputs.
The IEC/IEEE bus command uses the keywords LOW / HIGH for 508 /
1M3.
Caution:
Toggling the input impedance has no effect on the power level
indicated in the FFT Analyzer. It is always assumed that the
measured voltage is applied to a 50 3 resistor.
IEC/IEEE bus command: INP:IQ:IMP LOW
BALANCED
OFF
ON
The BALANCED ON / OFF softkey is used to toggle the measurement mode
of the baseband inputs.
ON switches to balanced inputs; OFF switches to ground-referenced inputs.
The setting has the same effect on both inputs.
IEC/IEEE bus command: INP:IQ:BAL:STAT ON
LOWPASS
36MHZ
The LOWPASS 36MHZ softkey is used to toggle the analog anti-aliasing
lowpass filters of the baseband inputs. The setting has the same effect on
both inputs. The softkey changes colour when the lowpass is switched ON.
IEC/IEEE bus command: SENS:IQ:LPAS:STAT ON
1303.3545.12
4.151
E-1
Configuration/Setup
DITHER
ON
OFF
R&S FMU
The DITHER ON / OFF softkey is used to add a shaped dither signal to both
inputs.
IEC/IEEE bus command: SENS:IQ:DITH:STAT ON
I+J*Q
The I+J*Q softkey causes the FFT Analyzer to regard the signals at the I and
Q input as components of a complex signal. This is the standard setting for
the analysis of signals with complex modulation.
IEC/IEEE bus command: INP:IQ:TYPE IJQ
I ONLY
The I ONLY softkey causes the FFT Analyzer to regard the signal at the I
input as a single, real signal. The signal at the Q input is ignored.
This setting should be selected if, for example, a signal at a low intermediate
frequency is connected to the I input.
IEC/IEEE bus command: INP:IQ:TYPE I
Q ONLY
The Q ONLY softkey causes the FFT Analyzer to regard the signal at the Q
input as a single, real signal. The signal at the I input is ignored.
This setting should be selected if, for example, a signal at a low intermediate
frequency is connected to the Q input.
IEC/IEEE bus command: INP:IQ:TYPE Q
1303.3545.12
4.152
E-1
R&S FMU
Configuration/Setup
Programming the Interface Configuration and Time Setup
The GENERAL SETUP softkey opens a submenu in which the general instrument parameters can be
set up. In addition to the configuration of the digital interfaces (IECBUS, COM), the date and time may
be entered.
The current settings are displayed in tabular form on the display screen where they may be edited.
SETUP - GENERAL SETUP submenu:
GENERAL
SETUP
Selecting the IEC/IEEE-Bus Address
SETUP - GENERAL SETUP menu:
GPIB
The GPIB softkey opens a submenu for setting the parameters of the remotecontrol interface.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: --
GPIB
ADDRESS
The GPIB ADDRESS softkey enables the entry of the IEC/IEEE-bus address.
Valid addresses are 0 through 30. The default address is 20.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 20
ID STRING
FACTORY
The ID STRING FACTORY softkey selects the default response to the *IDN?
query.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: --
ID STRING
USER
The ID STRING USER softkey opens an editor for entering a user-defined
response to the *IDN? query.
Max. length of output string: 36 characters
IEC/IEEE-bus command: --
1303.3545.12
4.153
E-1
Configuration/Setup
R&S FMU
Serial Interface Configuration
SETUP-GENERAL SETUP submenu:
COM
INTERFACE
The COM INTERFACE softkey activates the COM INTERFACE table for
entry of the serial interface parameters.
The following parameters can be configured in the table:
Baud rate
data transmission rate
Bits
number of data bits
Parity
bit parity check
Stop bits
number of stop bits
HW-Handshake
hardware handshake protocol
SW-Handshake
software handshake protocol
Owner
assignment to the measuring instrument or computer
Baud – Data transmission rate
The R&S FMU supports baud rates between 110 and 19200 baud. The
default setting is 9600 baud.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: SYST:COMM:SER:BAUD 9600
Bits – Number of data bits per word
For the transmission of text without special characters, 7 bits are adequate.
For binary data as well as for text with special characters, 8 bits must be
selected (default setting).
IEC/IEEE-bus command: SYST:COMM:SER:BITS 7
1303.3545.12
4.154
E-1
R&S FMU
Configuration/Setup
Parity – Bit parity check
NONE
no parity check (default setting)
even parity check
EVEN
ODD
odd parity check
IEC/IEEE-bus command: SYST:COMM:SER:PAR NONE
Stop bits – Number of stop bits
Available are 1 and 2. The default setting is 1 stop bit.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: SYST:COMM:SER:SBIT 1
HW-Handshake – Hardware handshake protocol
The integrity of data transmission can be improved by the use of a hardware
handshake mechanism, which effectively prevents uncontrolled transmission
of data and the resulting loss of data bytes. For hardware handshake
additional interface lines are used to transmit acknowledge signals with which
the data transmission can be controlled and, if necessary, stopped until the
receiver is ready to receive data again.
A prerequisite for using hardware handshaking is, however, that the interface
lines (DTR and RTS) are connected on both transmitter and receiver. For a
simple 3-wire connection, this is not the case and hardware handshake
cannot be used here.
Default setting is NONE.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: SYST:COMM:SER:CONT:DTR OFF
SYST:COMM:SER:CONT:RTS OFF
1303.3545.12
4.155
E-1
Configuration/Setup
R&S FMU
SW-Handshake – Software handshake protocol
Besides the hardware handshake mechanism using interface lines, it is also
possible to achieve the same effect by using a software handshake protocol.
Here, control bytes are transmitted in addition to the normal data bytes.
These control bytes can be used, as necessary, to stop data transmission
until the receiver is ready to receive data again.
In contrast to hardware handshaking, software handshaking can be realized
even for a simple 3-wire connection.
One limitation is, however, that software handshaking cannot be used for the
transmission of binary data, since the control characters XON and XOFF
require bit combinations that are also used for binary data transmission.
Default setting is NONE.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: SYST:COMM:SER:PACE NONE
Owner – Assignment of the interface
The serial interface can be assigned alternatively to the measuring instrument
section or to the computer section
If the interface is assigned to one section of the instrument, it is not available
to the other section.
INSTRUMENT
OS
The interface is assigned to the measuring instrument
section. Outputs to the interface from the computer
section are not possible will get lost.
The interface is assigned to the computer section. It
cannot be used by the measuring instrument section. This
means that remote control of the instrument via the
interface is not possible.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: --
Setting Date and Time
SETUP-GENERAL SETUP submenu:
TIME+DATE
The TIME+DATE softkey activates the entry of time and date for the internal
realtime clock.
Every number can be edited separately by highlighting it and pressing enter to
get into editing mode. After editing the corresponding number another press
on enter will save the changes.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: SYST:TIME 21,59
SYST:DATE 1999,10,01
1303.3545.12
4.156
E-1
R&S FMU
Configuration/Setup
Configuration of Network Settings R&S FMU
The instrument can be connected to an Ethernet LAN (local area network) by means of the LAN
Interface R&S FMU. This allows data transmission via the network and the use of network printers. The
network card is able to handle both 10 MHz Ethernet IEEE 802.3 and 100 MHz Ethernet IEEE 802.3u.
For more details see section 'LAN Interface R&S FMU'.
SETUP - GENERAL SETUP - menu:
CONFIGURE
NETWORK
The CONFIGURE NETWORK softkey opens the dialog box with the network
settings.
The softkey is used to modify an existing network configuration after the
corresponding tabs are selected (see subsection "Configuration of Already
Installed Network Protocols" in the section "LAN Interface").
Notes:
- A PC keyboard with trackball (or mouse instead) is required for the
installation/configuration of the network support.
- The softkey is only available with built-in LAN interface R&S FMU
IEC/IEEE-bus command: NETWORK
LOGIN
The NETWORK LOGIN softkey opens the dialog box with the auto login settings.
When a network is installed, the preset user name 'Instrument' and the password
'instrument' can be adapted to a new user (see section 'Defining Users' in the
LAN interface manual).
With the 'Auto Login' option active, an automatic registration is performed during
booting with the specified user name and password. Otherwise the Windows XP
login request is displayed during booting.
Notes:
A PC keyboard with trackball (or additional mouse instead) is
required for the installation/configuration of the network support.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: -
1303.3545.12
4.157
E-1
Configuration/Setup
R&S FMU
Enabling Firmware Options
The OPTIONS softkey opens a submenu that allows license keys for firmware options to be entered.
Previously installed options are displayed in a table that opens automatically.
OPTIONS
INSTALL
OPTION
Softkey INSTALL OPTION opens the data entry for the license keycode of a
firmware option.
On entry of a valid license key the message OPTION KEY OK is displayed in
the status line and the firmware option appears in table FIRMWARE
OPTIONS .
On entry of an invalid license key the message OPTION KEY INVALID is
displayed in the status line.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: --
REMOVE
OPTION
Softkey REMOVE OPTION removes all firmware options from the
instruments. Execution of this function must be confirmed in a message box
in order to avoid removal of the firmware options by mistake.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: --
1303.3545.12
4.158
E-1
R&S FMU
Configuration/Setup
Emulation of the Instrument Front Panel
SETUP - GENERAL SETUP – NEXT menu:
SOFT
FRONTPANEL
The SOFT FRONTPANEL softkey switches the display of the front-panel keys
on and off.
When the front-panel keys are displayed on the screen, the instrument can be
controlled by clicking the respective button with the mouse. This is especially useful
when the instrument in a different site is controlled via a remote-control program,
such as, for instance, the remote desktop of Windows XP, and the screen contents
are transferred to the controller via remote link (see the section "LAN Interface Remote Desktop under Windows XP).
Note:
Display resolution:
When the display of the front-panel keys is switched on, the screen
resolution of the instrument changes to 1024x768 pixels. Only a
section of the total screen is then displayed on the LC display, which
will automatically be shifted on mouse moves.
In order to obtain a complete display of the user interface, an external
monitor is to be plugged into the corresponding connector at the rear
panel. Prior to performing the resolution change the user is prompted
for confirmation whether the required monitor is connected.
Switching off the front-panel display restores the original screen
resolution.
Key assignment:
Button labels largely correspond to those of the front-panel keys. The
rotation function of the rotary knob is assigned to the 'KNOB LEFT'
and 'KNOB RIGHT' buttons, the press function (<ENTER>) to
'KNOB PRESS'.
The labels of the softkey buttons (F1 to F9) and of the hotkey buttons
(C-F1 to C-F7) indicate that the keys can be operated directly by
means of the corresponding function keys F1 to F9 or <CTRL>F1 to
<CTRL>F7 of a PS/2 keyboard.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: SYST:DISP:FPAN ON
1303.3545.12
4.159
E-1
Configuration/Setup
R&S FMU
System Information
The SYSTEM INFO softkey opens a submenu in which detailed information on module data, device
statistics and system messages is displayed.
SETUP menu:
SYSTEM
INFO
HARDWARE
INFO
STATISTICS
SYSTEM
MESSAGES
CLEAR ALL
MESSAGES
1303.3545.12
4.160
E-1
R&S FMU
Configuration/Setup
Display of Module Data
SETUP SYSTEM INFO submenu:
HA RDWARE
INFO
The HARDWARE INFO softkey opens a table in which the modules
(INSTALLED COMPONENTS) installed in the instrument are listed together
with the corresponding hardware revisions.
Table HARDWARE INFO consists of six columns:
SERIAL #
serial number
COMPONENT
name of module
ORDER #
order number
MODEL
model number of the module
REV
main modification index of the module
SUB REV
secondary modification index of the module
1303.3545.12
4.161
E-1
Configuration/Setup
R&S FMU
Display of Device Statistics
SETUP SYSTEM INFO submenu:
STAT IST ICS
The STATISTICS softkey opens the table STATISTICS. This table contains the
model information, serial number, firmware version, and specifications version
of the basic device. Additional the operating time of the instrument, the power-on
cycles as well as attenuator switching cycles are displayed.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: -For new delivered devices the specifications version (document of the hardware
properties) is shown. For already delivered device dashes (--.--) are displayed.
1303.3545.12
4.162
E-1
R&S FMU
Configuration/Setup
Display of System Messages
SETUP SYSTEM INFO submenu:
SYSTEM
MESSAGES
The SYSTEM MESSAGES softkey opens a submenu including a table in
which the generated system messages are displayed in the order of their
occurrence. The most recent messages are placed at the top of the list.
The following information is available:
No
MESSAGE
COMPONENT
DATE/TIME
Device-specific error code
Brief description of the message
On hardware messages:
name of the affected module
On software messages:
if needed, the name of the affected software
components
Date and time of the occurrence of the message
Messages that have occurred since the last call to the SYSTEM MESSAGES
menu are marked with an asterisk '*'.
The CLEAR ALL MESSAGES softkey is activated and allows clearing of the
error buffer.
If the number of error messages exceeds the capacity of the error buffer, the
message appearing first is "Message buffer overflow".
IEC/IEEE-bus command: SYST:ERR?
CLEAR ALL
MESSAGES
The CLEAR ALL MESSAGES softkey deletes all messages in the table.
The softkey is only available when table SYSTEM INFO is active.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: SYST:ERR?
1303.3545.12
4.163
E-1
Configuration/Setup
R&S FMU
Service Menu
The service menu offers a variety of additional functions which are used for maintenance and/or trouble
shooting.
Caution:
The service functions are not necessary for normal measurement operation. However,
incorrect use can affect correct operation and/or data integrity of the R&S FMU.
Therefore, many of the functions can only be used after entering a password. They
are described in the instrument service manual.
SETUP menu:
The SERVICE softkey opens a submenu for
selection of the service function.
1303.3545.12
4.164
E-1
R&S FMU
Configuration/Setup
General Service Functions
SETUP SERVICE submenu:
ENTER
PASSWORD
The ENTER PASSWORD softkey allows the entry of a password.
The R&S FMU contains a variety of service functions which, if incorrectly
used, can affect correct operation of the analyzer. These functions are
normally not accessible and are only usable after the entry of a password
(see instrument service manual).
IEC/IEEE-bus command: SYST:PASS "Password"
Selftest
SETUP SERVICE submenu:
SELFTEST
The SELFTEST softkey initiates the selftest of the instrument modules.
With this function the instrument is capable of identifying a defective
module in case of failure.
During the selftest a message box appears in which the current test and
its result is shown. The test sequence can be aborted by pressing ENTER
ABORT.
All modules are checked consecutively and the test result (selftest
PASSED or FAILED) is output in the message box.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: *TST?
SELFTEST
RESULTS
The SELFTEST RESULTS softkey calls the SELFTEST table in which the
results of the module test are displayed.
In case of failure a short description of the failed test, the defective
module, the associated value range and the corresponding test results
are indicated.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: DIAG:SERV:STE:RES?
PAGE UP
The PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN softkey sets the
SELFTEST RESULTS table to the next or previous page.
IEC/IEEE-bus command --
PAGE DOWN
1303.3545.12
4.165
E-1
Configuration/Setup
R&S FMU
Hardware Adjustment
Some of the R&S FMU modules can be realigned. This realignment can become necessary after
calibration due to temperature drift or aging of components (see service manual instrument).
Caution:
The realignment should be carried out by qualified personnel since the changes
considerably influence the measurement accuracy of the instrument. This is the
reason why the softkeys REF FREQUENCY and SAVE CHANGES can only be
accessed after entering a password.
Firmware Update
The installation of a new firmware version can be performed using a USB Memorystick. The installation
program is called in the SETUP menu.
SETUP side menu:
The FIRMWARE UPDATE softkey opens the subdirectory for
installing/deinstalling new firmware versions.
FIRMWARE
UPDATE
IEC/IEEE-bus command: --
FIRMWARE
UPDATE
The FIRMWARE UPDATE softkey starts the installation program and
leads the user through the remaining steps of the update
IEC/IEEE-bus command: -The firmware update is started as follows:
Connect your memory stick and
call SETUP side menu via [SETUP][NEXT]
Start the update via [FIRMWARE UPDATE]
RESTORE
FIRMWARE
The RESTORE FIRMWARE softkey restores the previous firmware
version
IEC/IEEE-bus command: --
UPDATE
PATH
The UPDATE PATH softkey is used to select the drive and directories
under which the archive files for the firmware update are stored.
The firmware update can thus also be performed via network drives or
USB-CD-ROM drives.
IEC/IEEE-bus command: "SYST:FIRM:UPD'D:\USER\FWUPDATE'"
1303.3545.12
4.166
E-1
R&S FMU
Saving and Recalling Data Sets – FILE Key
Saving and Recalling Data Sets – FILE Key
Overview
The FILE key calls the following functions:
• Storage/loading functions for storing (SAVE) instrument settings such as instrument configurations
(measurement/display settings, etc) and measurement results from working memory to permanent
storage media, or to load (RECALL) stored data into working memory.
• Functions for management of storage media (FILE MANAGER). Included are among others
functions for listing files, formatting storage media, copying, and deleting/renaming files.
The R&S FMU is capable of internally storing complete instrument settings with instrument
configurations and measurement data in the form of data sets. The respective data are stored on the
internal hard disk or, if selected, on a floppy. The hard-disk and floppy-disk drives have the following
names:
floppy disk
hard disk
A:
D: (hard disk C: is reserved for instrument software)
The configuration of the softkeys in the menu is shown in the following figure:
FILE
SAVE
ASCII FILE
EXPORT
EDIT
PATH
ASCII FILE
EXPORT
SELECT
ITEMS
RECALL
DECIM SEP
.
,
NEW
FOLDER
DECIM SEP
.
,
ENABLE
ALL ITEMS
EDIT
PATH
COPY
EDIT
COMMENT
RENAME
ITEMS TO
SAVE/RCL
CUT
DATA SET
LIST
PASTE
DATA SET
CLEAR
DELETE
STARTUP
DISABLE
ALL ITEMS
FORMAT
DISK
SORT MODE
RECALL
FILE
MANAGER
2
FILE LISTS
DEFAULT
CONFIG
NAME
DATE
EXTENSION
SIZE
1303.3545.12
4.167
E-1
Saving and Recalling Data Sets – FILE Key
R&S FMU
Storing a Device Configuration
Storing a Complete Device Configuration
The following steps are required to store a complete device configuration:
Press the FILE key and then press the SAVE softkey.
The selection box for the device configuration will be opened:
Enter the name of the data set to be stored (in the simplest case, a digit from 0 to 9) and press
ENTER. The data set will be stored and the dialog window closed.
The name of the data set may comprise letters and digits; if required, the desired directory may
precede the name of the data set (the directory will then automatically be used for further SAVE and
RECALL processes).
key, is available for
The help line editor, which can be opened by pressing the Cursor Down
entering file names via the front-panel keypad.
For further information on the operation of this editor, refer to the Quick Start Guide, chapter 4,
"Basic Operation".
How to enter comments, change the path for the file to be stored and select the data set from a list is
described under the associated softkeys EDIT COMMENT, EDIT PATH and DATA SET LIST.
The default path for the device configuration is D:\USER\CONFIG. The file names of the data sets have
the extension . FMU.
1303.3545.12
4.168
E-1
R&S FMU
Saving and Recalling Data Sets – FILE Key
Storing Parts of a Device Configuration
To store part of a data set (e.g. "All Traces"), the partial data set has to be selected beforehand. The
following steps are required:
Press the FILE key and then the SAVE softkey.
Press the ITEMS TO SAVE/RCL softkey. The entry focus moves to the first entry in the
field.
Items
Use the spinwheel to move the entry focus to the desired entry in the Items field and select the partial
data set by pressing the spinwheel or ENTER. The selection of already highlighted partial data sets
can be cancelled by pressing the spinwheel / ENTER again.
Softkeys ENABLE ALL ITEMS / DISABLE ALL ITEMS are also available to select all partial data sets
or to cancel the selection.
Move the entry focus to the field File Name using the spinwheel and activate the text entry by
pressing the spinwheel.
Enter file names and store the data set with ENTER.
Loading a Data Set:
A data set may be loaded in two different ways:
1. Direct entry of data set name:
Press the FILE key and then press the RECALL softkey.
Enter the name of the data set to be stored (in the simplest case, a digit from 0 to 9) and press
ENTER. The data set will be loaded.
The name of the data set may comprise letters and digits; if required, the desired directory may
precede the name of the data set (the directory will then automatically be used for further SAVE
and RECALL processes).
key, is available for
The help line editor, which can be opened by pressing the Cursor Down
entering file names via the front-panel keypad.
For further information on the operation of this editor, refer to the Quick Start Guide, chapter 4, "Basic
Operation".
2. Selection of data set via a selection list:
Press the FILE key and then press the RECALL softkey.
Press the ITEMS TO SAVE/RCL softkey.
The list of available data sets will be selected:
Select the data set to be loaded with the spinwheel and confirm twice with ENTER. The data set
will be loaded.
If the path for the device configuration is to be changed, this is done via the EDIT PATH softkey.
When loading device data, the settings of the unloaded partial data sets will remain unchanged. The
R&S FMU recognizes which parts the loaded data set has and ignores selected but unavailable partial
data sets.
1303.3545.12
4.169
E-1
Saving and Recalling Data Sets – FILE Key
R&S FMU
Automatic Loading of a Data Set during Booting
When the R&S FMU is delivered, it will load the device setting last activated when the unit was switched
off (provided that the unit was switched off via the STANDBY switch at the front panel, see section 1
"Putting the Device Into Operation").
Moreover, the R&S FMU is also able to automatically load a user-defined data set. The following
operating steps are required:
Press the FILE key and then press the RECALL softkey.
Press the STARTUP RECALL softkey.
The list of available data sets will be selected:
Select the data set to be loaded using the spinwheel and mark with ENTER.
Notes:
1. The selected data set will also be loaded when pressing the PRESET key.
2. The entry FACTORY will load the last setting that was activated prior to switch-off
when the unit is started after delivery.
Close the dialog window by pressing ESC twice.
If the path is to be changed for the device configuration, this is done via the EDIT PATH softkey.
1303.3545.12
4.170
E-1
R&S FMU
Saving and Recalling Data Sets – FILE Key
Copying Data Sets to Disk
The saved files of the data sets can be copied from one storage medium (e.g. drive D:) to another
storage medium (e.g. drive E:) or to another directory using the functions found in the FILE MANAGER
submenu. The file extension .FMU must not be changed.
1303.3545.12
4.171
E-1
Saving and Recalling Data Sets – FILE Key
R&S FMU
Description of the Individual Softkeys
SAVE
The SAVE softkey opens the dialog window for entering the data set to be
stored.
The SAVE table contains the entry fields for editing the data set:
Path
Directory in which the data set is stored.
Files
List of data sets already stored.
File Name
Name of data set.
The name can be entered with or without drive name
and directory; the drive name and directory, if available,
will then appear in the PATH field. The extension of the
data name is ignored.
Comment
Comment regarding the data set.
Items
Selection of settings to be stored.
IEC/IEEE command:
1303.3545.12
MMEM:STOR:STAT 1,"a:\test02"
4.172
E-1
R&S FMU
RECALL
Saving and Recalling Data Sets – FILE Key
The RECALL softkey activates the dialog window to enter the data set to be
loaded.
The RECALL table shows the current settings regarding the data set:
Path
Directory in which the data set is stored.
Files
List of stored data sets
File Name
Name of data set.
The name can be entered with or without drive name
and directory. The drive name and directory will then
appear in the Path field. A potential extension of the file
name is ignored.
Comment
Comment regarding data set.
IEC/IEEE command:
1303.3545.12
MMEM:LOAD:STAT 1,"a:\test02"
4.173
E-1
Saving and Recalling Data Sets – FILE Key
EDIT
PATH
R&S FMU
The EDIT PATH softkey activates the entry of a path name for the device
configuration to be stored/to be loaded:
The desired directory is selected with the spinwheel or the CURSOR UP /
DOWN key and is confirmed by pressing the spinwheel or the ENTER key.
Subdirectories are opened by the CURSOR RIGHT
key.
the CURSOR LEFT
key and closed with
IEC/IEEE-bus command EDIT
COMMENT
The EDIT COMMENT softkey activates the entry of commentary concerning
the current data set. The help line editor is opened with CURSOR DOWN.
A total of 60 characters are available for this purpose.
Note:
For further information on how to enter the comment text via the front
panel of the unit, see the section ""Entering Text using the Help Line
Editor".
IEC/IEEE command:
1303.3545.12
MMEM:COMM "Setup for GSM measurement"
4.174
E-1
R&S FMU
Saving and Recalling Data Sets – FILE Key
The SEL ITEMS TO SAVE/RCL softkey opens a submenu for selecting the data subsets.
FILE - ITEMS TO SAVE/RCL submenu:
ITEM S TO
SAVE/RCL
SELECT
ITEMS
ENABLE
ALL ITEMS
DISABLE
ALL ITEMS
DEFAULT
CONFIG
SELECT
ITEMS
The Dialog SaveL table offers the following selectable data subsets
in the Items field:
Current Settings These settings include:
• current configuration of general instrument
parameters
• current measurement hardware settings
• active limit lines:
A data set may contain maximum 8 limit lines
for each window. It always contain the
activated limit lines and the de-activated limit
lines used last, if any.
Consequently, the combination of the
restored de-activated limit lines depends on
the sequence of use with command
MMEM:LOAD.
• user-defined colour settings
• configuration for hardcopy output
All Limit Lines
All Traces
all limit lines
all traces which are not blanked
The SELECT ITEMS softkey moves the selection bar to the first
line, left column of the Items field. An entry is selected. Position the
entry focus to the corresponding partial data set using the cursor
keys and then press the ENTER key in the desired line. The
selection is cleared by pressing the key again.
IEC/IEEE command:
Current Settings:
All Limit Lines:
All Traces:
ENABLE
ALL ITEMS
ENABLE
ALL ITEMS
DEFAULT
CONFIG
The ENABLE ALL ITEMS softkey marks all partial data sets.
IEC/IEEE command:
MMEM:SEL:ALL
The ENABLE ALL ITEMS softkey marks all partial data sets.
IEC/IEEE-bus command MMEM:SEL:ALL
The DEFAULT CONFIG softkey establishes the default selection of
the data subset to be saved and outputs DEFAULT in the ITEMS
field of the SAVE/RECALL DATA SET table.
IEC/IEEE command:
1303.3545.12
MMEM:SEL:HWS ON
MMEM:SEL:LIN:ALL ON
MMEM:SEL:TRAC ON
4.175
MMEM:SEL:DEF
E-1
Saving and Recalling Data Sets – FILE Key
DATA SET
LIST
R&S FMU
The DATA SET LIST softkey sets the entry focus to the list Files of all available data
sets. In addition, the DATA SET CLEAR softkey are displayed.
The list Files lists all data sets which are stored in the selected directory.
The Comment and Items fields in the DATA SET CONTENTS column indicate the
saved data subsets and the comment for the currently selected data set.
IEC/IEEE command:
DATA SET
CLEAR
STARTUP
RECALL
---
The DATA SET CLEAR softkey deletes the selected data set
IEC/IEEE command:
MMEM:CLE:STAT 1, "test03"
The STARTUP RECALL softkey activates the selection of a data set which is
automatically loaded when the instrument is powered on and after PRESET. For this
purpose the Dialog Startup Recall is opened (analogously to DATA SET LIST).
The field Files lists all data sets stored in the selected directory. The currently selected
data set is checked.
In addition to the data sets stored by the user, the data set FACTORY, which specifies
the settings of the instrument before it was last switched off (Standby), is always
present (when unit is delivered).
To select a data set, the entry focus is set to the corresponding entry by means of the
spinwheel and the data set is activated by pressing the spinwheel or the ENTER key.
If a data set other than FACTORY is chosen, this data set will be loaded when the unit
is switched on or after pressing the PRESET key. Any settings can be assigned to the
PRESET key.
IEC/IEEE command: MMEM:LOAD:AUTO 1,"D:\user\config\test02"
1303.3545.12
4.176
E-1
R&S FMU
Saving and Recalling Data Sets – FILE Key
Operating Concept of File Managers
The FILE MANAGER softkey opens a menu for managing storage media and files.
FILE - FILE MANAGER submenu:
FILE
MANAGER
The designation and the letter of the current drive are displayed in the upper left corner of
the File Manager dialog.
The table below shows the files of the current directory and potential subdirectories.
A file or a directory in the table is selected via cursor keys. The ENTER key is used to
switch from one subdirectory to another.
The softkeys COPY, RENAME, CUT and DELETE are only visible if the entry focus is set
to a file and not to a directory.
The dots ".." open up the next higher directory.
1303.3545.12
4.177
E-1
Saving and Recalling Data Sets – FILE Key
R&S FMU
The EDIT PATH softkey activates the input of the directory which will be used
in subsequent file operations.
EDIT
PATH
The new path is included in the FILE MANAGEMENT table.
Use CURSOR UP / DOWN to select a drive and confirm your selection with
ENTER.
Open subdirectories by using CURSOR RIGHT, and use CURSOR LEFT to
close them again.
When you have found the subdirectory you looked for, mark it with ENTER.
IEC/IEEE command:
NEW
FOLDER
The NEW FOLDER softkey creates subdirectories.
The entry of an absolute path name (e.g. "\USER\MEAS") as well as the path
relative to the current directory (e.g. "..\MEAS") is possible.
IEC/IEEE command:
1303.3545.12
MMEM:MSIS "a:"
MMEM:CDIR "D:\user "
MMEM:MDIR "D:\user\test"
4.178
E-1
R&S FMU
Saving and Recalling Data Sets – FILE Key
COPY
The COPY softkey opens the help line editor to enter the target
directory for a copying process. The file is also copied into the
clipboard and can be copied into a different directory at a later
time by means of PASTE.
Files can also be copied to a different storage medium by
indicating a certain drive letter (e.g. D:). The selected files or
directories will be copied after terminating the entry with the
ENTER key.
IEC/IEEE-bus command MMEM:COPY "D:\user\set.cfg","a:"
RENAME
The RENAME softkey opens the help line editor to rename a file
or a directory (analogously to the COPY softkey).
IEC/IEEE command:
CUT
MMEM:MOVE "test02.cfg","set2.cfg"
The CUT softkey shifts the selected file into the clipboard from
where it can be copied into a different directory at a later time by
means of PASTE.
Note:
The file in the output directory will only be deleted if the PASTE
softkey has been pressed.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
PASTE
The PASTE softkey copies files from the clipboard to the current
directory. The directory is changed by means of the cursor keys
and subsequent pressing of ENTER or via the EDIT PATH
softkey.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
DELETE
-
-
The DELETE softkey deletes the selected file.
A confirmation query is displayed to avoid unintentional deletion of
files.
IEC/IEEE-bus command MMEM:DEL "test01.hcp"
MMEM:RDIR "D:\user\test"
1303.3545.12
4.179
E-1
Saving and Recalling Data Sets – FILE Key
SORT MODE
R&S FMU
The SORT MODE softkey opens the submenu to select the
sorting mode for the displayed files.
Directory names are located at the top of the list after the entry for
the next higher directory level ("..").
IEC/IEEE command:
2
FILE LISTS
--
The 2 FILE LISTS softkey opens a second window for the File
Manager. The entry focus can be moved between the two
windows by means of hotkeys SCREEN A and SCREEN B.
Files can thus very easily be copied and shifted from one
directory to the other.
Note:
The second file list can also be opened in the Full Screen mode
via hotkey SCREEN B or SCREEN A.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1303.3545.12
4.180
-
E-1
R&S FMU
Saving and Recalling Data Sets – FILE Key
FILE - NEXT menu:
ASCII FILE
EXPORT
The ASCII FILE EXPORT softkey stores the active trace in ASCII format to a
disk.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
FORM ASC;
MMEM:STOR:TRAC 1,'TRACE.DAT'
The file consists of a header, which contains important scaling parameters,
and a data section, which contains the trace data.
The file header data comes in three columns separated by semicolons (;).
It has the following contents:
parameter name; numerical value; default unit
The data section starts with the keyword "Trace <n>", where <n> designates
the number of the trace to be stored. This is followed by the measured data in
columns separated by semicolons (;).
This format can be read by spreadsheet programs such as MS Excel.
A semicolon (;) is to be defined as a separator between the cells of a table.
Note:
Analysis programs may come in different language versions that
require different notations of the decimal point. By means of the
DECIM SEP softkey, a decimal point (.) or a comma (,) can be
selected as decimal-point notation.
For a detailed description of the ASCII file format, refer to section "Selection
and Setting of Traces – TRACE Key", ASCII FILE EXPORT softkey.
DECIM SEP
.
,
By means of the DECIM SEP softkey, one can select between a decimal point
(.) and a comma (,) as decimal-point notation for the ASCII FILE EXPORT
function.
Due to the possibility of selecting between different decimal-point notations,
different language versions of analysis programs (such as MS Excel) can be
supported.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
1303.3545.12
4.181
FORM:DEXP:DSEP POIN
E-1
Measurement Documentation – HCOPY Key
R&S FMU
Measurement Documentation – HCOPY Key
The installation and configuration of printers is described in the Quick Start Guide.
HCOPY menu:
PRINT
SCREEN
HCOPY
COLOR
ON
OFF
INSTALL
PRINTER
SELECT
OBJECT
PRINT
TRACE
SCREEN
COLORSET
BRIGHTNESS
PRINT
TABLE
OPTIMIZED
COLORS
TINT
USER
DEFINED
SATURATION
DEVICE
SETUP
PREDEFINED
COLORS
DEVICE
1
2
COLORS
COMMENT
SET TO
DEFAULT
Pressing one of the softkeys PRINT, SCREEN, PRINT TRACE or PRINT TABLE in the HCOPY menu
initiates the print job. The printer parameters defined in the DEVICE SETTINGS menu are used for
setting up the printer configuration. All of the display items to be printed are written to the printer buffer.
Since the printer runs in the background, the instrument may be operated immediately after pressing the
PRINT... softkey.
With PRINT SCREEN selected, all the diagrams with traces and status displays are printed as they
occur on the screen. Softkeys, open tables and data entry fields are not printed.
The PRINT TRACE function allows individual traces to be printed. With PRINT TABLE, tables can be printed.
The DEVICE 1 and 2 softkeys are used for selecting and configuring the output interface.
If the PRINT TO FILE option in the DEVICE SETTINGS table is selected, the printout is directed to a file.
Upon pressing one of the PRINT... softkeys, the file name to which the output data is to be written is
requested. An entry field is then opened for entering the file name.
The COLORS submenu allows switchover between black-and-white and colour printouts (default), provided
that the printer connected can produce colour printouts. In addition, the colours are set in this submenu.
• SCREEN
Output in screen colours.
• OPTIMIZED (default) Instead of light colours, dark colours are used for traces and markers: trace 1
blue, trace 1 black, trace 3 green, markers turquoise.
• USER DEFINED
Notes:
This option enables the user to change the colours at will. It provides the same
setting functions as the DISPLAY – CONFIG DISPLAY – NEXT menu.
1. With SCREEN and OPTIMIZED selected, the background will always be white and the
grid black. With USER DEFINED, these colours can be selected, too.
2. Upon activation of the submenu, the colour display is switched over to the selected
printout colours. When the menu is quit, the original colour setting is restored.
1303.3545.12
4.182
E-1
R&S FMU
Measurement Documentation – HCOPY Key
The COMMENT SCREEN A and COMMENT SCREEN B softkeys allow text to be added to the printout
(date and time are inserted automatically).
Use the INSTALL PRINTER softkey to install additional printer drivers.
PRINT
SCREEN
The PRINT SCREEN softkey starts the output of test results.
All the diagrams, traces, markers, marker lists, limit lines etc are printed out
as long as they are displayed on the screen. All the softkeys, tables and open
data entry fields are not printed out. Moreover, comments, title, date, and
time are output at the bottom margin of the printout .
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
PRINT
TRACE
The PRINT TRACE softkey starts the output of all curves visible on the
display screen without auxiliary information. Specifically, no markers or
display lines are printed.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
PRINT
TABLE
HCOP:ITEM:WIND:TRAC:STAT ON
HCOP:IMM
The PRINT TABLE softkey starts the output of all tables and info lists visible
on the display screen without the measurement diagrams and other
information lying behind.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
DEVICE
SETUP
HCOP:ITEM:ALL
HCOP:IMM
HCOP:ITEM:WIND:TABL:STAT ON
HCOP:IMM
The DEVICE SETUP softkey opens the dialog where the file format and the
printer can be selected (see section "Selecting Printer, Clipboard and File
Formats").
IEC/IEEE-bus commands: HCOP:DEV:LANG GDI;
SYST:COMM:PRIN:ENUM:FIRS?;
SYST:COMM:PRIN:ENUM:NEXT?;
SYST:COMM:PRIN:SEL <Printer>;
HCOP:PAGE:ORI PORT;
HCOP:DEST "SYST:COMM:PRIN";
HCOP:DEST "SYST:COMM:MMEM"
DEVICE
1
2
The analyzer is able to manage two hardcopy settings independently of each
other. They are selected via the DEVICE 1 / 2 softkey, which displays also the
associated setting if the DEVICE SETUP dialog is open.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
COLORS
The COLORS softkey gives access to the submenu where the colours for the
printout can be selected (see section "Selecting Printer Colours").
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
1303.3545.12
--
4.183
-
E-1
Measurement Documentation – HCOPY Key
COMMENT
R&S FMU
The COMMENT softkey opens an entry field in which a comment of two lines
(60 characters per line) can be entered for screen A or B.
If the user enters more than 60 characters, the excess characters appear on
the second line on the print-out. At any point, a manual line-feed can be
forced by entering the @ character.
The comment is printed below the diagram area. The comment text appears
on the hardcopy, but not on the display screen.
If a comment should not be printed, it must be cleared.
If the instrument is reset by a click on the PRESET key, all entered comments
are cleared.
Note:
The COMMENT softkey opens the auxiliary line editor where the desired
letters can be entered in the text field by means of spinwheel and cursor
keys.
After clicking the COMMENT softkey, the auxiliary line editor can be reached
key. Pressing the spinwheel or the ENTER key inserts the
with the
selected characters in the text line.
key and confirm
After editing is completed, return to the text line with the
the comment text with ENTER.
If the entered comment should be aborted, quit the auxiliary line editor with
ESC.
Important:
Only after the auxiliary line editor has been closed with ESC can the
softkeys and hardkeys be operated again.
A detailed description of the auxiliary line editor can be found in section "
Entering a Text with the Auxiliary Line Editor ".
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
HCOP:ITEM:WIND2:TEXT 'Comment'
HCOPY NEXT menu:
INSTALL
PRINTER
A certain number of printer drivers is already installed on the R&S FMU.
The INSTALL PRINTER softkey opens the Printers and Faxes dialog where
more printer drivers can be installed.
For details refer to sections "Installation of Plug&Play Printers" and
"Installation of Non-Plug&Play Printers".
IEC/IEC-bus command:
1303.3545.12
4.184
-
E-1
R&S FMU
Measurement Documentation – HCOPY Key
Selecting Printer, Clipboard and File Formats
DEVICE
SETUP
The DEVICE SETUP softkey opens the selection dialog for file format and
printer.
Navigation in the dialog is possible by turning the spinwheel; selection of an
item is confirmed by pressing the spinwheel or the ENTER key.
The dialog is closed with ESC (alternatively, the Close button can be selected
with the spinwheel and the dialog can be closed by pressing the spinwheel or
with ENTER).
File formats
A file format is selected by turning the spinwheel
the ENTER key.
and then confirmed by pressing the spinwheel or
The following file formats can be selected:
BITMAP
BMP format (non-compressed)
WINDOWS METAFILE
Vector format, supported as of Windows 3.1
ENHANCED METAFILE
Vector format, supported as of Windows 95/98/ME/NT/XP
When a file format is selected, printing to a file is automatic. The file name is queried when the PRINT
SCREEN, PRINT TRACE and PRINT TABLE softkeys are pressed.
Clipboard
A clipboard is also selected with the spinwheel
ENTER key.
and then confirmed by pressing the spinwheel or
After the PRINT SCREEN, PRINT TRACE or PRINT TABLE softkey has been pressed, printout is
routed to the clipboard. With the aid of the "Process - Insert" function, the information in the clipboard
can then be pasted into other programs, e.g. Paint, and subsequently processed.
1303.3545.12
4.185
E-1
Measurement Documentation – HCOPY Key
R&S FMU
Printer
A printer (also a preconfigured network printer) is selected by selecting Printer with the spinwheel
and then confirmed by pressing the spinwheel or the ENTER key.
After confirmation, the entries under Name, Print to File and Orientation are available for selection with
the spinwheel.
To select the printer type, select Name and open the selection list by pressing the spinwheel or ENTER.
Select the desired printer (in the example "Cannon Bubble-Jet BJC800 (A4") from the list by means of
the spinwheel and confirm by pressing the spinwheel or ENTER. This closes the list and the cursor is
placed on the Name field again.
Printing to a file is also possible. In this case select Print to File with the spinwheel and activate or
deactivate the associated list by pressing the spinwheel or the ENTER key.
The printing format is selected under Orientation. In this case, too, pressing the spinwheel or ENTER
opens the selection list.
1303.3545.12
4.186
E-1
R&S FMU
Measurement Documentation – HCOPY Key
The desired format (here Portrait) is selected in the list with the spinwheel and confirmed by pressing
the spinwheel or ENTER. This closes the list and the cursor is placed again on the Orientation field.
The dialog is then closed with ESC or by clicking the Close button.
Note:
The installation of new printer types is described in sections "Local Printer" and "Configuring a
Network Printer"
Selecting Alternative Printer Configurations
The analyzer is capable of managing two independent hardcopy settings. This, for instance, permits fast
switchover between printing to a file or by a printer.
DEVICE
1
2
A selection is made with the DEVICE 1 / 2 softkey which also shows settings
when the DEVICE SETUP dialog is open.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
--
Selecting Printer Colours
COLORS
The COLORS softkey gives access to the submenu where the colours for the
printout can be selected. To facilitate colour selection, the selected colour
combination is displayed when the menu is entered. The previous colours are
restored when the menu is exited.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
COLOR
ON
OFF
-
The COLOR ON OFF softkey switches over from colour
output to black-and-white output. All colour-highlighted areas
are printed in white and all colour lines in black. This improves
the contrast on the printout. The default setting is COLOR ON.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
1303.3545.12
4.187
HCOP:DEV:COL ON
E-1
Measurement Documentation – HCOPY Key
SCREEN
COLORS
R&S FMU
The SCREEN COLORS softkey selects the current screen
colours for the printout.
Note: The background is always printed in white and the grid
in black.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
OPTIMIZED
COLORS
HCOP:CMAP:DEF1
The OPTIMIZED COLORS softkey selects an optimized colour
setting for the printout to improve the visibility of the colours on
the hardcopy.
Trace 1 is blue, trace 2 black, trace 3 green, and the markers
are turquoise.
The other colours correspond to the display colours of the
DISP – CONFIG DISPLAY -DEFAULT COLORS 1 softkey.
Note: The background is always printed in white and the grid
in black.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
USER
DEFINED
HCOP:CMAP:DEF2
The USER DEFINED softkey opens a submenu for userdefined colour selection (see submenu USER DEFINED
COLORS ).
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
SELECT
OBJECT
HCOP:CMAP:DEF3
The SELECT OBJECT softkey allows picture elements to
be selected to change their colour setting. After selection,
the PREDEFINED COLORS, BRIGHTNESS, TINT and
SATURATION softkeys enable the user to change the
colours or brightness, the hue and the colour saturation of
the element selected.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
BRIGHTNESS
-
The BRIGHTNESS softkey serves for determining the
brightness of the graphic element selected.
A value between 0 and 100% can be entered.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
HCOP:CMAP5:HSL <hue>,<sat>,<lum>
1303.3545.12
4.188
E-1
R&S FMU
Measurement Documentation – HCOPY Key
TINT
The TINT softkey serves for determining the hue of
the element selected. The percentage entered refers
to a continuous colour spectrum from red (0%) to blue
(100%).
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
HCOP:CMAP5:HSL <hue>,<sat>,<lum>
SATURATION
The SATURATION softkey serves for determining the
saturation of the element selected.
A value between 0 and 100% can be entered.
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
HCOP:CMAP5:HSL <hue>,<sat>,<lum>
PREDEFINED
COLORS
The PREDEFINED COLORS softkey opens a list from
which predefined colours for the displayed elements
can be selected:
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
HCOP:CMAP1 ... 26:PDEF <color>
SET TO
DEFAULT
The SET TO DEFAULT softkey reactivates the default
colour setting (= OPTIMIZED COLORS).
IEC/IEEE-bus command:
1303.3545.12
4.189
-
E-1
R&S FMU
Contents - Remote Control - Basics
Contents - Chapter 5 "Remote Control - "Basics"
5 Remote Control - Basics..................................................................................... 5.1
Introduction.......................................................................................................................................5.1
Getting Started..................................................................................................................................5.2
Starting Remote Control Operation ................................................................................................5.3
Display Contents during Remote Control .................................................................................5.3
Remote Control via IEC/IEEE Bus ...........................................................................................5.4
Setting the Device Address............................................................................................5.4
Return to Manual Operation...........................................................................................5.4
Remote Control via RS-232-Interface ......................................................................................5.5
Setting the Transmission Parameters............................................................................5.5
Return to Manual Operation...........................................................................................5.5
Limitations ......................................................................................................................5.5
Remote Control in a Network (RSIB Interface) ........................................................................5.6
Setting the Device Address............................................................................................5.6
Return to Manual Operation...........................................................................................5.6
Messages ..........................................................................................................................................5.7
IEC/IEEE-Bus Interface Messages ..........................................................................................5.7
Device Messages (Commands and Device Responses).........................................................5.8
Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages..............................................................................5.9
SCPI Introduction .....................................................................................................................5.9
Structure of a Command ..........................................................................................................5.9
Structure of a Command Line ................................................................................................5.12
Responses to Queries............................................................................................................5.12
Parameters.............................................................................................................................5.13
Overview of Syntax Elements ................................................................................................5.14
Instrument Model and Command Processing .............................................................................5.15
Input Unit ................................................................................................................................5.15
Command Recognition...........................................................................................................5.16
Instrument Data Base and Instrument Hardware...................................................................5.16
Output Unit .............................................................................................................................5.17
Command Sequence and Command Synchronization ..........................................................5.17
Status Reporting System...............................................................................................................5.18
Structure of an SCPI Status Register.....................................................................................5.18
Overview of the Status Registers ...........................................................................................5.20
Description of the Status Registers ........................................................................................5.21
Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable Register (SRE).................................5.21
IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register (PPE) .......................................................5.22
Event-Status Register (ESR) and Event-Status-Enable Register (ESE) .....................5.22
STATus:OPERation Register.......................................................................................5.23
STATus:QUEStionable Register..................................................................................5.24
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register..................................................................5.25
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency Register .............................................................5.26
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2> Register ................................................................5.27
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<1|2> Register .........................................................5.28
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer Register.....................................................................5.29
1303.3545.12
I-5.1
E-1
Contents - Remote Control - Basics
R&S FMU
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC Register.......................................................................5.30
Application of the Status Reporting Systems .........................................................................5.31
Application of the Status Reporting Systems .........................................................................5.31
Service Request, Making Use of the Hierarchy Structure............................................5.31
Serial Poll .....................................................................................................................5.31
Parallel Poll ..................................................................................................................5.32
Query by Means of Commands ...................................................................................5.32
Error-Queue Query ......................................................................................................5.32
Resetting Values of the Status Reporting System .................................................................5.33
1303.3545.12
I-5.2
E-1
R&S FMU
Introduction
5 Remote Control - Basics
In this chapter you'll find:
• instructions on how to put the R&S FMU into operation via remote control,
• a general introduction to remote control of programmable instruments. This includes the description
of the command structure and syntax according to the SCPI standard, the description of command
execution and of the status registers,
• diagrams and tables describing the status registers used in the R&S FMU.
In chapter 6, all remote control functions are described in detail. The subsystems are listed by
alphabetical order according to SCPI. All commands and their parameters are listed by alphabetical
order in the command list at the end of chapter 6.
Program examples for the R&S FMU can be found in chapter 7.
The remote control interfaces and their interface functions are described in Chapter 8.
Introduction
The instrument is equipped with an IEC-bus interface according to standard IEC 625.1/IEEE 488.2and a
RS-232 interface. The connectors are located at the rear of the instrument and permit to connect a
controller for remote control. In addition, the instrument can be remotely controlled in a local area
network (LAN interface).
The instrument supports the SCPI:version 1997.0 (Standard Commands for Programmable
Instruments). The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488.2 and aims at the standardization of
device-specific commands, error handling and the status registers (see Section "SCPI Introduction").
The tutorial "Automatic Measurement Control – A tutorial on SCPI and IEEE 488.2" from John M. Pieper
(R&S order number 0002.3536.00) offers detailed information on concepts and definitions of SCPI. For
remote control in a network, information will be found in the relevant section, "Remote Control in a
Network (RSIB Interface)".
This section assumes basic knowledge of IEC/IEEE bus programming and operation of the controller. A
description of the interface commands can be obtained from the relevant manuals.
The requirements of the SCPI standard placed on command syntax, error handling and configuration of
the status registers are explained in detail in the following sections. Tables provide a fast overview of the
bit assignment in the status registers. The tables are supplemented by a comprehensive description of
the status registers.
The program examples for IEC-bus programming are all written in VISUAL BASIC.
1303.3545.12
5.1
E-1
Getting Started
R&S FMU
Getting Started
The short and simple operating sequence given below permits fast putting into operation of the
instrument and setting of its basic functions. As a prerequisite, the IEC/IEEE-bus address, which is
factory-set to 20, must not have been changed.
1. Connect instrument and controller using IEC/IEEE-bus cable.
2. Write and start the following program on the controller:
'Open port to the instrument
'Inform controller about instrument address
''Reset instrument
CALL IBFIND("DEV1", analyzer%)
CALL IBPAD(analyzer%, 20)
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, '*RST;*CLS')
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, 'FREQ:CENT 10MHz')
' Set center frequency to 10 MHz
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, 'FREQ:SPAN 1MHz')
' Set span to 1 MHz
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, 'DISP:TRAC:Y:RLEV 1V')
' Set reference level to 1 Volt Peak
The instrument now performs a measurement in the frequency range of 9.5 MHz to 10.5 MHz .
3. To return to manual control, press the LOCAL key at the front panel
1303.3545.12
5.2
E-1
R&S FMU
Starting Remote Control Operation
Starting Remote Control Operation
On power-on, the instrument is always in the manual operating state ("LOCAL" state) and can be
operated via the front panel.
It is switched to remote control ("REMOTE" state)
IEC/IEEE-bus
as soon as it receives an addressed command from a controller.
RSIB, VXI-11
RS-232
if it is controlled in a network, as soon as it receives a command from a controller.
as soon as it receives the command "@REM" from a controller.
During remote control, operation via the front panel is disabled. The instrument remains in the remote
state until it is reset to the manual state via the front panel or via remote control interfaces. Switching
from manual operation to remote control and vice versa does not affect the remaining instrument
settings.
Display Contents during Remote Control
During remote control, only the LOCAL softkey appears, with which it is possible to return to manual
operation. In addition a softkey DISP UPD ON/OFF allows to enable or blank out the display of
diagrams and results. It is OFF by default to obtain optimum performance during remote control
operation. The remote command for this operation is "SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate ON | OFF".
During program execution it is recommended to activate the display of results by means of
"SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate ON" so that it is possible to follow the changes in the device settings and
the recorded measurement curves on the screen.
Note:
If the instrument is exclusively operated in remote control, it is recommended to switch on
the power-save mode (POWER SAVE). In this mode, the required display is completely
switched off after a preset time.
1303.3545.12
5.3
E-1
Starting Remote Control Operation
R&S FMU
Remote Control via IEC/IEEE Bus
Setting the Device Address
In order to operate the instrument via the IEC-bus, it must be addressed using the set IEC/IEEE bus
address. The IEC/IEEE bus address of the instrument is factory-set to 20. It can be changed manually in
the SETUP - GENERAL SETUP menu or via IEC bus. Addresses 0 to 30 are permissible.
Manually:
Call SETUP - GENERAL SETUP menu
Enter desired address in table GPIB-ADDRESS
Terminate input using the ENTER key
Via IEC/IEEE bus:
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
IBFIND("DEV1", analyzer%)
'Open port to the instrument
IBPAD(analyzer%, 20)
'Inform controller about old address
IBWRT(analyzer%, "SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 18") 'Set instrument to new address
IBPAD(analyzer%, 18)
'Inform controller about new address
Return to Manual Operation
Return to manual operation is possible via the front panel or the IEC/IEEE bus.
Manually:
Press the LOCAL softkey or the PRESET key
Notes:
– Before the transition, command processing must be completed
as otherwise transition to remote control is performed
immediately.
– The keys can be disabled by the universal command LLO (see
Chapter 8, IEC/IEEE-Bus Interface – Interface Messages) in
order to prevent unintentional transition. In this case, transition to
manual mode is only possible via the IEC/IEEE bus.
– The keys can be enabled again by deactivating the REN line of
the IEC/IEEE bus (see Chapter 8, IEC/IEEE-Bus Interface – Bus
Lines).
Via IEC bus:
1303.3545.12
...
CALL IBLOC(analyzer%)
...
5.4
'Set instrument to manual operation
E-1
R&S FMU
Starting Remote Control Operation
Remote Control via RS-232-Interface
Setting the Transmission Parameters
To enable an error-free and correct data transmission, the parameters of the unit and the controller
should have the same setting.
Parameters can be manually changed in menu SETUP-GENERAL SETUP in table COM PORT or via
remote control using the command SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:... .
The transmission parameters of the COM interface are factory-set to the following values:
baudrate = 9600, data bits = 8, stop bits = 1, parity = NONE and owner = INSTRUMENT.
For remote control operation, the interface should be allocated to the operating system (owner = OS) so
that the control characters including @ can be recognized by the interface.
Manually:
Setting the COM interface
Call SETUP-GENERAL SETUP menu
Select desired baudrate, bits, stopbit, parity in table COM PORT.
Set owner to OS in table COM PORT.
Terminate input using the ENTER key.
Return to Manual Operation
Return to manual operation is possible via the front panel or via RS-232 interface.
Manually:
Press the LOCAL softkey or the PRESET key.
Notes:
– Before the transition, command processing must be completed as
otherwise transition to remote control is performed immediately
– The keys can be enabled again by sending the control string "@LOC" via
RS-232 (see Chapter 8, S-232-C Interface - Control Commands).
Via RS-232:
...
v24puts(port,"@LOC");
...
Set instrument to manual operation..
Limitations
The following limitations apply if the unit is remote-controlled via the RS-232-C interface:
No interface messages, only control strings (see interface description in Chapter 8, RS-232-C
Interface – Control Commands).
Only the Common Commands *OPC? can be used for command synchronization, *WAI and *OPC
are not available.
Block data cannot be transmitted.
1303.3545.12
5.5
E-1
Starting Remote Control Operation
R&S FMU
Remote Control in a Network (RSIB Interface)
Setting the Device Address
For control of the instrument in a network, it must be accessed using the preselected IP address.
The IP address of the instrument (device address) is defined in the network configuration.
Setting the IP address:
Call SETUP - GENERAL SETUP – CONFIGURE NETWORK menu.
Select "Protocols" tab.
Set IP address for TCP/IP protocol under "Properties" (see section on option R&S FSU-B16).
Return to Manual Operation
Return to manual operation can be made manually via the front panel or remotely via the RSIB
interface.
Manually:
Press LOCAL softkey or PRESET key.
Note:
– Make sure that the execution of commands is completed prior to switchover
since otherwise the instrument will switch back to remote control
immediately.
Via RSIB interface:
1303.3545.12
...
CALL RSDLLibloc(analyzer%, ibsta%, iberr%, ibcntl&)'Set
device to manual control
...
5.6
E-1
R&S FMU
Messages
Messages
The messages transferred via the data lines of the IEC bus (see Chapter 8, IEC/IEEE-Bus Interface)
can be divided into two groups:
– interface messages and
– device messages.
IEC/IEEE-Bus Interface Messages
Interface messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC bus, the "ATN" control line being active.
They are used for communication between controller and instrument and can only be sent by a
controller which has the IEC/IEEE bus control. Interface commands can be subdivided into
– universal commands and
– addressed commands.
Universal commands act on all devices connected to the IEC/IEEE bus without previous addressing,
addressed commands only act on devices previously addressed as listeners. The interface messages
relevant to the instrument are listed in Chapter 8, IEC/IEEE-Bus Interface – Interface Functions.
1303.3545.12
5.7
E-1
Messages
R&S FMU
Device Messages (Commands and Device Responses)
Device messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC bus, the "ATN" control line not being
active. ASCII code is used.
A distinction is made according to the direction in which they are sent on the IEC/IEEE bus:
– Commands
are messages the controller sends to the instrument. They operate the device
functions and request informations.
The commands are subdivided according to two criteria::
1. According to the effect they have on the instrument:
Setting commands
cause instrument settings such as reset of the
instrument or setting the center frequency.
Queries
cause data to be provided for output on the IEC/IEEE
bus, e.g. for identification of the device or polling the
marker.
2. According to their definition in standard IEEE 488.2:
Common Commands
Device-specific
commands
are exactly defined as to their function and
notation in standard IEEE 488.2. They refer to
functions such as management of the standar-dized
status registers, reset and selftest.
refer to functions depending on the features of the
instrument such as frequency setting. A majority of
these commands has also been standardized by the
SCPI committee (cf. Section "SCPI Introduction")).
– Device responses are messages the instrument sends to the controller after a query. They can
contain measurement results, instrument settings and information on the
instrument status (cf. Section "Responses to Queries").
Structure and syntax of the device messages are described in the following Section.
1303.3545.12
5.8
E-1
R&S FMU
Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages
Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages
SCPI Introduction
SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments) describes a standard command set for
programming instruments, irrespective of the type of instrument or manufacturer. The goal of the SCPI
consortium is to standardize the device-specific commands to a large extent. For this purpose, a model
was developed which defines the same functions inside a device or for different devices. Command
systems were generated which are assigned to these functions. Thus it is possible to address the same
functions with identical commands. The command systems are of a hierarchical structure.
Fig. 5-1 illustrates this tree structure using a section of command system SENSe, which controls the
device-specific settings, that do not refer to the signal characteristics of the measurement signal.
SCPI is based on standard IEEE 488.2, i.e. it uses the same syntactic basic elements as well as the
common commands defined in this standard. Part of the syntax of the device responses is defined with
greater restrictions than in standard IEEE 488.2 (see Section "Responses to Queries").
Structure of a Command
The commands consist of a so-called header and, in most cases, one or more parameters. Header and
parameter are separated by a "white space" (ASCII code 0 to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, e.g. blank). The
headers may consist of several key words. Queries are formed by directly appending a question mark to
the header.
Note:
The commands used in the following examples are not in every case implemented in the
instrument.
Common commands
Common commands consist of a header preceded by an asterisk "*"
and one or several parameters, if any.
Examples:
1303.3545.12
*RST
RESET, resets the device
*ESE 253 EVENT STATUS ENABLE, sets the bits of
the event status enable register
*ESR?
EVENT STATUS QUERY, queries the
contents of the event status register.
5.9
E-1
Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages
R&S FMU
Device-specific commands
Hierarchy:
Device-specific commands are of hierarchical structure (see
Fig. 5-1). The different levels are represented by combined headers.
Headers of the highest level (root level) have only one key word. This
key word denotes a complete command system.
Example:
SENSe
This key word denotes the command system
SENSe.
For commands of lower levels, the complete path has to be specified,
starting on the left with the highest level, the individual key words being
separated by a colon ":".
Example:
SENSe:FREQuency:SPAN 10MHZ
This command lies in the third level of the SENSe system. It set the
frequency span.
SENSe
BANDwidth
FUNCtion
STARt
Fig. 5-1
FREQuency
STOP
CENTer
DETector
SPAN
OFFSet
Tree structure the SCPI command systems using the SENSe system by way of example
Some key words occur in several levels within one command system. Their
effect depends on the structure of the command, that is to say, at which
position in the header of a command they are inserted.
Example: SOURce:FM:POLarity NORMal
This command contains key word POLarity in the third
command level. It defines the polarity between modulator and
modulation signal.
SOURce:FM:EXTernal:POLarity NORMal
This command contains key word POLarity in the fourth
command level. It defines the polarity between modulation
voltage and the resulting direction of the modulation only for the
external signal source indicated.
1303.3545.12
5.10
E-1
R&S FMU
Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages
Optional key words:
Some command systems permit certain key words to be optionally inserted
into the header or omitted. These key words are marked by square
brackets in the description. The full command length must be recognized
by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standard.
Some commands are considerably shortened by these optional key words.
Example: [SENSe]:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO
This command couples the resolution bandwidth of the
instrument to other parameters. The following command has
the same effect:
BANDwidth:AUTO
Note:
Long and short form:
Parameter:
An optional key word must not be omitted if its effect is specified
in detail by a numeric suffix.
The key words feature a long form and a short form. Either the short form
or the long form can be entered, other abbreviations are not permissible.
Beispiel:
STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle 1= STAT:QUES:ENAB 1
Note:
The short form is marked by upper-case letters, the long form
corresponds to the complete word. Upper-case and lower-case
notation only serve the above purpose, the instrument itself
does not make any difference between upper-case and lowercase letters.
The parameter must be separated from the header by a "white space". If
several parameters are specified in a command, they are separated by a
comma ",". A few queries permit the parameters MINimum, MAXimum and
DEFault to be entered. For a description of the types of parameter, refer to
Section "Parameters".
Example: SENSe:FREQuency:STOP? MAXimum
Response: 3.5E9
This query requests the maximal value for the stop frequency.
Numeric suffix:
If a device features several functions or features of the same kind, e.g.
inputs, the desired function can be selected by a suffix added to the command. Entries without suffix are interpreted like entries with the suffix 1.
Example:. SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:BAUD 9600
This command sets the baudrate of a second serial interface.
1303.3545.12
5.11
E-1
Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages
R&S FMU
Structure of a Command Line
A command line may consist of one or several commands. It is terminated by a <New Line>, a <New
Line> with EOI or an EOI together with the last data byte. The IEC/IEEE driver of the controller usually
produces automatically an EOI together with the last data byte.
Several commands in a command line are separated by a semicolon ";". If the next command belongs
to a different command system, the semicolon is followed by a colon.
Example:
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"INPut:IQ:BALanced OFF;:SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer 10MHz ")
This command line contains two commands. The first one is part of the SENSe command
system and is used to determine the center frequency of the instrument. The second one is
part of the INPut command system and sets the input signal attenuation.
If the successive commands belong to the same system, having one or several levels in common, the
command line can be abbreviated. For that purpose, the second command after the semicolon starts
with the level that lies below the common levels (see also Fig. 5-1). The colon following the semicolon
must be omitted in this case.
Example:
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "SENSe:FREQuency:STARt 1E6;:SENSe:FREQuency:STOP 10E6")
This command line is represented in its full length and contains two commands separated
from each other by the semicolon. Both commands are part of the SENSe command
system, subsystem FREQuency, i.e. they have two common levels.
When abbreviating the command line, the second command begins with the level below
SENSe:FREQuency. The colon after the semicolon is omitted.
The abbreviated form of the command line reads as follows:
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,
"SENSe:FREQuency:STARt 1E6;STOP 10E6")
However, a new command line always begins with the complete path.
Example:
CALL IBWRT(analyzer, "SENSe:FREQuency:STARt 1E6")
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "SENSe:FREQuency:STOP 10E6")
Responses to Queries
A query is defined for each setting command unless explicitly specified otherwise. It is formed by adding
a question mark to the associated setting command. According to SCPI, the responses to queries are
partly subject to stricter rules than in standard IEEE 488.2.
1 The requested parameter is transmitted without header.
Example:
INPut:IQ:IMPedance?
Response: LOW
2. Maximum values, minimum values and all further quantities, which are requested via a special text
parameter are returned as numerical values.
Example:
SENSe:FREQuency:STOP? MAX
Response: 36E6
3. Numerical values are output without a unit. Physical quantities are referred to the basic units or to the
units set using the Unit command.
Example:
SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer?
Response: 1E6 for 1 MHz
4. Truth values <Boolean values> are returned as 0 (for OFF) and 1 (for ON).
Example:
INPut:IQ:BALanced:STATe?
Response: 0 for OFF
5. Text (character data) is returned in a short form (see also Section 3.5.5).
Example:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:CONTrol:RTS? Response(for standard): STAN
1303.3545.12
5.12
E-1
R&S FMU
Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages
Parameters
Most commands require a parameter to be specified. The parameters must be separated from the
header by a "white space". Permissible parameters are numerical values, Boolean parameters, text,
character strings and block data. The type of parameter required for the respective command and the
permissible range of values are specified in the command description
Numerical values
Numerical values can be entered in any form, i.e. with sign, decimal point and
exponent. Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or
down. The mantissa may comprise up to 255 characters, the exponent must lie
inside the value range -32000 to 32000. The exponent is introduced by an "E"
or "e". Entry of the exponent alone is not permissible. In the case of physical
quantities, the unit can be entered. Permissible unit prefixes are G (giga), MA
(mega), MOHM and MHZ are also permissible), K (kilo), M (milli), U (micro)
and N (nano). It the unit is missing, the basic unit is used.
Example:
SENSe:FREQuency:STOP 15MHz = SENSe:FREQuency:STOP 15E6
Special numerical
The texts MINimum, MAXimum, DEFault, UP and DOWN are interpreted as
valuesspecial numerical values.
In the case of a query, the numerical value is provided.
Example: Setting command: SENSe:FREQuency:STOP MAXimum
Query:
SENSe:FREQuency:STOP? Response: 36E6
MIN/MAX
MINimum and MAXimum denote the minimum and maximum value.
DEF
DEFault denotes a preset value which has been stored in the EPROM. This
value conforms to the default setting, as it is called by the *RST command
UP/DOWN
UP, DOWN increases or reduces the numerical value by one step. The step
width can be specified via an allocated step command (see annex C, List of
Commands) for each parameter which can be set via UP, DOWN.
INF/NINF
INFinity, Negative INFinity (NINF) Negative INFinity (NINF) represent the
numerical values -9.9E37 or 9.9E37, respectively. INF and NINF are only sent
as device reponses.
NAN
Not A Number (NAN) represents the value 9.91E37. NAN is only sent as
device response. This value is not defined. Possible causes are the division of
zero by zero, the subtraction of infinite from infinite and the representation of
missing values.
Boolean Parameters
Boolean parameters represent two states. The ON state (logically true) is
represented by ON or a numerical value unequal to 0. The OFF state (logically
untrue) is represented by OFF or the numerical value 0. 0 or 1 is provided in a
query.
Example: Setting command: DISPlay:WINDow:STATe ON
Query:
DISPlay:WINDow:STATe?
1303.3545.12
5.13
Response: 1
E-1
Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages
Text
R&S FMU
Text parameters observe the syntactic rules for key words, i.e. they can be
entered using a short or long form. Like any parameter, they have to be
separated from the header by a white space. In the case of a query, the short
form of the text is provided.
Example: Setting command: SENSe:DETector APEak
Query:
SENSe:DETector?
Strings
Strings must always be entered in quotation marks (' or ").
Example: DISPlay:WINDow:TEXT "Text Example"
DISPlay: WINDow:TEXT 'Example'
Block data
GROund
Response APE
or
Block data are a transmission format which is suitable for the transmission of
large amounts of data. A command using a block data parameter has the
following structure:
Example: HEADer:HEADer #45168xxxxxxxx
ASCII character # introduces the data block. The next number indicates how
many of the following digits describe the length of the data block. In the example
the 4 following digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes. The data bytes follow.
During the transmission of these data bytes all End or other control signs are
ignored until all bytes are transmitted.
Overview of Syntax Elements
The following survey offers an overview of the syntax elements.
:
;
,
?
*
"
#
The colon separates the key words of a command.
In a command line the colon after the separating semicolon marks the uppermost command
level.
The semicolon separates two commands of a command line. It does not alter the path.
The comma separates several parameters of a command.
The question mark forms a query.
The asterix marks a common command.
Quotation marks introduce a string and terminate it.
The double dagger ( #) introduces block data
A "white space (ASCII-Code 0 to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, e.g.blank) separates header and parameter.
1303.3545.12
5.14
E-1
R&S FMU
Instrument Model and Command Processing
Instrument Model and Command Processing
The instrument model shown in Fig. 5-2 has been made viewed from the standpoint of the servicing of
IEC-bus commands. The individual components work independently of each other and simultaneously.
They communicate by means of so-called "messages".
Input unit with
IEC Bus
input puffer
Command
recognition
Data set
Instrument
hardware
Output unit with
output buffer
IEC Bus
Fig. 5-2
Status reportingsystem
Instrument model in the case of remote control by means of the IEC bus
Input Unit
The input unit receives commands character by character from the IEC bus and collects them in the
input buffer. The input unit sends a message to the command recognition as soon as the input buffer is
full or as soon as it receives a delimiter, <PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR>, as defined in IEEE
488.2, or the interface message DCL.
If the input buffer is full, the IEC-bus traffic is stopped and the data received up to then are processed.
Subsequently the IEC-bus traffic is continued. If, however, the buffer is not yet full when receiving the
delimiter, the input unit can already receive the next command during command recognition and
execution. The receipt of a DCL clears the input buffer and immediately initiates a message to the
command recognition.
1303.3545.12
5.15
E-1
Instrument Model and Command Processing
R&S FMU
Command Recognition
The command recognition analyses the data received from the input unit. It proceeds in the order in
which it receives the data. Only a DCL is serviced with priority, a GET (Group Execute Trigger), e.g., is
only executed after the commands received before as well. Each recognized command is immediately
transferred to the instrument data base but without being executed there at once.
Syntactical errors in the command are recognized in the command recognition and supplied to the
status reporting system. The rest of a command line after a syntax error is analysed further if possible
and serviced.
If the command recognition recognizes a delimiter (<PROGRAM MESSAGE SEPARATOR> or
<PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR>) or a DCL, it requests the instrument data base to set the
commands in the instrument hardware as well now. Subsequently it is immediately prepared to process
commands again. This means for the command servicing that further commands can already be
serviced while the hardware is still being set ("overlapping execution").
Instrument Data Base and Instrument Hardware
Here the expression "instrument hardware" denotes the part of the instrument fulfilling the actual
instrument function - signal generation, measurement etc. The controller is not included.
The instrument data base is a detailed reproduction of the instrument hardware in the software.
IEC-bus setting commands lead to an alteration in the data set. The data base management enters the
new values (e.g. frequency) into the data base, however, only passes them on to the hardware when
requested by the command recognition.
The data are only checked for their compatibility among each other and with the instrument hardware
immediately before they are transmitted to the instrument hardware. If the detection is made that an
execution is not possible, an "execution error" is signalled to the status reporting system. The alteration
of the data base are cancelled, the instrument hardware is not reset.
IEC-bus queries induce the data base management to send the desired data to the output unit.
Status Reporting System
The status reporting system collects information on the instrument state and makes it available to the
output unit on request. The exact structure and function are described in Section 3.8
1303.3545.12
5.16
E-1
R&S FMU
Instrument Model and Command Processing
Output Unit
The output unit collects the information requested by the controller, which it receives from the data base
management. It processes it according to the SCPI rules and makes it available in the output buffer. If
the instrument is addressed as a talker without the output buffer containing data or awaiting data from
the data base management, the output unit sends error message "Query UNTERMINATED" to the
status reporting system. No data are sent on the IEC bus, the controller waits until it has reached its
time limit. This behaviour is specified by SCPI.
Command Sequence and Command Synchronization
What has been said above makes clear that all commands can potentially be carried out overlapping.
In order to prevent an overlapping execution of commands, one of commands *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI
must be used. All three commands cause a certain action only to be carried out after the hardware has
been set and has settled. By a suitable programming, the controller can be forced to wait for the
respective action to occur (cf. Table 5-1).
Table 5-1
Synchronisation using *OPC, *OPC? and *WAI
Command
Action after the hardware has settled
Programming the controller
*OPC
Setting the opteration-complete bit in the ESR
- Setting bit 0 in the ESE
- Setting bit 5 in the SRE
- Waiting for service request (SRQ)
*OPC?
Writing a "1" into the output buffer
Addressing the instrument as a talker
*WAI
Continuing the IEC-bus handshake
Sending the next command
An example as to command synchronization can be found in Chapter "Program Examples".
For a couple of commands the synchronization to the end of command execution is mandatory in order
to obtain the desired result. The affected commands require either more than one measurement in
order to accomplish the desired instrument setting (eg autorange functions), or they require a longer
period of time for execution. If a new command is received during execution of the corresponding
function this may either lead to either to an aborted measurement or to invalid measurement data.
The following list includes the commands, for which a synchronization via *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI is
mandatory:
Table 5-2
Commands with mandatory synchronization (Overlapping Commands)
Command
Purpose
INIT
start measurement
INIT:CONM
continue measurement
CALC:STAT:SCAL:AUTO ONCE
optimize level settings for signal statistic measurement
functions
[SENS:]POW:ACH:PRES:RLEV
optimize level settings for adjacent channel power
measurements
1303.3545.12
5.17
E-1
Status Reporting System
R&S FMU
Status Reporting System
The status reporting system (cf. Fig. 5-4) stores all information on the present operating state of the
instrument, e.g. that the instrument presently carries out a calibration and on errors which have
occurred. This information is stored in the status registers and in the error queue. The status registers
and the error queue can be queried via IEC bus.
The information is of a hierarchical structure. The register status byte (STB) defined in IEEE 488.2 and
its associated mask register service request enable (SRE) form the uppermost level. The STB receives
its information from the standard event status register (ESR) which is also defined in IEEE 488.2 with
the associated mask register standard event status enable (ESE) and registers STATus:OPERation and
STATus:QUEStionable which are defined by SCPI and contain detailed information on the instrument.
The IST flag ("Individual STatus") and the parallel poll enable register (PPE) allocated to it are also part
of the status reporting system. The IST flag, like the SRQ, combines the entire instrument status in a
single bit. The PPE fulfills the same function for the IST flag as the SRE for the service request.
The output buffer contains the messages the instrument returns to the controller. It is not part of the
status reporting system but determines the value of the MAV bit in the STB and thus is represented in
Fig. 5-4.
Structure of an SCPI Status Register
Each SCPI register consists of 5 parts which each have a width of 16 bits and have different functions
(cf. Fig. 5-3). The individual bits are independent of each other, i.e. each hardware status is assigned a
bit number which is valid for all five parts. For example, bit 3 of the STATus:OPERation register is
assigned to the hardware status "wait for trigger" in all five parts. Bit 15 (the most significant bit) is set to
zero for all parts. Thus the contents of the register parts can be processed by the controller as positive
integer.
15 14 13 12
CONDition part
3 2 1 0
15 14 13 12
PTRansition part
3 2 1 0
15 14 13 12
NTRansition part
3 2 1 0
15 14 13 12
EVENt part
3 2 1 0
to higher-order register
&
&
& & & & &
& & & & & & & & &
+ Sum bit
15 14 13 12
Fig. 5-3
ENABle part
& = logical AND
+ = logical OR
of all bits
3 2 1 0
The status-register model
1303.3545.12
5.18
E-1
R&S FMU
Status Reporting System
CONDition part
The CONDition part is directly written into by the hardware or the sum bit of
the next lower register. Its contents reflects the current instrument status. This
register part can only be read, but not written into or cleared. Its contents is
not affected by reading.
PTRansition part
The Positive-TRansition part acts as an edge detector. When a bit of the
CONDition part is changed from 0 to 1, the associated PTR bit decides
whether the EVENt bit is set to 1.
PTR bit =1: the EVENt bit is set.
PTR bit =0: the EVENt bit is not set.
This part can be written into and read at will. Its contents is not affected by
reading.
NTRansition part
The Negative-TRansition part also acts as an edge detector. When a bit of the
CONDition part is changed from 1 to 0, the associated NTR bit decides
whether the EVENt bit is set to 1.
NTR-Bit = 1: the EVENt bit is set.
NTR-Bit = 0: the EVENt bit is not set.
This part can be written into and read at will. Its contents is not affected by
reading.
With these two edge register parts the user can define which state transition of
the condition part (none, 0 to 1, 1 to 0 or both) is stored in the EVENt part.
EVENt part
The EVENt part indicates whether an event has occurred since the last
reading, it is the "memory" of the condition part. It only indicates events
passed on by the edge filters. It is permanently updated by the instrument.
This part can only be read by the user. During reading, its contents is set to
zero. In linguistic usage this part is often equated with the entire register.
ENABle part
The ENABle part determines whether the associated EVENt bit contributes to
the sum bit (cf. below). Each bit of the EVENt part is ANDed with the
associated ENABle bit (symbol '&'). The results of all logical operations of this
part are passed on to the sum bit via an OR function (symbol '+').
ENABle-Bit = 0: the associated EVENt bit does not contribute to the sum bit
ENABle-Bit = 1: if the associated EVENT bit is "1", the sum bit is set to "1" as
well.
This part can be written into and read by the user at will. Its contents is not
affected by reading.
Sum bit
As indicated above, the sum bit is obtained from the EVENt and ENABle part
for each register. The result is then entered into a bit of the CONDition part of
the higher-order register.
The instrument automatically generates the sum bit for each register. Thus an
event, e.g. a PLL that has not locked, can lead to a service request throughout
all levels of the hierarchy.
Note:
The service request enable register SRE defined in IEEE 488.2 can be taken as ENABle
part of the STB if the STB is structured according to SCPI. By analogy, the ESE can be
taken as the ENABle part of the ESR.
1303.3545.12
5.19
E-1
Status Reporting System
R&S FMU
Overview of the Status Registers
Fig. 5-4
Overview of the status registers
1303.3545.12
5.20
E-1
R&S FMU
Status Reporting System
Description of the Status Registers
Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable Register (SRE)
The STB is already defined in IEEE 488.2. It provides a rough overview of the instrument status by
collecting the pieces of information of the lower registers. It can thus be compared with the CONDition
part of an SCPI register and assumes the highest level within the SCPI hierarchy. A special feature is
that bit 6 acts as the sum bit of the remaining bits of the status byte.
The STATUS BYTE is read out using the command "*STB?" or a serial poll.
The STB implies the SRE. It corresponds to the ENABle part of the SCPI registers as to its function.
Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit in the SRE. Bit 6 of the SRE is ignored. If a bit is set in the SRE
and the associated bit in the STB changes from 0 to 1, a Service Request (SRQ) is generated on the
IEC bus, which triggers an interrupt in the controller if this is appropriately configured and can be further
processed there.
The SRE can be set using command "*SRE" and read using "*SRE?".
Table 5-3Meaning of the bits in the status byte
Bit No.
Meaning
2
Error Queue not empty
The bit is set when an entry is made in the error queue.
If this bit is enabled by the SRE, each entry of the error queue generates a Service Request. Thus an error can
be recognized and specified in greater detail by polling the error queue. The poll provides an informative error
message. This procedure is to be recommended since it considerably reduces the problems involved with IECbus control.
3
QUEStionable status sum bit
The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the QUEStionable: status register and the associated ENABle bit is set
to 1.
A set bit indicates a questionable instrument status, which can be specified in greater detail by polling the
QUEStionable status register.
4
MAV bit (message available)
The bit is set if a message is available in the output buffer which can be read.
This bit can be used to enable data to be automatically read from the instrument to the controller (cf. Chapter 7,
program examples).
5
ESB bit
Sum bit of the event status register. It is set if one of the bits in the event status register is set and enabled in
the event status enable register.
Setting of this bit implies an error or an event which can be specified in greater detail by polling the event status
register.
6
MSS bit (master status summary bit)
The bit is set if the instrument triggers a service request. This is the case if one of the other bits of this registers
is set together with its mask bit in the service request enable register SRE.
7
OPERation status register sum bit
The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the OPERation-Status register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1.
A set bit indicates that the instrument is just performing an action. The type of action can be determined by
polling the OPERation-status register.
1303.3545.12
5.21
E-1
Status Reporting System
R&S FMU
IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register (PPE)
By analogy with the SRQ, the IST flag combines the entire status information in a single bit. It can be
queried by means of a parallel poll (cf. Section 3.8.4.3) or using command "*IST?".
The parallel poll enable register (PPE) determines which bits of the STB contribute to the IST flag. The
bits of the STB are ANDed with the corresponding bits of the PPE, with bit 6 being used as well in
contrast to the SRE. The Ist flag results from the ORing of all results. The PPE can be set using
commands "*PRE" and read using command "*PRE?".
Event-Status Register (ESR) and Event-Status-Enable Register (ESE)
The ESR is already defined in IEEE 488.2. It can be compared with the EVENt part of an SCPI register.
The event status register can be read out using command "*ESR?".
The ESE is the associated ENABle part. It can be set using command "*ESE" and read using command
"*ESE?".
Table 5-4
Meaning of the bits in the event status register
Bit No.
Meaning
0
Operation Complete
This bit is set on receipt of the command *OPC exactly when all previous commands have been executed.
1
This bit is not used
2
Query Error
This bit is set if either the controller wants to read data from the instrument without having send a query, or if it
does not fetch requested data and sends new instructions to the instrument instead. The cause is often a query
which is faulty and hence cannot be executed.
3
Device-dependent Error
This bit is set if a device-dependent error occurs. An error message with a number between -300 and -399 or a
positive error number, which denotes the error in greater detail, is entered into the error queue (cf. Chapter 9,
Error Messages).
4
Execution Error
This bit is set if a received command is syntactically correct, however, cannot be performed for other reasons.
An error message with a number between -200 and -300, which denotes the error in greater detail, is entered
into the error queue (cf. Chapter 9, Error Messages).
5
Command Error
This bit is set if a command which is undefined or syntactically incorrect is received. An error message with a
number between -100 and -200, which denotes the error in greater detail, is entered into the error queue (cf.
Chapter 9 "Error Messages").
6
User Request
This bit is set on pressing the LOCAL key.
7
Power On (supply voltage on)
This bit is set on switching on the instrument.
1303.3545.12
5.22
E-1
R&S FMU
Status Reporting System
STATus:OPERation Register
In the CONDition part, this register contains information on which actions the instrument is being
executing or, in the EVENt part, information on which actions the instrument has executed since the last
reading. It can be read using commands "STATus:OPERation:CONDition?" or "STATus
:OPERation[:EVENt]?".
Table 5-5
Meaning of the bits in the STATus.OPERation register
Bit No.
Meaning
0
CALibrating
This bit is set as long as the instrument is performing a calibration.
1 to 7
These bits are not used
8
HardCOPy in progress
This bit is set while the instrument is printing a hardcopy.
9
These bits are not used
10 to 14
These bits are not used
15
This bit is always 0
1303.3545.12
5.23
E-1
Status Reporting System
R&S FMU
STATus:QUEStionable Register
This register comprises information about indefinite states which may occur if the unit is operated
without meeting the specifications. It can be queried by commands STATus:QUEStionable:
CONDition? and STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?.
Table 5-6
Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable register
Bit No.
Meaning
0 to 2
These bits are not used
3
POWer
This bit is set if a questionable power occurs (cf. also section "STATus:QUEStionable:POWer Register")
4
TEMPerature
This bit is set if a questionable temperature occurs.
5
FREQuency
The bit is set if a frequency is questionable (cf. section "STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency Register")
6 to 7
These bits are not used
8
CALibration
9
LIMit (device-specific)
^ label "UNCAL")
The bit is set if a measurement is performed uncalibrated (=
This bit is set if a limit value is violated (see also section STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit Register)
10
LMARgin (device-specific)
This bit is set if a margin is violated (see also section STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin Register)
11
SYNC (device-dependent)
This bit is set if, in measurements or premeasurements in GSM MS mode, synchronization to midamble fails or
no burst is found.
This bit is also set if, in premeasurements in GSM MS mode, the result differs too strongly from the expected
value (see also "STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC Register").
12
ACPLimit (device-specific)
This bit is set if a limit for the adjacent channel power measurement is violated (see also section
"STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register")
13 to 14
These bits are not used
15
This bit is always 0.
1303.3545.12
5.24
E-1
R&S FMU
Status Reporting System
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register
This register comprises information about the observance of limits during adjacent power
measurements. It can be queried with commands 'STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit
:CONDition?' and 'STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit[:EVENt]?'
Table 5-7
Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register
Bit No.
Meaning
0
ADJ UPPer FAIL(Screen A)
This bit is set if in screen A. the limit is exceeded in the upper adjacent channel
1
ADJ LOWer FAIL (Screen A)
This bit is set if in screen A the limit is exceeded in the lower adjacent channel.
2
ALT1 UPPer FAIL (Screen A)
This bit is set if in screen A the limit is exceeded in the upper 1st alternate channel.
3
ALT1 LOWer FAIL (Screen A)
This bit is set if in screen A the limit is exceeded in the lower 1st alternate channel.
4
ALT2 UPPer FAIL (Screen A)
This bit is set if in screen A the limit is exceeded in the upper 2nd alternate channel.
5
ALT2 LOWer FAIL (Screen A)
This bit is set if in screen A the limit is exceeded in the lower 2nd alternate channel.
6 to 7
not used
8
ADJ UPPer FAIL (Screen B)
This bit is set if in screen B the limit is exceeded in the upper adjacent channel.
9
ADJ LOWer FAIL (Screen B)
This bit is set if in screen B the limit is exceeded in the lower adjacent channel.
10
ALT1 UPPer FAIL (Screen B)
This bit is set if in screen B the limit is exceeded in the upper 1st alternate channel.
11
ALT1 LOWer FAIL (Screen B)
This bit is set if in screen B the limit is exceeded in the lower 1st alternate channel.
12
ALT2 UPPer FAIL (Screen B)
This bit is set if in screen B the limit is exceeded in the upper 2nd alternate channel.
13
ALT2 LOWer FAIL (Screen B)
This bit is set if in screen B the limit is exceeded in the lower 2nd alternate channel.
14
not used
15
This bit is always set to 0.
1303.3545.12
5.25
E-1
Status Reporting System
R&S FMU
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency Register
This register comprises information aboutthe reference and local oscillator.
It can be queried with commands STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition? and "STATus
:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]?.
Table 5-8
Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register
Bit No.
Meaning
0
OVEN COLD
This bit is set if the reference oscillator has not yet attained its operating temperature. 'OCXO' will then be
displayed.
1
Clock UNLocked (Screen A)
This bit is set if the local oscillator no longer locks. 'CLUNL will then be displayed.
2 to 8
not used
9
Clock UNLocked (Screen B)
This bit is set if the local oscillator no longer locks.' CLUNL' will then be displayed.
10 to 14
not used
15
This bit is always 0.
1303.3545.12
5.26
E-1
R&S FMU
Status Reporting System
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2> Register
This register comprises information about the observance of limit lines in the corresponding
measurement window (LIMit 1 corresponds to Screen A, LIMit 2 to Screen B). It can be queried with
commands STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2>:CONDition? and STATus:QUEStionable:
LIMit<1|2>[:EVENt]?.
Table 5-9
Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2> register
Bit No.
Meaning
0
LIMit 1 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 1 is violated.
1
LIMit 2 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 2 is violated.
2
LIMit 3 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 3 is violated.
3
LIMit 4 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 4 is violated.
4
LIMit 5 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 5 is violated.
5
LIMit 6 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 6 is violated.
6
LIMit 7 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 7 is violated.
7
LIMit 8 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 8 is violated.
8 to 14
not used
15
This bit is always 0.
1303.3545.12
5.27
E-1
Status Reporting System
R&S FMU
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<1|2> Register
This register comprises information about the observance of limit margins in the corresponding
measurement window (LMARgin1 corresponds to Screen A, LMARgin2 corresponds to Screen B). It
can be queried with commands STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<1|2>:CONDition? and
"STATus :QUEStionable:LMARgin<1|2>[:EVENt]?.
Table 5-10
Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<1|2> register
Bit No.
Meaning
0
LMARgin 1 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 1 is violated.
1
LMARgin 2 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 2 is violated.
2
LMARgin 3 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 3 is violated.
3
LMARgin 4 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 4 is violated.
4
LMARgin 5 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 5 is violated.
5
LMARgin 6 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 1 is violated.
6
LMARgin 7 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 7 is violated.
7
LMARgin 8 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 8 is violated.
8 to 14
not used
15
This bit is always 0.
1303.3545.12
5.28
E-1
R&S FMU
Status Reporting System
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer Register
This register comprises all information about possible overloads of the unit.
It can be queried with commands STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition? and "STATus
:QUEStionable:POWer[:EVENt]?.
Table 5-11
Bit No.
0
Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register
Meaning
not used
1
not usednot used
2
Baseband Verload
This bit is set if thebaseband signal path is overloaded. 'OVLD' will then be displayed.
3 to 14
not used
15
This bit is always 0.
1303.3545.12
5.29
E-1
Status Reporting System
R&S FMU
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC Register
This register is used only with GSM MS mode. It contains information about sync and bursts not found,
and about premeasurement results exceeding or falling short of expected values.
The bits can be queried with commands "STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:CONDition?" and
"STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC[:EVENt]?".
Table 5-12
Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEstionable:SYNC register
Bit No.
Meaning
0
BURSt not found (screen A)
This bit is set if no burst is found in the measurements/premeasurements for
phase/frequency error (PFE) or carrier power versus time (PVT) in GSM MS mode.
If a burst is found in these measurements/premeasurements, the bit is reset.
1
SYNC not found (screen A)
This bit is set if the synchronization sequence (training sequence) of the midamble is not found in the
measurements/premeasurements for phase/frequency error (PFE) or carrier power versus time (PVT)
in GSM MS mode.
If the synchronization sequence (training sequence) of the midamble is found in these
measurements/premeasurements, the bit is reset.
2
No carrier (screen A)
This bit is set if, in GSM MS mode, the level value determined in the premeasurements for
carrier power versus time (PVT) and spectrum due to modulation is too low.
The bit is reset at the beginning of the premeasurement
(see also Chapter 2, description of the named premeasurements).
3
Carrier overload (screen A)
This bit is set if, in GSM MS mode, the level value determined in the premeasurements for
carrier versus time (PVT) and spectrum due to modulation is too high.
The bit is reset at the beginning of the premeasurement
(see also Chapter 2, description of the named premeasurements).
4-11
Not used.
12
I Probe Adjust
This bit is set during probe calibration when the probe connected with Input I has to be manually adjusted.
After the manual adjustment is finished, the probe calibration process will continue with INIT:CONM.
13
Q Probe Adjust
This bit is set during probe calibration when the probe connected with Input Q has to be manually adjusted.
After the manual adjustment is finished, the probe calibration process will continue with INIT:CONM.
14
Not used.
15
This bit is always 0.
1303.3545.12
5.30
E-1
R&S FMU
Status Reporting System
Application of the Status Reporting Systems
In order to be able to effectively use the status reporting system, the information contained there must
be transmitted to the controller and further processed there. There are several methods which are
represented in the following. Detailed program examples are to be found in chapter 7, Program
Examples.
Service Request, Making Use of the Hierarchy Structure
Under certain circumstances, the instrument can send a service request (SRQ) to the controller. Usually
this service request initiates an interrupt at the controller, to which the control program can react with
corresponding actions. As evident from Fig. 5-4, an SRQ is always initiated if one or several of bits 2, 3,
4, 5 or 7 of the status byte are set and enabled in the SRE. Each of these bits combines the information
of a further register, the error queue or the output buffer. The corresponding setting of the ENABle parts
of the status registers can achieve that arbitrary bits in an arbitrary status register initiate an SRQ. In
order to make use of the possibilities of the service request, all bits should be set to "1" in enable
registers SRE and ESE.
Examples (cf. Fig. 5-4 and chapter 7, Program Examples, as well):
Use of command "*OPC" to generate an SRQ at the end of a sweep.
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "*ESE 1")Set bit 0 in the ESE (Operation Complete)
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "*SRE 32")Set bit 5 in the SRE (ESB)?
After its settings have been completed, the instrument generates an SRQ.
The SRQ is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own. Each controller program
should set the instrument in a way that a service request is initiated in the case of malfunction. The
program should react appropriately to the service request. A detailed example for a service request
routine is to be found in chapter 7, Program Examples.
Serial Poll
In a serial poll, just as with command "*STB", the status byte of an instrument is queried. However, the
query is realized via interface messages and is thus clearly faster. The serial-poll method has already
been defined in IEEE 488.1 and used to be the only standard possibility for different instruments to poll
the status byte. The method also works with instruments which do not adhere to SCPI or IEEE 488.2.
The VISUAL BASIC command for executing a serial poll is "IBRSP()". Serial poll is mainly used to
obtain a fast overview of the state of several instruments connected to the IEC bus.
1303.3545.12
5.31
E-1
Status Reporting System
R&S FMU
Parallel Poll
In a parallel poll, up to eight instruments are simultaneously requested by the controller by means of a
single command to transmit 1 bit of information each on the data lines, i.e., to set the data line allocated
to each instrument to logically "0" or "1". By analogy to the SRE register which determines under which
conditions an SRQ is generated, there is a parallel poll enable register (PPE) which is ANDed with the
STB bit by bit as well considering bit 6. The results are ORed, the result is then sent (possibly inverted)
as a response in the parallel poll of the controller. The result can also be queried without parallel poll by
means of command "*IST".
The instrument first has to be set for the parallel poll using quick-BASIC command "IBPPC()". This
command allocates a data line to the instrument and determines whether the response is to be inverted.
The parallel poll itself is executed using "IBRPP()".
The parallel-poll method is mainly used in order to quickly find out after an SRQ which instrument has
sent the service request if there are many instruments connected to the IEC bus. To this effect, SRE
and PPE must be set to the same value. A detailed example as to the parallel poll is to be found in
chapter 7, Program Examples.
Query by Means of Commands
Each part of every status register can be read by means of queries. The individual commands are
indicated in the detailed description of the registers in Section 3.8.3. What is returned is always a
number which represents the bit pattern of the register queried. Evaluating this number is effected by
the controller program.
Queries are usually used after an SRQ in order to obtain more detailed information on the cause of the
SRQ.
Error-Queue Query
Each error state in the instrument leads to an entry in the error queue. The entries of the error queue
are detailed plain-text error messages which can be looked at in the ERROR menu via manual control
or queried via the IEC bus using command "SYSTem:ERRor?". Each call of "SYSTem:ERRor?"
provides an entry from the error queue. If no error messages are stored there any more, the instrument
responds with 0, "No error".
The error queue should be queried after every SRQ in the controller program as the entries describe the
cause of an error more precisely than the status registers. Especially in the test phase of a controller
program the error queue should be queried regularly since faulty commands from the controller to the
instrument are recorded there as well.
1303.3545.12
5.32
E-1
R&S FMU
Status Reporting System
Resetting Values of the Status Reporting System
Table 5-13 comprises the different commands and events causing the status reporting system to be
reset. None of the commands, except for *RST and SYSTem:PRESet influences the functional
instrument settings. In particular, DCL does not change the instrument settings.
Table 5-13Resettting instrument functions
Event
Switching on supply
voltage
Power-On-StatusClear
Effect
0
DCL,SDC
(Device Clear,
Selected Device
Clear)
*RST or
SYSTem:PRESet
STATus:PRESet
*CLS
1
Clear STB,ESR
yes
yes
Clear SRE,ESE
yes
Clear PPE
yes
Clear EVENTt parts of the
registers
yes
Clear Enable parts of all
OPERation and
QUEStionable registers,
Fill Enable parts of all
other registers with "1".
yes
yes
Fill PTRansition parts with
"1" ,
Clear NTRansition parts
yes
yes
yes
yes
Clear error queue
yes
yes
Clear output buffer
yes
yes
yes
Clear command
processing and input
buffer
yes
yes
yes
1)
1)
1)
1) Every command being the first in a command line, i.e., immediately following a <PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR>
clears the output buffer.
1303.3545.12
5.33
E-1
R&S FMU
Contents - Description of Commands
Contents - Chapter 6
"Remote Control - Description of Commands"
6 Remote Control - Description of Commands.................................................... 6.1
Notation .............................................................................................................................................6.1
Common Commands .......................................................................................................................6.4
ABORt Subsystem............................................................................................................................6.8
CALCulate Subsystem .....................................................................................................................6.9
CALCulate:DELTamarker Subsystem....................................................................................6.10
CALCulate:FORMat subsystem .............................................................................................6.17
CALCulate:LIMit Subsystem ..................................................................................................6.18
CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower Subsystem ........................................................................6.22
CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol Subsystem .........................................................................6.31
CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer Subsystem............................................................................6.33
CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer Subsystem.............................................................................6.36
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem.............................................................................................6.38
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion Subsystem..................................................................6.45
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer Subsystem ....................................................6.52
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary Subsystem.................................................6.58
CALCulate:MATH Subsystem ................................................................................................6.68
CALCulate:PLINe Subsystem ................................................................................................6.70
CALCulate:STATistics Subsystem .........................................................................................6.71
CALCulate:THReshold Subsystem ........................................................................................6.75
CALCulate:UNIT subsystem ..................................................................................................6.77
CALibration Subsystem .................................................................................................................6.78
DIAGnostic Subsystem ..................................................................................................................6.81
DISPlay Subsystem ........................................................................................................................6.84
FORMat Subsystem........................................................................................................................6.91
HCOPy Subsystem .........................................................................................................................6.92
INITiate Subsystem ........................................................................................................................6.97
INPut Subsystem ............................................................................................................................6.99
INSTrument Subsystem ...............................................................................................................6.100
MMEMory Subsystem ..................................................................................................................6.101
1303.3545.12
I-6.1
E-1
Contents - Description of Commands
R&S FMU
SENSe Subsystem........................................................................................................................6.110
SENSe:AVERage Subsystem ..............................................................................................6.111
SENSe:BANDwidth Subsystem ...........................................................................................6.113
SENSe:CORRection Subsystem..........................................................................................6.115
SENSe:DETector Subsystem...............................................................................................6.116
SENSe:FFT Subsystem .......................................................................................................6.117
SENSe:FREQuency Subsystem ..........................................................................................6.119
SENSe:I/Q Subsystem .........................................................................................................6.122
SENSe:POWer Subsystem..................................................................................................6.123
SENSe:PROBe Subsystem..................................................................................................6.128
SENSe:ROSCillator Subsystem ...........................................................................................6.131
SENSe:SWEep Subsystem .................................................................................................6.132
SENSe:VOLTage Subsystem ..............................................................................................6.134
SENSe:WINDow Subsystem ...............................................................................................6.135
STATus Subsystem ......................................................................................................................6.136
SYSTem Subsystem.....................................................................................................................6.145
TRACe Subsystem........................................................................................................................6.151
General Trace Commands...................................................................................................6.151
TRACe:IQ Subsystem ..........................................................................................................6.153
Digital Down Converter for Low Carrier Frequency Using Baseband Inputs .............6.154
Trigger and Measurement..........................................................................................6.156
TRIGger Subsystem .....................................................................................................................6.162
UNIT Subsystem ...........................................................................................................................6.164
Table of Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment .................................................6.165
Hotkeys ................................................................................................................................6.165
Hotkey FFT HOME...............................................................................................................6.166
FREQ Key ............................................................................................................................6.167
SPAN Key.............................................................................................................................6.168
AMPT Key ............................................................................................................................6.169
MKR Key ..............................................................................................................................6.171
MKR-> Key ...........................................................................................................................6.172
MKR FCTN Key....................................................................................................................6.173
BW Key ................................................................................................................................6.175
SWEEP Key .........................................................................................................................6.176
MEAS Key ............................................................................................................................6.177
TRIG Key..............................................................................................................................6.182
TRACE Key ..........................................................................................................................6.183
LINES Key............................................................................................................................6.185
1155.5047.12
I-6.2
E-1
R&S FMU
Contents - Description of Commands
DISP Key..............................................................................................................................6.187
FILE Key...............................................................................................................................6.188
CAL Key ...............................................................................................................................6.190
SETUP Key ..........................................................................................................................6.192
HCOPY Key..........................................................................................................................6.194
1303.3545.12
I-6.3
E-1
R&S FMU
6
Notation
Remote Control - Description of Commands
Notation
In the following sections, all commands implemented in the instrument are first listed in tables and then
described in detail, arranged according to the command subsystems. The notation is adapted to the
SCPI standard. The SCPI conformity information is included in the individual description of the
commands.
Table of Commands
Command:
Parameter:
Unit:
Comment:
Indentations
In the command column, the table provides an overview of the commands
and their hierarchical arrangement (see indentations).
The parameter column indicates the requested parameters together with
their specified range.
The unit column indicates the basic unit of the physical parameters.
In the comment column an indication is made on:
– whether the command does not have a query form,
– whether the command has only one query form
– whether the command is implemented only with a certain option of the
instrument
The different levels of the SCPI command hierarchy are represented in the
table by means of indentations to the right. The lower the level, the further
the indentation to the right. Please note that the complete notation of the
command always includes the higher levels as well.
Example: SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer is represented in the table as
follows:
SENSe
:FREQuency
:CENTer
Individual description
Note:
1303.3545.12
first level
second level
third level
The individual description contains the complete notation of the command. An
example for each command, the *RST value and the SCPI information are
included as well.
The baseband analysis (FFT) mode is implemented in the basic unit. For the other
modes, the corresponding options are required.
6.1
E-1
Notation
R&S FMU
Upper/lower case notation Upper/lower case letters are used to mark the long or short form of the key
words of a command in the description (see Chapter 5). The instrument
itself does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters.
Special characters
|
A selection of key words with an identical effect exists for several
commands. These keywords are indicated in the same line; they are
separated by a vertical stroke. Only one of these keywords needs to be
included in the header of the command. The effect of the command is
independent of which of the keywords is used.
Example: SENSe:FREQuency:CW|:FIXed
The two following commands with identical meaning can be
created. They set the frequency of the fid frequency signal to 1
kHz:
SENSe:FREQuency:CW 1E3 = SENSe:FREQuency:FIXed 1E3
A vertical stroke in parameter indications marks alternative possibilities in
the sense of "or". The effect of the command is different, depending on
which parameter is used.
Example: Selection of the parameters for the command
DISPlay:FORMat
FULL | SPLit
If parameter FULL is selected, full screen is displayed, in the
case of SPLit, split screen is displayed.
[ ]
Key words in square brackets can be omitted when composing the header
(cf. Chapter 5, Optional Keywords). The full command length must be
accepted by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI
standards.
Parameters in square brackets can be incorporated optionally in the
command or omitted as well.
{ }
Parameters in braces can be incorporated optionally in the command,
either not at all, once or several times.
Description of parameters Due to the standardization, the parameter section of SCPI commands
consists always of the same syntactical elements. SCPI has therefore
specified a series of definitions, which are used in the tables of commands.
In the tables, these established definitions are indicated in angled brackets
(< to >) and will be briefly explained in the following (see also Chapter 5,
Section "Parameters").
<Boolean>
1303.3545.12
This keyword refers to parameters which can adopt two states, "on" and
"off". The "off" state may either be indicated by the keyword OFF or by the
numeric value 0, the "on" state is indicated by ON or any numeric value
other than zero. Parameter queries are always returned the numeric value
0 or 1.
6.2
E-1
R&S FMU
<numeric_value>
<num>
Notation
These keywords mark parameters which may be entered as numeric
values or be set using specific keywords (character data).
The following keywords given below are permitted:
MINimum This keyword sets the parameter to the smallest possible
value.
MAXimum This keyword sets the parameter to the largest possible value.
DEFault
This keyword is used to reset the parameter to its default
value.
UP
This keyword increments the parameter value.
DOWN
This keyword decrements the parameter value.
The numeric values associated to MAXimum/MINimum/DEFault can be
queried by adding the corresponding keywords to the command. They
must be entered following the quotation mark.
Example: SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer? MAXimum
returns the maximum possible numeric value of the center frequency as
result.
<arbitrary block program data>
This keyword is provided for commands the parameters of which consist of
a binary data block.
1303.3545.12
6.3
E-1
Common Commands
R&S FMU
Common Commands
The common commands are taken from the IEEE 488.2 (IEC 625-2) standard. A particular command
has the same effect on different devices. The headers of these commands consist of an asterisk "*"
followed by three letters. Many common commands refer to the status reporting system which is
described in detail in Chapter 5.
Command
Function
Comment
*CAL?
Calibration Query
query only
*CLS
Clear Status
no query
*ESE
Parameter
0 to 255
Event Status Enable
*ESR?
Standard Event Status Query
query only
*IDN?
Identification Query
query only
*IST?
Individual Status Query
query only
*OPC
Operation Complete
*OPT?
Option Identification Query
query only
no query
*PCB
0 to 30
Pass Control Back
*PRE
0 to 255
Parallel Poll Register Enable
*PSC
0|1
Power On Status Clear
Reset
*RST
*SRE
0 to 255
no query
Service Request Enable
*STB?
Status Byte Query
query only
*TRG
Trigger
no query
*TST?
Self Test Query
query only
*WAI
Wait to continue
no query
1303.3545.12
6.4
E-1
R&S FMU
Common Commands
*CAL?
CALIBRATION QUERY initiates a calibration of the instrument and subsequently queries the
calibration status. Any responses > 0 indicate errors.
*CLS
CLEAR STATUS sets the status byte (STB), the standard event register (ESR) and the EVENt-part
of the QUEStionable and the OPERation register to zero. The command does not alter the mask and
transition parts of the registers. It clears the output buffer.
*ESE 0 to 255
EVENT STATUS ENABLE sets the event status enable register to the value indicated. The query
form *ESE? returns the contents of the event status enable register in decimal form.
*ESR?
STANDARD EVENT STATUS QUERY returns the contents of the event status register in decimal
form (0 to 255) and subsequently sets the register to zero.
*IDN?
IDENTIFICATION QUERY queries the instrument identification.
Example: " Rohde&Schwarz, R&S FMU-36, 123456/789, 4.08"
R&S FMU-36
= Device name
123456/789 = Serial number of the instrument
4.08
= Firmware version number
*IST?
INDIVIDUAL STATUS QUERY returns the contents of the IST flag in decimal form (0 | 1). The IST
flag is the status bit which is sent during a parallel poll (cf. Chapter 5).
*OPC
OPERATION COMPLETE sets bit 0 in the event status register when all preceding commands have
been ecuted. This bit can be used to initiate a service request (cf. Chapter 5).
*OPC?
OPERATION COMPLETE QUERY writes message "1" into the output buffer as soon as all
preceding commands have been ecuted (cf. Chapter 5).
1303.3545.12
6.5
E-1
Common Commands
R&S FMU
*OPT?
OPTION IDENTIFICATION QUERY queries the options included in the instrument and returns a list
of the options installed. The options are separated from each other by means of commas.
Position
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
10
11 to 12
13
14
15 to 18
19
20 to 22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50 to 51
1303.3545.12
Option
B4
FS-K74
FS-K76
FS-K5
FS-K7
FS-K8
reserved
OCXO
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
LAN Interface
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
HSDPA BTS
reserved
SCDMA BTS
reserved
reserved
reserved
GSM-GSM/EDGE
reserved
FM Demodulator
Application Firmware Bluetooth® Transmitter Measurement
reserved
FS-K72
FS-K73
FS-K82
FS-K83
FS-K84
FS-K85
FSQ-K90
FSQ-K91
FSQ-K92
FSQ-K70
WCDMA 3G FDD BTS
WCDMA 3G FDD UE
reserved
CDMA2000 Downlink
CDMA2000 Uplink
1xEV-DO Downlink
1xEV-DOUpnlink
reserved
W-Lan 802.11a reserved
W-Lan 802.11b/g reserved
W-Lan 802.16 reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
Vector signal analysis
reserved
6.6
E-1
R&S FMU
Common Commands
Example:
0,B4,0,0,0,0,0,B10,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,K70,0,0
*PCB 0 to 30
PASS CONTROL BACK indicates the controller address which the IEC-bus control is to be returned
to after termination of the triggered action.
*PRE 0 to 255
PARALLEL POLL REGISTER ENABLE sets the parallel poll enable register to the indicated value.
The query form *PRE? returns the contents of the parallel poll enable register in decimal form.
*PSC 0 | 1
POWER ON STATUS CLEAR determines whether the contents of the ENABle registers are
preserved or reset during power-up.
*PSC = 0
causes the contents of the status registers to be preserved. Thus a service request can be
generated when switching on the instrument, if the status registers ESE and SRE are suitably
configured.
*PSC = 0
'Resets the registers.
The query form *PSC? reads out the contents of the power-on-status-clear flag. The response can be 0 or 1.
*RST
RESET sets the instrument to a defined default status. The command essentially corresponds to
pressing the PRESET key. The default setting is indicated in the description of the commands.
*SRE 0 to 255
SERVICE REQUEST ENABLE sets the service request enable register to the indicated value. Bit 6
(MSS mask bit) remains 0. This command determines under which conditions a service request is
generated. The query form *SRE? reads the contents of the service request enable register in
decimal form. Bit 6 is always 0.
*STB?
READ STATUS BYTE QUERY reads out the contents of the status byte in decimal form.
*TRG
TRIGGER initiates all actions in the currently active test screen expecting a trigger event. This
command corresponds to INITiate:IMMediate (cf. Section "TRIGger Subsystem").
*TST?
SELF TEST QUERY initiates the selftest of the instrument and outputs an error code in decimal form
(0 = no error).
*WAI
WAIT-to-CONTINUE permits servicing of subsequent commands only after all preceding commands
have been ecuted and all signals have settled (cf. Chapter 5 and "*OPC" as well).
1303.3545.12
6.7
E-1
ABORt Subsystem
R&S FMU
ABORt Subsystem
The ABORt subsystem contains the commands for aborting triggered actions. An action can be
triggered again immediately after being aborted. All commands trigger events, and therefore they have
no *RST value.
Command
Parameters
ABORt
ABORt
This command aborts a current measurement and resets the trigger system
Example:
"ABOR;INIT:IMM"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
0
conforming
6.8
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate Subsystem
CALCulate Subsystem
The CALCulate subsystem contains commands for converting instrument data, transforming and
carrying out corrections. These functions are carried out subsequent to data acquistion, i.e. following the
SENSe subsystem.
The numeric suffix is used in CALCulate to make the distinction between the two measurement windows
SCREEN A and SCREEN B:
CALCulate1 = Screen A
CALCulate2 = Screen B.
For commands without suffix, screen A is selected automatically.
Full Screen
The settings are valid for the measurement window selected with the numeric
suffix. They become effective as soon as the corresponding measurement window
has been selected as active measurement window using the command
DISPLay[:WINDow<1|2>]:SELect. Triggering measurements and querying
measured values is possible only in the active measurement window.
Split Screen
The settings are valid for the measurement window selected by means of the
numeric suffix and become effective immediately.
Notes:
All GSM measurements are performed in screen A. Therefore, commands carrying
a numerical suffix selecting the screen should start either with the numerical
suffix 1 (i.e. CALCulate1) or without a numerical suffix (i.e. CALCulate).
1303.3545.12
6.9
E-1
CALCulate:DELTamarker Subsystem
R&S FMU
CALCulate:DELTamarker Subsystem
The CALCulate:DELTamarker subsystem controls the delta-marker functions in the instrument. The
measurement windows are selected via CALCulate1 (screen A) or 2 (screen B).
Command
Parameters
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:AOFF
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:MAXimum[:PEAK]
!<numeric_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X
<numeric_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y:OFFSet
<numeric_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:FIXed[:STATe]
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:PNOise:AUTO
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:PNOise:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe]
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:LINK
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MAXimum:LEFT
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MAXimum:NEXT
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MAXimum[:PEAK]
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MAXimum:RIGHt
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MINimum:LEFT
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MINimum:NEXT
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MINimum[:PEAK]
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MINimum:RIGHt
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MODE
ABSolute | RELative
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>[:STATe]
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:TRACe
1 to 3
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:X
0 to MAX (frequency | sweep time)
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:X:RELative?
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:Y?
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:AOFF
This command switches off all active delta markers in the selected measurement window (screen A
or screen B).
Example:
"CALC2:DELT:AOFF"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Switches off all delta markers in screen B.
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
1303.3545.12
6.10
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate:DELTamarker Subsystem
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:MAXimum[:PEAK] <numeric_value>
This command sets the reference point level for all delta markers in the selected measurement
window for a measurement with fid reference point (CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:STAT ON) to the peak
of the selected trace.
For phase-noise measurements (CALCulate:DELTamarker:FUNCtion:PNOise:STATe ON), the
command defines a new reference point level for delta marker 2 in the selected measurement
window.
Example:
"CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:MAX"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X <numeric_value>
This command defines a new reference frequency (span > 0) or time (span = 0) for all delta markers
in the selected measurement window for a measurement with fid reference value
(CALCulate:DELTamarker:FUNCtion:FIXed:STATe ON).
For phase-noise measurements (CALCulate:DELTamarker:FUNCtion:PNOise:STATe ON),
the command defines a new reference frequency or time for delta marker 2 in the selected
measurement window.
Example:
"CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:X 12MHz"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Sets the reference frequency in
'screen A to 12 MHz.
- (FUNction:FIXed[:STATe] is set to OFF)
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y <numeric_value>
This command defines a new reference point level for all delta markers in the selected measurement
window for a measurement with fid reference point.
(CALCulate:DELTamarker:FUNCtion:FIXed:STATe ON).
For phase-noise measurements (CALCulate:DELTamarker:FUNCtion:PNOise:STATe ON),
the command defines a new reference point level for delta marker 2 in the selected measurement
window.
Example:
"CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y -10dBm"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Sets the reference point level for
'delta markers in screen A to -10
'dBm.
- (FUNction:FIXed[:STATe] is set to OFF)
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y:OFFSet <numeric_value>
This command defines an additional level offset for the measurement with fid reference value
(CALCulate:DELTamarker:FUNCtion:FIXed:STATe ON). For this measurement, the offset is
included in the display of all delta markers of the selected measurement window.
For phase-noise measurements (CALCulate:DELTamarker:FUNCtion:PNOise:STATe ON),
the command defines an additional level offset which is included in the display of delta marker 2 in
the selected measurement window.
Example:
"CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y:OFFS 10dB"
'Sets the level offset for the measurement with fid reference
'value or the phase-noise measurement in screen A to 10 dB.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
0 dB
device-specific
6.11
E-1
CALCulate:DELTamarker Subsystem
R&S FMU
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:FIXed[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches the relative measurement to a fid reference value on or off. Marker 1 will
be activated previously and a peak search will be performed, if necessary. If marker 1 is activated, its
position becomes the reference point for the measurement. The reference point can then be
modified with commands CALCulate:DELTamarker:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X and to
:RPOint:Y independently of the position of marker 1 and of a trace. It is valid for all delta markers
in the selected measurement window as long as the function is active.
Example:
"CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX ON"
'Switches on the measurement with fid
'reference value for all delta markers in
'screen B.
"CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:X 14 MHZ"
'Sets the reference frequency
'in screen A to 14 MHz.
"CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y 30 DBM"
'Sets the reference level in
'screen A to +30 dBm
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
OFF
device-specific.
CALCultate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1…4>:FUNCtion:PNOise:AUTO
ON | OFF
This command activates an automatic peak search for the phase-noise measurement.
Example:
"CALC:DELT:FUNC:PNO 1"
'Switches on the phase-noise measurement.
"CALC:DELT:FUNC:PNO:AUTO 1" Activates the automatic peak search.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
OFF
device-specific.
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:PNOise:RESult?
This command queries the result of the phase-noise measurement in the selected measurement
window.The measurement will be switched on, if necessary.
Example:
"CALC:DELT:FUNC:PNO:RES?" 'Outputs the result of phase-noise
'measurement of the selected delta marker in
'screen A.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
This command is only a query and therefore has no *RST value.
1303.3545.12
6.12
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate:DELTamarker Subsystem
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the phase-noise measurement with all active delta markers in the
selected measurement window. The correction values for the bandwidth and the log amplifier are
taken into account in the measurement.
Marker 1 will be activated, if necessary, and a peak search will be performed. If marker 1 is
activated, its position becomes the reference point for the measurement.
The reference point can then be modified with commands CALCulate:DELTamarker
:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X and to :RPOint:Y independently of the position of marker 1
and of a trace (the same commands used for the measurement with fid reference point).
The numeric suffix <1 to 4> with DELTamarker is not relevant for this command.
Note:
This command is not available during GSM measurements.
Example:
"CALC:DELT:FUNC:PNO ON"
"CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:X 12 MHZ"
"CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y 10 DBM"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Switches on the phase-noise
measurement 'with all delta
markers in screen A.
'Sets the reference frequency 'to
'12 MHz.
'Sets the reference level to +10 dBm
OFF
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:LINK ON | OFF
This command switches on and off the delta marker when delta marker 1 is selected. The
corresponding marker becomes the delta marker when delta marker 2 to 4 is selected. If the
corresponding marker is not activated, it will be activated and positioned on the maximum of the
measurement curve.
If no numeric suffix is indicated, delta marker 1 is selected automatically.
Example:
"CALC:DELT3 ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Switches marker 3 in screen A to delta marker mode.
OFF
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MAXimum:LEFT
This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller maximum value to the left of the
current value (i.e. descending X values). The corresponding delta marker will be activated first, if
necessary.
Example:
'Sets delta marker 1 in screen A to the next smaller
'maximum value to the left of the 'current value.
"CALC:DELT:MAX:LEFT"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MAXimum:NEXT
This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller maximum value on the measured
curve. The corresponding delta marker will be activated first, if necessary.
Example:
"CALC1:DELT2:MAX:NEXT"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Sets delta marker 2 in screen A to the next
'smaller maximum value.
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
1303.3545.12
6.13
E-1
CALCulate:DELTamarker Subsystem
R&S FMU
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MAXimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the delta marker to the current maximum value on the measured curve. If
necessary, the corresponding delta marker will be activated first.
Example:
"CALC2:DELT3:MAX"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Sets delta marker 3 in screen B to the
'maximum value of the associated trace.
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MAXimum:RIGHt
This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller maximum value to the right of the
current value (i.e. ascending X values).
The corresponding delta marker is activated first, if necessary.
Example:
"CALC2:DELT:MAX:RIGH"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Sets delta marker 1 in screen B to the next
'smaller maximum value to the right of the
'current value.
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MINimum:LEFT
This command positions the delta marker to the next higher minimum value to the left of the current
value (i.e. descending X values). The corresponding delta marker will be activated first, if necessary.
Example:
'Sets delta marker 1 in screen A to the next
'higher minimum to the left of the current
'value.
"CALC:DELT:MIN:LEFT"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MINimum:NEXT
This command positions the delta marker to the next higher minimum value of the measured curve.
The corresponding delta marker will be activated first, if necessary.
Example:
"CALC1:DELT2:MIN:NEXT"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Sets delta marker 2 in screen A to the next
higher minimum value.
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
1303.3545.12
6.14
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate:DELTamarker Subsystem
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MINimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the delta marker to the current minimum value on the measured curve. The
corresponding delta marker will be activated first, if necessary.
Example:
"CALC2:DELT3:MIN"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Sets delta marker 3 in screen B to the
'minimum value of the associated trace.
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MINimum:RIGHt
This command positions the delta marker to the next higher minimum value to the right of the current
value (i.e. ascending X values). The corresponding delta marker will be activated first, if necessary.
Example:
"CALC2:DELT:MIN:RIGH"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Sets delta marker 1 in screen B to the next
'higher minimum value to the right of the
current value.
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MODE ABSolute | RELative
This command switches between relative and absolute frequency input of the delta marker (or time
with span = 0). It affects all delta markers independent of the measurement window.
Example:
"CALC:DELT:MODE ABS"
'Switches the frequency/time indication for all
delta markers to absolute values.
'Switches the frequency/time indication for all
'delta markers to relative to marker 1.
"CALC:DELT:MODE REL"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
REL
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches on and off the delta marker when delta marker 1 is selected. The corresponding
marker becomes the delta marker when delta marker 2 to 4 is selected. If the corresponding marker is not
activated, it will be activated and positioned on the maximum of the measurement curve.
If no numeric suffix is indicated, delta marker 1 is selected automatically.
Example:
"CALC:DELT3 ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Switches marker 3 in screen A to delta marker mode.
OFF
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:TRACe 1 to 3
This command assigns the selected delta marker to the indicated measurement curve in the
indicated measurement window. The selected measurement curve must be active, i.e. its state must
be different from "BLANK".
Example:
"CALC:DELT3:TRAC 2"
"CALC:DELT:TRAC 3"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
'Assigns deltamarker 3 to trace 2 in screen A.
'Assigns deltamarker 1 to trace 3 in screen B.
device-specific
6.15
E-1
CALCulate:DELTamarker Subsystem
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:X
R&S FMU
0 to MAX (frequency | sweep time)
This command positions the selected delta marker in the indicated measurement window to the
indicated frequency (span > 0), time (span = 0) or level (APD measurement = ON or
CCDFmeasurement = ON). The input is in absolute values or relative to marker 1 depending on the
command CALCulate:DELTamarker:MODE. If Reference Fid measurement
(CALCulate:DELTamarker:FUNCtion:FIXed:STATe ON) is active, relative values refer to the
reference position are entered. The query always returns absolute values.
Example:
"CALC:DELT:MOD
"CALC:DELT2:X
'Switches the input for all delta markers to
'relative to marker 1.
REL"
10.7MHz"
'Positions delta marker 2 in screen A
'10.7 MHz to the right of marker 1.
"CALC2:DELT:X?"
'Outputs the absolute frequency/time of delta
'marker 1 in screen B
"CALC2:DELT:X:REL?"
'Outputs the relative frequency/time/level of
'delta marker 1 in screen B
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:X:RELative?
This command queries the frequency (span > 0) or time (span = 0) of the selected delta marker
relative to marker 1 or to the reference position ( for CALCulate:DELTamarker:FUNCtion
:FIXed:STATe ON). The command activates the corresponding delta marker, if necessary.
Example:
"CALC:DELT3:X:REL?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 in
'screen B relative to marker 1 or relative to the
'reference position.
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:Y?
This command queries the measured value of the selected delta marker in the indicated
measurement window. The corresponding delta marker will be activated, if necessary. The output is
always a relative value referred to marker 1 or to the reference position (reference fid active).
To obtain a valid query result, a complete sweep with synchronization to the sweep end must be
performed between the activation of the delta marker and the query of the y value. This is only
possible in single sweep mode.
Depending on the unit defined with CALC:UNIT or on the activated measuring functions, the query
result is output in the units below:
• DBM | DBPW | DBUV | DBMV | DBUA:
• WATT | VOLT | AMPere:
• Statistics function (APD or CCDF) on:
Example:
"INIT:CONT OFF"
"CALC:DELT2 ON"
"INIT;*WAI"
"CALC:DELT2:Y?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
Output unit DB
Output unit W | V | A
Dimensionless output
'Switches to single-sweep mode.
'Switches on delta marker 2 in screen A.
'Starts a sweep and waits for its end.
'Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2 in
'screen A.
device-specific
6.16
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate:FORMat subsystem
CALCulate:FORMat subsystem
The CALCulate:FORMat subsystem determines the postprocessing and conversion of measured data.
The measurement window is selected via CALCulate1 (SCREEN A) or CALCulate2 (SCREEN B).
Command
Parameters
CALCulate<1|2>::FORMat
MAGNitude | PHASe | UPHase | RIMag | MPHase | VOLTage
:CALCulate<1|2>:FORMat
MAGNitude | PHASe | UPHase | RIMag | MPHase | VOLTage
This command defines the display of traces.
The availability of the parameters depends on the FREQUENCY DOMAIN/TIME DOMAIN setting
MAGNitude
Display of magnitude.
This parameter is available in both the frequency and time domains.
RIMag
Display of real and imaginary component of spectrum.
This parameter is available only in the frequency domain.
MPHase
Display of magnitude and phase of spectrum.
This parameter is available only in the frequency domain.
VOLTage
Display of voltage.
This parameter is available only in the time domain.
PHASe
Display of phase with limitation to ±180 deg or . ± W (PHASE WRAP).
This parameter is available only in the phase diagram.
UPHASe
Display of phase without limitation to ±180 deg or . ± W (PHASE UNWRAP).
This parameter is available only in the phase diagram.
Example:
":CALC:FORM MPH"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
Display of magnitude/phase diagram
MAGNitude
conforms to standard
6.17
E-1
CALCulate:LIMit Subsystem
R&S FMU
CALCulate:LIMit Subsystem
The CALCulate:LIMit subsystem consists of the limit lines and the corresponding limit checks. Limit lines
can be defined as upper or lower limit lines. The individual Y values of the limit lines correspond to the
values of the X axis (CONTrol). The number of X and Y values must be identical.
8 limit lines can be active at the same time (marked by LIMIT1 to LIMIT8) in screen A and/or screen B.
The measurement windows is selected via CALCulate 1 (screen A) or 2 (screen B).
The limit check can be switched on separately for each measurement screen and limit line. WINDow1
corresponds to screen A, WINDow2 to screen B.
Each limit line can be assigned a name (max. 8 letters) under which the line is stored in the instrument.
An explanatory comment can also be given for each line (max. 40 characters).
Example (analyzer mode):
Definition and use of a new limit line 5 for trace 2 in screen A and trace 1 in screen B with the following
features:
• upper limit line
• absolute X axis in the frequency domain
• 5 ref. values:12 MHz/-40 dB, 13 MHz/-40 dB, 14 MHz/-20 dB, 15 MHz/-40 dB,
16 MHz/-40 dB
• relative Y axis with unit dB
• absolute threshold value at -35 dBm
• no safety margin
Definition of the line:
1. Defining the name:
CALC:LIM5:NAME 'TEST1'
2. Entering the comment:
CALC:LIM5:COMM 'Upper limit line'
3. Associated trace in screen A:
CALC1:LIM5:TRAC 2
4. Associated trace in screen B:
CALC2:LIM5:TRAC 1
5. Defining the X axis range:
CALC:LIM5:CONT:DOM FREQ
6. Defining the X axis scaling:
CALC:LIM5:CONT:MODE ABS
7. Defining the Y axis unit:
CALC:LIM5:UNIT DB
8. Defining the Y axis scaling:
CALC:LIM5:UPP:MODE REL
9. Defining the X axis values:
CALC:LIM5:CONT 12MHZ, 13MHZ, 14MHZ, 15MHZ, 16MHZ
10. Defining the y values:
CALC:LIM5:UPP -40, -40, -30, -40, -40
11. Defining the y threshold value:
CALC:LIM5:UPP:THR -35DBM
The definition of the safety margin and shifting in X and/or Y direction can take place as from here (see
commands below).
Switching on and evaluating the line in screen A:
1. Switching on the line in screen A:
CALC1:LIM5:UPP:STAT ON
2. Switching on the limit check in screen A:
CALC1:LIM5:STAT ON
3. Starting a new measurement with synchronization:
INIT;*WAI
4. Querying the limit check result:
CALC1:LIM5:FAIL?
Switching on and evaluating the line in screen B is performed in the same way by using CALC2 instead
of CALC1.
1303.3545.12
6.18
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate:LIMit Subsystem
Command
Parameters
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CATalog?
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CLEar[:IMMediate]
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:COMMent
<string>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:COPY
1 to 8 | <name>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:DELete
1 to 8 | <name>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:FAIL?
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:NAME
1 to 8 | <name>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:STATe
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:TRACe
1 to 3
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:UNIT
DBM | DBPW | WATT | DBUV | DBMV | VOLT | DBUA | AMPere | DB |
DEG | RAD | S | HZ | PCT | UNITLESS
CALCulate:LIMit:CATalog?
This command reads out the names of all limit lines stored on the hard disk.
Example:
"CALC:LIM:CAT?"
Feature:
*RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CLEar[:IMMediate]
This command deletes the result of the current limit check for all limit lines in the selected
measurement window.
Example:
"CALC:LIM:CLE"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Deletes the result of the limit check in screen A
conforming
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value.
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:COMMent <string>
This command defines a comment for the limit line selected (max. 40 characters). The comment is
independent from the measurement window.
Example:
"CALC:LIM5:COMM 'Upper limit for spectrum'"
'Defines the comment for limit line 5.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
blank comment
device-specific
6.19
E-1
CALCulate:LIMit Subsystem
R&S FMU
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:COPY
1 to 8 | <name>
This command copies one limit line onto another one. It is independent of the measurement window.
The name of the limit line may consist of max 8 characters.
Parameter:
1 to 8 ::= number of the new limit line or:
<name> ::= name of the new limit line given as a string
Example:
"CALC:LIM1:COPY 2"
'Copies limit line 1 to line 2.
"CALC:LIM1:COPY 'GSM2'"
'Copies limit line 1 to a new line named
''GSM2'.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
-device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:DELete
This command deletes the selected limit line. The command is independent of the measurement
window.
Example:
"CALC:LIM1:DEL"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Deletes limit line 1.
-device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:FAIL?
This command queries the result of the limit check of the limit line indicated in the selected
measurement window. It should be noted that a complete sweep must have been performed for
obtaining a valid result. A synchronization with *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI should therefore be provided.
The result of the limit check responds with 0 for PASS, 1 for FAIL, and 2 for MARGIN.
Example:
"INIT;*WAI"
"CALC2:LIM3:FAIL?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Starts a new sweep and waits for its end.
'Queries the result of the check for limit
'line 3 in screen B.
conforming
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:NAME
<name of limit line>
This command assigns a name to a limit line numbered 1 to 8. If it does not exist already, a limit line
with this name is created. The command is independent of the measurement window.
The name of the limit line may contain a maximum of 8 characters.
Example:
"CALC:LIM1:NAME 'GSM1'"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
'Assigns the name 'GSM1' to limit line 1.
'REM1' to 'REM8' for lines 1 to 8
device-specific
6.20
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate:LIMit Subsystem
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the limit check for the selected limit line in the selected
measurement window.
The result of the limit check can be queried with CALCulate:LIMit<1 to 8>:FAIL?.
Example:
"CALC:LIM:STAT ON"
'Switches on the limit check for limit line 1 in
'screen A.
"CALC2:LIM:STAT OFF"
'Switches off the limit check for limit line 1 in
'screen B.
"CALC:LIM1:NAME 'TEST_1'" 'define name for limit line 1
"CALC:LIM1:DEL'"
'delete previous limit line TEST_1
"CALC:LIM1:COMM“
'Upper Limit Example' "'
"CALC:LIM1:TRAC 1"
"CALC:LIM1:CONT:DOM:FREQ"
"CALC:LIM1:CONT:MODE ABS "
"CALC:LIM1:UNIT DB"
"CALC:LIM1:UPP:MODE REL "
"CALC:LIM1:CONT 10.0MHZ, 12.0MHz, 12.5MHZ, 13.0MHZ", 13.5MHZ,
14.0MHZ, 16MHZ
"CALC:LIM1:UPP -70, -40, -40, -20, -40, -40, -70"
"CALC:LIM1:UPP:STAT ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
OFF
conforming
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:TRACe 1 to 3
This command assigns a limit line to a trace in the indicated measurement window.
Examples:
"CALC:LIM2:TRAC 3"
'Assigns limit line 2 to trace 3 in screen A.
"CALC2:LIM2:TRAC 1"
'Assigns limit line 2 to trace 1 in screen B at
the same time.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UNIT DBM | DBPW | WATT | DBUV | DBMV | VOLT |DBUA | AMPere |
DB | DBT | DBUV_M | DBMV_M
This command defines the unit of the selected limit line.
The definition is valid independently of the measurement window.
Upon selection of the unit DB the limit line is automatically switched to the relative mode. For units
different from DB the limit line is automatically switched to absolute mode.The permissible unit
depends on the following:
• The selection TIME DOMAIN / FREQUENCY DOMAIN
• The selected result display (MAGNITUDE, MAGNITUDE/PHASE, REAL/IMAG or MAGNITUDE,
VOLTAGE)
• The display unit set with :DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:UNIT
Example:
"CALC:LIM4:UNIT DBUV"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
'Sets the unit of limit line 4 to dBµV.
DBM
device-specific
6.21
E-1
CALCulate:LIMit Subsystem
R&S FMU
CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower Subsystem
The CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower subsystem defines the limit check for adjacent channel power measurement.
Command
Parameters
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute
-200 to 200 DBM, -200 to 200 DBM
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute:STATe
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]
0 to 100 dB, 0 to 100 dB
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]:STATe
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ALTernate<1 to 11>:ABSolute
-200 to 200 DBM, -200 to 200 DBM
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ALTernate<1 to 11>:ABSolute:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ALTernate<1 to 11>:ABSolute:STATe
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ALTernate<1 to 11>[:RELative]
0 to 100 DB, 0 to 100 DB
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ALTernate<1 to 11>[:RELative]:STATe
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower[:STATe]
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute
-200DBM to 200DBM, -200 to 200DBM
This command defines the absolute limit value for the lower/upper adjacent channel during adjacentchannel power measurement (Adjacent Channel Power) in the selected measurement window.
It should be noted that the absolute limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below
the relative limit value defined with CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower:ACHannel:RELative. This
mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute basic values of adjacent channel power as
defined in mobile radio standards.
The numeric suffis <1 to 8> with LIMit are irrelevant for this command. The numeric suffix 2 with
CALCulate is not allowed.
Parameter:
The first value is the limit for the lower and the upper adjacent channel. The second limit
value is ignored but must be indicated for reasons of compatibility with the FSE family.
Example:
"CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:ABS -35DBM, -35DBM"
'Sets the absolute limit value in 'screen
A for the power in the lower 'and upper
adjacent channel to '-35 dBm.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
-200DBM
device-specific
6.22
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate:LIMit Subsystem
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute:STATe
ON | OFF
This command activates the limit check for the adjacent channel when adjacent-channel power
measurement (Adjacent Channel Power) is performed. Before the command, the limit check for the
channel/adjacent-channel measurement must be globally switched on using CALC:LIM:ACP ON.
The result can be queried with CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult?. It should be
noted that a complete measurement must be performed between switching on the limit check and
the result query, since otherwise no valid results are available.
The numeric suffis <1 to 8> with LIMit are irrelevant for this command. The numeric suffix 2 with
CALCulate is not allowed.
Example:
"CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH 30DB, 30DB"
'Sets the relative limit value in screen A for
'the power in the lower and upper adjacent
'channel to 30 dB below the channel power.
"CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:ABS -35DBM, -35DBM"
'Sets the absolute limit value in screen A
'for the power in the lower and upper
'adjacent channel to -35 dBm.
"CALC:LIM:ACP ON"
'Switches on globally the limit check for the
'channel/adjacent channel measurement in
'screen A.
"CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:REL:STAT ON"
'Switches on the check of the relative limit
'values for adjacent channels in screen A.
"CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:ABS:STAT ON"
'Switches on the check of absolute limit 'values
for the adjacent channels in screen 'A.
"INIT;*WAI"
'Starts a new measurement and waits for
'the sweep end.
"CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:RES?"
'Queries the limit check result in the
'adjacent channels in screen A.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
OFF
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative] 0 to 100dB, 0 to 100dB
This command defines the relative limit of the upper/lower adjacent channel for adjacent channel
power measurements in the selected measurement window. The reference value for the relative limit
value is the measured channel power.
It should be noted that the relative limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below
the absolute limit value defined with CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute. This
mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute basic values of adjacent channel power as
defined in mobile radio standards.
The numeric suffis <1 to 8> with LIMit are irrelevant for this command. The numeric suffix 2 with
CALCulate is not allowed.
Parameter:
The first numeric value is the limit for the upper (lower) adjacent channel. The
second value is ignored but must be indicated for reasons of compatibility with the
FSE family.
Example:
"CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH 30DB, 30DB"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
'Sets the relative limit value in
'screen A for the power in the lower
'and upper adjacent channel to
'30 dB below the channel power.
0 dB
device-specific
6.23
E-1
CALCulate:LIMit Subsystem
R&S FMU
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]:STATe ON | OFF
This command activates the limit check for the relative limit value of the adjacent channel when
adjacent channel power measurement is performed. Before the command, the limit check must be
activated using CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower:STATe ON.
The result can be queried with CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult?. It should be
noted that a complete measurement must be performed between switching on the limit check and
the result query, since otherwise no valid results are available.
The numeric suffis <1 to 8> with LIMit are irrelevant for this command. The numeric suffix 2 with
CALCulate is not allowed.
Example:
"CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH 30DB,30DB"
'Sets the relative limit value in screen A for
'the power in the lower and upper adjacent
'channel to 30 dB below the channel 'power.
"CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:ABS -35DBM, -35DBM"
'Sets the absolute limit value in screen A
'for the power in the lower and upper
'adjacent channel to -35 dBm.
"CALC:LIM:ACP ON"
'Switches on globally the limit check for the
'channel/adjacent channel measurement in
'screen A.
"CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:REL:STAT ON"'Switches on the check of the relative limit
values for adjacent channels in 'screen A.
"CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:ABS:STAT ON"'Switches on the check of absolute 'limit
values for the adjacent channels in 'screen A.
"INIT;*WAI"
'Starts a new measurement and waits for
'the sweep end.
"CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:RES?"
'Queries the limit check result in the
'adjacent channels in screen A.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
OFF
device-specific
6.24
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate:LIMit Subsystem
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult?
This command queries the result of the limit check for the upper/lower adjacent channel in the
selected measurement window when adjacent channel power measurement is performed.
If the power measurement of the adjacent channel is switched off, the command produces a query
error.
The numeric suffis <1 to 8> with LIMit are irrelevant for this command. The numeric suffix 2 with
CALCulate is not allowed.
Parameter:
The result is returned in the form <result>, <result> where
<result> = PASSED | FAILED, and where the first returned value denotes the
lower, the second denotes the upper adjacent channel.
Example:
"CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH 30DB, 30DB"
'Sets the relative limit value in screen A for the
'power in the lower and upper adjacent
'channel to 30 dB below the channel power.
"CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:ABS -35DBM, -35DBM"
Sets the absolute limit value in screen A
'for the power in the lower and upper
'adjacent channel to -35 dB.
"CALC:LIM:ACP ON"
'Switches on globally the limit check for the
'channel/adjacent channel measurement in
'screen A.
"CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:STAT ON" 'Switches on the limit check for the adjacent
'channels in screen A.
"INIT;*WAI"
'Starts a new measurement and waits for the
'sweep end.
"CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:RES?"
'Queries the limit check result in the adjacent
'channels in screen A.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
-device-specific
This command is a query and therefore has no *RST value.
1303.3545.12
6.25
E-1
CALCulate:LIMit Subsystem
R&S FMU
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ALTernate<1 to 11>[:RELative] 0 to 100dB, 0 to 100dB.
This command defines the limit for the alternate adjacent channels in the selected measurement
window for adjacent channel power measurements. The reference value for the relative limit value is
the measured channel power.
The numeric suffix after ALTernate<1 to 11> denotes the alternate channel. The numeric suffis <1 to
8> with LIMit are irrelevant for this command. The numeric suffix 2 with CALCulate is not allowed.
It should be noted that the relative limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below
the absolute limit defined with CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower:ALTernate<1 to
11>:ABSolute. This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute basic values of
adjacent channel power as defined in mobile radio standards.
Parameter:
The first value is the limit for the lower and the upper alternate adjacent channel.
The second limit value is ignored but must be indicated for reasons of
compatibility with the FSE family.
Example:
"CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2 30DB, 30DB"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
'Sets the relative limit value in
'screen A for the power in the lower
'and upper alternate adjacent
'channel to 30 dB below the channel
'power.
0DB
device-specific
6.26
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate:LIMit Subsystem
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ALTernate<1 to 11>[:RELative]:STATe ON | OFF
This command activates the limit check for the alternate adjacent channels in the selected
measurement window for adjacent channel power measurements. Before the command, the limit
check must be activated using CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower:STATe ON.
The numeric suffix after ALTernate<1 to 11> denotes the alternate channel. The numeric suffis <1 to
8> with LIMit are irrelevant for this command. The numeric suffix 2 with CALCulate is not allowed.
The result can be queried with CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower:ALTernate<1 to 11>:RESult?.
It should be noted that a complete measurement must be performed between switching on the limit
check and the result query, since otherwise no valid results are obtained.
Example:
"CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2 30DB, 30DB"
'Sets the relative limit value in screen A for the
'power in the lower and upper second alternate
'adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel
'power.
"CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:ABS -35DBM, -35DBM"
'Sets the absolute limit value in screen A for the
'power in the lower and upper second alternate
'adjacent channel to -35 dBm.
"CALC:LIM:ACP ON"
'Switches on globally the limit check for the
'channel/adjacent channel measurement in
'screen A.
"CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:REL:STAT ON"
'Switches on the check of the relative limit
'values for the alternate adjacent channels in
'screen A.
"CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:ABS:STAT ON"
'Switches on the check of absolute limit values
'for the alternate adjacent channels in screen A.
"INIT;*WAI"
'Starts a new measurement and waits for the
'sweep end.
"CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:RES?"
'Queries the limit check result in the second
'alternate adjacent channels in screen A.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
OFF
device-specific
6.27
E-1
CALCulate:LIMit Subsystem
R&S FMU
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ALTernate<1 to 11>:ABSolute
-200DBM to 200DBM,
-200DBM to .200DBM
This command defines the absolute limit value for the lower/upper alternate adjacent channel power
measurement (Adjacent Channel Power) in the selected measurement window.
The numeric suffix after ALTernate<1 to 11> denotes the alternate channel. The numeric suffis <1 to
8> with LIMit are irrelevant for this command. The numeric suffix 2 with CALCulate is not allowed.
It should be noted that the absolute limit value for the limit check has no effect as soon as it is below
the relative limit value defined with CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower:ALTernate<1 to
11>:RELative. This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute basic values defined in
mobile radio standards for the power in adjacent channels.
Parameter:
The first value is the limit for the lower and the upper alternate adjacent channel.
The second limit value is ignored but must be indicated for reasons of
compatibility with the FSE family.
Example:
"CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:ABS -35DBM, -35DBM"
'Sets the absolute limit value in
'screen A for the power in the lower
'and upper second alternate
'adjacent channel to -35 dBm.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
-200DBM
device-specific
6.28
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate:LIMit Subsystem
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ALTernate<1 to 11>:RESult?
This command queries the result of the limit check for the alternate adjacent channels in the selected
measurement window for adjacent channel power measurements.
The numeric suffix after ALTernate<1 to 11> denotes the alternate channel. The numeric suffis <1 to
8> with LIMit are irrelevant for this command. The numeric suffix 2 with CALCulate is not allowed.
If the power measurement of the adjacent channel is switched off, the command produces a query
error.
Parameter:
The result is returned in the form <result>, <result> where
<result> = PASSED | FAILED and where the first (second) returned value
denotes the lower (upper) alternate adjacent channel.
Example:
"CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2 30DB, 30DB"
'Sets the relative limit value in screen A for the
'power in the lower and upper second alternate
'adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel
'power.
"CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:ABS -35DBM, -35DBM"
'Sets the absolute limit value in screen A for the
'power in the lower and upper second alternate
'adjacent channel to -35 dBm.
"CALC:LIM:ACP ON"
'Switches on globally the limit check for the
'channel/adjacent channel measurement in
'screen A.
"CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT:STAT ON"
'Switches on the limit check for the adjacent
'channels in screen A.
"INIT;*WAI"
'Starts a new measurement and waits for the
'sweep end.
"CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT:RES?"
'Queries the limit check result in the second
'alternate adjacent channels in screen A.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
-device-specific
This command is a query and therefore has no *RST value.
1303.3545.12
6.29
E-1
CALCulate:LIMit Subsystem
R&S FMU
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ALTernate<1 to 11>:ABSolute:STATe ON | OFF
This command activates the limit check for the alternate adjacent channels in the selected
measurement window for adjacent channel power measurement (Adjacent Channel Power).
Before the command, the limit check must be globally switched on for the channel/adjacent channel
power with the command CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower:STATe ON.
The numeric suffix after ALTernate<1 to 11> denotes the alternate channel. The numeric suffis <1 to
8> with LIMit are irrelevant for this command. The numeric suffix 2 with CALCulate is not allowed.
The result can be queried with CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower:ALTernate<1 to
11>:RESult?. It should be noted that a complete measurement must be performed between
switching on the limit check and the result query, since otherwise no valid results are available.
Example:
"CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2 30DB, 30DB"
'Sets the relative limit value in screen A for the
power in the lower and upper second alternate
'adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel
'power.
"CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:ABS -35DBM, -35DBM"
'Sets the absolute limit value in screen A for the
'power in the lower and upper second alternate
'adjacent channel to -35 dBm.
"CALC:LIM:ACP ON"
'Switches on globally the limit check for the
'channel/adjacent channel measurement in
'screen A.
"CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:REL:STAT ON"
Switches on the check of the relative limit
values for the alternative adjacent channels in
'screen A.
"CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:ABS:STAT ON"
'Switches on the check of absolute limit values
'for the alternative adjacent channels in screen
'A.
"INIT;*WAI"
'Starts a new measurement and waits for the
'sweep end.
"CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:RES?"
'Queries the limit check result in the second
'alternate adjacent channels in screen A.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
OFF
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower[:STATe]
ON | OFF
This command switches on and off the limit check for adjacent channel power measurements in the
selected measurement window. The commands CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower:ACHannel:STATe or
CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower:ALTernate:STATe must be used in addition to specify whether the limit
check is to be performed for the upper/lower adjacent channel or for the alternate adjacent channels.
The numeric suffis <1 to 8> with LIMit are irrelevant for this command. The numeric suffix 2 with
CALCulate is not allowed.
Example:
"CALC:LIM:ACP ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
'Switches on the ACP limit check in screen A.
OFF
device-specific
6.30
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate:LIMit Subsystem
CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol Subsystem
The CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol subsystem defines the x axis (CONTrol-axis).
Command
Parameters
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CONTrol[:DATA]
<numeric_value>,<numeric_value>..
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CONTrol:DOMain
FREQuency | TIME
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CONTrol:MODE
RELative | ABSolute
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CONTrol:OFFset
<numeric_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CONTrol:SHIFt
<numeric_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CONTrol:SPACing
LINear | LOGarithmic
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CONTrol[:DATA] <numeric_value>,<numeric_value>..
This command defines the X axis values (frequencies or times) of the upper or lower limit lines. The
values are defined independently of the measurement window.
Example:
"CALC:LIM2:CONT 1MHz,3MHz,10MHz, 15MHz,30MHz"
'Defines 5 reference values for the X axis of
'limit line 2
"CALC:LIM2:CONT?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Outputs the reference values for the X axis of
'limit line 2 separated by a comma.
- (LIMit:STATe is set to OFF)
conforming
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CONTrol:DOMain
FREQuency | TIME
This command defines the frequency or time domain for the x axis values.
Example:
"CALC:LIM2:CONT:DOM TIME" 'Defines the time domain for the X axis of limit
'line 2.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
FREQuency
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CONTrol:MODE
RELative | ABSolute
This command selects the relative or absolute scaling for the X axis of the selected limit line. The
definition is independent of the measurement window.
Example:
"CALC:LIM2:CONT:MODE REL" 'Defines the X axis of limit line 2 as relatively
'scaled.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
ABSolute
device-specific
6.31
E-1
CALCulate:LIMit Subsystem
R&S FMU
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CONTrol:OFFSet
<numeric_value>
This command defines an offset for the X axis value of the selected relative limit line in the frequency
or time domain.
The unit of values depends on the frequency or time domain of the X axis, i.e. it is HZ with
CALC:LIM:CONT:DOM FREQ and S with CALC:LIM:CONT:DOM TIME.
Example:
"CALC:LIM2:CONT:OFFS 100us"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Sets the X offset for limit line 2 (defined in
'the time domain) to 100Zs.
0
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CONTrol:SHIFt
<numeric_value>
This command moves a limit line by the indicated value in x direction. In contrast to
CALC:LIM:CONT:OFFS, the line is shifted by modifying the individual x values and not by means of
an additive offset. The shift is independent of the measurement window.
Example:
"CALC:LIM2:CONT:SHIF 50KHZ"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Shifts all reference values of limit line 2 by
'50 kHz.
-device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CONTrol:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic
This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the calculation of limit lines from
frequency points.
Example:
"CALC:LIM:CONT:SPAC LIN"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
LIN
device-specific
6.32
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate:LIMit Subsystem
CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer Subsystem
The CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer subsystem defines the lower limit line.
Command
Parameters
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer[:DATA]
<numeric_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer:MARGin
<numeric_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer:MODE
RELative | ABSolute
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer:OFFset
<numeric_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer:SHIFt
<numeric_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer:SPACing
LINear | LOGarithmic
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer:STATe
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer:THReshold
<numeric_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer[:DATA] <numeric_value>,<numeric_value>..
This command defines the values for the selected lower limit line independently of the measurement
window.
The unit must be identical with the unit selected by CALC:LIM:UNIT. If no unit is indicated, the unit
defined with CALC:LIM:UNIT is automatically used.
If the measured values are smaller than the LOWer limit line, the limit check signals errors.
The permissible unit depends on the following:
• The selected TIME DOMAIN / FREQUENCY DOMAIN
• The selected result display (MAGNITUDE, MAGNITUDE/PHASE, REAL/IMAG or MAGNITUDE,
VOLTAGE)
• The display unit set with:DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:UNIT
Example:
"CALC:LIM2:LOW -30,-40,-10,-40,-30"
'Defines 5 lower limit values for limit line 2 in
'the preset unit.
"CALC:LIM2:LOW?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Outputs the lower limit values of limit line 2
'separated by a comma.
- (LIMit:STATe is set to OFF)
conforming
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer:MARGin <numeric_value>
This command defines a margin to a lower limit line, at which out-of-limit values are signaled (if the
limit check is active), but not handled as a violation of the limit value. The margin is independent of
the measurement window.
Example:
"CALC:LIM:LOW:MARG 10dB"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
0
device-specific
6.33
E-1
CALCulate:LIMit Subsystem
R&S FMU
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer:MODE RELative | ABSolute
This command selects the relative or absolute scaling for the Y axis of the selected lower limit line.
The setting is independent of the measurement window.
Selecting RELative causes the unit to be switched to DB.
Example:
"CALC:LIM:LOW:MODE REL"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Defines the Y axis of limit line 2 as relative
'scaled.
ABSolute
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer:OFFSet
<numeric_value>
This command defines an offset for the Y axis of the selected relative lower limit line. In contrast to
CALC:LIM:LOW:SHIFt, the line is not shifted by modifying the individual Y values but by means of
an additive offset. The offset is independent of the measurement window.
Example:
"CALC:LIM2:LOW:OFFS 3dB"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Shifts limit line 2 in the corresponding
'measurement windows by 3 dB upwards.
0
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer:SHIFt <numeric_value>
This command shifts a limit line by the indicated value in Y direction. In contrast to
CALC:LIM:LOW:OFFS, the line is shifted by modifying the individual Y values but not by means of an
additive offset. The shift is independent of the measurement window.
Example:
"CALC:LIM3:LOW:SHIF 20DB"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Shifts all Y values of limit line 3 by 20 dB.
-device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic
This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the lower limit line.
Example:
"CALC:LIM:LOW:SPAC LIN"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
LIN
device-specific
6.34
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate:LIMit Subsystem
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the indicated limit line in the selected measurement window. The
limit check is activated separately with CALC:LIM:STAT ON.
In analyzer mode, the result of the limit check can be queried with CALCulate:LIMit<1 to
8>:FAIL?.
Example:
"CALC:LIM4:LOW:STAT ON"
'Switches on limit line 4 (lower limit) in
'screen A.
"CALC2:LIM4:LOW:STAT ON"
'Switches on limit line 4 (lower limit) also in
'screen B.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
OFF
conforming
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer:THReshold <numeric_value>
This command defines an absolute threshold value for limit lines with relative Y axis scaling
independently of the measurement window. The absolute threshold value is used in the limit check
as soon as it exceeds the relative limit value.
The unit must correspond to the unit selected with CALC:LIM:UNIT (except dB which is not
allowed). If no unit is indicated, the unit defined with CALC:LIM:UNIT is automatically used
(exception: dBm instead of dB).
Example:
"CALC:LIM2:LOW:THR -35DBM"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
'Defines an absolute threshold value 'for
limit line 2.
-200 dBm
device-specific
6.35
E-1
CALCulate:LIMit Subsystem
R&S FMU
CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer Subsystem
The CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer subsystem defines the upper limit line.
Command
Parameters
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer[:DATA]
<num_value>,<num_value>..
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer:MARGin
<numeric_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer:MODE
RELative | ABSolute
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer:OFFset
<numeric_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer:SHIFt
<numeric_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer:SPACing
LINear | LOGarithmic
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer:STATe
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer:THReshold
<numeric value>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer[:DATA] <numeric_value>,<numeric_value>..
This command defines the values for the upper limit lines independently of the measurement
window.
The number of values for the CONTrol axis and for the corresponding UPPer and/or LOWer limit line
have to be identical. Otherwise default values are entered for missing values or not necessary values
are deleted.
The unit must be identical with the unit selected by CALC:LIM:UNIT. If no unit is indicated, the unit
defined with CALC:LIM:UNIT is automatically used.
Example:
"CALC:LIM2:UPP -10,0,0,-10,-5" 'Defines 5 upper limit values for limit
'line 2 in the preset unit.
"CALC:LIM2:UPP?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Outputs the upper limit values for limit
'line 2 separated by a comma.
- (LIMit:STATe is set to OFF)
conforming
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer:MARGin
<numeric_value>
This command defines a margin to an upper limit line, at which out-of-limit values are signaled (if the
limit check is active), but not handled as a violation of the limit value. The margin is independent of
the measurement window.
Example:
"CALC:LIM2:UPP:MARG 10dB"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Defines the margin of limit line 2 to 10
'dB below the limit value.
0
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer:MODE
RELative | ABSolute
This command selects the relative or absolute scaling for the Y axis of the selected upper limit line.
The setting is independent of the measurement window.
Selecting RELative causes the unit to be switched to DB.
Example:
"CALC:LIM2:UPP:MODE REL"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
'Defines the Y axis of limit line 2 as
'relative scaled.
ABSolute
device-specific
6.36
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate:LIMit Subsystem
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer:OFFSet
<numeric_value>
This command defines an offset for the Y axis of the selected relative upper limit line. In contrast to
CALC:LIM:UPP:SHIFt, the line is not shifted by modifying the individual Y values but by means of
an additive offset. The offset is independent of the measurement window.
Example:
"CALC:LIM2:UPP:OFFS 3dB"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Shifts limit line 2 by 3 dB upwards in the
'corresponding measurement windows.
0
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer:SHIFt
<numeric_value>
This command moves a limit line by the indicated value in Y direction. In contrast to
CALC:LIM:UPP:OFFS, the line is shifted by modifying the individual Y values and not by means of
an additive offset. The shift is independent of the measurement window.
Example:
"CALC:LIM3:UPP:SHIF 20DB"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Shifts all Y values of limit line 3 by 20 dB.
-device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer:SPACing
LINear | LOGarithmic
This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the upper limit line.
Example:
"CALC:LIM:UPP:SPAC LIN"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
LIN
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer:STATe
ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the indicated limit line in the selected measurement window. The
limit check is activated separately with CALC:LIM:STAT ON.
Example:
"CALC1:LIM4:UPP:STAT ON"
'Switches on limit line 4 (upper limit) in
'screen A.
'Switches on limit line 4 (upper limit) in
'screen B.
"CALC2:LIM4:UPP:STAT ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
OFF
conforming
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer:THReshold
<numeric_value>
This command defines an absolute threshold value for limit lines with relative Y axis scaling
independently of the measurement window. The absolute threshold value is used in the limit check
as soon as it exceeds the relative limit value.
The unit must correspond to the unit selected with CALC:LIM:UNIT (except dB which is not
possible). If no unit is indicated, the unit defined with CALC:LIM:UNIT is automatically used
(exception: dBm instead of dB).
The units DEG, RAD, S, HZ, PCT are not available in the SPECTRUM mode.
Example:
"CALC:LIM2:UPP:THR -35DBM"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
'Defines an absolute threshold value for
'limit line 2.
-200 dBm
device-specific
6.37
E-1
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem
R&S FMU
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem
The CALCulate:MARKer subsystem checks the marker functions in the instrument. The measurement
windows are assigned to CALCulate 1 (screen A) or 2 (screen B).
For measurements using two windows (MAGNITUDE/PHASE, REAL/IMAG, VOLTAGE), a second
marker in the other window follows the first marker. Switching a marker on and off and positioning it thus
applies to both windows in this case.
Command
Parameters
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:AOFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:LOEXclude
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MAXimum:AUTO
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MAXimum:LEFT
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MAXimum:NEXT
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MAXimum[:PEAK]
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MAXimum:RIGHt
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>: MINimum:AUTO
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MINimum:LEFT
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MINimum:NEXT
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MINimum[:PEAK]
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MINimum:RIGHt
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:PEXCursion
<numeric_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>[:STATe]
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:TRACe
1 to 3
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:X
0 to MAX (frequency | sweep time)
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:X:SLIMits:LEFT
0 to MAX (frequency|sweep time)
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:X:SLIMits:RIGHt
0 to MAX (frequency|sweep time)
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:X:SLIMits[:STATe]
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:Y?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:Y:PERCent
0 to 100 %
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:AOFF
This command switches off all active markers in the selected measurement window. All delta
markers and active marker/delta marker measurement functions are switched off. The numeric suffix
in CALCulate<1|2> is irrelevant.
Example:
"CALC:MARK:AOFF"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Switches off all markers.
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
1303.3545.12
6.38
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:LOEXclude ON | OFF
This command switches the suppression of the DC component on or off during maximum search.
This function is available only in the frequency domain display.
This setting is valid for all markers and delta markers in all measurement windows. The numeric
suffix under CALCulate<1|2> and the numeric suffix under MARKer<1...4> are irrelevant.
Example:
"CALC:MARK:LOEX OFF"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
ON
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:MAXimum:AUTO ON | OFF
This command switches an automatic maximum peak search for marker 1 at the end of each
particular sweep on and off. The actual marker search limit settings (LEFT LIMIT, RIGHT LIMIT,
THRESHOLD, EXCLUDE LO) are taken into account.
The numeric suffix at MARKer<1..4> is irrelevant.
Example:
"CALC:MARK:MAX:AUTO ON"'activates the auto search function
for marker 1
Characteristics: *RST value
SCPI:
OFF
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MAXimum:LEFT
This command positions the marker to the next smaller maximum value to the left of the current
value (i.e. in descending X values) on the trace in the selected measurement window. For
measurements using two windows (MAGNITUDE/PHASE, REAL/IMAG, VOLTAGE), the
corresponding marker of the other window is moved to the same X position.
Note:
If no next smaller maximum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values
< peak excursion), an ecution error (error code: -200) is produced.
Example:
"CALC:MARK2:MAX:LEFT"
'Positions marker 2 in screen A to the next
'lower maximum value to the left of the current
'value.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MAXimum:NEXT
This command positions the marker to the next smaller maximum value of the corresponding trace in
the selected measurement window. For measurements using two windows (MAGNITUDE/PHASE,
REAL/IMAG, VOLTAGE), the corresponding marker of the other window is moved to the same X
position.
Note:
If no next smaller maximum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values
< peak excursion), an ecution error (error code: -200) is produced.
Example:
"CALC:MARK2:MAX:NEXT"
'Positions marker 2 in screen A to the next
'lower maximum value.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
1303.3545.12
6.39
E-1
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem
R&S FMU
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MAXimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the marker to the current maximum value of the corresponding trace in the
selected measurement window. The corresponding marker is activated first or switched to the
marker mode. For measurements using two windows (MAGNITUDE/PHASE, REAL/IMAG,
VOLTAGE), the corresponding marker of the other window is moved to the same X position.
Note:
If no maximum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values < peak
excursion), an ecution error (error code: -200) is produced.
Example:
"CALC:MARK2:MAX"
'Positions marker 2 in screen A to the maximum value of
'the trace.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MAXimum:RIGHt
This command positions the marker to the next smaller maximum value to the right of the current
value (i.e. in ascending X values) on the corresponding trace in the selected measurement window.
For measurements using two windows (MAGNITUDE/PHASE, REAL/IMAG, VOLTAGE), the
corresponding marker of the other window is moved to the same X position.
Note:
Example:
If no next smaller maximum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values
< peak excursion), an ecution error (error code: -200) is produced.
"CALC:MARK2:MAX:RIGH"
'Positions marker 2 in screen A to the next
'lower maximum value to the right of the
'current value.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:MINimum:AUTO ON | OFF
This command switches an automatic minimum peak search for marker 1 at the end of each
particular sweep on and off. The actual marker search limit settings (LEFT LIMIT, RIGHT LIMIT,
THRESHOLD, EXCLUDE LO) are taken into account.
The numeric suffix at MARKer<1..4> is irrelevant.
Example:
"CALC:MARK:MIN:AUTO ON"'activates the auto search function
for marker 1
Characteristics: *RST value
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
OFF
device-specific
6.40
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MINimum:LEFT
This command positions the marker to the next higher minimum value to the left of the current value
(i.e. in descending X direction) on the corresponding trace in the selected measurement window. For
measurements using two windows (MAGNITUDE/PHASE, REAL/IMAG, VOLTAGE), the
corresponding marker of the other window is moved to the same X position.
Note:
If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values <
peak excursion), an ecution error (error code: -200) is produced.
Example:
"CALC:MARK2:MIN:LEFT"
'Positions marker 2 in screen A to the next
'higher minimum value to the left of the
'current value.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MINimum:NEXT
This command positions the marker to the next higher minimum value of the corresponding trace in
the selected measurement window. For measurements using two windows (MAGNITUDE/PHASE,
REAL/IMAG, VOLTAGE), the corresponding marker of the other window is moved to the same X
position.
Note:
Example:
If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values <
peak excursion), an ecution error (error code: -200) is produced.
"CALC:MARK2:MIN:NEXT"
'Positions marker 2 in screen A to the next
'higher maximum value.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MINimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the marker to the current minimum value of the corresponding trace in the
selected measurement window. The corresponding marker is activated first or switched to marker
mode, if necessary.For measurements using two windows (MAGNITUDE/PHASE, REAL/IMAG,
VOLTAGE), the corresponding marker of the other window is moved to the same X position.
Note:
Example:
If no minimum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values < peak
excursion), an ecution error (error code: -200) is produced.
"CALC:MARK2:MIN"
'Positions marker 2 in screen A to the minimum value of
'the trace.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
1303.3545.12
6.41
E-1
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem
R&S FMU
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MINimum:RIGHt
This command positions the marker to the next higher minimum value to the right of the current
value (i.e. in ascending X direction) on the corresponding trace in the selected measurement
window. For measurements using two windows (MAGNITUDE/PHASE, REAL/IMAG, VOLTAGE),
the corresponding marker of the other window is moved to the same X position.
Note:
If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values <
peak excursion), an ecution error (error code: -200) is produced.
Example:
"CALC:MARK2:MIN:RIGH"
'Positions marker 2 in screen A to the next
'higher minimum value to the right of the
'current value.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:PEXCursion <numeric_value>
This command defines the peak excursion., i.e. the spacing below a trace maximum which must be
attained before a new maximum is recognized, or the spacing above a trace minimum which must be
attained before a new minimum is recognized. The set value is valid for all markers and delta
markers. The unit depends on the selected operating mode. The numeric suffix in MARKer<1 to 4>
is irrelevant.
Example:
"CALC:MARK:PEXC 10dB"
'Defines peak excursion 10 dB in
'SPECTRUM mode
"CALC:MARK:PEXC 100 HZ"
Defines peak excursion 100 Hz in
'FM DEMOD mode
Characteristics: *RST value:
6dB
SCPI:
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the currently selected marker. If no indication is made, marker 1 is
selected automatically. If marker 2, 3 or 4 is selected and used as a delta marker, it is switched to
marker mode. The numeric suffix in CALCulate<1|2> is irrelevant.
Example:
"CALC:MARK3 ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Switches marker 3 on or to marker mode.
OFF
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:TRACe 1 to 3
This command assigns the selected marker (1 to 4) to the indicated measurement curve in the
selected measurement window. The corresponding trace must be active, i.e. its status must be
different from "BLANK". The numeric suffix in CALCulate<1|2> is irrelevant.
If necessary the corresponding marker is switched on prior to the assignment.
Example:
"CALC:MARK3:TRAC 2"
Characteristics: *RST value
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
'Assigns marker 3 to trace 2.
device-specific
6.42
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:X
0 to MAX (frequency | sweep time)
This command positions the selected marker to the indicated frequency (frequency domain, span > 0),
time (time domain, span = 0) or level (APD measurement or CCDF measurement ON). If marker 2, 3 or 4
is selected and used as delta marker, it is switched to marker mode. The numeric suffix in
CALCulate<1|2> is irrelevant.
Example:
"CALC1:MARK2:X 10.7MHz"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Positions marker 2 to frequency '10.7 MHz.
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:X:SLIMits[:STATe]
ON | OFF
This command switches between a limited (ON) and unlimited (OFF) search range in the selected
measurement window. The function is independent of the selection of a marker, i.e. the numeric
suffix MARKer<1 to 4> is irrelevant.
If the time domain power measurement is active, this command limits the evaluation range on the
trace.
Example:
"CALC:MARK:X:SLIM ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Switches on search limitation in screen A.
OFF
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:X:SLIMits:LEFT 0 to MAX (frequency | sweep time)
This command sets the left limit of the search range for markers and delta markers in the selected
measurement window. Depending on the x axis domain the indicated value defines a frequency
(span > 0) or time (span = 0). The function is independent of the selection of a marker, i.e. the
numeric suffix in MARKer<1 to 4> is irrelevant.
If the time domain power measurement is active, this command limits the evaluation range to the
trace.
Note:
The function is only available if the search limit for marker and delta marker is switched on
(CALC:MARK:X:SLIM ON).
Example:
"CALC:MARK:X:SLIM ON"
'Switches the search limit function on
for screen A.
"CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:LEFT 10MHz"
'Sets the left limit of the search range in
screen A to 10 MHz.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
- (is set to the left diagram border on switching on search limits)
device-specific
6.43
E-1
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem
R&S FMU
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:X:SLIMits:RIGHt 0 to MAX (frequency | sweep time)
This command sets the right limit of the search range for markers and delta markers in the selected
measurement window. Depending on the x axis domain the indicated value defines a frequency
(span > 0) or time (span = 0). The function is independent of the selection of a marker, i.e. the
numeric suffix in MARKer<1 to 4> is irrelevant.
If the time domain power measurement is active, this command limits the evaluation range to the
trace.
Note:
The function is only available if the search limit for marker and delta marker is switched on
(CALC:MARK:X:SLIM ON).
Example:
"CALC:MARK:X:SLIM ON"
'Switches the search limit function on
'for screen A.
"CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:RIGH 20MHz"
'Sets the right limit of the search range
'in screen A to 20 MHz.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
- is set to the right diagram border on switching on search
limits)
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:Y?
This command queries the measured value of the selected marker in the selected measurement
window. The corresponding marker is activated before or switched to marker mode, if necessary.
To obtain a valid query result, a complete sweep with synchronization to the sweep end must be
performed between the activation of the marker and the query of the y value. This is only possible in
single sweep mode.
The query result is output in the unit determined with CALCulate:UNIT.
In the default setting, the output is made depending on the unit determined with CALC:UNIT.
Example:
"INIT:CONT OFF"
"CALC:MARK2 ON"
"INIT;*WAI"
"CALC:MARK2:Y?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Switches to single-sweep mode.
'Switches marker 2.
'Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
'Outputs the measured value of marker 2 in screen A.
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:Y:PERCent 0 to100 %
This command positions the selected marker in the selected window to the given probability. If
marker 2, 3 or 4 is selected and used as a delta marker, it is switched to marker mode. Only
numeric suffix 1 in CALCulate<1|2> is allowed.
Note:
The command is only available with the CCDF measurement switched on.
The associated level value can be determined with the CALC:MARK:X? command.
Example:
"CALC1:MARK:Y:PERC 95PCT" 'Positions marker 1 to a 'probability of 95 %.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
device-specific
6.44
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion Subsystem
The measurement window is selected by CALCulate 1 (screen A) or 2 (screen B).
Command
Parameters
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:CENTer
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:COUNt?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:FPEaks[:IMMediate]
<numeric value>
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:SORT
X|Y
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:X?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:Y?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:MDEPth[:STATe]
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown
<numeric_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:FREQuency?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:STATe
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:TIME?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe]
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:TOI:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:TOI[:STATe]
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:CENTer
This command sets the center frequency of the selected measurement window equal to the
frequency of the indicated marker.
If marker 2, 3 or 4 is selected and used as delta marker, it is switched to the marker mode.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in frequency domain.
Example:
"CALC:MARK2:FUNC:CENT"
'Sets the center frequency of screen A to
the frequency of marker 2.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
This command is an "event" and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:COUNt?
This query reads out the number of maxima found during the search. If no search for maxima has
been performed, 0 is returned.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in frequency domain or time domain.
Example:
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE 3" 'searches the 3 highest maxima for trace 1
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:COUN?" 'queries the number of maxima found
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
-device-specific
6.45
E-1
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem
R&S FMU
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:FPEaks[:IMMediate] <numeric_value>
This command searches the selected trace for the indicated number of maxima. The results are
entered in a list and can be queried with commands CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPEaks:X? and
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPEaks:Y?. The number of maxima found can be queried with
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPEaks:COUNt?. The trace to be examined is selected with
CALC:MARK:TRACe. The order of the results in the list can be defined with
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPEaks:SORT.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in frequency domain or time domain.
Note:
The number of maxima found depends on the waveform and value set for the Peak
Excursion parameter (CALC:MARK:PEXC), however, a maximum number of 50 maxima
are determined. Only the signals which exceed their surrounding values at least by the
value indicated by the peak excursion parameter will be recognized as maxima. Therefore,
the number of maxima found is not automatically the same as the number of maxima
desired.
Example:
"INIT:CONT OFF"
'switches to single-sweep mode
"INIT;*WAI"
"CALC:MARK:TRAC 1"
'starts measurement and synchronizes to
'end
'sets marker 1 in screen A to trace 1
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:SORT X"
'sets the sort mode to increasing X values
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE 3"
'searches the 3 highest maxima for trace 1
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:COUN?"
'queries the number of maxima found
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:Y?"
'queries the level of maxima found
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:X?"
'queries the frequencies (span <> 0) or
'time (span = 0) of maxima found.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
-device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:SORT X | Y
This command sets the sort mode for the search for maxima:
X the maxima are sorted in the list of responses according to increasing X values
Y the maxima are sorted in the list of responses according to decreasing Y values
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in frequency domain or time domain.
Example:
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:SORT Y" 'sets the sort mode to decreasing y values.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
-device-specific
6.46
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:X?
This query reads out the list of X values of the maxima found. The number of available values can be
queried with CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPEaks:COUNt?.
With sort mode X, the X values are in increasing order; with sort mode Y the order corresponds to
the decreasing order of the Y values.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in frequency domain or time domain.
Example:
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:SORT Y"
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE 3"
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:COUN?"
"CALC:MARK:FPE:FUNC:X?"
'sets the sort mode to decreasing y values
'searches the 3 highest maxima for trace 1
'queries the number of maxima found
'queries the frequencies (span <> 0) or.
'time (span = 0) of the maxima found.
Returned values:
"107.5E3,153.8E3,187.9E3"'frequencies in increasing order
"2.05E-3,2.37E-3, 3.71e-3"'times in increasing order
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
-device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:Y?
This query reads out the list of X values of the maxima found. The number of available values can be
queried with CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPEaks:COUNt?.
With sort mode X, the X values are in increasing order; with sort mode Y the order corresponds to
the decreasing order of the Y values.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in frequency domain or time domain.
Example:
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:SORT Y"
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE 3"
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:COUN?"
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:Y?"
'sets the sort mode to decreasing y values
'searches the 3 highest maxima for trace 1
'queries the number of maxima found
'queries the levels of the maxima found.
Return value:
"-37.5,-58.3,-59.6" 'level in decreasing order
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
-device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:RESult?
This command queries the AM modulation depth in the indicated measurement window.
A complete sweep with synchronization to sweep end must be performed between switching on the
function and querying the measured value to obtain a valid query result. This is only possible in single
sweep mode.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in frequency domain. The numeric
suffix <1 to 4> of :MARKer is irrelevant for this command.
Example:
"INIT:CONT OFF"
"CALC:MARK:X 10MHZ"
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:MDEP ON"
"INIT;*WAI"
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:MDEP:RES?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Switches to single-sweep mode.
'Sets the reference marker (marker 1) to
'the carrier signal at 10 MHz.
'Switches on the modulation depth
'measurement in screen A.
'Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
'Outputs the measured value of screen A.
device-specific
This command is only a query and therefore has no *RST value.
1303.3545.12
6.47
E-1
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem
R&S FMU
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:MDEPth[:STATe]
This command switches on the measurement of the AM modulation depth. An AM-modulated carrier
is required on the screen for correct operation. If necessary, marker 1 is previously activated and set
to the largest signal available.
The level value of marker 1 is regarded as the carrier level. On activating the function, marker 2 and
marker 3 are automatically set as delta markers symmetrically to the carrier to the adjacent maxima
of the trace.
If the position of delta marker 2 is changed, delta marker 3 is moved symmetrically with respect to
the reference marker (marker 1). If the position of delta marker 3 is changed, fine adjustment can be
performed independently of delta marker 2.
The R&S FMU calculates the power at the marker positions from the measured levels.
The AM modulation depth is calculated from the ratio of power values at the reference marker and
the delta markers. If the two AM sidebands differ in power, the average value of the two power
values is used for calculating the AM modulation depth.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in frequency domain. The numeric
suffix <1 to 4> of :MARKer is irrelevant with this command.
Example:
"CALC:MARK:X 10MHZ"
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:MDEP ON"
"CALC:DELT2:X 10KHZ"
"CALC:DELT3:X 9.999KHZ"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Sets the reference marker (marker 1) to
'the carrier signal at 10 MHz
'Switches on the modulation depth
'measurement in screen A.
'Sets delta markers 2 and 3 to the signals
'at 10 kHz from the carrier signal
'Corrects the position of delta marker 3
'relative to delta marker 2.
OFF
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown <numeric_value>
This command defines the level spacing of the two delta markers to the right and left of marker 1 in
the selected measurement window. Marker 1 is always used as the reference marker. The numeric
suffix <1 to 4> is irrelevant for this command.
The temporary markers T1 and T2 are positioned by n dB below the active reference marker. The
frequency spacing of these markers can be queried with CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:
NDBDown:RESult?.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in frequency domain or time domain.
Example:
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD 3dB"'Sets the level spacing in screen A to 3 dB.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
6dB
device-specific
6.48
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:FREQuency?
This command queries the two frequencies of the N-dB-down marker in the selected measurement
window. The numeric suffix <1 to 4> is irrelevant for this command. The two frequency values are
separated by comma and output in ascending order.
A complete sweep with synchronization to sweep end must be performed between switching on the
function and querying the measured value to obtain a valid query result. This is only possible in single
sweep mode.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in frequency domain or time domain.
Example:
'Switches to single-sweep mode.
'Switches on the n-dB-down function in
'screen A.
"INIT;*WAI"
'Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:FREQ?" 'Outputs the frequencies of the temporary
'markers in screen A.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
This command is only a query and therefore has no *RST value.
"INIT:CONT OFF"
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD ON"
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:RESult?
This command queries the frequency spacing (bandwidth) of the N-dB-down markers in the selected
measurement window. The numeric suffix <1 to 4> is irrelevant for this command.
A complete sweep with synchronization to sweep end must be performed between switching on the
function and querying the measured value in order to obtain a valid query result. This is only possible
in single sweep mode.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in frequency domain or time domain.
Example:
"INIT:CONT OFF"
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD ON"
"INIT;*WAI"
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:RES?"
'Switches to single-sweep mode.
'Switches on the n-dB-down function in
'screen A.
'Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
'Outputs the measured value of screen A.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
This command is only a query and therefore has no *RST value.
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches the "N dB Down" function on or off in the selected measurement window.
Marker 1 is activated first, if necessary. The numeric suffix <1 to 4> is irrelevant for this command.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in frequency domain or time domain.
Example:
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:STAT ON" 'Switches on the N-dB-down function in
'screen A.
Characteristics: *RST value:
OFF
SCPI:
device-specific
1303.3545.12
6.49
E-1
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem
R&S FMU
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:TIME?
This command queries the two time values of the "N dB Down" markers in the specified
measurement window. The suffix <1 to 4> has no meaning with this command. The two time values
are output in ascending order, separated by commas.
To obtain a valid query response, a complete sweep with synchronization to the sweep end must
have been performed in between activating the function and querying the measurement results. This
is possible only in single-sweep mode.This function is available for measurement result
MAGNITUDE in frequency domain or time domain.
Example:
'Switches to single-sweep mode.
'Switches on the "N dB Down" function in
'screen A.
"INIT;*WAI"
'Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:TIME?" 'Outputs the time values of the temporary
markers in screen A.
Characteristics:
*RST value:
SCPI:
"INIT:CONT OFF"
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD ON"
device-specific
This command is a query only and thus has no *RST value
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult?
This command queries the result of the noise measurement.
A complete sweep with synchronization to the sweep end must be performed between switching on
the function and querying the measured value in order to obtain a valid query result. This is only
possible in single sweep mode.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in frequency domain or time domain.
Example:
"INIT:CONT OFF"
"CALC:MARK2 ON"
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:NOIS ON"
"INIT;*WAI"
"CALC:MARK2:NOIS:RES?"
'Switches to single-sweep mode.
'Switches on marker 2 in screen A.
'Switches on noise measurement in screen A.
'Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
'Outputs the noise result of marker 2 in
'screen A.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches the noise measurement on or off for all markers of the indicated
measurement window. The noise power density is measured at the position of the markers. The
result can be queried with CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult?.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in frequency domain or time domain.
Example:
"CALC1:MARK:FUNC:NOIS ON" 'Switches on the noise measurement for
'screen A.
Characteristics: *RST value:
OFF
SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
A, GSM/EDGE
1303.3545.12
6.50
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:TOI:RESult?
This command queries the third-order intercept point measurement in the indicated measurement
window.
A complete sweep with synchronization to sweep end must be performed between switching on the
function and querying the measured value to obtain a valid query result. This is only possible in single
sweep mode.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in frequency domain. The numeric
suffix <1 to 4> of :MARKer is irrelevant of this command.
Example:
"INIT:CONT OFF"
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI ON"
"INIT;*WAI"
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI:RES?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Switches to single-sweep mode.
'Switches the intercept measurement in
'screen A.
'Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
'Outputs the measured value of screen A.
device-specific
This command is only a query and therefore has no *RST value.
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:TOI[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command initiates the measurement of the third-order intercept point.
A two-tone signal with equal carrier levels is expected at the RF input of the instrument. Marker 1 and
marker 2 (both normal markers) are set to the maximum of the two signals. Delta marker 3 and delta
marker 4 are positioned to the intermodulation products. The delta markers can be modified
sperately afterwards with the commands CALCulate:DELTamarker3:X and
CALCulate:DELTamarker4:X.
The third-order intercept is calculated from the level spacing between the normal markers and the
delta markers.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in frequency domain. The numeric
suffix <1 to 4> of :MARKer is irrelevant for this command.
Example:
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
'Switches on the measurement of the
third-order intercept in screen A.
OFF
device-specific
6.51
E-1
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem
R&S FMU
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer Subsystem
The CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWER subsystem contains the commands for control of power
measurement.
Command
Parameters
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:POWer:MODE
WRITe | MAXHold
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet
NADC | TETRA | PDC | PHS | CDPD | FWCDma |
RWCDma | F8CDma | R8CDma | F19Cdma |
R19Cdma | FW3Gppcdma | RW3Gppcdma | D2CDma
| S2CDma | M2CDma | FIS95A | RIS95A | FIS95C0 |
RIS95C0 | FJ008 | RJ008 | FIS95C1 | RIS95C1 |
TCDMa | NONE | AWLan | BWLan
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult?
ACPower | CPOWer | MCACpower | OBANdwidth |
OBWidth | CN | CN0
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult:PHZ?
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect
ACPower | MCACpower | CPOWer | OBANdwidth |
OBWidth | CN | CN0
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe]
OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:POWer:MODE
WRITe | MAXHold
This command selects the Clear Write or Maxhold for Channel Power values.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in frequency domain.
Example:
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:MODE MAXH" 'Maxhold für Channel Power Werte
Characteristics: *RST-Wert:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
WRITe
gerätespezifisch
6.52
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet NADC | TETRA | PDC | PHS | CDPD |
FWCDma | RWCDma | F8CDma |
R8CDma | F19Cdma | R19Cdma |
FW3Gppcdma | RW3Gppcdma |
D2CDma | S2CDma | M2CDma |
FIS95A | RIS95A | FIS95C0 | RIS95C0
| FJ008 | RJ008 | FIS95C1 | RIS95C1 |
TCDMa | NONE | AWLan | BWLan
This command selects the power measurement setting for a standard in the indicated measurement
window and previously switches on the corresponding measurement, if required. The function is
independent of the marker selection, i.e. the numeric suffix <1 to 4> of MARKer is irrelevant.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in frequency domain.
The configuration for a standard comprises of the parameters weighting filter, channel bandwidth and
spacing, resolution and video bandwidth, as well as detector and sweep count.
Meaning of the CDMA standard abbreviations:
FIS95A, F8CDma
CDMA IS95A forward
RIS95A, R8CDma
CDMA IS95A reverse
FJ008, F19CDma
CDMA J-STD008 forward
RJ008, R19CDma
CDMA J-STD008 reverse
FIS95C0
CDMA IS95C Class 0 forward
RIS95C0
CDMA IS95C Class 0 reverse
FIS95C1
CDMA IS95C Class 1 forward
RIS95C1
CDMA IS95C Class 1 reverse
FWCDma
W-CDMA 4.096 MHz forward
RWCDma
W-CDMA 4.096 MHz reverse
FW3Gppcdma
W-CDMA 3.84 MHz forward
RW3Gppcdma
W-CDMA 3.84 MHz reverse
D2CDma
CDMA 2000 direct sequence
S2CDma
CDMA 2000 MC1 multi carrier with 1 carrier
M2CDma
CDMA 2000 MC3 multi carrier with 3 carriers
TCDMa
TD-SCDMA
AWLan
WLAN 802.11a
BWLan
WLAN 802.11b
WiMAX
WIMax
WIBro
WiBro
Notes:
The settings for standards IS95A and C differ as far as the calculation method of channel
spacings is concerned. For IS95A and J-STD008 the spacing is calculated from the center
of the main channel to the center of the corresponding adjacent channel, for IS95C from
the center of the main channel to the nearest border of the adjacent channel.
Example:
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:PRES NADC"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Selects the standard setting for
'NADC
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? ACPower | CPOWer | MCACpower |
OBANdwidth | OBWidth | CN | CN0
This command queries the result of the power measurement performed in the selected window.
If necessary, the measurement is switched on prior to the query.
The channel spacings and channel bandwidths are configured in the SENSe:POWer:ACHannel
subsystem.
To obtain a valid result, a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the sweep must be
performed before a query is output. Synchronization is possible only in the single-sweep mode.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in frequency domain. In addition the
occupied bandwidth measurement is available in MAGNITUDE/PHASE, too.
1303.3545.12
6.53
E-1
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem
R&S FMU
Parameters:
ACPower:
Adjacent-channel power measurement
Results are output in the following sequence, separated by commas:
1. Power of transmission channel
2. Power of lower adjacent channel
3. Power of upper adjacent channel
4. Power of lower alternate channel 1
5. Power of upper alternate channel 1
6. Power of lower alternate channel 2
7. Power of upper alternate channel 2
The number of measured values returned depends on the number of
adjacent/alternate channels selected with
SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs.
With logarithmic scaling (RANGE LOG), the power is output in the
currently selected level unit; with linear scaling (RANGE LIN dB or LIN
%), the power is output in W. If SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:MODE REL is
selected, the adjacent/alternate-channel power is output in dB.
CPOWer
Channel power measurement
With logarithmic scaling (RANGE LOG), the channel power is output in the
currently selected level unit; with linear scaling (RANGE LIN dB or LIN %), the
channel power is output in W.
MCACpower:
Channel/adjacent-channel power measurement with several carrier signals
Results are output in the following sequence, separated by commas:
1. Power of carrier signal 1
2. Power of carrier signal 2
3. Power of carrier signal 3
4. Power of carrier signal 4
5. Total power of all carrier signals
6. Power of lower adjacent channel
7. Power of upper adjacent channel
8. Power of lower alternate channel 1
9. Power of upper alternate channel 1
10.Power of lower alternate channel 2
11.Power of upper alternate channel 2
The number of measured values returned depends on the number of
carrier signals and adjacent/alternate channels selected with
SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:TXCHannel:COUNt and
SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs.
If only one carrier signal is measured, the total value of all carrier signals
will not be output.
With logarithmic scaling (RANGE LOG), the power is output in dBm;
with linear scaling (RANGE LIN dB or LIN %), the power is output in W.
If SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:MODE REL is selected, the
adjacent/alternate-channel power is output in dB.
OBANdwidth | OBWidth Measurement of occupied bandwidth
The occupied bandwidth in Hz is returned.
CN
Measurement of carrier-to-noise ratio
The carrier-to-noise ratio in dB is returned.
CN0
Measurement of carrier-to-noise ratio referenced to 1 Hz bandwidth.
The carrier-to-noise ratio in dB/Hz is returned.
1303.3545.12
6.54
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem
Example of channel/adjacent-channel power measurement:
"SENS:POW:ACH:ACP 3"
'Sets the number of adjacent/alternate channels to
3.
'Sets the bandwidth of the transmission channel to
30 kHz.
'Sets the bandwidth of each adjacent channel to
40 kHz.
'Sets the bandwidth of each alternate channel to
50 kHz.
'Sets the bandwidth of alternate channel 2 to
60 kHz.
'Sets the spacing between the transmission
channel and the adjacent channel to 30 kHz, the
spacing between the transmission channel and
alternate channel 1 to 60 kHz, and the spacing
between the transmission channel and alternate
channel 2 to 90 kHz.
'Sets the spacing between the transmission
channel and alternate channel 1 to 100 kHz, and
the spacing between the transmission channel and
alternate channel 2 to 150 kHz.
'Sets the spacing between the transmission
channel and alternate channel 2 to 140 kHz.
'Switches on absolute power measurement.
'Switches on the adjacent-channel power
measurement.
'Switches over to single-sweep mode.
'Starts a sweep and waits for the end of the sweep.
'Queries the result of adjacent-channel power
measurement.
'Defines the measured channel power as the
reference value for relative power measurements.
"SENS:POW:ACH:BAND 30KHZ"
"SENS:POW:ACH:BAND:ACH 40KHZ"
"SENS:POW:ACH:BAND:ALT1 50KHZ"
"SENS:POW:ACH:BAND:ALT2 60KHZ"
"SENS:POW:ACH:SPAC 30KHZ"
"SENS:POW:ACH:SPAC:ALT1 100KHZ"
"SENS:POW:ACH:SPAC:ALT2 140KHZ"
"SENS:POW:ACH:MODE ABS"
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL ACP"
"INIT:CONT OFF"
"INIT;*WAI"
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? ACP"
"SENS:POW:ACH:REF:AUTO ONCE"
If the channel power only is to be measured, all commands relating to adjacent/alternate channel
bandwidth and channel spacings are omitted. The number of adjacent/alternate channels is set to 0
with SENS2:POW:ACH:ACP 0.
Example of occupied bandwidth measurement:
"SENS1:POW:BAND 90PCT"
'
"INIT:CONT OFF"
"INIT;*WAI" '
"CALC1:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? OBW"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Defines 90 % as the percentage of the power
to be contained in the bandwidth range to be
measured.
'Switches over to single-sweep mode.
'Starts a sweep and waits for the end of the
sweep.
'Queries the occupied bandwidth measured
in screen A.
device-specific
This command is a query and therefore has no *RST value.
1303.3545.12
6.55
E-1
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem
R&S FMU
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult:PHZ
ON | OFF
This command switches the query response of the power measurement results in the indicated
measurement window between output of absolute values (OFF) and output referred to the
measurement bandwidth (ON).
The measurement results are output with CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult?
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in frequency domain.
Parameter:
ON:
OFF:
Results output referred to measurement bandwidth.
Results output in absolute values.
Example of channel/adjacent channel measurement:
"SENS:POW:ACH:ACP 3"
"SENS:POW:ACH:BAND 30KHZ"
'Sets the number of adjacent channels to 3.
'Sets the bandwidth of the main channel to
30 kHz.
"SENS:POW:ACH:BAND:ACH 40KHZ"
'Sets the bandwidth of all adjacent
'channels to 40 kHz.
"SENS:POW:ACH:BAND:ALT1 50KHZ"
'Sets the bandwidth of all alternate
'adjacent channels to 50 kHz.
"SENS:POW:ACH:BAND:ALT2 60KHZ"
'Sets the bandwidth of alternate adjacent
'channel 2 to 60 kHz.
"SENS:POW:ACH:SPAC 30KHZ"
'Sets the spacing between channel and
'adjacent channel as well as between all
'adjacent channels to 30 kHz.
"SENS:POW:ACH:SPAC:ALT1 40KHZ"
'Sets the spacing between adjacent
'channel and alternate adjacent channel as
'well as between all alternate adjacent
'channels to 40 kHz.
"SENS:POW:ACH:SPAC:ALT2 50KHZ"
'Sets the spacing between alternate
'adjacent channel 1 and alternate adjacent
'channel 2 to 50 kHz.
"SENS:POW:ACH:MODE ABS"
'Switches on absolute power
'measurement.
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL ACP"
'Switches the adjacent channel power
'measurement on.
"INIT:CONT OFF"
'Switches to single-sweep mode.
"INIT;*WAI"
'Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES:PHZ ON" 'Output of results referred to the channel
'bandwidth.
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? ACP"
'Queries the result of the adjacent channel
'power measurement referred 'to the
channel bandwidth.
If only the channel power is to be measured, all commands for defining the bandwidths
of adjacent channels as well as the channel spacings are not necessary. The number of
adjacent channels is set to 0 with SENS:POW:ACH:ACP 0.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
device-specific
6.56
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect ACPower | CPOWer | MCACpower |
OBANdwidth | OBWidth | CN | CN0
This command selects – and switches on – one of the above types of power measurement in the
selected measurement window. This function is independent of the selected marker, i.e. the
numerical suffix <1 to 4> appended to MARKer has no effect.
The channel spacings and channel bandwidths are configured in the SENSe:POWer:ACHannel
subsystem.
Please note the following:
If CPOWer is selected, the number of adjacent channels (command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs) is set to 0. If ACPower is selected, the number of adjacent
channels is set to 1, unless adjacent-channel power measurement is switched on already.
With respect to the above two settings, the behaviour of the R&S FMU differs from that of the FSE
family.
Note:
The channel/adjacent-channel power measurement is performed for the trace selected with
SENSe:POWer:TRACe 1|2|3.
This command is not available during an active GSM measurement.
The occupied bandwidth measurement is performed for the trace on which marker 1 is positioned.
To select another trace for the measurement, marker 1 is to be positioned on the desired trace by
means of CALC:MARK:TRAC 1|2|3.
Parameters:
ACPower
Adjacent-channel power measurement with a single
carrier signal
CPOWer
Channel power measurement with a single carrier
signal (equivalent to adjacent-channel power
measurement with NO. OF ADJ CHAN = 0)
MCACpower
Channel/adjacent-channel power measurement with
several carrier signals
OBANdwidth | OBWidth Measurement of occupied bandwidth
CN
Measurement of carrier-to-noise ratio
CN0
Measurement of carrier-to-noise ratio referenced to 1Hz
bandwidth
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in frequency domain. In addition the
occupied bandwidth measurement is available in MAGNITUDE/PHASE, too.
Example:
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL ACP"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Switches on adjacent-channel power
measurement.
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe]
OFF
This command switches off the power measurement in the selected measurement window.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in frequency domain.
Example:
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW OFF"'Switches off the power measurement.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value.
1303.3545.12
6.57
E-1
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem
R&S FMU
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary Subsystem
This subsystem contains the commands for controlling the time domain power functions.
Command
Parameters
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AOFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:AVERage:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:PHOLd:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN[:STATe]
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MODE
ABSolute | RELative
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:MSUMmary?
<time offset of first pulse>,
<measurement time>, <period>, < # of
pulses to measure>
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:AVERage:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:PHOLd:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak[:STATe]
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:REFerence:AUTO
ONCE
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:AVERage:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:PHOLd:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS[:STATe]
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEV:AVERage:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEV:PHOLd:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation[:STATe]
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:STATe
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AOFF
This command switches off all time domain measurements in the selected measurement
window.The function is independent of the marker selection, i.e. the numeric suffix <1 to 4> of
:MARKer is irrelevant.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Example:
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:AOFF"
'Switches off the time domain power
'measurement functions.
Characteristics: *RST value:
_
SCPI:
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
1303.3545.12
6.58
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage ON | OFF
This command switches on or off averaging for the active time domain power measurement in the
indicated window. The function is independent of the marker selection, i.e. the numeric suffix <1 to
4> of :MARKer is irrelevant.
Averaging is reset by switching it off and on again.
The number of results required for the calculation of average is defined with
[SENSe<1|2>:]AVERage:COUNt.
It should be noted that synchronization to the end of averaging is only possible in single sweep mode.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Example:
"INIT:CONT OFF"
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:AVER ON"
"AVER:COUN 200"
"INIT;*WAI"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Switches to single-sweep mode.
'Switches on the calculation of.
'Sets the measurement counter to 200.
'Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
OFF
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:AVERage:RESult?
This command queries the result of the measurement of the averaged mean value in the selected
measurement window. The query is only possible if averaging has been activated previously using
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion: SUMMary:AVERage.
The function is independent of the marker selection, i.e. the numeric suffix <1 to 4> of :MARKer is
irrelevant.
A complete sweep with synchronization to sweep end must be performed between switching on the
function and querying the measured value to obtain a valid query result. This is only possible in single
sweep mode.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Example: "INIT:CONT OFF"
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN ON"
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:AVER ON"
'Switches to single-sweep mode.
'Switches on the function.
'Switches on the average value
'calculation.
"INIT;*WAI"
'Starts a sweep and waits for
'the end.
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN:AVER:RES?" 'Outputs the result.
Characteristics: *RST- value: SCPI:
device-specific
This command is only a query and therefore has no *RST value.
1303.3545.12
6.59
E-1
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem
R&S FMU
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:PHOLd:RESult?
This command queries the result of the measurement of the mean value with active peak hold in the
selected measurement window. The query is only possible if the peak hold function has been
switched on previously using CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:
PHOLd.
The query is possible only if the peak hold function is active. The function is independent of the
marker selection, i.e. the numeric suffix <1 to 4> of :MARKer is irrelevant.
A complete sweep with synchronization to sweep end must be performed between switching on the
function and querying the measured value to obtain a valid query result. This is only possible in single
sweep mode.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Example:
'Switches to single-sweep mode
'Switches on the function
'Switches on the peak value
'measurement.
"INIT;*WAI"
'Starts a sweep and waits for the end
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN:PHOL:RES?" 'Outputs the result.
"INIT:CONT OFF"
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN ON"
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PHOL ON"
Characteristics: *RST- value: SCPI:
device-specific
This command is only a query and therefore has no *RST value.
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:RESult?
This command queries the result of the measurement of the mean value in the selected
measurement window. The function is independent of the marker selection, i.e. the numeric suffix
<1 to 4> of :MARKer is irrelevant.
A complete sweep with synchronization to sweep end must be performed between switching on the
function and querying the measured value to obtain a valid query result. This is only possible in single
sweep mode.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Example:
"INIT:CONT OFF"
'Switches to single-sweep mode.
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN ON" 'Switches on the function.
"INIT;*WAI"
'Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN:RES?" 'Outputs the result.
Characteristics: *RST- value: SCPI:
device-specific
This command is only a query and therefore has no *RST value.
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the measurement of the mean value in the selected measurement
window.
The function is independent of the marker selection, i.e. the numeric suffix <1 to 4> of :MARKer is
irrelevant.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Note:
The measurement is performed on the trace on which marker 1 is positioned. In order to
evaluate another trace, marker 1 must be positioned on another trace with
CALC:MARK:TRAC 1|2|3.
Example:
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
'Switches on the function.
OFF
device-specific
6.60
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MODE ABSolute | RELative
This command selects absolute or relative time domain power measurement in the indicated
measurement window. The function is independent of the marker selection, i.e. the numeric suffix <1
to 4> of :MARKer is irrelevant.
The reference power for relative measurement is defined with CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion
:SUMMary:REFerence:AUTO ONCE. If the reference power is not defined, the value 0 dBm is
used.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Example:
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MODE REL"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Switches the time domain power
'measurement to relative.
ABSolute
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:MSUMmary? <time offset of first pulse>,
<measurement time>, <period>, < # of
pulses to measure>
The commands of this subsystem are used to determine the power of a sequence of signal pulses
having the same interval, as are typical for the slots of a GSM signal, for example. The number of
pulses to be measured as well as the measurement time and the period can be set. To define the
position of the first pulse in the trace, a suitable offset can be entered.
The evaluation is performed on the measurement data of a previously recorded trace. The data
recorded during the set measurement time is combined to a measured value for each pulse
according to the detector specified and the indicated number of results is output as a list.
P
Measurement
Time
Measurement
Time
Period
Measurement
Time
Period
t
Time offset of
first pulse
Trace start
TRACE 1 of the selected screen is always used by the function. The suffix of MARKer will be ignored.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Example:
'Sets the reference level to 10 dBm
'Sets the receive frequency to 18 MHz
'and the span to 0 Hz (time domain)
"BAND:RES 1MHz"
'Sets the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz
"DET RMS"'Sets the RMS detector
"TRIG:SOUR EXT "
'Selects the trigger source EXTern
"SWE:TIME 50ms"
'Sets the sweep time to 50 ms
"INIT;*WAI"
'Starts the measurement with synchronization
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:MSUM? 50US,450US,576.9US,8"
'Queries 8 bursts with an offset of 50 µs, a
'test time of 450 µs and a period of 576.9 µs
"DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV –10dBm"
"FREQ:CENT 18MHz;SPAN 0Hz"
Characteristics:
1303.3545.12
*RST value:SCPI:device-specific
6.61
E-1
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem
R&S FMU
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the peak-hold function for the active time domain power
measurement in the indicated measurement window. The function is independent of the marker
selection, i.e. the numeric suffix <1 to 4> of :MARKer is irrelevant.
The peak-hold function is reset by switching it off and on again.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Example:
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PHOL ON" 'Switches on the function.
Characteristics: *RST value:
OFF
SCPI:
device-specific
The peak-hold function is reset by switching off and on, again.
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:AVERage:RESult?
This command is used to query the result of the measurement of the averaged positive peak value in
the selected measurement window. The query is only possible if averaging has been activated
previously using CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion: SUMMary:AVERage.
The function is independent of the marker selection, i.e. the numeric suffix <1 to 4> in MARKer is
irrelevant.
A complete sweep with synchronization to sweep end must be performed between switching on the
function and querying the measured value to obtain a valid query result. This is only possible in single
sweep mode.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Example:
"INIT:CONT OFF"
'Switches to single-sweep mode.
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE ON"
'Switches on the function.
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:AVER ON" 'Switches on the calculation of average.
"INIT;*WAI"
'Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE:AVER:RES?" 'Outputs the result.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
This command is only a query and therefore has no *RST value.
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:PHOLd:RESult?
This command is used to query the result of the measurement of the positive peak value with active
peak hold function. The query is only possible if the peak hold function has been activated previously
using CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>: FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd.
The function is independent of the marker selection, i.e. the numeric suffix <1 to 4> of :MARKer is
irrelevant.
A complete sweep with synchronization to sweep end must be performed between switching on the
function and querying the measured value to obtain a valid query result. This is only possible in single
sweep mode.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Example:
'Switches to single-sweep mode.
'Switches on the function.
'Switches on the measurement of the
'peak value.
"INIT;*WAI"
'Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE:PHOL:RES?" 'Outputs the result.
"INIT:CONT OFF"
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE ON"
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PHOL ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
This command is only a query and therefore has no *RST value.
1303.3545.12
6.62
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:RESult?
This command is used to query the result of the measurement of the positive peak value in the
selected measurement window. The measurement may have to be switched on previously.
The function is independent of the marker selection, i.e. the numeric suffix <1 to 4> of MARKer is
irrelevant.
A complete sweep with synchronization to sweep end must be performed between switching on the
function and querying the measured value to obtain a valid query result. This is only possible in single
sweep mode.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Example:
"INIT:CONT OFF"
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE ON"
"INIT;*WAI"
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE:RES?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
'Switches to single-sweep mode.
'Switches on the function.
'Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
'Outputs the result.
device-specific
A-T, MS
This command is only a query and therefore has no *RST value.
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak[:STATe]
ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the measurement of the positive peak value in the selected
measurement window.
The function is independent of the marker selection, i.e. the numeric suffix <1 to 4> of MARKer is
irrelevant.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Example:
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE ON" 'Switches on the function in screen A.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
OFF
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:REFerence:AUTO ONCE
With this command the currently measured average value (..:SUMMary:MEAN) and RMS value
(..:SUMMary:RMS)are declared as reference values for relative measurements in the indicated
measurement window. The function is independent of the marker selection, i.e. the numeric suffix <1
to 4> of :MARKer is irrelevant.
If the measurement of RMS value and average is not activated, the reference value 0 dBm is used.
If the function to :SUMMary:AVERage or to :SUMMary:PHOLd is switched on, the current
value is the accumulated measurement value at the time considered.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Example:
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:REF:AUTO ONCE"
'Takes the currently measured power in
' screen A as reference value for the relative
' time domain power measurement.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
1303.3545.12
6.63
E-1
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem
R&S FMU
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:AVERage:RESult?
This command queries the result of the measurement of the averaged RMS value in the selected
measurement window. The query is only possible if averaging has been activated previously using
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion: SUMMary:AVERage.
The function is independent of the marker selection, i.e. the numeric suffix <1 to 4> of :MARKer is
irrelevant.
A complete sweep with synchronization to sweep end must be performed between switching on the
function and querying the measured value to obtain a valid query result. This is only possible in single
sweep mode.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Example:
'Switches to single-sweep mode.
'Switches on the function.
Switches on the average value
'calculation.
"INIT;*WAI"
'Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS:AVER:RES?" 'Outputs the result.
"INIT:CONT OFF"
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS ON"
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:AVER ON"
Characteristics: *RST- value: SCPI:
device-specific
This command is only a query and therefore has no *RST value.
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:PHOLd:RESult?
This command queries the result of the measurement of the RMS value with active peak hold in the
selected measurement window. The query is only possible only if the peak hold function has been
activated previously using CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>: FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd.
The function is independent of the marker selection, i.e. the numeric suffix <1 to 4> of :MARKer is
irrelevant.
A complete sweep with synchronization to sweep end must be performed between switching on the
function and querying the measured value to obtain a valid query result. This is only possible in single
sweep mode.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Example:
'Switches to single-sweep mode.
'Switches on the function.
'Switches on the peak value
'measurement.
"INIT;*WAI"
'Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS:PHOL:RES?" 'Outputs the result.
"INIT:CONT OFF"
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS ON"
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PHOL ON"
Characteristics: *RST- value: SCPI:
device-specific
This command is only a query and therefore has no *RST value.
1303.3545.12
6.64
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:RESult?
This command queries the result of the measurement of the RMS power value in the selected
measurement window.
The function is independent of the marker selection, i.e. the numeric suffix <1 to 4> of :MARKer is
irrelevant.
A complete sweep with synchronization to sweep end must be performed between switching on the
function and querying the measured value to obtain a valid query result. This is only possible in single
sweep mode.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Example:
"INIT:CONT OFF"
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS ON"
"INIT;*WAI"
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS:RES?"
'Switches to single-sweep mode.
'Switches on the function.
'Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
'Outputs the result.
Characteristics: *RST- value: SCPI:
device-specific
This command is only a query and therefore has no *RST value.
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the measurement of the effective (RMS) power in the selected
measurement window. If necessary the function is switched on previously.
The function is independent of the marker selection, i.e. the numeric suffix <1 to 4> of :MARKer is
irrelevant.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Example:
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUM:RMS ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Switches on the function.
OFF
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:AVERage:RESult?
This command queries the result of the averaged standard deviation determined in several sweeps
in the selected measurement window. The query is possible only if averaging is active. The function
is independent of the marker selection, i.e. the numeric suffix <1 to 4> of :MARKer is irrelevant.
A complete sweep with synchronization to sweep end must be performed between switching on the
function and querying the measured value to obtain a valid query result. This is only possible in single
sweep mode.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Example:
"INIT:CONT OFF"
'Switches to single-sweep mode.
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:SDEV ON" 'Switches on the function.
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:AVER ON" 'Switches on the calculation of average.
"INIT;*WAI"
'Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN:SDEV:RES?" 'Outputs the result.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
This command is only a query and therefore has no *RST value.
1303.3545.12
6.65
E-1
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem
R&S FMU
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:PHOLd:RESult?
This command queries the maximum standard deviation value determined in several sweeps in the
selected measurement window. The query is possible only if the peak hold function is active.
The function is independent of the marker selection, i.e. the numeric suffix <1 to 4> of :MARKer is
irrelevant.
A complete sweep with synchronization to sweep end must be performed between switching on the
function and querying the measured value to obtain a valid query result. This is only possible in single
sweep mode.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Example:
'Switches to single-sweep mode.
'Switches on the function.
'Switches on the peak value
'measurement.
"INIT;*WAI"
'Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:SDEV:PHOL:RES?" 'Outputs the result.
"INIT:CONT OFF"
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:SDEV ON"
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PHOL ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
This command is only a query and therefore has no *RST value.
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:RESult?
This command queries the results of the standard deviation measurement. The function is
independent of the marker selection, i.e. the numeric suffix <1 to 4> of :MARKer is irrelevant.
A complete sweep with synchronization to sweep end must be performed between switching on the
function and querying the measured value to obtain a valid query result. This is only possible in single
sweep mode.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Example:
"INIT:CONT OFF"
'Switches to single-sweep mode.
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:SDEV ON" 'Switches on the function.
"INIT;*WAI"
'Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:SDEV:RES?" 'Outputs the result.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
This command is only a query and therefore has no *RST value.
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the measurement of the standard deviation in the selected
measurement window.The function is independent of the marker selection, i.e. the numeric suffix <1
to 4> of :MARKer is irrelevant.
On switching on the measurement, the mean power measurement is switched on as well.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Example:
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:SDEV ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
'Switches on the measurement of
'the standard deviation.
OFF
device-specific
6.66
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the previously selected time domain power measurements. Thus
one or several measurements can be first selected and then switched on and off together with
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMMary:STATe.
The function is independent of the marker selection, i.e. the suffix of MARKer is irrelevant. As
default the complete trace is taken into account. The calculation range can be reduced by using
CALC:MARK:X:SLIM sub-system.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Example:
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:STAT ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
OFF
device-specific
6.67
E-1
CALCulate:MATH Subsystem
R&S FMU
CALCulate:MATH Subsystem
The CALCulate:MATH subsystem allows to process data from the SENSe-subsystem in numeric
expressions. The measurement windows are selected by CALCulate1 (screen A) or CALCulate2
(screen B).
Command
Parameters
CALCulate<1|2>:MATH[:EXPRession][:DEFine]
<expr>
CALCulate<1|2>:MATH:MODE
LINear | LOGarithmic
CALCulate<1|2>:MATH:POSition
-100PCT to 200PCT
CALCulate<1|2>:MATH:STATe
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MATH[:EXPression][:DEFine] <expr>
This command defines the mathematical expression for relating traces to trace1.
The zero point of the result display can be defined with CALC:MATH:POS. Command
CALCulate:MATH:STATe switches the mathematical relation of traces on or off .
Parameter:
<expr>::= ‘OP1 - OP2’
OP1 ::= TRACE1
OP2 ::= TRACE2 | TRACE3
Example:
"CALC1:MATH (TRACE1 - TRACE2)"
"CALC2:MATH (TRACE1 - TRACE3)"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Selects the subtraction of trace 1
'from trace 2 in screen A.
'Selects the subtraction of trace 1
'from trace 3 in screen B.
conforming
CALCulate<1|2>:MATH:MODE LINear | LOGarithmic
This command selects linear or logarithmic calculation of the mathematical functions related to the
traces. The calculation of the average is one of the affected functions. The setting is valid for all
measurement windows, i.e. the numeric suffix <1|2> of CALCulate is irrelevant.
Example:
'Switches on the linear calculation.
"CALC:MATH:MODE LIN"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
LOG
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:MATH:POSition -100PCT to 200PCT
This command defines the position of the result of the trace mathematics in the selected
measurement window. The indication is in % of the screen height, with 100 % corresponding to the
upper diagram border.
Example:
"CALC:MATH:POS 50PCT"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
'Sets the position in screen A to the
'horizontal diagram center.
50 %
device-specific
6.68
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate:MATH Subsystem
CALCulate<1|2>:MATH:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches the mathematical relation of traces on or off.
Example:
"CALC:MATH:STAT ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
'Switches on the trace mathematics in
'screen A.
OFF
conforming
6.69
E-1
CALCulate:PLINe Subsystem
R&S FMU
CALCulate:PLINe Subsystem
The CALCulate:PLINe subsystem controls the display lines in the phase diagram in the FFT Analyzer mode.
The measurement window is selected via CALCulate1 (SCREEN A) or CALCulate2 (SCREEN B).
COMMAND
PARAMETER
CALCulate<1|2>:PLINe<1|2>
-36000 to 36000 DEG | RAD
CALCulate<1|2>::STATe
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:PLINe<1|2> -36000 to 36000 DEG | RAD
This command defines the position of the display lines in the phase diagram (phase line).
The lines mark the specified phases in the measurement window. Phase lines are available only in
the frequency domain of the magnitude/phase display when the FFT Analyzer mode is active.
Example:
"CALC2:PLIN2 10 DEG"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
- (STATe to OFF)
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:PLINe<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches the display lines in the phase diagram on or off. Phase lines are available
only in the frequency domain of the magnitude/phase display when the FFT Analyzer mode is active.
Example:
"CALC2:PLIN2:STAT ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
OFF
device-specific
6.70
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate:STATistics Subsystem
CALCulate:STATistics Subsystem
The CALCulate:STATistics subsystem controls the statistical measurement functions in the instrument.
The measurement window cannot be selected with these functions. The numeric suffix in CALCulate is
therefore ignored.
Command
Parameters
CALCulate:STATistics:APD[:STATe]
ON | OFF
CALCulate:STATistics:CCDF[:STATe]
ON | OFF
CALCulate:STATistics:CCDF:X<1 to 3>?
P0_1|P1|P10
CALCulate:STATistics:NSAMples
100 to 1E9
CALCulate:STATistics:PRESet
CALCulate:STATistics:Result<1 to 3>?
MEAN|PEAK|CFACtor|ALL
CALCulate:STATistics:SCALe:AUTO
ONCE
CALCulate:STATistics:SCALe:X:RLEVel
0.0316 V to 5.63 V
CALCulate:STATistics: SCALe:X:RANGe
1 dB to 200 dB
CALCulate:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UNIT
PCT|ABS
CALCulate:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UPPer
-1E-8 to 1.0
CALCulate:STATistics: SCALe:Y:LOWer
-1E-9 to 0.1
CALCulate:STATistics:APD[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the measurement of amplitude distribution (APD). On activating
this function, the CCDF measurement is switched off.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Example:
"CALC:STAT:APD ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Switches on the APD measurement.
OFF
device-specific
CALCulate:STATistics:CCDF[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the measurement of the complementary cumulative distribution
function (CCDF). On activating this function, the APD measurement is switched off.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Example:
"CALC:STAT:CCDF ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
'Switches on the CCDF measurement.
OFF
device-specific
6.71
E-1
CALCulate:STATistics Subsystem
R&S FMU
CALCulate:STATistics:CCDF:X<1 to 3>? P0_01 | P0_1 | P1 | P10
This command reads out the level values for the probabilities 0.1 %, 1 % and 10 %. The trace is
selected by means of the numeric suffix <1 to 3>.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Parameters:
The desired result is selected by means of the following parameters:
P0_01 Level value for 0.01 % probability
P0_1
Level value for 0.1% probability
P1
Level value for 1 % probability
P10
Level value for 10 % probability
Example:
"CALC:STAT:CCDF:X? P1"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Reads out the level values for 1 % probability.
-device-specific
CALCulate:STATistics:NSAMples 100 to 1E9
This command sets the number of measurement points to be acquired for the statistical
measurement functions.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Example:
"CALC:STAT:NSAM 500"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Sets the number of measurement points to be
'acquired to 500.
100000
device-specific
CALCulate:STATistics:PRESet
This command resets the scaling of the X and Y as in a statistical measurement. The following
values are set:
X axis ref level:
-1 volt peak
X axis range APD:
100 dB
X axis range CCDF: 20 dB
Y axis upper limit:
1.0
Y axis lower limit:
1E-6
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Example:
"CALC:STAT:PRES"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Resets the scaling for statistical functions
-device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
1303.3545.12
6.72
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate:STATistics Subsystem
CALCulate:STATistics:RESult<1 to 3>? MEAN | PEAK | CFACtor | ALL
This command reads out the results of statistical measurements of a recorded trace. The trace is
selected with the numeric suffix <1 to 3> attached to RESult.
Parameter:
The required result is selected via the following parameters:
MEAN Average (=RMS) power in dBm measured during the measurement
time.
PEAK
Peak power in dBm measured during the measurement time.
CFACtor Determined CREST factor (= ratio of peak power to average power) in
dB.
ALL
Results of all three measurements mentioned before, separated by
commas:
<mean power>,<peak power>,<crest factor>
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Example:
"CALC:STAT:RES2? ALL"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Reads out the three measurement results of
'trace 2. Example of answer string:
'5.56,19.25,13.69
'i.e. mean power: 5.56 dBm, peak power 19.25
'dBm, CREST factor 13.69 dB
-device-specific
CALCulate:STATistics:SCALe:AUTO ONCE
This command optimizes the level setting of the instrument depending on the measured peak power,
in order to obtain maximum instrument sensitivity.
To obtain maximum resolution, the level range is set as a function of the measured spacing between
peak power and the minimum power for the APD measurement and of the spacing between peak
power and mean power for the CCDF measurement. In addition, the probability scale for the number
of test points is adapted.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Note:
Subsequent commands have to be synchronized with *WAI, *OPC or *OPC? to the end of
the autorange process which would otherwise be aborted.
Example:
"CALC:STAT:SCAL:AUTO ONCE;*WAI"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Adapts the level setting for
'statistical measurements.
-device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
CALCulate:STATistics:SCALe:X:RLEVel 0.0316 V to 5.62 V
This command defines the reference level in volt peak for the X axis of the measurement diagram.
The setting is identical to the reference level setting using the command
DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y: RLEVel.
With the reference level offset <> 0 the indicated value range of the reference level is modified by the
offset.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Example:
"CALC:STAT:SCAL:X:RLEV 1.78V"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
1.0 volt peak
device-specific
6.73
E-1
CALCulate:STATistics Subsystem
R&S FMU
CALCulate:STATistics:SCALe:X:RANGe 1dB to 200dB
This command defines the level range for the X axis of the measurement diagram. The setting is
identical to the level range setting defined with the command DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SCALe.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Example:
"CALC:STAT:SCAL:X:RANG 20dB"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
100dB
device-specific
CALCulate:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UNIT PCT | ABS
This command toggles the scaling of Y axis between percentage und absolute.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Example:
"CALC:STAT:SCAL:Y:UNIT PCT" 'toggle to percentage
Characteristics: *RST value
SCPI:
ABS
device-specific
CALCulate:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UPPer 1E-8 to 1.0
This command defines the upper limit for the Y axis of the diagram in statitistical measurements.
Since probabilities are specified on the Y axis, the entered numerical values are dimensionless.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Example:
"CALC:STAT:Y:UPP 0.01"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1.0
device-specific
CALCulate:STATistics:SCALe:Y:LOWer 1E-9 to 0.1
This command defines the lower limit for the Y axis of the diagram in statistical measurements.
Since probabilities are specified on the Y axis, the entered numerical values are dimensionless.
This function is available for measurement result MAGNITUDE in time domain.
Example:
"CALC:STAT:SCAL:Y:LOW 0.001"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
1E-6
device-specific
6.74
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate:THReshold Subsystem
CALCulate:THReshold Subsystem
The CALCulate:THReshold subsystem controls the threshold value for the maximum/minimum search
of markers. The measurement windows are selected by CALCulate 1 (screen A) or 2 (screen B).
Command
Parameters
CALCulate<1|2>:DLINe<1|2>
MINimum to MAXimum
CALCulate<1|2>:DLINe<1|2>:STATe
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:FLINe<1|2>
-fmax to +fmax
CALCulate<1|2>:FLINe<1|2>:STATe
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:THReshold
MINimum to MAXimum
CALCulate<1|2>:THReshold:STATe
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:TLINe<1|2>
0 to 1000s
CALCulate<1|2>:TLINe<1|2>:STATe
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:DLINe<1|2> MINimum .. MAXimum (depending on current unit)
This command defines the position of Display Line 1 or 2. These lines enable the user to mark any
levels in the diagram. The unit depends on the setting made with CALC:UNIT” and the selected
measurement result of the window.
Example:
"CALC:DLIN -20dBm"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
- (STATe to OFF)
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:DLINe<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches Display Line 1 or 2 (level lines) on or off.
Example:
"CALC:DLIN2:STAT OFF"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
OFF
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:FLINe<1|2> -fmax to +fmax
This command defines the position of the frequency lines.
The frequency lines mark the frequencies specified in the measurement window. Frequency lines are
only available in frequency domain.
Example:
"CALC:FLIN2 12MHz"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
- (STATe to OFF)
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:FLINe<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches the frequency line on or off. Frequency lines are only available in frequency
domain.
Example:
"CALC:FLIN2:STAT ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
OFF
device-specific
6.75
E-1
CALCulate:THReshold Subsystem
R&S FMU
CALCulate<1|2>:THReshold MINimum to MAXimum (depending on current unit)
This command defines the threshold value for the maximum/minimum search of markers with
marker search functions MAX PEAK, NEXT PEAK, etc in the selected measurement window. The
associated display line is automatically switched on.
Example:
"CALC:THR -82DBM" 'Sets the threshold value for screen A to -82 dBm.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
- (STATe to OFF)
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:THReshold:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the threshold line in the selected measurement window.The unit
depends on the setting performed with CALC:UNIT and the selected measurement result of the
window.
Example:
"CALC2:THR:STAT ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Switches on the threshold line in screen B.
OFF
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:TLINe<1|2> 0 to 1000s
This command defines the position of the time lines.
The time lines mark the times specified in the measurement window. Time lines are only available in
time domain.
Example:
"CALC:TLIN 10ms"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
- (STATe auf OFF)
device-specific
CALCulate<1|2>:TLINe<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches the time line on or off. Time lines are only available in time domain.
Example:
"CALC:TLIN2:STAT ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
OFF
device-specific
6.76
E-1
R&S FMU
CALCulate:UNIT subsystem
CALCulate:UNIT subsystem
The CALCulate:UNIT subsystem defines the units of the phase in the FFT Analyzer mode.
Command
Parameters
CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:ANGLe
DEG | RAD
CALCulate<1|2>: UNIT:ANGLe
DEG | RAD
This command selects the unit of the phase in the magnitude/phase diagram.
Example:
"CALC2:UNIT:ANGL RAD"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
DEG
device-specific
6.77
E-1
CALibration Subsystem
R&S FMU
CALibration Subsystem
The commands of the CALibration subsystem determine the data for system error correction in the
instrument.
Command
Parameters
CALibration:ABORt
CALibration[:ALL]
CALibration:PROBe:COMPensation
ON | OFF
CALibration:PROBe:FRESponse
ON | OFF
CALibration:PROBe:GAIN
ON | OFF
CALibration:PROBe[:STARt]
<file_name>
CALibration:RESult?
CALibration:STATe
ON | OFF
CALibration:ABORt
This command aborts the acquisition of correction data and restores the last complete correction
data set.
Example:
"CAL:ABOR"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
CALibration[:ALL]?
This command initiates the acquisition of system error correction data. A "0" is returned if the
acquisition was successful.
Note:
During the acquisition of correction data the instrument does not accept any remote control
commands, except
*RST
CALibration:ABORt
In order to recognize when the acquisition of correction data is completed, the MAV bit in the status
byte can be used. If the associated bit is set in the Service Request Enable Register, the instrument
generates a service request after the acquisition of correction data has been completed.
Example:
"*CLS"
"*SRE 16"
"*CAL?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
'Resets the status management.
'Enables MAV bit in the Service Request Enable Register.
' Starts the correction data recording and then a service
'request is generated.
conforming
6.78
E-1
R&S FMU
CALibration Subsystem
CALibration:PROBe:COMPensation ON | OFF
This command switches the manual probe adjustment as part of the probe calibration process on or
off. If active the probe calibration process is interrupted and the bits 12/13 of the
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC register will signal the required manual operation. The calibration
process has to be continued by "INIT:CONM" afterwards.
Example:
"CAL:PROB:COMP ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
' manual probe compensation will be requested
' during probe calibration process.
device-specific
CALibration:PROBe:FRESponse ON | OFF
This command switches the gain error compensation on or off.
Example:
"CAL:PROB:FRES OFF"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
' frequency response calibration off
device-specific
CALibration:PROBe:GAIN ON | OFF
This command switches the gain error compensation on or off.
Example:
"CAL:PROB:GAIN ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
' gain compensation active
device-specific
6.79
E-1
CALibration Subsystem
R&S FMU
CALibration:PROBe[:STARt] <file_name>
This command starts a probe calibration using the specified file name to generate a probe data set at
the end of the calibration process. During the probe calibration process, manual operations may be
required (see -chapter 4, softkey PROBE CAL START). The Status Questionable Sync Register bits
12 and 13 are set if related user operation has to take place. After adjusting the probes of input I or
Q, the calibration process has to be continued by the command "INIT:CONM". The probe data set is
automatically activated and can be switched off again using the SENS:PROBE:STATE ON | OFF
command.
Example:
' complex input path I + j*Q used
' impedance 1 Mc
' unbalanced input
' activates the manual probe adjust
' activates the gain error compensation
' calibration
"CAL:PROB:FRES:GAIN ON"
' activates the frequency response calibration
"CAL:PROB 'probe_1';*OPC" ' starts the calibration and creates probe
' data set probe_1
'' now wait for questionable sync register
"INP:IQ:TYPE IQ"
"INP:IQ:IMP HIGH"
"INP:IQ:BAL OFF"
"CAL:PROB:COMP ON"
"CAL:PROB:GAIN ON"
now wait until
"INIT:CONM"
now wait until
"INIT:CONM"
STAT QUES SYNC Bit 12=1
' now manually adjust probe I, when finished:
' continue probe cal
STAT QUES SYNC Bit 12=1
' now manually adjust probe Q, when finished:
' continue probe cal
now wait until OPC=1
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
' calibration is finished
' probe data set is created
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
CALibration:RESult?
This command outputs the results of the correction data acquisition. The lines of the result table (see
section "Recording the correction data of R&S FMU – CAL key") are output as string data separated by
commas:
"Total Calibration Status: PASSED","Date (dd/mm/yyyy): 24/04/2006",
"Time: 16:24:54","Runtime:00:06"
Example:
"CAL:RES?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
-device-specific
CALibration:STATe ON | OFF
This command determines whether the current calibration data are taken into account by the
instrument (ON) or not (OFF).
Example:
"CAL:STAT OFF"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
'Sets up the instrument to ignore the calibration data.
conforming
6.80
E-1
R&S FMU
DIAGnostic Subsystem
DIAGnostic Subsystem
The DIAGnostic subsystem contains the commands which support instrument diagnostics for
maintenance, service and repair. In accordance with the SCPI standard, all of these commands are
device-specific.
The measurement windows are selected by DIAGnostic1 (screen A) or DIAGnostic2 (screen B) .
Command
Parameters
DIAGnostic<1|2>:SERVice:HWINfo?
DIAGnostic<1|2>:SERVice:IQ:CALibration:DESTination
IHIGh | ILOW | QHIGh | QLOW
DIAGnostic<1|2>:SERVice:IQ:CALibration:DC
0 | 0.1 | 0.178 | 0.316 | 0.562 | 1.0
DIAGnostic<1|2>:SERVice:IQ:CALibration:PULSe:PRATe
10 kHz | 62.5 kHz | 80 kHz | 100 kHz | 102.4 kHz |
200 kHz | 500 kHz | 1 MHz | 2 MHz | 4 MHz
DIAGnostic<1|2>:SERVice:IQ:INPut
IQ | GND | CALDc | CALPulse
DIAGnostic<1|2>:SERVice:SFUNction
<string>
DIAGnostic<1|2>:SERVice:STESt:RESult?
DIAGnostic<1|2>:SERVice:HWINfo?
This command queries the contents of the module info table. Table lines are output as string data
and are separated by commas.
"<component 1>|<serial #>|<order #>|<model>|<HWC>|<rev>|<sub rev>",
"<component 2>|<serial #>|<order #>|<model>|<HWC>|<rev>|<sub rev>", to
The individual columns of the table are separated from each other by '|'.
The numeric suffix <1|2> is ignored with this command.
Example:
"DIAG:SERV:HWIN?"
Result (shortened):
"WBDET|100553/005|1130.3086|05|00|04|13",
" CLOCK GEN|000654/321|1303.3800|01|00|00|00",
to
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
-device-specific
6.81
E-1
DIAGnostic Subsystem
R&S FMU
DIAGnostic<1|2>:SERVice:IQ:CALibration:DESTination IHIGh | ILOW | QHIGh | QLOW
The calibration signals (DC Cal signal and Pulse Cal signal) can only be switched to one input at a
time. This command switches the calibration signal to the I or Q path.
High selects the positive and low the negative input. The negative input is only connected through at
the Balanced setting. The calibration signals are always positive. An inverted signal therefore
appears in the output data during feeding into the negative input (Low).
The DC Cal signal voltage is set using the command diag:serv:iq:cal:dc, and the frequency of the
Pulse Cal signal is set using the command diag:serv:iq:cal:puls:prat.
IHIGh
Feed the calibration signal into the positive I path
ILOW
Feed the calibration signal into the negative I path
QHIGh Feed the calibration signal into the positive Q path
QLOW Feed the calibration signal into the negative Q path
The numeric suffix <1|2> has no meaning with this command.
Example:
"DIAG:SERV:IQ:CAL:DEST QHIG"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
IHIGh
device-specific
DIAGnostic<1|2>:SERVice:IQ:CALibration:DC 0 | 0.1 | 0.178 | 0.316 | 0.562 | 1.0
This command selects the voltage for the DC Cal signal in Volt.
The numeric suffix <1|2> has no meaning with this command.
Example:
"DIAG:SERV:IQ:CAL:DC 0.316"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
0
device-specific
DIAGnostic<1|2>:SERVice:IQ:CALibration:PULSe:PRATe 10KHz | 62.5KHz | 80KHz | 100KHz |
102.4KHz | 200KHz | 500KHz | 1MHz |
2MHz | 4MHz
This command sets the frequency of the Pulse Cal signal.
The numeric suffix <1|2> has no meaning with this command.
Example:
"DIAG:SERV:IQ:CAL:PULS:PRAT 80KHZ"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
62.5 kHz
device-specific
DIAGnostic<1|2>:SERVice:IQ:INPut IQ | GND | CALDc | CALPulse
This command selects the baseband signal source.
IQ
The female I and Q connectors of the R&S FMU are the baseband signal sources.
GND
The baseband inputs are internally connected to ground.
CALDc
The baseband signal source is the DC Cal signal. The voltage of this signal can be set
with diag:serv:iq:cal:dc.
CALPulse The baseband signal source is the Pulse Cal signal. The frequency of this signal can be
set with diag:serv:iq:prat.
The numeric suffix <1|2> has no meaning with this command.
Example:
"DIAG:SERV:IQ:INP CALD"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
IQ
device-specific
6.82
E-1
R&S FMU
DIAGnostic Subsystem
DIAGnostic<1|2>:SERVice:SFUNction <string>
This command activates a service function which can be selected by indicating the five parameters:
function group number, board number, function number, parameter 1 and parameter 2 (see service
manual). The contents of the parameter string is identical to the code to be entered in the data entry
field of manual operation.
The entry of a service function is accepted only if the system password Level 1 or Level 2 has been
entered previously (command: SYSTem:SECurity).
The numeric suffix <1|2> is ignored with this command.
Example:
"DIAG:SERV:SFUN '2.0.2.12.1'"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
DIAGnostic<1|2>:SERVice:STESt:RESult?
This command reads the results of the selftest out of the instrument. The lines of the result table are
output as string data separated by commas:
"Total Selftest Status: PASSED","Date (dd/mm/yyyy): 09/07/1999
TIME: 16:24:54","Runtime: 00:06"," to
The numeric suffix <1|2> is ignored with this command.
Example:
"DIAG:SERV:STES:RES?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
-device-specific
6.83
E-1
DISPlay Subsystem
R&S FMU
DISPlay Subsystem
The DISPLay subsystem controls the selection and presentation of textual and graphic information as
well as of measurement data on the display.
The measurement windows are selected by WINDow1 (screen A) or WINDow2 (screen B) .
Command
Parameters
DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency
ON | OFF
DISPlay:CMAP<1 to 26>:DEFault<1|2>
DISPlay:CMAP<1 to 26>:HSL
<hue>,<sat>,<lum>
DISPlay:CMAP<1 to 26>:PDEFined
<color>
DISPlay:FORmat?
query only
DISPlay:LOGO
ON | OFF
DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff
0 to 60
DISPlay:PSAVe[:STATe]
ON | OFF
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:ACTive?
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:SELect
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:SIZE
LARGe | SMALl
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TEXT[:DATA]
<string>
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TEXT:STATe
ON | OFF
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TIME
ON | OFF
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 3>:MODE
WRITe | VIEW | AVERage | MAXHold | MINHold
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 3>:MODE:HCONtinuous
ON | OFF
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACE<1 to 3>[:STATe]
ON | OFF
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 3>:Y[:SCALe]
10dB to 200dB
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 3>:Y[:SCALe]:AUTO
ONCE
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 3>:Y[:SCALe]:MODE
ABSolute | RELative
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACE<1 to 3>:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision
<numeric_value>
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 3>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel
<numeric_value>
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 3>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet
-200dB to 200dB
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 3>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition
0 to 100 PCT
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACE<1 to 3>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue
<numeric_value>
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 3>:Y:SPACing
LINear | LOGarithmic | PERCent
DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency ON | OFF
This command switches the X axis annotation on or off.
Example:
"DISP:ANN:FREQ OFF"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
ON
conforming
6.84
E-1
R&S FMU
DISPlay Subsystem
DISPlay:CMAP<1 to 26>:DEFault<1|2>
This command resets the screen colors of all display items to their default settings. Two default
settings DEFault1 and DEFault2 are available. The numeric suffix of CMAP is irrelevant.
Example:
"DISP:CMAP:DEF2"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Selects default setting 2 for setting the colors.
-conforming
This command is an event and therefore has no query and no *RST value .
DISPlay:CMAP<1 to 26>:HSL <hue>,<sat>,<lum>
This command defines the color table of the instrument.
Each numeric suffix of CMAP is assigned one or several graphical elements which can be modified
by varying the corresponding color setting. The following assignment applies:
CMAP1 Background
CMAP2 Grid
CMAP3 Function field + status field + data entry text
CMAP4 Function field LED on
CMAP5 Function field LED warn
CMAP6 Enhancement label text
CMAP7 Status field background
CMAP8 Trace 1
CMAP9 Trace 2
CMAP10 Trace 3
CMAP11 Marker
CMAP12 Lines
CMAP13 Measurement status + limit check pass
CMAP14 Limit check fail
CMAP15 Table + softkey background
CMAP16 Table + softkey text
CMAP17 Table selected field text
CMAP18 Table selected field background
CMAP19 Table + data entry field opaq titlebar
CMAP20 Data entry field opaq text
CMAP21 Data entry field opaq background
CMAP22 3D shade bright part
CMAP23 3D shade dark part
CMAP24 Softkey state on
CMAP25 Softkey state data entry
CMAP26 Logo
Parameter:
hue = TINT
sat = SATURATION
lum = BRIGHTNESS
The value range is 0 to 1 for all parameters.
Example:
"DISP:CMAP2:HSL 0.3,0.8,1.0"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
Changes the grid color.
-conforming
The values set are not changed by *RST.
1303.3545.12
6.85
E-1
DISPlay Subsystem
R&S FMU
DISPlay:CMAP<1 to 26>:PDEFined
BLACk | BLUE | BROWn | GREen | CYAN | RED | MAGenta |
YELLow | WHITe | DGRAy | LGRAy | LBLUe | LGREen | LCYan
| LRED | LMAGenta
This command defines the color table of the instrument using predefined color values. Each numeric
suffix of CMAP is assigned one or several graphical elements which can be modified by varying the
corresponding color setting. The same assignment as for DISPlay:CMAP<1 to 26>:HSL applies.
Example:
"DISP:CMAP2:PDEF GRE"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
-conforming
The values set are not changed by *RST.
DISPlay:FORMat?
This command returns the state of the result display (FULL SCREEN or SPLIT SCREEN). The
number of windows depends on the selected measurement result.
Return value:
SING
FULL SCREENfor Magnitude
SPL
SPLIT SCREENfor Magnitude/Phase, Real/Imag, Voltage
In split screen display the active measurement window can be selected with
DISPlay:WINDow<1|2>:SELect.
Example:
"DISP:FORM? "
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'returns the current state SPL or SING.
device-specific
This command is a query only and thus has no *RST value
DISPlay:LOGO ON | OFF
This command switches the company logo on the screen on or off.
Example:
"DISP:LOGO OFF"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
ON
device-specific
DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff 1 to 60
This command sets the hold off time for the power-save mode of the display. The available value
range is 1 to 60 minutes, the resolution 1 minute. The entry is dimensionless.
Example:
"DISP:PSAV:HOLD 30"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
15
device-specific
DISPlay:PSAVe[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the power-save mode of the display. With the power-save mode
activated the display including backlight is completely switched off after the elapse of the response
time (see command DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff).
Note:
Example:
This mode is recommended for preserving the display especially if the instrument is
exclusively operated via remote control.
"DISP:PSAVe ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
'Switches on the power-save mode.
OFF
device-specific
6.86
E-1
R&S FMU
DISPlay Subsystem
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:ACTive?
This command returns the active measurement window. The numeric response has following
meaning:
1
2
3
4
Screen A
Screen B
Screen C
Screen D
The numeric suffix at WINDow<1|2> is irrelevant.
Example:
"DISP:WIND:ACT?
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'returns the active window
device-specific
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:SELect
This command selects the active measurement window. WINDow1 corresponds to SCREEN A,
WINDow2 to SCREEN B.
The selection of the active window for result queries is irrelevant.
Example:
"DISP:WIND2:SEL
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Selects SCREEN B as active measurement window.
SCREEN A active
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no query.
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:SIZE LARGe | SMALl
This command switches the measurement window for channel and adjacent-channel power
measurements to full screen or half screen. Only "1" is allowed as a numerical suffix.
Example:
"DISP:WIND1:SIZE LARG" ' Switches the measurement window to
' full screen.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
SMALl
device-specific
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TEXT[:DATA] <string>
This command defines a comment (max. 20 characters) which can be displayed on the screen in
the selected measurement window.
Example:
"DISP:WIND2:TEXT 'Noise Measurement'"
'Defines the title for screen B
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
"" (empty)
conforming
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TEXT:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the display of the comment (screen title) in the selected
measurement window.
Example:
"DISP:TEXT:STAT ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
'Switches on the title of screen B.
OFF
conforming
6.87
E-1
DISPlay Subsystem
R&S FMU
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TIME ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the screen display of date and time. The numeric suffix in
WINDow<1| 2> is irrelevant.
Example:
"DISP:TIME ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
OFF
device-specific
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 3>:MODE
WRITe | VIEW | AVERage | MAXHold | MINHold
This command defines the type of display and the evaluation of the traces in the selected
measurement window. WRITE corresponds to the Clr/Write mode of manual operation. The trace is
switched off (= BLANK in manual operation) with DISP:WIND:TRAC:STAT OFF.
The number of measurements for AVERage, MAXHold and MINHold is defined with the command
SENSe:AVERage:COUNt or SENSe:SWEep:COUNt. It should be noted that synchronization to the
end of the indicated number of measurements is only possible in single sweep mode.
If calculation of average values is active, selection between logarithmic and linear averaging is
possible. For more detail see command SENSe:AVERage:TYPE.
Example:
"INIT:CONT OFF"
Switching to single-sweep mode.
"SWE:COUN 16"
'Sets the number of measurements to 16.
"DISP:WIND1:TRAC3:MODE MAXH"
'Switches on the calculation of the for
'trace 3 in screen A.
"INIT;*WAI"
'Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the
'16 sweeps.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
WRITe for TRACe1, STATe OFF for TRACe2/3
device-specific
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 3>:MODE:HCONtinuous ON | OFF
This command specifies whether or not the traces with peak or minimum value detection are reset
after specific parameter changes.
Usually the measurement must be restarted after a parameter change, before an evaluation of the
measurement results is performed (e.g. with a marker). In cases in which a change causes a
compulsory new measurement, the trace is automatically reset in order to prevent erroneous
measurements of previous measurement results (e.g. when the span changes). For applications in
which this behavior is not desired, this mechanism can be switched off.
OFF
The traces are reset after specific parameter changes.
ON
The reset mechanism is switched off.
Example:
"DISP:WIND1:TRAC3:MODE:HCON ON" The reset mechanism is switched off
for measurement window 1.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
OFF
device-specific
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACE<1 to 3>[:STATe]
ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the display of the corresponding trace in the selected
measurement window.
Example:
"DISP:WIND1:TRAC3 ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
ON for TRACe1, OFF for TRACe2 to 4
conforming
6.88
E-1
R&S FMU
DISPlay Subsystem
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 3>:Y[:SCALe] 10dB to 200dB
This command defines the display range of the Y axis (level axis) in the selected measurement
window for MAGNITUDE with logarithmic scaling (DISP:TRAC:Y:SPAC LOG).
For linear scaling, (DISP:TRAC:Y:SPAC LIN | PERC) the display range is fid and cannot be
modified. The numeric suffix in TRACe<1 to 3> is irrelevant.
Example:
"DISP:TRAC:Y 110dB"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
100dB
device-specific
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...3>:Y[:SCALe]:AUTO ONCE
This command adapts the diagram limits to the current measurement results. The value range
depends on the selected display.
Example:
":DISP:WIND2:TRAC:Y:SCAL:AUTO ONCE"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
--device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 3>:Y[:SCALe]:MODE ABSolute | RELative
This command defines the scale type of the Y axis (absolute or relative) in the selected
measurement window for MAGNITUDE.
When SYSTem:DISPlay is set to OFF, this command has no immediate effect on the screen. The
numeric suffix in TRACe<1 to 3> is irrelevant.
Example:
"DISP:TRAC:Y:MODE REL"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
ABS
device-specific
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...3>:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision
<numeric_value>
This command defines the scaling of the y-axis.
Example:
":DISP:WIND2:TRAC:Y:PDIV 20deg" ’Sets the scaling of the y-axis to 20 deg/ DIV
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
-device-specific
The numeric suffix under TRACe <1...3> is irrelevant.
1303.3545.12
6.89
E-1
DISPlay Subsystem
R&S FMU
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 3>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel
-<numeric_value>
This command defines the reference level.The value range of the baseband input depends on the input
impedance. The measurement range is defined as the measurable peak voltage (positive and
negative).The setting can also be made with SENS:VOLT:IQ:RANG:UPP.
Input impedance
Value range / Volt (5 dB steps)
Low (50
0.0316; 0.0562; 0.1; 0.178 ; 0.316; 0.562; 1; 1.78; 3.16; 5.62
High (1 M
)
or 1K
)
0.0316; 0.0562; 0.1; 0.178 ; 0.316; 0.562; 1; 1.78
With the reference level offset <> 0 the indicated value range of the reference level is modified by the
offset.
The numeric suffix at WINDow<1...2> and the numeric suffix at TRACe<1...3> are irrelevant.
Example:
"DISP:WIND1:TRAC:Y:RLEV 0.1"’sets the reference level to
0.1 volt peak
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1 volt peak
conforming
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 3>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet
-200 dB to 200 dB
This command defines the offset of the reference level.
The numeric suffix at WINDow<1...2> and the numeric suffix at TRACe<1...3> are irrelevant.
Example:
"DISP:TRAC:Y:RLEV:OFFS -10dB"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
0dB
conforming
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...3>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition 0 to 100 PCT
This command defines the position of the reference value for the y-axis. It is available for
MAGNITUDE/PHASE (screen B), REAL/IMAG, VOLTAGE.
The numeric suffix at TRACe<1...3> is irrelevant.
Example:
":DISP:WIND2:TRAC:Y:RPOS 30PCT"'shifts the reference value to 30 %
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
-device specific
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...3>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue
<numeric_value>
This command defines the reference value for the y-axis of the measurement diagram. It is available
for MAGNITUDE/PHASE (screen B), REAL/IMAG, VOLTAGE.
The numeric suffix at TRACe<1...3> is irrelevant.
Example:
":DISP:WIND2:TRAC:Y:RVAL 10deg"'sets the reference value to 10 deg
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
0
device specific
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 3>:Y:SPACing
LINear | LOGarithmic| LDB
This command toggles between linear and logarithmic display in the MAGNITUDE window.On a
linear scale, switchover between the unit % (command DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SPAC LIN) and the
unit dB (command DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SPAC LDB) is also possible.
The numeric suffix in TRACe<1 to 3> is irrelevant.
Example:
"DISP:TRAC:Y:SPAC LIN"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
LOGarithmic
conforming
6.90
E-1
FSQ
FORMat-Subsystem
FORMat Subsystem
The FORMat subsystem specifies the data format of the data transmitted from and to the instrument.
Command
Parameters
FORMat[:DATA]
ASCii | REAL | UINT [,8 | 32]
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator
POINt|COMMa
FORMat[:DATA] ASCii | REAL| UINT [, 8 | 32]
This command specifies the data format for the data transmitted from the instrument to the control
PC.
The data format is either ASCII or one of the formats REAL . ASCII data are transmitted in plain text,
separated by commas. REAL data are transmitted as 32-bit IEEE 754 floating-point numbers in the
"definite length block format".
The FORMat command is valid for the transmission of trace data. The data format of trace data
received by the instrument is automatically recognized, regardless of the format which is
programmed.
Note:
Incorrect format setting will result in numerical conversion, which may lead to incorrect
results.
Example:
"FORM REAL,32"
"FORM ASC"
"FORM UINT,8"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
ASCII
conforming
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator POINt | COMMA
This command defines which decimal separator (decimal point or comma) is to be used for
outputting measurement data to the file in ASCII format. Different languages of evaluation programs
(e.g. MS-Excel) can thus be supported.
Example:
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
'Sets the decimal point as separator.
"FORM:DEXP:DSEP POIN
-- (factory setting is POINt; *RST does not affect setting)
device-specific
6.91
E-1
HCOPy Subsystem
R&S FMU
HCOPy Subsystem
The HCOPy subsystem controls the output of display information for documentation purposes on output
devices or files. The instrument allows two independent printer configurations which can be set
separately with the numeric suffix <1|2>.
Command
Parameters
HCOPy:ABORt
HCOPy:CMAP<1 to 26>:DEFault
1|2|3
HCOPy:CMAP<1 to 26>:HSL
<hue>,<sat>,<lum>
HCOPy:CMAP<1 to 26>:PDEFined
<color>
HCOPy:DESTination<1|2>
MMEM’ | ‘SYST:COMM:PRIN’ | ‘SYST:COMM:CLIP’
HCOPy:DEVice:COLor
ON | OFF
HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage<1|2>
GDI | WMF | EWMF | BMP
HCOPy[:IMMediate]
HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TABle:STATe
ON | OFF
HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TEXT
<string>
HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TRACe:STATe
ON | OFF
HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation<1|2>
LANDscape | PORTrait
HCOPy:ABORt
This command aborts a running hardcopy output.
Example:
"HCOP:ABOR"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
conforming
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
HCOPy:CMAP<1 to 26>:DEFault 1|2|3
This command resets the colors for a hardcopy to the selected default settings. DEFault1(SCREEN
COLORS, but background white), DEFault2 (OPTIMIZED COLOR SET) and DEFault3 (USER
DEFINED). The numeric suffix in CMAP is not significant.
Example:
"HCOP:CMAP:DEF2"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'selects OPTIMIZED COLOR SET for the
color settings of a hardcopy.
-conforming
This command is an event and therefore has no query and no *RST value.
1303.3545.12
6.92
E-1
R&S FMU
HCOPy Subsystem
HCOPy:CMAP<1 to 26>:HSL <hue>,<sat>,<lum>
This command defines the color table in USER DEFINED COLORS mode.
To each numeric suffix of CMAP is assigned one or several picture elements which can be modified
by varying the corresponding color setting. The following assignment applies:
CMAP1
Background
CMAP2
Grid
CMAP3
Function field + status field + data entry text
CMAP4
Function field LED on
CMAP5
Function field LED warn
CMAP6
Enhancement label text
CMAP7
Status field background
CMAP8
Trace 1
CMAP9
Trace 2
CMAP10 Trace 3
CMAP11 Marker
CMAP12 Lines
CMAP13 Measurement status + Limit check pass
CMAP14 Limit check fail
CMAP15 Table + softkey background
CMAP16 Table + softkey text
CMAP17 Table selected field text
CMAP18 Table selected field background
CMAP19 Table + data entry field opaque titlebar
CMAP20 Data entry field opaque text
CMAP21 Data entry field opaque background
CMAP22 3D shade bright part
CMAP23 3D shade dark part
CMAP24 Softkey state on
CMAP25 Softkey state data entry
CMAP26 Logo
Parameter:
hue = tint
sat = saturation
lum = brightness
The value range is 0 to 1 for all parameters
Example:
"HCOP:CMAP2:HSL 0.3,0.8,1.0"'changes the grid color
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
-conforming
The values set are not changed by *RST.
HCOPy:CMAP<1 to 26>:PDEFined BLACk | BLUE | BROWn | GREen | CYAN | RED | MAGenta |
YELLow | WHITe | DGRAy | LGRAy | LBLUe | LGREen | LCYan |
LRED | LMAGenta
This command defines the color table in USER DEFINED COLORS using predefined color values. To
each numeric suffix of CMAP is assigned one or several picture elements which can be modified by varying
the corresponding color setting. The same assignment as for :HCPOy:CMAP<1 to 26>:HSL applies
Example:
"HCOP:CMAP2:PDEF GRE"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
-conforming
The values set are not changed by *RST.
1303.3545.12
6.93
E-1
HCOPy Subsystem
R&S FMU
HCOPy:DESTination<1|2> <string>
This command selects the printer output medium (Disk, Printer or Clipboard) associated with
configuration 1 or 2.
Note:
The type of instrument is selected with SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:SELect,
which will automatically select a default output medium. Therefore the command
HCOPy:DESTination should always be sent after setting the device type.
Parameter:
Example:
<string>::=
’SYST:COMM:GPIB’ |
’SYST:COMM:SER
’SYST:COMM:CENT’ |
’MMEM’ |
’SYST:COMM:PRIN’ |
’SYST:COMM:CLIP’
'MMEM'
'Directs the hardcopy to a file. Command MMEM:NAME
'<file_name> defines the file name. All formats can be
'selected for HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage.
’SYST:COMM:PRIN’
'Directs the hardcopy to the printer. The printer is
'selected with command
'SYSTEM:COMMunicate:PRINter:SELect.
'GDI should be selected for
'HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage.
’SYST:COMM:CLIP’
'Directs the hardcopy to the clipboard. EWMF should be
'selected for HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage.
"SYST:COMM:PRIN:SEL2 ‘LASER on LPT1’" 'Selects the printer and output
'medium for device 2
"HCOP:DEST2 'SYST:COMM:PRIN'"
'Selects the printer interface
'as device 2.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
conforming
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
HCOPy:DEVice:COLor ON|OFF
This command selects between color and monochrome hardcopy of the screen.
Example:
"HCOP:DEV:COL ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
OFF
conforming
6.94
E-1
R&S FMU
HCOPy Subsystem
HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage<1|2>
GDI | WMF | EWMF | BMP
This command determines the data format of the printout.
Parameter:
GDI
Graphics Device Interface:
Default format for the output to a printer configured under Windows.
Must be selected for the output to the printer interface (HCOPy:DEVice
'SYST:COMM:PRIN').
Can be used for the output to a file (HCOPy:DEVice
'SYST:COMM:MMEM'). The printer driver configured under Windows is
used in this case and a printer-specific file format is thus generated.
WMF
WINDOWS Metafile and Enhanced Metafile Format:
and EWMF Data formats for output files which can be integrated in corresponding
programs for documentation purposes at a later time. WMF can only
be used for output to a file (HCOPy:DEVice 'SYST:COMM:MMEM')
and EWMF also for the output to the clipboard
(HCOPy:DEVice 'SYST:COMM:CLIP').
BMP
Example:
Bitmap.
Data format for output to files only (HCOPy:DEVice
'SYST:COMM:MMEM').
"HCOP:DEV:LANG WMF"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
conforming
HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>]
This command starts a hardcopy output. The numeric suffix selects which printer configuration (1 or
2) is to be used for the hardcopy output. If there is no suffix, configuration 1 is automatically selected.
HCOPy:IMM[1] 'Starts the hardcopy output to device 1 (default).
HCOPy:IMM2
'Starts the output to device 2.
Example:
"HCOP"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
conforming
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
HCOPy:ITEM:ALL
This command selects the complete screen to be output.
The hardcopy output is always provided with comments, title, time and date. As an alternative to the
whole screen, only traces (commands 'HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TRACe: STATe ON') or tables
(command 'HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TABLe:STATe ON') can be output.
Example:
"HCOP:ITEM:ALL"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
OFF
conforming
6.95
E-1
HCOPy Subsystem
R&S FMU
HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TABle:STATe ON | OFF
This command selects the output of the currently displayed tables.
The command HCOPy:DEVice:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TABle:STATe
HCOPy:DEVice:ITEM:ALL enable the output of the whole screen.
Example:
OFF as well as command
"HCOP:ITEM:WIND:TABL:STAT ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TEXT
OFF
device-specific
<string>
This command defines the comment text for measurement window 1 or 2 for printout, with a
maximum of 100 characters; line feed by means of character @).
The numeric suffix at WINDow<1|2> is irrelevant.
Example:
"HCOP:ITEM:WIND:TEXT ’comment’"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TRACe:STATe ON | OFF
This command selects the output of the currently displayed trace.
The command HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TRACe:STATe OFF as well as command
HCOPy:ITEM:ALL enable the output of the whole screen.
Example:
"HCOP:ITEM:WIND:TRACe:STAT ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
OFF
device-specific
HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation<1|2> LANDscape | PORTrait
The command selects the format of the output (portrait and landscape) (hardcopy unit 1 or 2).
Note:
The command is only available provided that the output device "printer" (HCOP:DEST
'SYST:COMM:PRIN’) has been selected.
Example:
"HCOP:PAGE:ORI LAND"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
conforming
6.96
E-1
R&S FMU
INITiate Subsystem
INITiate Subsystem
The INITiate subsystem is used to control the init-measurement function in the selected measurement
window. The numeric suffix 2 at INITiate<1|2> is not allowed.
Command
Parameters
INITiate<1|2>:CONMeas
INITiate<1|2>:CONTinuous
ON | OFF
INITiate<1|2>:DISPlay
ON | OFF
INITiate<1|2>[:IMMediate]
INITiate<1|2>:CONMeas
This command continues a stopped probe calibration. It is used to confirm the manual probe
adjustment. It is only required if the related calibration process is switched on
Numeric suffix 2 at INITiate<1|2> is not allowed.
Example:
' complex input path I + j*Q used
' impedance 50c
' unbalanced input
' activates the manual probe adjust
' activates the gain error compensation
' calibration
"CAL:FRES:GAIN ON"
' activates the frequency response calibration
"CAL:PROB 'probe_1';*OPC" ' starts the calibration and creates probe
' data set probe_1
'' now wait for questionable sync register
now wait until STAT QUES SYNC Bit 12=1
' now manually adjust probe I, when finished:
"INIT:CONM"
' continue probe cal
"INP:IQ:TYPE IQ"
"INP:IQ:IMP LOW"
"INP:IQ:BAL OFF"
"CAL:PROB:COMP ON"
"CAL:PROB:GAIN ON"
now wait until
STAT QUES SYNC Bit 12=1
' now manually adjust probe Q, when finished:
"INIT:CONM"
' continue probe cal
now wait unil OPC=1
' calibration is finished
' probe data set is created
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
INITiate<1|2>:CONTinuous ON | OFF
This command determines whether the trigger system is continuously initiated (continuous) or
performs single measurements (single).
In manual operation, this setting refers to the sweep sequence (switching between continuous/single
sweep).
Numeric suffix 2 at INITiate<1|2> is not allowed.
Example:
"INIT:CONT OFF"
"INIT:CONT ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
'Switches the sequence to single sweep.
'Switches the sequence to continuous sweep.
ON
conforming
6.97
E-1
INITiate SubsystemI
R&S FMU
INITiate<1|2>:DISPlay ON | OFF
This command configures the behavior of the display during a single sweep.
INITiate:DISPlay OFF means that the display is switched off during the measurement,
INITiate:DISPlay ON means that the display is switched on during the measurement.
The numeric suffix of INITiate is irrelevant with this command.
Example:
'Switches to single-sweep mode
'Sets the display behavior to OFF
'Starts the measurement with display
'switched off.
"INIT:CONT OFF"
"INIT:DISP OFF
"INIT;*WAI"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
ON
device-specific
INITiate<1|2>[:IMMediate]
The command initiates a new sweep in the indicated measurement window.
In single sweep mode, synchronization to the end of the indicated number of measurements can be
achieved with the command *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI. In continuous-sweep mode, synchronization to
the sweep end is not possible since the overall measurement never ends.
Example:
"INIT:CONT OFF"
"DISP:WIND:TRAC:MODE AVER
"SWE:COUN 20"
"INIT;*WAI"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Switches to single-sweep mode.
'Switches on trace averaging.
Setting the sweep counter to 20 sweeps.
'Starts the measurement and waits for the
'end of the 20 sweeps.
conforming
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
1303.3545.12
6.98
E-1
R&S FMU
INPut Subsystem
INPut Subsystem
The INPut subsystem controls the input characteristics of the baseband input of the instrument. The
numeric suffix at INPut<1|2> is irrelevant.
Command
Parameters
INPut<1|2>:IQ:BALanced[:STATE]
ON | OFF
INPut<1|2>:IQ:IMPedance
LOW | HIGH
INPut<1|2>:IQ:TYPE
I | Q | IQ
INPut<1|2>:SELect
AIQ
INPut<1|2>:IQ:BALanced[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command toggles the baseband inputs between balanced and unbalanced.
ON
Inputs balanced
OFF
Inputs unbalanced
The numeric suffix at INPut<1|2> is irrelevant.
Example:
"INP:IQ:BAL ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
OFF
device-specific
INPut<1|2>:IQ:IMPedance LOW | HIGH
This command selects the impedance of the baseband inputs.
LOW
Input impedance 50
HIGH
Input impedance 1 M
The numeric suffix at INPut<1|2> is irrelevant.
Example:
"INP:IQ:IMP HIGH"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
LOW
device-specific
INPut<1|2>:IQ:TYPE I | Q | IQ
This command defines the input signal path used.
I
Real signal
I only
Q Real signal
Q only
IQ Complex signal I + j*Q
The numeric suffix <1|2> is irrelevant with this command.
Example:
"INP:IQ:TYPE IQ"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
’Selection of ’I+j*Q’
IQ
device-specific
INPut<1|2>:SELect AIQ
This command selects the analog baseband inputs.
AIQ: analog baseband input
The numeric suffix at INPut<1|2> is irrelevant.
Example:
"INP:SEL AIQ"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
AIQ
device-specific
6.99
E-1
INSTrument Subsystem
R&S FMU
INSTrument Subsystem
The INSTrument subsystem selects the operating mode of the unit either via text parameters or fid
numbers.
Command
Parameters
INSTrument<1|2>:NSELect
INSTrument[:SELect]
FANalyzer
INSTrument:NSELect <numeric value>
This command switches between the operating modes by means of numbers.
Parameter:
22:
Baseband analysis, FFT
Example:
"INST:NSEL 22" 'Switches the instrument to FFT.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
INSTrument[:SELect]
1
conforming
FANalyzer
This command switches between the operating modes by means of text parameters.
FANalyzer
Example:
"INST FAN"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
Baseband Analyzer mode FFT
'Switches the instrument to FFT.
FANalyzer
conforming
6.100
E-1
R&S FMU
MMEMory Subsystem
MMEMory Subsystem
The MMEMory (mass memory) subsystem provides commands which allow for access to the storage
media of the instrument and for storing and loading various instrument settings.
The various drives can be addressed via the "mass storage unit specifier" <msus> using the conventional DOS syntax. The internal hard disk is addressed by "D:", the floppy disk drive by "A:".
Note:
For reasons of compatibility with the FSE instruments, addressing the hard disk by "C:" is also
accepted. Since hard disk "C:" is reserved for instrument software, all read and write
operations are rerouted to hard disk "D:" in normal operation (service level 0).
The file names <file_name> are indicated as string parameters with the commands being enclosed in
quotation marks. They also comply with DOS conventions.
DOS file names consist of max. 8 ASCII characters and an extension of up to three characters
separated from the file name by a dot "." Both, the dot and the extension are optional. The dot is not
part of the file name. DOS file names do not distinguish between uppercase and lowercase notation. All
letters and digits are permitted as well as the special characters "_", "^", "$", "~", "!", "#", "%", "&", "-", "{",
"}", "(", ")", "@" and "`". Reserved file names are CLOCK$, CON, AUX, COM1 to COM4, LPT1 to LPT3,
NUL and PRN.
The two characters "*" and "?" have the function of so-called "wildcards", i.e., they are variables for
selection of several files. The question mark "?" replaces exactly one character, the asterisk means any
of the remaining characters in the file name. "*.*" thus means all files in a directory.
1303.3545.12
6.101
E-1
MMEMory Subsystem
R&S FMU
Command
Parameters
MMEMory:CATalog?
Path
MMEMory:CATalog:LONG?
Pfad
MMEMory:CDIRectory
directory name
MMEMory:CLear:ALL
MMEMory:CLear:STATe
1,Path
MMEMory:COMMent
<string>
MMEMory:COPY
path, file name
MMEMory:DATA
<file name>,<block data>
MMEMory:DELete
path, file name
MMEMory:LOAD:AUTO
1,Path
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe
path, file name
MMEMory:MDIRectory
path
MMEMory:MOVE
path, file name
MMEMory:MSIS
'A:' | 'D:'
MMEMory:NAME
path, file name
MMEMory:RDIRectory
directory name
MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:TRACe
1 to 3,Path
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:DEFault
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings
ON | OFF
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL
ON | OFF
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe[:ACTive]
ON | OFF
MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:MARKer
<file_name>
MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:STATe
path, file name
MMEMory:CATalog? <path>
This command reads the indicated directory. In accordance with DOS convention, wild card
characters can be entered in order to query e.g. a list of all files of a certain type.
The path name should be in conformance with DOS conventions and may also include the drive name.
Parameter:
<path>::= DOS Path name
Example:
"MMEM:CAT? 'D:\USER\DATA'
'Returns the contents of the
'D:\USER\DATA directory
"MMEM:CAT? 'D:\USER\DATA\*.LOG'
'Returns all files in D:\USER\DATA
'with extension ".LOG"
"MMEM:CAT? 'D:\USER\DATA\SPOOL?.WMF'
'Returns all files in D:\USER\DATA whose
'names start with SPOOL, have 6 letters
'and the extension ".WMF".
Response value: List of file names in the form of strings separated by commas, i.e.
'SPOOL1.WMF','SPOOL2.WMF','SPOOL3.WMF'
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
conforming
6.102
E-1
R&S FMU
MMEMory Subsystem
MMEMory:CATalog:LONG? <path>
This command queries the directories and files in the given path.
Parameter:
<path>::= DOS path
Example:
"MMEM:CAT:LONG? 'D:\USER\DATA''queries the contents of directory
D:\USER\DATA
Return value:
<used_bytes_in_this_directory>,<free_bytes_on_this_disk>,
”<file_name>,<file_type>,<filesize_in_bytes>”,
”<file_name>,<file_type>,<filesize_in_bytes>”, …
with
<file_name>
name of file or directory
<file_type>
file type: DIR (directory), ASCii (ASCII file),
BINary (binary file) and STATe (file with device settings)
<filesize_in_bytes>
size of file, 0 for directories
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
conforming
all
MMEMory:CDIRectory <directory_name>
This command changes the current directory.
In addition to the path name, the indication of the directory may contain the drive name. The path
name complies with the DOS conventions.
Parameter:
<directory_name>::= DOS path name
Example:
"MMEM:CDIR 'D:\USER\DATA'"
'Returns the list of files in directory
'D:\USER\DATA.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
conforming
MMEMory:CLEar:ALL
This command deletes all device settings in the current directory.The current directory can be
selected with MMEM:CDIR. The default directory is D:.
Example:
"MMEM:CLE:ALL"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
all
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
MMEMory:CLEar:STATe 1,<file_name>
This command deletes the instrument setting selected by <file_name>. All associated files on the mass
memory storage are cleared. A list of the extensions used is included under MMEMory:LOAD:STATe.
The file name includes indication of the path and may also include the drive. The path name
complies with DOS conventions.
Parameter:
<file_name> ::= DOS file name without extension
Example:
"MMEM:CLE:STAT 1,'TEST'"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
device-specific
all
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
1303.3545.12
6.103
E-1
MMEMory Subsystem
R&S FMU
MMEMory:COMMent <string>
This command defines a comment ( max. 60 characters) for a device setting to be stored.
Example:
"MMEM:COMM 'Setup for GSM measurement'"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
blank comment
device-specific
MMEMory:COPY <file_source>,<file_destination>
This command copies the files indicated in <file_source> to the destination directory indicated with
<file_destination> or to the destination file indicated by <file_destination> when <file_source> is just a file.
The indication of the file name may include the path and the drive name. The file names and path
information must be in accordance with the DOS conventions.
Parameter:
<file_source>,<file_destination> ::= <file_name>
<file_name> ::= DOS file name
Example:
"MMEM:COPY 'D:\USER\DATA\SETUP.CFG','A:'"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI
conforming
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
MMEMory:DATA
<file_name>[,<block data>]
This command writes the block data contained in <block> into the file characterized by <file_name>.
The IEC/IEEE-bus delimiter must be set to EOI to obtain error-free data transfer.
The associated query command reads the indicated file from the mass memory and transfers it to
the control computer via the IEC/IEEE bus. It should be noted that the buffer memory of the control
computer should be large enough to store the file. The setting of the IEC/IEEE-bus delimiter is
irrelevant in this case.
The command is useful for reading stored device settings or trace data from the instrument or for
transferring them to the instrument.
Syntax:
MMEMory:DATA <file_name>,<block data> Data transfer from control computer
to instrument.
MMEMory:DATA? <file_name>
Data transfer from instrument
to control computer.
<file_name> selects the file to be transferred.
The binary data block <block> has the following structure:
• it always begins with the character ‘#’,
• followed by a digit for the length of the length information,
• followed by the indicated number of digits as length information (number of
bytes) for the binary data themselves,
• finally the binary data with the indicated number of bytes
Example:
"MMEM:DATA 'TEST01.HCP',
#217This is the file"
'means:
'#2:
the next 2 characters
'
are the length indication
'17:
number of subsequent binary data
'
bytes
'This is the file:
'
17 bytes stored as binary data in the
'
file TEST01.HCP.
"MMEM:DATA? 'TEST01.HCP'" 'Transfers the file TEST01.HCP from the
'instrument to the control computer.
1303.3545.12
6.104
E-1
R&S FMU
MMEMory Subsystem
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
conforming
MMEMory:DELete <file_name>
This command deletes the indicated files.
The indication of the file name contains the path and, optionally, the drive name. Indication of the
path complies with DOS conventions.
Parameter:
<file_name> ::= DOS file name
Example:
"MMEM:DEL 'TEST01.HCP'"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'The file TEST01.HCP is deleted.
conforming
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
MMEMory:LOAD:AUTO
1,<file_name>
This command defines which device setting is automatically loaded after the device is switched on. The
contents of the file are read after switching on the device and used to define the new device state. The file
name includes indication of the path and may also include the drive. The path name complies with DOS
conventions.
Note:
The data set defined as auto recall set will also be restored by a *RST-command.
Parameter:
<file_name> ::= DOS file name without extension;
FACTORY denotes the data set previously in the
instrument
Example:
"MMEM:LOAD:AUTO 1,'D:\USER\DATA\TEST'"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
FACTORY
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe 1,<file_name>
This command loads device settings from files.The contents of the file are loaded and set as the new
device state.
The file name includes indication of the path and may also include the drive name. The path name
complies with DOS conventions.
Parameter:
<file_name> ::= DOS file name without extension, extensions see table
Example:
"MMEM:LOAD:STAT 1,'F:TEST'"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
conforming
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
MMEMory:MDIRectory <directory_name>
This command creates a new directory. The file name includes indication of the path and may also
include the drive name. The path name complies with DOS conventions.
Parameter:
<directory_name>::= DOS path name
Example:
"MMEM:MDIR 'D:\USER\DATA'"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
1303.3545.12
6.105
E-1
MMEMory Subsystem
MMEMory:MOVE
R&S FMU
<file_source>,<file_destination>
This command renames existing files, if <file_destination> contains no path indication. Otherwise the
file is moved to the indicated path and stored under the file name specified there, if any.
The file name includes indication of the path and may also include the drive. The path name
complies with DOS conventions.
Parameter:
<file_source>,<file_destination> ::= <file_name>
<file_name> ::= DOS file name
Example:
"MMEM:MOVE 'D:\TEST01.CFG','SETUP.CFG'"
'Renames TEST01.CFG in SETUP.CFG
'in directory D:\.
"MMEM:MOVE 'D:\TEST01.CFG','D:\USER\DATA'"
'Moves TEST01.CFG from D:\ to
'D:\USER\DATA.
"MMEM:MOVE 'D:\TEST01.CFG','D:\USER\DATA\SETUP.CFG'"
'Moves TEST01.CFG from D:\ to
'D:\USER\DATA and renames the file in
'SETUP.CFG.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
conforming
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
MMEMory:MSIS
<device>
This command changes to the drive indicated. The drive may be the internal hard disk D: or a
memory stick F::.
Example:
"MMEM:MSIS 'F:'"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
MMEMory:NAME
"D:'
conforming
<file_name>
This command defines a destination file for the printout started with the command HCOPy:IMMediate. In
this case the printer output must be routed to destination FILE using the command "HCOP:DEST 'MMEM' ".
The file name includes indication of the path and may also include the drive name. The file name and
path information comply with DOS conventions.
Parameter:
<file_name> ::= DOS file name
Example:
"HCOP:DEV:LANG BMP"
"HCOP:DEST 'MMEM' "
"MMEM:NAME 'PRINT1.BMP'"
"HCOP:IMM"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
Selection of data format.
Selection of the output device
Selection of file name.
Start of the printout.
conforming
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
1303.3545.12
6.106
E-1
R&S FMU
MMEMory Subsystem
MMEMory:RDIRectory
<directory_name>
This command deletes the indicated directory. The directory name includes indication of the path and
may also include the drive name. The path name complies with DOS conventions.
Parameter:
<directory_name>::= DOS path name
Example:
"MMEM:RDIR 'D:\TEST'"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings
ON | OFF
This command includes the hardware settings in the list of data subsets of a device setting to be
stored/loaded. The hardware settings include:
• current configuration of general device parameters (general setup)
• current setting of the measurement hardware including markers
• activated limit lines:
A data set may include 8 limit lines at maximum in each measurement window. This number
includes the activated limit lines and, if available, the de-activated limit lines last used.
Therefore the combination of the non-activated restored limit lines depends on the sequence of
use with the command MMEM:LOAD.
• user-defined color setting
• configuration for the hardcopy output
Example:
"MMEM:SEL:HWS ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
ON
device-specific
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe[:ACTive]
ON | OFF
This command adds the active traces to the list of data subsets of a save/recall device setting. Active
traces are all traces whose state is not blank.
Example:
"MMEM:SEL:TRAC ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
OFF, i.e. no traces will be stored
device-specific
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL
ON | OFF
This command adds all limit lines (activated and de-activated) to the list of device settings to be
stored/loaded.The selection MMEM:SEL:LIN:ACT is thus switched off.
Example:
"MMEM:SEL:LIN:ALL ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
ON
device-specific
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL
This command includes all data subsets in the list device settings to be stored/loaded.
Example:
"MMEM:SEL:ALL"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
-device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value.
1303.3545.12
6.107
E-1
MMEMory Subsystem
R&S FMU
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE
This command deletes all data subsets from the list of device settings to be stored/loaded.
Example:
"MMEM:SEL:NONE"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
-device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value.
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:DEFault
This command sets the default list of device settings to be stored/loaded.The latter includes:
• current configuration of general device parameters (general setup)
• current setting of the measurement hardware including markers
• activated limit lines
• user-defined color setting
• configuration for the hardcopy output
Trace data and non-used limit lines are not included.
Example:
"MMEM:SEL:DEFault"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
-device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value.
MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:MARKer <file_name>
This command saves the data of active markers to a file < file_name >.
Example for the content of a tex file contaning the data for 2 active markers in screen A:
Marker;1;T1
-25.87;dBm
19.920000000;GHz
Delta;2;T1
-21.90;dB
-5.920000000;GHz
Example:
"MMEM:STOR:MARK 'C:\marker.txt'"
'Creates the file'marker.txt, with all marker data of screen A.
Characteristics: *RST-Wert:
SCPI:
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
1303.3545.12
6.108
E-1
R&S FMU
MMEMory Subsystem
MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:STATe 1,<file_name>
This command stores the current device settings in a series of files which have the indicated file
name, but different extensions. The file name includes indication of the path and may also include
the drive name. The path name complies with DOS conventions. The numeric suffix in STORe<1|2>
is irrelevant with this command.
Parameter:
<file_name> := DOS file name without extension
Example:
"MMEM:STOR:STAT 1,'TEST'"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
conforming
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:TRACe
1 to 3,<file_name>
This command stores the selected trace (1 to 3) in the measurement window indicated by
STORe<1|2> (screen A or B) in a file with ASCII format. The file format is described in chapter 4 in
the TRACE menu under the ASCII-FILE EXPORT softkey.
The decimal separator (decimal point or comma) for floating-point numerals contained in the file is
defined with the command FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator.
The file name includes indication of the path and the drive name. Indication of the path complies with
DOS conventions.
Parameter:
1 to 3
<file_name>
Example:
"MMEM:STOR2:TRAC 3,'F:\TEST.ASC'"
'Stores trace 3 from screen B in the file
'TEST.ASC on an USB stick.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
:= selected measurement curve Trace 1 to 3
:= DOS file name
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
1303.3545.12
6.109
E-1
SENSe Subsystem
R&S FMU
SENSe Subsystem
The SENSe subsystem is organized in several subsystems. The commands of these subsystems
directly control device-specific settings, they do not refer to the signal characteristics of the
measurement signal.
The SENSe subsystem controls the essential parameters of the analyzer. In accordance with the SCPI
standard, the keyword "SENSe" is optional for this reason, which means that it is not necessary to
include the SENSe node in command sequences.
The measurement windows are selected by SENSe1 and SENSe2:
SENSe1 = Modification of screen A settings
SENSe2 = Modification of screen B settings.
Screen A is automatically selected if 1 or 2 is missing.
1303.3545.12
6.110
E-1
R&S FMU
SENSe:AVERage Subsystem
SENSe:AVERage Subsystem
The SENSe:AVERage subsystem calculates the average of the acquired data. A new test result is
obtained from several successive measurements.
There are two types of average calculation: logarithmic and linear. In case of logarithmic average
calculation (denoted with VIDeo), the average value of the measured logarithmic power is calculated
and in case of linear average calculation, the linear power is averaged before the logarithm is applied.
The measurement windows are selected by SENSe1 (screen A) and SENSe2 (screen B).
Command
Parameters
[SENSe<1|2>:]AVERage:COUNt
0 to 32767
[SENSe<1|2>:]AVERage[:STATe<1 to 3>]
ON | OFF
[SENSe<1|2>:]AVERage:TYPE
VIDeo | LINear
[SENSe<1|2>:]AVERage:COUNt 0 to 32767
This command defines the number of measurements which contribute to the average value.
It should be noted that continuous averaging will be performed after the indicated number has been
reached in continuous sweep mode.
In single sweep mode, the sweep is stopped as soon as the indicated number of measurements
(sweeps) is reached. Synchronization to the end of the indicated number of measurements is only
possible in single sweep mode.
The command [SENSe<1|2>:]AVERage:COUNt is the same as command
[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:COUNt. In both cases, the number of measurements is defined whether the
average calculation is active or not.
The number of measurements is valid for all traces in the indicated measurement window.
The numeric suffix at SENSet<1|2> is irrelevant.
Example:
"SWE:CONT OFF"
"AVER:COUN 16"
"AVER:STAT ON"
"INIT;*WAI"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
Switching to single-sweep mode.
'Sets the number of measurements to 16.
'Switches on the calculation of average.
'Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 16
'sweeps.
0
conforming
[SENSe<1|2>:]AVERage[:STATe<1 to 3>] ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the average calculation for the selected trace (STATe<1 to 3>) in
the selected measurement window. For measurement results using two windows (e.g.
Magnitude/Phase), the average calculation is activated in both windows.
The numeric suffix at SENSet<1|2> is irrelevant.
Example:
"AVER OFF"
'Switches off the average calculation for trace 1 in screen A.
"SENS2:AVER:STAT3 ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
'Switches on the average calculation for trace 3
'in screen B.
OFF
conforming
6.111
E-1
SENSe:AVERage Subsystem
R&S FMU
[SENSe<1|2>:]AVERage:TYPE VIDeo | LINear
This command selects the type of average function. If VIDeo is selected, the logarithmic power is
averaged and, if LINear is selected, the power values are averaged before they are converted to
logarithmic values.
The type of average calculation is equally set for all traces in one measurement window.
Example:
"AVER:TYPE LIN"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
'Switches screen A to linear average calculation.
LINear
device-specific
6.112
E-1
R&S FMU
SENSe:BANDwidth Subsystem
SENSe:BANDwidth Subsystem
This subsystem controls the setting of the instrument's filter bandwidths. Both groups of commands
(BANDwidth and BWIDth) perform the same functions. The numeric suffix at SENSe<1|2> is irrelevant..
Command
Parameters
[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:
10 Hz to 50 MHz
[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO
ON | OFF
[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio
0.0001 to 1
[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:STEP:MODE
LIN | L1235
[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] 10 Hz to 20 MHz
This command defines the analyzer's resolution bandwidth.
An FFT with preselectable windowing of the data is used in the Frequency Domain mode. The
resolution bandwidths can be selected both in the usual steps and in fine intermediate steps (RES
BW 1-2-3-5 softkey).
In time domain digital resolution filters of 10 Hz to 20 MHz in 1, 2, 3, 5, 10 steps are available.
In frequency domain a preselectable windowing of the data is performed. The minimum resolution
bandwidth is 0.5 Hz and is dependent on the selected windowing function and the span.
If the resolution bandwidth is modified in SPECTRUM mode, the coupling to the span is automatically
switched off.
Example:
"BAND 1MHz" 'Sets the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
- (AUTO is set to ON)
conforming
[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO ON | OFF
This command either automatically couples the resolution bandwidth of the instrument to the span or
cancels the coupling in frequency domain.
The automatic coupling adapts the resolution bandwidth to the currently set frequency span
according to the relationship between frequency span and resolution bandwidth.
The ratio resolution bandwidth/span can be modified with the command
[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:RATio.
Example:
"BAND:AUTO OFF"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Switches off the coupling of the resolution bandwidth to
'the span (frequency domain)
ON
conforming
[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio 0.0001 to 1
This command defines the ratio resolution bandwidth (Hz) / span (Hz). The ratio to be entered is
reciprocal to the ratio span/RBW used in manual control.
Example:
"BAND:RAT 0.1"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
0.02
conforming
6.113
E-1
SENSe:BANDwidth Subsystem
R&S FMU
[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:STEP:MODE LIN | L1235.
This command controls the rounding of the settable bandwidth in the frequency domain. With L1235,
it is limited to steps of 1/2/3/5/10; with LIN, it is rounded to 0.1 Hz.
The numeric suffix <1|2> is irrelevant with this command.
Example:
"BAND:STEP:MODE L1235"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
L1235
device-specific
6.114
E-1
R&S FMU
SENSe:CORRection Subsystem
SENSe:CORRection Subsystem
This subsystem also controls calibration and normalization during operation with the external generator
control option (B10). The measurement windows are selected by SENSe1 (screen A) and SENSe2
(screen B).
Note:
The commands of this subsystem are not available during GSM measurements.
Command
Parameters
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:OFFset:PHAse
<numeric_value>
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:OFFSet:PHASe <numeric_value.
This command sets a reference value for the phase display.
Example:
"CORR:OFFS:PHAS 10deg"includes a phase offset of 10 deg
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
0 dB
device-specific
6.115
E-1
SENSe:DETector Subsystem
R&S FMU
SENSe:DETector Subsystem
The SENSe:DETector subsystem controls the acquisition of measurement data via the selection of the
detector for the corresponding trace. The measurement windows are selected by SENSe1 (screen A)
and SENSe2 (screen B).
Command
Parameters
[SENSe<1|2>:]DETector<1 to 3>[:FUNCtion]
APEak | NEGative | POSitive | SAMPle | RMS | AVERage
[SENSe<1|2>:]DETector<1 to 3>[:FUNCtion]:AUTO
ON | OFF
[SENSe<1|2>:]DETector<1..3>[:FUNCtion] APEak | NEGative | POSitive | SAMPle | RMS |
AVERage | QPEak
This command switches on the detector for the data acquisition in the selected trace and the
indicated measurement window.
• The APEak detector (AutoPeak) displays the positive and also the negative peak value of the
noise floor. If a signal is detected, only the positive peak value is displayed.
• The POSitive or NEGative detector only displays the positive or the negative peak value.
• With the Sample detector the value measured at the sampling time is displayed, whereas the
RMS value of the power measured at each test point is displayed with the RMS detector.
• The AVERage detector displays the power average value at each test point.
The trace is indicated as numeric suffix in DETector.
Example:
"DET POS"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Sets the detector in screen A to "positive peak".
APEak
conforming
[SENSe<1|2>:]DETector<1 to 3>[:FUNCtion]:AUTO ON | OFF
This command either couples the detector in the selected measurement window to the current trace
setting or turns coupling off. The trace is selected by the numeric suffix at DETector.
Example:
"DET:AUTO OFF"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
ON
conforming
6.116
E-1
R&S FMU
SENSe:FFT Subsystem
SENSe:FFT Subsystem
The SENSe:FFT subsystem controls the I/Q capturing. The numeric suffix at SENSe<1|2> is irrelevant.
Command
Parameters
[SENSe<1|2>:]FFT:CAPTure
ON | OFF
[SENSe<1|2>:]FFT:CAPTure:AUTO
ON | OFF
[SENSe<1|2>:]FFT:CAPTure:CALCulate
[SENSe<1|2>:]FFT:PRESet[:DEVice]
[SENSe<1|2>:]FFT:CAPTure ON | OFF
This command controls how data is captured. While the highest measurement speed is attained with
OFF, ON and Single Sweep allow switching between the time and frequency domains even after the
measurement without further data capture being necessary.
The numeric suffix <1|2> is irrelevant with this command.
Example:
"FFT:CAPT ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
ON
device-specific
[SENSe<1|2>:]FFT:CAPTure:AUTO ON | OFF
This command controls the automatic recalculation of measurement results after changing the
instruments parameter. This function is only available for BOTH DOMAIN OFF and SINGLE
SWEEP.
The numeric suffix <1|2> is irrelevant with this command.
Example:
"FFT:CAPT:AUTO ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
OFF
device-specific
[SENSe<1|2>:]FFT:CAPTure:CALCulate
This command restarts the analysis of captured data with new parameter settings, e.g. resolution
bandwidth, window function or domain. This function is only available for BOTH DOMAIN OFF and
SINGLE SWEEP."
This recalculation is automatically done, if FFT:CAPT:AUTO is switched ON.
The numeric suffix <1|2> is irrelevant with this command.
Example:
"FFT:CAPT:CALC"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
1303.3545.12
6.117
E-1
SENSe:FFT Subsystem
R&S FMU
SENSe<1|2>:]FFT:PRESet[:DEVice]
This command sets the FFT Analyzer mode to the default state. This default state is nearly identical
with the setting in effect after PRESET. An active probe calibration is not switched off. Connected
coded power probes are taken into account.
The numeric suffix <1|2> is irrelevant with this command.
Example:
"SENS:FFT:PRES" 'sets the instrument to the default state
' probe cal remains active
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
-device-specific
This command is an event, so it has neither an *RST value nor a query.
1303.3545.12
6.118
E-1
R&S FMU
SENSe:FREQuency Subsystem
SENSe:FREQuency Subsystem
The SENSe:FREQuency subsystem defines the frequency axis of the active display. The frequency axis
can either be defined via the start/stop frequency or via the center frequency and span. The numeric
suffix at SENSe<1|2> is irrelevant.
Command
Parameters
[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP
0 to fmax
[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK
SPAN | RBW | OFF
[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor
1 to 100 PCT
[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:MODE
CW|FIXed | SWEep
[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:OFFSet
<numeric_value>
[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:SPAN
0 Hz to fmax
[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:SPAN:FULL
[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:STARt
0 Hz to fmax
[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:STOP
0 Hz to fmax
[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP 0 to fmax
This command defines the step width of the center frequency.
Example:
"FREQ:CENT:STEP 1.50MHz"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
- (AUTO 0.1 × SPAN is switched on)
conforming
[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK SPAN | RBW | OFF
This command couples the step width of the center frequency to span (span >0) or to the resolution
bandwidth (span = 0) or cancels the couplings.
Parameters:
SPAN = Coupling to frequency display range (for frequency domain)
RBW = Coupling to resolution bandwidth (for time domain)
OFF = manual input, no coupling.
Example:
"FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK SPAN"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
SPAN
device-specific
6.119
E-1
SENSe:FREQuency Subsystem
R&S FMU
[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor 1 to 100 PCT
This command couples the step width of the center frequency with a factor to the span (span >0) or
to the resolution bandwidth (span = 0).
Note:
This command is not available for GSM/EDGE measurements modulation accuracy (MAC),
phase/frequency error (PFE) and power versus time (PVT).
Example:
"FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK:FACT 20PCT"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:MODE
- (AUTO 0.1 × SPAN is switched on)
device-specific
CW | FIXed | SWEep
This command switches between frequency domain (SWEep) and time domain (CW | FIXed).
For CW and FIXed, the frequency setting is via command FREQuency:CENTer. In the SWEep
mode, the setting is via commands FREQuency:STARt, STOP, CENTer and SPAN.
Example:
"FREQ:MODE SWE"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:OFFSet
SWEep
conforming
<numeric_value>
This command defines the frequency offset of the instrument.
Example:
"FREQ:OFFS 1GHZ"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
0 Hz
conforming
[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:SPAN 0 to fmax
This command defines the frequency span in the frequency domain. A span of 0 Hz activates the
time domain.
Example:
"FREQ:SPAN 1MHz"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
72 MHz
conforming
[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:SPAN:FULL
This command sets the frequency span in the frequency domain to its maximum.
Example:
"FREQ:SPAN:FULL"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
conforming
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
1303.3545.12
6.120
E-1
R&S FMU
SENSe:FREQuency Subsystem
[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:STARt -fmax to fmax
This command defines the start frequency of the analyzer. This command is only available in the
frequency domain. For signal path I only/Q only, only values m 0 are allowed.
The automatic coupling of the frequency parameters is set to STOP FIXED.
Example:
"FREQ:STAR 20MHz"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
0
conforming
[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:STOP -fmax to fmax
This command defines the stop frequency of the frequency domain. For signal path I only/Q only,
only values > 0 are allowed.
Example:
"FREQ:STOP 20MHz"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
fmax
conforming
6.121
E-1
SENSe:I/Q Subsystem
R&S FMU
SENSe:I/Q Subsystem
This subsystem controls the settings for the baseband input.
Command
Parameters
[SENSe<1|2>:]IQ:DITHer[:STATe]
ON | OFF
[SENSe<1|2>:]IQ:LPASs[:STATe]
ON | OFF
[SENSe<1|2>:]IQ:DITHer[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command inserts a 2 MHz wide noise signal at 42.67 MHz into the signal path of the baseband
input.
The numeric suffix at SENSe<1|2> is irrelevant.
Example:
"IQ:DITH ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
OFF
device-specific
[SENSe<1|2>:]IQ:LPASs[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches a filter of 36 MHz into the I and Q paths of the baseband input.
The numeric suffix at SENSe<1|2> is irrelevant.
Example:
"IQ:LPAS OFF"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
ON
device-specific
6.122
E-1
R&S FMU
SENSe:POWer Subsystem
SENSe:POWer Subsystem
This subsystem controls the setting of the instrument's channel and adjacent channel power
measurements. The measurement is allowed in frequency domain / magnitude. The numeric suffix 2
with SENSe is not allowed.
Note:
The maximum allowed values of the number of channels, channel spacing and channel
bandwidth parameters exceed the frequency range of the R&S FMU. There is no checking
concerning possible R&S FMU frequency range and valid measurement settings. If the
effective sweep parameters exceed the available frequency range, the measurement results
will be marked as invalid.
Command
Parameters
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs
0 to 12
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ACHannel
100 to 1000MHz
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ALTernate<1..11>
100 to 1000MHz
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:CHANnel]
100 to 1000 MHz
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE
ABSolute | RELative
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet
ACPower | CPOWer | MCACpower |
OBANdwidth | OBWidth | CN | CN0
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:AUTO
ONCE
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:AUTO
MINimum | MAXimum | LHIGhest
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:MANual
1 to 12
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ACHannel
100 to 2000MHz
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<1 to 11>
100 to 2000MHz
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:CHANnel<1 to 11>
100 to 2000MHz
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:TXCHannel:COUNt
1 to 12
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:BANDwidth|BWIDth
10 to 99.9PCT
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:TRACe
1 to 3
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs 0 to 12
This command sets the number of adjacent channels (upper and lower channel in pairs).The figure 0
stands for pure channel power measurement.
The command is only available in frequency domain / magnitude. The numeric suffix 2 with SENSe is
not allowed.
Example:
"POW:ACH:ACP 3"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
'Sets the number of adjacent channels to 3, i.e. the
'adjacent channel and alternate adjacent channels 1 and
'2 are switched on.
1
device-specific
6.123
E-1
SENSe:POWer Subsystem
R&S FMU
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ACHannel 100 Hz to 1000 MHz
This command defines the channel bandwidth of the adjacent channel of the radio transmission
system. If the bandwidth of the adjacent channel is changed, the bandwidths of all alternate adjacent
channels are automatically set to the same value.
With SENS:POW:HSP ON the steep-edged channel filters from the table "List of available channel
filters" in Section "Setting Bandwidths and Sweep Time – Key BW" are available.
The command is only available in frequency domain / magnitude. The numeric suffix 2 with SENSe is
not allowed.
Example:
"POW:ACH:BWID:ACH 30kHz"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Sets the bandwidth of all adjacent channels to
'30 kHz.
14 kHz
device-specific
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ALTernate<1 to 11>
100 Hz to 1000 MHz
This command defines the channel bandwidth of the alternate adjacent channels of the radio
transmission system. If the channel bandwidth of an alternate adjacent channel (e.g. channel no. 1)
is changed, the bandwidth of all the following alternate adjacent channels (e.g. channels no. 2 to 11)
is automatically set to the same value.
With SENS:POW:HSP ON the steep-edged channel filters from the table "List of available channel
filters" in Section "Setting Bandwidths and Sweep Time – Key BW" are available.
The command is only available in frequency domain / magnitude. The numeric suffix 2 with SENSe is
not allowed.
Example:
"POW:ACH:BWID:ALT2 30kHz"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
14 kHz
device-specific
SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:CHANnel]
100 Hz to 1000 MHz
This command sets the channel bandwidth of the radio communication system.The bandwidths of
adjacent channels are not influenced by this modification (in contrast to the FSE family).
With SENS:POW:HSP ON the steep-edged channel filters from the table "List of available channel
filters" in Section "Setting Bandwidths and Sweep Time – Key BW" are available.
The command is only available in frequency domain / magnitude. The numeric suffix 2 with SENSe is
not allowed.
Example:
"POW:ACH:BWID 30kHz"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Sets the bandwidth of the TX channel to
'30 kHz.
14 kHz
device-specific
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE ABSolute | RELative
This command toggles between absolute and relative adjacent channel measurement.
For the relative measurement the reference value is set to the currently measured channel power by
command SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:AUTO ONCE.
The command is only available in frequency domain / magnitude. The numeric suffix 2 with SENSe is
not allowed.
Example:
"POW:ACH:MODE REL"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
ABSolute
device-specific
6.124
E-1
R&S FMU
SENSe:POWer Subsystem
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet ACPower | CPOWer | MCACpower | OBANdwidth |
OBWidth | CN | CN0
This command adjusts the frequency span, the measurement bandwidths and the detector as
required for the number of channels, the channel bandwidths and the channel spacings selected in
the active power measurement. If necessary, adjacent-channel power measurement is switched on
prior to the adjustment.
To obtain valid results, a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the sweep must be
performed after the adjustment. Synchronization is possible only in the single-sweep mode.
The result is queried with the command CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult?.
The command is available only for measurements in frequency domain / magnitude. The numeric
suffix 2 with SENSe is not allowed.
Example:
'Sets the frequency span, the measurement
bandwidths and the detector as required for the
ACP measurement in screen A.
"INIT:CONT OFF"
'Switches over to single-sweep mode.
"INIT;*WAI"
'Starts a sweep and waits for the end of the
sweep.
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? ACP" 'Queries the result of the adjacent-channel
power measurement.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
"POW:ACH:PRES ACP"
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:AUTO ONCE
This command sets the reference value for the relative measurement to the currently measured
channel power.
The command is only available in frequency domain / magnitude. The numeric suffix 2 with SENSe is
not allowed..
Example:
"POW:ACH:REF:AUTO ONCE"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:AUTO MINimum | MAXimum | LHIGhest
This command activates the automatic selection of a transmission channel to be used as a reference
channel in relative adjacent-channel power measurements.
The transmission channel with the highest power, the transmission channel with the lowest power,
or the transmission channel nearest to the adjacent channels can be defined as a reference channel.
The command is available only for multicarrier channel and adjacent-channel power measurements
(CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL MCAC) in frequency domain / magnitude. The numeric suffix 2 with
SENSe is not allowed.
Parameters:
MINimum
Transmission channel with the lowest power
MAXimum
Transmission channel with the highest power
LHIGhest Lowermost transmission channel for the lower adjacent channels,
uppermost transmission channel for the upper adjacent channels
Example:
"POW:ACH:REF:TXCH:AUTO MAX"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
'The transmission channel with the
highest power is used as a reference
channel.
device-specific
6.125
E-1
SENSe:POWer Subsystem
R&S FMU
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:MANual 1 to 12
This command selects a transmission channel to be used as a reference channel in relative
adjacent-channel power measurements.
The command is available only for multicarrier channel and adjacent-channel power measurements
(CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL MCAC) in frequency domain / magnitude. The numeric suffix 2 with
SENSe is not allowed.
Example:
"POW:ACH:REF:TXCH:MAN 3" 'Transmission channel 3 is used as a reference
channel.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1
device-specific
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ACHannel 100 Hz to 2000 MHz
This command defines the channel spacing of the adjacent channel to the TX channel. At the same time,
the spacing of alternate adjacent channels 1 to 11 is set to the double or triple etc. of the entered value.
The command is only available in frequency domain / magnitude.
Note:
The maximum values of the channel spacing/channel bandwidth parameters exceed the
frequency range of the R&S FMU. There is no checking concerning valid measurement
settings. If the effective sweep parameters exceed the available frequency range, the
measurement results will be marked as invalid.
The numeric suffix 2 with SENSe is not allowed.
Example:
"POW:ACH:SPAC:ACH 33kHz"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Sets the spacing between the carrier signal
'and
'- the adjacent channel to 33 kHz
'- the alternate adjacent channel 1 to 66 kHz
'- the alternate adjacent channel 2 to 99 kHz
14 kHz
device-specific
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<1 to 11> 100 Hz to 2000 MHz
This command defines the spacing between the alternate adjacent channels and the TX channel. If the
spacing to an alternate adjacent channel ALTernate<k> is modified, the spacing to all the following
alternate adjacent channels ALTernate<n> is set to (<n> + 1) / (<k> + 1) times the entered value.
This command is only available in frequency domain / magnitude. The numeric suffix 2 with SENSe
is not allowed.
Example:
"POW:ACH:SPAC:ALT1 100kHz" 'Sets the spacing between TX channel and
'alternate adjacent channel 1 to 100 kHz and
'between TX channel and alternate adjacent
'channel 2 to 150 kHz.
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
40 kHz (ALT1)
60 kHz (ALT2)
80 kHz (ALT3)
100 kHz (ALT4)
120 kHz (ALT5)
140 kHz (ALT6)
160 kHz (ALT7)
180 kHz (ALT8)
200 kHz (ALT9)
220 kHz (ALT10)
240 kHz (ALT11)
device-specific
6.126
E-1
R&S FMU
SENSe:POWer Subsystem
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:CHANnel<1 to 11> 100 Hz to 2000 MHz
This command defines the channel spacing of the carriers. At the same time the spacing of carriers
with higher channel number are set to the same value. If the spacing is equal between all carriers it is
sufficient to set the spacing between carrier 1 and 2 with the command
SENS:POW:ACP:SPAC:CHAN1 or SENS:POW:ACP:SPAC:CHAN. If the spacing are set in ascending
order individual spacing of the carriers can be set.
The command is available only in frequency domain / magnitude. The numeric suffix 2 with SENSe is
not allowed.
Example:
"POW:ACH:SPAC:CHAN 25kHz" 'Sets the spacing between all carriers to 25 kHz
"POW:ACH:SPAC:CHAN2 4.8MHz"
’sets the spacing between TX carrier 2 and 3 to 4.8 MHz.
Characteristics:
*RST value:
SCPI:
20 kHz
device-specific
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:TXCHannel:COUNt 1 to 12
This command selects the number of carrier signals.
The command is available only for multicarrier channel and adjacent-channel power measurements
(CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL MCAC) in frequency domain / magnitude. The numeric suffix 2 with
SENSe is not allowed.
Example:
"POW:ACH:TXCH:COUN 3"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
4
device-specific
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:BANDwidth|BWIDth
10 to 99.9 PCT
This command defines the percentage of the power with respect to the total power. This value is the
basis for the occupied bandwidth measurement (command: POWer:ACHannel:PRESet OBW).
The command is only available in frequency domain / magnitude. The numeric suffix 2 with SENSe is
not allowed.
Example:
"POW:BWID 95PCT"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
99PCT
device-specific
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:TRACe 1 to 3
This command assigns the channel/adjacent channel power measurement to the indicated trace in
the selected measurement window. The corresponding trace must be active, i.e. its state must be
different from blank.
Note:
The measurement of the occupied bandwidth (OBW) is performed on the trace on which
marker 1 is positioned. To evaluate another trace, marker 1 must be positioned to another
trace with CALCulate:MARKer:TRACe.
The maximum values of the channel spacing/channel bandwidth parameters exceed the
frequency range of the R&S FMU. There is no checking concerning valid measurement
settings. If the effective sweep parameters exceed the available frequency range, the
measurement results will be marked as invalid.
The numeric suffix 2 with SENSe is not allowed.
Example:
"POW:TRAC 2"
"SENS2:POW:TRAC 3"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
'Assigns the measurement in screen A to trace 2.
'Assigns the measurement in screen B to trace 3.
device-specific
6.127
E-1
SENSe:PROBe Subsystem
R&S FMU
SENSe:PROBe Subsystem
This subsystem controls the probe calibration data set handling.
Command
Parameters
[SENSe<1|2>:]PROBe:ADJust:DC
0 to 2.4 V
[SENSe<1|2>:]PROBe:ADJust:MODE
DC | PULSE | COMPensation
[SENSe<1|2>:]PROBe:ADJust:PULSe
10 kHz to 8 MHz
[SENSe<1|2>:]PROBe:CATalog?
[SENSe<1|2>:]PROBe:DELete
<probe_data_set_name>
[SENSe<1|2>:]PROBe:FAIL?
[SENSe<1|2>:]PROBe:MOVE
<file_name>,<file_name>
[SENSe<1|2>:]PROBe:RESult?
[SENSe<1|2>:]PROBe:SELect
<file_name>
[SENSe<1|2>:]PROBe[:STATe]
ON | OFF
[SENSe<1|2>:]PROBe:ADJust:DC
0 to 2.4V
This command sets the voltage at the Probe Cal output (0V, 10mV, 20mV, 50mV, 100mV, 200mV,
500mV, 1V, 2V, 2.4V).
The numeric suffix <1|2> is ignored with this command.
Note:
To activate the voltage at the Probe Cal output use the command PROBe:ADJ:MODE DC.
Example:
"PROB:ADJ:DC 2"
'Set the DC voltage at the Probe Cal output to 2V
"PROB:ADJ:MODE DC"
'Activate the DC voltage at the Probe Cal output
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
0
device-specific
[SENSe<1|2>:]PROBe:ADJust:MODE
DC | PULSE | COMPensation
This command activates the DC voltage, frequency or pulse at the Prob Cal or Compensation output.
The numeric suffix <1|2> is ignored with this command.
Parameter:
DC
PULSe
COMPensation
Example:
"PROB:ADJ:MODE COMP"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
activates DC voltage at the Prob Cal output
activates pulse at the Prob Cal output
activates a 1kHz frequency at the Compensation output
'Activate a 1kHz signal the Compensation output
DC
device-specific
6.128
E-1
R&S FMU
SENSe:PROBe Subsystem
[SENSe<1|2>:]PROBe:ADJust:PULSe 10 kHz to 8 MHz
This command sets the pulse frequenzy at the Probe Cal output (10kHz, 62.5kHz, 100kHz,
102.4kHz, 200kHz, 250kHz, 500kHz, 1MHz, 2MHz, 4MHz, 8MHz).
The numeric suffix <1|2> is ignored with this command.
Note:
To activate the pulse at the Probe Cal output use the command PROBe:ADJ:MODE
PULSe.
Example:
"PROB:ADJ:PULS 100KHZ" 'Set the pulse frequency at the Probe Cal output to
'100 kHz
"PROB:ADJ:MODE PULS"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'Activate the pulse at the Probe Cal output
102.4kHz
device-specific
[SENSe<1|2>:]PROBe:CATalog?
This command queries the names of all probe data sets stored in the FMU.
The numeric suffix <1|2> is ignored with this command.
The syntax of this output format is as follows:
st
st
st
<1 probe data set>,<2 probe data set 2>,..,<n probe data set>
Example:
"PROB:CAT?" 'Query names of all probe data sets
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
[SENSe<1|2>:]PROBe:DELete <probe_data_set_name>
This command deletes the specified probe data set.
The numeric suffix <1|2> is ignored with this command.
Parameters:
probe_data_set_name
Example:
"PROB:DEL 'probe_1'"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
name of the probe data set to delete
'Delete probe data set probe_1
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
[SENSe<1|2>:]PROBe:FAIL?
This command queries, if the calibration of the selected probe data set passed or failed. The
response of this query is 0 for PASS and 1 for FAIL.
The numeric suffix <1|2> is ignored with this command.
Note:
Example:
The probe data set is selected with PROBe:SELect. Therefore the command
PROBe:FAIL? should always be sent after selecting the probe data set.
"PROB:SEL 'probe_1'"
"PROB:FAIL?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
'Select probe data set probe_1
'Query if calibration failed
device-specific
6.129
E-1
SENSe:PROBe Subsystem
[SENSe<1|2>:]PROBe:MOVE
R&S FMU
<probe_data_set_source>,<probe_data_set_destination>
This command renames existing probe data sets.
The numeric suffix <1|2> is ignored with this command.
Parameters:
probe_data_set_source
probe_data_set_destination
Example:
"PROB:MOV 'probe_1', 'probe_2'"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
name of the source probe data set
name of the destination probe data set
'Rename probe data set probe_1 to
'probe_2
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
[SENSe<1|2>:]PROBe:RESult?
This command queries the calibration result of the selected probe data set.
The numeric suffix <1|2> is ignored with this command.
Note:
The probe data set is selected with PROBe:SELect. Therefore the command
PROBe:RESult? should always be sent after selecting the probe data set.
Example:
"PROB:SEL 'probe_1'"
"PROB:RES?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
[SENSe<1|2>:]PROBe:SELect
'Select probe data set probe_1
'Query calibration results
device-specific
<probe_data_set_name>
This command selects the specified probe data set.
The numeric suffix <1|2> is ignored with this command.
Note:
Use the command PROBe:STATe to activate the probe data set,
Parameters:
probe_data_set_name
Example:
"PROB:SEL 'probe_1'"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
name of the probe data set to select
'Select probe data set probe_1
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
[SENSe<1|2>:]PROBe:STATe
ON | OFF
This command activates a selected probe data set.
The numeric suffix <1|2> is ignored with this command.
Note:
Example:
The probe data set is selected with PROBe:SELect. Therefore the command
PROBe:STATe should always be sent after selecting the probe data set.
"PROB:SEL 'probe_1'"
"PROB:STAT ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
'Select probe data set probe_1
'Activate probe data set probe_1
OFF
device-specific
6.130
E-1
R&S FMU
SENSe:ROSCillator Subsystem
SENSe:ROSCillator Subsystem
This subsystem controls the reference oscillator. The numeric suffix in SENSe is irrelevant for the
commands of this subsystem.
Command
Parameters
[SENSe<1|2>:]ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency
1MHz to 20MHz
[SENSe<1|2>:]ROSCillator:SOURce
INTernal | EXTernal
[SENSe<1|2>:]ROSCillator[:INTernal]:TUNe
0 to 4095
[SENSe<1|2>:]ROSCillator[:INTernal]:TUNe:SAVe
[SENSe<1|2>:]ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency
1MHz to 20MHz
This command informs the instrument on the frequency of the external reference oscillator. This
frequency is used as starting point for the synchronization of the internal reference frequencies.
The value of the external reference frequency (1 MHz to 20 MHz) is rounded in steps of 1 Hz.
Example:
"ROSC:EXT:FREQ 5MHz"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
conforming
*RST is not influencing this parameter.
[SENSe<1|2>:]ROSCillator:SOURce
INTernal | EXTernal
This command controls selection of the reference oscillator.
If the external reference oscillator is selected, the reference signal must be connected to the rear
panel of the instrument.
Example:
"ROSC:SOUR EXT"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
conforming
*RST is not influencing this parameter.
[SENSe<1|2>:]ROSCillator[:INTernal]:TUNe 0 to 4095
This command defines the value for the tuning of the internal reference oscillator.
The reference oscillator should be tuned only if an error has been detected in the frequency accuracy
check. After rebooting the instrument, the factory-set reference frequency or the previously saved
reference frequency is restored.
Note:
This command is only available at service level 1.
Example:
"ROSC:TUN 128"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
device-specific
[SENSe<1|2>:]ROSCillator[:INTernal]:TUNe:SAVe
This command saves the new value for the tuning of the internal reference oscillator. The factory-set
value in the EEPROM is overwritten.
Note:
This command is only available at service level 1.
Example:
"ROSC:TUN:SAV"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
–
device-specific
6.131
E-1
SENSe:SWEep Subsystem
R&S FMU
SENSe:SWEep Subsystem
This subsystem controls the sweep parameters. The measurement windows are selected by SENSe1
(screen A) and SENSe2 (screen B).
Command
Parameters
[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:COUNt
0 to 32767
[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:COUNt:CURRent?
[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:POINts
625, 1251, 1999, 2501,5001,10001,20001,30001
[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:TIME
1Zs to 16000s
[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:COUNt 0 to 32767
This command defines the number of sweeps started with single sweep, which are used for
calculating the average or maximum value. In average mode, the value 0 defines a continuous
averaging of measurement data over 10 sweeps.
Example:
'Sets the number of sweeps to 64.
'Switches to single-sweep mode.
'Starts a sweep and waits for its end.
"SWE:COUN 64"
"INIT:CONT OFF"
"INIT;*WAI"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
0
conforming
[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:COUNt:CURRent?
This query command returns the current number of started sweeps. A sweep count value should be
set and the device should be in single sweep mode. This command is a query and therefore has no
*RST value.
Example:
"SWE:COUNt 64"
'sets sweep count to 64
"INIT:CONT OFF"
'switches to single sweep mode
"INIT" 'starts a sweep (without waiting for the sweep end!)
"SWE:COUN:CURR?" 'queries the number of started sweeps
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
conforming
[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:POINts <numeric value>
This command defines the number of measurement points for one sweep run. Allowed numeric
values are 155, 201, 313, 401, 625, 801, 1251, 1601, 1999, 2501, 5001, 10001, 20001, 30001.
Example:
"SENS:SWE:POIN 801"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
625
conforming
6.132
E-1
R&S FMU
SENSe:SWEep Subsystem
[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:TIME
1µs to 16000s
This command defines the sweep time in time domain.
The available range depends on following instrument settings:
Both Domain ON/OFF
Resolution Bandwidth
In frequency domain, it is not possible to set the sweep time (here the acquisition time for I/Q data
capturing). But the current setting can be queried.
Example:
"SWE:TIME 10s"
Characteristics: *RST value
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
5 ms (for time domain)
conforming
6.133
E-1
SENSe:VOLTage Subsystem
R&S FMU
SENSe:VOLTage Subsystem
This subsystem controls the amplitude settings of the baseband input.
Command
Parameters
[SENSe<1|2>]:VOLTage:IQ:RANGe:OFFSet
-200 dB to 200 dB
[SENSe<1|2>:]:VOLTage:IQ:RANGe[:UPPer]
<numeric_value> V
[SENSe<1|2>]:VOLTage:IQ:RANGe:OFFSet -200 dB to 200 dB
This command defines the reference level offset for the baseband input.The command
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SCAL:RLEV:OFFS can also be used.
The numeric suffix <1|2> is irrelevant with this command.
Example:
"VOLT:IQ:RANG:OFFS -20dB"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
'sets the reference level offset for the
' baseband input to –20 dB
0 dB
device-specific
[SENSe<1|2>]:VOLTage:IQ:RANGe[:UPPer] <numeric_value>
This command defines the measurement range of the baseband input. The value range depends on
the input impedance. The measurement range defines the measurable peak voltage (positive and
negative).
Input impedance
Range of values / Volt (5 dB steps)
Low (50
0.0316; 0.0562; 0.1; 0.178 ; 0.316; 0.562; 1; 1.78; 3.16; 5.62
High (1 M
)
or 1 k
)
0.0316; 0.0562; 0.1; 0.178 ; 0.316; 0.562; 1; 1.78
The numeric suffix <1|2> is irrelevant with this command.
Example:
"VOLT:IQ:RANGE 0.1V"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
1V
device-specific
6.134
E-1
R&S FMU
SENSe:WINDow Subsystem
SENSe:WINDow Subsystem
This subsystem controls the evaluation in the FFT Analyzer mode.
Command
Parameters
[SENSe<1|2>:]:WINDow:TYPE
FLATtop | EXPonential | HAMMing | HANNing
| RECTangular | CHEBychev
SENSe<1|2>:WINDow:TYPE FLATtop | EXPonential | HAMMing | HANNing | RECTangular |
CHEBychev
This command selects the type of the window function for the I/Q input data in the spectrum display
(frequency domain).
Parameter:
FLATtop
EXPonential
HAMMing
HANNing
RECTangular
CHEBychev
"Flattop" type
"Gaussian" type
"Hamming" type
"Hann" type
"Rectangular" type
"Chebychev" type
The numeric suffix <1|2> is irrelevant with this command.
Example:
"WIND:TYPE CHEB"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
CHEB
device-specific
6.135
E-1
STATus Subsystem
R&S FMU
STATus Subsystem
The STATus subsystem contains the commands for the status reporting system (see Chapter 5, Status
Reporting System"). *RST does not influence the status registers.
Command
Parameters
STATus:OPERation:CONDition?
STATus:OPERation:ENABle
0 to 65535
STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]
STATus:OPERation:NTRansition
0 to 65535
STATus:OPERation:PTRansition
0 to 65535
STATus:PRESet
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:CONDition?
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:ENABle
0 to 65535
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit[:EVENt]?
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:NTRansition
0 to 65535
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:PTRansition
0 to 65535
STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?
STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle
0 to 65535
STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:CONDition?
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:ENABle
0 to 65535
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit[:EVENt]?
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:NTRansition
0 to 65535
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:PTRansition
0 to 65535
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin:CONDition?
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin:ENABle
0 to 65535
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin[:EVENt]?
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin:NTRansition
0 to 65535
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin:PTRansition
0 to 65535
STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition
0 to 65535
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition?
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:ENABle
0 to 65535
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[:EVENt]?
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:NTRansition
0 to 65535
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:PTRansition
0 to 65535
STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition
0 to 65535
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:CONDition?
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:ENABle
0 to 65535
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC[:EVENt]?
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:NTRansition
0 to 65535
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:PTRansition
0 to 65535
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition?
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:ENABle
0 to 65535
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]?
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:NTRansition
0 to 65535
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:PTRansition
0 to 65535
STATus:QUEue[:NEXT]?
1303.3545.12
6.136
E-1
R&S FMU
STATus Subsystem
STATus:OPERation:CONDition?
This command queries the CONDition section of the STATus:OPERation register. Readout does not
delete the contents of the CONDition section. The value returned reflects the current hardware
status.
Example:
"STAT:OPER:COND?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
conforming
STATus:OPERation:ENABle 0 to 65535
This command sets the bits of the ENABle section of the STATus:OPERation register. The ENABle
register selectively enables the individual events of the associated EVENt section for the summary bit
in the status byte.
Example:
"STAT:OPER:ENAB 65535"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
conforming
STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?
This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus:OPERation register. The
contents of the EVENt section are deleted after readout.
Example:
"STAT:OPER?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
conforming
STATus:OPERation:NTRansition 0 to 65535
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:OPERation register from 1 to 0 for
the transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example:
"STAT:OPER:NTR 65535"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
conforming
STATus:OPERation:PTRansition 0 to 65535
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:OPERation register from 0 to 1 for
the transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example:
"STAT:OPER:PTR 65535"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
–
conforming
6.137
E-1
STATus Subsystem
R&S FMU
STATus:PRESet
This command resets the edge detectors and ENABle parts of all registers to a defined value. All
PTRansition parts are set to FFFFh, i.e. all transitions from 0 to 1 are detected. All NTRansition parts
are set to 0, i.e. a transition from 1 to 0 in a CONDition bit is not detected. The ENABle part of the
STATus:OPERation and STATus:QUEStionable registers are set to 0, i.e. all events in these
registers are not passed on.
Example:
"STAT:PRES"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
conforming
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:CONDition?
This command queries the contents of the CONDition section of the
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register. Readout does not delete the contents of the CONDition
section.
Example:
"STAT:QUES:ACPL:COND?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
device-specific
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:ENABle 0 to 65535
This command sets the bits of the ENABle section of the STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register.
The ENABle register selectively enables the individual events of the associated EVENt section for the
summary bit.
Example:
"STAT:QUES:ACPL:ENAB 65535"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
device-specific
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit[:EVENt]?
This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit
register. Readout deletes the contents of the EVENt section.
Example:
"STAT:QUES:ACPL?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
device-specific
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:NTRansition 0 to 65535
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:QUEStionable: ACPLimit register
from 1 to 0 for the transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example:
"STAT:QUES:ACPL:NTR 65535"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
–
device-specific
6.138
E-1
R&S FMU
STATus Subsystem
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:PTRansition 0 to 65535
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:QUEStionable: ACPLimit register
from 0 to 1 for the transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example:
"STAT:QUES:ACPL:PTR 65535"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
device-specific
STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?
This command queries the CONDition section of the STATus:QUEStionable register. Readout does
not delete the contents of the CONDition section.
Example:
"STAT:QUES:COND?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
conforming
STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle 0 to 65535
This command sets the bits of the ENABle section of the STATus-QUEStionable register. The
ENABle register selectively enables the individual events of the associated EVENt section for the
summary bit in the status byte.
Example:
"STAT:QUES:ENAB 65535"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
conforming
STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?
This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus:QUEStionable register. The
contents of the EVENt section are deleted after the readout.
Example:
"STAT:QUES?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
conforming
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2>:CONDition?
This command queries the contents of the CONDition section of the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit
register.
Readout does not delete the contents of the CONDition section.
Example:
"STAT:QUES:LIM:COND?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
–
device-specific
6.139
E-1
STATus Subsystem
R&S FMU
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2>:ENABle 0 to 65535
This command sets the bits of the ENABle section of the STATus:QUEStionable register. The
ENABle register selectively enables the individual events of the associated EVENt section for the
summary bit.
Example:
"STAT:QUES:ENAB 65535"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
device-specific
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2> [:EVENt]?
This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit
register. Readout deletes the contents of the EVENt section.
Example:
"STAT:QUES?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
device-specific
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2>:NTRansition 0 to 65535
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register from 1
to 0 for the transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example:
"STAT:QUES:NTR 65535"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
–
device-specific
all
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2>:PTRansition 0 to 65535
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register from 0
to 1 for the transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example:
"STAT:QUES:PTR 65535"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
device-specific
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<1|2>:CONDition?
This command queries the contents of the CONDition section of the
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin register. Readout does not delete the contents of the CONDition
section.
Example:
"STAT:QUES:LMAR:COND?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
–
device-specific
6.140
E-1
R&S FMU
STATus Subsystem
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<1|2>:ENABle 0 to 65535
This command sets the bits of the ENABle section of the STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin register.
The ENABle register selectively enables the individual events of the associated EVENt section for the
summary bit.
Example:
"STAT:QUES:LMAR:ENAB 65535"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
device-specific
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<1|2> [:EVENt]?
This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin
register. Readout deletes the contents of the EVENt section.
Example:
"STAT:QUES:LMAR?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
device-specific
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<1|2>:NTRansition 0 to 65535
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin register
from 1 to 0 for the transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example:
"STAT:QUES:LMAR:NTR 65535"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
device-specific
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<1|2>:PTRansition 0 to 65535
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin register
from 0 to 1 for the transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example:
"STAT:QUES:LMAR:PTR 65535"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
device-specific
STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition 0 to 65535
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:OPERation register from 1 to 0 for
the transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example:
"STAT:QUES:NTR 65535"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
conforming
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition?
This command queries the contents of the CONDition section of the STATus:QUEStionable:POWer
register. Readout does not delete the contents of the CONDition section.
Example:
"STAT:QUES:COND?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
–
conforming
6.141
E-1
STATus Subsystem
R&S FMU
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:ENABle 0 to 65535
This command sets the bits of the ENABle section of the STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register.
The ENABle register selectively enables the individual events of the associated EVENt section for the
summary bit.
Example:
"STAT:QUES:ENAB 65535"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
conforming
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[:EVENt]?
This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus:QUEStionable:POWer
register. Readout deletes the contents of the EVENt section.
Example:
"STAT:QUES?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
conforming
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:NTRansition 0 to 65535
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register from
1 to 0 for the transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example:
"STAT:QUES:NTR 65535"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
conforming
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:PTRansition 0 to 65535
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register from
0 to 1 for the transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example:
"STAT:QUES:PTR 65535"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
conforming
STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition 0 to 65535
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:QUEStionable register from 0 to 1
for the transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example:
"STAT:QUES:PTR 65535"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
conforming
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:CONDition?
This command queries the contents of the CONDition section of the STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC
register. Readout does not delete the contents of the CONDition section.
Example:
"STAT:QUES:SYNC:COND?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
–
device-specific
6.142
E-1
R&S FMU
STATus Subsystem
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:ENABle 0 to 65535
This command sets the bits of the ENABle section of the STATus:QUEStionable: SYNC register.
The ENABle register selectively enables the individual events of the associated EVENt section for the
sum bit in the status byte.
Example:
"STAT:QUES:SYNC:ENAB 65535"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
device-specific
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC[:EVENt]?
This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC
register. Readout deletes the contents of the EVENt section.
Example:
"STAT:QUES:SYNC?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
device-specific
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:NTRansition 0 to 65535
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:QUEStionable: SYNC register from
1 to 0 for the transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example:
"STAT:QUES:SYNC:NTR 65535"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
device-specific
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:PTRansition 0 to 65535
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:QUEStionable: SYNC register from
0 to 1 for the transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example:
"STAT:QUES:SYNC:PTR 65535"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
device-specific
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition?
This command queries the contents of the CONDition section of the
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register. Readout does not delete the contents of the CONDition
section.
Example:
"STAT:QUES:FREQ:COND?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
–
device-specific
6.143
E-1
STATus Subsystem
R&S FMU
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:ENABle 0 to 65535
This command sets the bits of the ENABle section of the STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency
register. The ENABle register selectively enables the individual events of the associated EVENt
section for the summary bit.
Example:
"STAT:QUES:FREQ:ENAB 65535"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
device-specific
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]?
This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus:QUEStionable: FREQuency
register.
Example:
"STAT:QUES:FREQ?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
device-specific
Readout deletes the contents of the EVENt section.
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:NTRansition 0 to 65535
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register
from 1 to 0 for the transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example:
"STAT:QUES:FREQ:NTR 65535"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
device-specific
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:PTRansition 0 to 65535
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register
from 0 to 1 for the transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example:
"STAT:QUES:FREQ:PTR 65535"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
–
device-specific
all
STATus:QUEue[:NEXT]?
This command returns the earliest entry to the error queue and deletes it.
Positive error numbers indicate device-specific errors, negative error numbers are error messages
defined by SCPI (cf. Chapter 9). If the error queue is empty, the error number 0, "no error", is
returned. This command is identical with the command SYSTem:ERRor.
Example:
"STAT:QUE?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
–
conforming
6.144
E-1
R&S FMU
SYSTem Subsystem
SYSTem Subsystem
This subsystem contains a series of commands for general functions.
Command
Parameters
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess
0 to 30
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:RTERminator
LFEOI | EOI
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt?
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:NEXT?
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:SELect <1|2>
<printer_name>
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:CONTrol:DTR
IBFull | OFF
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:CONTrol:RTS
IBFull | OFF
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:BAUD
110 | 300 | 600 | 1200 | 2400 | 9600 | 19200
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:BITS
7|8
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:PARity[:TYPE]
EVEN | ODD | NONE
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:PACE
XON | NONE
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:SBITs
1|2
SYSTem:DATE
1980 to 2099, 1 to 12, 1 to 31
SYSTem:DISPlay:FPANel
ON | OFF
SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate
ON | OFF
SYSTem:ERRor?
SYSTem:ERRor:CLEar:ALL
SYSTem:ERRor:LIST?
SYSTem:FIRMware:UPDate
<path>
SYSTem:MSIZe?
MBOard | B100
SYSTem:PASSword[:CENable]
'password'
SYSTem:PRESet
SYSTem:TIME
0 to 23, 0 to 59, 0 to 59
SYSTem:VERSion?
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess 0 to 30
This command changes the IEC/IEEE-bus address of the unit.
Example:
"SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 18"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
- (no influence on this parameter, factory default 20)
conforming
6.145
E-1
SYSTem Subsystem
R&S FMU
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:RTERminator LFEOI | EOI
This command changes the GPIB receive terminator.
In accordance with to the standard the terminator in ASCII is <LF> and/or <EOI>. For binary data
transfers (e.g. trace data) from the control computer to the instrument, the binary code (0AH) used
for <LF> might be included in the binary data block, and therefore should not be interpreted as a
terminator in this particular case. This can be avoided by changing the receive terminator to EOI.
Output of binary data from the instrument to the control computer does not require such a terminator
change.
Example:
"SYST:COMM:GPIB:RTER EOI"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
-- (no influence on this parameter, factory default LFEOI)
device-specific
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt?
This command queries the name of the first printer (in the list of printers) available under Windows NT.
The names of other installed printers can be queried with command SYSTem:COMMunicate:
PRINter:ENUMerate:NEXT?.
If no printer is configured an empty string is output.
Example:
"SYST:COMM:PRIN:ENUM:FIRS?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
NONE
device-specific
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:NEXT?
This command queries the name of the next printer installed under Windows NT.
The command SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt?
should be sent previously to return to the beginning of the printer list and query the name of the first
printer.
The names of other printers can then be queried with NEXT?. After all available printer names have
been output, an empty string enclosed by quotation marks (") is output for the next query. Further
queries are answered by a Query Error.
Example:
"SYST:COMM:PRIN:ENUM:NEXT?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
NONE
device-specific
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:SELect <1|2> <printer_name>
This command selects one of the printers configured under Windows NT including the associated
output destination.
The specified printer name must be a string as returned by the commands
SYSTem:COMMunicate :PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt? or
SYSTem:COMMunicate :PRINter:ENUMerate:NEXT?
Note:
Command HCOPy:DESTination is used to select an output medium other than the
default one.
Example:
"SYST:COMM:PRIN:SEL 'LASER on LPT1'"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
NONE
device-specific
6.146
E-1
R&S FMU
SYSTem Subsystem
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:CONTrol:DTR IBFull | OFF
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:CONTrol:RTS IBFull | OFF
These commands switch the hardware handshake procedure for the serial interface off (OFF) or on
(IBFull).
The two commands are equivalent.
Examples:
"SYST:COMM:SER:CONT:DTR OFF"
"SYST:COMM:SER:CONT:RTS IBF"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
-- (no influence on this parameter, factory default OFF)
conforming
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:BAUD 110 | 300 | 600 | 1200 | 2400 | 9600 | 19200
This command sets the transmission speed for the serial interface (COM).
Example:
"SYST:COMM:SER:BAUD 2400"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
-- (no influence on this parameter, factory default 9600)
conforming
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:BITS 7 | 8
This command defines the number of data bits per data word for the serial interface (COM).
Example:
"SYST:COMM:SER:BITS 7"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
-- (no influence on this parameter, factory default 8)
conforming
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:PACE XON | NONE
This command switches on or off the software handshake for the serial interface.
Example:
"SYST:COMM:SER:PACE XON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
-- (no influence on this parameter, factory default NONE)
conforming
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:PARity[:TYPE] EVEN | ODD | NONE
This command defines the parity check for the serial interface (COM).
Possible values are:
EVEN even parity
ODD odd parity
NONE no parity check.
Example:
"SYST:COMM:SER:PAR EVEN"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
-- (no influence on this parameter, factory default NONE)
conforming
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:SBITs
1|2
This command defines the number of stop bits per data word for the serial interface (COM).
Example:
"SYST:COMM:SER:SBITs 2"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
-- (no influence on this parameter, factory default 1)
conforming
6.147
E-1
SYSTem Subsystem
SYSTem:DATE
R&S FMU
1980 to 2099, 1 to 12, 1 to 31
This command is used to enter the date for the internal calendar.
The sequence of entry is year, month, day.
Example:
" SYST:DATE 2000,6,1"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
conforming
SYSTem:DISPlay:FPANel ON | OFF
This command activates or deactivates the display of the front panel keys on the screen.
With the display activated, the instrument can be operated on the screen using the mouse by
pressing the corresponding buttons. This may be useful if the instrument is operated in a detached
station by means of a remote program such as PCANYWHERE.
Notes:
With the display of the front panel keys activated, the screen resolution of the unit is set to
1024x768. Thus, only a section of the whole screen is visible on the internal LCD display,
which will be moved by mouse moves.
For a full display of the user interface, an external monitor has to be connected to the rear
panel.
When the front panel display is deactivated, the original screen resolution is restored.
Example:
"SYST:DISP:FPAN ON"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate
OFF
device-specific
ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the update of all display elements during remote control.
Note:
The best performance is obtained when the display output is switched off during remote
control.
Example:
" SYST:DISP:UPD ON
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
OFF
device specific
SYSTem:ERRor?
This command queries the earliest entry in the error queue, and deletes it after the readout.
Positive error numbers indicate device-specific errors, negative error numbers are error messages
defined by SCPI (cf. Chapter 9). If the error queue is empty, the error number 0, "no error", is
returned. This command is identical with the command STATus:QUEue:NEXT?. This command is a
query and therefore has no *RST value.
Example:
"SYST:ERR?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
conforming
SYSTem:ERRor:CLEar:ALL
This command deletes all entries in the table SYSTEM MESSAGES.
This command is an event and therefore has no query and no *RST value.
Example:
"SYST:ERR:CLE:ALL?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
–
device specific
6.148
E-1
R&S FMU
SYSTem Subsystem
SYSTem:ERRor:LIST?
This command reads all system messages and returns a list of comma separated strings. Each
string corresponds to an entry in the table SYSTEM MESSAGES.
If the error list is empty, an empty string "" will be returned.
This command is a query and therefore has no *RST value.
Example:
"SYST:ERR:LIST?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
device specific
SYSTem:FIRMware:UPDate <path>
This command starts a firmware update using the data set in the selected directory. Beforehand, the
update files have to be stored in the following subdirectories using command MMEM:DATA:
Directory
Contents
DISK1
disc1.bin
DISK2
data3.cab
DISK3
data4.cab
DISK4
.
.
.
data5.cab
.
.
.
DISK11
data12.cab
Example:
"SYST:FIRM:UPD 'D:\USER\FWUPDATE'"
'Starts the firmware update
'from directory
'D:\USER\FWUPDATE using the '
'files of ubdirectories DISK1
'to DISK11
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
device specific
This command is an 'event' and therefore has no query and no *RST value.
SYSTem:MSIZe? MBOard
This command returns the memory size installed on related boards. This information is listed in table
SETUP - SYSTEM INFO - STATISTICS.
Parameter:
MBOard Mainboard
Example:
"SYST:MSIZ? MBO"
Characteristics: *RST-Wert:
SCPI:
'reads the memory size of the CPU-Board
device-specific
SYSTem:PASSword[:CENable] 'password'
This command enables access to the service functions by means of the password.
Example:
"SYST:PASS 'XXXX'"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
conforming
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
1303.3545.12
6.149
E-1
SYSTem Subsystem
R&S FMU
SYSTem:PRESet
This command initiates an instrument reset.
The effect of this command corresponds to that of the PRESET key with manual control or to the
*RST command.
Example:
"SYST:PRES"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
conforming
SYSTem:TIME 0 to 23, 0 to 59, 0 to 59
This command sets the internal clock. The sequence of entry is hour, minute, second.
Example:
"SYST:TIME 12,30,30"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
conforming
SYSTem:VERSion?
This command queries the number of the SCPI version, which is relevant for the instrument.
Example:
"SYST:VERS?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
–
conforming
This command is a query and therefore has no *RST value.
1303.3545.12
6.150
E-1
R&S FMU
General Trace Commands
TRACe Subsystem
The TRACe subsystem controls access to the instrument's internal trace memory.
General Trace Commands
Command
Parameters
TRACe<1|2>[:DATA]
TRACE1| TRACE2| TRACE3, <block> | <numeric_value>
TRACe<1|2>:COPY
TRACE1| TRACE2| TRACE3
TRACe<1|2>[:DATA] TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3, <block> | <numeric_value>
This command transfers trace data from the control computer to the instrument, the query reads
trace data out of the instrument. The associated measurement window is selected with the numeric
suffix of TRACe<1|2>.
Example:
"TRAC TRACE1,"+A$
"TRAC? TRACE1"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
(A$: data list in the current format)
conforming
Return values:
The returned values are scaled in the currently selected unit of the measurement window
(magnitude: "UNIT:POW"; Phase: CALC:UNIT:ANGL").
ASCII format (FORMat ASCII):
In ASCII format, a list of values separated by commas is returned (Comma Separated Values =
CSV).
The default number of measurement points is 625 and can be set by SENS:SWE:POIN.
Binary format (FORMat REAL,32):
If the transmission takes place using the binary format (REAL,32), the data are transferred in block
format (Definite Length Block Data in accordance with IEEE 488.2). They are arranged in
succeeding lists of 32 bit IEEE 754 floating-point numbers. General structure of return string:
#42500<meas value 1><meas value value2> to <meas value 625>
with
#4
digits of the subsequent number of data bytes (4 in the example)
2500
Number of subsequent data bytes (2500 in the example))
<meas value x>
4 byte floating point measurement values
Saving and recalling:
Saving and recalling trace data together with the device settings to/from the device-internal hard disk
or to/from a floppy is controlled via the commands "MMEMory:STORe:STATe" and
"MMEMory:LOAD:STATe" respectively. Trace data are selected with
"MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL" or "MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe". Trace data in
ASCII format (ASCII FILE EXPORT) are exported with the command "MMEM:STORe:TRACe".
1303.3545.12
6.151
E-1
General Trace Commands
R&S FMU
Transfer format:
The trace data are transferred in the current format (corresponding to the command FORMat
ASCii|REAL). The device-internal trace memory is addressed using the trace names 'TRACE1' to
'TRACE3'.
The transfer of trace data from the control computer to the instrument takes place by indicating the
trace name and then the data to be transferred. In ASCII format, these data are values separated by
commas. If the transfer takes place using the format real (REAL,32), the data are transferred in block
format.
The parameter of the query is the trace name TRACE1 to TRACE3, it indicates which trace memory
will be read out.
The command "MMEMory:STORe:STATe" or "MMEMory:LOAD:STATe" controls the storage or
loading of measured data, including the device settings, on or from the internal hard disk or floppy
disk. The trace data is selected via "MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL" or
"MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe". The trace data in ASCII format (ASCII FILE EXPORT) is
exported via the "MMEM:STORe:TRACe" command.
TRACe<1|2>:COPY TRACE1| TRACE2| TRACE3|
This command copies data from one trace to another. The second operand describes the source,
the first operand the destination of the data to be copied.The associated measurement window is
selected with the numeric suffix of TRACe<1|2>.
Example:
"TRAC:COPY TRACE2,TRACE1"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
' copies contents of trace 1 to trace 2
conforming
6.152
E-1
R&S FMU
TRACe:IQ Subsystem
TRACe:IQ Subsystem
The commands of this subsystem are used for collection of measured I/Q data. A special memory is
therefore available in the instrument with 16M words for complex I/Q data. The measurement is always
performed in the time domain .The mixing frequency into the complex baseband is configured by parameter
center frequency (SENS:FREQ:CENT). The number of samples to be collected can be set. The sampling rate
can be set in the range from 400 Hz to 100 MHz. Prior to being stored in memory or output via GPIB, the
measured data is corrected by an equalizer filter in terms of frequency response.
Fig. 6-1
Functional block diagram I/Q data capturing
The baseband signal is sampled by a 14 bit A/D converter with 81.6 MHz. The analog anti-aliasing filter
is optimized for this fid sampling rate. The sampling rate is not changed at the A/D converter but by
means of digital signal processing using a resampler and subsequent integer decimation.
The signal is first digitally down converted into the complex baseband, low pass filtered and then
decimated. There is thus no aliasing despite a lower output sample rate.
If the output sampling rate is set too low (Nyquist condition), the bandwidth of the signal is limited; but
this does not result in aliasing (folding back of high frequencies to the useful band).
The bandwidths available for the given sampling rate are specified in the following table. Reference is
made to the useful bandwidth (flat response of the digital filters).
Table 6-1
Available useful bandwiths (0.05 dB)
Sampling rate
from
Equivalent lowpass filter bandwidth
to
(useful bandwidth)
100.0 MHz
>81.6 MHz
0.343 sampling rate
but
n 30 MHz for Lowpass ON *)
81.6 MHz
>40.8 MHz
0.441 sampling rate
but
n 30 MHz for Lowpass ON *)
40.8 MHz
>20.4 MHz
0.34 sampling rate
20.4 MHz
400 Hz
0.4 sampling rate
*) SENS:IQ:LPAS ON | OFF)
1303.3545.12
6.153
E-1
TRACe:IQ Subsystem
R&S FMU
The bandwidth listed in table Table 6-1 applies to I and Q, and is therefore the equivalent lowpass filter
bandwidth.
The complex signal formed by I and Q is a bandpass signal having a center frequency of zero.
The bandpass filter bandwidth is twice the size of the lowpass filter bandwidth shown in the table.
The maximum bandpass filter bandwidth is therefore 72 MHz.
An analog anti-aliasing filter with a cutoff frequency of 36 MHz is active by default and can be switched
off (command SENS:IQ:LPAS ON | OFF).
• The filter prevents frequencies above the usable frequency range (>36 MHz) from
being mid into the usable frequency range (DC to 36 MHz) as a result of sampling
(sampling frequency 81.6 MHz). It should therefore always be switched on. It should
bear in mind that, for example, harmonics and other spurious emissions of the device
under test might be in the disallowed frequency range.
Note:
• Amplitude response and phase response (or group delay) of the filter are
compensated for up to 30 MHz.
• With the filter switched off, amplitude response and phase response (or group delay)
of the filter are compensated for up to 36 MHz. This setting is only recommended if
the higher bandwidth is required. In this case, it is important to ensure that the
spectrum of the device under test has adequately decayed >45.6 MHz since these
spectral components appear in the useful band <= 36 MHz.
When data is extracted, the samples (I/Q data) are written with the selected sampling rate to a
16 Mword memory (16 Mword for both I and Q). The number of measurement values (samples) to be
acquired is user-selectable.
Digital Down Converter for Low Carrier Frequency Using Baseband Inputs
The R&S FMU is capable of mixing signals from low carrier frequencies (e.g. low IF signals) into the
complex baseband. The maximum allowed center frequency range is -35 MHz to +35 MHz. Both realvalued and complex-valued signals are supported.
The baseband signal is sampled, mid from desired center frequency into the complex baseband and
resampled to the requested output sampling rate.
Limitation of center frequency range depending on signal bandwidth for real-valued signals:
Center frequency and sampling rate are adjustable independently, though there are some restrictions to
observe:
The lower limit of the center frequency depends on the sideband suppression that is needed for a
particular measurement application. To avoid overlapping of the two sidebands of a real-valued signal,
the theoretical lower limit of the intermediate frequency is half the signal bandwidth.
Fig. 6-2
Dependency between signal bandwidth and carrier frequency
The carrier frequency fc in Fig. 6-2 - a) is lower than half the signal bandwidth, resulting in sideband
overlap. The carrier frequency fc in Fig. 6-2 - b) is high enough to separate the two sidebands.
In practice, the intermediate frequency must be increased for lower sideband crosstalk (limited filter
edge steepness). All spectral components of the opposite sideband must be above the decimation filter
stop band frequency. Thus, the center frequency must be higher than 0.5 x (stop band frequency + 0.5
1303.3545.12
6.154
E-1
R&S FMU
TRACe:IQ Subsystem
x signal bandwidth). The stop band frequency depends on the desired output sampling rate and is
specified in the following table:
Table 6-2
Stop band frequency of equivalent lowpass filter
Sampling rate
from
to
Stop band frequency of
equivalent lowpass filter
100 MHz
>81.6 MHz
0.54 sampling rate
81.6 MHz
>40.8 MHz
0.55 sampling rate
40.8 MHz
>20.4 MHz
0.42 sampling rate
20.4 MHz
400 Hz
0.53 sampling rate
Real-valued signals shifted to complex baseband
Fig. 6-3
Real-valued signals shifted to complex baseband
In the signal shown in Fig. 6-3 - a) an unwanted part of the opposite sideband remains after decimation
filtering, while figure Fig. 6-3 - b) depicts a decimation filtered signal free from sideband crosstalk.
Signal bandwidth dependency on the maximum baseband input bandwidth
The upper limit of the carrier frequency is specified by the available baseband input bandwidth. The
entire signal spectrum must fit into the baseband input bandwidth, so the carrier frequency may not
exceed
± 0.5 x (baseband input bandwidth – signal bandwidth )
Fig. 6-4
Signal bandwidth dependency on the maximum baseband input bandwidth
In Fig. 6-4 - a) signal spectrum is cut, because it exceeds the baseband input bandwidth. Fig. 6-4 - b)
shows a signal fitting entirely into the baseband input bandwidth.
Signal bandwidth limitation for real-valued input signals:
A theoretical upper bandwidth limit for an input signal on the lowest possible intermediate frequency
(= 0.5 x signal bandwidth) is defined by the half of the baseband input.
1303.3545.12
6.155
E-1
TRACe:IQ Subsystem
R&S FMU
Trigger and Measurement
With the trigger setting IMMEDIATE (corresponds to FREE RUN), sample acquisition begins directly
following the request. The number of test points to be acquired before the trigger instant has to be set to 0.
The trigger setting EXTERNAL supports synchronization of sample acquisition with an external trigger
signal. The number of test points to be acquired before the trigger instant can be set.
With the trigger setting IFPOWER (corresponds to I/Q LEVEL), sample acquisition begins as soon as
the magnitude of the I/Q signal exceeds or falls below a selectable threshold. The number of test points
to be acquired before the trigger instant can be set.
The measurement results are output in list form. You can use the FORMAT command to choose
between binary output (32 bit IEEE 754 floating-point values) and output in ASCII format and to choose
between block and I/Q pair mode.
The commands of this subsystem can be used in two ways:
1. Measurement and result query with one command:
This method causes the least delay between measurement and output of the result data, but it
requires the control computer to wait actively for the response data.
2. Setting up the instrument, start of the measurement via "INIT" and query of the result list at the end
of the measurement:
With this method the control computer can be used for other activities during the measurement. In
this case the additional time needed for synchronization via service request must be taken into
account.
Command
Parameters
TRACe<1|2>:IQ:DATA?
TRACe<1|2>:IQ:DATA:FORMat
COMPatible | IQBLock | IQPair
TRACe<1|2>:IQ:DATA:MEMory?
!<offset sample>,<number of samples>
TRACe<1|2>:IQ:SET
< reserved1>, < reserved2>,<sampling rate>,<trigger
source>,<trigger slope>,<pretrigger samples>,<# of samples>
TRACe<1|2>:IQ:SRATe
400 Hz to 100 MHz
TRACe<1|2>:IQ[:STATe]
ON | OFF
1303.3545.12
6.156
E-1
R&S FMU
TRACe:IQ Subsystem
TRACe<1|2>:IQ:DATA?
This command starts a measurement with the settings defined via TRACe:IQ:SET and returns the
list of measurement results immediately after they are corrected in terms of frequency response. The
number of measurement results depends on the settings defined with TRACe:IQ:SET, the output
format depends on the settings of the FORMat – subsystem.
Note:
The command requires that all response data are read out completely before the
instrument accepts further commands.
Example:
"TRAC:IQ:STAT ON" 'Enables acquisition of I/Q data
"TRAC:IQ:SET NORM,3E6,32MHz,EXT,POS,0,4096"
'Measurement configuration:
'NORM: reserved
'3E6: reserved
'Sampling Rate:32 MHz
'Trigger Source:External
'Trigger Slope:Positive
'Pretrigger Samples:0
'# of Samples:4096
"FORMat REAL,32"
'Selects format of response data
"TRAC:IQ:DATA:FORM IQP"
'Select result as array of I/Q pairs
"TRAC:IQ:DATA?"
'Starts measurement and reads results
Return values:
The result values are scaled linear in unit Volt and correspond to the voltage at the baseband input of
the instrument.
Note:
The format of data (all I data followed by all Q data or I/Q pairs is selectable by the
TRACE:IQ:DATA:FORMAT command.
With >512 k 524288 samples, the data is transmitted in logical blocks of 512k values if
the default format is used. See below.
ASCII Format (FORMat ASCII):
In this case the command returns a comma separated list of the measured voltage values in floating
point format (Comma Separated Values = CSV). The number of values returned is 2 * number of
samples. The order of values ( I1, I2,….,In,Q1,Q2,…Qn or I1,Q1,I2Q2,…In,Qn) is controlled by
TRACe:IQ:DATA:FORMat.
Binary Format (FORMat REAL,32) with TRAC:IQ:DATA:FORM IQBLock
In this case the command returns binary data (Definite Length Block Data n accordance with IEEE
488.2), with the lists of I- and Q-data being arranged one after the other in 32 bit IEEE 754 floating
point data. The scheme of the response string is as follows:
#44096<I-value1><I-value2> to <I-value512><Q-value1><Q-value2> to <Q-value512>
with
#4
digits of the subsequent number of data bytes (4 in the example)
4096
number of subsequent data bytes (# of DataBytes, 4096 in the example)
<I-value x>
4-Byte-Floating Point I-value; max. 512k
<Q-value y>
4-Byte-Floating Point Q-value; max. 512k
The number of I- and Q-data can be calculated as follows:
# of I
Data = # of Q
1303.3545.12
Data =
# of DataBytes
8
6.157
E-1
TRACe:IQ Subsystem
R&S FMU
The offset of Q-data in the output buffer can be calculated as follows:
Q Data Offset =
(# of DataBytes)
+ LengthIndicatorDigits
2
with LengthIndicatorDigits being the number of digits of the length indicator including the '#'. In the
example above (#44096 to ) this results in a value of 6 for LengthIndicatorDigits and the offset for
the Q-data will result in 2048 + 6 = 2054.
Binary Format (FORMat REAL,32) with TRAC:IQ:DATA:FORM IQPair
In this case the command returns binary data (Definite Length Block Data n accordance with IEEE
488.2), with the lists of I- and Q-data being arranged one after the other in 32 bit IEEE 754 floating
point data. The scheme of the response string is as follows:
#44096<I-value1><Q-value1><I-value2><Q-value2> to <I-value512><Q-value512>
with
#4
digits of the subsequent number of data bytes (4 in the example)
4096
number of subsequent data bytes (# of DataBytes, 4096 in the example)
<I-value x>
4-byte-Floating point I-value
<Q-value x>
4-byte-Floating point Q-value
The number of I- and Q-data pairs can be calculated as follows:
# of I / Q Pairs =
# of DataBytes
8
Blockwise transmission with data volumes exceeding 512k words:
With > 512 k 524288 samples, the data is transmitted in logical blocks of 512k values. All
transmitted blocks, except the block last transmitted, have a data length of exactly 512k words.
The following example shows the data structure for 1058816 I data samples and 1058816 Q data the
samples. Since the block length is limited to 512k, 3 blocks are required for data transmission:
512k
512k
512k
512k
10k
10k
(=524288) Samples of I data of Block 1
(=524288) Samples of Q data of Block 1
(=524288) Samples of I data of Block 2
(=524288) Samples of Q data of Block 2
(=10240) Samples of I data of Block 3
(=10240) Samples of Q data of Block 3
I
512 k samples of I data
Q
512 k samples of Q data
I
512 k samples I data
Q
512 k samples of Q data
I
Q
10 k samples of I data
10 k samples of Q data
Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Block transfer structure for 1034k samples = 1058816 samples
Characteristics:
*RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
--
Note:
Using the command with the *RST values for command
TRAC:IQ:SET the following minimum buffer sizes for
the response data are recommended:
ASCII format:10 kBytes
Binary format:2 kBytes
device specific
6.158
E-1
R&S FMU
TRACe:IQ Subsystem
TRACe<1|2>:IQ:DATA:FORMat
COMPatible | IQBLock | IQPair
This command sets the data output formatting (using the TRAC:IQ:DATA? command):
COMPatible
512k I data and 512k Q data is alternately transferred
IQBLock
First, all I and then all Q data is transferred
Returned values:
I1, I2, …In, Q1, Q2, Qn
IQPair
I/Q data is transferred in pairs
Returned values:
I1, Q1, I2,Q2, …In, Qn
Example:
"TRAC:IQ:DATA:FORM IQP"
Characteristics:
*RST value:
SCPI:
COMPatible
device-specific
TRACe<1|2>:IQ:DATA:MEMory? <offset samples>,<# of samples>
This command permits the readout of previously acquired (and frequency response corrected) I/Q
data from the memory, with indication of the offset related to the start of measurement and with
indication of the number of measurement values. Therefore a previously acquired data set can be
read out in smaller portions. The maximum amount of available data depends on the settings of
command TRACe:IQ:SET, the output format on the settings in the FORMat – subsystem.
<offset samples> Offset of the values to be output, referenced to the start of the sampled data.
Value range: 0 ... <# of samples> - 1,
where <# of samples> is the value specified with the
TRACe:IQ:SET command
<# of samples>
Value range: 1 ... <# of samples> - <offset samples>
where <# of samples> is the value specified with the TRACe:IQ:SET command.
Examples:
"TRAC:IQ:STAT ON"
'activates the I/Q data sampling
"TRAC:IQ:SET NORM,3E6,32MHz,EXT,POS,100,4096"
'configures the measurement:
'NORM: reserved
3E6: reserved
'Sampling Rate:32 MHz
'Trigger Source:External
'Trigger Slope:Positive
'Pretrigger Samples:100
'# of Samples:4096
"INIT;*WAI"
'starts the measurement and waits for
'its end
"FORMat REAL,32"
'specifies the format of the response
'data
''Reading the results:
"TRAC:IQ:DATA:MEM? 0,2048"
'reads in 2048 I/Q values starting with
'the beginning of the sampling
"TRAC:IQ:DATA:MEM? 2048,1024" 'reads in 2048 I/Q values starting with
'the beginning of the sampling
"TRAC:IQ:DATA:MEM? 100,512"
'reads in 512 I/Q values starting with
'the trigger time (<Pretrigger Samples>
'was 100))
Return values:
Irrespective of the output format selected, the data is scaled linearly with 'V' as
the unit and corresponds to the voltage at the baseband input of the device.
The return buffer is similarly configured to the return buffer with the
TRACe:IQ:DATA? command where all I data has the value 0.
Characteristics:
*RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
-device-specific
6.159
E-1
TRACe:IQ Subsystem
TRACe<1|2>:IQ:SET
R&S FMU
<reserved1>,<reserved2>,<sampling rate>,<trigger source>,<trigger slope>,
<pretrigger samples>,<# of samples>
This command defines the settings of the analyzer hardware for the measurement of I/Q data.
This allows setting the bandwidth of the analog filters in front of the A/D converter as well as setting
the sampling rate, trigger conditions and the record length.
Note:
If this command is omitted, the current analyzer settings will be used for the corresponding
parameters.
<reserved1>:
NORM
reserved, the value NORM has to be used for reasons of
compatibillity reasons to other instruments..
<reserved2>:
3E6
reserved for compatibility to other instruments.
<sampling rate>:
Sampling rate for the data acquisition.
Value range:
Value range:
400 Hz to 100 MHz
<trigger mode>:
Selection of the trigger source used for the measurement.
Values:
IMMediate | EXTernal | IFPower
After selecting IFPower, the trigger threshold can be set with command
TRIG:LEV:IFP.
<trigger slope>:
Used trigger slope.
Values:
POSitive (currently the only value supported)
<pretrigger samples>:
Number of measurement values to be recorded before the trigger point.
Range:
-16744447
(= -(224-1-512k)) to 65023 (= 64*1024 – 512 - 1)
Note: Negative values correspond to a trigger delay.For
<trigger mode> = IMMediate the value must be 0.
Number of measurement values to record.
Value range:
1 to 16776704 (=16*1024*1024 - 512)
<# of samples>:
Examples:
'
'
Characteristics:
"TRAC:IQ:SET NORM,3E6,32MHz,EXT,POS,0,2048"
'Reads 2048 I/Q-values starting at the 'trigger point.
NORM (reserved)
3E6 (reserved)
'Sampling Rate:32 MHz
'Trigger:External
'Slope:Positive
"TRAC:IQ:SET NORM,3E6,4MHz,EXT,POS,1024,512"
'Reads 512 I/Q-values from 1024 'measurement
points before the 'trigger point.
'NORM (reserved)
'3E6 (reserved)
'Sampling Rate:4 MHz
'Trigger:External
'Slope:Positive
*RST values:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
NORM,3E6,32MHz,IMM,POS,0,128
Note: For using these default settings with command
TRAC:IQ:DATA? the following minimum buffer
sizes for
the response data are recommended:
ASCII format:10 kBytes
Binary format:2 kBytes
device specific
6.160
E-1
R&S FMU
TRACe:IQ Subsystem
TRACe<1|2>:IQ:SRATe
400 Hz to 100 MHz
This command sets the sampling rate for the I/Q data acquisition. Thus the sampling rate can be
modified without affecting the other settings.
Example:
TRAC:IQ:SRAT 4MHZ
Characteristics: *RST value:
32 MHz
SCPI:
device specific
TRACe<1|2>:IQ[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches the I/Q data acquisition on or off.
Note:
The I/Q data acquisition is not compatible with other measurement functions. Therefore all
other measurement functions will be switched off as soon as the I/Q measurement function
is switched on. Additionally a trace display is not possible in this operating mode. Therefore
all traces are set to "BLANK". Finally split screen operation will automatically be stopped.
Example:
TRAC:IQ ON
'Switches on I/Q data acquisition
Characteristics:
*RST value:
SCPI:
OFF
device specific
1303.3545.12
6.161
E-1
TRIGger Subsystem
R&S FMU
TRIGger Subsystem
The TRIGger subsystem is used to synchronize instrument actions with events. It is thus possible to control
and synchronize the start of a sweep. An external trigger signal can be applied to the connector at the rear
panel of the instrument. A distinction is made between TRIGger1 (screen A) and TRIGger2 (screen B).
Command
Parameters
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff
-100 ms to 50 s
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:LEVel[:EXTernal]
0.5 to +3.5V
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IFPower
0.001V to 7.948 V
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IONLy
1.41 to +1.41 V
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:QONLy
1.41 to +1.41 V
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SLOPe
POSitive | NEGative
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SOURce
MMediate | EXTernal | IFPower | IONLy | QONLy
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff -100ms to 50s
This command defines the length of the trigger delay.
Triggering is delayed (entry > 0) or advanced (entry < 0) by the entered time relative to the trigger
signal. The time can be entered in the value range –100 ms to 50 s (default: 0 s).
Example:
"TRIG:HOLD 500us"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
0s
conforming
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:LEVel[:EXTernal] 0.5 to +3.5V
This command sets the level of the external trigger source.
Example:
"TRIG:LEV 2V"
Characteristics: *RST-Wert:
SCPI:
1.4 V
gdevice-specific
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IFPower 1 mV...7.948 V
This command sets the level of the I/Q level trigger source. The upper limit is dependent on current
reference level and selected input impedance.
Example:
"TRIG:LEV:IFP 0.1V"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
0.5 V
device-specific
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IONLy -7.9242 to +7.9242V
This command sets the level of the I level trigger source.
Example:
"TRIG:LEV:IONL 0.1V"
Characteristics: *RST-Wert:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
0V
gdevice-specific
6.162
E-1
R&S FMU
TRIGger Subsystem
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:QONLy -7.9242 to +7.9242V
This command sets the level of the Q level trigger source.
Example:
"TRIG:LEV:IONL 0.1V"
Characteristics: *RST-Wert:
SCPI:
0V
gdevice-specific
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SLOPe POSitive | NEGative
This command selects the slope of the trigger signal. The selected trigger slope applies to all trigger
signal sources .
Example:
"TRIG:SLOP NEG"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
POSitive
conforming
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SOURce IMMediate | EXTernal | IFPower | IONLy | QONLy
This command selects the trigger source for the start of a sweep.
Parameter:
IMMediate = automatic triggering the next measurement at the end of the
previous one. The value IMMediate corresponds to the FREE
RUN setting.
EXTernal = the next measurement is triggered by the signal at the external
trigger input.
IFPower = the next measurement is triggered by the magnitude of the I/Q
signal. Sample acquisition starts when the value exceeds (positive
polarity) or drops below (negative polarity) the selected
threshold.
IONLy =
QONLy =
Example:
"TRIG:SOUR EXT"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
the next measurement is triggerd by the magnitude of the I signal
the next measurement is triggerd by the magnitude of the Q signal
'Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger
'signal
IMMediate
conforming
6.163
E-1
UNIT Subsystem
R&S FMU
UNIT Subsystem
The UNIT subsystem is used to switch the basic unit of setting parameters. A distinction is made
between UNIT1 (screen A) and UNIT2 (screen B).
Command
Parameters
UNIT<1|2>:POWer
DBM | DBPW | WATT | DBUV | DBMV | VOLT | DBUA | AMP | V | A | W
UNIT<1|2>:POWer DBM | DBPW | WATT | DBUV | DBMV | VOLT | DBUA | AMPere | V | A | W
This command selects the default unit for the selected measurement window.
Example:
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
1303.3545.12
'Sets the power unit for screen A to dBm.
"UNIT:POW DBUV"
DBM
conforming
6.164
E-1
R&S FMU
Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment
Table of Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment
Hotkeys
FFT
EXIT FFT
PRESET FFT
INSTrument[:SELect] FANalyzer
INSTrument:NSELect 22
INSTrument[:SELect] <other>
INSTrument:NSELect <other>
[SENSe:]FFT:PRESet
FFT HOME
SCREEN A/B
FULL SCREEN:
Selection of the active window:
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:SELect
The window valid for the setting is selected by the numeric.
suffix in the command, eg SENSe<1|2>
SPLIT SCREEN: The two measurement windows are active.
The window valid for the setting is selected by the numeric
suffix in the command, eg SENSe<1|2>
1303.3545.12
6.165
E-1
R&S FMU
Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment
Hotkey FFT HOME
FFT HOME
FREQUENCY
DOMAIN
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN >0
MAGNITUDE
CALCulate:FORMat MAGNitude
MAGNITUDE
PHASE
CALCulate:FORMat MPHase
REAL
IMAG
CALCulate:FORMat RIMag
WINDOW
FUNCTION
FLATTOP
[SENSe:]WINDow[:TYPE] FLATtop
GAUSSIAN
[SENSe:]WINDow[:TYPE] EXPonential
RECT
ANGULAR
[SENSe:]WINDow[:TYPE] RECTangular
HAMMING
[SENSe:]WINDow[:TYPE] HAMMing
HANN
[SENSe:]WINDow[:TYPE] HANNing
CHEBYSHEV
TIME
DOMAIN
[SENSe:]WINDow[:TYPE] CHEBychev
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN 0
MAGNITUDE
VOLTAGE
CAPTURE
BOTH DOM
CALCulate:FORMat MAGNitude
CALCulate:FORMat VOLTage
[SENSe:]FFT:CAPTure ON|OFF
SIGNAL
SOURCE
IQ
PATH(I+J*Q)
I+J*Q
I ONLY
INPut:IQ:TYPE I
Q ONLY
INPut:IQ:TYPE Q
I/Q INPUT
50=
1M=
1303.3545.12
INPut:IQ:TYPE IQ
INPut:IQ:IMPedance LOW|HIGH
BALANCED
ON
OFF
INPut:IQ:BALanced[:STATe] ON|OFF
LOW PASS
36 MHz
[SENSe:]IQ:LPASs[:STATe] ON|OFF
DITHER
ON
OFF
[SENSe:]IQ:DITHer[:STATe] ON|OFF
6.166
E-1
R&S FMU
Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment
FREQ Key
FREQ
CENTER
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer <num_value>
CFSREPSIZE
0.1 * SPAN
0.5 * SPAN
X * SPAN
0.1 * RBW
0.5 * RBW
X * RBW
MANUAL
START
STOP
FREQUENCY
OFFSET
1303.3545.12
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK SPAN;
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK SPAN;
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK SPAN;
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK RBW;
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor
10PCT
50PCT
<num_value>
10PCT
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK RBW;
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor 50PCT
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK RBW;
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor <num_value>
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP <num_value>
[SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt <num_value>
[SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP <num_value>
[SENSe:]FREQuency:OFFSet <num_value>
6.167
E-1
R&S FMU
Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment
SPAN Key
SPAN
SPAN
MANUAL
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN <num_value>
FULL
SPAN
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN:FULL
ZERO
SPAN
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN 0HZ
or
[SENSe:]FREQuency:MODE CW | FIXed
LAST
SPAN
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
1303.3545.12
6.168
E-1
R&S FMU
Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment
AMPT Key
AMPT
REF
LEVEL
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...3>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel
<num_value>
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...3>:Y:SPACing LOGarithmic;
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...3>:Y[:SCALe] 100 dB
RANGE
LOG 100 dB
RANGE
LOG MANUAL
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...3>:Y:SPACing
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...3>:Y[:SCALe]
RANGE
LINEAR
LOGarithmic;
<num_value>
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...3>:Y:SPACing
LINear
RANGE
LINEAR %
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...3>:Y:SPACing
LINear %
RANGE
LINEAR dB
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...3>:Y:SPACing
LINear dB
Y-AXIS
/DIV
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACE<1 to 3>:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision
<num_value>
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACE<1 to 3>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue<num_value>
Y-AXIS
REF VALUE
Y-AXIS
REF POS
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 3>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition<num_value>
UNIT
dBm
CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:POWer
DBM
dBmV
CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:POWer DBMV
dBµV
CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:POWer DBUV
dBµA
CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:POWer DBUA
dBpW
CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:POWer DBPW
VOLT
CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:POWer VOLT
CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:POWer AMPere
AMPERE
CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:POWer
WATT
REF LEVEL
POSITION
WATT
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...3>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition
<num_value>
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...3>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet
<num_value>
REF LEVEL
OFFSET
PHASE
SETTINGS
AUTOSCALE
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SCALe:AUTO ONCE
Y-AXIS
/DIV
DISP:WIND:Y:PDIV <numeric_value>
Y-AXIS
REF VALUE
DISP:WIND:Y:RVAL <numeric_value>
1303.3545.12
6.169
E-1
R&S FMU
Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment
Y-AXIS
REF POS
DISP:WIND:Y:RPOS <numeric_value>
PHASE
OFFSET
SENSe:CORR:OFFS:PHASe <numeric_value>
PHASE
RAD
DEG
CALC:UNIT:ANGL RAD|DEG
PHASEWRAP
ON OFF
CALC:FORM PHASe|UPHase
1303.3545.12
6.170
E-1
R&S FMU
Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment
MKR Key
MKR
MARKER
1..4
MARKER
NORM DELTA
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>[:STATe]
ON | OFF;
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:X <numeric value>;
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:Y?
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker1[:STATe]
ON | OFF;
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:X <numeric value>;
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:Y?
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>[:STATe]
ON | OFF;
REFERENCE
FIXED
REF FXD
ON
OFF
REF POINT
LEVEL
REF POINT
LVL OFFSET
REF POINT
FREQUENCY
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:FUNCtion:FIXed[:STATe]
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y
<num_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y:
<num_value>
OFFSet
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X
<num_value>
or:
REF POINT
TIME
PEAK
SEARCH
ALL MARKER
OFF
MKR->
TRACE
LINK MKR1
AND DELTA
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X
<num_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint: MAX
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:AOFF
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:AOFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:TRACe <num_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:TRACe <num_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:LINK ON | OFF
MKR FILE
EXPORT
MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:MARKer <file_name>
DECIM
.
,
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator POINt|COMMa
1303.3545.12
6.171
E-1
R&S FMU
Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment
MKR-> Key
MKR->
SELECT
MARKER
PEAK
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:MAXimum[:PEAK]
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:MAXimum[:PEAK]
CENTER
= MKR FREQ
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:CENTer
REF LEVEL
= MKR LVL
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:REFerence
NEXT PEAK
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:MAXimum:NEXT
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:MAXimum:NEXT
NEXT PEAK
RIGHT
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:MAXimum:RIGHt
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:MAXimum:LEFT
NEXT PEAK
LEFT
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:MAXimum:NEXT
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:MAXimum:NEXT
SEARCH
LIMITS
LEFT
LIMIT
RIGHT
LIMIT
THRESHOLD
SEARCH LIM
OFF
MKR->TRACE
MIN
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:X:SLIMits:LEFT <num_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:X:SLIMits:RIGHt <num_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:THReshold[:STATe] ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:THReshold <num_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:THReshold[:STATe] ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:TRACe <numeric value>
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:TRACe <numeric value>
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:MINimum[:PEAK]
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:MINimum[:PEAK]
NEXT MIN
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:MINimum:NEXT
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:MINimum:NEXT
NEXT MIN
RIGHT
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:MINimum::RIGHt
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:MINimum::LEFT
NEXT MIN
LEFT
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:MINimum::NEXT
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:MINimum::NEXT
EXCLUDE
DC
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:LOEXclude ON | OFF
PEAK
EXCURSION
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:PEXCursion <num_value>
AUTO MAX
PEAK
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MAXimum[:PEAK]
AUTO MIN
PEAK
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MINimum[:PEAK]
1303.3545.12
6.172
E-1
R&S FMU
Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment
MKR FCTN Key
MKR
FCTN
SELECT
MARKER
PEAK
NOISE MEAS
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:MAXimum[:PEAK]
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:MAXimum[:PEAK]
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe]
ON | OFF;
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult?
PHASE
NOISE
PH NOISE
OFF
ON
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe]
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:FUNCtion:PNOise:RESult?
REF POINT
LEVEL
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y <
REF POINT
LVL OFFSET
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y:O
REF POINT
FREQUENCY
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X
<num_value>
PEAK
SEARCH
AUTO PEAK
SEARCH
N dB DOWN
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint: MAX
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:PNOise:AUTO
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown[:STATe]
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown <num_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:FREQuency
PEAK
LIST
NEW
SEARCH
INIT;*WAI;
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:FPEaks 10;
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:COUNt?;
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:Y?;
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:X?;
SORT MODE
FREQ LEVEL
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:SORT X | Y
PEAK
EXCURSION
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:PEXCursion <num_value>
LEFT
LIMIT
1303.3545.12
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:X:SLIMits:LEFT <num_value>
6.173
E-1
R&S FMU
RIGHT
LIMIT
THRESHOLD
PEAK LIST
OFF
MKR->
TRACE
1303.3545.12
Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:X:SLIMits:RIGHt <num_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:THReshold[:STATe] ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:THReshold <num_value>
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:TRACe <numeric value>
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:TRACe <numeric value>
6.174
E-1
R&S FMU
Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment
BW Key
BW
RES BW
MANUAL
SWEEP TIME
MANUAL
RES BW
AUTO
SWEEP TIME
AUTO
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:AUTO OFF
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <num_value>
[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:TIME <num_value>
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO ON
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO ON
COUPLING
RATIO
SPAN / RBW
AUTO [50]
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio 0.02
SPAN / RBW
MANUAL
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio <num_value>
DEFAULT
COUPLING
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO ON;
RES BW
1/2/3/5
[SENSe:]BBANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]STEP:MODE
LINear|L1235
1303.3545.12
6.175
E-1
R&S FMU
Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment
SWEEP Key
SWEEP
CONTINUOUS
SWEEP
SINGLE
SWEEP
INITiate:CONTinuous ON
INITiate:CONTinuous OFF;
INITiate:IMMediate
CONTINUE
SGL SWEEP
INITiate:CONMeasure
SWEEP TIME
MANUAL
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME <num_value>
SWEEP TIME
AUTO
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
SWEEP
COUNT
[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt <num_value>
SWEEP
POINTS
[SENSe:]SWEep:POINts <num_value>
RECALC
[SENSe:]FFT:CAPTure:CALCulate
SGL SWEEP
DISP OFF
INITiate:DISPlay OFF
INITiate:IMMediate
RECALC
AUTO
OFF
[SENSe:]FFT:CAPTure:AUTO ON|OFF
1303.3545.12
6.176
E-1
R&S FMU
Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment
MEAS Key
MEAS
TIME DOM
POWER
POWER
ON
OFF
PEAK
RMS
MEAN
STANDARD
DEVIATION
LIMITS
ON
OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS[:STATe] ON
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak[:STATe]
ON
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN[:STATe]
ON
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation
[:STATe] ON
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS[:STATe]
ON|OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak[:STATe]
ON|OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN[:STATe]
ON|OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation
[:STATe] ON|OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak[:STATe]
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS[:STATe]
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN[:STATe]
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation
[:STATe] ON|OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:
RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:SLIMits ON | OFF
START
LIMIT
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:SLIMits:LEFT <num_value>
STOP
LIMIT
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:SLIMits:RIGHt <num_value>
SET
REFERENCE
POWER
ABS REL
MAX HOLD
ON
OFF
1303.3545.12
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:REFerence:
AUTO ONCE
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MODE
ABS | REL
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:PHOLd:
RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:PHOLd:
RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMar:MEAN:PHOLd:
RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:
PHOLd:RESult?
6.177
E-1
R&S FMU
AVERAGE
ON
OFF
NUMBER OF
SWEEPS
Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:AVERage:
RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:AVERage:RESu
lt?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMar:MEAN:AVERage:
RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:AVE
Rage:RES?
[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt <num_value>
CHAN PWR
ACP
CP / ACP
ON
OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect
CPOWer | ACPower;
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? CPOWer |
ACPower;
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe] OFF
CP / ACP
STANDARD
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet
<standard>
CP / ACP
CONFIG
NO. OF
ADJ CHAN
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs <num_value>
NO. OF
TX CHAN
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:TXCHannel:COUNt<num_value>
CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH
CHANNEL
SPACING
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:CHANnel] <num_value>
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ACHannel
<num_value>
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ALTernate
<1…11> <num_value>
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ACHannel <num_value>
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<1…11> <num_value>
ACP REF
SETTINGS
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:MAN 1
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:Auto MIN
CP/ACP
ABS/REL
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE ABSolute|RELative
CHAN PWR
/HZ
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult:PHZ
ON | OFF
POWER
MODE
CLEAR/
WRITE
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:MODE WRITe|MAXHold
MAX HOLD
ADJUST
SETTINGS
ACP LIMIT
CHECK
1303.3545.12
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet
ACPower|CPOWer|OBANdwidth|OBWidth
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower[:STATe] ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ALTernate<1|2>:RESult?
6.178
E-1
R&S FMU
EDIT
ACP LIMITS
SELECT
TRACE
SET CP
REFERENCE
SWEEP
TIME
DIAGRAM
FULL SIZE
Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower[:STATe] ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]:
STATe ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]
<num_val>,<num_val>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute:STATe
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute
<num_value>,<num_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ALTernate[:RELative]
:STATeON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ALTernate[:RELative]
<num_value>,<num_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ALTernate:ABSolute:STATe
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ALTernate:ABSolute
<num_value>,<num_value>
[SENSe:]POWer:TRACe 1|2|3
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:AUTO ONCE
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME <num_value>
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:SIZE LARGe | SMALl
MULT CARR
ACP
CP / ACP
ON
OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect
CPOWer | ACPower;
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult?
CPOWer | ACPower;
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe] OFF
CP / ACP
STANDARD
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet
<standard>
CP / ACP
CONFIG
NO. OF
ADJ CHAN
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs <num_value>
NO. OF
TX CHAN
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:TXCHannel:COUNt <num_value>
CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:CHANnel]
<num_value>
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ACHannel
<num_value>
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ALTernate<1|2>
<num_value>
CHANNEL
SPACING
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:CHANnel <num_value>
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ACHannel <num_value>
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<1|2> <num_value>
ACP REF
SETTINGS
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:MAN 1
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:Auto MIN
CP/ACP
ABS REL
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE ABSolute|RELative
CHAN PWR
/HZ
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult:PHZ
ON | OFF
1303.3545.12
6.179
E-1
R&S FMU
Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment
POWER
MODE
CLEAR/
WRITE
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:MODE WRITe|MAXHold
MAX HOLD
ADJUST
SETTINGS
ACP LIMIT
CHECK
EDIT
ACP LIMITS
SELECT
TRACE
SWEEP
TIME
DIAGRAM
FULL SIZE
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet
ACPower|CPOWer|MCACpower|OBANdwidth|OBWidth
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower[:STATe] ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ALTernate<1|2>:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower[:STATe] ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]:S
ON | OFF
TATe
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]
<num_val>,<num_val>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute:STATe
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute
<num_value>,<num_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ALTernate[:RELative]:
ON | OFF
STATe
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ALTernate[:RELative]
<num_value>,<num_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ALTernate:ABSolute:STAT
e
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ALTernate:ABSolute
<num_value>,<num_value>
[SENSe:]POWer:TRACe 1|2|3
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME <num_value>
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:SIZE
LARGe | SMALl
OCCUPIED
BANDWIDTH
OCCUP BW
ON
OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect
OBANdwidth | OBWidth
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult?
OBANdwidth| OBWidth
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe] OFF
% POWER
BANDWIDTH
[SENSe:]POWer:BANDwidth|BWIDth <num_value>
CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth <num_value>
ADJUST
SETTINGS
1303.3545.12
[SENSe:]POWer:PRESet ACPower|CPOWer|OBANdwidth|OBWidth
6.180
E-1
R&S FMU
Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment
SIGNAL
STATISTIC
ON
APD
OFF
CALCulate:STATistics:APD[:STATe] ON | OFF
CALCulate:STATistics:RESult<1...3>? MEAN | PEAK | CFACtor
| ALL
ON
CCDF
OFF
CALCulate:STATistics:CCDF[:STATe] ON | OFF
CALCulate:STATistics:RESult<1...3>? MEAN | PEAK | CFACtor |
ALL
PERCENT
MARKER
RES BW
NO OF
SAMPLES
CALC:MARK:Y:PERC 0...100%
[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO OFF
[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution] <num_value>
CALCulate:STATistics:NSAMples <num_value>
SCALING
X-AXIS
REF LEVEL
X-AXIS
RANGE
Y-UNIT
%
ABS
CALCulate:STATistics:X:RLEVel <num_value>
CALCulate:STATistics:X:RANGe
<num_value>
CALCulate:STATistics:Y:SCALe:Y:UNIT PCT | ABS
Y-AXIS
MAX VALUE
CALCulate:STATistics:Y:UPPER <num_value>
Y-AXIS
MIN VALUE
CALCulate:STATistics:Y:LOWer <num_value>
ADJUST
SETTINGS
CALCulate:STATistics:SCALe:AUTO ONCE
DEFAULT
SETTINGS
CALCulate:STATistics:PRESet
COUNT
MEAS
INITiate:CONTinuous ON;
INITiate:IMMediate
SINGLE
MEAS
INITiate:CONTinuous OFF;
INITiate:IMMediate
C/NO
C/N
C/No
CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH
ADJUST
SETTINGS
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect CN
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? CN
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect CN0
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? CN0
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer OFF
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth <num_value>
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet CN | CN0
MODULATION
DEPTH
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:MDEPth[:STATe]
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:RESult?
SELECT
MARKER
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:MDEPth[:STATe]
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:RESult?
TOI
1303.3545.12
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:TOI ON
6.181
E-1
R&S FMU
Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment
TRIG Key
TRIG
FREE RUN
EXTERN
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce
IMMediate
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel[EXTernal] <numeric value>
EXTernalTRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce EXTernal
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce EXTernal
I LEVEL
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IONLy <numeric value>
Q LEVEL
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IONLy <numeric value>
I/Q LEVEL
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IFPower <numeric value>
TRIGGER
OFFSET
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff <num_value>
POLARITY
POS/NEG
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe POSitive | NEGative or
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:POLarity POSitive | NEGative
1303.3545.12
6.182
E-1
R&S FMU
Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment
TRACE Key
TRACE
SELECT
TRACE
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
CLEAR/
WRITE
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...3>:MODE WRITe
MAX HOLD
AVERAGE
VIEW
BLANK
SWEEP
COUNT
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...3>:MODE MAXHold
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...3>:MODE
or:
[SENSe:]AVERage[:STATe<1...3>] ON
AVERage
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...3>:MODE VIEW
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...3>[:STATe] OFF
[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt <num_value>
or:
[SENSe:]AVERage:COUNt <num_value>
DETECTOR
AUTO
SELECT
DETECTOR
AUTO PEAK
[SENSe:]DETector[:FUNCtion]:AUTO
ON | OFF
[SENSe:]DETector[:FUNCtion] APEak
DETECTOR
MAX PEAK
[SENSe:]DETector[:FUNCtion] POSitive
DETECTOR
MIN PEAK
[SENSe:]DETector[:FUNCtion] NEGative
DETECTOR
SAMPLE
[SENSe:]DETector[:FUNCtion] SAMPle
DETECTOR
RMS
[SENSe:]DETector[:FUNCtion] RMS
DETECTOR
AVERAGE
[SENSe:]DETector[:FUNCtion] AVERage
TRACE
MATH
T1-T2->T1
T1-T3->T1
TRACE
POSITION
TRACE MATH
OFF
MIN HOLD
HOLD CONT
ON OFF
1303.3545.12
CALCulate<1|2>:MATH:STATe ON
CALCulate<1|2>:MATH[:EXPRession][:DEFine] (TRACE1 TRACE2)
CALCulate<1|2>:MATH:STATe ON
CALCulate<1|2>:MATH[:EXPRession][:DEFine] (TRACE1 - TRACE3)
CALCulate<1|2>:MATH:POSition <num_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:MATH:STATe OFF
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...3>:MODE MINHold
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4>:MODE:HCON ON|OFF
6.183
E-1
R&S FMU
AVG MODE
LOG LIN
ASCII FILE
EXPORT
DECIM SEP
,
.
COPY
TRACE
1303.3545.12
Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment
CALCulate<1|2>:MATH:MODE LINear | LOGarithmic
or:
[SENSe:]AVERage:TYPE VIDeo | LINear
FORMat[:DATA] ASCii
MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:TRACe 1,'TRACE.DAT'
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator POINt | COMMa
TRACe:COPY
TRACE1|TRACE2|TRACE3,TRACE1|TRACE2|TRACE3
6.184
E-1
R&S FMU
Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment
LINES Key
LINES
SELECT
LIMIT LINE
selection:
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:NAME <string>;
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer:STATe
ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer:STATe ON | OFF
limit check:
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:STATe ON | OFF
INITiate[:IMMediate]; WAI*
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:FAIL?
trace assignment:
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:TRACe 1|2|3
NEW
LIMIT LINE
NAME
name:
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:NAME <string>;
domain:
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CONTrol:DOMain
FREQuency|TIME
scaling:
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CONTrol:MODE
RELative | ABSolute
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer:MODE
RELative | ABSolute
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer:MODE
RELative | ABSolute
unit:
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UNIT
DBM| DBPW| WATT|
DBUV| VOLT|DBUA|AMPere| DB| DBUV_MHZ| DBUA_MHZ| DEG| RAD
| S| HZ| PCT
margin:
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer:MARGin <num_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer:MARGin <num_value>
threshold for relative y-scaling:
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer:THReshold
<num_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer:THReshold
<num_value>
comment:
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:COMMent <string>
VALUES
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CONTrol[:DATA]
<num_value>, <num_value>..
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer[:DATA]
<num_value>, <num_value>..
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer[:DATA]
<num_value>,<num_value>..
INSERT
VALUE
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
DELETE
VALUE
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
SHIFT X
LIMIT LINE
1303.3545.12
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CONTrol:SHIFt <num_value>
6.185
E-1
R&S FMU
Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment
SHIFT Y
LIMIT LINE
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer:SHIFt <num_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer:SHIFt <num_value>
SAVE
LIMIT LINE
automatically executed during IEC/IEEE-bus operation
EDIT LIMIT
LINE
s. NEW LIMIT LINE
COPY
LIMIT LINE
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:COPY 1...8 | <name>
DELETE
LIMIT LINE
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:DELete
X OFFSET
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CONTrol:OFFset <num_value>
Y OFFSET
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer:OFFset <num_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer:OFFset <num_value>
DISPLAY
LINES
DISPLAY
LINE 1
CALCulate<1|2>:DLINe1:STATe ON|OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:DLINe1 <num_value>
DISPLAY
LINE 2
CALCulate<1|2>:DLINe2:STATe ON|OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:DLINe2 <num_value>
FREQUENCY
LINE 1
CALCulate<1|2>:FLINe1:STATe ON|OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:FLINe1 <num_value>
FREQUENCY
LINE 2
CALCulate<1|2>:FLINe2:STATe ON|OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:FLINe2 <num_value>
TIME
LINE 1
CALCulate<1|2>:TLINe1:STATe ON|OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:TLINe1 <num_value>
TIME
LINE 2
CALCulate<1|2>:TLINe2:STATe ON|OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:TLINe2 <num_value>
PHASE
LINE 1
CALCulate<1|2>:PLINe1:STATe ON|OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:PLINe1 <num_value>
PHASE
LINE 2
CALCulate<1|2>:PLINe2:STATe ON|OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:PLINe2 <num_value>
1303.3545.12
6.186
E-1
R&S FMU
Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment
DISP Key
DISP
FULL SCREEN
SPLIT
SCREEN
DISPlay:FORmat?
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:SELect
DISPlay:FORmat?
CONFIG
DISPLAY
SCREEN
TITLE
TIME+DATE
ON
OFF
LOGO
ON OFF
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TEXT[:DATA] <string>
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TEXT:STATe ON | OFF
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TIME ON | OFF
DISPlay:LOGO ON|OFF
ANNOTATION
ON OFF
DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency ON|OFF
DATAENTRY
OPAQUE
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
DEFAULT
COLORS 1
DISPlay:CMAP<1...13>:DEFault1
DEFAULT
COLORS 2
DISPlay:CMAP<1...13>:DEFault2
DISPLAY
PWR SAVE
DISPlay:PSAVe[:STATe] ON | OFF
DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff <num_value>
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
SELECT
OBJECT
BRIGHTNESS
DISPlay:CMAP:HSL <hue>,<sat>,<lum>
TINT
DISPlay:CMAP<1...13>:HSL <hue>,<sat>,<lum>
SATURATION
DISPlay:CMAP<1...13>:HSL <hue>,<sat>,<lum>
PREDEFINED
COLORS
1303.3545.12
DISPlay:CMAP<1...13>:PDEFined BLACk| BLUE| BROWn| GREen|
CYAN| RED| MAGenta|
YELLow| WHITe| DGRAy|
LGRAy| LBLUe| LGREen|
LCYan| LRED| MAGenta
6.187
E-1
R&S FMU
Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment
FILE Key
FILE
MMEMory:STORe:STATe 1,<file_name>
SAVE
RECALL
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe 1,<file_name>
EDIT
PATH
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
EDIT
COMMENT
MMEMory:COMMent <string>
ITEMS TO
SAVE/RCL
SELECT
ITEMS
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings ON|OFF
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe[:ACTive] ON|OFF
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL ON|OFF
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE
ENABLE
ALL ITEMS
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL
DISABLE
ALL ITEMS
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE
DEFAULT
CONFIG
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:DEFault
DATA SET
LIST
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
DATA SET
CLEAR
MMEMory:CLEar:STATe 1,<file_name>
STARTUP
RECALL
MMEMory:LOAD:AUTO 1,<file_name>
FILE
MANAGER
EDIT
PATH
NEW
FOLDER
MMEMory:MSIS <device>
MMEMory:CDIRectory <directory_name>
MMEMory:MDIRectory <directory_name>
COPY
MMEMory:COPY <file_source>,<file_destination>
RENAME
MMEMory:MOVE <file_source>,<file_destination>
CUT
MMEMory:DELete <file_name>
MMEMory:RDIRectory <directory_name>
PASTE
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
DELETE
MMEMory:DELete <file_name>
MMEMory:RDIRectory <directory_name>
SORT
MODE
NAME
1303.3545.12
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
6.188
E-1
R&S FMU
Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment
DATE
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
EXTENSION
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
2
FILE LISTS
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
ASCII FILE
EXPORT
FORMat[:DATA] ASCii
MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:TRACe 1,'TRACE.DAT'
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator POINt | COMMa
DECIM SEP
,
.
FORMAT
DISK
ASCII FILE
EXPORT
DECIM SEP
.
,
1303.3545.12
FORMat[:DATA] ASCii
MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:TRACe 1,'TRACE.DAT'
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator POINt | COMMa
6.189
E-1
R&S FMU
Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment
CAL Key
CAL
PROBE CAL
PROBE DATA
SELECT
SENSe:PROBe:CATalog?
SENSe:PROBe:DELete <file_name>
SENSe:PROBe:MOVE <file_name>,<file_name>
SENSe:PROBe:SELect <file_name>
SORT BY
NAME DATE
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
PROBE CAL
START
CALibration:PROBe[:STARt] <file_name>
INIT:CONM
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:CONDition (bit 12, bit 13)
PROBE COMP
ON
OFF
CALibration:PROBe:COMPensation ON | OFF
GAIN&OFFS
OFF
ON
CALibration:PROBe:GAIN ON | OFF
FREQ RESP
ON
OFF
CALibration:PROBe:FRESponse ON | OFF
IQ PATH
(I+j*Q)
I+J*Q
INPut:IQ:TYPE IJQ
I ONLY
INPut:IQ:TYPE I
Q ONLY
INPut:IQ:TYPE Q
I/Q INPUT
50=
1M=
INPut:IQ:IMPedance LOW|HIGH
BALANCED
ON
OFF
INPut:IQ:BALanced[:STATe] ON|OFF
PROBE DATA
RENAME
[SENSe<1|2>:]PROBe:MOVE <file_name>,<file_name>
PROBE DATA
DELETE
[SENSe<1|2>:]PROBe:DELete <probe_data_set_name>
PROBE DATA
DELETE ALL
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
PROBE CAL
DC
[SENSe<1|2>:]PROBe:ADJust:DC <numreric value>
[SENSe<1|2>:]PROBe:ADJust:MODE DC
PROBE CAL
PULSE
[SENSe<1|2>:]PROBe:ADJust:PULSe <numreric value>
[SENSe<1|2>:]PROBe:ADJust:MODE PULSE
PROBE CAL
COMP
PROBE CORR
ON
OFF
SENSe:PROBe[:STATe] ON | OFF
PROBE CALL
RESULTS
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
CAL TOTAL
CALibration[:ALL]?
1303.3545.12
6.190
E-1
R&S FMU
CAL
ABORT
Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment
CALibration:ABORt
CAL CORR
OFF
ON
CALibration:STATe ON | OFF
CAL
RESULTS
CALibration:RESults?
PAGE UP
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
PAGE DOWN
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
1303.3545.12
6.191
E-1
R&S FMU
Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment
SETUP Key
REFERENCE
INT EXT
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce INTernal|EXTernal
SIGNAL
SOURCE
I/Q INPUT
50=
1M=
INPut:IQ:IMPedance LOW|HIGH
BALANCED
ON
OFF
INPut:IQ:BALanced[:STATe] ON|OFF
LOW PASS
36MHz
ON
DITHER
OFF
I+J*Q
[SENSe:]IQ:LPASs[:STATe] ON|OFF
[SENSe:]IQ:DITHer[:STATe] ON|OFF
INPut<1|2>:IQ:TYPE IQ
I ONLY
INPut<1|2>:IQ:TYPE I
Q ONLY
INPut<1|2>:IQ:TYPE Q
GENERAL
SETUP
GPIB
GPIB
ADDRESS
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess
ID STRING
FACTORY
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
LD STRING
USER
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
COM
INTERFACE
TIME+DATE
CONFIGURE
NETWORK
NETWORK
LOGIN
0...30
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive:]BAUD
<num_value>
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:BITS
7 | 8
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:RECeive:PARity[:TYPE] EVEN |
ODD | NONE
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:SBITs
1|2
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:CONTrol:DTR
IBFull | OFF
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:CONTrol:RTS
IBFull | OFF
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:PACE
XON | NONE
SYSTem:TIME
0...23, 0...59, 0...59
SYSTem:DATE
<num>,<num>,<num>
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
OPTIONS
INSTALL
OPTION
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
REMOVE
OPTION
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
SYSTEM
INFO
HARDWARE
INFO
STATISTICS
1303.3545.12
DIAGnostic:SERVice:HWINfo?
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
6.192
E-1
R&S FMU
SYSTEM
MESSAGES
CLEAR ALL
MESSAGES
Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment
SYSTem:ERRor?
SYSTem:ERRor:LIST?
SYSTem:ERRor?
SERVICE
SELFTEST
*TST?
SELFTEST
RESULTS
DIAGnostic:SERVice:STESt:RESult?
ENTER
PASSWORD
SYSTem:PASSword[:CENable]
<string>
FIRMWARE
UPDATE
FIRMWARE
UPDATE
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
RESTORE
FIRMWARE
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
UPDATE
PATH
1303.3545.12
SSYSTem:FIRMware:UPDate <path>
6.193
E-1
R&S FMU
Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment
HCOPY Key
HCOPY
PRINT
SCREEN
HCOPy:ITEM:ALL
HCOPy:IMMediate
for printout into file add
PRINT
TRACE
MMEMory:NAME <file_name>
HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TRACe:STATe
HCOPy:IMMediate
for printout into file add
PRINT
TABLE
MMEMory:NAME <file_name>
HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TABle:STATe
HCOPy:IMMediate
for printout into file add
DEVICE
SETUP
ON | OFF
ON | OFF
MMEMory:NAME <file_name>
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt?
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:NEXT?
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:SELect <string>
HCOPy:DESTination
<string>
HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage
GDI | WMF | EWMF | BMP
HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation<1|2>
LANDscape | PORTrait
DEVICE2
1
2
HCOPy:CMAP:DEFault1
COLORS
COLOR
ON OFF
HCOPy:DEVice:COLor ON | OFF
SCREEN
COLORS
HCOPy:CMAP<1 to 26>:DEFault 2
OPTIMIZED
COLORS
HCOPy:CMAP<1 to 26>:DEFault 1
USER
DEFINE
HCOPy:CMAP<1 to 26>:DEFault 3
SELECT
OBJECT
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
BRIGHTNESS
HCOPy:CMAP<1 to 26>:HSL <hue>,<sat>,<lum>
TINT
HCOPy:CMAP<1 to 26>:HSL <hue>,<sat>,<lum>
SATURATION
HCOPy:CMAP<1 to 26>:HSL <hue>,<sat>,<lum>
PREDIFINED
COLORS
HCOPy:CMAP<1 to
SET TO
DEFAULT
26>:PDEFined <color>
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
COMMENT
HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TEXT
INSTALL
PRINTER
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command
1303.3545.12
6.194
<string>
E-1
R&S FMU
Contents - Programming Examples
Contents - Chapter 7 "Remote Control - Programming
Examples"
7 Remote Control - Programming Examples ....................................................... 7.1
Basic Steps of IEC/IEEE-Bus Programming ..................................................................................7.1
Service Request .......................................................................................................................7.1
Initiate Service Request .................................................................................................7.1
Waiting for the Arrival of a Service Request ..................................................................7.2
Waiting Without Blocking the Keyboard and Mouse......................................................7.3
Service Request Routine ...............................................................................................7.4
Reading Out the Output Buffer ......................................................................................7.4
Reading Out Error Messages ........................................................................................7.5
Evaluation of SCPI Status Registers..............................................................................7.5
Evaluation of Event Status Register...............................................................................7.6
More Complex Programming Examples ........................................................................................7.7
Using Marker and Delta Marker ...............................................................................................7.7
Measuring Spurious Emissions......................................................................................7.7
Shape Factor Measurement (using n dB down) ............................................................7.8
Measuring the Third Order Intercept Point.....................................................................7.9
Measuring the AM Modulation Depth...........................................................................7.10
Limit Lines and Limit Test ......................................................................................................7.11
Measuring the Channel and Adjacent Channel Power...........................................................7.13
Occupied Bandwidth Measurement .......................................................................................7.15
Time Domain Power Measurement........................................................................................7.16
Fast Power Measurement on Power Ramps .........................................................................7.17
Power Measurement with Multi-Summary Marker .......................................................7.17
Multi-Burst Power Measurement..................................................................................7.19
Fast Level Measurement Using Frequency Lists ...................................................................7.21
Level Correction of Transducers (Definition of Transducer Factors) .....................................7.23
Measuring the Magnitude and Phase of a Signal (I/Q Data Acquisition) ...............................7.25
Averaging I/Q Data.................................................................................................................7.29
Reading and Writing Files ......................................................................................................7.30
Reading a File from the Instrument..............................................................................7.30
Creating a File on the Instrument.................................................................................7.31
1303.3545.12
I-7.1
E-1
R&S FMU
Basic Steps of IEC/IEEE-Bus Programming
7 Remote Control - Programming Examples
The following programming examples have a hierarchical structure, i.e. subsequent examples are
based on previous ones. It is thus possible to compile very easily an operational program from the
modules of the given examples.
Basic Steps of IEC/IEEE-Bus Programming
The examples explain the programming of the instrument and can serve as a basis to solve more
complex programming tasks.
VISUAL BASIC has been used as programming language. However, the programs can be translated
into other languages.
Service Request
The service request routine requires an extended initialization of the instrument in which the relevant
bits of the transition and enable registers are set.
In order to use the service request function in conjunction with a National Instruments GPIB driver, the
setting "Disable Auto Serial Poll" must be changed to "yes" by means of IBCONF.
Initiate Service Request
REM ---- Example of initialization of the SRQ in the case of errors -------PUBLIC SUB SetupSRQ()
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "*CLS")
'Reset status reporting system
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"*SRE 168")
'Permit service request for
'STAT:OPER,STAT:QUES and ESR
'register
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"*ESE 60")
'Set event enable bit for
'command, execution, device'dependent and query error
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"STAT:OPER:ENAB 32767")
'Set OPERation enable bit for
'all events
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"STAT:OPER:PTR 32767")
'Set appropriate OPERation
'Ptransition bits
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"STAT:QUES:ENAB 32767")
'Set questionable enable bits
'for all events
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"STAT:QUES:PTR 32767")
'Set appropriate questionable
'Ptransition bits
END SUB
REM ***********************************************************************
1303.3545.12
7.1
E-1
Basic Steps of IEC/IEEE-Bus Programming
R&S FMU
Waiting for the Arrival of a Service Request
There are basically two methods of waiting for the arrival of a service request:
1. Blocking (user inputs not possible):
This method is appropriate if the waiting time until the event to be signalled by an SRQ is short
(shorter than the selected timeout), if no response to user inputs is required during the waiting time,
and if – as the main criterion – the event is absolutely certain to occur.
Reason:
From the time the WaitSRQ() function is called until the occurrence of the expected event, it does
not allow the program to respond to mouse clicks or key entries during the waiting time. Moreover,
it causes program abort if the SRQ event does not occur within the predefined timeout period.
The method is, therefore, in many cases not suitable for waiting for measurement results,
especially with triggered measurements.
The following function calls are required:
CALL WaitSRQ(boardID%,result%)
'Wait for service request
'User inputs are not possible
'during the waiting time!
IF (result% = 1) THEN CALL Srq
'If SRQ is recognized =>
'subroutine for evaluation
2. Non-blocking (user inputs possible):
This method is recommended if the waiting time until the event to be signalled by an SRQ is long
(longer than the selected timeout), and user inputs should be possible during the waiting time, or if
the event is not certain to occur. This method is, therefore, the preferable choice for waiting for the
end of measurements, i.e. the output of results, especially in the case of triggered measurements.
The method necessitates a waiting loop that checks the status of the SRQ line at regular intervals
and returns control to the operating system during the time the expected event has not yet
occurred. In this way, the system can respond to user inputs (mouse clicks, key entries) during the
waiting time.
It is advisable to employ the Hold() auxiliary function, which returns control to the operating system
for a selectable waiting time (see section "Waiting Without Blocking the Keyboard or Mouse"), so
enabling user inputs during the waiting time.
result% = 0
For i = 1 To 10
'Abort after max. 10 loop
'iterations
CALL TestSRQ(boardID%,result%)
'Check service request line
If (result% <> 0) Then
CALL Srq
'If SRQ is recognized =>
'subroutine for evaluation
Else
Call Hold(20)
'Call hold function with
'20 ms waiting time.
'User inputs are possible.
Endif
Next i
If result% = 0 Then
PRINT "Timeout Error; Program aborted"' Output error message
STOP
'Stop software
Endif
1303.3545.12
7.2
E-1
R&S FMU
Basic Steps of IEC/IEEE-Bus Programming
Waiting Without Blocking the Keyboard and Mouse
A frequent problem with remote control programs using Visual Basic is to insert waiting times without
blocking the keyboard and the mouse.
If the program is to respond to user inputs also during a waiting time, control over the program events
during this time must be returned to the operating system. In Visual Basic, this is done by calling the
DoEvents function. This function causes keyboard- or mouse-triggered events to be executed by the
associated elements. For example, it allows the operation of buttons and input fields while the user waits
for an instrument setting to be completed.
The following programming example describes the Hold() function, which returns control to the
operating system for the period of the waiting time selectable in milliseconds.
Rem
Rem
Rem
Rem
Rem
**********************************************************************
The waiting function below expects the transfer of the desired
waiting time in milliseconds. The keyboard and the mouse remain
operative during the waiting period, thus allowing desired elements
to be controlled
Rem **********************************************************************
Public Sub Hold(delayTime As Single)
Start = Timer
'Save timer count on calling the function
Do While Timer < Start + delayTime / 1000
DoEvents
'Check timer count
'Return control to operating system
'to enable control of desired elements as long as
'timer has not elapsed
Loop
End Sub
Rem **********************************************************************
The waiting procedure is activated simply by calling Hold(<Waiting time in milliseconds>).
1303.3545.12
7.3
E-1
Basic Steps of IEC/IEEE-Bus Programming
R&S FMU
Service Request Routine
A service request is processed in the service request routine.
Note: the variables userN% and userM% must be pre-assigned usefully!
REM ------------ Service request routine ---------------------------------Public SUB Srq()
ON ERROR GOTO noDevice
'No user existing
CALL IBRSP(analyzer%, STB%)
'Serial poll, read status byte
IF STB% > 0 THEN
'This instrument has bits set
'in the STB
SRQFOUND% = 1
IF (STB% AND 16)
> 0 THEN CALL Outputqueue
IF (STB% AND 4)
> 0 THEN CALL ErrorQueueHandler
IF (STB% AND 8)
> 0 THEN CALL Questionablestatus
IF (STB% AND 128) > 0 THEN CALL Operationstatus
IF (STB% AND 32)
> 0 THEN CALL Esrread
END IF
noDevice:
END SUB
'End of SRQ routine
REM ***********************************************************************
Reading out the status event registers, the output buffer and the error/event queue is effected in
subroutines.
Reading Out the Output Buffer
REM -------- Subroutine for the individual STB bits ----------------------Public SUB Outputqueue()
'Reading the output buffer
result$ = SPACE$(100)
'Make space for response
CALL IBRD(analyzer%, result$)
PRINT "Contents of Output Queue : "; result$
END SUB
REM ***********************************************************************
1303.3545.12
7.4
E-1
R&S FMU
Basic Steps of IEC/IEEE-Bus Programming
Reading Out Error Messages
REM -------- Subroutine for reading the error queue ----------------------Public SUB ErrorQueueHandler()
ERROR$ = SPACE$(100)
'Make space for error variable
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "SYSTEM:ERROR?")
CALL IBRD(analyzer%, ERROR$)
PRINT "Error Description : "; ERROR$
END SUB
REM ***********************************************************************
Evaluation of SCPI Status Registers
REM ------ Subroutine for evaluating Questionable Status Register --------Public SUB Questionablestatus()
Ques$ = SPACE$(20)
'Preallocate blanks to text variable
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "STATus:QUEStionable:EVENt?")
CALL IBRD(analyzer%, Ques$)
PRINT "Questionable Status: "; Ques$
END SUB
REM ***********************************************************************
REM ------ Subroutine for evaluating Operation Status Register -----------Public SUB Operationstatus()
Oper$ = SPACE$(20)
'Preallocate blanks to text variable
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "STATus:OPERation:EVENt?")
CALL IBRD(analyzer%, Oper$)
PRINT "Operation Status: "; Oper$
END SUB
REM ***********************************************************************
1303.3545.12
7.5
E-1
Basic Steps of IEC/IEEE-Bus Programming
R&S FMU
Evaluation of Event Status Register
REM ------ Subroutine for evaluating the Event Status Register -----------Public SUB Esrread()
Esr$ = SPACE$(20)
'Preallocate blanks to text variable
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "*ESR?")
'Read ESR
CALL IBRD(analyzer%, Esr$)
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 1) > 0 THEN PRINT "Operation complete"
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 2) > 0 THEN PRINT "Request Control"
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 4) > 0 THEN PRINT "Query Error"
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 8) > 0 THEN PRINT "Device dependent error"
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 16) > 0 THEN
PRINT "Execution Error; Program aborted"'
Output error message
STOP
'Stop software
END IF
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 32) > 0 THEN
PRINT "Command Error; Program aborted"'
Output error message
STOP
'Stop software
END IF
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 64) > 0 THEN PRINT "User request"
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 128) > 0 THEN PRINT "Power on"
END SUB
REM **********************************************************************
1303.3545.12
7.6
E-1
R&S FMU
More Complex Programming Examples
More Complex Programming Examples
Using Marker and Delta Marker
Measuring Spurious Emissions
In transmission measurements, it is often necessary to search a large frequency range for unwanted
spurious emissions.
This can be done by means of the R&S FMU's LIST PEAKS function, which finds up to 50 peaks in a
preselected frequency range and outputs them as a list. The search range can be defined both in terms
of frequency and level, and the number of peaks to be found is selectable as well.
In the following example, the 10 highest peaks are to be found in a preselected frequency range. Only
signals >-60 dBm in a range ± 400 kHz about the center frequency are of interest, so the search range
is limited accordingly. The signals found are output in the order of ascending frequency.
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub SpuriousSearch()
powerlist$ = Space$(1000)
freqlist$ = Space$(1000)
count$ = Space$(30)
'--------- R&S FMU default setting --------------------------------------CALL SetupInstrument
'Default setting
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"INIT:CONT OFF")
'Default setting
'--------- Definition of search range --------------------------------CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:STAT ON")
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:LEFT 99.6MHz;RIGHt 100.4MHz")
'Activate search limit and
'set to ±400 kHz about
'center frequency
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:THR:STAT ON")
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:THR –60DBM")
'Activate threshold and
'set to –60 dBm
'--------- Activate search for spurious -----------------------------------CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:SORT X")
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"INIT;*WAI")
'Sort according to
'frequency
'Perform sweep with sync
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE 10")
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:COUN?")
'Search for
'10 highest peaks
CALL IBRD(analyzer%, count$)
'Call number of
'peaks, check it,
'and read it in
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:X?")
'Query and read
CALL IBRD(analyzer%, freqlist$)
'frequency list
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:Y?")
'Query and read
CALL IBRD(analyzer%, powerlist$)
'level list
Print "# of spurious: ";count$
'Output number of results
Print "Frequencies: ";freqlist$
'Output frequency list
1303.3545.12
7.7
E-1
More Complex Programming Examples
Print "Power: ";powerlist$
R&S FMU
'Output level list
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************
Shape Factor Measurement (using n dB down)
The n-dB-down function of the R&S FMU is used twice to determine the shape factor of a filter (ratio of
bandwidths at 60 dB and 3 dB below the filter maximum).
The following example is again based on a signal with a level of –30 dBm at 100 MHz. The shape factor
is determined for the 30 kHz resolution bandwidth. The default setting of the R&S FMU is used for
measurements (SetupInstrument).
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub ShapeFactor()
result$ = Space$(100)
'--------- R&S FMU default setting ----------------------------------------CALL SetupInstrument
'Default setting
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"INIT:CONT OFF")
'Single sweep
'--------- Set frequency --------------------------------------------------CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"FREQ:SPAN 1MHz")
'Span
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"BAND:RES 30kHz")
'Resolution bandwidth
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"INIT;*WAI")
'Perform sweep with sync
'--------- Measure 60 dB value --------------------------------------------CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:MARK:PEXC 6DB")
'Peak excursion
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:MARK:STAT ON")
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:MARK:TRAC 1")
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:MARK:MAX")
'Marker1 on
'Assign marker1 to trace1
'Set marker1 to 100 MHz
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD 60dB")'Read out bandwidth measured
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:RES?")'at 60 dB
CALL IBRD(analyzer%,result$)
result60 = Val(result$)
'--------- Measure 3 dB Down value
----------------------------------------
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD 3dB")'Read out bandwidth measured
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:RES?")'at 60 dB
CALL IBRD(analyzer%,result$)
result3 = Val(result$)
'--------- Read out shape factor-------------------------------------------Print "Shapefaktor 60dB/3dB: ";result60/result3
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************
1303.3545.12
7.8
E-1
R&S FMU
More Complex Programming Examples
Measuring the Third Order Intercept Point
The third order intercept point (TOI) is the (virtual) level of two adjacent useful signals at which the
intermodulation products of third order have the same level as the useful signals.
The intermodulation product at fS2 is obtained by mixing the first harmonic of the useful signal PN2 with
signal PN1, the intermodulation product at fS1 by mixing the first harmonic of the useful signal PN1 with
signal PN2.
fs1 = 2 x fn1 - fn2 (1)
fs2 = 2 x fn2 - fn1 (2)
The following example is based on two adjacent signals with a level of –30 dBm at 100 MHz and
110 MHz. The intermodulation products lie at 90 MHz and 120 MHz according to the above formula. The
frequency is set so that the examined mixture products are displayed in the diagram. Otherwise, the
default setting of the R&S FMU is used for measurements (SetupInstrument).
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub TOI()
result$ = Space$(100)
'--------- R&S FMU default setting ------------------------------------------CALL SetupStatusReg
'Set status registers
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"*RST")
'Reset instrument
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"INIT:CONT OFF")
'Single sweep
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"SYST:DISP:UPD ON")
'ON: display on
'OFF: off
'--------- Set frequency --------------------------------------------------CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"FREQ:STARt 85MHz;STOP 125 MHz") 'Span
'--------- Set level ------------------------------------------------------CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV –20dBm")
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"INIT;*WAI")
'Reference level
'Perform sweep with sync
'--------- TOI measurement ------------------------------------------------CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:MARK:PEXC 6DB")
'Peak excursion
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI ON") 'Switch on TOI measurement
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI:RES?") 'and read out results
CALL IBRD(analyzer%,result$)
'--------- Read out result -----------------------------------------------Print "TOI [dBm]: ";result$
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************
1303.3545.12
7.9
E-1
More Complex Programming Examples
R&S FMU
Measuring the AM Modulation Depth
The example below is based on an AM-modulated signal at 100 MHz with the following characteristics:
• Carrier signal level: –30 dBm
• AF frequency:
100 kHz
• Modulation depth:
50 %
The default setting of the analyzer for measurements can be used for the measurements described
below (SetupInstrument).
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub AMMod()
result$ = Space$(100)
CALL SetupInstrument
'Default setting
'--------- Peak search ----------------------------------------------------CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"INIT:CONT OFF")
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"INIT;*WAI")
'Single sweep
'Perform sweep with sync
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:MARK:PEXC 6DB")
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:MARK:STAT ON")
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:MARK:TRAC 1")
'Peak excursion
'Marker 1 on
'Assign marker1 to trace1
'--------- Measure modulation depth----------------------------------------CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:MARK:MAX;FUNC:MDEP ON") 'Marker to Peak;
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:MDEP:RES?")
'Measure mod. depth
CALL IBRD(analyzer%, result$)
'Read out result
'--------- Read out result ------------------------------------------------Print "AM Mod Depth [%]: ";result$
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************
1303.3545.12
7.10
E-1
R&S FMU
More Complex Programming Examples
Limit Lines and Limit Test
The example below shows the definition and use of a new limit line 5 for trace 1 on screen A and trace 2
on screen B with the following characteristics:
• Upper limit line
• Absolute x axis in the frequency range
• 5 reference values: 120 MHz / -70 dB, 126 MHz/-40 dB, 127 MHz/-40 dB, 128 MHz/-10 dB,
129 MHz/-40 dB, 130 MHz/-40 dB, 136 MHz / -70 dB
• Relative y axis with unit dB
• Absolute threshold at -75 dBm
• No margin
The signal of the integrated calibration source (128 MHz, -30 dBm) is used to check the limit test.
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub LimitLine()
result$ = Space$(100)
'--------- R&S FMU default setting ----------------------------------------CALL SetupInstrument
'Default setting
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"FREQUENCY:CENTER 128MHz;Span 10MHz")'Span
Call ibwrt(analyzer%,"Diag:Serv:Inp Cal;CSO -30dBm")
'Cal signal on
'--------- Definition of limit lines --------------------------------------CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:LIM5:NAME 'TEST1'")
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:LIM5:COMM 'Upper limit'")
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC1:LIM5:TRAC 1")
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC2:LIM5:TRAC 2")
'Define name
'Define comment
'Assign trace in screen A
'Assign trace in screen B
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:LIM5:CONT:DOM FREQ") 'Define x axis range
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:LIM5:CONT:MODE ABS") 'Define x axis scaling
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:LIM5:UNIT DB")
'Define y axis unit
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:LIM5:UPP:MODE REL") 'Define y axis scaling
'--------- Definition of data points and threshold ------------------------xlimit$ = "CALC:LIM5:CONT 120MHZ,126MHZ,127MHZ,128MHZ,129MHZ,130MHz,136MHz"
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, xlimit$)
'Set values for x axis
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:LIM5:UPP –70,-40,-40,-20,-40,-40,-70")
'Set values for y axis
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:LIM5:UPP:THR -75DBM") 'Set y threshold (only
'possible for relative
'y axis)
'--------------------------------------------------------------------------'A margin or an x /y offset can be defined here.
'----------- Activate and evaluate the limit line in screen A ------------CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC1:LIM5:UPP:STAT ON") 'Activate line 5 in screen A
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC1:LIM5:STAT ON")
'Activate limit check in
'screen A
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"INIT;*WAI")
'Perform sweep with sync
1303.3545.12
7.11
E-1
More Complex Programming Examples
R&S FMU
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC1:LIM5:FAIL?")
'Query result of limit
'check
CALL IBRD(analyzer%, result$)
'Result: 1 (= FAIL)
'--------- Read out result ------------------------------------------------Print "Limit Result Line 5: ";result$
'------ Evaluate limit line in screen A by means of status register ------CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"*CLS")
'Reset status register
'--------- Measure --------------------------------------------------------CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"INIT;*OPC")
CALL WaitSRQ(boardID%,status%)
'Perform sweep with sync
'Wait for service request
'--------- Read out result ------------------------------------------------IF (status% = 1) THEN
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"STAT:QUES:LIM1:COND?") 'Read out STAT:QUES:LIMit
CALL IBRD(analyzer%, result$)
'register
IF ((Val(result$) And 16) <> 0) THEN
Print "Limit5 failed"
ELSE
Print "Limit5 passed"
END IF
END IF
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************
1303.3545.12
7.12
E-1
R&S FMU
More Complex Programming Examples
Measuring the Channel and Adjacent Channel Power
In the following example, the channel and adjacent channel power is first measured on a signal with a
level of 0 dBm at 800 MHz to IS95. Then the channel and adjacent channel power is measured on a
GSM signal at 935.2 MHz with fast ACP measurement (FAST ACP).
In addition, the limit test is activated.
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub ACP()
result$ = Space$(100)
'--------- R&S FMU default setting ----------------------------------------CALL SetupStatusReg
'Set status register
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"*RST")
'Reset instrument
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"INIT:CONT OFF")
'Single sweep
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"SYST:DISP:UPD ON")
'ON: display on
'OFF: off
'--------- Set frequency --------------------------------------------------CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"FREQ:CENT 800MHz")
'Set frequency
'--------- Set level ------------------------------------------------------CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV 10dBm")
'--------- Example 1: Configure CP/ACP for CDMA
'Reference level
---------------------------
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC2:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL ACP")
'ACP measurement on
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:PRES F8CDMA") 'Select CDMA800 FWD
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
IBWRT(analyzer%,"SENS:POW:ACH:ACP 2")
IBWRT(analyzer%,"SENS:POW:ACH:PRES ACP")
IBWRT(analyzer%,"SENS:POW:ACH:PRES:RLEV")
IBWRT(analyzer%,"SENS:POW:ACH:MODE ABS")
IBWRT(analyzer%,"SENS:POW:HSP ON")
'Select 2
'Optimize
'Optimize
'Absolute
'Fast ACP
adjacent channels
settings
reference level
measurement
measurement
'--------- Perform measurement and query results -------------------------CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"INIT;*WAI")
'Perform sweep with sync
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC2:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? ACP")
CALL IBRD(analyzer%, result$)
'Query result
'--------- Read out result ------------------------------------------------Print "Result (CP, ACP low, ACP up, Alt low, Alt up): "
Print result$
1303.3545.12
7.13
E-1
More Complex Programming Examples
R&S FMU
'--------- Example 2: Configure CP/ACP manually for GSM
-------------------
result$ = Space$(100)
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"FREQ:CENT 935.2MHz")
'Set frequency
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL ACP")
'ACP measurement on
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"SENS:POW:ACH:ACP 1")
'1 adjacent channel
'Channel bandw. 200 kHz
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"SENS:POW:ACH:BAND 200KHZ")
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"SENS:POW:ACH:BAND:ACH 200KHZ")'Adjacent channel band'width 200 kHz
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"SENS:POW:ACH:SPAC 200KHZ")
'Channel spacing 200 kHz
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"SENS:POW:ACH:PRES ACP") 'Optimize settings
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"SENS:POW:ACH:PRES:RLEV") 'Optimize reference level
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"SENS:POW:ACH:MODE ABS")
'Absolute measurement
'--------- Start measurement and query result -----------------------------CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"INIT;*WAI")
'Perform sweep with sync
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? ACP")
CALL IBRD(analyzer%, result$)
'Query result
'--------- Read out result ------------------------------------------------Print "Result (CP, ACP low, ACP up): "
Print result$
'--------- Active limit check ---------------------------------------------result$ = Space$(100)
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH 30DB, 30DB")
'Set relative limit
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:ABS –35DBM,-35DBM")
'Set absolute limit
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:STAT ON")
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:ABS:STAT ON")
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:LIM:ACP ON")
'Rel. limit check on
'Abs. limit check on
'Limit check on
'--------- Start measurement and query result -----------------------------CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"INIT;*WAI")
sync
'Perform sweep with
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:RES?")
CALL IBRD(analyzer%, result$)
'Query result of
'limit check
'--------- Read out result ------------------------------------------------Print "Result Limit Check: ";result$
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************
1303.3545.12
7.14
E-1
R&S FMU
More Complex Programming Examples
Occupied Bandwidth Measurement
In the following example, the bandwidth is to be found in which 95% of the power of a GSM signal is
contained. Signal frequency is 935,2 MHz; channel bandwidth is 200 kHz.
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub OBW()
result$ = Space$(100)
'--------- R&S FMU default setting ----------------------------------------CALL SetupStatusReg
'Set status register
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"*RST")
'Reset instrument
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"INIT:CONT OFF")
'Single sweep
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"SYST:DISP:UPD ON")
'ON: display on
'OFF: off
'--------- Configure R&S FMU for OBW for GSM
-----------------------------
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"FREQ:CENT 935.2MHz")
'Set frequency
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL OBW")
'OBW measurement on
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"SENS:POW:ACH:BAND 200KHZ")
'Channel bandw. 200 kHz
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"SENS:POW:BWID 95PCT")
'Percentage of power
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"SENS:POW:ACH:PRES OBW") 'Set frequency and
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"SENS:POW:ACH:PRES:RLEV") 'optimize reference level
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"SENS:POW:NCOR OFF")
'Noise correction
'OFF: switch off
'ON: switch on
'--------- Perform measurement and query results --------------------------CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"INIT;*WAI")
'Perform sweep with sync
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? OBW")
CALL IBRD(analyzer%, result$)
'Query result
Print result$
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************
1303.3545.12
7.15
E-1
More Complex Programming Examples
R&S FMU
Time Domain Power Measurement
In the following example, the mean carrier power of a signal with 300 kHz bandwidth at 100 MHz is to be
determined. In addition, the peak power, the rms value and the standard deviation are measured. To do
this, the time-domain-power measurement functions are used.
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub TimeDomainPower()
result$ = Space$(100)
'--------- R&S FMU default setting ----------------------------------------CALL SetupStatusReg
'Set status register
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"*RST")
'Reset instrument
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"INIT:CONT OFF")
'Single sweep
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"SYST:DISP:UPD ON")
'ON: display on
'OFF: off
'--------- Configure R&S FMU for time domain power measurement -----------CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"FREQ:CENT 100MHz;SPAN 0Hz")
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"BAND:RES 300kHz")
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"SWE:TIME 200US")
'Set frequency
'Resolution bandwidth
'Sweep time
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
'Peak measurement on
'Mean measurement on
'RMS measurement on
'Standard deviation on
IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE ON")
IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN ON")
IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS ON")
IBWRT(analyzer%,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:SDEV ON")
'------------------- Perform measurement and query results ---------------CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"INIT;*WAI")
'Perform sweep with sync
query$ =
" CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE:RES?;"
query$ = query$ + ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN:RES?;"
query$ = query$ + ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS:RES?;"
query$ = query$ + ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:SDEV:RES?"
Call IBWRT(analyzer%, query$)
'Query results:
'Peak measurement
'Mean measurement
'RMS measurement
'Standard deviation
CALL IBRD(analyzer%, result$)
Print result$
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************
1303.3545.12
7.16
E-1
R&S FMU
More Complex Programming Examples
Fast Power Measurement on Power Ramps
A frequent task in mobile radio tests is measurement of a DUT at various power control levels at the
highest possible speed. The R&S FMU offers two test functions for this task, which can be used
depending on the signal characteristics.
In the following, the two methods are presented by means of two examples.
Power Measurement with Multi-Summary Marker
The multi-summary marker function is suitable for measuring the power of a sequence of pulses with
the following characteristics:
•
The pulses occur at identical time intervals, which is typical of GSM transmission in slots, for
example.
•
The level of the first signal is reliably above threshold.
• The subsequent pulses may have any levels.
The function uses the first pulse as a trigger signal. The power of the subsequent pulses is determined
exclusively via the timing pattern selected for the pulse sequence. The function is, therefore, suitable for
adjustments where the DUT output power varies considerably and is not reliably above the trigger
threshold.
The measurement accuracy is determined by the ratio of pulse duration to total measurement time; this
should not be below 1:50.
The function always uses TRACE 1 of the selected screen.
P
Measurement
Time
Measurement
Time
Measurement
Time
Trigger
Threshold
Period
Period
t
Time offset of
first pulse
Trace start
Fig. 7-1
Block diagram illustrating signal processing in analyzer
In the example below, a sequence of 8 pulses is measured with an offset of 50 µs of the first pulse,
450 µs measurement time/pulse and 576.9 µs pulse period.
1303.3545.12
7.17
E-1
More Complex Programming Examples
R&S FMU
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub MultiSumMarker()
result$ = Space$(200)
'--------- R&S FMU default setting--------------------------------------CALL SetupStatusReg
'Configure status register
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"*RST")
'Reset instrument
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"INIT:CONT OFF")
'Single sweep mode
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"SYST:DISP:UPD ON")
'ON: switch display on
'OFF: switch display off
'--------- Configure R&S FMU for power measurement in time domain ---------CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"FREQ:CENT 935.2MHz;SPAN 0Hz")
'Frequency setting
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV 10dBm")
'Set reference level
'to 10 dB
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"INP:ATT 30 dB")
'Set input attenuation
'to 30 dB
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"BAND:RES 1MHz;VID 3MHz")
'Bandwidth setting
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"DET RMS")
'Select RMS detector
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"TRIG:SOUR VID")
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"TRIG:LEV:VID 50 PCT")
'Trigger source: video
'Trigger threshold: 50%
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"SWE:TIME 50ms")
'Sweep time
1 frame
'--------- Perform measurement and query results -------------------------CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"INIT;*WAI")
'Perform sweep with sync
'Query results:
cmd$ = "CALC:MARK:FUNC:MSUM? "
cmd$ = cmd$ + "50US,"
'Offset of first pulse
cmd$ = cmd$ + "450US,"
'Measurement time
cmd$ = cmd$ + "576.9US,"
'Pulse period
cmd$ = cmd$ + "8"
'Number of bursts
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,cmd$)
CALL IBRD(analyzer%, result$)
'Read results
Print result$
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************
1303.3545.12
7.18
E-1
R&S FMU
More Complex Programming Examples
Multi-Burst Power Measurement
The multi-burst power measurement function is suitable for measuring the power of a sequence of
pulses with the following characteristics:
•
The pulses occur at variable time intervals.
•
The levels of all pulses of the sequence are reliably above the trigger threshold, or an external
trigger signal is used.
The function requires one trigger event per pulse. This means that if the video trigger or the IF power
trigger is used, the levels of all pulses must be above the trigger threshold.
The function is, therefore, particularly suitable for re-measuring DUTs already adjusted and whose
output power is within the specified range. The measurement is optimized for minimum overhead
relative to the actual measurement time.
Measurement
Time
Measurement
Time
Measurement
Time
Trigger
Offset
Trigger
Offset
Trigger
Offset
Trigger
Threshold
Trigger
Signal
Fig. 7-2
Trigger
Signal
t
Trigger
Signal
Block diagram illustrating signal processing in analyzer
Either the root-mean-square power or the peak power is measured, depending on whether the RMS
detector or the PEAK detector is selected. The function always uses TRACE 1 of the selected screen.
The following parameters are to be set for this measurement:
• Analyzer frequency
• Resolution bandwidth
• Measurement time per single pulse
• Trigger source
• Trigger threshold
• Trigger offset
• Type of power measurement (PEAK, MEAN)
• Number of pulses to be measured
During the measurement, each pulse is mapped into a pixel of the screen, i.e. any change of the trace
can be detected only at the left-hand edge of the screen. Maximum measurement speed is as usual
achieved with the display switched off.
In the example below, a GSM pulse sequence of 8 pulses is measured with 5 µs trigger offset,
434 µs measurement time/pulse, video trigger with 50% trigger threshold, and peak detection:
1303.3545.12
7.19
E-1
More Complex Programming Examples
R&S FMU
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub MultiBurstPower()
result$ = Space$(200)
'--------- R&S FMU default setting ----------------------------------------CALL SetupStatusReg
'Configure status register
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"*RST")
'Reset instrument
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"INIT:CONT OFF")
'Single sweep mode
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"SYST:DISP:UPD OFF")
'OFF: display off
'--------- Perform measurement and query results --------------------cmd$ = "MPOW? "
cmd$ = cmd$ + "935.2 MHZ,"
'Center frequency
cmd$ = cmd$ + "1MHZ,"
'Resolution bandwidth
cmd$ = cmd$ + "434US,"
'Measurement time
cmd$ = cmd$ + "VID,"
'Trigger source
cmd$ = cmd$ + "50PCT,"
'Trigger threshold
cmd$ = cmd$ + "1US,"
'Trigger offset, must be > 125 ns
cmd$ = cmd$ + "PEAK,"
'Peak detector
cmd$ = cmd$ + "8"
'Number of bursts
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, cmd$)
CALL IBRD(analyzer%, result$)
'Read results
Print result$
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************
1303.3545.12
7.20
E-1
R&S FMU
More Complex Programming Examples
Fast Level Measurement Using Frequency Lists
A typical task for the R&S FMU is power measurement at a number of frequency points, e.g. at multiples
of the fundamental (harmonics measurement), or at frequencies defined by a mobile radio standard
(e.g. spectrum due to transients at ± 200 kHz, ± 400 kHz, etc about the carrier frequency of a GSM
signal). In many cases, different level and/or bandwidth settings are required for the different frequency
points to match the channel spacing and meet the requirements of dynamic range.
Especially for this application, the R&S FMU offers a number of remote-control functions (commands
available in SENSe:LIST subsystem) that allow level measurement based on a frequency list with
different instrument settings assigned to different frequencies. Not only the frequency list can be
programmed, but also the measurement types (PEAK, RMS, AVG) to be performed simultaneously can
be selected.
The example below describes a harmonics measurement on a dual-band amplifier. The harmonics level
in general decreases as the frequency increases. To boost measurement sensitivity, therefore, the
reference level is lowered by 10 dB from the third harmonic.
The following settings are used:
Reference level:
10.00 dBm up to 2nd harmonic, 0 dBm from 3rd harmonic
RF attenuation:
20 dB
Electronic attenuation:
0 dB
RBW:
1 MHz
VBW:
3 MHz
Filter type:
NORMal
Measurement time:
300 µs
Trigger delay:
100 µs
Trigger:
video, 45 %
Frequency
Type
935.2 MHz
GSM 900 fundamental
1805.2 MHz
GSM 1800 fundamental
1870.4 MHz
GSM 900 2nd harmonic
2805.6 MHz
GSM 900 3rd harmonic
3610.4 MHz
GSM 1800 2nd harmonic
3740.8 MHz
GSM 900 4th harmonic
5815.6 MHz
GSM 1800 3rd Harmonic
The frequencies are selected in ascending order to minimize system-inherent waiting times resulting
from frequency changes.
At each frequency point the peak power and the rms power are measured. The peak power and the rms
power values are stored alternately in the results memory.
1303.3545.12
7.21
E-1
More Complex Programming Examples
R&S FMU
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub FrequencyList()
result$ = Space$(500)
'--------- R&S FMU default setting ----------------------------------------CALL SetupStatusReg
'Configure status register
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"*RST")
'Reset instrument
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"INIT:CONT OFF")
'Single sweep mode
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"SYST:DISP:UPD OFF")
'Display off
'---------Configure R&S FMU for power measurement based on frequency list -Call IBWRT(analyzer%, "TRIG:LEV:VID 45PCT")
'Video trigger threshold
Call IBWRT(analyzer%, "LIST:POWer:SET ON,ON,OFF,VID,POS,100us,0")
'--------- Perform measurement and query results --------------------------cmd$ = "LIST:POWer? "
cmd$ = cmd$ + "935.2MHZ,10dBm,20dB,OFF,NORM,1MHz,3MHz,300us,0,"
cmd$ = cmd$ + "1805.2MHZ,10dBm,20dB,OFF,NORM,1MHz,3MHz,300us,0,"
cmd$ = cmd$ + "1870.4MHZ,10dBm,20dB,OFF,NORM,1MHz,3MHz,300us,0,"
cmd$ = cmd$ + "2805.6MHZ,0dBm,20dB,OFF,NORM,1MHz,3MHz,300us,0,"
cmd$ = cmd$ + "3610.4MHz,10dBm,20dB,OFF,NORM,1MHz,3MHz,300us,0,"
cmd$ = cmd$ + "3740.8MHz,0dBm,20dB,OFF,NORM,1MHz,3MHz,300us,0,"
cmd$ = cmd$ + "5815.6MHz,0dBm,20dB,OFF,NORM,1MHz,3MHz,300us,0"
Call IBWRT(analyzer%, cmd$)
Call IBRD(analyzer%, result$)
Print result$
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************
1303.3545.12
7.22
E-1
R&S FMU
More Complex Programming Examples
Level Correction of Transducers (Definition of Transducer Factors)
In more complex test systems, the frequency response of the test setup must be taken into account in
all power measurements to avoid any measurement errors being introduced from sources other than the
DUT.
The R&S FMU offers the possibility of defining a frequency-dependent attenuation correction factor
(transducer factor).
In the example below, a factor with the following characteristics is defined:
Name:
Unit:
Scaling:
Comment:
Transtest
dB
lin
simulated cable correction
Frequency
10 MHz
100 MHz
1 GHz
3 GHz
Level
0 dB
3 dB
7 dB
10 dB
The factor is defined and can be activated as required.
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub TransducerFactor()
'--------- Define transducer factor --------------------------------------CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CORR:TRAN:SEL 'TRANSTEST'")
'Define "Transtest"
'transducer factor
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CORR:TRAN:UNIT 'DB'") 'Unit 'dB'
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CORR:TRAN:SCAL LIN")
'Linear frequency axis
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CORR:TRAN:COMM 'Simulated cable correction'")
cmd$
cmd$
cmd$
cmd$
cmd$
=
=
=
=
=
"CORR:TRAN:DATA "
cmd$ + "10MHz, 0,"
cmd$ + "100MHz, 3,"
cmd$ + "1GHz, 7,"
cmd$ + "3GHz, 10"
'Enter frequency and level
'values. Level values without
'unit!
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,cmd$)
'Enter frequency and level values
'--------- Activate transducer --------------------------------------CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"CORR:TRAN:STAT ON") 'Activate transducer factor
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************
'--------- Read out in binary format --------------------------------------Call ibwrt(analyzer%, "FORMAT REAL,32")
'Select binary format
Call ibwrt(analyzer%, "TRAC1? TRACE1")
'Read out trace 1
Call ilrd(analyzer%, result$, 2)
digits = Val(Mid$(result$, 2, 1))
'Read out and store
'number of digits of
'length information
'Initialize buffer again
result$ = Space$(100)
1303.3545.12
7.23
E-1
More Complex Programming Examples
Call ilrd(analyzer%, result$, digits)
traceBytes = Val(Left$(result$, digits))
R&S FMU
'Read out
'and store length information
Call ibrd32(analyzer%, traceData(0), traceBytes) 'Read trace data into buffer
Call ilrd(analyzer%, result$, 1)
'Read the terminator <NL>
'--------- Read out binary data as pairs of frequency/level values --------traceValues = traceBytes/4
'Single precision = 4 bytes
stepsize = span/traceValues
'Calculate frequency step width
For i = 0 To traceValues – 1
Print "Value["; i; "] = "; startFreq+stepsize*i; ", "; traceData(i)
Next i
'--------- Time domain default setting ----------------------------------Call ibwrt(analyzer%,"FREQ:SPAN 0Hz")
Switchover to time domain
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"INIT;*WAI")
'Perform sweep with sync
'--------- Read out in ASCII format ---------------------------------------Call ibwrt(analyzer%,"FORMAT ASCII")
'Select ASCII format
CALL ibwrt(analyzer%,"TRAC1? TRACE1")
CALL ibrd(analyzer%, asciiResult$)
'Read out Trace 1
Print "Contents of Trace1: ",asciiResult$
'Output
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************
1303.3545.12
7.24
E-1
R&S FMU
More Complex Programming Examples
Measuring the Magnitude and Phase of a Signal
(I/Q Data Acquisition)
Due to the R&S FMU's internal architecture, it is capable of measuring and outputting the magnitude
and phase of a signal in addition to its power values. This opens up a variety of possibilities for more indepth analysis (FFT, demodulation, etc).
Fig. 7-3 shows the analyzer hardware from the IF to the processor. The IF filter is the resolution filter of
the spectrum analyzer and can be set between 300 kHz and 50 MHz. The A/D converter samples the IF
(20.4 MHz) at 64 MHz (spectrum analysis) or 81.6 MHz (signal analysis).
Lowpass filtering and reduction of the sampling rate follow the downconversion to the complex
baseband. The output sampling rate is set as continuous between 10 kHz and 81.6 MHz during signal
analysis. This prevents superfluous oversampling at narrow bandwidths, which reduces computation
time and increases the maximum recording time. In spectrum analysis, the output sampling rate is 32
MHz.
The I/Q data is stored in memory areas that each contain 16 M words. The data can then be read out
from these areas in blocks that are 512 k words each. Hardware triggering controls the memory.
IF=
20.4
MHz
cos
A
D
IF-Filter
50 MHz
20 MHz
10 MHz
3 MHz
1 MHz
300 kHz
Fig. 7-3
NCO
20.4 MHz
I-Memory
16 M
decimation
filters
Halfband Resampling
Filter
ratio
Q-Memory
16 M
sin
sampling rate =
81.6 MHz... 40.8
MHz
r = 1...2;
sampling rate =
81.6 MHz.
Processor
sampling rate =
81.6 MHz... 10 kHz
d=1/2^n
n=0...11
Trigger
Block diagram illustrating signal processing in the analyzer
The following maximum bandwidths are possible in this measurement depending on the selected
sampling rate:
1303.3545.12
Sample rate
(from)
Sample rate
(to)
Max. bandwidth
Notes
81.6 MHz
40.8 MHz
30 MHz
Half band filter for the half
sampling rate (81.6 MHz)
40.8 MHz
20.4 MHz
0.68 sampling rate
20.4 MHz
10.2 MHz
0.8 sampling rate
10.2 MHz
5.1 MHz
0.8 sampling rate
5.1 MHz
2.55 MHz
0.8 sampling rate
2.55 MHz
1.275 MHz
0.8 sampling rate
1.275 MHz
0.6375 MHz
0.8 sampling rate
0.6375 MHz
318.75 kHz
0.8 sampling rate
318.75 kHz
159.375 kHz
0.8 sampling rate
159.375 kHz
79.6875 kHz
0.8 sampling rate
79.6875 kHz
39.84375 kHz
0.8 sampling rate
39.84375 kHz
19.921875 kHz
0.8 sampling rate
19.921875 kHz
10 kHz
0.8 sampling rate
7.25
E-1
More Complex Programming Examples
R&S FMU
Due to the sampling concept of the R&S FMU (21.4 MHz IF, 32 MHz sampling rate), the image
frequency is band-limited only by the analog 10 MHz filter. For an input signal at the limit of the 10 MHz
band (+ 5 MHz above center frequency), an image-frequency signal 800 kHz above the input signal
would be obtained.
The following example shows the steps necessary to collect data at a predefined sampling rate and
read it from the I/Q memory.
Data is output in the form of voltage values referred to the analyzer input. Data can be read in binary or
ASCII format.
In binary format, the length information carried in the message header is evaluated and used for
calculating the x axis values.
In ASCII format, only a list of voltage values is output.
Binary data is read in three steps:
1. The number of digits carrying the length information is read.
2. The length information itself is read.
3. The trace data is read.
This procedure is necessary with programming languages like Visual Basic which support only
structures of identical data types (arrays), whereas the binary data format uses different data types in
the header and the data section.
Note:
The arrays for measured data are dynamically dimensioned to allow the example to be
easily adapted to individual requirements.
Rem ************************************************************************
Public Sub ReadIQData()
'--------- Create variables ----------------------------------------------Dim IData() As Single ' I values as single floats
Dim QData() As Single ' Q values as single floats
Dim digits As Byte
'No. of digits as length information
Dim IQBytes As Long
'Length of trace data in bytes
Dim IQSamples As Long 'No. of trace data in SamplesDim LastSize As Long
'Length of last block in bytes
Const BlockSize = 524288
'Block size in R&S FMU, as per manual
result$ = Space$(100)
'Buffer for simple results
'--------- R&S FMU default setting --------------------------------------Call SetupInstrument
'Default setting
'Activate I/Q data acquisition mode; must be done before TRAC:IQ:SET!
Call ibwrt(analyzer%, "TRAC:IQ:STAT ON")
' Number of test points (800 000)
' (max. test points allowed (= 16 * 1024 * 1024 - 512))
' at RBW 50 MHz,
' sample rate 80 MHz, trigger free run, pos. trigger edge
' and 0 s trigger delay.
Call ibwrt(analyzer%, "TRAC:IQ:SET NORM,50MHz,80MHz,IMM,POS,0,800000")
1303.3545.12
7.26
E-1
R&S FMU
More Complex Programming Examples
'--------- Read-out in binary format ---------------------------------------Call ibwrt(analyzer%, "FORMAT REAL,32")
'Set binary format
Call ibwrt(analyzer%, "TRAC:IQ:DATA?")
'Meas. + read out I/Q data
'
'
'
'
'
'
The data must
They have the
Example:
"#42000"
|||||______
|__________
be retrieved from device
following format:
Length of data in bytes
No. of digits as length
Call ilrd(analyzer%, result$, 2)
'Read and store length for
digits = Val(Mid$(result$, 2, 1))
'number of digits
result$ = Space$(100)
'Re-initialize buffer
Call ilrd(analyzer%, result$, digits)
'Read length
' Total number of bytes that are read
IQBytes = Val(Left$(result$, digits))
'and store
' Total number of samples (I and Q) that are read
IQSamples = IQBytes / 8
'4 bytes each for I and Q samples
If IQBytes > 0 Then
' Dynamically create buffer for I/Q data
ReDim IData(0 To IQSamples - 1)
ReDim QData(0 To IQSamples - 1)
' "Blocks" with 512 k I/Q data each are read
Blocks = (IQSamples - 1) \ BlockSize
' 0 or 1 block, each with "LastSize" I/Q data, is read
LastSize = IQSamples - (Blocks * BlockSize)
'
Entire blocks with 512 k samples each
For Index = 0 To Blocks - 1
' Read I and Q data in buffer; index for I data counts samples
' Size of data for ibrd32 in bytes
Call ibrd32(analyzer%, IData(Index * BlockSize), BlockSize * 4)
Call ibrd32(analyzer%, QData(Index * BlockSize), BlockSize * 4)
Next Index
' The last block (if any) with < 512 k data)
If LastSize > 0 Then
1303.3545.12
7.27
E-1
More Complex Programming Examples
R&S FMU
' Read I/Q data; see above
Call ibrd32(analyzer%, IData(Blocks * BlockSize), LastSize * 4)
Call ibrd32(analyzer%, QData(Blocks * BlockSize), LastSize * 4)
End If
End If
Call ilrd(analyzer%, result$, 1)
'Read in end character <NL>
Call ibwrt(analyzer%, "TRAC:IQ:STAT OFF") 'I/Q data acquisition mode
Call ibwrt(analyzer%, "DISP:WIND:Trac:Stat ON") ' Re-start screen
Call ibwrt(analyzer%, "INITiate:CONTinuous ON") ' continuous sweep on
'--------- Output of binary data as frequency/level pair ----------------Open ".\traceiq.dat" For Output As #1
'Store in current directory
For i = 0 To IQSamples - 1
Print #1, i; " ; "; Str(IData(i)); " ; "; Str(QData(i))
Next i
Close #1
End Sub
Rem ************************************************************************
1303.3545.12
7.28
E-1
R&S FMU
More Complex Programming Examples
Averaging I/Q Data
The R&S FMU has averaging capability also for I/Q measurements, i.e. I/Q data can be averaged over
several test runs. This is subject to the following conditions:
1. An external trigger signal must be available for data measurement, and the trigger signal must be
phase-locked to the signal measured.
2. The same reference-frequency signal must be used for the DUT and the R&S FMU.
3. The sampling rate must be 32 MHz, since only with this sampling frequency will the measurement
be performed phase-synchronous with the trigger signal.
If all of the above conditions are fulfilled, no phase shift will occur between consecutive test runs. Phase
shift may invalidate the measured average so that in extreme cases a value of 0 is obtained.
The default setting of the instrument for data measurement without averaging has to be changed as
follows:
'--------- R&S FMU default setting ----------------------------------------CALL SetupInstrument
'Default setting
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"TRAC:IQ:STAT ON")
'Activate I/Q data acquisition
'mode; this must be
'done before TRAC:IQ:SET!
'Select max. number of test points (= 128 * 1024 – 512) at 10 MHz RBW,
'32 MHz sampling rate, external trigger, pos. trigger edge and 0 s trigger
'delay.
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"TRAC:IQ:SET NORM,10MHz,32MHz,EXT,POS,0,130560")
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"TRAC:IQ:AVER ON")
'Switch on I/Q averaging
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"TRAC:IQ:AVER:COUN 10") 'Set 10 test runs
'--------- Read data in binary format -------------------------------------...
1303.3545.12
7.29
E-1
More Complex Programming Examples
R&S FMU
Reading and Writing Files
Reading a File from the Instrument
In the following example, file TEST1.SET stored under D:\USER\DATA is read from the instrument and
stored in the controller.
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub ReadFile()
'--------- Generate variables ---------------------------------------------Dim digits As Byte
'Number of digits of
'length information
'Length of file with trace data
'in bytes
'Buffer for simple results
Dim fileBytes As Long
result$ = Space$(100)
'--------- Default setting of status register -----------------------------Call SetupStatusReg
'Configure status register
'--------- Read out file --------------------------------------------------Call ibwrt(analyzer%, "MMEM:DATA? 'D:\USER\DATA\TEST1.SET'")
'Select file
Call ilrd(analyzer%, result$, 2)
digits = Val(Mid$(result$, 2, 1))
'Read and store number of
'digits of length information
Call ilrd(analyzer%, result$, digits)
fileBytes = Val(Left$(result$, digits))
'Read and store length
'information
FileBuffer$ = Space$(fileBytes)
'Buffer for file
Call ilrd(analyzer%, FileBuffer, fileBytes)
'Read file into buffer
Call ilrd(analyzer%, result$, 1)
'Read terminator <NL>
'--------- Store file to controller --------------------------------------Open "TEST1.SET" For Output As #1
Print #1, FileBuffer;
' ; to avoid linefeed at
'
end of file
Close #1
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************
1303.3545.12
7.30
E-1
R&S FMU
More Complex Programming Examples
Creating a File on the Instrument
In the following example, the TEST1.SET file available on the controller is stored in the instrument under
D:\USER\DATA\DUPLICAT.SET.
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub WriteFile()
'--------- Generate variables ---------------------------------------------FileBuffer$ = Space$(100000)
Dim digits As Long
Dim fileBytes As Long
fileSize$ = Space$(100)
'Buffer
'Number
'length
'Length
'Length
for file
of digits of
information
of file in bytes
of file as a string
result$ = Space$(100)
'Buffer for simple results
'--------- Default setting of status register -----------------------------Call SetupStatusReg
'Configure status register
'--------- Prepare the definite length block data -------------------------fileBytes = FileLen("H:\work\vb\test1.set")
fileSize$ = Str$(fileBytes)
'Determine length of file
digits = Len(fileSize$) – 1
fileSize$ = Right$(fileSize$, digits)
'Determine number of digits of
'length information
FileBuffer$ = "#" + Right$(Str$(digits), 1) + fileSize$
'Store length information in
'file buffer
'--------- Read file from controller --------------------------------------Open "H:\work\vb\TEST1.SET" For Binary As #1
FileBuffer$ = FileBuffer$ + Left$(Input(fileBytes, #1), fileBytes)
Close #1
'--------- Write file -----------------------------------------------------Call ibwrt(analyzer%, "SYST:COMM:GPIB:RTER EOI")
'Set receive
'terminator on the
'instrument
Call ibwrt(analyzer%, "MMEM:DATA 'D:\USER\DATA\DUPLICAT.SET'," +
FileBuffer$)
'Select file
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************
1303.3545.12
7.31
E-1
R&S FMU
Contents - Maintenance and Instrument Interfaces
Contents - Chapter 8 "Maintenance and Instrument
Interfaces"
8 Maintenance and Instrument Interfaces............................................................ 8.1
Maintenance......................................................................................................................................8.1
Mechanical and Electrical Maintenance ...................................................................................8.1
Storing and Packing .................................................................................................................8.1
List of Power Cables Available.................................................................................................8.1
Instrument Interfaces .......................................................................................................................8.2
Probe Connector (PROBE POWER) .......................................................................................8.2
Probe Compensation Connector (PROBE COMPENSATION)................................................8.2
Probe Calibration Connector (PROBE CAL / PROBE CAL )
.............................................8.2
IEC Bus Interface .....................................................................................................................8.3
Interface Characteristics ................................................................................................8.3
Bus Lines .......................................................................................................................8.3
Interface Functions ........................................................................................................8.4
IEC Bus Messages ........................................................................................................8.4
Interface Messages........................................................................................................8.5
Instrument Messages.....................................................................................................8.5
Printer Interface (LPT)..............................................................................................................8.6
RS-232-C Interface (COM) ......................................................................................................8.7
Interface Characteristics ................................................................................................8.7
Signal Lines....................................................................................................................8.7
Transmission Parameters..............................................................................................8.8
Control Characters .........................................................................................................8.9
Handshake.....................................................................................................................8.9
Monitor Connector (MONITOR) .............................................................................................8.10
External Trigger Input (EXT TRIG).........................................................................................8.11
Mouse Connector (MOUSE) ..................................................................................................8.11
USB Connector (USB
) ..................................................................................................8.11
Reference Output/Input (REF IN and REF OUT)...................................................................8.12
LAN Interface .........................................................................................................................8.12
1303.3545.12
I-8.1
E-1
Contents - Maintenance and Instrument Interfaces
1303.3545.12
I-8.2
R&S FMU
E-1
R&S FMU
Maintenance
8 Maintenance and Instrument Interfaces
The R&S FMU following chapter contains information on the maintenance of the R&S FMU and on the
instrument interfaces.
Please follow the instructions in the service manual when exchanging modules or ordering spares. The
order no. for spare parts can be found in the service manual.
The address of our support center and a list of all Rohde & Schwarz service centers can be found at the
beginning of this manual.
The service manual includes further information particularly on troubleshooting, repair, exchange of
modules (including battery exchange, adjustment of the OCXO oscillator) and calibration.
Maintenance
Mechanical and Electrical Maintenance
The R&S FMU does not require any special maintenance. Remove any contamination on the instrument
by means of a soft cloth. Make sure that the air vents are not obstructed.
Storing and Packing
°
°
The R&S FMU can be stored at a temperature of –5 C to +60 C. When stored for an extended period of
time the instrument should be protected against dust.
The original packing should be used, particularly the protective covers at the front and rear, when the
instrument is to be transported or dispatched. If the original packing is no longer available, use a sturdy
cardboard box of suitable size and carefully wrap the instrument to protect it against mechanical
damage.
List of Power Cables Available
Table 8-1
List of power cables available
Stock No.
Earthed-contact connector
Preferably used in
DS 006.7013
BS1363: 1967' complying with
IEC 83: 1975 standard B2
Great Britain
DS 006.7020
Type 12 complying with SEV-regulation
1011.1059, standard sheet S 24 507
Switzerland
DS 006.7036
Type 498 / 13 complying with
US-regulation UL 498, or with IEC 83
USA / Canada
DS 006.7107
Type SAA3 10 A, 250 V,
complying with AS C112-1964 Ap.
Australia
DS 0025.2365
DS 0099.1456
DIN 49 441, 10 A, 250 V, angular
DIN 49 441, 10 A, 250 V, straight
Europe (except Switzerland)
1303.3545.12
8.1
E-1
Instrument Interfaces
R&S FMU
Instrument Interfaces
Probe Connector (PROBE POWER)
To allow the connection of probes, the R&S FMU provides the PROBE POWER power connector. It
delivers the power supply voltages +15 V and -12,6 V and ground.
The connector is also suited for powering the high-impedance probes from Agilent.
1
3
Fig. 8-1
2
Pin
Signal
1
GND
2
-12.6 V; max 150 mA
3
+15 V; max 150 mA
Pin assignments of PROBE POWER connector
Probe Compensation Connector (PROBE COMPENSATION)
To align high-impedance 10:1 probes, the R&S FMU provides a Probe Compensation
connector. A 1 V / 1 kHz square wave signal is output.
Probe Calibration Connector (PROBE CAL / PROBE CAL )
The PROBE CAL BNC connector allows you to calibrate measurement cables and probes.
The output signal is adjustable:
• Precise DC voltage to calibrate attenuation and offset (adjustable from 0 to 2.4 V)
• Pulse (comb spectrum) to calibrate the frequency response (peak 1 V, frequency selectable
from 10 kHz to 8 MHz)
• 1 kHz / 1V square wave suitable to align high-impedance 10:1 probes
The PROBE CAL connector supplies the inverted signal for the simultaneous calibration of
two probes in a differential measurement.
The signals are adjusted automatically during probe calibration. In a test setup you can also
adjust the signals manually (Probe Cal menu).
1303.3545.12
8.2
E-1
R&S FMU
Instrument Interfaces
IEC Bus Interface
The standard instrument is equipped with an IEC/IEEE Bus connector. An IEEE 488 interface connector
is located on the rear panel of the R&S FMU. An external controller for remote control of the instrument
can be connected via the IEEE 488 interface connector using a shielded cable.
Interface Characteristics
• 8-bit parallel data transfer
• bi-directional data transfer
• three-line handshake
• high data transfer rate of max. 350 kbyte/s
• up to 15 instruments can be connected
• maximal length of the interconnecting cables 15 m (single connection, 2m)
• wired-OR connection if several instruments are connected in parallel.
ATN
IFC
NRFD EOI
DIO3 DIO1
SHIELD SRQ NDAC DAV DIO4
DIO2
12
24
1
13
LOGIC GND GND(10) GND(8) GND(6) DIO8 DIO6
GND(11)
GND(9) GND(7)
REN DIO7 DIO5
Fig. 8-2
Pin assignment of IEC-Bus interface
Bus Lines
1. Data bus with 8 lines DIO 1 to DIO 8.
The transmission is bit-parallel and byte-serial in the ASCII/ISO code. DIO1 is the least significant,
DIO8 the most significant bit.
2. Control bus with 5 lines.
IFC (Interface Clear),
active low resets the interfaces of the devices connected to the default setting.
ATN (Attention),
active low signals the transmission of interface messages
inactive high signals the transmission of device messages.
SRQ (Service Request),
active low enables a device connected to send a service request to the controller.
1303.3545.12
8.3
E-1
Instrument Interfaces
R&S FMU
REN (Remote Enable),
active low permits the switch over to remote control.
EOI (End or Identify),
has two functions in connection with ATN:
active low marks the end of data transmission when ATN=high
active low triggers a parallel poll when ATN=low.
3. Handshake bus with three lines.
DAV (Data Valid),
active low signals a valid data byte on the data bus.
NRFD (Not Ready For Data),
active low signals that one of the devices connected is not ready for data transfer .
NDAC (Not Data Accepted),
active low as long as the device connected is accepting the data present on the data bus.
Interface Functions
Instruments which can be remote controlled via the IEC bus can be equipped with different interface
functions. Table 8-2 lists the interface functions appropriate for the instrument.
Table 8-2 Interface functions
Control character
Interface function
SH1
Handshake source function (source handshake), full capability
AH1
Handshake sink function (acceptor handshake), full capability
L4
Listener function, full capability, unaddress if MTA.
T6
Talker function, full capability, ability to respond to serial poll, unaddress if MLA
SR1
Service request function (Service Request), full capability
PP1
Parallel poll function, full capability
RL1
Remote/Local switch over function, full capability
DC1
Reset function (Device Clear), full capability
DT1
Trigger function (Device Trigger), full capability
C0
No controller function
IEC Bus Messages
The messages transferred via the data lines of the IEC bus can be divided into two groups:
– interface messages and
– instrument messages.
1303.3545.12
8.4
E-1
R&S FMU
Instrument Interfaces
Interface Messages
Interface messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC Bus when the "ATN" control line is
active (LOW). They are used for communication between controller and instruments and can only be
sent by the controller which currently has control of the IEC Bus.
Universal Commands
The universal commands are encoded 10 - 1F hex. They affect all instruments connected to the bus
without addressing.
Table 8-3
Universal Commands
Command
QuickBASIC command
Effect on the instrument
DCL (Device Clear)
IBCMD (controller%, CHR$(20))
Aborts the processing of the commands just
received and sets the command processing
software to a defined initial state. Does not change
the instrument settings.
IFC
IBSIC (controller%)
Resets the interfaces to the default setting.
LLO (Local Lockout)
IBCMD (controller%, CHR$(17))
The LOC/IEC ADDR key is disabled.
SPE (Serial Poll Enable)
IBCMD (controller%, CHR$(24))
Ready for serial poll.
SPD (Serial Poll Disable)
IBCMD (controller%, CHR$(25))
End of serial poll.
PPU
IBCMD (controller%, CHR$(21))
End of the parallel-poll state.
(Interface Clear)
(Parallel Poll Unconfigure)
Addressed Commands
The addressed commands are encoded 00 - 0F hex. They are only effective for instruments addressed
as listeners.
Table 8-4
Addressed Commands
Command
QuickBASIC command
Effect on the instrument
SDC (Selected Device Clear)
IBCLR (device%)
Aborts the processing of the commands just
received and sets the command processing
software to a defined initial state. Does not change
the instrument setting.
GTL (Go to Local)
IBLOC (device%)
Transition to the "Local" state (manual control).
PPC (Parallel Poll Configure)
IBPPC (device%, data%)
Configure instrument for parallel poll. Additionally,
the QuickBASIC command executes PPE/PPD.
Instrument Messages
Instrument messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC bus when the "ATN" control line is not
active. ASCII code is used.
Structure and syntax of the instrument messages are described in Chapter 5. The commands are listed
and explained in detail in Chapter 6.
1303.3545.12
8.5
E-1
Instrument Interfaces
R&S FMU
Printer Interface (LPT)
The 25-pin LPT connector on the rear panel of the Fig. 8-3 is provided for the connection of a printer.
The LPT interface is compatible with the CENTRONICS printer interface.
PE
ACK
SELECT BUSY
D4
D6
D7
D5
D0
D2
D1
D3
STROBE
13
1
25
14
GND
GND
INIT AUTOFEED
GND GND
GND GND
GND
GND
ERROR
SELECT IN
Pin
Signal
Input (I)
Output (O)
Description
1
STROBE
O
Pulse for transmitting a data byte, min. 1Os pulse width
(active LOW)
2
D0
O
Data Line 0
3
D1
O
Data Line 1
4
D2
O
Data Line 2
5
D3
O
Data Line 3
6
D4
O
Data Line 4
7
D5
O
Data Line 5
8
D6
O
Data Line 6
9
D7
O
Data Line 7
10
ACK
I
Indicates that the printer is ready to receive the next byte.
(active LOW)
11
BUSY
I
Signal is active when the printer cannot accept data.
(active HIGH)
12
PE
I
Signal is active when the paper tray is empty.
(active HIGH)
13
SELECT
I
Signal is active when the printer is selected.
(active HIGH)
14
AUTOFEED
O
When signal is active, the printer automatically performs a
linefeed after each line.
(active LOW)
15
ERROR
I
This signal is high when the printer has no paper, is not
selected or has an error status.
(active LOW)
16
INIT
O
Initialize the printer.
(active LOW)
17
SELECT IN
O
If signal is active, the codes DC1/DC3 are ignored by the
printer.
(active LOW).
18 - 25
GND
Fig. 8-3
Ground connection.
Pin assignments for the LPT connector.
1303.3545.12
8.6
E-1
R&S FMU
Instrument Interfaces
RS-232-C Interface (COM)
The standard R&S FMU is equipped with a serial interfaces (RS-232-C; COM connector at the rear of
the instrument). The interface can be set up and activated manually in the SETUP-GENERAL SETUP
menu in the COM PORTtable (Selection OWNER = INSTRUMENT).
Interface Characteristics
Serial data transmission in asynchronous mode
Bi-directional data transfer via two separate lines
Transmission rate selectable from 110 to 19200 baud
Logic '0' signal from +3 V to +15 V
Logic '1' signal from -15 V to -3 V
An external instrument (controller) can be connected.
RxD
DCD
2
1
6
DTR
TxD
SG
3 4
5
7
8
RTS
DSR
Fig. 8-4
9
RI
CTS
Pin assignment of the RS-232-C interface
Signal Lines
DCD (Data Carrier Detect),
Not used in R&S FMU.
Input; active LOW.
Using this signal, the local terminal recognizes that the modem of the remote station receives valid
signals with sufficient level. DCD is used to disable the receiver in the local terminal and prevent
reading of false data if the modem cannot interpret the signals of the remote station.
RxD (Receive Data)
Input, LOW = logic '1', HIGH = logic '0'.
Data line, local terminal receives data from remote station.
TxD (Transmit Data)
Output, LOW = logic '1', HIGH = logic '0'.
Data line, local terminal transmits data to remote station.
DTR (Data Terminal Ready),
Output, active LOW,
Indicates that the local terminal is ready to receive data.
GND
Interface ground, connected to instrument ground
1303.3545.12
8.7
E-1
Instrument Interfaces
R&S FMU
DSR (Data Set Ready),
Input, active LOW,
Indicates that the remote station is ready to receive data.
RTS (Request To Send),
Output, active LOW.
Indicates that the local terminal wants to transmit data.
CTS (Clear To Send),
Input, active LOW.
Used to tell the local terminal that the remote station is ready to receive data.
RI (Ring Indicator),
Not used in R&S FMU.
Input, active LOW.
Used by a modem to indicate that a remote station wants to establish a connection.
Transmission Parameters
To ensure error-free data transmission, the parameters of the instrument and the controller must have
the same settings. The parameters are defined in the SETUP-GENERAL SETUP menu.
Transmission rate
(baud rate)
the following transmission rates can be set in the instrument:
110, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200.
Data bits
Data transmission is in 7- or 8-bit ASCII code. The first bit
transmitted is the LSB (least significant bit).
Start bit
Each data byte starts with a start bit. The falling edge of the start
bit indicates the beginning of the data byte.
Parity bit
In order to detect errors, a parity bit may be transmitted. No
parity, even parity or odd parity may be selected. In addition, the
parity bit can be set to logic '0' or to logic '1'.
Stop bits
The transmission of a data byte is terminated by 1, 1,5 or 2 stop bits.
Example:
Transmission of character 'A' (41 hex) in 7-bit ASCII code,
with even parity and 2 stop bits:
01
02
Bit 01
Start bit
1303.3545.12
03
04
8.8
05
06
Bit 02...08
Data bits
07
08
09
10
11
Bit 09
Bit 10...11
Parity bit Stop bits
E-1
R&S FMU
Instrument Interfaces
Control Characters
For interface control, several strings are defined and control characters are reserved which are based
upon IEC Bus control.
Table 8-5 Control strings or control characters of the RS-232 interface
Control string or character
Function
'@REM'
Switch over to remote
'@LOC'
Switch over to local
'@SRQ'
Service Request SRQ ( SRQ is sent by the instrument)
'@GET'
Group Execute Trigger (GET)
'@DCL'
Reset instrument (Device Clear DCL)
<Ctrl Q> 11 Hex
Enables character output / XON
<Ctrl S> 13 Hex
Inhibits character output / XOFF
0D Hex, 0A Hex
Terminator <CR>, <LF>
Handshake
Software handshake
In the software handshake mode of operation, the data transfer is controlled using the two control
characters XON / XOFF.
The instrument uses the control character XON to indicate that it is ready to receive data. If the receive
buffer is full, it sends the XOFF character via the interface to the controller. The controller then interrupts
the data output until it receives another XON from the instrument. The controller indicates to the
instrument that it is ready to receive data in the same way.
Cable required for software handshake
The connection of the instrument with a controller for software handshake is made by crossing the data
lines. The following wiring diagram applies to a controller with a 9-pin or 25-pin configuration.
Instrument
9-pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Fig. 8-5
Controller
9-pin
------------RxD / TxD--------------------------TxD / RxD--------------------------GND / GND-------------
Instrument
9-pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
3
2
6
5
4
8
7
9
Controller
25-pin
------------RxD / TxD--------------------------TxD / RxD--------------------------GND / GND-------------
8
2
3
6
7
20
5
4
22
Wiring of the data lines for software handshake
1303.3545.12
8.9
E-1
Instrument Interfaces
R&S FMU
Hardware handshake
For hardware handshake, the instrument indicates that it is ready to receive data via the lines DTR and
RTS. A logic '0' on both lines means 'ready' and a logic '1' means 'not ready'. The RTS line is always
active (logic '0') as long as the serial interface is switched on. The DTR line thus controls the readiness
of the instrument to receive data.
The readiness of the remote station to receive data is reported to the instrument via the CTS and DSR
line. A logic '0' on both lines activates the data output and a logic '1' on both lines stops the data output
of the instrument. The data output takes place via the TxD line.
Cable for hardware handshake
The connection of the instrument to a controller is made with a so-called zero modem cable. Here, the
data, control and acknowledge lines must be crossed. The following wiring diagram applies to a
controller with a 9-pin or 25-pin configuration.
Instrument
9-pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Fig. 8-6
Controller
9-pin
------------RxD / TxD--------------------------TxD / RxD--------------------------DTR /DSR--------------------------GND / GND------------------------DSR / DTR-------------------------RTS / CTS-------------------------CTS / RTS--------------
Instrument
9-pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
3
2
6
5
4
8
7
9
Controller
25-pin
------------RxD / TxD--------------------------TxD / RxD--------------------------DTR /DSR--------------------------GND / GND------------------------DSR / DTR-------------------------RTS / CTS-------------------------CTS / RTS--------------
8
2
3
6
7
20
5
4
22
Wiring of the data, control and acknowledge lines for hardware handshake
The configuration of the user ports takes place in the SETUP menu (SETUP key) in the GENERAL
SETUP sub-menu.
Monitor Connector (MONITOR)
5
10
15
Fig. 8-7
1303.3545.12
6
1
11
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
R
6
GND
11
(NC)
2
G
7
GND
12
(NC)
3
B
8
GND
13
HSYNC
4
(NC)
9
GND
14
VSYNC
5
GND
10
GND
15
(NC)
Pin assignments of the MONITOR connector.
8.10
E-1
R&S FMU
Instrument Interfaces
External Trigger Input (EXT TRIG)
The EXT TRIG connector is used for controlling the measurement via an external signal. The trigger
level can be set from 0.5 V to 3.5 V. The default value 1.4 V is suitable for TTL signals. Typical input
impedance is 10 kOhm.
Mouse Connector (MOUSE)
A PS/2 connector is provided at the rear panel to connect a PS/2 mouse:
Fig 8-8
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
MOUSEDATA
KEYBOARDDATA
MOUSEGND
MOUSEVD5
MOUSECLK
KEYBOARDCLK
Pin assignments for the MOUSE connector.
USB Connector (USB
)
Two USB dual connectors are provided, one at the rear panel and one at the front panel of the R&S
FMU. These USB connectors are used to connect up to four USB devices at a time.
USB connector
Front panel, both connectors
Rear panal upper connector
Rear panal lower connector
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Standard
USB 2.0
USB 1.1
USB 2.0
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
+ 5 V USB0
USBDATA0 USBDATA0 +
GND
+ 5 V USB1
USBDATA1 USBDATA1 +
GND
Fig. 8-9
USB connector assignment
Note:
Passive USB connection cables should not be longer than 1 m.
1303.3545.12
8.11
E-1
Instrument Interfaces
R&S FMU
Reference Output/Input (REF IN and REF OUT)
For operation with an external reference, the internal reference oscillator is then synchronized to the 10MHz reference applied to the connector. The necessary level is > 0 dBm.
The internal 10 MHz reference signal is also available at the REF OUT connector and thus provides the
capability of, e.g., synchronization of external instruments to the R&S FMU. The output level is typ. +10
dBm.
Selection between internal and external reference is possible in the SETUP menu.
LAN Interface
The the LAN interface allows the instrument to be connected to local networks. The pin assignment of
the RJ45 connector supports double-paired category 5 UTP/STP cables in star configuration. (UTP
means unshielded twisted pair, and STP stands for shielded twisted pair).
1303.3545.12
8.12
E-1
R&S FMU
Contents - Error Messages
Contents - Chapter 9 "Error Messages"
9 Error Messages ................................................................................................... 9.1
SCPI-Specific Error Messages ........................................................................................................9.2
Device-Specific Messages...............................................................................................................9.8
1303.3545.12
I-9.1
E-1
Contents - Error Messages
1303.3545.12
R&S FMU
I-9.2
E-1
R&S FMU
Error Messages
9 Error Messages
Error messages are entered in the error/event queue of the status reporting system in the remote
control mode and can be queried with the command SYSTem:ERRor?. The answer format of R&S FMU
to the command is as follows:
<error code>, "<error text with queue query>;
<remote control command concerned>"
The indication of the remote control command with prefixed semicolon is optional.
Example:
The command "TEST:COMMAND" generates the following answer to the query SYSTem:ERRor? :
-113,"Undefined header;TEST:COMMAND"
The subsequent list contains the description of error texts displayed on the instrument.
Distinction is made between error messages defined by SCPI, which are marked by negative error
codes, and the device-specific error messages for which positive error codes are used.
The right-hand column in the following tables contains the error text in bold which is entered in the
error/event queue and can be read out by means of query SYSTem:ERRor?. A short explanation of the
error cause is given below. The left-hand column contains the associated error code.
1303.3545.12
9.1
E-1
Error Messages
R&S FMU
SCPI-Specific Error Messages
No Error
Error code
0
Error text in the case of queue poll
Error explanation
No error
This message is output if the error queue does not contain any entries.
Command Error - Faulty command; sets bit 5 in the ESR register.
Error code
Error text in the case of queue poll
Error explanation
-100
Command Error
The command is faulty or invalid.
-101
Invalid Character
The command contains an invalid sign.
Example: A header contains an ampersand, "SENSe&".
-102
Syntax error
The command is invalid.
Example: The command contains block data the instrument does not accept.
-103
Invalid separator
The command contains an imallowed sign instead of a separator.
Example: A semicolon is missing after the command.
-104
Data type error
The command contains an invalid value indication.
Example: ON is indicated instead of a numeric value for frequency setting.
-105
GET not allowed
A Group Execute Trigger (GET) is within a command line.
-108
Parameter not allowed
The command contains too many parameters.
Example: Command SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer permits only one frequency indication.
1303.3545.12
9.2
E-1
R&S FMU
Error Messages
Continuation: Command Error
Error code
Error text in the case of queue poll
Error explanation
-109
Missing parameter
The command contains too few parameters.
Example: The command SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer requires a frequency indication.
-110
Command header error
The header of the command is faulty.
-111
Header separator error
The header contains an imallowed separator.
Example: the header is not followed by a "White Space", "*ESE255"
-112
Program mnemonic too long
The header contains more than 12 characters.
-113
Undefined header
The header is not defined for the instrument.
Example: *XYZ is undefined for every instrument.
-114
Header suffix out of range
The header contains an imallowed numeric suffix.
Example: SENSe3 does not exist in the instrument.
-120
Numeric data error
The command contains a faulty numeric parameter.
-121
Invalid character in number
A number contains an invalid character.
Example: An "A" in a decimal number or a "9" in an octal number.
-123
Exponent too large
The absolute value of the exponent is greater than 32000.
-124
Too many digits
The number includes too many digits.
-128
Numeric data not allowed
The command includes a number which is not allowed at this position.
Example: The command INPut:COUPling requires indication of a text parameter.
-130
Suffix error
The command contains a faulty suffix.
-131
Invalid suffix
The suffix is invalid for this instrument.
Example: nHz is not defined.
-134
Suffix too long
The suffix contains more than 12 characters.
-138
Suffix not allowed
A suffix is not allowed for this command or at this position of the command.
Example: The command *RCL does not permit a suffix to be indicated.
-140
Character data error
The command contains a faulty text parameter
-141
Invalid character data
The text parameter either contains an invalid character or it is invalid for this command.
Example: Write error with parameter indication;INPut:IQ:TYPE XIQ.
1303.3545.12
9.3
E-1
Error Messages
R&S FMU
Continuation: Command Error
Error code
Error text in the case of queue poll
Error explanation
-144
Character data too long
The text parameter contains more than 12 characters.
-148
Character data not allowed
The text parameter is not allowed for this command or at this position of the command.
Example: The command *RCL requires a number to be indicated.
-150
String data error
The command contains a faulty string.
-151
Invalid string data
The command contains a faulty string.
Example: An END message has been received prior to the terminating apostrophe.
-158
String data not allowed
The command contains a valid string at a position which is not allowed.
Example: A text parameter is set in quotation marks, INPut:IQ:TYPE "IQ"
-160
Block data error
The command contains faulty block data.
-161
Invalid block data
The command contains faulty block data.
Example: An END message was received prior to reception of the expected number of data.
-168
Block data not allowed
The command contains valid block data at an imallowed position.
Example: The command *RCL requires a number to be indicated.
-170
Expression error
The command contains an invalid mathematical expression.
-171
Invalid expression
The command contains an invalid mathematical expression.
Example: The expression contains mismatching parentheses.
-178
Expression data not allowed
The command contains a mathematical expression at an imallowed position.
1303.3545.12
9.4
E-1
R&S FMU
Error Messages
Execution Error - Error on execution of a command; sets bit 4 in the ESR register
Error code
Error text in the case of queue poll
Error explanation
-200
Execution error
Error on execution of the command.
-201
Invalid while in local
The command is not executable while the device is in local due to a hard local control.
Example: The device receives a command which would change the rotary knob state, but the device is
in local so the command can not be executed.
-202
Settings lost due to rtl
A setting associated with hard local control was lost when the device changed to LOCS from REMS or to
LWLS from RWLS.
-210
Trigger error
Error on triggering the device.
-211
Trigger ignored
The trigger (GET, *TRG or trigger signal) was ignored because of device timing considerations.
Example: The device was not ready to respond.
-212
Arm ignored
An arming signal was ignored by the device.
-213
Init ignored
Measurement initialisation was ignored as another measurement was already in progress.
-214
Trigger deadlock
The trigger source for the initiation of measurement is set to GET and subsequent measurement is
received. The measurement cannot be started until a GET is received, but the GET would cause an
interrupted-error)
-215
Arm deadlock
The trigger source for the initiation of measurement is set to GET and subsequent measurement is
received. The measurement cannot be started until a GET is received, but the GET would cause an
interrupted-error.
-220
Parameter error
The command contains a faulty or invalid parameter.
-221
Settings conflict
There is a conflict between setting of parameter value and instrument state.
-222
Data out of range
The parameter value lies out of the allowed range of the instrument.
-223
Too much data
The command contains too many data.
Example: The instrument does not have sufficient storage space.
1303.3545.12
9.5
E-1
Error Messages
R&S FMU
Continuation: Execution Error
Error code
Error text in the case of queue poll
Error explanation
-230
Data corrupt or stale
The data are incomplete or invalid.
Example: The instrument has aborted a measurement.
-231
Data questionable
The measurement accuracy is suspect.
-240
Hardware error
The command cannot be executed due to problems with the instrument hardware.
-241
Hardware missing
Hardware is missing.
Example: An option is not fitted.
-250
Mass storage error
A mass storage error occured.
-251
Missing mass storage
The mass storage is missing.
Example: An option is not installed.
-252
Missing media
The media is missing.
Example: There is no floppy in the floppy disk drive.
-253
Corrupt media
The media is corrupt.
Example: The floppy is bad or has the wrong format.
-254
Media full
The media is full.
Example: There is no room on the floppy.
-255
Directory full
The media directory is full.
-256
File name not found
The file name cannot be found on the media.
-257
File name error
The file name is wrong.
Example: An attempt is made to copy to a duplicate file name.
-258
Media protected
The media is protected.
Example: The write-protect tab on the floppy is present.
-260
Expression error
The expression contains an error.
1303.3545.12
9.6
E-1
R&S FMU
Error Messages
Device Specific Error; sets bit 3 in the ESR register
Error code
-300
Error test in the case of queue poll
Error explanation
Device-specific error
R&S FMU-specific error not defined in greater detail.
-310
System error
This error message suggests an error within the instrument. Please inform the R&S Service.
-313
Calibration memory lost
Loss of the non-volatile data stored using the *CAL? command. This error occurs when the correction
data recording has failed.
-330
Self-test failed
The selftest could not be executed.
-350
Queue overflow
This error code is entered in the queue instead of the actual error code if the queue is full. It indicates
that an error has occurred but not been accepted. The queue can accept 5 entries.
Query Error - Error in data request; sets bit 2 in the ESR register
Error code
Error text in the case of queue poll
Error explanation
-400
Query error
General error occurring when data are requested by a query.
-410
Query INTERRUPTED
The query has been interrupted.
Example: After a query, the instrument receives new data before the response has been sent completely.
-420
Query UNTERMINATED
The query is incomplete.
Example: The instrument is addressed as a talker and receives incomplete data.
-430
Query DEADLOCKED
The query cannot be processed.
Example: The input and output buffers are full, the instrument cannot continue operation.
-440
Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response
A query is in the same command line after a query which requests an indefinite response.
1303.3545.12
9.7
E-1
Error Messages
R&S FMU
Device-Specific Messages
Error code
Error text in the case of queue poll
Error explanation
2022
OPTIONS.INI invalid
This message is output when an error has been recognized in the file OPTIONS.INI which contains the
clearing codes for retrofitable firmware applications. If this file is not correctly recognized, all firmware
applications are blocked for this instrument.
2033
Printer Not Available
This message is output when the selected printer is not included in the list of available output devices. A
possible cause is that the required printer driver is missing or incorrectly installed.
2034
CPU Temperature is too high
This message is output when the temperature of the processor exceeds 70 °C.
1303.3545.12
9.8
E-1
R&S FMU
Index
10
Index
Note:
All softkeys are listed alphabetically under keyword "Softkey" with their names. The page
numbers 4.xxx refer to the detailed description of the softkeys in chapter 4. Generally, the
number of the page in chapter 6 containing the equivalent remote control command is
given in addition.
A list of softkeys and equivalent remote control commands or command sequences is
given in chapter 6, section "Table of Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment".
Chapter 6 also contains an alphabetical list of all remote control commands.
*
C
* (enhancement lable) ...................................................4.55
...........................................................4.65, 4.67, 4.68, 4.73
CCDF function ............................................................ 4.122
Center frequency
Step size................................................................. 4.36
Channel
power ..................................................................... 4.111
bandwidth ........................................4.108, 4.117, 4.127
number ...................................................... 4.107, 4.108
spacing ................................................................. 4.109
Channel power measurement ..................................... 4.103
Characters, special ......................................................... 6.2
Clear/Write mode .......................................................... 4.54
Colon ............................................................................ 5.14
Color................................................................ 4.148, 4.187
Color printout .............................................................. 4.187
COM interface...................................................... 4.154, 8.7
Comma ......................................................................... 5.14
Command
# ............................................................................. 5.14
addressed................................................................. 8.5
colon....................................................................... 5.14
comma.................................................................... 5.14
description ................................................................ 6.1
header .................................................................... 5.10
line.......................................................................... 5.12
long form ................................................................ 5.11
overlapping execution............................................. 5.17
programming examples ............................................ 7.1
query ...................................................................... 5.12
question mark ................................................ 5.12, 5.14
quotation mark........................................................ 5.14
recognition.............................................................. 5.16
sequence................................................................ 5.17
short form ............................................................... 5.11
structure ................................................................... 5.9
suffix....................................................................... 5.11
syntax elements...................................................... 5.14
univeral..................................................................... 8.5
white space ............................................................ 5.14
Common commands ....................................................... 6.4
CONDition register part................................................. 5.19
Configuration .............................................................. 4.149
save...................................................................... 4.167
Continue single sweep.................................................. 4.49
Continuous sweep ........................................................ 4.48
Control characters .......................................................... 8.9
Copy
file......................................................................... 4.179
limit line..................................................................4.135
trace ....................................................................... 4.59
Correction data ............................................................. 4.64
Create directory .......................................................... 4.178
Cumulative distribution function .................................. 4.122
1
1 - 2 (trace info).............................................................4.63
1 - 3 (trace info).............................................................4.63
2
......................................................................................8.12
A
Abort
recording of correction data.....................................4.66
ACP measurement ......................................................4.102
Addressed command ......................................................8.5
Adjacent-channel power
number of channels...............................................4.108
........................................................................................8.2
AM modulation depth ..................................................4.128
Amplitude probability distribution function....................4.122
Amplitude statistics .....................................................4.120
Annotation...................................................................4.146
APD function ...............................................................4.122
Ascii # ...........................................................................5.14
Autopeak detector .........................................................4.62
...............................................................................8.12
......................................................................................8.12
Average detector.................................................. 4.61, 4.62
Averaging........................................................... 4.54, 4.100
continuous sweep ...................................................4.55
lin/log ......................................................................4.57
single sweep ...........................................................4.55
sweep count............................................................4.55
B
Bandwidth
occupied ................................................................ 4.117
Baud rate ....................................................................4.154
Block data .....................................................................5.14
Boolean parameter........................................................5.13
Brightness ...................................................................4.148
Brightness, Screen......................................................4.188
1303.3545.12
10.1
E-1
Index
R&S FMU
D
H
Date ............................................................................4.146
DCL...............................................................................5.16
Default
display settings .....................................................4.147
scalings of x- and y-axis........................................4.124
Delete
file .........................................................................4.179
limit line.................................................................4.136
Detector
autopeak .................................................................4.60
average...................................................................4.61
max peak................................................................. 4.60
min peak.................................................................. 4.60
RMS........................................................................4.60
sample ....................................................................4.60
Device reset (overall) ....................................................4.22
....................................................................................4.181
Display
brightness .............................................................4.148
color......................................................................4.148
date.......................................................................4.146
deactivation during single sweep ............................4.50
power-save mode..................................................4.147
saturation ..............................................................4.148
time.......................................................................4.146
.............................................................................4.148
title ........................................................................4.146
Display line..................................................................4.142
DISPLAY LINE ..............................................................6.75
Distribution function.....................................................4.122
Double dagger...............................................................5.14
Hardcopy
screen .................................................................. 4.183
Hardware Adjustment ................................................. 4.166
Header.......................................................................... 5.10
Hotkey
FFT....................................................................... 6.100
SCREEN A/B.......................................................... 6.87
Hue, Screen................................................................ 4.189
I
IEC/IEEE bus
address................................................................. 4.153
command description................................................ 6.1
interface.................................................................... 8.3
interface functions .................................................... 8.4
programming examples ............................................ 7.1
Initial configuration........................................................ 4.22
Input
EXT TRIGGER/GATE ............................................ 8.11
REF IN ................................................................... 8.12
Instrument functions ....................................................... 4.1
Interface functions
IEC/IEEE bus ........................................................... 8.4
Interfaces........................................................................ 8.2
Intermodulation product .............................................. 4.129
Interrupt ........................................................................ 5.31
IST flag ......................................................................... 5.22
K
E
Key
CAL ........................................................................ 4.64
DISP..................................................................... 4.145
ESC........................................................................ 6.19
FILE...................................................................... 4.167
FREQ ..................................................................... 4.35
LINES........................................................ 4.133, 4.142
MEAS ..................................................................... 4.96
MKR ....................................................................... 4.74
MKR FCTN............................................................. 4.80
MKR to ................................................................... 4.90
PRESET ................................................4.22, 6.7, 6.150
SETUP ................................................................. 4.149
TRACE ................................................................... 4.53
Editing
limit line.................................................................4.137
ENABle register part......................................................5.19
Enabling the front panel keys ........................................4.24
Error messages.................................................... 4.163, 9.1
Error-queue query .........................................................5.32
ESE (event status enable register) ................................5.22
ESR (event status register) ...........................................5.22
EVENt register part .......................................................5.19
Event status enable register (ESE) ...............................5.22
Event status register (ESR)...........................................5.22
EXT TRIGGER/GATE input ..........................................8.11
................................................................................. 8.2
F
File
copy ......................................................................4.179
delete ....................................................................4.179
rename..................................................................4.179
sort........................................................................4.180
Firmware version.........................................................4.162
Frequency .....................................................................4.35
display window........................................................4.34
Line.......................................................................4.143
offset.......................................................................4.37
switching off display ..............................................4.146
G
GET (Group Execute Trigger) .......................................5.16
1303.3545.12
L
Level
line........................................................................ 4.143
offset (phase noise) ................................................ 4.84
Limit
ACP measurement ............................................... 4.113
evaluation range ..................................................... 4.99
probability range ................................................... 4.124
Limit check.................................................................. 4.135
ACP measurement ............................................... 4.112
Limit Check................................................................. 4.135
Limit line
copy.......................................................................4.135
delete ................................................................... 4.136
domain.................................................................. 4.138
edit ....................................................................... 4.137
limit check............................................................. 4.135
10.2
E-1
R&S FMU
offset.....................................................................4.136
save ......................................................................4.141
scaling ................................................................... 4.139
select ....................................................................4.134
shift .......................................................................4.141
unit ........................................................................ 4.139
value .....................................................................4.141
Line
Frequency (Frequency Line 1, 2) ..........................4.143
level (Display Line 1,2)..........................................4.143
limit .......................................................................4.134
threshold .................................................................4.92
Time (Time Line 1, 2) ............................................4.143
Lines ...........................................................................4.143
LO exclude........................................................... 4.93, 4.95
Logo............................................................................4.146
Lower case......................................................................6.2
LPT interface...................................................................8.6
Index
O
Occupied bandwidth ......................................................4.117
Offset
frequency................................................................ 4.37
limit line ................................................................ 4.136
phase noise ............................................................ 4.84
Operating time ............................................................ 4.162
option
Order number ............................................................. 4.161
................................................................................. 8.2
............................................................................... 8.12
............................................................................... 8.10
REF OUT................................................................ 8.12
Overwrite mode ............................................................ 4.54
P
M
Maintenance....................................................................8.1
Manual operation
return to .............................................................5.4, 5.6
switch to..................................................................4.24
Marker...........................................................................4.74
center frequency to .................................................4.91
N dB Down..............................................................4.86
normal.....................................................................4.74
peak............................................................... 4.81, 4.90
reference level to ....................................................4.91
search limit..............................................................4.92
............................................................. 4.76, 4.79, 4.89
Max hold .......................................................................4.54
Max peak detector.........................................................4.62
Maximum peak value ..................................................4.100
Maximum search ...........................................................4.90
Maximum value .............................................................4.98
Mean power (GSM burst) ..............................................4.98
Mean value ...................................................................4.98
Measurement example
ACP with user-specific channel configuration........4.115
adjacent-channel power for a specific standard.....4.114
CCDF of a IS95 BTS signal ..................................4.125
occupied bandwidth of a PDC signal.....................4.119
signal/noise power density (C/No) of an IS95 CDMA
signal ....................................................................4.116
Measurement of Carrier/Noise Ratio C/N and C/No ....... 4.126
Measurement, save.....................................................4.167
Messages....................................................................4.163
Min hold ........................................................................4.56
Min peak detector..........................................................4.62
Minimum search ............................................................4.93
Mobile radio standard..................................................4.104
Modulation depth.........................................................4.128
Monitor
connector ................................................................8.10
Mouse ...........................................................................8.11
connector ................................................................8.11
......................................................................................8.11
Mouse connector.............................................................8.2
Packing........................................................................... 8.1
Parallel poll ................................................................... 5.32
Parallel poll enable register (PPE) ................................ 5.22
Parameter
block data ............................................................... 5.14
boolean................................................................... 5.13
numerical values..................................................... 5.13
string ...................................................................... 5.14
text ......................................................................... 5.14
Password
service functions................................................... 4.165
Path ............................................................................ 4.178
Peak search......................................................... 4.81, 4.90
Phase noise measurement ........................................... 4.83
Power bandwidth percentage...................................... 4.117
Power cables .................................................................. 8.1
Power measurement..................................................... 4.96
CP/ACP ................................................................ 4.102
occupied bandwidth.................................................4.117
signal amplitude statistics ..................................... 4.120
Time domain........................................................... 4.97
trace ..................................................................... 4.113
Power, mean................................................................. 4.98
PPE (parallel poll enable register)................................. 5.22
Preset instrument.......................................................... 4.22
Print
start ...................................................................... 4.183
Printer
configuration ......................................................... 4.182
connection ................................................................ 8.6
interface.................................................................... 8.6
Probe Power connector .................................................. 8.2
PTRansition register part .............................................. 5.19
Q
Query................................................................... 5.12, 5.32
Question mark ..................................................... 5.12, 5.14
Quotation mark ............................................................. 5.14
R
N
Noise measurement ......................................................4.81
......................................................................................8.10
NTRansition register part...............................................5.19
Numerical values (command) ........................................5.13
Recording the correction data ....................................... 4.64
Reference
external................................................................. 4.150
fixed........................................................................ 4.77
frequency................................................................ 4.77
level to marker level................................................ 4.91
Reference level
1303.3545.12
10.3
E-1
Index
R&S FMU
position ...................................................................4.42
to marker level ........................................................4.91
Reference point
frequency ................................................................4.77
frequency (phase noise)..........................................4.85
level ........................................................................4.77
offset.................................................................4.77
level (phase noise) ..................................................4.84
offset.................................................................4.84
time.........................................................................4.78
Reference value
channel power........................................................ 4.105
time domain power..................................................4.99
Remote control
basics .......................................................................5.1
IEC/IEEE bus............................................................5.4
RS-232-C..................................................................5.5
switch over................................................................5.3
Rename
directory ................................................................4.179
file .........................................................................4.179
Reset
device .....................................................................4.22
status reporting system ...........................................5.33
RMS detector ....................................................... 4.60, 4.62
RMS value ....................................................................4.98
RS-232-C
configuration .........................................................4.154
interface ....................................................................8.7
transmission parameters ...........................................8.8
% POWER BANDWIDTH .......................... 4.117, 6.127
0.1 * RBW..........................................4.36, 6.119, 6.120
0.1 * SPAN ........................................4.36, 6.119, 6.120
0.5 * RBW..........................................4.36, 6.119, 6.120
0.5 * SPAN ........................................4.36, 6.119, 6.120
2 FILE LISTS........................................................ 4.180
...................................................................... 6.13, 6.14
ACP LIMIT CHECK ..................................... 4.112, 6.30
ACP REF SETTINGS .......................................... 4.109
ACP REF SETTINGS ................................ 6.125, 6.126
ADJ CHAN BANDWIDTH .......................... 4.108, 6.124
ADJUST SETTINGS..........................4.127, 6.73, 6.125
ADJUST SETTINGS (occupied bandwidth) 4.118, 6.125
ADJUST SETTINGS (power measurements)4.112, 6.125
ALL MARKER OFF................................4.79, 6.10, 6.38
AMPERE ..................................................... 4.42, 6.164
ANNOTATION ON/OFF............................... 4.146, 6.84
APD ON/OFF ......................................4.122, 6.71, 6.73
ASCII FILE EXPORT..... 4.58, 4.181, 6.91, 6.103, 6.109
AUTO SELECT............................................ 4.61, 6.116
AUTOSCALE................................................. 4.43, 6.89
AVERAGE ...........................................4.54, 6.88, 6.111
AVERAGE ON/OFF........... 4.100, 6.59, 6.62, 6.64, 6.65
AVG MODE LOG/LIN ..........................4.57, 6.68, 6.112
BALANCED ON/OFF.............................4.33, 4.72, 6.99
BLANK .......................................................... 4.56, 6.88
BRIGHTNESS ..........................4.148, 4.188, 6.85, 6.93
C/N .............................................................. 4.127, 6.57
C/No ...................................................4.126 4.127, 6.57
CAL ABORT .................................................. 4.66, 6.78
CAL CORR ON/OFF............4.66, 4.69, 4.71, 4.74, 6.80
PROBE CORR ON/OFF ......................................... 4.65
CAL RESULTS ......................................4.67, 4.74, 6.80
CAL TOTAL................................................... 4.66, 6.78
CAPTURE BOTH DOM ............................... 4.27, 6.117
CCDF ON/OFF ....................................4.122, 6.71, 6.73
CENTER...................................................... 4.34, 6.119
CENTER = MKR FREQ ................................. 4.92, 6.45
CHAN PWR / HZ ......................................... 4.111, 6.56
CHAN PWR ACP........................................... 4.103, 6.57
CHANNEL BANDWIDTH.................4.117, 4.127, 6.124
CHEBYCHEV .............................................. 4.29, 6.135
CLEAR ALL MESSAGES .......................... 4.163, 6.148
CLEAR/WRITE ....................................4.54, 4.111, 6.88
COLOR ON/OFF ......................................... 4.187, 6.94
COLORS ................................................... 4.183, 4.187
COM INTERFACE..................................... 4.154, 6.147
COMMENT.................................................. 4.184, 6.96
CONFIGURE NETWORK ..................................... 4.157
CONT MEAS ............................................... 4.125, 6.97
CONTINUE SGL SWEEP.............................. 4.49, 6.97
CONTINUOUS SWEEP................................. 4.48, 6.97
COPY ........................................................ 4.179, 6.104
COPY LIMIT LINE .........................................4.133, 6.20
COPY TRACE ............................................. 4.59, 6.152
CUT...................................................................... 4.179
PASTE ................................................................. 4.179
COUPLING RATIO ...................................... 4.47, 6.113
CP/ACP ABS/REL .................................... 4.111, 6.124
CP/ACP CONFIG ..............................4.107, 6.30, 6.126
CP/ACP ON/OFF.................................4.103, 6.53, 6.57
CP/ACP STANDARD................................... 4.104, 6.53
DATA SET CLEAR .................................... 4.176, 6.103
DATA SET LIST ................................................... 4.176
DATAENTRY OPAQUE........................................ 4.146
dBm............................................................. 4.42, 6.164
dBmV .......................................................... 4.42, 6.164
dBpW .......................................................... 4.42, 6.164
dBµA ........................................................... 4.42, 6.164
dBµV ........................................................... 4.42, 6.164
DECIM SEP................................4.59, 4.80, 4.181, 6.91
S
Sample detector ............................................................4.62
Sample number ............................................................ 4.123
Saturation....................................................................4.148
Saturation, Screen ......................................................4.189
Save
configuration .........................................................4.167
limit line.................................................................4.141
measurement ........................................................4.167
Scaling
limit line.................................................................. 4.139
x- and y-axis (signal statistic) ................................4.123
SCPI
conformity information ................................................. 6.1
introduction ...............................................................5.9
version ......................................................................5.1
Screen
brightness .............................................................4.188
hue........................................................................4.189
Saturation .............................................................4.189
Search
minimum .................................................................4.93
peak............................................................... 4.81, 4.90
PEAK EXCURSION ....................................... 4.88, 4.93
range.......................................................................4.92
Selftest........................................................................4.165
Serial interface ................................................................8.7
configuration .........................................................4.154
Serial number..............................................................4.161
Serial poll ......................................................................5.31
Service functions.........................................................4.164
Service request (SRQ) ......................................... 5.21, 5.31
Service request enable register (SRE) ..........................5.21
Setup ..........................................................................4.149
general..................................................................4.153
Signal amplitude statistics ...........................................4.120
Single sweep.................................................................4.48
Softkey
1303.3545.12
10.4
E-1
R&S FMU
Index
DEFAULT COLORS............................ 4.147, 6.85, 6.92
DEFAULT CONFIG.................................... 4.175, 6.108
DEFAULT COUPLING ................................. 4.47, 6.113
DEFAULT SETTINGS.................................. 4.123, 6.72
DELETE.......................................... 4.179, 6.105, 6.107
DELETE LIMIT LINE.................................... 4.136, 6.20
DELETE VALUE ...................................................4.141
DETECTOR ................................................. 4.61, 6.116
DETECTOR AUTOPEAK............................. 4.62, 6.116
DETECTOR AVERAGE ............................... 4.62, 6.116
DETECTOR MAX PEAK .............................. 4.62, 6.116
DETECTOR MIN PEAK ............................... 4.62, 6.116
DETECTOR RMS ........................................ 4.62, 6.116
DETECTOR SAMPLE.................................. 4.62, 6.116
DEVICE 1/2 ..........4.183, 6.94, 6.95, 6.96, 6.106, 6.146
DEVICE SETUP....................................................4.185
DIAGRAM FULL SIZE.................................. 4.105, 6.87
DISPLAY LINE 1...................................................4.143
DISPLAY PWR SAVE.................................. 4.147, 6.86
EDIT ACP LIMITS....4.113, 6.22, 6.23, 6.24, 6.25, 6.26,
............................................................. 6.27, 6.28, 6.30
EDIT COMMENT ............................ 4.174, 6.104, 6.108
EDIT LIMIT LINE4.138, 6.21, 6.31, 6.32, 6.34, 6.36, 6.37
EDIT PATH .......................... 4.174, 4.178, 6.103, 6.106
ENABLE ALL ITEMS ................................. 4.175, 6.107
ENTER PASSWORD................................. 4.165, 6.149
EXCLUDE LO ................................................ 4.94, 4.96
EXTERN ........................................... 4.51, 6.162, 6.163
FILE MANAGER ........................................ 4.177, 6.103
FIRMWARE UPDATE ...........................................4.166
FLATOP....................................................... 4.28, 6.149
FREE RUN .................................................. 4.51, 6.163
FREQ RESP ON/OFF.................................... 4.71, 6.79
FREQUENCY DOMAIN ..........................................4.26
FREQUENCY LINE 1/2................................ 4.143, 6.75
FREQUENCY OFFSET ............................... 4.37, 6.120
FULL SPAN ................................................. 4.39, 6.120
GAIN&OFFS ON/OFF.................................... 4.71, 6.79
GAUSSIAN .................................................. 4.28, 6.135
GENERAL SETUP................................................4.153
GPIB .....................................................................4.153
GPIB ADDRESS ........................................ 4.153, 6.145
HAMMING ................................................... 4.29, 6.135
HAN ............................................................. 4.29, 6.135
HARDCOPY ABORT ..............................................6.92
HARDWARE INFO ............................... 4.161, 6.6, 6.81
HOLD CONT...........................................................4.57
I LEVEL ............................................ 4.51, 6.162, 6.163
I ONLY ........................................................... 4.32, 4.71
I/Q INPUT 50L / 1ML .................................... 4.72, 6.99
I/Q LEVEL.................................................... 4.52, 6.162
I+J*Q.............................................................. 4.32, 4.71
ID STRING FACTORY..........................................4.153
ID STRING USER.................................................4.153
INSERT VALUE ....................................................4.141
INSTALL OPTION.................................................4.158
INSTALL PRINTER...............................................4.184
IQ INPUT 50L / 1ML ..............................................4.33
IQ PATH .................................................................4.32
ITEMS TO SAVE/RECALL......................... 4.175, 6.107
LAST SPAN ............................................................4.39
LEFT LIMIT.................................. 4.89, 4.93, 6.43, 6.44
LIMIT ON/OFF ............................................... 4.99, 6.43
LOCAL ............................................................. 4.24, 5.6
LOGO ON/OFF ............................................ 4.146, 6.86
LOWPASS ..............................................................4.33
MAGNITUDE ................................................. 4.27, 4.31
MAGNITUDE PHASE .............................................4.28
MAKE DIRECTORY................................... 4.178, 6.105
MANUAL.................................................................4.36
MARKER 1 to 4................... 4.76, 6.16, 6.42, 6.43, 6.44
MARKER NORM/DELTA ...................... 4.76, 6.13, 6.15
MAX HOLD..........................................4.54, 4.110, 6.88
MAX HOLD ON/OFF ......... 4.100, 6.60, 6.62, 6.64, 6.66
MEAN............................................................ 4.98, 6.60
MIN........................................................4.94, 6.15, 6.41
MIN HOLD..................................................... 4.57, 6.88
................................... 4.77, 4.80, 4.90, 4.94, 6.15, 6.42
MKR AND DELTA1 ....................................... 4.77, 6.13
MKR FILE EXPORT ............................................... 4.80
MODULATION DEPTH........................4.128, 6.47, 6.48
MULT CARR ACP...................................................4.102
N dB DOWN .................................4.87, 6.48, 6.49, 6.50
NAME.............. 4.138, 6.19, 6.20, 6.21, 6.31, 6.35, 6.37
NETWORK LOGIN ............................................... 4.157
NEW LIMIT LINE ..... 4.138, 6.19, 6.20, 6.21, 6.31, 6.34,
.............................................................................. 6.36
NEXT MIN ....................................4.94, 6.14, 6.41, 6.42
NEXT MIN LEFT............................................ 4.94, 6.13
NEXT MIN RIGHT ......................................... 4.94, 6.14
NEXT PEAK ................ 4.92 6.13, 6.14, 6.15, 6.39, 6.40
NEXT PEAK LEFT......................................... 4.92, 6.13
NEXT PEAK RIGHT ...................................... 4.92, 6.14
NO OF SAMPLES ....................................... 4.123, 6.72
NO. OF ADJ CHAN .........................4.107, 6.123, 6.126
NO. OF TX CHAN ..................................... 4.108, 6.127
NOISE MEAS ................................................ 4.82, 6.50
NUMBER OF SWEEPS............................. 4.100, 6.132
OCCUP BW ON/OFF ..........................4.117, 6.53, 6.57
OCCUPIED BANDWIDTH ........................... 4.117, 6.57
OPTIMIZED COLORS ................................. 4.188, 6.92
OPTIONS ............................................................. 4.157
PEAK.......................... 4.82, 4.91, 4.98, 6.14, 6.40, 6.63
PEAK EXCURSION...............................4.89, 4.94, 6.42
PEAK LIST .................................................... 4.88, 6.46
PEAK LIST OFF ............................................ 4.89, 6.46
PEAK SEARCH.....................................4.86, 4.89, 6.11
PERCENT MARKER ................................... 4.122, 6.44
PH NOISE ON/OFF...............................4.85, 6.12, 6.13
PHASE LINE 1/2 .................................................. 4.144
PHASE NOISE .............................................. 4.84, 6.13
PHASE OFFSET .................................................... 4.43
PHASE RAD DEG .................................................. 4.43
PHASE SETTINGS ................................................ 4.43
PHASEWRAP SETTINGS...................................... 4.43
POLARITY POS NEG ................................. 4.52, 6.163
POWER ABS/REL......................................... 4.99, 6.61
POWER MODE ........................................... 4.111, 6.52
POWER ON/OFF4.98, 6.58, 6.60, 6.63, 6.65, 6.66, 6.67
PREDEFINED COLORS ..........4.148, 4.189, 6.86, 6.93
PRINT SCREEN................................4.183, 6.95, 6.106
PRINT TABLE ..........................4.183, 6.95, 6.96, 6.106
PRINT TRACE..........................4.183, 6.95, 6.96, 6.106
PROBE CAL COMP .................................... 4.73, 6.128
PROBE CAL DC.......................................... 4.73, 6.128
PROBE CAL PULSE ................................... 4.73, 6.129
PROBE CAL RESULTS............................... 4.65, 6.130
PROBE CAL START .............................4.69, 6.80, 6.97
PROBE CAL........................................................... 4.65
PROBE COMP ON/OFF................................ 4.69, 6.79
PROBE DATA DELETE ALL ....................... 4.73, 6.129
PROBE DATA SELECT.....................4.68, 6.129, 6.130
Q LEVEL ..................................................... 4.52, 6.163
Q ONLY......................................................... 4.32, 4.71
RANGE LINEAR............................................ 4.41, 6.90
RANGE LINEAR %........................................ 4.41, 6.90
RANGE LINEAR dB ...................................... 4.41, 6.90
RANGE LOG 100 DB .................................... 4.40, 6.90
RANGE LOG MANUAL ................................. 4.41, 6.90
RE BW 1-2-3-5 ....................................................... 4.47
REAL IMAG............................................................ 4.28
RECALC...................................................... 4.50, 6.117
RECAL AUTO OFF ................................................ 4.50
RECALL .................................................... 4.173, 6.105
1303.3545.12
10.5
E-1
Index
RECT ......................................................................4.29
REF FXD ON/OFF ......................................... 4.78, 6.12
REF LEVEL ................................................... 4.40, 6.90
REF LEVEL = MKR LVL .........................................4.91
REF LEVEL OFFSET .................................... 4.42, 6.90
REF LEVEL POSITION...........................................4.42
REF POINT FREQUENCY.................... 4.78, 4.86, 6.11
REF POINT LEVEL............................... 4.78, 4.85, 6.11
REF POINT LVL OFFSET .................... 4.78, 4.85, 6.11
REF POINT TIME .......................................... 4.78, 6.11
REFERENCE FIXED ..................................... 4.77, 6.12
REFERENCE INT/EXT .............................. 4.150, 6.131
REMOVE OPTION................................................4.157
RENAME ................................................... 4.179, 6.106
RES BW .................................................... 4.123, 6.113
RES BW AUTO............................................ 4.46, 6.113
RES BW MANUAL....................................... 4.45, 6.113
RESTORE FIRMWARE ........................................4.166
RIGHT LIMIT ................................ 4.89 4.93, 6.43, 6.44
RMS............................................................... 4.97, 6.65
SATURATION.......................... 4.148, 4.189, 6.85, 6.93
SAVE ......................................................... 4.172, 6.109
SAVE LIMIT LINE .................................................4.140
SCALING ..................................................... 4.123, 6.73
SCREEN COLORS ...................................... 4.188, 6.92
SCREEN TITLE ........................................... 4.146, 6.87
SEARCH LIMIT OFF...................................... 4.93, 6.43
SEARCH LIMITS ........................................... 4.93, 6.43
SELECT ITEMS ......................................... 4.174, 6.107
SELECT LIMIT LINE.................. 4.134, 6.20, 6.21, 6.35
SELECT MARKER..................... 4.82, 4.91, 4.131, 6.42
SELECT OBJECT...................................... 4.147, 4.188
SELECT TRACE............................... 4.54, 4.113, 6.127
SELFTEST..................................................... 4.165, 6.7
SELFTEST RESULTS ................................. 4.165, 6.83
SERVICE ..............................................................4.163
SET CP REFERENCE..................................4.105, 6.125
SET REFERENCE......................................... 4.99, 6.63
SET TO DEFAULT................................................4.189
SGL SWEEP DISP OFF ................................ 4.50, 6.98
SHIFT X LIMIT LINE .................................... 4.141, 6.32
SHIFT Y LIMIT LINE .................................... 4.141, 6.37
SIGNAL SOURCE ..................................................4.27
SIGNAL STATISTIC .............................................4.121
SINGLE MEAS ............................................ 4.125, 6.97
SINGLE SWEEP............................................ 4.48, 6.97
SOFT FRONTPANEL ................................ 4.159, 6.148
SORT BY NAME/DATE ..........................................4.68
SORT MODE ........................................................4.180
SORT MODE FREQ/LEVEL .......................... 4.89, 6.46
SPAN /RBW AUTO.................................................4.47
SPAN /RBW MANUAL ............................................4.47
SPAN MANUAL ........................................... 4.38, 6.120
STANDARD DEVIATION ............................... 4.99, 6.66
START ......................................................... 4.35, 6.121
START LIMIT........................................ 4.99, 6.43, 6.44
STARTUP RECALL ................................... 4.176, 6.105
STATISTICS .................................................. 4.162, 6.5
MANUAL.................................................................4.37
STOP........................................................... 4.35, 6.121
SWEEP COUNT ................................. 4.49, 4.56, 6.132
SWEEP POINTS ......................................... 4.49, 6.132
SWEEP TIME MANUAL ................................ 4.38, 4.45
SWEEPTIME AUTO ...................................... 4.46, 4.49
SWEEPTIME MANUAL ............................... 4.49, 6.133
SYSTEM INFO .....................................................4.160
SYSTEM MESSAGES .................... 4.163, 6.148, 6.149
T1-T2 ............................................................. 4.63, 6.68
T1-T3 ............................................................. 4.63, 6.68
THRESHOLD........................................ 4.89, 4.93, 6.76
TIME DOM POWER ...4.97, 6.60, 6.63, 6.65, 6.66, 6.67
TIME DOMAIN........................................................4.26
1303.3545.12
R&S FMU
TIME LINE 1/2...................................................... 4.142
TIME+DATE ....................................4.156, 6.148, 6.150
TIME+DATE ON/OFF.................................. 4.146, 6.88
TOI .............................................................. 4.130, 6.51
TRACE MATH ............................................... 4.63, 6.68
TRACE MATH OFF ....................................... 4.63, 6.69
TRACE POSITION ........................................ 4.63, 6.68
TRIGGER OFFSET ..................................... 4.52, 6.162
UNIT............................................................ 4.42, 6.164
USER DEFINED................................................... 4.188
VALUES .....................................4.141, 6.31, 6.33, 6.36
VIEW ............................................................. 4.55, 6.88
VOLT........................................................... 4.42, 6.164
VOLTAGE .............................................................. 4.31
WATT .......................................................... 4.42, 6.164
WINDOWFCT (FLATOP)........................................ 4.28
X * RBW ............................................4.37, 6.119, 6.120
X * SPAN...........................................4.36, 6.119, 6.120
X OFFSET................................................... 4.136, 6.32
X-AXIS RANGE ........................................... 4.124, 6.74
X-AXIS REF LEVEL .................................... 4.124, 6.73
............................................................................. 4.108
Y OFFSET...........................................4.136, 6.34, 6.37
Y-AXIS MAX VALUE ................................... 4.124, 6.74
Y-AXIS MIN VALUE .................................... 4.124, 6.74
............................................................................... 6.90
Y-AXIS REF-POS..................................4.42, 4.43, 6.90
Y-AXIS REF-VALUE..............................4.41, 4.43, 6.90
Y-AXIS/DIV.................................................... 4.41, 4.43
ZERO SPAN................................................ 4.39, 6.120
Special characters .......................................................... 6.2
SRE (service request enable register) .......................... 5.21
SRQ (service request) ......................................... 5.21, 5.31
Standard deviation ........................................................ 4.99
Standard, mobile radio ................................................ 4.104
Statistics ..................................................................... 4.120
Status byte (STB) ......................................................... 5.21
STATus OPERation register ......................................... 5.23
STATus QUEStionable register .................................... 5.24
ACPLimit register.................................................... 5.25
FREQuency register ............................................... 5.26
LIMit register........................................................... 5.27
LMARgin register.................................................... 5.28
POWer register....................................................... 5.29
SYNC ..................................................................... 5.30
Status register
CONDition part ....................................................... 5.19
ENABle part............................................................ 5.19
ESE ........................................................................ 5.22
ESR........................................................................ 5.22
EVENt part ............................................................. 5.19
NTRansition part..................................................... 5.19
overview ................................................................. 5.20
PPE ........................................................................ 5.22
PTRansition part..................................................... 5.19
SRE........................................................................ 5.21
STATus OPERation................................................ 5.23
STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit ........................... 5.25
STATus QUEStionable FREQuency....................... 5.26
STATus QUEStionable LIMit .................................. 5.27
STATus QUEStionable LMARgin ........................... 5.28
STATus QUEStionable POWer .............................. 5.29
STATus QUEStionable SYNC ................................ 5.30
STB ........................................................................ 5.21
structure ................................................................. 5.18
sum bit.................................................................... 5.19
Status reporting system ................................................ 5.18
resetting values ...................................................... 5.33
STB (status byte).......................................................... 5.21
Stepsize........................................................................ 4.37
center frequency..................................................... 4.36
10.6
E-1
R&S FMU
Store
trace......................................................................4.181
Storing.............................................................................8.1
String ............................................................................5.14
Suffix.............................................................................5.11
Sum bit..........................................................................5.19
Sweep
continue single sweep.............................................4.49
continuous ..............................................................4.48
count.......................................................................4.49
single ......................................................................4.48
time.........................................................................4.49
Switching cycles..........................................................4.162
Syntax elements of commands .....................................5.14
System messages.......................................................4.163
Index
U
Unit
limit line ..................................................................4.139
Universal command ........................................................ 8.5
Upper case ..................................................................... 6.2
USB connection ............................................................ 8.11
User Interface ............................................................... 8.10
V
View trace..................................................................... 4.55
W
T
Test
selftest ..................................................................4.165
Text parameter..............................................................5.14
Third Order Intercept ...................................................4.129
Threshold
line ..........................................................................4.92
Time............................................................................4.146
Line.......................................................................4.143
....................................................................................4.148
Title for the active diagram ..........................................4.146
TOI..............................................................................4.129
Trace.................................................................... 4.53, 4.54
average...................................................................4.54
averaging ................................................................4.57
blank .......................................................................4.56
Clear/Write..............................................................4.54
copy ........................................................................4.59
freeze......................................................................4.55
math........................................................................4.63
max hold .................................................................4.54
min hold ..................................................................4.56
position for 0 difference...........................................4.63
power measurement .............................................4.113
select ......................................................................4.53
Transmission parameters RS-232-C/COM ......................8.8
White space.................................................................. 5.14
Z
Zoom
amplitude................................................................ 4.55
1303.3545.12
10.7
E-1
Download PDF

advertising